Bid Document

BIDDING DOCUMENT
for
THE PROCUREMENT OF
Construction of Gautam Buddha International Cricket Stadium at Bharatpur, Chitwan
(Phase I)
National Competitive Bidding (NCB)

Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure
IFB No.: 54-BMC/2080/081/W/NCB/87

Contract Identification No.: 54-BMC/2080/081/W/NCB/87
Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office

Issued on: 29-02-2024 00:00
Abbreviations
BD .......................................................... Bidding Document
BDF ....................................................... Bidding Forms
BDS ....................................................... Bid Data Sheet
BOQ ..................................................... Bill of Quantities
COF ...................................................... Contract Forms
DP .........................................................Development Partners
ELI ....................................................... Eligibility
EQC....................................................... Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
EXP ...................................................... Experience
FIN ....................................................... Financial
GCC ...................................................... General Conditions of Contract
GoN ........................................................ Government of Nepal
ICC ........................................................ International Chamber of Commerce
IFB ................................... ……………..Invitation for Bids
ITB ........................................................ Instructions to Bidders
JV ......................................................... Joint Venture
LIT .......................................................Litigation
BMC ................................... …………..Bharatpur Metropolitan City
NCB ..................................................... National Competitive Bidding
PAN ...................................................... Permanent Account Number
PPA ...................................................... Public Procurement Act
PPMO................................................... Public Procurement Monitoring Office
PPR ...................................................... Public Procurement Regulations
PL ............................................................Profit & Loss
SBD ....................................................... Standard Bidding Document
SCC ...................................................... Special Conditions of Contract
TS ............................................................ Technical Specifications
VAT .....................................................Value Added Tax
Table of Contents
Invitation for Bids .........................................................................................................................
Part I: BIDDING PROCEDURES ...............................................................................................
Section I: Instructions to Bidders ..............................................................................................

Section II : Bid Data Sheet .......................................................................................................
Section III: Evaluation and Qualification Criteria .......................................................................
Section IV: Bidding Forms ........................................................................................................
Section V - Eligible Countries ...................................................................................................
Part II : EMPLOYER'S REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................
Section VI: Works Requirements .............................................................................................

Section VII: Bill of Quantities ....................................................................................................
Part III: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS ........................................
Section VIII: General Conditions of Contract ...........................................................................

Section IX: Special Conditions of Contract ................................................................................
Section X: Contract Forms ........................................................................................................
Invitation for Bids
null
Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office
Date of publication: 29-02-2024 00:00

1.
2. Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office invites electronic bids from eligible bidders for the construction of
Construction of Gautam Buddha International Cricket Stadium at Bharatpur, Chitwan (Continue from existing
structure Phase I) under National Competitive Bidding – Single Stage Two Envelope Bidding procedures.
Only eligible bidders with the following key qualifications should participate in this bidding:
Minimum Average Annual Construction Turnover of the best 3 years within the last 10 years: NRS. 588 Million
(Excluding VAT)
Minimum Work experience of similar size and nature: at least One contract within the last Ten (10) Years with a
value of NRs 588 million (Excluding VAT) that have been successfully or are substantially completed that are
similar to the proposed works .The similarity shall be: "Construction of RCC Frame Structure Stadium with
minimum viewer capacity of 6000.
3. Under the Single Stage, Two Envelope Procedure, Bidders are required to submit simultaneously two separate
sealed envelopes, one containing (i) the Technical Bid and the other (ii) the Price Bid, both in turn enclosed in one
sealed envelope as per the provision of ITB 21 of the Bidding Document.
4. Eligible Bidders may obtain further information and inspect the Bidding Documents at the office of
Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office, Bharatpur, Bharatpur-10, Bharatpur, Chitwan, Bagmati Province, Nepal or
may visit PPMO e-GP system www.bolpatra.gov.np/egp.
5. If hard-copy is allowed then a complete set of Bidding Documents may be purchased from the office Bharatpur
Metropolitian City Office, Bharatpur, Bharatpur-10, Bharatpur, Chitwan, Bagmati Province, Nepal by eligible
Bidders on the submission of a written application, along with the copy of company/firm registration certificate,
and upon payment of a non-refundable fee of 20000.0 NRs. till 31-03-2024 12:00 during office hours.
Or
Bidder who chooses to submit their bid electronically may purchase the hard copy of the bidding documents as
mentioned above or may download the bidding documents for e-submission from PPMO’s e-GP system www.
bolpatra.gov.np/egp. Bidders, submitting their bid electronically, should deposit the cost of bidding document in
the Project’s Rajaswa (revenue) account as specified below
Information to deposit the cost of bidding document in Bank:

Name of the Bank: Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd.
Name of the Office: Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office
Office Code no: 31304
Office Account no: 1310100301010002
Rajaswa (revenue) Shirshak no: GA-1-1
6. Pre-bid meeting shall be held at Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office
Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Nepal at 20-03-2024 13:00 hours.
7. Sealed or electronic bids must be submitted to the office Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office, Bharatpur, Bharatpur-
10, Bharatpur, Chitwan, Bagmati Province, Nepal by hand/courier or through PPMO’s e-GP system www.bolpatra.
gov.np/egp on or before 31-03-2024 12:00. Bids received after this deadline will be rejected.
8. The bids will be opened in the presence of Bidders' representatives who choose to attend at 31-03-2024 13:00 hours
at the office of Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office
Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Nepal. Bids must be valid for a period of 120 days after bid opening and must be accompanied by a bid security or
scanned copy of the bid security in pdf format in case of e-bid, amounting to a minimum of NRs. 30000000 which
shall be valid for 30 days beyond the validity period of the bid.
9. If the last date of purchasing and /or submission falls on a government holiday, then the next working day shall be
considered as the last date. In such case the validity period of the bid and bid security shall remain the same as
specified for the original last date of bid submission.
10. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria:
Nationality:
Nationality in accordance with ITB Subclause 4.2.
Single entity : must meet requirements.
In case of joint ventures,
each partner: must meet requirement.

all partners: must meet requirement.
One partner: Not Applicable.
Document required: Letter of Technical Bid Forms ELI –1; ELI –2 with attachments.
Conflict of Interest:
No conflicts of interest in accordance with ITB Sub- Clause 4.3.
For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

For joint Venture,
All partners combined : existing or intended JV must meet requirement.
Each partner : Must meet requirement.
One partner : Not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Letter of Technical Bid.
Government/DP Eligibility:
Requirement : Not having been declared ineligible by government/DP, as described in ITB Sub-Clause 4.4.

each partner : must meet requirement.
All partners : must meet requirement.
Documents Required : Letter of Technical Bid.

Government-Owned Enterprise:
Bidder required to meet conditions of ITB Sub-Clause 4.5.

For joint Venture ,
Each partner: Must meet requirement.
All combined partner: existing or intended JV must meet requirement.
One partner-> Not Applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Forms ELI - 1, ELI - 2, with attachments

United Nations Eligibility:
Not having been declared ineligible based on a United Nations resolution or Employer's country law, as described in
ITB Sub-Clause 4.8.
For joint Venture,
All combined partner : existing or intended JV must meet requirement.
Each partner : must meet requirement.
One partner -> not applicable.
Bidder’s Running Contracts:

Bidder's Running Contracts not more than five (5) as described in ITB Sub-Clause 4.9.

For joint Venture,
Each partner: Must meet requirement
For all partner combined: Existing or intended JV must meet requirement
For One Partner: Not Applicable
Documents Submission Requirements : ELI-3
Other Eligibility : Firm Registration Certificate:
Firm Registration Certificate

For joint Venture,
For all partner combined and one partner : not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Document attachment.
Other Eligibility : Business Registration Certificate:

Business Registration Certificate(License)

For joint Venture,

Other Eligibility : VAT and PAN Registration:
VAT and PAN Registration(only for domestic bidders)

For joint Venture,

Other Eligibility : Tax Clearance Certificate for the F/Y 2079/080 (Only for domestic bidders)
:
Tax Clearance Certificate for the F/Y 2079/080(Only for domestic bidders)

For joint Venture,
Each partner: must meet requirement.
Adequacy of Technical Proposal:
Evaluation of the Bidder's Technical Proposal will include an assessment of the Bidder's technical capacity, to
mobilize key equipment and personnel for the contract consistent with its proposal regarding work methods,
scheduling, and material sourcing in sufficient detail and fully in accordance with the requirements stipulated in
Section VI (Works Requirements).
Non-compliance with equipment and personnel requirements described in Section VI (Works Requirements) shall
not be grounds for bid rejection and such non-compliance will be subject to clarification and rectification prior to
contract award.
Pending Litigation and Arbitration:
All pending litigation shall be treated as resolved against the Bidder and so shall in total not represent more than 75
percent of the Bidder's net worth.
For Single Entity : must meet requirement by itself or as partner to past or existing JV
For joint Venture :Each partner must meet requirement by itself or as partner to past or existing JV. All partner
combined and one partner -> not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Form LIT - 1
General Construction Experience:

Experience under construction contracts in the role of contractor, subcontractor, or management contractor for at
least the last Five(5) years prior to the applications submission deadline.
Contracts of Similar Size and Nature

(iv) For works with value above NRs. 50 million:
Participation as Prime contractor, management contractor, or subcontractor, in at least One contract within the last
Ten (10) Years with a value of NRs 588 Million (Excluding VAT) that have been successfully or are substantially
completed and that are similar to the proposed works. The similarity shall be: "Construction of RCC Frame
Structure Stadium with minimum viewer capacity of 6000.
The similarity shall be based on the physical size, complexity, methods, technology or other characteristics as
described in Section VI, Works Requirements.

For joint Venture,
For all partner combined: Not applicable
Each partner: Not applicable
For One Partner: Must meet requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(a)

Construction Experience in Key Activities:
For the above or other contracts executed during the period stipulated in 2.4.2(a) above, a minimum construction
experience in the following key activities :
PCC for RCC Works (M25 or Richer Mix): 3200 Cum/year
-Reinforcement Works:-655 Metric Ton/year
For Single Entity : Must meet all requirements
For joint Venture,
For all partner combined: Must meet all requirements
For One Partner: Not applicable
Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(b)

Historical Financial Performance:
Submission of audited balance sheets and income statements, for the last 5 (Five) years to demonstrate the current
soundness of the Bidder's financial position. As a minimum, a Bidder's net worth for the last year calculated as the
difference between total assets and total liabilities should be positive.
For joint Venture : Each partner Must meet requirement. All partner combined and one partner -> not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 1 with attachments
Average Annual Construction Turnover:

NRS. 588 Million(Excluding VAT)
Financial Resources:
Using Forms FIN - 3 and FIN - 4 in Section IV (Bidding Forms) the Bidder must demonstrate access to, or
availability of, financial resources such as liquid assets[ Liquid Assets mean cash and cash equivalents, short-
term financial instruments, short term available-for-sale-securities, marketable securities, trade receivables, short-
term financing receivables and other assets that can be converted into cash within ONE YEAR.], unencumbered real
assets, and other financial resources, (other than any contractual advance payments) to meet the cash-flow
requirement of NRs.160 Millions
Note:
For joint Venture : Each partner Must meet 25% of the requirement
All partner combined: Must meet requirement
One partner -> must meet 40% of the requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 3

Required Bid Capacity:
The bidding capacity of the bidder should be equal to or more than the NRs. 900 Millions
For joint Venture :
All combined partner: Must meet requirements,
Each partner Must meet 25% of the requirement,
One partner: Must meet 40% of the requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 4 and Form FIN - 5
Note:
(9) Usually not less than 25 %

Part I: Bidding Procedures
Section I: Instructions to Bidders
This section specifies the procedures to be followed by Bidders in the preparation and
submission of their Bids. Information is also provided on the submission, opening, and
evaluation of bids and on the award of contract.
Table of Clauses
A. General ..............................................................................................................................
1. Scope of Bid ....................................................................................................................................
2. Source of Funds ..............................................................................................................................
3. Fraud and Corruption .....................................................................................................................
4.Eligible Bidders ................................................................................................................................
5. Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services ....................................................................................
B. Contents of Bidding Documents ..........................................................................................
6. Sections of Bidding Document ........................................................................................................
7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting .....................................................
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ...............................................................................................
9. Cost of Bidding ................................................................................................................................
10. Language of Bid ............................................................................................................................
11. Documents Comprising the Bid ....................................................................................................
12. Letter of Bid and Schedules ..........................................................................................................
13. Alternative Bids ...........................................................................................................................
14. Bid Prices and Discounts .............................................................................................................
15. Currency of Bid and Payment .....................................................................................................
16. Documents Comprising the Technical Proposal ...........................................................................
17. Documents Establishing theQualifications ofthe Bidder ............................................................
18. Period of Validity of Bids..............................................................................................................
19. Bid Security ..................................................................................................................................
20. Format and Signing of Bid ............................................................................................................
D. Submission and Opening of Bids .........................................................................................
21. Sealing and Marking of Bids..........................................................................................................
22. Deadline for Submission of Bids ...................................................................................................
23. Late Bids .......................................................................................................................................
24. Withdrawal, andModification ofBids............................................................................................
25. Bid Opening ..................................................................................................................................
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids .....................................................................................
26. Confidentiality ..............................................................................................................................
27. Clarification of Bids ......................................................................................................................
28. Deviations, Reservations, and Omissions ...................................................................................
29. Examination of Technical Bid .......................................................................................................
30. Determination of Responsiveness of Technical Bid ....................................................................
31.NonconformitiesErrors, andOmissions...........................................................................................
32 Qualification of the Bidder ............................................................................................................
33. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ..............................................................................................
34 Subcontractors ...............................................................................................................................
35. Evaluation of Price Bids ................................................................................................................
36. Comparison of Bids .......................................................................................................................
37. Employer’s Right to Accept Any Bid, and to Reject Any or All Bids ...............................................
38. Award Criteria ...............................................................................................................................
39. Letter of Intent to Award the Contract/Notification of Award....................................................
40. Performance Security and Line of Credit ......................................................................................
41 Signing of Contract ........................................................................................................................
42. Complaint and Review .................................................................................................................
Section I: Instructions to Bidders
A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 In connection with the Invitation for Bids indicated in the Bid Data Sheet (BDS),
the Employer, as indicated in the BDS, issues this Bidding Document for the
procurement of Works as specified in Section VI (Works Requirements). The
name, identification, and number of lots (contracts) of the National
Competitive Bidding (NCB) are provided in the BDS.
1.2 Throughout this Bidding Document:
(a)the term “in writing” means communicated in written form and delivered
against receipt;
(b) except where the context requires otherwise, words indicating the
singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include
the singular; and
(c) “day” means calendar day.
2. Source of Funds 2.1 GoN Funded: In accordance with its annual program and budget, approved by the
GoN, the implementing agency indicated in the BDS plans to apply a portion of
the allocated budget to eligible payments under the contract(s) for which this
Bidding Document is issued.
Or
Public Entities' own Resource Funded: In accordance with its annual program
and budget, approved by the public entity, the implementing agency indicated
in the BDS plans to apply a portion of the allocated budget to eligible payments
under the contract(s) for which this Bidding Document is issued.
Or
DP Funded: The GoN has applied for or received financing (hereinafter
called “funds”) from the Development Partner (hereinafter called “the DP”)
indicated in the BDS toward the cost of the project named in the BDS. The
GoN intends to apply a portion of the funds to eligible payments under the
contract(s) for which this Bidding Document is issued.
2.2 DP Funded: Payment by the DP will be made only at the request of the GoN and
upon approval by the DP in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
financing agreement between the GoN and the DP (hereinafter called the
“Loan/Grant Agreement”), and will be subject in all respects to the terms and
conditions of that Loan/Grant Agreement. No party other than the GoN shall
derive any rights from the Loan Agreement or have any claim to the funds.
3. Fraud and Corruption 3.1 Procuring Entities as well as Bidders, suppliers and contractors and their sub-
contractors shall adhere to the highest standard of ethics during the
procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance of this:;
(a) the Employer adopts, for the purposes of this provision, the terms as
defined below:
(i) “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, anything of value to influence improperly
the actions of another party;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” means any act or omission, including a

misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts
to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid
an obligation;
(iii) “coercive practice” means impairing or harming, or threatening to

impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the
party to influence improperly the actions of a party;
(iv) “collusive practice” means an arrangement between two or more

parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including influencing
improperly the actions of another party.
v) “obstructive practice” means (a) deliberately destroying, falsifying,

altering, or concealing of evidence material to an investigation; (b)
making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede an
investigation; (c) failing to comply with requests to provide information,
documents, or records in connection with an investigation; (d)
threatening, harassing, or intimidating any party to prevent it from
disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from
pursuing the investigation; or (e) materially impeding GoN/DP’s
contractual rights of audit or access to information; and
vi) “integrity violation” is any act which violates Anticorruption Policy,

including (i) to (v) above and the following: abuse, conflict of interest,
violations of GoN/DP sanctions, retaliation against whistleblowers or
witnesses, and other violations of Anticorruption Policy, including failure
to adhere to the highest ethical standard.
(b) the Employer will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the
Bidder recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in
corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices or other
integrity violations in competing for the contract;
(c) DP will cancel the portion of the financing allocated to a contract if it
determines at any time that representative(s) of the GoN/or of a beneficiary
of DP-financing engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices or other integrity violations during the procurement or the execution
of that contract, without the GoN having taken timely and appropriate
action satisfactory to DP to remedy the situation.
(d) DP will impose remedial actions on a firm or an individual, at any time, in

accordance with DP's Anticorruption Policy and related Guidelines (as
amended from time to time), including declaring ineligible, either indefinitely
or for a stated period of time, to participate in DP-financed, -administered, or
-supported activities or to benefit from an DP-financed, -administered, or -
supported contract, financially or otherwise, if it at any time determines that
the firm or individual has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices or other integrity
violations; and
(e) The Contractor shall permit the GoN/DP to inspect the Contractor’s
accounts and records relating to the performance of the Contractor and to have
them audited by auditors appointed by the GoN /DP, if so required by the
GoN/DP.
3.2 The Bidder shall not carry out or cause to carry out the following acts
with an intention to influence the implementation
of the procurement process or the procurement agreement :
(a) give or propose improper inducement directly or indirectly,

(b) distortion or misrepresentation of facts,
(c) engaging in corrupt or fraudulent practice or involving in such act,
(d) interference in participation of other competing bidders,
(e) coercion or threatening directly or indirectly to cause harm to the
person or the property of any person to be involved in the procurement
proceedings,
(f) collusive practice among bidders before or after submission of bids for
distribution of works among bidders or fixing artificial/uncompetitive bid
price with an intention to deprive the Employer the benefit of open
competitive bid price,
(g) Contacting the Employer with an intention to influence the Employer
with regards to the bids or interference of any kind in examination and
evaluation of the bids during the period from the time of opening of the
bids until the notification of award of contract.
3.3 PPMO, on the recommendation of the Procuring Entity may blacklist a Bidder
for a period of one (1) to three (3) years for its conduct including on the following
grounds and seriousness of the act committed by the bidder:
(a) if convicted by a court of law in a criminal offence which disqualifies the

Bidder from participating in the contract,
(b) if it is established that the contract agreement signed by the Bidder was based
on false or misrepresentation of Bidder’s qualification information,
(c)if it at any time determines that the firm has, directly or through an agent,
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices in
competing for, or in executing, a GoN/DP-financed contract.
(d) if the Successful Bidder fails to sign the Contract.
(e) if the bidder fails to inform about the saturation of maximum number of
contracts as per ITB 4.10.
3.4 A bidder declared blacklisted and ineligible by the GoN, Public Procurement
Monitoring Office (PPMO) and/or the DP in case of DP funded project, may be
ineligible to bid for a contract during the period of time determined by the GoN,
PPMO and/or the DP.
3.5 In case of a natural person or firm/institution/company which is already declared
blacklisted and ineligible by the GoN, any other new or existing
firm/institution/company owned partially or fully by such Natural person or
Owner or Board of director of blacklisted firm/institution/company; shall not be
eligible bidder.
3.6 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provisions of GCC (GCC 28.3 and
72.3(j).
4. Eligible Bidders 4.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or government owned entity
subject to ITB 4.5 or any combination of them in the form of a Joint Venture (JV)
under an existing agreement, or with the intent to constitute a legally-enforceable
joint venture. In the case of a JV:
(a) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract terms. Maximum number of JV
shall be as specified in the BDS and
(b) the JV shall nominate a Representative who shall have the authority to
conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the parties of the JV
during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the
Contract, during Contract execution.
4.2 A Bidder, and all parties constituting the Bidder, shall have the nationality of an
eligible country, in accordance with Section V (Eligible Countries). A Bidder
shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder is a citizen or is
constituted, or incorporated, and operates in conformity with the provisions of
the laws of that country. This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the
nationality of proposed sub-contractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract
including related services.
4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. A Bidder found to have a conflict of
interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may be considered to be in a conflict of
interest with one or more parties in this bidding process, if any of, including but not
limited to, the following apply:
(a) they have controlling shareholders in common; or
(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any of them;
or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or through common third
parties, that puts them in a position to have access to material information
about or improperly influence the Bid of another Bidder, or influence the
decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding process; or
(e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this bidding process either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture. This will result in the
disqualification of all Bids in which it is involved. However, subject to any
finding of a conflict of interest in terms of ITB 4.3 (a)-(d) above, this does not
limit the participation of the same subcontractor in more than one bid; or
(f) a Bidder or any of its affiliated entity, participated as a consultant in the
preparation of the design or technical specifications of the works that are the
subject of the Bid; or
(g) a Bidder was affiliated with a firm or entity that has been hired (or is proposed to
be hired) by the Employer as Engineer for the Contract.
(h) a Bidder that has a close business or family relationship with a professional
staff of the Procuring Entity.
4.4 A firm that is under a declaration of ineligibility by the GoN in accordance

with ITB 3, at the date of the deadline for bid submission or thereafter, shall be
disqualified. A firm shall not be eligible to participate in any procurement
activities under an DP-financed, -administered, or -supported project while
under temporary suspension or debarment by DP pursuant to the DP's
Anticorruption Policy (see ITB 3), whether such debarment was directly
imposed by the DP, or enforced by other DPs pursuant to the Agreement for
Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions. A bid from a temporary
suspended or debarred firm will be rejected.
4.5 Enterprises owned by Government shall be eligible only if they can establish that
they are legally and financially autonomous and operate under commercial
law, and that they are not a dependent agency of the GoN.
4.6 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued eligibility satisfactory to the
Employer, as the Employer shall reasonably request.
4.7 Firms shall be excluded in any of the cases, if

(a) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security
Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations,
Nepal prohibits any import of goods or Contracting of works or services
from that country or any payments to persons or entities in that country.
Where Nepal prohibits payments to a particular firm or for particular
goods by such an act of compliance, that firm may be excluded;
(b) DP Funded: as a matter of law or official regulation, Nepal prohibits
commercial relations with that country, provided that the DP is satisfied
that such exclusion does not preclude effective competition for the supply of
goods or related services required;
(c) DP Funded: a firm sanctioned or temporarily suspended by the DP in
relation to their guidelines or appropriate provisions on preventing and
combating fraud and corruption in projects financed by them.
4.8 In case a prequalification process has been conducted prior to the bidding
process, this bidding is open only to prequalified Bidders.
4.9 Maximum number of running contracts that a Bidder, and all parties constituting
the Bidder can have shall be as specified in BDS. The bidders shall be considered
ineligible if number of running contracts exceeds the number as specified.
4.10 For the purpose of ITB 4.9 above, the bidder shall declare that the bidder, and all
parties constituting the Bidder have not running contracts more than the number
as specified in BDS. If the bidder, and all parties constituting the Bidder has
participated in bidding processes of many public entities and during that period
the maximum number of contracts as specified saturates due to issuance of letters
of acceptance by a particular public entity, the bidder shall inform in written to all
other concerned public entities, where the bidder have participated in bidding
process, within three days of issuance of last letter of acceptance that saturates the
maximum number of contracts as specified.
5. Eligible Materials, 5.1 The materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract shall
Equipment and have their origin in any source countries as defined in accordance with Section
Services V (Eligible Countries) and all expenditures under the Contract will be limited to
such materials, equipment, and services. At the Employer’s request, Bidders
may be required to provide evidence of the origin of materials, equipment and
services.
5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place where the materials and
equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from which the
services are provided. Materials and equipment are produced when,
through manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major assembling of
components, a commercially recognized product results that differs substantially
in its basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its components.
B. Contents of Bidding Documents

6. Sections of Bidding 6.1 The Bidding Document consist of Parts I, II, and III, which include all the
Document Sections indicated below, and should be read in conjunction with any Addenda
issued in accordance with ITB 8.
PART I Bidding Procedures
Section I Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section II Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC)
Section IV Bidding Forms (BDF)
Section V Eligible Countries
PART II Requirements
Section VI Works Requirements (WRQ)
Section VII Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
PART III Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
Section VIII General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Section IX Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
Section X Contract Forms (COF)
6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not part of the Bidding
Document.
6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of the Bidding
Document and their Addenda, if they were not obtained directly from the source
stated by the Employer in the Invitation for Bids.
6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms, and
specifications in the Bidding Document and to furnish with its bid all
information and documentation as is required by the Bidding Documents.
Failure to furnish all information or documentation required by the Bidding
Document may result in the rejection of the bid.
7. Clarification of 7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Document shall
Bidding Document, contact the Employer in writing at the Employer’s address indicated in BDS or
Site Visit, Pre-Bid raise any question or curiosity during the pre-bid meeting if provided for in
Meeting
accordance with ITB 7.4.The Employer will respond in writing to any request
for clarification, provided that such request is received within the period as
mentioned in ITB 7.5. The Employer shall forward copies of its response to all
Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3,
including a description of the inquiry but without identifying its source. Should
the Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding Document as a result of a
request for clarification, it shall do so following the procedure under ITB 8 and
ITB 22.2.
7.2 The Bidder is advised to visit and examine the Site of Works and its
surroundings and obtain for itself, on its own risk and responsibility, all
information that may be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a
Contract for construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the
Bidder’s own expense.
7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted permission by
the Employer to enter upon its premises and lands for the purpose of such
visit, but only upon the express condition that the Bidder, its personnel, and
agents will release and indemnify the Employer and its personnel and agents from
and against all liability in respect thereof, and will be responsible for death or
personal injury, loss of or damage to property, and any other loss, damage, costs,
and expenses incurred as a result of the inspection.
7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting, if

provided for in the BDS. The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and
to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at that stage.
7.5 The Bidder is requested, to submit any questions in writing, to reach the
Employer as mentioned in BDS.
7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the questions raised,
without identifying the source, and the responses given, together with any
responses prepared after the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to all Bidders
who have acquired the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 6.3. Any
modification to the Bidding Document that may become necessary as a result of
the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the Employer exclusively through the
issue of an addendum pursuant to ITB 8 and not through the minutes of the pre-
bid meeting.
7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of
a Bidder.
8. Amendment of 8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids, the Employer may
Bidding Document amend the Bidding Document by issuing agenda.
8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding Document and shall be
communicated in writing to all who have obtained the Bidding Document from
the Employer in accordance with ITB 6.3.
8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into
account in preparing their Bids, the Employer may, at its discretion, extend the
deadline for the submission of Bids, pursuant to ITB 22.2. However, the time
available to submit bids shall not be less than five (5) days since amendment in
bidding document.
C. Preparation of Bids
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of
its Bid, and the Employer shall in no case be responsible or liable for those costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.
10. Language of Bid 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bid
exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be written in the language
specified in the BDS. Supporting documents and printed literature that are part of
the Bid may be in another language provided they are accompanied by an accurate
translation of the relevant passages in the language specified in the BDS, in
which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall
govern.
11. Documents 11.1 The Bid shall comprise two envelopes submitted simultaneously, one called
Comprising the Bid the Technical Bid containing the documents listed in ITB 11.2 and the other the
Price Bid containing the documents listed in ITB 11.3, both envelopes enclosed
together in an outer single envelope.
11.2 The Technical Bid shall comprise the following:
(a) Letter of Technical Bid;

(b) Bid Security in accordance with ITB 19;
(c) alternative Technical Bid, at Bidder’s option and if permissible, in
accordance with ITB 13;
(d) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid to commit the
Bidder, in accordance with ITB 20.2;
(e) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 17, establishing the
Bidder’s qualifications to perform the contract;
(f) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 16;
(g) Bids submitted by a Joint Venture shall include a copy of the Joint
Venture Agreement entered into by all partners. Alternatively, a Letter
of Intent to execute a Joint Venture Agreement in the event of a
successful Bid shall be signed by all partners and submitted with the
Bid, together with a copy of the proposed agreement. The Joint
Venture agreement, or letter of intent to enter into a Joint Venture
including a draft agreement shall indicate at least the parts of the
Works to be executed by the respective partners; and
(h) Any other required documents, which is not against the provision of
Procurement Act/Regulation/Directives and Standard Bidding
Document issued by PPMO as specified in the BDS.
11.3 The Price Bid shall comprise the following:
(a) Letter of Price Bid;
(b) completed Bill of Quantities(BoQ), in accordance with ITB 12 and ITB
14, or as stipulated in the BDS;
(c) alternative price Bids, at Bidder’s option and if permissible, in
accordance with ITB 13;
(d) Any other document required in the BDS.
11.4 The Bidder is solely responsible for the authenticity of the submitted
documents.
11.5 The Technical Bid shall not include any financial information related to the
Price Bid. A Technical Bid containing such material financial information
shall be declared non-responsive.
12. Letter of Bid and 12.1 The Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid, Schedules, and all documents listed
Schedules under ITB 11, shall be prepared using the relevant forms in Section IV (Bidding
Forms) and in Section VII (Bill of Quantities). The forms must be completed
without any alterations to the text, and no substitutes shall be accepted. All blank
spaces shall be filled in with the information requested.
13. Alternative Bids 13.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, alternative bids shall not be considered.
13.2 When alternative times for completion are explicitly invited, a statement to that
effect will be included in the BDS, as will the method of evaluating different
times for completion.
13.3 When specified in the BDS pursuant to ITB 13.1, and subject to ITB 13.4 below,
Bidders wishing to offer technical alternatives to the requirements of the Bidding
Document must first price the Employer’s design as described in the Bidding
Document and shall further provide all information necessary for a complete
evaluation of the alternative by the Employer, including drawings, design
calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, and proposed
construction methodology and other relevant details. Only the technical
alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated Bidder conforming to the basic
technical requirements shall be considered by the Employer.
13.4 When specified in the BDS, Bidders are permitted to submit alternative
technical solutions for specified parts of the Works. Such parts will be identified
in the BDS and described in Section VI (Works Requirements). The method for
their evaluation will be stipulated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria).
14. Bid Prices and 14.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Bidder in the Letter of Price Bid and
Discounts in the Schedules shall conform to the requirements specified below.
14.2 The Bidder shall submit a bid for the whole of the works described in
ITB 1.1 by filling in prices for all items of the Works, as identified in
Section VII (Bill of Quantities). In case of Unit Rate Contracts, the Bidder shall
fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the Bill of
Quantities. Items against which no rate or price is entered by the Bidder will not
be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed covered by the
rates for other items and prices in the Bill of Quantities.
14.3 The price to be quoted in the Letter of Price Bid shall be the total price of the Bid,
excluding any discounts offered. Absence of the total price in the Letter of Price
Bid or the Bid Price in the Bill of Quantities shall result in rejection of the Bid.
14.4 The Bidder shall quote any discounts and the methodology for their application
in the Letter of Price Bid, in accordance with ITB 12.1.
14.5 If so indicated in ITB 1.1 and ITB 35.4, bids are invited for individual Contracts or
for any combination of Contracts (packages). Bidders wishing to offer any price
reduction for the award of more than one Contract shall specify in their bid the
price reductions applicable to each package, or alternatively, to individual
Contracts within the package. Price reductions or discounts shall be submitted in
accordance with ITB 14.4, provided the Bids for all Contracts are submitted
and opened at the same time.
14.6 Unless otherwise provided in the BDS and the Conditions of Contract, the
prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed. If the prices quoted by the Bidder are
subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract in accordance with
the provisions of the Conditions of Contract, the Bidder shall furnish the indices
and weightings for the price adjustment formulae in the Table of Adjustment
Data in Section IV (Bidding Forms) and the Employer may require the Bidder
to justify its proposed indices and weightings.
14.7 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or
for any other cause, as of the date 30 days prior to the deadline for
submission of bids, shall be included in the rates and prices and the total bid
price submitted by the Bidder.
15. Currency of Bid 15.1 The currency of the bid and payment shall be in Nepalese Rupees.
and Payment
16. Documents 16.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including a statement of
Comprising the work methods, equipment, personnel, schedule and any other information as
Technical Proposal stipulated in Section IV (Bidding Forms), in sufficient detail to demonstrate
the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to meet the work requirements and
the completion time.
17. Documents 17.1 To establish its qualifications to perform the Contract in accordance with
Establishing the Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the
Qualifications of the information requested in the corresponding information sheets included in
Bidder
Section IV (Bidding Forms).
18. Period of Validity 18.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the BDS after the bid
of Bids submission deadline date prescribed by the Employer. If the prescribed bid
submission deadline date falls on a government holiday, then the next working
day shall be considered as the bid submission deadline date. In such case the
validity period of the bids shall be considered from the original bid submission
deadline date. A bid valid for a shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer
as nonresponsive.
18.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validity

period, the Employer may request Bidders to extend the period of validity
of their Bids. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. If a bid
security is requested in accordance with ITB 19, it shall also be extended 30
days beyond the deadline of the extended validity period. A Bidder may
refuse the request without forfeiting its bid security. A Bidder granting the
request shall not be required or permitted to modify its Bid and to include any
additional conditions against the provisions specified in Bid Documents.
19. Bid Security 19.1 The Bidder shall furnish as part of its bid, in original form, a bid security as
specified in the BDS. In case of e-submission of bid, the Bidder shall upload scanned
copy of Bid security letter at the time of electronic submission of the bid. The Bidder
accepts that the scanned copy of the Bid security shall, for all purposes, be equal to the
original. The details of original Bid Security and the scanned copy submitted with e-
bid should be the same otherwise the bid shall be non-responsive.
19.2 The bid security shall be, at the Bidder’s option, in any of the following forms:
(a) an unconditional bank guarantee from Commercial Bank or Financial
Institution eligible to issue Bank Guarantee as per prevailing Law or;
(b) a cash deposit voucher in the Employer's Account as specified in BDS.
In the case of a bank guarantee, the bid security shall be submitted
either using the Bid Security Form included in Section IV (Bidding
Forms) or in another Form acceptable to the employer. The form must include the
complete name of the Bidder. The bid security shall be valid for minimum thirty (30)
days beyond the original validity period of the bid, or beyond any period of extension if
requested under ITB 18.2.
19.3 The bid security issued by any foreign Bank outside Nepal must be counter
guaranteed by Commercial Bank or Financial Institution eligible to issue
Bank Guarantee as per prevailing Law in Nepal.
19.4 Any bid not accompanied by an enforceable and substantially compliant bid
security shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive. In case of e-
Submission, if the scanned copy of an acceptable Bid Security letter is not
uploaded with the electronic Bid then Bid shall be rejected.
19.5 The bid security of unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned within three days, once
the successful Bidder’s furnishing of the required performance security and
signing of the Contract Agreement pursuant to ITB 40.1 and 41.1
19.6 The bid security shall be forfeited if:

GoN funded :
(a) a Bidder requests for withdrawal or modification of its bid, except as
provided in ITB 18.2:
(i) during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of
Technical Bid and Price Bid, in case of electronic submission;
(ii) from the period twenty-four hours prior to bid submission deadline up to
the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical Bid
and Price Bid, in case of hard copy submission.
(b)a Bidder changes the prices or substance of the bid while providing information
pursuant to clause 27.1;
(c) a Bidder involves in fraud and corruption pursuant to clause 3.1;
(d) the successful Bidder fails to:
(i) furnish a performance security in accordance with ITB 40.1;
(ii) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 41.1; or
(iii) accept the correction of arithmetical errors pursuant to clause 33.1
DP funded:
The bid security shall be forfeited
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity specified by
the Bidder on the Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid, except as
provided in ITB 18.2; or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to
(i) furnish a performance security in accordance with ITB 40.1; or
(ii) sign the Contract in accordance with ITB 41.1;
(iii) accept arithmetical corrections in accordance with ITB 33.1;
19.7 The Bid Security of a Joint Venture shall be in the name of the Joint Venture
that submits the bid. If the Joint Venture has not been legally constituted at the
time of bidding, the Bid Security shall be in the names of all future partners as
named in the letter of intent mentioned in ITB 4.1.
20. Format and Signing 20.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original set of the Technical Bid and one original
of Bid of the Price Bid comprising the Bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly mark it
“ORIGINAL – TECHNICAL BID” and “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID.”
Alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, shall be clearly marked
“ALTERNATIVE”. In addition, the Bidder shall submit copies of the bid in the
number specified in the BDS, and clearly mark each of them “COPY.” In the
event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original shall
prevail.
In case of e-submission of bid, the Bidder shall submit his bid
electronically in PDF or web forms files as specified in ITB Clause 21.1(b).
20.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and
shall be signed by a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This
authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the BDS and
shall be attached to the bid. The name and position held by each person signing
the authorization must be typed or printed below the signature. All pages of
the bid, except for un amended printed literature, shall be signed or initialed by
the person signing the bid.
20.3 Any amendments such as interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid
only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the bid.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids
21. Sealing and 21.1 Unless otherwise specified in BDS, Bidders shall submit their bids by electronic
Marking of Bids or by mail/by hand/by courier. Procedures for submission, sealing and marking
are as follows:
(a) Bidders submitting bids by mail, by hand or by courier
shall enclose the original of the Technical Bid, and the original of the
Price Bid and each copy of the Technical Bid and Price Bid, including
alternative bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, in separate sealed
envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as “ORIGINAL TECHNICAL
BID”, “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID”, “ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY No.
– TECHNICAL BID” and “COPY NO. PRICE BID” These envelopes
containing the original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one single
envelope.
(b) Bidders submitting Bids electronically shall follow the electronic bid
submission procedure specified in this clause.
i. The bidder is required to register in the e-GP system
https://www.bolpatra.gov.np/egp following the procedure
specified in e-GP guideline.
ii. Interested bidders may either purchase the bidding document
from the Employer's office as specified in the Invitation for Bid
(IFB) or bidders may download the IFB and bidding document
from e-GP system.
iii. The registered bidders need to maintain their profile data
required during preparation of bids.
iv. In order to submit their bids the cost of the bidding document
can be deposited as specified in IFB. In addition, electronic
scanned copy (.pdf format) of the bank deposit voucher/cash
receipt should also be submitted along with the technical bid.
v. The bidder can prepare their technical and price bids using data
and documents maintained in bidder’s profile and forms/format
provided in bidding document by Employer. The bidder may
submit bids as a single entity or as a joint venture. The bidder
submitting bid in joint venture shall have to upload joint
venture agreement along with partner(s) Bolpatra ID provided
during bidder’s registration.
vi. Bidders (all partners in case of JV) should update their profile
data and documents required during preparation and submission
of their technical bids.
vii. In case of bid submission in JV, the consent of the partners shall
be obtained through the confirmation link sent to the registered
email address and the partners shall have to acknowledge their
confirmation.
The required forms and documents shall be part of technical bids.
No. Document Requirement Remarks
1. Letter of Technical Bid Mandatory PDF
2. Bid Security/Bank Mandatory PDF

Guarantee
3. Company registration Mandatory PDF

Certificate
4. VAT registration Mandatory (for PDF

Certificate domestic
bidders only)
5. Business Registration Mandatory PDF
Certificate
6. Tax Clearance Mandatory (for PDF

Certificate/Tax return domestic
submission bidders only)
evidence/evidence of
time extension
7. Power of Attorney of Mandatory PDF

Bid signatory
8. Bank Voucher for cost of Mandatory PDF

bid document
9. Joint venture agreement Mandatory in case PDF

of
JV Bids Only
10. Qualification Documents Mandatory Using profile data(financial
details, contract details etc.) and
Technical Proposal
11. Additional documents] Mandatory (If PDF
specified in ITB 11.2 (h) any)
The required forms and documents shall be part of price bids.

No. Document Requirement Remarks
1. Letter of Price Bid Mandatory PDF
2. Completed Bill of Quantities (BoQ) Mandatory Online Forms
3. Price Adjustment Table Mandatory (If Online Forms

applicable)
4. Additional Documents specified in Mandatory (If PDF
ITB 11.3 (d) any)
Note:
a) The documents specified as “Mandatory” should be included in e-

submission and non-submission of the documents shall be considered as
non-responsive bid.
b) Bidders (all partners in case of JV) should verify/update their profile
documents as appropriate for the specific bid before submitting their bid
electronically.
viii. After providing all the details and documents, two separate bid response
documents i.e technical bids and price bids will be generated from the
system. Bidders are advised to download and verify the response
documents prior to bid submission.
ix. For verifying the authentic user, the system will send one time password
(OTP) in the registered e-mail address of the bidder. System will validate
the OTP and allow bidder to submit their bid.
x. Electronically submitted bids can be modified and/or withdrawn through
system. The bidder may modify their bids multiple times online within bid
submission date and time specified in e-GP system. Once a Bid is
withdrawn, bidder won’t be able to submit another bid response for the
same bid.
xi. The Bidder / Bid shall meet the following requirements and conditions for
e-submission of bids;
aa) The e-submitted bids must be readable through PDF reader.
ab) The facility for submission of bid electronically through e-submission is to

promote transparency, non-discrimination, equality of access, and open
competition in the bidding process. The Bidders are fully responsible to use
the e- submission facility properly in e-GP system as per specified
procedures and in no case the Employer shall be held liable for Bidder's
inability to use this facility.
ac) When a bidder submits electronic bid through the PPMO e-GP portal, it is
assumed that the bidder has prepared the bid by studying and examining the
complete set of the Bidding documents including specifications, drawings
and conditions of contract.
21.2. The inner and outer envelopes shall:

(aa) bear the name and address of the Bidder;
(bb) be addressed to the Employer as provided in BDS 22.1;
(cc) bear the specific identification of this bidding process indicated
in BDS 1.1; and
21.3 The outer envelope and the inner envelope containing Technical Proposal shall
bear a warning not to open before the time and date for the opening of Technical Bid
in accordance with ITB 25.1.
21.4 The inner envelope containing the Price Bid shall bear a warning not to open
until advised by the Employer in accordance with ITB 25.7
21.5 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required, the Employer will
assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid.
22. Deadline for 22.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address and no later than the
Submission of Bids date and time indicated in the BDS.
In case of e-submission, the standard time for e-submission is Nepal Standard
Time as set out in the server. The e-procurement system will accept the e-
submission of bid from the date of publishing of notice and will automatically
not allow the e-submission of bid after the deadline for submission of bid.
22.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission
of bids by amending the Bidding Document in accordance with ITB 8, in which
case all rights and obligations of the Employer and Bidders previously subject to
the deadline shall thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended.
23. Late Bids 23.1 The Employer shall not consider any bid that arrives after the deadline for
submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22. Any bid received by the
Employer after the deadline for submission of bids shall be declared late, rejected,
and returned unopened to the Bidder.
24. Withdrawal, and 24.1 A Bidder may withdraw, or modify its bid- Technical or Price - after it has
Modification of Bids been submitted either in hard copy or by e-submission. Once a Bid is
withdrawn, bidder shall not be able to submit another bid for this bidding
process. Procedures for withdrawal or modification of submitted bids are as
follows:
(i) Bids submitted in Hard Copy
GoN Funded:
a) Bidders may withdraw or modify its bids by sending a written notice in a
sealed envelope, duly signed by an authorized representative, and shall
include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITB 20.2. The
corresponding modification of the bid must accompany the respective
written notice. All notices must be:
(aa)prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 20 and ITB 21,and in
addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly marked
“WITHDRAWAL”, “MODIFICATION;” and
(bb) received by the Employer twenty four hour prior to the deadline
prescribed for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 22.
DP Funded:
A Bidder may withdraw or modify its Bid – Technical or Price – after it has
been submitted by sending a written notice, duly signed by an authorized
representative, and shall include a copy of the authorization in accordance with
ITB 20.2, (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies). The
corresponding modification of the Bid must accompany the respective written
notice. All notices must be
i) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 20 and ITB 21
(except that withdrawal notices do not require copies), and in
addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly marked
“WITHDRAWAL,” and “MODIFICATION;” and
ii) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed for
submission of Bids, in accordance with ITB 22.
ii) E-submitted bids.
a) Bidder may submit modification or withdrawal prior to the deadline
prescribed for submission of bids through e-GP system by using the
forms and instructions provided by the system.
24.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 24.1 shall not be
opened. In case of hard copy submission, the Bid will be returned unopened to
the Bidders.
24.3 The following provisions apply for withdrawal or modification of the Bids:
GoN Funded:
(i) In case of bids submitted in hard copy no bid shall be withdrawn or modified in
the interval between 24 hours prior to the deadline for submission of bids and
the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter
of Bid or any extension thereof.
(ii) In case of e-submitted bids no bids shall be withdrawn or modified in the
interval between deadline for submission of bids and the expiration of the
period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical Bid
and Price Bid or any extension thereof.
DP Funded:
No Bid may be withdrawn or modified in the interval between the deadline for
submission of Bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the
Bidder on the Letters of Technical Bid and Price Bid or any extension thereof.
24.4 Except in case of any modification or correction in bid document made by

procuring entity, Bidder may submit request for withdrawal or modification
only one time.
24.5 In case of hard copy bid, no bid may be withdrawn if the bid has already been
modified; except in case of any modification or correction in bid document by
procuring entity.
24.6 Request for withdrawal or modification must be made through the same
medium of submission. Request for withdrawal or modifications through
different medium shall not be considered.
25. Bid Opening 25.1 The Employer shall open the Technical Bids in public at the address, on the date
and time specified in the BDS in the presence of Bidders` designated
representatives who choose to attend. The Price Bids will remain unopened and
will be held in custody of the Employer until the specified time of their
opening. If the Technical Bid and Price Bid are submitted together in one
envelope, the Employer shall reject the entire Bid.
25.2 The Employer shall download the e-submitted Technical Bid. The e-GP
system allows the Employer to download the e-submitted technical bid only
after bid opening date and time after login simultaneously by at least two
members of the Bid Opening Committee.
25.3 Electronically submitted Technical Bid shall be opened at first in the same
time and date as specified above. Electronic Bids shall be opened one by one
and read out. The e-submitted technical bids must be readable through open
standards interfaces. Unreadable and or partially submitted bid files shall be
considered incomplete.
25.4 Thereafter, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be opened and read out
and the envelope with the corresponding Bid shall not be opened, but returned to
the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be Permitted unless the corresponding
withdrawal notice contains a valid authorization to request the withdrawal and is
read out at bid opening. Next, envelopes marked “MODIFICATION” shall be
opened and read out with the corresponding bid. No Technical Bid and/or
Price Bid modification shall be permitted unless the corresponding
modification notice contains a valid authorization to request the modification
and is read out and recorded at bid opening. Only the Technical Bid, both Original
as well as Modification, are to be opened, read out, and recorded at the opening.
Price Bids, both Original and Modification, will remain unopened in accordance
with ITB 25.1.
25.5 All other envelopes holding the Technical Bid shall be opened one at a
time, reading out: the name of the Bidder; whether there is a modification; the
presence of a bid security and any other details as the Employer may consider
appropriate. Only Technical Bids read out and recorded at bid opening shall be
considered for evaluation. No bid shall be rejected at opening of Technical Bids
except for late bids, in accordance with ITB 23.1.
25.6 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Technical Bids that shall
include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there is a withdrawal,
or modification; and the presence or absence of a bid security. The Bidders’
representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record. The
omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the contents
and effect of the record.
25.7 At the end of the evaluation of the Technical Bids, the Employer will invite
bidders who have submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids and who
have been determined as being qualified for award to attend the opening of the
Price Bids. The date, time, and location of the opening of Price Bids will be
advised in writing by the Employer. Bidders shall be given at least 7 days'
notice for the opening of Price Bids.
25.8 The Employer will notify Bidders in writing who have been rejected on the
grounds of their Technical Bids being substantially nonresponsive to the
requirements of the Bidding Document and return their Price Bids unopened.
25.9 The Employer shall conduct the opening of Price Bids of all Bidders who
submitted substantially responsive Technical Bids, in the presence of Bidders`
representatives who choose to attend at the address, on the date, and time
specified by the Employer. The Bidder’s representatives who are present shall
be requested to sign a register evidencing their attendance.
25.10 All envelopes containing Price Bids shall be opened one at a time and the
following read out and recorded:
(a) the name of the Bidder;
(b) whether there is a modification;
(c) the Bid Prices, including any discounts and alternative offers; and
(d) any other details as the Employer may consider appropriate.
Only Price Bids, discounts, modifications, and alternative offers read out and
recorded during the opening of Price Bids shall be considered for evaluation.
No Bid shall be rejected at the opening of Price Bids.
25.11 The Employer shall prepare a record of the opening of Price Bids that shall
include, as a minimum, the name of the Bidder, the Bid Price (per lot if
applicable), any discounts, modifications and alternative offers. The Bidders’
representatives who are present shall be requested to sign the record. The
omission of a Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the contents
and effect of the record.
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

26. Confidentiality 26.1 Information relating to the examination, evaluation, comparison, and post-
qualification of bids and recommendation of Contract award, shall not be
disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially concerned with such
process until information on Contract award is communicated to all Bidders.
26.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in the evaluation of the bids
or Contract award decisions may result in the rejection of its bid.
26.3 Notwithstanding ITB 26.2, from the time of bid opening to the time of Contract
award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the Employer on any matter related to
the bidding process, it may do so in writing.
27. Clarification of 27.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of the Technical
Bids and Price Bids, the Employer may, at its discretion, ask any Bidder for a
clarification of its Bid. Any clarification submitted by a Bidder that is not in
response to a request by the Employer shall not be considered. The Employer’s
request for clarification and the response shall be in writing. No change in the
substance of the Technical Bid or prices in the Price Bid shall be sought, offered,
or permitted, except to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by
the Employer in the evaluation of the Price Bids, in accordance with ITB 33. In
case of e-submission of bid, upon notification from the employer, the bidder shall
also submit the original of documents comprising the Technical and Price Bid as
per ITB 11.2 and ITB 11.3 for verification of submitted documents for acceptance
of the e-submitted bid.
27.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its Bid by the date and time set in
the Employer’s request for clarification, its Bid may be rejected.
28. Deviations, 28.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions apply:
Reservations, and
Omissions (a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements specified in the Bidding
Document;
(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or withholding from
complete acceptance of the requirements specified in the Bidding Document;
and
(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the information or
documentation required in the Bidding Document.
29. Examination of 29.1The Employer shall examine the Technical Bid to confirm that all documents
Technical Bid and technical documentation requested in ITB 11.2 have been submitted. If
any of these documents or information (except alternative Technical Bid
which is optional) is missing, the bid shall be rejected.
29.2 In case of e-submission bids, the Employer shall confirm that all the documents
and information requested in ITB 21.1 have been submitted. If any of these
documents or information is missing, the bid shall be rejected.
30. Determination of 30.1 The Employer’s determination of a Bid’s responsiveness is to be based on the
Responsiveness of contents of the bid itself, as defined in ITB11.2.
Technical Bid
30.2 A substantially responsive Technical Bid is one that meets the requirements of the
Bidding Document without material deviation, reservation, or omission. A
material deviation, reservation, or omission is one that,
(a) if accepted, would:
(i) affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of
the Works specified in the Contract;
or
(ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding
Document, the Employer’s rights or the Bidder’s obligations under
the proposed Contract; or
(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position of other Bidders
presenting substantially responsive bids.
30.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the Bid submitted in
accordance with ITB 16, Technical Proposal, in particular, to confirm that all
requirements of Section VI (Works Requirements) have been met without any
material deviation, reservation or omission.
30.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding

Document, it shall be rejected by the Employer and may not subsequently be
made responsive by correction of the material deviation, reservation, or
omission.
30.5 In case of e-submission bids, the Employer evaluates the bid on the basis of the
information in the electronically submitted bid files. If the Bidder cannot
substantiate or provide evidence to establish the information provided in e-
submitted bid through documents/ clarifications as per ITB Clause 27.1,
the bid shall not be considered for further evaluation.
30.6 In Case, a corruption case is being filed to Court against the Natural Person or
Board of Director of the firm/institution /company or any partner of JV, such
Natural Person or Board of Director of the firm/institution /company or any
partner of JV such bidder’s bid shall be excluded from the evaluation, if public
entity receives instruction from Government of Nepal.
30.7 Except in case of e-submission, the Financial Bid of the bidder, which is
evaluated as substantially non-responsive in technical bid, shall be returned to
the respective bidders.
31. Non-conformities 31.1 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may waive any
Errors, and Omissions non-conformities in the bid that do not constitute a material deviation,
reservation, or omission.
31.2 Provided that a Technical Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer may
request that the Bidder submit the necessary information or documentation,
within a reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities in the
Technical Bid related to documentation requirements. Requesting information or
documentation on such nonconformities shall not be related to any aspect of
the Price Bid. Failure of the Bidder to comply with the request may result in the
rejection of its bid.
31.3 Provided that a Technical Bid is substantially responsive, the Employer shall
rectify quantifiable nonmaterial nonconformities related to the Bid Price. To
this effect, the Bid Price shall be adjusted, for comparison purposes only, to
reflect the price of a missing or non-conforming item or component. The
adjustment shall be made using the methods indicated in Section III (Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria).
31.4 If the monetary value of such non-conformities is found to be more than fifteen
percent of the Bid Price of the bidder pursuant to ITB 31.3, such bid shall be
considered nonresponsive and shall not be involved in evaluation.
32 Qualification of the 32.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction during the evaluation of
Bidder Technical Bids whether Bidders meet the qualifying criteria specified in
Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
32.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary

evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted by the Bidder, pursuant to
ITB 17.1.
32.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for the opening and

evaluation of a Bidder’s Price Bid. A negative determination shall result into
the disqualification of the Bid, in which event the Employer shall return the
unopened Price Bid to the Bidder.
33. Correction of 33.1 During the evaluation of Price Bids, the Employer shall correct arithmetical
Arithmetical Errors errors on the following basis:
(a) only for unit price Contracts, if there is a discrepancy between the unit price
and the total price that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity,
the unit price shall prevail and the total price shall be corrected, unless in the
opinion of the Employer there is an obvious misplacement of the decimal
point in the unit price, in which case the total price as quoted shall govern
and the unit price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of
subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected;
(c) If there is a discrepancy between the bid price in the Summary of Bill of
Quantities and the bid amount in item (c) of the Letter of Price Bid, the
bid price in the Summary of Bill of Quantities will prevail and the bid
amount in item (c) of the Letter of Price Bid will be corrected.
(d) If there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in words
shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related to an
arithmetic error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevail
subject to (a), (b) and (c) above.
33.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated bid does not accept the
correction of errors, its bid shall be disqualified and its bid security shall be
forfeited.
34 Subcontractors 34.1 In case of Prequalification, the Bidder’s Bid shall name the same subcontractor
as submitted in the prequalification application and approved by the Employer.
In case of Post-qualification, the Employer may permit subcontracting for
certain specialized works as indicated in Section III When subcontracting is
permitted by the Employer, the sub-contractor shall meet the qualifications
criteria as indicated in section III.
Sub-contractors’ qualification and experience will not be considered for
evaluation of the Bidder. The Bidder on its own (without taking into account
the qualification and experience of the sub-contractor) should meet the
qualification criteria.
Bidders may propose subcontracting up to the percentage of total value of
contracts or the volume of works as specified in the BDS.
35. Evaluation of Price 35.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies listed in this Clause. No
Bids other evaluation criteria or methodologies shall be permitted.
35.2 To evaluate a Price Bid, the Employer shall consider the following:
(a) the bid price, excluding Value Added Tax , Provisional Sums, and the
provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary Bill of Quantities, for Unit
Rate Contracts, or Schedule of Prices for lump sum Contracts, but including
Day work items, where priced competitively;
(b) adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors in accordance with ITB
33.1;
(c) adjustment due to discounts offered in accordance with ITB 14.4;
(d) adjustment for nonconformities in accordance with ITB 31.3;
(e) application of all the evaluation factors indicated in Section III (Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria);
35.3 The estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions of the Conditions of
Contract, applied over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken
into account in bid evaluation.
35.4 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote separate prices for
different lots (Contracts), and to award multiple Contracts to a single Bidder
as specified in BDS, the methodology to determine the lowest evaluated
price of the Contract combinations, including any discounts offered in the
Letter of Price Bid, is specified in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria).
35.5 if the bid for an Unit Rate Contract, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid
Price is seriously unbalanced or front loaded or extremely low in the
opinion of the Employer, the Employer may require the Bidder to produce
detailed price analysis for any or all items of the Bill of Quantities, to demonstrate
the internal consistency of those prices with the construction methods and
schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price analysis, taking into
consideration the schedule of estimated Contract payments, the Employer may
require that the amount of the performance security be increased at the expense
of the Bidder as mentioned in BDS to protect the Employer against financial loss
in the event of default of the successful Bidder under the Contract or may
consider the bid as non-responsive.
35.6 In case of e-submission bids, the Employer evaluates the bid on the basis of the
information in the electronically submitted bid files. If the Bidder cannot
substantiate or provide evidence to establish the information provided in e-
submitted bid through documents/ clarifications as per ITB Clause 27.1, the
bid shall not be considered for further evaluation.
36. Comparison of Bids 36.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive bids in accordance
with ITB 35.2 to determine the lowest evaluated bid.
37. Employer’s Right to 37.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any bid, and to annul the
Accept Any Bid, and bidding process and reject all Bids at any time prior to contract award, without
to Reject Any or All thereby incurring any liability to Bidders. In case of annulment, all Bids
Bids submitted and specifically, bid securities, shall be promptly returned to the
Bidders.
F. Award of Contract
38. Award Criteria 38.1 The Employer shall award the Contract to the Bidder whose offer has been
determined to be the lowest evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to
the Bidding Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to be
qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
39. Letter of Intent to 39.1 The Employer shall notify the concerned Bidder whose bid has been selected in
Award the accordance with ITB 38.1 within seven days of the selection of the bid, in writing
Contract/Notification that the Employer has intention to accept its bid and the information regarding the
of Award name, address and amount of selected bidder shall be given to all other bidders
who submitted the bid.
39.2 After issuance of the notice under ITB 39.1 if the concerned bidder provides
information pursuant to ITB 4.10 regarding saturation of maximum number
of contracts, the employer shall disqualify the bidder and shall select the next
lowest evaluated Bidder in accordance with ITB 38.1 and notify accordingly
as per ITB 39.1.
39.3 If no bidder submits an application pursuant to ITB 42 within a period of

seven days of the notice provided under ITB 39.1, the Employer shall, accept
the bid selected in accordance with ITB 38.1 and Letter of Acceptance shall be
communicated to the selected bidder prior to the expiration of period of Bid
validity, to furnish the performance security and sign the contract within fifteen
days.
39.4 After communicating letter of acceptance under ITB 39.3, if the concerned
bidder provides information pursuant to ITB 4.10 regarding saturation of
maximum number of contracts, the employer shall reject the bid of that
bidder and shall select the next lowest evaluated Bidder in accordance with
ITB 38.1 and shall issue the notice accordingly as per ITB 39.1. In such case
bid security of the rejected bidder shall not be forfeited.
40. Performance 40.1 Within Fifteen (15) days of the receipt of Letter of Acceptance from the
Security and Line of Employer, the successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security in
Credit accordance with the Conditions of Contract, subject to ITB 35.5, as specified below
from Commercial Bank or Financial Institution eligible to issue Bank Guarantee as per
prevailing Law in Nepal using Sample Form for the Performance Security included
in Section X (Contract Forms), or another form acceptable to the Employer.
The performance security issued by any foreign Bank outside Nepal must be counter
guaranteed by Commercial Bank or Financial Institution eligible to issue Bank
Guarantee as per prevailing Law in Nepal.
i) If bid price of the bidder selected for acceptance is up to 15 (fifteen) percent below
the approved cost estimate, the performance security amount shall be 5 (five) percent of
the bid price.
ii) For the bid price of the bidder selected for acceptance is more than 15 (fifteen) percent
below of the cost estimate, the performance security amount shall be determined as
follows:
Performance Security Amount = [(0.85 x Cost Estimate –Bid Price) x 0.5] + 5% of
Bid Price.
The Bid Price and Cost Estimate shall be exclusive of Value Added Tax.
40.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-mentioned Performance

Security or to sign the Contract Agreement shall constitute sufficient grounds
for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the bid security. In that
event the Employer may award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated
Bidder whose offer is substantially responsive and is determined by the
Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily. The process shall
be repeated according to ITB 39.
41 Signing of Contract 41.1 The Employer and the successful Bidder shall sign the Contract Agreement
within the period as stated ITB 40.1.
41.2 At the same time, the Employer shall affix a public notice on the result of the
award on its notice board and make arrangement for causing such notice to be
affixed on the notice board also of the District Coordination Committee, District
Administration Office, Provincial Treasury and Controller Office and District
Treasury and Controller Office. The Employer may make arrangements to post
the notice into its website, if it has; and if it does not have, into the website of the
Public Procurement Monitoring Office, identifying the bid and lot numbers and
the following information: (i) the result of evaluation of bid; (ii) date of
publication of notice inviting bids; (iii) name of newspaper; (iv) reference
number of notice; (v) item of procurement; (vi) name and address of bidder
making contract and (viii) contract price
41.3 Within thirty (30) days from the date of issuance of notification pursuant to ITB
39.1 unsuccessful bidders may request in writing to the Employer for a
debriefing seeking explanations on the grounds on which their bids were not
selected. The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, requests for debriefing.
41.4 If the bidder whose bid has been accepted fails to sign the contract as stated ITB
40.1, the Public Procurement Monitoring Office shall blacklist the bidder on
recommendation of the Public Entity.
42. Complaint and 42.1 If a Bidder is dissatisfied with the Procurement proceedings or the decision made
Review by the Employer in opening of the price bid or the intention to award the
Contract, it may file an application to the Chief of the Public Entity within
Seven (7) days of providing the notice under ITB 25.8 and ITB 39.1 by the
Public Entity, for review of the proceedings stating the factual and legal grounds.
42.2 Late application filed after the deadline pursuant to ITB 42.1 shall not be
processed.
42.3 The chief of Public Entity shall, within five (5) days after receiving the
application, give its decision with reasons, in writing pursuant to ITB 42.1:
(a) whether to suspend the procurement proceeding and indicate the procedure to be
adopted for further proceedings; or
(b) to reject the application.
The decision of the chief of Public Entity shall be final for the Bid amount up
to the value as stated in 42.4.
42.4 If the Bidder is not satisfied with the decision of the Public Entity in accordance
with ITB 42.3, or the decision is not given within five (5) days of receipt of
application pursuant to ITB 42.1, it can, within seven (7) days of receipt of
such decision, file an application to the Review Committee of the GoN,
stating the reason of its disagreement on the decision of the chief of Public
Entity and furnishing the relevant documents, provided that its Bid amount ,equal
or more than Rupees Twenty Million (NRs. 20,000,000). The application may be
sent by hand, by post, by courier, or by electronic media at the risk of the
Bidder itself.
42.5 Late application filed after the deadline pursuant to ITB 42.4 shall not be
processed.
42.6 Within three (3) days of the receipt of application from the Bidder, pursuant
to ITB 42.4, the Review Committee shall notify the concerning Public
Entity to furnish its procurement proceedings, pursuant to ITB 42.3.
42.7 Within three (3) days of receipt of the notification pursuant to ITB 42.6, the
Public Entity shall furnish the copy of the related documents to the Review
Committee.
42.8 The Review Committee, after inquiring from the Bidder and the Public
Entity, if needed, shall give its decision within one (1) month of the receipt of
the application filed by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 42.4.
42.9 The Bidder, filing application pursuant to ITB 42.4, shall have to furnish a
cash amount or Bank guarantee from Commercial Bank or Financial
Institution eligible to issue Bank Guarantee as per prevailing Law
equivalent to ten percent (10 %) of amount of bid security in case of
complaint against decision pursuant to ITB 25.8 and one percent (1%) of its
quoted Bid amount in case of complaint against decision pursuant to ITB 39.1
with the validity period of at least ninety (90) days from the date of the filing
of application pursuant to ITB 42.4.
42.10 If the claim made by the Bidder pursuant to ITB 42.4 is justified, the Review
Committee shall have to return the security deposit to the applicant, pursuant to
ITB 42.9, within seven (7) days of such decision made.
SECTION-II
Bid Data Sheet

This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information or
requirements included in Section I. Instructions to Bidders.
A. General
ITB 1.1 The number of the Invitation for Bids is : 54-BMC/2080/081/W/NCB/87
ITB 1.1 The Employer is : Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office
ITB 1.1 The number and identification of lots (contracts) comprising this bidding process is: 54-BMC/2080/081/W/NCB/87
ITB 2.1 The name of the Project is: Construction of Gautam Buddha International Cricket Stadium at Bharatpur, Chitwan (Phase
I)
The Development Partner(DP) is : NA
The implementing agency is: NA
GoN Funded or DP Funded: NA
ITB 4.1(a) Maximum number of partner in a joint venture shall be :3
ITB 4.9 & Maximum number of running contracts that a Bidder, and all parties constituting the Bidder can have shall be :5
4.10
B. Bidding Document
ITB 7.1 For clarification purposes only, the Employer’s address is:
Attention: Santosh Acharya
Address: Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Telephone: 9849830995
Facsimile number:
Electronic mail address: acharyasantosh50@gmail.com
ITB 7.4 A pre bid meeting shall be held. Pre-Bid meeting will take place at the following date, time and place:
Date and Time:20-03-2024 13:00
Address :Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office

Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Nepal
ITB 7.4 A site visit shall not be organized by the Employer.
ITB 7.5 Time for request: Requests for clarification should be received by the Employer no later than 10 days prior to the deadline
for submission of bids.
C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English / Nepali

ITB 11.2 The Bidder shall submit with its Technical Bid the following additional documents:
(h)
SL No Document Name
1 a) Quality Assurance Plan
b) Material Sourcing Detail
c)Milestone Schedule for Construction
ITB 11.3 In accordance with ITB 12 and ITB 14, the following schedules shall be submitted with the bid, including the priced Bill
(b) of Quantities for Unit Rate Contracts and Schedule of Prices for lump sum contracts:
SL No Document Name
1 As per ITB Site Organization Chart, Method Statement, Construction Schedule
ITB 11.3 The Bidder shall submit with its Price Bid the following additional documents :
(d)
SL No Document Name
1 -Letter of Price Bid
-Price Adjustment Table
- Any Other Document Required in BDS
ITB 13.1 Alternative bids shall not be permitted.
ITB 13.2 Alternative times for completion shall not be permitted.
If alternative times for completion are permitted, the evaluation method will be as specified in Section III (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria).
ITB 13.4 Alternative technical solutions shall not be permitted for the following parts of the Works
ITB 14.6 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall be subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract.
Bidder shall submit the Table of Price Adjustment Data as a part of price bid.
ITB 18.1 The bid validity period shall be 120 days.
ITB 19.1 The Bidder shall furnish a bid security, from Commercial Bank or Financial Institution eligible to issue Bank Guarantee
as per prevailing Law with a minimum of 30000000.00 NPR, which shall be valid for 30 days beyond the validity period
of the bid.
ITB 19.2(b) Bank Name: Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd.
Bank Address: Bharatpur
Office Name: BHARATPUR MA.NA.PA(GA-3)-DHARAUTIA
Account Number: 1310100303000002
Office Code: 31304
ITB 20.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copy/ies is/are:
SL No Document Name
1 Not Applicable
ITB 20.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder shall indicate:
(a) The name and description of the documentation required to demonstrate the authority of the signatory to sign the Bid
such as a Power of Attorney; and
(b) In the case of Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV, an undertaking signed by all parties
(i) stating that all parties shall be jointly and severally liable, and
(ii) nominating a Representative who shall have the authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of any
and all the parties of the JV during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the Contract, during contract
execution.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids
ITB 21.1 Bidders shall have the option of submitting their bids by electronic only.
ITB 22.1 For bid submission purposes only, the Employer’s address is :
Attention : Chief Administrative Officer
Address : Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office

Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Nepal
The deadline for bid submission is : 31-03-2024 12:00
ITB 25.1 The Technical Bid opening shall take place at :
Address : Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office

Bharatpur
Bharatpur-10
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Bagmati Province
Nepal
Date : 31-03-2024 13:00
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
ITB 34.1 Sub-contracting for this procurement is: Applicable
a) Contractor's proposed subcontracting: Maximum percentage of subcontracting permitted is: 25 % of the total contract
amount
b) Sub-contractors' qualification and experience will not be considered for evaluation of the Bidder. The Bidder on its
own (without taking into account the qualification and experience of the sub-contractor) should meet the qualification
criteria.
ITB 35.4 Bidders are not permitted to quote separate prices for lots (Contracts), and a single Bidder will be awarded multiple lots
(Contracts) based on provision of Paragraph 1.2, Multiple Contracts Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
ITB 35.5 The amount of the performance security be increased by 8 percent of the quoted bid price.
SECTION-III
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

This Section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders by post-
qualification exercise. GoN/DP requires bidders to be qualified by meeting predefined, precise minimum
requirements. The method sets pass-fail criteria, which, if not met by the bidder, results in disqualification. In
accordance with ITB 32 and ITB 35, no other methods, criteria and factors shall be used. The Bidder shall
provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
1. Evaluation
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 35.2 (a) - (e) the following criteria shall apply:
1.1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal

Sl. No. Criteria Title Criteria Description
1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal Evaluation of the Bidder's Technical Proposal will include an
assessment of the Bidder's technical capacity, to mobilize key
equipment and personnel for the contract consistent with its proposal
regarding work methods, scheduling, and material sourcing in
sufficient detail and fully in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in Section VI (Works Requirements).
Non-compliance with equipment and personnel requirements
described in Section VI (Works Requirements) shall not be grounds
for bid rejection and such non-compliance will be subject to
clarification and rectification prior to contract award.
1.2 Multiple Contracts

1 Multiple Contracts Multiple Contracts, if permitted under ITB 35.4, will be evaluated as
follows:
Not Applicable
1.3 In case other than Multiple Contracts

1 In case other than Multiple Contracts Bidders have the option to Bid for any one or more Contracts. The
contracts will be awarded to the Bidder or Bidders offering the
lowest evaluated cost to the Employer, subject to the selected Bidder
(s) meeting the required qualification which shall be the sum of the
minimum requirements for respective individual contracts. Under
this case, Contract shall be awarded based on Least Cost
Combination to the Employer.
1.4 Completion Time
1.5 Alternative Technical Solutions

1 Alternative Technical Solutions Alternative technical solutions, if permitted under ITB 13.4, will be
evaluated as follows:
Not Permitted
1.6 Quantifiable Non-conformities and Omissions

1 Quantifiable Non-conformities and Subject to ITB 14.2 and ITB 35.2, the evaluated cost of quantifiable
Omissions nonconformities including omissions, is determined as follows:
Pursuant to ITB 31.3, the cost of all quantifiable nonmaterial
nonconformities shall be evaluated, but excluding omission of prices
in the BoQ.The Employer will make its own assessment of the cost
of any nonmaterial nonconformities and omissions for the purpose of
ensuring fair comparison of bids.
2. Qualification
2.1 Eligibility
1 Nationality Nationality in accordance with ITB Subclause 4.2.

each partner: must meet requirement.

all partners: must meet requirement.
One partner: Not Applicable.
Document required: Letter of Technical Bid Forms ELI –1; ELI –2

with attachments.
2 Conflict of Interest No conflicts of interest in accordance with ITB Sub- Clause 4.3.

For joint Venture,
All partners combined : existing or intended JV must meet
requirement.
Each partner : Must meet requirement.
3 Government/DP Eligibility Requirement : Not having been declared ineligible by

government/DP, as described in ITB Sub-Clause 4.4.

each partner : must meet requirement.
All partners : must meet requirement.
Documents Required : Letter of Technical Bid.

4 Government-Owned Enterprise Bidder required to meet conditions of ITB Sub-Clause 4.5.

For joint Venture ,
Each partner: Must meet requirement.
All combined partner: existing or intended JV must meet
requirement.
One partner-> Not Applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Forms ELI - 1, ELI - 2, with

attachments
5 United Nations Eligibility Not having been declared ineligible based on a United Nations
resolution or Employer's country law, as described in ITB Sub-
Clause 4.8.
For joint Venture,
All combined partner : existing or intended JV must meet
requirement.
One partner -> not applicable.
6 Bidder’s Running Contracts Bidder's Running Contracts not more than five (5) as described in
ITB Sub-Clause 4.9.

For joint Venture,
Each partner: Must meet requirement
For all partner combined: Existing or intended JV must meet
requirement
For One Partner: Not Applicable
Documents Submission Requirements : ELI-3
7 Other Eligibility : Firm Registration Firm Registration Certificate
Certificate
For joint Venture,
8 Other Eligibility : Business Registration Business Registration Certificate(License)

Certificate
For joint Venture,

9 Other Eligibility : VAT and PAN VAT and PAN Registration(only for domestic bidders)
Registration
For joint Venture,

10 Other Eligibility : Tax Clearance Certificate Tax Clearance Certificate for the F/Y 2079/080(Only for domestic
for the F/Y 2079/080 (Only for bidders)
domestic bidders)
For joint Venture,
Each partner: must meet requirement.
11 Other Eligibility : Additional requirements Insert if Any
2.2 Pending Litigation

1 Pending Litigation and Arbitration All pending litigation shall be treated as resolved against the Bidder
and so shall in total not represent more than 75 percent of the
Bidder's net worth.
For Single Entity : must meet requirement by itself or as partner to
past or existing JV
For joint Venture :Each partner must meet requirement by itself or as
partner to past or existing JV. All partner combined and one partner
-> not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Form LIT - 1
2.3 Financial Situation

1 Historical Financial Performance Submission of audited balance sheets and income statements, for the
last 5 (Five) years to demonstrate the current soundness of the
Bidder's financial position. As a minimum, a Bidder's net worth for
the last year calculated as the difference between total assets and
total liabilities should be positive.
For joint Venture : Each partner Must meet requirement. All partner
combined and one partner -> not applicable.
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 1 with
attachments
2 Average Annual Construction Turnover Minimum average annual construction turnover of NRs 588
Millions, calculated as total certified payments received for
construction contracts in progress or
completed, within best three years out of last ten years.
Only the net amount shall be calculated after deducting the amount
for VAT and such amount shall be adjusted wholesale price index of
Nepal Rastra Bank.
For joint Venture : All combined partner Must meet requirements,
Each partner Must meet 3 of the requirement, One partner must meet
4 of the requirements.
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN -2
Only the net amount shall be calculated after deducting the amount
for VAT and such amount shall be adjusted to present value by
applying wholesale price index of Nepal Rastra Bank.
Note:
3 Financial Resources Using Forms FIN - 3 and FIN - 4 in Section IV (Bidding Forms) the
Bidder must demonstrate access to, or availability of, financial
resources such as liquid assets[ Liquid Assets mean cash and cash
equivalents, short-term financial instruments, short term available-
for-sale-securities, marketable securities, trade receivables, short-
term financing receivables and other assets that can be converted into
cash within ONE YEAR.], unencumbered real assets, and other
financial resources, (other than any contractual advance payments) to
meet the cash-flow requirement of NRs.160 Millions
Note:
For joint Venture : Each partner Must meet 25% of the requirement
All partner combined: Must meet requirement
One partner -> must meet 40% of the
requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 3

4 Required Bid Capacity The bidding capacity of the bidder should be equal to or more than
the NRs. 900 Millions
For joint Venture :
All combined partner: Must meet requirements,
Each partner Must meet 25% of the requirement,
One partner: Must meet 40% of the requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 4 and Form FIN

-5
Note:

2.4 Experience
1 General Construction Experience Experience under construction contracts in the role of contractor,
subcontractor, or management contractor for at least the last Five(5)
years prior to the applications submission deadline.
2 Contracts of Similar Size and Nature Participation as Prime contractor, management contractor, or
(iv) For works with value above NRs. 50 subcontractor, in at least One contract within the last Ten (10) Years
million with a value of NRs 588 Million (Excluding VAT) that have been
successfully or are substantially completed and that are similar to the
proposed works. The similarity shall be: "Construction of RCC
Frame Structure Stadium with minimum viewer capacity of 6000.
The similarity shall be based on the physical size, complexity,
methods, technology or other characteristics as described in Section
VI, Works Requirements.

For joint Venture,
For all partner combined: Not applicable
For One Partner: Must meet requirement
Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(a)

3 Construction Experience in Key Activities For the above or other contracts executed during the period
stipulated in 2.4.2(a) above, a minimum construction experience in
the following key activities :
PCC for RCC Works (M25 or Richer Mix): 3200 Cum/year
-Reinforcement Works:-655 Metric Ton/year
For Single Entity : Must meet all requirements

For joint Venture,
For all partner combined: Must meet all requirements
For One Partner: Not applicable
Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(b)
Following contracts shall not be counted for this purpose

a) The contracts which were invited or accepted before 2078-12-03 B.S or March 17, 2022 A.D
b) The contracts which have been invited after 2078-12-03 B.S i.e March 17, 2022 A.D and accepted but the work
acceptance report has been approved according to Rule 117 of PPR.
c) The contracts that are running under all types of foreign assistance
Personnel Requirements
Using Form PER-1 and PER-2 in Section IV (Bidding Forms), the Bidder must demonstrate it has personnel that
meet the following requirements:
Sl. No. Position Required No Academic Qualification Total Work Experience Experience in Similar
(years) Works (years)
1 Project Manager 1 Master’s Degree in 10 5
Construction
Management/Civil
Engineering
2 Structural Engineer 1 Master’s Degree in 8 4
Structural
Engineering/Earthquake
Engineering
3 Civil/Water supply 3 Bachelor’s Degree in 5 3
and Sanitary Sanitation/Civil
Engineer Engineering
4 Electrical Engineer 1 Bachelor’s Degree in 5 3
Electrical Engineering
5 Mechanical 1 Bachelor’s Degree in 5 3
Engineer (HVAC Mechanical Engineering
Engineer)
6 Architecture 1 Bachelor’s Degree in 5 3
Architecture
7 Geo Engineering 1 Diploma in Civil 5 3
Lab Technician Engineering and having
Geo Engineering Lab
Technician Course.
8 Curator 1 +2 Pass and having Level- 5 3
1 certification course for
curators
9 Sub-Engineer 5 Diploma in Civil 5 3
Engineering
Equipment Requirements
Using Form EQU in Section IV(Bidding Forms), the Bidder must demonstrate it has the key equipment listed
below:
Sl. No. Equipment Type and Characteristics Minimum Number Requirement
1 Concrete Batching Plant 1
2 Truck-mounted concrete boom pump of minimum 30 meters length boom 2
3 Transit Mixture 4
2.5 Subcontractors
The experience and financial capacity of the sub-contractors shall not be added to those of the Bidder for
purposes of qualification of the Bidder.
The sub-contractors proposed shall be fully qualified for their work proposed, and meet the following criteria:
2.5 (a) Nature of Works that can be sub contracted:
(i) HVAC Works
(ii) Ground and Pitch Construction with Subsurface Drainage System
The proposed sub-contractor shall meet the following requirements:

1) Completion of following work being sub contracted
-For HVAC Works:-at least one Building project having HVAC Works
-For Ground and Pitch Construction with Subsurface Drainage System:-at least one project with Subsurface
Drainage System.
2) Average Annual Construction Turnover for the work being sub contracted should be at least 1.5 * V/T
where V is the proposed value of sub contract and T is time in year. For contract duration of up to 1 year, T
shall be "1".
-For HVAC Works:- NRS 270 Million
-For Ground and Pitch Construction with Subsurface Drainage System:- NRS 82.5 Million.
Financial Resources: The sub contract must demonstrate that it has the financial resources to meet its current
contract commitment plus three months' requirements for the sub contracted work.
SECTION-IV
Bidding Forms
This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of its Bid.
Letter of Technical Bid
The Bidder must accomplish the Letter of Bid in its letter head clearly showing the Bidder’s
complete name and address.
Date: .........................................................
Name of the contract: .........................................................
Invitation for Bid No.: .......................................................
To:…………………………………………………………………………………………………….....
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addenda issued
in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Clause 8.
(b) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works:
(c) Our Bid consisting of the Technical Bid and the Price Bid shall be valid for a period of [insert validity
period as specified in ITB 18.1 of the BDS] days from the date fixed for the bid submission deadline
in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be
accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.
(d) Our firm, including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract, have nationalities from
eligible countries in accordance with ITB 4.2 and meet the requirements of ITB 3.4,& 3.5
(e) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a subcontractor, in more than one Bid in this bidding
process in accordance with ITB 4.3(e), other than alternative offers submitted in accordance with
ITB 13.
(f) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for any part of
the contract, has not been declared ineligible by DP, under the Employer’s country laws or official
regulations or by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(g) We are not a government owned entity/We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB 4.5;1
(h) We declare that, we including any subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract do not
have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4.3 and we have not been punished for an
offense relating to the concerned profession or business.
(i) We declare that we are solely responsible for the authenticity of the documents submitted by us.
The document and information submitted by us are true and correct. If any document/information
given is found to be concealed at a later date, we shall accept any legal actions by the Employer.
(j) We agree to permit the Employer/DP or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and
other documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors appointed by
the Employer.
(k) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to mobilizing key equipment and personnel in accordance with
the requirements set forth in Section VI (Works Requirement) and our technical proposal, or as
otherwise agreed with the Employer.
(l) We declare that we have not running contracts more than five (5)1 in accordance with ITB 4.9.
Name: .................................................................................................
In the capacity of .............................................................................
Signed …………………………………………………………...
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of …………
Date …………………………………………………………....
1 Note: Following contracts shall not be counted for this purpose

Letter of Price Bid
The Bidder must accomplish the Letter of Bid in its letterhead clearly showing the Bidder’s
complete name and address.
Date: .........................................................
Name of the contract: .........................................................
Invitation for Bid No.: .......................................................
To:…………………………………………………………………………………………………….....
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including Addenda issued
in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Clause 8;
(b) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works:
(c)The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is: [Insert one of the
options below as appropriate] or when left blank is the Bid Price indicated in the Bill of Quantities
Option 1, in case of single contract: Total price is: [insert the total price of the Bid in words and figures];
Or
Option 2, in case of multiple lots (contracts): (i) Total price of each lot (contracts): [insert the total price
of each lot in words and figures]; (ii) Total price of subject contract [say Lot1] and Lot2 [another
contract] [insert the total price in words and figures]; (iii) Total price of subject contract [say Lot1]and
Lot3 [another contract] [insert the total price in words and figures]; Total price of subject contract [say
Lot1], Lot2 [another contract], Lot3 [another contract], ………………..[insert the total price in words
and figures];
(d) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application for subject contract [single contract]
are:…………………………………………….. [For Bidding Documents not provisioning multiple
contracts]
Add following if Bidding Document provisions applicability of multiple contracts:
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application for subject contract [say Lot1] and Lot2
[another contract] are:……………………………………………..
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application for subject contract [say Lot1] and Lot3
[another contract] are:……………………………………………..
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application for subject contract [say Lot1], Lot2
[another contract] and Lot3 [another contract],……………………,
are:……………………………………………..
[Note:
1. Formulate possible combinations depending upon the number of lots under Bidding Process and
modify accordingly Paragraph (c) and (d)]
(a) Our bid shall be valid for a period of [insert validity period as specified in ITB 18.1] days from the
date fixed for the bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall
remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(b) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with the Bidding
Document;
(c) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to the bidding
process or execution of the Contract:2
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount
............................................. ........................................... .................................. ........................

............................................. ........................................... .................................. ....................... .
(d) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in your
notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal contract is
prepared and executed;
(e) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid that you
may receive; and
(f) We declare that we are solely responsible for the authenticity of the documents submitted by us.
(g) We agree to permit the Employer/DP or its representative to inspect our accounts and records and
other documents relating to the bid submission and to have them audited by auditors appointed by
the Employer.
Name: ..............................................................................................
In the capacity of .............................................................................
Signed …………………………………………………………...
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and on behalf of …………
Date …………………………………………………………....
2
If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate “None”.
Table of Price Adjustment Data3
[To be used if Price Adjustment is applicable as per GCC 53.1]
Employer's
Base Bidder's
Source Proposed
Index Value Proposed
Code of Weighting
Description and Weighting
Index* Range
Date (coefficient)**
(coefficient)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Non -
0.15 0.15
Adjustable (A)
Labor (b)
Materials (c)
Equipment
usage (d)
Total 1.00
*Normally following source of index shall apply. Public Entity shall choose applicable Index for each
item.
(a) Labor: "National Salary and Wage Rate Index"- "Construction Labor" of Nepal Rastra Bank
or rate fixed by District Rate Fixation Committee
(b) Material:"National Wholesale Price Index" - Construction Materials" of Nepal Rastra Bank
(c) Equipment usage: "National Wholesale Price Index" - Machinery and Equipment" of Nepal Rastra
Bank or "Fuel" Price fixed by Nepal Oil Corporation.
** Bidders proposed weightings should be within the range specified by the Employer in column - 5
3
Non-compliance of the data (stipulated by the bidder in this table) with requirements described here
shall not be grounds for bid rejection and such non-compliance will be subject to clarification and
rectification prior to contract award.
Table of Price Adjustment Data 4
[To be used if Price Adjustment is applicable as per GCC 53.6]
Code Construction Unit Base Price (NRs/Unit) Source

Material* (Ex-factory) (Factory)**
1 2 3 4 5
* Major construction materials to be specified by Employer in column - 2.
** Base Price and source normally to be specified by Employer (or alternatively informed to be
proposed by bidder) in column 4 and 5.
Note:
The base prices of the construction materials shall be taken as of 30 days before the deadline for submission of the Bid
as quoted by the Bidder and verified by the Employer. For the purpose of calculation of price adjustment, the Ex-
factory price of the same source shall be taken into consideration.
4
Non-compliance of the data (stipulated by the bidder in this table) with requirements described here
shall not be grounds for bid rejection and such non-compliance will be subject to clarification and
rectification prior to contract award.
Bid Security
Bank Guarantee
Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office
(On Letter head of the Bank)
Beneficiary: .............................. name and address of Employer ………………………………
Date: ……………………………………………Bid Security No.: ..............................................
We have been informed that. …………. [insert name of the Bidder] (hereinafter called “the
Bidder”)intends to submit its bid (hereinafter called “the Bid”) to you for the execution of
…………...name of Contract . …………… under Invitation for Bids No. ……………… (“the IFB”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a bid
guarantee.
At the request of the Bidder, we…………………. . name of Bank ……………….. hereby irrevocably
undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of . . ………...amount in
figures ………………………. (. …………..amount in words ……………….) upon receipt by us of
your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its
obligation(s) under the bid conditions, because the Bidder:
(a) has withdrawn or modifies its Bid:
i) during the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical and Price Bid,
in case of electronic submission
(ii) from the period twenty-four hours prior to bid submission deadline up to the period of bid validity
specified by the Bidder on the Letter of Technical Bid and Price Bid, in case of hard copy submission;
or
(b) does not accept the correction of errors in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders
(hereinafter “the ITB”); or
(c) changes the prices or substance of the bid while providing information pursuant to clause 27.1 of
ITB; or
(d) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during the period of bid validity,
(i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract Agreement, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the
performance security, in accordance with the ITB.
(e) is involved in fraud and corruption in accordance with the ITB
This guarantee will remain in force up to and including the date ………number…………days after
the deadline for submission of Bids as such deadline is stated in the instructions to Bidders or as it may
be extended by the Employer, notice of which extension(s) to the Bank is hereby waived. Any demand in
respect of this guarantee should reach the Bank not letter than the above date.
This Bank guarantee shall not be withdrawn or released merely upon return of the original guarantee by
the Bidder unless notified by you for the release of the guarantee.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No. 758.
. . .Bank’s seal and authorized signature(s) . . .
Note:
The bid security of ………..……………. has been counter guaranteed by the Bank ……..………..…… on
…………... .................................................. ...……..………. (Applicable for Bid Security of Foreign Banks).
Technical Proposal Format
Personnel
Equipment
Site Organization
Method Statement
Mobilization Schedule
Construction Schedule
Others
Personnel
Form PER - 1: Proposed Personnel
Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified requirements for
each of the positions listed in Section VI (Work Requirements). The data on their experience should be
supplied using the Form below for each candidate.
Academic Total Work Experience in

No. Name Position* Qualification Experience Similar
[Years] Works [years]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
 As listed in Section VI (Work Requirements).

Form PER - 2: Resume of Proposed Personnel
The Bidder shall provide all the information requested below.
Position*
Personal Information Name Date of Birth
Professional qualifications
Present employment Name of employer
Address of employer
Telephone Contact (manager/personnel officer)
Fax E-mail
Job title Years with present employer
Summarize professional experience over the last twenty years in reverse chronological order. Indicate
particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.
From To Company, Project, Position and Relevant Technical and

Management Experience
Equipment
Form EQU: Equipment
The Bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the capability to meet the
requirements for the key equipment listed in Section VI (Work Requirements). A separate Form shall
be prepared for each item of equipment listed, or for alternative equipment proposed by the Bidder.
(i) For the equipment under Bidder's ownership
Total Nos. of No. of Equipment

Equipment under engaged/proposed for Nos. of Equipment
Equipment Type
No. Bidder's ongoing/committed proposed for this
and Characteristics
Ownership contracts contract
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(ii) For the Equipment to be leased/hired

Total Nos. of No. of Equipment Nos. of Equipment
Equipment Type Equipment under the engaged/committed proposed to be
No.
and Characteristics ownership of lease/hire for other works leased/hired for this
provider contract
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type of Equipment
Equipment Information Name of manufacturer Model and power rating
Capacity Year of manufacture
Current Status Current location
Details of current commitments
Source Indicate source of the equipment
 Owned  Rented  Leased  Specially manufactured
The following information shall be provided only for equipment not owned by the Bidder.
Owner Name of owner
Address of owner
Telephone Contact name and title
Fax email
Agreements Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the
project
The Bidder shall be solely responsible for the data provided. However, this shall not limit
the right of Employer to verify the authenticity of submitted information.
Bidder’s Information and Qualification Format
Site Organization
Method Statement
Mobilization Schedule
Construction Schedule
Others
Bidder’s Qualification
To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section III (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the information requested in the corresponding
Information Sheets included hereunder.
Form ELI - 1: Bidder’s Information Sheet
Bidder's Information
Bidder's legal name
In case of JV, legal name of each partner
Bidder's country of constitution
Bidder's year of constitution
Bidder's legal address in country of constitution
Bidder's authorized representative (name, address,
telephone numbers, fax numbers, e-mail address)
Attached are copies of the following original documents.
1. In case of single entity, articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in
accordance with ITB 4.1 and 4.2.
2. Authorization to represent the firm or JV named in above, in accordance with ITB 20.2.
3. In case of JV, letter of intent to form JV or JV agreement, in accordance with ITB 4.1.
4. In case of a government-owned entity, any additional documents not covered under 1 above required to
comply with ITB 4.5.
Form ELI - 2: JV Information Sheet
Each member of a JV must fill in this form
JV / Specialist Subcontractor Information
Bidder's legal name
JV Partner's or Subcontractor's legal name
JV Partner's or
Subcontractor's country of constitution
JV Partner's or
Subcontractor's year of constitution
JV Partner's or
Subcontractor's legal address in country of
constitution
JV Partner's or
Subcontractor's authorized representative
information (name, address, telephone numbers,
fax numbers, e-mail address)
Attached are copies of the following original documents.
1. articles of incorporation or constitution of the legal entity named above, in accordance with
ITB 4.1 and 4.2.
2. Authorization to represent the firm named above, in accordance with ITB 20.2.
3. In the case of government-owned entity, documents establishing legal and financial autonomy
and compliance with commercial law, in accordance with ITB 4.5.
Form ELI - 3: Bidder’s Running Contracts5
Bidder's Running Contracts
Contract Date of issuance

Name of Date of Issuance
Identification Source of of Letter of Status of of Taking Over
office contract**
no. Fund* Acceptance Certificate***
* Mention GON funded or DP funded or Other PE (Insert name) funded

** Mention "Yet to sign" if contract is not signed, "Running" if contract has been signed and contract is running
and "Substantially completed" if taking over certificate has been issued.
** Insert date of issuance of taking over certificate if the awarded contract has been substantially completed and
taking over certificate has been issued.
5Note: Following contracts shall not be counted for this purpose

Form LIT - 1: Pending Litigation
Pending Litigation
 No pending litigation in accordance with Criteria 2.2 of Section III (Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria)
 Pending litigation in accordance with Criteria 2.2 of Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)
Value of Pending Value of Pending

Year Matter in Dispute Claim as a Percentage
Claim in NRS
on Net Worth
Form FIN - 1: Financial Situation
Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form
Financial Data for Previous 3 Years [in NRS]
Year 1 : Year 2 : Year 3 :
Information from Balance Sheet
Total Assets
Total Liabilities
Net Worth
Current Assets
Current Liabilities
Information from Income Statement
Total Revenues
Profit Before Tax
Profit After Tax
o Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets including all related notes, and income statements)
for the last three or above years, as indicated above, complying with the following conditions.
o All such documents reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JV, and not sister
or parent companies.
o Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified auditor.
o Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial statements.
o Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no
statements for partial periods shall be requested or accepted).
Form FIN - 2: Average Annual Construction Turnover
The information supplied should be the Annual Turnover of the Bidder or each member of a JV in
terms of the amounts billed to clients for each year for work in progress or completed to NRs at the end
of the period reported.
Annual Turnover Data for the Last 10 Years

(Construction only)
Year Amount Currency
- Average Annual Construction Turnover

(Best three years within the last 10 years)
Form FIN - 3: Financial Resources
Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets and other
financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands
of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
Financial Resources
No. Source of financing Amount (in NRS)
3
Form FIN – 4: Bid Capacity
Bid Capacity = [(5 x A) – B]
A = Average Annual Turnover of best three years out of last ten fiscal years.
B = Annual Value of the existing commitments and works (ongoing) to be completed, calculated from
FIN-4.
A, in B, in Bid Capacity,
SN Name of Bidder Pan No.
Million Million in Million
Total Bid Capacity :
Signature of Bidder
Form FIN- 5: Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress
Bidders and each partner to a JV should provide information on their current commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or
acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued.
Current Contract Commitments ( For Calculation of B with reference of FIN-3)
Estimated Time in Month
Initial or Revised Value of
Employer's Contract Contract to Complete the
Contract Contract outstanding
Name of Name of the Contact Amount in Date(yyyy- outstanding works
No. Share in % Duration works [In
Contract Contractor/s Address, Tel, Millions mm) (f) = (c) + (d) – Date of
(a) (months) Millions, NRS]#
Fax (b) (c) Invitation of Bid
(d) (e)
(f)
1
Signature of Bidder
# The Outstanding Works means Contract Price (excluding Vat) minus Work Evaluated by Employer till the reference date. Bidder shall have to submit the relevant documentary evidence to
substantiate the facts/figures.
 ( e)  ( a ) 
Note 1: “B” shall be calculated as : B=   x12 , If (f) is less than 12, then value of (f) shall be taken as 12.
 (f) 
Note 2: If Initial or Revised Contract Date is run out with respect to Date of Invitation of Bid, the Estimated Time in Month to Complete the outstanding works shall be taken equal to 12 months.
Form EXP - 1: General Construction Experience
Each Bidder or member of a JV must fill in this form.
General Construction Experience
Starting Ending Year Contract Identification and Name and Address Role of
Month Year Month of Employer Brief Description of the Works Bidder
Year Executed by the Bidder
Form EXP - 2(a): Specific Construction Experience
Fill up one (1) form per contract.
Contract of Similar Size and Nature

Contract No………… of….. Contract Identification
Award Date Completion
Date
Role in Contract   
Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Total Contract Amount  NRS
………..
If Partner in a JV or subcontractor, specify Percent of Amount
participation of total contract amount Total
Employer's Name
Address
Telephone/Fax
Number
E-mail
Description of the similarity in accordance with Criteria 2.4.2 (a) of Section III
Note :
The Employer should insert here contract size,
complexity, methods, technology, or other
characteristics as described in Section VI
(Work Requirements) against which the bidder
demonstrates similarity in the box on the right-
hand-side.
Participation as Prime contractor, management contractor, or subcontractor, in at least One contract within the last Ten (10)
Years with a value of NRs 588 Million (Excluding VAT) that have been successfully or are substantially completed and that are
similar to the proposed works. The similarity shall be: "Construction of RCC Frame Structure Stadium with minimum viewer
capacity of 6000.
The similarity shall be based on the physical size, complexity, methods, technology or other characteristics as described in
Section VI, Works Requirements.Single entity must meet requirements.
In case of joint venture, one partner must meet requirements.
Document required: Form EXP-2(a)

Form EXP - 2(b): Specific Construction Experience in Key Activities
Fill up one (1) form per contract.

Contract of Similar Size and Nature
Contract No………… Contract Identification

of………..
Award Date Completion Date
Role in Contract  Contractor  Management  Subcontractor

Contractor
Total Contract Amount  NRS ………..
If Partner in a JV or Percent of Total Amount

subcontractor, specify
participation of total contract
amount
Employer's Name
Address
Telephone/Fax
Number
E-mail
Note :
The Employer should insert here
production rate(s) for the key
activity (activities) subject
contract against which the bidder
demonstrates in the box on the
right-hand-side production rates
achieved by him on previous
contracts.
Description of the similarity in accordance with Criteria 2.4.2 (b) of Section III
For the above or other contracts executed during the period stipulated in 2.4.2(a) above,a minimum construction experience in
the following key activities :
(1)PCC for RCC Works (M25 or Richer Mix): 3200 Cum/year
2)Structural Steel Works:-655 Metric Ton/year
Single entity must meet requirements. In case of joint venture, all partners combined must meet requirements.Document
required: Form EXP-2(b)
SECTION-V
Eligible Countries
This section contains the list of eligible countries.
For GoN funded: [with estimate upto NRs. 5 Billion]

For the purpose of ITB 4.2: Nepal and
For the purpose of Country of Origin ITB 5.1 and GCC 79.2: "all Countries"
Part II: Employer's Requirements
Table of Clauses
Scope of Work ............................................................................................................................
Specifications ............................................................................................................................
Notes on the Specifications ......................................................................................................

Sample Clause: Equivalency of Standards and Codes ...........................................................
Drawings .....................................................................................................................................
Supplementary Information .......................................................................................................
Personnel Requirements…………………………………………………………………....
Equipment Requirements …….……………………………………………………….......
Section VI: Bill of Quantities .....................................................................................................
Notes for Unit Rate Contracts: .................................................................................................

Preamble of Bill of Quantities ...................................................................................................
A. General .................................................................................................................................
B. Day work Schedule ..............................................................................................................
Provisional Sums ......................................................................................................................
Bill of Quantities .........................................................................................................................
SECTION-VI
Works Requirements
This Section contains the Specification, the Drawings, and supplementary information that describe the
Works to be procured, Personnel Requirements and Equipment Requirements.
SCOPE OF WORK:
National Competitive Biddiding
Single Stage- Double Envelope Bidding Procedure
Construction of Gautam Buddha International Cricket Stadium
at Bharatpur, Chitwan (Phase I)
Construction of RCC Frame Structure Cricket Stadium

SPECIFICATIONS OF CIVIL WORKS
FOR GAUTAM BUDDHA
INTERNATIONAL CRICKET STADIUM
CONSTRUCTION PROJECT
GAUTAM BUDDHA INTERNATIONAL CRICKET STADIUM

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 1-1
100 GENERAL 1-1

101 Definitions 1-1
102 Contractor’s Office & Accommodation 1-2
103 Office For Engineer 1-2
104 Safety Measures 1-3
105 Notice Boards 1-3
106 Temporary Facilities 1-3
107 Publicly And Privately Owned Services 1-4
106 Insurance Of Works 1-4
107 Environmental Protection Works 1-5
108 Survey And Setting Out 1-7
109 As-Built Drawings 1-7
110 Photographs 1-7
111 Supply Of Video Cassettes 1-8
112 Notes About Measurement And Payment 1-8
113 National Specifications 1-9
114 Equivalency Of Standards 1-9
115 Units Of Measurement, Abbreviations And Terminology 1-9
116 Program 1-11
CHAPTER 2 2-1
200 SITE CLEARANCE 2-1
201 Clearing 2-1
CHAPTER 3 3-1
300 QUALITY CONTROL 3-1
301 Scope 3-1
302 Contractor Responsible For The Quality Of The W orks 3-1
303 Quality Control System 3-1
304 Quality Assurance Plan 3-1
305 Testing Procedures And Set Of Tests 3-2
306 Laboratory Trials To Confirm Compliance W ith Specifications 3-2
307 Site Trials Or Trials Sections 3-2
308 Control Testing During Construction 3-3
309 Acceptance Tests For Completed W orks Or Part Of Works 3-3
310 Recapitulative Schedule Of Tests 3-3
311 Contractor's Laboratory 3-4
312 Laboratory Equipment at Site 3-4
313 Sampling and Testing of Material away From Site 3-7
314 Survey and Setting 3-7
315 Use of the Contractor's Temporary W orks 3-8
316 Provide and Place Large Permanent Signs and Markings 3-8
317 Day work 3-8
318 Reports 3-8
319 Site Diary 3-8

CHAPTER 4 4-1
400 M ATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS 4-1

401 Scope 4-1
402 Quality Of Materials 4-1
403 Sources Of Materials 4-1
404 Inspection And Acceptance Of Materials 4-1
405 Materials And Manufactured Articles 4-1
406 Defective Materials 4-2
407 Trade Names And Alternatives 4-2
408 Foreign Materials 4-2
409 Definition Of General types Of Materials 4-3
410 Sieves 4-3
411 Soils And Gravels 4-3
412 Stone, Aggregate, Sand And Fillers 4-5
413 Cement 4-5
414 Lime 4-6
415 Lime Treated Materials 4-6
416 Concrete 4-7
417 Reinforcing Steel 4-8
418 Testing Of W elds 4-8
419 Paints For Structural Steelwork 4-9
420 Bricks 4-9
421 Mortar 4-9
422 Reinforced Concrete Pipes 4-9
423 High Density Polythene Pipes 4-9
424 Geotextiles 4-9
425 Timber For Structural W orks 4-9
426 Manhole Covers And Frames 4-9
427 Pre-cast Concrete Channels 4-10
428 Cast Iron Drainage Gratings 4-10
429 Measurement And Payment 4-10
CHAPTER 5 5-1
500 EARTHWORKS 5-1

501 Scope 5-1
502 Definitions And General Requirements 5-1
503 Earthwork In Excavation In Foundation 5-2
504 Excavation For Formation Of Plinth Of Building And Parking W orks 5-2
505. Backfill 5-3
506. Transportation And Handling Of Excess Disposable Material 5-4
CHAPTER 6 6-1
600 CONCRETE WORK 6-1

601 Scope 6-1
602 Definitions 6-1
603 Materials For Concrete 6-1
604 The Design Of Concrete Mixes 6-5
605 Mixing Concrete 6-8

606 Transportation Of Concrete 6-9
607 Placing Of Concrete 6-9
608 Compaction Of Concrete 6-11
609 Curing Of Concrete 6-12
610 Protection Of Fresh Concrete 6-12
611 Concreting In Hot W eather 6-12
612 Construction Joints 6-13
613 Records Of Concrete Placing 6-13
614 Reinforcement 6-14
615 Concrete For Secondary Purposes 6-15
616 Early Loading 6-16
617 Measurement 6-16
618 Payment 6-17
CHAPTER 7 7-1
700 BRICK M ASONRY WORK 7-1

701 Scope 7-1
702 Materials 7-1
703 Soaking Of Bricks 7-1
704 Laying Of Bricks 7-1
705 Joints 7-2
706 Jointing W ith Existing Structures 7-2
707 Curing 7-2
708 Scaffolding 7-2
709 Condition Of Equipment 7-2
710 Finishing Of Surfaces 7-2
711 Test And Standard Of Acceptance 7-4
712 Dry Brick Works 7-4
713 Measurement 7-4
714 Payment 7-4
714 DACHI APPA BRICK W ORK 7-5
CHAPTER 8 8-1
800 STONE M ASONRY WORK 8-1

801 Scope 8-1
802 Materials 8-1
803 Construction 8-1
804 Ashlar 8-2
805 Block-In-Course 8-2
806 Square Rubble-Coursed Or Broken Courses 8-2
807 Random Rubble - Coursed Or Uncoursed 8-3
808 Dry Random Rubble 8-3
809 Composite Random Rubble 8-3
810 Test And Standard Of Acceptance 8-3
811 Measurement 8-3
812 Payment 8-3
CHAPTER 9 9-1
900 FORM WORK 9-1

901 Scope And Definitions 9-1
902 General 9-1
903 Formwork For Concrete 9-1
904 Surface Finish On Formed Surfaces 9-3
905 Finishes On Unformed Surfaces 9-4
906 Remedial W ork To Defective Surfaces 9-5
907 Measurement 9-5
908 Payment 9-6
CHAPTER 10 10-1
1000 WOOD WORK 10-1

1001 Scope 10-1
1002 Material 10-1
1003 Carpentry and Joinery 10-2
1004 Beams Lintel, Rafters, Purlins, W all Plates, Post/Column 10-4
1005 Doors and W indows Frames 10-4
1006 Wooden Door and W indows Frame 10-4
1007 Wooden W indow Shutters 10-6
1008 Glazed W indow Shutters 10-6
1009 Wooden Paneled Door Shutters 10-8
1010 Wooden Solid Core Door Shutters 10-8
1011 Wooden Carving Door and Windows Frame And Shutters 10-9
CHAPTER 11 11-1
1100 PLASTER AND POINTING WORK 11-1

1101 Scope 11-1
1102 Material 11-1
1103 Construction Procedures 11-1
1104 Punning And Pointing W orks 11-2
1106 Payment 11-3
CHAPTER 12 12-1
1200 PAINTING 12-1

1201 Scope 12-1
1202 Delivery and Application of Paint: 12-1
1203 Preparation and priming of surfaces: 12-1
1204 Colors and Priming: 12-1
1205 Cement Paint 12-2
1206 Enamel Paint 12-3
1207 Washable Distemper 12-3
1208 Plastic Emulsion Paint 12-3
1209 Bituminous Aluminum Paint 12-3
1309 Red Lead Primer 12-3
1210 Chapra Polish 12-3
1211 Polyurethane Paint 12-4
1212 White W ashing 12-4
1214 Payment 12-4

CHAPTER 13 13-1
1300. FLOORING 13-1

1301 Scope 13-1
1302 Concrete Flooring 13-1
1303 Flag Stone Flooring 13-1
1304 Plain and Colored ceramic Tiles 13-2
1305 Marble Floor 13-3
1306 Terrazzo Tiles Flooring: 13-3
1307 In skirting, risers etc 13-3
1308 Glazed W all tiling 13-3
1309 Non Slippery Tiles in Flooring 13-3
1310 Timber Flooring 13-4
1311 Telia Tile 13-4
1312 Marble Flooring 13-4
1313 Polythene Sheeting 13-4
1314 Paving, Skirting etc 13-4
1315 Floor Hardener 13-5
1316 Polythene/ Polythene sheets 13-5
1317 Damp Proof Course 13-5
1319 Payment 13-6
CHAPTER 14 14-1
1400 ROOFING WORK AND FALSE CEILING WORK 14-1

1401 Clay Tiles 14-1
1402 Ridge and Verge Cover 14-1
1403 Asbestos Cement Roofing 14-1
1404 Reinforced Cement Concrete Roofing 14-2
1405 Galvanized Corrugated Iron Sheet (CGI Sheet) Roofing and Ridge an d
Verge Cover 14-2
1406 Slate Roofing: 14-2
1407 W ater Proofing for Concrete Roofs 14-3
1408 W ater Proofing for Tiled Roofs 14-3
1409 Laying Tar Felt Sheets 14-4
CHAPTER 15 15-1
1500 CEILING WORKS 15-1

1501 Acoustic Ceiling 15-1
1502 Gypsum board Ceiling 15-1
1503 Marine Board Ceiling 15-2
CHAPTER 16 16-1
1600 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 16-1

1601 General 16-1
1602 Materials 16-1
1603 Fabrication : General Requirements 16-1
1604 Fabrication Of Bolted Structures 16-7
1605 Castings And Heat Treatment 16-11
1606 Welded Construction 16-12

1607 Field Erection Requirements 16-16
1608 Assembling And Bolting 16-16
1609 Protection Against Corrosion 16-17
1611 Payment 16-21
CHAPTER 17 17-1
1700 METAL WORK 17-1

1701 Aluminum W indows Frame And Shutters 17-1
1702 Mild Steel Folded Door and W indows Frame and Shutters 17-2
1703 Mild Steel Grill 17-4
1704 Mild Steel Collapsible Gate 17-4
1705 Mild steel Main Gate 17-4
1706 Cattle Trap 17-5
1707 Mild steel Main Gate 17-5
CHAPTER 18 18-1
1800 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS 18-1

1801 Hume Pipes 18-1
1802 Grass Plantation 18-1
1803 Barbed W ire Fencing on Timber Poles: 18-2
1804 Precast RCC W orks 18-2
1805 Damp Proof Courses: 18-2
1806 Holes, Pipes, etc.: 18-3
CHAPTER 19 19-1
1900 DISM ANTLING WORK 19-1

1901 Dismantling of Gabions 19-1
1902 Dismantling of Cement Masonry W orks 19-1
1903 Dismantling of Plain Concrete/Reinforced Concrete 19-1
1904 Dismantling of Dry Stone Masonry W all 19-1
CHAPTER 20 1
2000 OTHER WORKS 1

2001 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 1
2002 ASPHALT CONCRETE/ BITUMINOUS CONCRETE 2
2003 GLASS CANOPY IN CARBON STEEL SECTION 3
2004 WATER STOPPER 3
2005 SCAFFOLDING W ORKS 4
2006 PEA GRAVEL CONCRETE (Shot Crete) 4
2007 Boundry Rope 4
2008 Sight Screen 4
2009 Score Board 4

CHAPTER 1
100 GENERAL
The W ork shall be carried out according to these Specifications whether specifically mentioned
elsewhere or not. No extra in any form will be paid unless it is definitely stated as an item in the Bill of
Quantities.
Whenever the Specifications are not given or when the Specifications are ambiguous, the relevant
Indian Standards or British Standards and further amendments will be considered as final and
binding.
All W orks shall be carried out simultaneously with electrical, plumbing, sanitary and other services
and in co-operation with the Contractors the above services. The W ork shall be carried on till it is
completed satisfactorily along with the completion of other essential services. The building Contractor
shall keep the other Contractors informed of the proposed program of W ork, well in advance, so that
the building W ork is not hindered. The Contractor shall further cooperate with other Contractors in
respect of any facility required by them e.g. making holes in shuttering for sanitary, pipes, electric
conduits, fan hook etc. However, no extra payment shall be admissible to him for such reason able
assistance and facilities afforded to other Contractors and the building Contractors shall be deemed to
have taken these factors into consideration while quoting his rates.
The W ork shall be related to the drawings which the Contractor is presumed to have studied. Nothing
extra will be paid for any item because of its shape, location or other difficult circumstances, even if
the schedule makes no distinction, as long as the item is shown in the drawings.
The sources of materials stated in the Specifications are those from which materials are generally
available. However, materials not conforming to Specifications shall be rejected even if they come
from the stated sources. The Contractor should satisfy himself that sufficient quantity of materials of
acceptable Specification is available form the stated or other sources.
The requirements of Specifications under (A). GENERAL (B). MATERIALS shall be fulfilled by the
Contractor without extra charges i.e. the item rates quoted shall be deemed to have taken these
Specifications into account.
These are requirements the Contractor shall fulfill after the issue of Letter of Acceptance but before
the Date of Commencement.
101 DEFINITIONS
a) General
Acceptable/Approved (Approval) - Acceptable to/approved (approval) by the Engineer.
Agreed - Agreed in writing.
As detailed - As detailed on the drawings.
Authorized/ordered/rejected - Authorized/ordered/rejected by the Engineer.
Designated - Shown on the drawings or otherwise specified by the Engineer or, in relation to
an item scheduled in the bid documents, descriptive of an item to be priced by a bidder.
Indicated - Indicated in or reasonably to be inferred from the contract, or indicated in writing
by the Engineer.
Instructed/directed/permitted -Instructed/directed/ permitted by the Engineer.
Satisfactory - Capable of fulfilling or having fulfilled the intended function.
Service - Any pipeline, cable, duct etc. for conveying or transmitting any fluid or other matter.
Submitted - Submitted with the tender or submitted to the Engineer, as appropriate.
b) Tolerances
Deviation - The difference between the actual (i.e., measured) size or position and the
specified size or position.
Permissible deviation - The specified limit(s) of deviation.
Tolerance - The range between the limits within which a size or position must lie.
c) Measurement and Payment
Bill/schedule - The bill/schedule of quantities.

Billed/scheduled rate - The unit rate or price entered in the bill/schedule at which the
Contractor undertakes to execute the particular work or to provide the required material,

article or service, or to do any or all of these things, as set out in the item concerned.
Billed/scheduled - Listed in the bill/schedule of quantities.
Fixed charge - A charge for work that is executed without reference to time.
Method-related charge - The sum for an item inserted in the bill by the Contractor when
tendering, to cover items of work relating to his intended method of executing the Works.
Time-related charge - A charge for work the cost of which, to the Employer, is varied in
proportion to the length of time taken to execute the particular item scheduled.
Value-related charge - A charge that is directly proportional to the value of the contract.
102 CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE & ACCOMMODATION
Various works defined under this item are for the provision and maintenance of the Contractor's office,
camps, stores, equipment yard, and workshops. The structure of the buildings shall be adequate,
rainproof, spacious, airy and hygienic with proper lighting and toilet facilities. The area shall be kept
neat and clean. Any garbage or sewage shall be disposed at a location and in a manner approved by
the Engineer.
Space allocated for storage of various materials such as cement, reinforcement steel, and petroleum
products etc. shall be clearly separated to avoid contamination.
Petroleum products shall be stored and handled in a way that avoids contamination of ground water.
Workshops shall be installed with oil and grease traps for the same purpose.
Written information shall be given to and approval taken from the Engineer regarding proper
establishment and maintenance of such camps. Failure in compliance with Engineer's instructions in
respect of overall standard will lead to reduction or withholding of any payment due to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide at his own expense adequate temporary accommodation and toilet
facilities for his W orkmen and keep the same in good conditions. This may be done to suit Site
conditions with the approval of Project Engineer. The above mentioned temporary structures shall be
removed on the completion of W orks at Contractor's own cost. All materials shall belong to the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the supply of electric power and lighting as
required for construction purpose.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for all internal and external telephones and other
communication means deemed necessary for the W orks.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for office equipment and other consumable for his
use for the W orks.
103 OFFICE FOR ENGINEER
The contractor shall provide and maintain offices for the use of the Engineer and his staff if provided
in the contract. Site Office Setup including supply of electricity, water, internet etc as specified in
following
Description unit Quantity
Construction of prefab building construction as per drawing all complete sqm 100
Accessories (Supply and Fitting with maintenance up to project
period)
Laptop @7 numbers nos 7
Desk Top Computer @6 numbers nos 6
A3 colour Printer @1 numbers with A3 paper set 1
Printer @3 numbers with A4 paper set 3
Water (Hot ,cold) months 30
Carpet sqm 100
Table nos 13

Meeting Table ( 14 seat) nos 1
Chair nos 28

Sofa @ 3 set (3 seater) set 3
Network ( Internet) months 30
Electrification months 30
Office Assistant @2 number Man- Mon 60
104 SAFETY MEASURES

The Contractor shall be responsible for safety of all workmen and other persons entering the W orks
and shall at his own expense; where not stated otherwise take all measures, subject to the Engineer's
approval, necessary to ensure their safety. Such measures shall include but not be limited to:
Provision of safety and emergency regulations for fire, gas, and electric shock prevention,
together with rescue operation plan
Safe control of flowing water
Provision and maintenance of suitable lighting to provide adequate illumination at place of work
with appropriate spares and standby unit
Provision and maintenance of safe, sound slings, pulleys, ropes, and other lifting device
Provision of safe access to any part of the works.
Provision of notices in local dialect temporarily or permanently during construction at locations
likely to be used by the public. Placement of such notices shall depend on the existence of the
nature of work in the vicinity. These notices shall be in addition to any other statutory
requirements demanded of the Contractor
The Contractor shall submit a proposal with detailed safety and emergency measures f or the
Engineer's approval. W hen the proposal has been approved, English and Nepali version of the
regulations shall be made available to all of his Employees and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that all his Employees are fully conversant with the regulations,
emergency and rescue procedures etc. and shall enforce a rule that will instantly dismiss any
employee committing a serious breach of such regulations.
105 NOTICE BOARDS
The Contractor shall erect two notice boards (1.9 m x 4.5 m) at the site giving details of the Contract
in the format and wordings directed by the Engineer. These boards shall be erected within 14 days
after the Contractor has been given the Possession of Site.
The Contractor shall not erect any advertisement sign board on or along the work. The board shall be
removed by the Contractor by the end of the Defects Liability Period.
106 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
(1) Provision of Temporary Services
When the rehabilitation or replacement of existing public utilities requires their temporary
disconnection, the Contractor shall provide the affected users with temporary services in at
least the same standard as the original services. For water supply he may install temporary
lines or arrange for regular supply by tankers. W hen forced to disconnect existing sewers the
Contractor shall install temporary pipes of adequate size to carry off sewage from any private
sewer facilities cut off by construction work. Connections to temporary pipes shall be made
immediately by the Contractor upon cutting off the existing facility. No sewage shall be
allowed to flow from any severed facility upon the ground surface or into trench excavation.
Pipes used in temporary sewers may be plastic or approved flexible material.
Upon completion of work the Contractor shall replace all severed connections and restore to
operating order the existing sanitary facilities. The Contractor without approval of the
Engineer shall operate no valve or other controls in public service facilities. All users affected
by such operation shall be notified by the Contractor at least one hour before the operation
and advised of the probable time when service will be restored.
(2) Protection of Adjoining Property
The Contractor shall control the movement of his crews and equipment on right-of-way
including access routes approved by the Engineer so as to minimize damage to crops and
property and shall endeavor to avoid marring the lands. Ruts and scars shall be obliterated

and damage to land shall be corrected and the land shall be restored as closely as possible to
its original conditions before final taking-over of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible directly to the Employer for any excessive or avoidable
damage to crops or lands resulting from his operations whether on lands adjacent to right-of-
way or on approved access road and deductions will be made from payment due to the
Contractor to cover the amount of such excessive or avoidable damage as determined by the
Engineer.
(3) Reinstatement upon Completion
Temporary facilities shall be provided by the Contractor, only for as long as required after
which he shall dismantle and remove the same from their place of use as speedily as
possible. The Contractor in his yard shall safely store re-usable components. The place of
use shall be cleared and reinstated immediately to at least the condition existing before the
temporary facilities were provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) Measurement and Payment
Unless otherwise provided in the contract, no separate measurement and/or payment shall be
made for all materials and works required under this clause. All costs in connection with the
work specified herein shall be considered to be included with other related items of the work
in the BOQ
All provision of temporary services shall be covered by a provisional sum in the BOQ. The
lump sum amounts indicated in BOQ shall be paid in pro-rata basis by dividing the total
amounts by contract period in months. These payments will be incorporated in the interim
certificates for payment.
107 PUBLICLY AND PRIVATELY OWNED SERVICES
(1) If any privately owned service for water, electricity, drainage, etc., passing through the site is
affected by the works, the Contractor shall provide a satisfactory alternative service in full
working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the services and of the Engineer before
terminating the existing service.
(2) Drawing and scheduling the affected services like water pipes, sewers, cables, etc. owned by
various authorities including Public Undertakings and Local Authorities included in the
contract documents shall be verified by the Contractor for the accuracy of the information
prior to the commencement of any work.
(3) Notwithstanding the fact that the information on affected services may not be exhaustive, the
final position of these services within the works shall be supposed to have been indicated
based on the information furnished by different bodies and to the extent the bodies are
familiar with the final position. The Contractor must also allow for any effect of these services
and alternations upon the works and for arranging regular meetings with the various bodies at
the commencement of the contract and throughout the period of the works in order to
maintain the required co-ordination. During the period of the works, the Contractor shall agree
if the public utility bodies vary their decisions in the execution of their proposals in terms of
program and construction, provided that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor has
received reasonable notice thereof before the relevant alterations are put in hand.
(4) No clearance or alterations to the utility shall be carried out unless ordered by the Engineer.
(5) Any services affected by the works shall be restored immediately by the Contract or who must
also take all measures reasonably required by the various bodies to protect their services and
property during the progress of the works.
(6) The Contractor may be required to carry out the removal or shifting of certain services/utilities
on specific orders from the Engineer for which payment shall be made to him. Such works
shall be taken up by the Contractor only after obtaining clearance from the Engineer and
ensuring adequate safety measures.
106 INSURANCE OF WORKS
(1) Insurance of Works
The Contractor shall take out Insurance for the W orks from approved agency/institution staff if
provided in the contract

Payment
Payments made to the agency/institution and stamp charges/duties incurred if any, by

thecontractor in compliance of the above work shall be paid from the item in the BOQ after
submission of the insurance document to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(2) Third Party Insurance
The Contractor shall take out Third Party Insurance from an approved agency/institution staff
if provided in the contract
Payment
Payments made to the agency/institution and stamp charges/duties incurred if any, by the
Contractor in compliance of the above work shall be paid from the item in the BOQ after
submission of the documents to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(3) Insurance of Contractor's Workmen and Employees
The Contractor shall insure against such liability as stipulated in Part II Conditions of
Particular Application.
Payment
107 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION WORKS
The environment has been defined to m ean surrounding area including human and natural resources
to be affected by execution and after completion of works.
The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment during the course of the
construction of the works. He shall abide by all prevalent laws, rules and regulations governing
pollution and environmental protection.
The Contractor shall prohibit employees from unauthorized use of explosives, poaching wildlife and
cutting trees. The Contractor shall be responsible for the action of his employees.
The Contractor is expected to arrange and execute the W orks in such a way that existing
environmental conditions are not deteriorated. Borrow pits and dumping sites used by the contractor
shall be reinstated at his own cost by grass and/or tree plantation.
Written instruction/approval must be given to seek from the Engineer regarding protection and
reinstatement of environment throughout the Contract period. Failure in compliance with Engineer's
instructions in respect of overall standard will lead to reduction or withhold of payment. Further, any
serious deterioration in the environment including pollution attributable to Contractor as determined by
the Engineer, may result in deduction of actual expenditures incurred in their reinstatement done
through separate agency, from any money due to the Contractor.
Environmental protection works, among others, shall also include the following:
(1) Borrow/Quarry Sites
The Engineer shall have the power to disallow the method of construction and/or the use of
any borrow/quarry area, if in his opinion, the stability and safety of the works or any adjacent
structure is endangered, or there is undue interference with the natural or artificial drainage,
or the method or use of the area will promote undue erosion.
All areas susceptible to erosion shall be protected as soon as possible either by temporary or
permanent drainage works. All necessary measures shall be taken to prevent concentration
of surface water and to avoid erosion and scouring of slopes and other areas. Any newly
formed channels shall be backfilled.
Borrows/quarries shall be located away from the population centers, drinking water intakes,
cultivable lands and drainage systems. The cutting of trees shall be minimized. Temporary
ditches and/or settling basins shall be dug to prevent erosion. The undesirable ponding of
water shall be prevented through temporary drains discharging to natural drainage channels.
Earthworks operations shall be strictly limited to the areas to be occupied b y the permanent
works and approved borrow areas and quarries unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Due provision shall be made for temporary drainage. Erosion and/or instability and/or
sediment deposition arising from earthwork operations not in accordance with the
Specifications shall be made good immediately by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall obtain the permission of the Engineer before opening up any borrows
pits or quarries. Such borrow pits and quarries may be prohibited or restricted in dim ensions
and depth by the Engineer where:
(i) They might affect the stability or safety of the works or adjacent property;
(ii) They might interfere with natural or artificial drainage or irrigation;

(iii) They may be environmentally unsuitable.
The Contractor shall not purchase or receive any borrow materials from private individuals
unless the source of such materials has been approved by the Engineer.
At least 14 days before he intends to commence opening up any approved borrow pit or
quarry, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his intended method of working and
restoration. These shall include but not be limited to:
(2) Disposal of Spoil and Construction Waste
Materials in excess of the requirements for permanent works and unsuitable materials shall
be disposed off in locations and in the manner as agreed with the Engineer. The locations of
disposal sites shall be such as not to promote instability, destruction of properties and public
service systems. Exposed areas of such disposal sites shall be suitably dressed and be
planted with suitable vegetation.
The Contractor shall plan his works in such a way that there is no spillage of POL products to
the surface or sub-surface water.
(3) Provision and Maintenance of Camps, Offices, Stores, Equipment Yards
Various works defined under this item are related to provision and maintenance of camps for
work person and employees, Contractor's site offices, stores equipment yards and
workshops. These camps must be adequate, rain-proof, spacious, airy and hygienic with
proper lighting and materials storage facilities. The area shall be kept neat and clean.
Space allocated for storage of materials such as cement, gabion wire, reinforcing wire etc.
shall in general be damp-free, rain-proof and away from petroleum products storage.
Permission may be granted by the Engineer to erect suitable camps within the right of way
free of charge, if such establishments do not cause obstructions to traffic, nuisance to works
execution and adverse effect to the environment.
Written information must be given to and approval be taken from the Engineer regarding
proper establishment and maintenance of such camps. Failure in compliance with Engineer's
instruction in respect of overall standard will lead to reduction or with holding of payment.
(4) Provision and Maintenance of Toilets
Provision of toilets for labor and employees shall be made to avoid public nuisance as well as
pollution of water courses and air. The Contractor shall construct suitable septic tanks and/or
soak pits along with room of pit-type latrines. Sufficient water must be provided and
maintained in the toilets. Proper methods of sanitation and hygiene should be employed
during the whole project duration.
(5) Provision of Potable Water
The Contractor shall supply potable water along with commencement of work to Contractor's
staff and work person both at camps and construction-sites. This arrangement shall be
enforced to avoid proliferation and generation of various water borne diseases.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer regarding sources, installation and operation of
supply of potable water within a week after the supply is commenced.
(6) Provision of First Aid/Medical Facilities
Provision of first aid/medical facilities shall be made along with commencement of work to
provide quick medical service to injured/sick work person, and employees. Services shall also
include on-the-way service and other arrangements required for taking them to the nearest
hospital in case of emergency.
The scope of work shall include service of at least one part-time experienced health
worker/health assistant with a minimum of once a week full time site visit as work assignment.
The Contractor shall also supply and provide adequate medicines and facilities required for
standard first aid.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer regarding the medical facility within a week after its
establishment and operation.
(7) Hazardous Materials
The Contractor shall not store hazardous materials near water surfaces. The Contractor shall
provide protective clothing or appliances when it is necessary to use some hazardous
substances.
High concentration of airborne dust resulting in deposition and damage to crops and water

resources shall be avoided. The Contractor shall take every precaution to control excessive
noise resulting in disruption to wildlife and human population.
Only controlled explosives methods shall be applied and used in construction works.
(10) Reinstatement of Environment
The Contractor shall arrange and execute works as well as related activities in such a way
that environmental conditions are reinstated. He may be required to carry out filling, removal
and disposal works along with plantation of grass and trees as directed by the Engineer at his
own costs at identified locations to reinstate environment.
Written instruction/approval shall be given by/sought from the Engineer regarding
reinstatement of environment both during and after completion of works and up to the end of
Defects Liability Period.
(11) Measurement and Payment
No separate measurement and payment shall be made for the works described in this
Clause.
108 SURVEY AND SETTING OUT
(1) During the period of Commencement of works the Contractor shall survey the construction
area and confirm the levels. He shall immediately notify the Engineer of any discrepancies
and shall agree with the Engineer any amended values to be used during the contract,
including replacements for any stations missing from the original stations.
(2) The Contractor shall check, replace and supplement as necessary the station points and
agree any revised or additional station details with the Engineer.
(3) All stations and reference points shall be clearly marked and protected to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
(4) The Contractor shall establish working Bench Marks tied with reference stations soon after
taking possession of the site. The coordinates and the elevations of the reference stations
shall be obtained from the Engineer. The working Bench Marks shall be near all
major/medium structure sites. Regular checking of these Bench Marks shall be made and
adjustments, if any, got agreed with the Engineer and recorded.
(5) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate establishment of the center lines based
on the Drawing and data supplied. The center lines shall be accurately referenced in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer. A schedule of reference dimensions shall be prepared
and supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer.
(6) The existing profile and cross-sections shall be taken jointly by the Engineer and the
Contractor. These shall form the basis for the measurements and payments. If in the opinion
of the Engineer, design modifications of the center lines and/or grade are advisable, the
Engineer shall issue detailed instructions to the Contractor and the Contractor shall perform
modifications in the field, as required, and modify the levels on the cross-sections accordingly.
109 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Such approved W orking Drawings as have been selected by the Engineer shall be correctly modif ied
for inclusion in the As-Built Drawings incorporating such variations to the W orks as have been ordered
and executed. Such drawings shall show the actual arrangement of all structures and items of
equipment installed under the Contract. The Contractor shall submit 1 (one) reproducible copy and 3
(three) prints of all As-Built Drawings clearly named as such to the Engineer for approval before
applying for the Taking-Over Certificate for the respective Section of the W orks.
During the course of the Works, the Contractor shall maintain a fully detailed record of all changes
from the approval to facilitate easy and accurate preparation of the As-Built Drawing. Irrespective of
the other contractual prerequisites no Section of the Works will be considered substantially completed
until the Engineer has approved the respective As-Built Drawings.
110 PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall supply negatives and un-mounted positive color prints of photographs, of such
portions of the works in progress and completed, as may be directed by the Engineer. The negatives
and prints shall not be retouched. The negative of each photograph shall be the property of the
Employer and shall be delivered to the Engineer with prints. No prints from these negatives shall be
supplied to anyone without the written permission of the Engineer. No additional payment will made
for this job.

111 SUPPLY OF VIDEO CASSETTES
The work consists of taking video film of important activities of the work as directed by the Engineer
during the commencement of the contract and editing them to a video film of playing time between 30
minutes and 180 minutes as directed by the Engineer. It shall contain narration of activities in English
and/or Nepali by a competent narrator. The edition of the video film and the script shall be approved
by the Engineer. The video cassettes shall be of acceptable quality and the film shall be capable of
producing color pictures.
Measurement
The measurement for this item shall be by number of sets of edited master cassettes supplied each
with four copies thereof.
Payment
The contract unit rate shall include all expenses for making video films with the help of a
professionally competent photographer, editing, narration and supplying the final edited master
cassette along with four copies thereof.
112 NOTES ABOUT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(1) Measurement
Unless specified, all measurements shall be based on “Principals of Measurement (Int.) for
works of constructions."
The tolerances specified in these Specifications are for evaluation of accuracies only based
on which the work shall be accepted or rejected. However, the measurement of the work
performed within the limits of tolerances shall be the measurement of actual work done in
place, if their dimensions are less than what have been specified or instructed by the
Engineer. If the actual work done in place is more than what has been specified or instructed
by the Engineer, but within the limit of tolerances, the measurement shall be the
measurement of the work what has been specified or instructed by the Engineer.
(2) Payment
Unless specified in the contract, the contract unit rates and/or prices for items as set out in the
Bill of Quantities are the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for:
Supply of all materials necessary to complete the item as per relevant specifications;
Use of materials, labors, tools, equipment, machines and other resources as per
need;
All handling, packing charges and transportation;
Cost of supervision, quality assurance, temporary and ancillary works;
Site commissioning;
Maintenance and making good;
All duties and obligations as set out in the contract
general works such as setting out, clearance of site before setting out and after
completion of works
the preparation of detailed work program
providing samples of various materials proposed to be used
the detailed Design and Drawing of temporary works
testing of materials
any other details as required by the contract
cost of all operations like storing, erection, moving into final position, etc. necessary
to complete and protect the work till handing over to the Employer;
the cost for safeguarding the environment
All incidental costs, not covered under above stated.
Where the Bill of Quantities does not include the items mentioned in Section 100, no separate
payment shall be made for such works. The costs in connection with the execution of the
works specified herein shall be considered to be included in the related items of other works
specified in the Bill of Quantities or shall be considered to be incidental to the works specified.
Items specified in this Section and included in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid at the

contract unit rates as agreed and shown in the Bill of Quantities.
113 NATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Certain Specifications issued by various national or other widely recognized bodies are
referred to in these Specifications. Such Specifications shall be defined and referred to as
National Specifications.
The Contractor may propose that the materials and workmanship be defined in accordance
with the requirements of other equivalent National Specifications and he may execute the
works in accordance with such National Specifications as may be approved by the Engineer.
A copy of the National Specification, together with its translation into the English language if
the National Specification is in another language, shall be submitted to the Engineer along
with the request for its adoption.
In referring to National Specifications, the following abbreviations are used:
NS Nepal Bureau of Standards and Metrology
IS Indian Standards
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
BS British Standards
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
ISO International Organization for Standardization
EN European Norm
NFP French Norm
Along with the commencement of the contract, the Contractor shall provide in his site office at
least one complete set of all National Specifications referred to in these Specifications, if they
are for the Sections applicable to the works. This set shall be made available for use by the
Engineer.
114 EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS
Wherever reference is made in these Specifications to specific standards and codes to be
met by the materials, plant, and other supplies to be furnished, and work to be performed or
tested, the provisions of latest current edition or revision of relevant standards and codes in
effect shall apply. Other authoritative standards which ensure a substantially equal or higher
performance than the specified*,-standards and codes shall be accepted subject to the
Engineer's prior review and approval. Differences between the standards specified and the
proposed alternative standards shall be fully described by the Contractor and submitted to the
Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Engineer’s
approval. In the event that the Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not
ensure substantially performance, the Contractor shall comply with the standards and codes
specified. No payment shall be made for adoption of higher standards.
115 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
(1) Units of Measurement
The Symbols for units of measurement are used in these Specifications as they are given
below.
M micron = mx 10
mm millimeter
m meter
km kilometer
sq. mm. or mm 2 square millimeter
sq.m. or m 2 square meter
sq. km. or km 2 square kilometer
ha hectare

cu. m. or m 3 cubic meter
lit or I liter

rad radian
°C degrees Celsius
kg kilogram
g gram = kgx10-3
mg milligram = kg x 10'6
mg/l milligram per liter
t ton = kg x 103
kg/m 3 kilogram per cubic meter
t/m 3 ton per cubic meter
N Newton
N/m 2 Newton per square meter
Lin. m Linear meter
Max Maximum
Min Minimum
Symbols of other units, if not covered above, shall be as per SI system set out in ISO 31/1.
(2) Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in these Specifications.
ACV Aggregate Crushing Value

BOQ Bill of Quantities
CR Crushing Ratio
dia Diameter
DUDBC Department of Urban Development & Building Construction
DOR Department of Roads.
hr Hour
LS Linear Shrinkage
MC Moisture Content
MDD Maximum Dry Density
min Minute
no Number (units), as in 6 no.
No Number (order) as in No 6
OMC Optimum Moisture Content
OPC Ordinary Portland Cement
PI Plasticity Index
PL Plastic Limit
PM Plasticity Modulus (PI x % passing 0.425 mm sieve)
POL Petrol, Oil & Lubricant
ROW Right of W ay
SE Sand Equivalent
sec Second
SG Specific Gravity
SI International Standard Units of Measurements
SSS Sodium Sulphate Soundness test, loss on 5 cycles
STV Standard Tar Viscosity
TS Tensile Strength

UC Uniformity Coefficient
UCS Unconfined Compressive Strength
VIM Voids in Mix
w/c W ater cement ratio
wt W eight
% Percent
(3) Terminology
The term" the Specifications" shall be construed as the Standard Specification and the Special
Specification all together.
(4) The Sections, Clauses and/or Sub-clauses mentioned in these Specifications deem to apply
those of these Specifications only, if otherwise not specified.
116 PROGRAM
The Contractor shall provide all information needed for fulfillment of the program and required in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract including the sequence in which he intends to work
including implementation of quality assurance plan. If the Contractor requests a change in the
sequence and such change is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall have no claim as per
the Conditions of Contract for delay arising from such revisions to the program.
The program for the construction and completion of the works shall be established using CPM/PERT
techniques or equivalent. The program shall be detailed enough to give, in addition to construction
activities, detailed network activities for the submission and approval of materials, procurement of
critical materials and equipment, fabrication of special products/equipments if any and their installation
and testing, and for all activities of the Engineer that are likely to affect the progress of work. The
Contractor shall update all activities in accordance with the Conditions of Contract on the basis of the
decision taken at the periodic site review meetings or as directed by the Engineer.
The program shall also include the Contractor's general requirements for any road closures pursuant
to Clause 102 to be agreed in principle with the Engineer. Such agreement shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to obtain specific approval for each closure or series of closures.
Any proposal for night working shall also be stated in the program.

CHAPTER 2
200 SITE CLEARANCE
201 CLEARING
(1) Scope
This Section covers the removal of topsoil, vegetation, boulders of size up to 0.25 cu.m,
surface obstructions, and demolition and removal of structures including their basements (if
any) not directly associated with or incidental to any excavation necessary for the construction
of the works covered by the contract. Conservation of the top soil and flora is also covered
under this section. The prepared surface shall be finished to line, grade and slope suitable
and as required by the Engineer.
All material from site clearance shall be the property of the Employer and depending on its
nature shall, as directed by the Engineer, be either
a. Stockpiled for future reuse.
b. disposed by controlled burning.
d. disposed by tipping or side casting with all lift within 30m.
Topsoil, referred to in this Clause shall mean the top 100 mm layer of soil with roots and
organic matter, which is capable of vegetation support.
(2) Description of Work
(a) Clearing
Clearing shall consist of the cutting, removing and disposal of all trees, bushes, shrubs, grass,
weeds, other vegetation, anthills, rubbish, fences, top organic soil not exceeding 150 mm in
thickness and all other objectionable material, resulting from the clearing and grubbing. It
shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon or
otherwise obstruct the work.
The moving of a certain amount of soil or gravel material may be inherent to or unavoidable
during the process of clearing and no extra payment shall be made for this. Clearing shall
include the removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 m3 in size exposed or lying on the
surface.
(b) Grubbing
In the site all trees up to 300 mm girth, stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of not
less than 900 mm below the finished level and a minimum of 500 mm below the original
ground level whichever is lower.
Except in borrow areas the cavities resulting from the grubbing shall be backfilled with
approved material and compacted to a density not less than the density of the surrounding
ground.
(c) Conservation of Top Soil
Where suitable topsoil exists within the limits of the area to be cleared and grubbed, the
Contractor shall, if ordered by the Engineer, remove the topsoil together with any grass and
other suitable vegetation. If not used immediately, the topsoil shall be transported and
deposited in stockpiles for later use.
(d) Conservation of Flora
Where provided for in the contract, certain designated flora encountered in the road reserve
and borrow areas shall be carefully protected by the Contractor. In his tendered rate for Site
Clearance, he shall include for the careful removal and planting of the flora in a protected and
fenced-off area and, on completion of the road, for the
replanting of the flora in suitable positions in the road reserve in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions.
(3) Execution of Work
(a) Areas to be Cleared and Grubbed
Stumps, embedded logs, roots and all other vegetation growth and accumulated rubbish of
whatsoever nature and all other objectionable material shall be completely removed to a
depth as specified in Sub-clause 201 (2) (a) and (b).

Normally the portions of the road reserve that fall within the limits of the road prism, as well as
certain borrow areas shall be cleared and/or grubbed. W here the road reserve is to remain
unfenced, the full width of the road reserve shall be cleared and/or grubbed except for such
trees designated by the Engineer to be left standing and uninjured.
The Contractor shall mark the boundaries of the area for clearing and grubbing and seek the
approval of the Engineer before commencement of the work. The Engineer shall designate in
detail the exact areas to be cleared and grubbed and the time at which it shall be done.
(b) Cutting of Trees
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent damage to structures and
other private or public property. If necessary, trees shall be cut in sections from the top
downwards. The branches of trees to be left standing shall be trimmed so as not to intrude
into a space of 7 m above the roadway.
Such individual trees as the Engineer may designate and mark in white paint shall be left
standing and uninjured. In order to minimize damage to trees that are to be left standing,
trees shall be felled towards the center of the area being cleared, if so required by the
Engineer.
Permission for cutting trees must be obtained from the competent authority who may require
that trees be numbered, measured and marked in the presence of officials from that authority.
Cutting of such trees shall then be carried out by the Contractor and the timber stored at
designated locations within the Right of W ay.
Felling and cutting of trees on the site and pilling them off the site shall conform to the
requirements of the competent authority.
All tree trunks and branches in excess of 150 mm in diameter shall be cleaned off, secondary
branches cut into suitable length and stacked at sites indicated by the Engineer. Such timber
shall not be used by the Contractor for any purpose and shall remain the property of the
Employer.
All timber except such timber as can be used and all brush, stumps, roots, rotten wood and
other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be completely removed from
within the Right of W ay.
(c) Dealing with Anthills
Where anthills are encountered within the limits of the road prism, they shall be excavated to
a depth of not less than 750 mm below the finished road level and the material carted to spoil.
Cavities resulting from the clearance of anthill material shall be backfilled with approved
material and compacted to a density not less than that of the surrounding ground.
Where directed by the Engineer, the area covered by anthills shall be treated, after
excavation and before backfilling of cavities, with an approved ant control chemical. Payment
for such treatment shall be made in the manner specified in the contract.
(d) Disposal of Material
Material obtained from clearing and grubbing shall be disposed off in borrow pits or other
suitable places and be covered up with soil or gravel as directed by the Engineer. The burning
of combustible material shall not, normally, be permitted and may only be done with the prior
written approval of the Engineer.
Where fences have to be taken down, fencing wire shall be neatly wound into reels and all
such wire, together with all fence posts and other serviceable material from structures, etc.,
shall be stacked at sites indicated by the Engineer.
(e) Re-clearing of Vegetation
When portions of the road reserve, borrow or other areas have been cleared in accordance
with the Specifications, but in the course of time, vegetation grows again during construction,
the Engineer may, if he considers it necessary, order that the area be re-cleared.
Before the bottom layer of the embankment is m ade, the Contractor shall grub up and remove
any vegetation that may in the meantime have grown on the surfaces previously cleared and
grubbed.
Such re-clearing of areas previously cleared includes the removal and disposal of grass,
shrubs and other vegetation in the same manner as for the first clearing operation. No
separate payment shall be made for re-clearing of vegetation.

(4) Measurement
Clearing and grubbing executed as per this Specification shall be measured in square meter.
Cutting trees including removal of stumps and their roots of girth above 300 mm and
backfilling to required compaction shall be measured in number according to the sizes given
below:
a Above 300 mm to 600 mm.
b Above 600 mm to 900 mm.
c Above 900 mm to 1800 mm.
d Above 1800 mm.
For this purpose girth shall be measured at a height 1 meter above ground.
Cutting of trees up to 300 mm girth including removal of stumps and roots and backfilling of
holes with compaction shall not be measured separately.
(5) Payment
Clearing and grubbing and cutting trees shall be paid at their respective contract unit rates
which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112. The
contract unit rate for cutting of trees of girth above 300 mm shall also include handling ,
salvaging, piling and disposing off the cleared materials with all leads and lifts.
(6) Measurement
Prior to commencement of dismantling, the work of dismantling structures shall be measured
in the units given below:
Type of W ork Unit

Dismantling brick/stone masonry/ concrete (plain and reinforced) cu. m.
Dismantling gabion cu. m
Dismantling steel structures T
Dismantling timber structures cu. m
Dismantling pipes, guard rails, kerbs and gutters r. m
Utility services Lump sum
Pavement cu. m
Associated works like disposal, stockpiling, marking and numbering, etc. shall not be
measured separately.
(7) Payment
The various dismantling works shall be paid at their respective contract unit rates which shall
be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and for the cost of
all operations involved for completion of this item.

CHAPTER 3
300 QUALITY CONTROL
301 SCOPE
This Section covers the Quality Control System and procedures, Quality Assurance Plan, program of
tests, trials, and general procedures for acceptance as well as laboratory arrangements and related
facilities which are required for the selection and control of the quality of materials and workmanship.
302 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR THE QUALITY OF THE WORKS
All materials incorporated and all workmanship performed shall be strictly in conformity with the
requirements of the Specifications and the Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the works
in the entire construction within the contract.
The Contractor shall provide, use and maintain on the Site, throughout the period of execution of the
contract, a laboratory with adequate laboratory equipment operated by competent staff for carrying
out tests required for the selection and control of the quality of materials and for the control of
workmanship in accordance with these Specifications. The list of laboratory equipment to be procured
and laboratory facilities to be provided shall be as per clause 308. The Contractor shall assume that
tests shall be required on all materials to be used in the works and on all finished works or part of
works.
303 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM
The Quality Control System comprises the methods, procedures and organization for the Quality
Control of the works. The Contractor shall implement the Quality Control System in the following
sequences:
(1) Sequence
a) Compliant testing for materials including laboratory trials,
b) Compliant testing for methods and equipment prior to the commencement of the
work, including site trials or trials sections,
c) Control testing during construction,
d) Acceptant testing on completed works or parts of the works.
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary tests and shall report to the Engineer the results
of such tests before submitting materials and/or finished works or part of works to the
Engineer for approval in accordance with this Specification. In certain circumstances, tests
may be carried out at the place of manufacture as per the Conditions of Contracts.
For satisfying himself about the quality of the works, quality control tests shall be conducted
by the Engineer himself or by any other agencies deemed fit by the Engineer. Additional tests
may also be conducted where in the opinion of the Engineer such tests are needed.
Before commencement of the work, the Contractor shall demonstrate a trial run of all
construction equipment for establishing their capability to achieve the laid down Specifications
and tolerances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(2) The supply, testing and monitoring shall be in compliance with a Quality Assurance Plan,
Clause 304 and the provisions in the contract.
304 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, the Quality Assurance Plan
(QAP) which shall be based on the detailed Program of the W orks as per Clause 116 of these
Specifications.
The Quality Assurance Plan shall include the following:
(1) The Quality Control Schedule Comprising of:
a) The recapitulative test schedule and testing program detailing the list of tests for
compliance, laboratory trials, site trials and trials Sections, construction control tests
and their frequencies, tests for acceptance of the completed works with their dates.
b) Recapitulative list of "critical" acceptance testing procedures, for equipment or parts
of the works which corresponds to the tasks on the Critical Path according to the
construction Program.
c) Estimate of the number of tests to be carried out, list and number of appropriate

equipment to conduct them, list of tests to be conducted outside the site laboratory, if
any, identification of the outside laboratory where proposed to carry out the test.
d) List of staff assigned to the laboratory, their position and responsibilities in the quality
control procedures, their qualification and experience, general description and
detailed organization of the laboratory activities.
(2) The list of sources of materials and/or of manufactured articles, their main characteristics,
their identification mode as provided by the supplier when required; the program of supply
and procurement of material and/or manufactured articles in accordance with the Program
pursuant to Clause 116.
(3) The list of tests and quality control procedures to be implemented by the Sub-contractors, if
any, pointing out the "critical" acceptance testing procedures relating to the Sub-contracted
works, which correspond to the tasks on the Critical Path included in the Sub-contracted
works.
The Contractor shall implement the Quality Control in compliance with the approved QAP.
The Engineer's approval of the QAP shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility of
the quality of the W orks as per the Conditions of Contract and these Specifications nor shall
the Engineer's approval of the QAP exempt the Contractor of any procedure to inform the
Engineer in writing or request for the Engineer's approval or re-approval as specified in the
Conditions of Contract and/or in these Specifications
The Contractor shall monitor and update the QAP on the basis of the decisions taken at the
periodic review meetings or as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with the program
of the works as per Clause 116 and the Conditions of Contract.
305 TESTING PROCEDURES AND SET OF TESTS
For ensuring the quality of the work, the materials and the workmanship shall be subjected to testing
in accordance with procedures, sets of tests and frequencies as specified in Section 400 and
respective Sections of these Specifications. The specified testing frequencies are not restrictive. The
Engineer shall direct for the tests to be carried out as frequently as deemed necessary that the
materials and workmanship comply with their Specifications.
Sets of tests to be carried out on the materials and the workmanship as specified in these
Specifications are recapitulated in Clause 310. W here no specific testing procedure is mentioned in
the Specifications, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted engineering practice or
directions of the Engineer.
306 LABORATORY TRIALS TO CONFIRM COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Concrete
Laboratory trials for concrete mixes as specified in Clause 600 shall be carried out by the
Contractor to demonstrate that the composition of the mixes proposed for the concrete meets
the requirements of the Specifications.
The compositions of concrete mixes which meet the specified requirements and are accepted
by the Engineer shall be then used in the site trials carried out in accordance with Clause 307.
307 SITE TRIALS OR TRIALS SECTIONS
(1) Concrete
Site trials for concrete mixes as specified in Clause 600 shall be carried out by the Contractor
to demonstrate the suitability of his mixing equipment. During the site trials, compliance with
the Specifications for weighing equipment, storage of ingredients, means of transport for
concrete, placing, compaction and curing shall be checked by the Engineer.
During the site trial a full scale sequence including placing and compaction of concrete shall
be carried out on a part of the works which will represent particular difficulties due to the
presence of reinforcement, obstructions or others.
The Contractor shall allow in his program for conducting the site trials and for carrying out the
appropriate tests, including the time required to obtain compressive strength test results at 28
days. The Contractor shall inform in writing the Engineer at least two weeks before the date
he proposes to use the concrete mixes in the site trials with all relevant data including the trial
program, the results of the laboratory trial tests for the proposed concrete mixes and
compliance tests results of all constituents i.e. cement, aggregates, water and admixtures, if

any.
(2) Other Works and Equipment
Site trials for Pre-stressed Concrete W orks, Painting of Structural Steelwork etc. are detailed
in the relevant Sections of these Specifications.
Approval of the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a site trial shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities to comply with the requirements of these Specifications
308 CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
Quality Control procedure are detailed in the relevant Sections of these Specifications
309 ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR COMPLETED WORKS OR PART OF WORKS
Acceptance tests for other works and equipment are detailed in the relevant Sections of these
Specifications.
310 RECAPITULATIVE SCHEDULE OF TESTS
the tests to be carried out and their frequency for the quality control of the works are detailed in the
relevant Sections of these Specifications.
The following Table 300.1 recapitulates the testing schedule for the main t ypes of works.
T ABLE 300.1: TESTING SCHEDULE
PART OR COMPONENT OF THE Section/ TESTS FREQUENCY
WORKS Clause No
CONCRETE 600 •Cement: Acceptance tests: •Conservative samples for each

MATERIALS supply and not less than every
200t or part of it.
• Testing in case of non compliance
CONTROL TESTS: Chemical
of the mixes or storage on site for
composition Physical properties
longer than 1 month
•Aggregates:
•Sub-clause 603 (5)
Acceptance tests:
•Each delivery and every 100 t or part
CONTROL TESTS: of it for fine aggregate and 250 t or
Grading part of it for coarse aggregate
Silt & clay content
Organic Impurities
Chloride content, sulphate content, •As frequently as required.
Alkali reactivity
Water, Admixtures •Sub-clause 603 (7) and (8)
CONCRETE • LAB. TRIALS • •Sub-clause 600 (3) • Sub-clause
SITE TRIALS • Control tests 600 (4) •Early works: every 6 m3 of
Compressive strength each class. When compliance is
established: every 20 m3 or part of it.
REINFORCEMENT: • Clause 614
BRICKWORKS FOR 700 • Quality of Bricks • As required

STRUCTURES
• Quality of cement and sand
• Control tests Compressive
MATERIALS MORTAR strength of mortar • Every 10 m3of brick work or part
of it.

800 • Quality of cement and sand • As required
MASONRY FOR
• Control tests Compressive • Every 10m3 of masonry of part of it
STRUCTURES
strength of mortar
MATERIALS • Dismantling of masonry (1 m_1 • Every 30m3of masonry or part of it
MORTAR m)
311 CONTRACTOR'S LABORATORY

(1) Laboratory Building
The Contractor shall on his own make provide and maintain a site laboratory. Such laboratory
shall have a minimum total area of 60 m 2 appropriately partitioned to house various laboratory
instruments/equipment, office, store, and toilet. It shall have adequate electrical connections
(power plugs, switches) necessary to operate the equipment in the laboratory.
The laboratory shall be new prefab building at site constructed of GI sheets and pipes/angles.
The floor of the laboratory shall however be of 100 mm M15/20 concrete and the minimum
height 3 m. The Contractor shall submit the design of the prefab material building for approval
of the Engineer prior to its construction.
S.No Description unit quantity
1 Construction of prefab building construction as per sqm 100

drawing.
2 Electricity supply as per requirement month 24-36
3 Hot and cold water supply as per requirement. month 24-36
4 Internet 25Mbps 24 hrs month 24-36
5 gas as per requirement month 24-36
Alternatively, it may also be constructed from shipping containers modified suitably to the
Engineer's satisfaction for the purpose.
This laboratory shall be part of the Temporary W orks and will be the property of the client on
completion of the W orks.
(2) Measurement
Measurement for the provision of site laboratory will be on a monthly basis.
(3) Payment
Payment for work will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the BOQ.
Payment for the works shall be full and final compensation for all material, labor, and
equipment (including land rent if any) to complete the works as specified.
312 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT AT SITE
The equipment for the site laboratory and field control tests shall be provided, installed, operated and
maintained by the Contractor. The equipment, material, chemical reagents may also be used by the
Engineer to conduct tests according to his Quality Check Plan. Testing frequency (both laboratory and
field control) shall be developed in the Quality Assurance Plan of the Contractor and Quality Check
Plan of the Engineer.
The following items of laboratory equipment shall be provided in the laboratory, as a minimum,
however, this does not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to equip the laboratory with all
equipment needed to perform the full range of tests required by the specification.
T ABLE 300.2: L ABORATORY EQUIPMENT/FIELD CONTROL TESTING APPARATUS FOR CEMENT M ASONRY
AND CONCRETE WORKS
S.N. Lab Equipment Quantity unit
General
1 Oven18x18x18" Aluminum Chamber Unilab 1 nos
2 Platform balance 300 kg 1 nos

3 Electronic Balance Model CH30R11 30kgx5gm OHAUS 1 nos
Electronic Balance Model CT6000 Capacity 6010x0.5gm
4 1 nos
OHAUS
Electronic Balance Model NDB110 Capacity 2100x0.1gm
5 1 nos
OHAUS
6 Water bath serological 2 rack solar 1 nos
7 Mercury Thermometer 2500C 2 nos
8 Dial Thermometer 4000C 2 nos
9 Mercury Thermometer 500C 2 nos
Glassware: containers and small tools including;
10 Wet and Dry Thermometer 1 nos
11 Spatulas 200mm 2 nos
12 Non Vacuum Dissicator 200mm 2 nos
GI Tray
30x30x7.5 6 nos
13
40x40x7.5 6 nos
60x60x7.5 6 nos
14 Aluminum Moisture Container 75x50mm 50 nos
15 Rubber Mallet 1 nos
16 Aggregate Steel Scoop (690*300*100mm) 1 nos
17 Aluminium Scoop (125*200*75mm) 1 nos
18 Guaging Trowel 2 nos
19 S.S Bowlb 2 Lit 2 nos
20 Volumetric Flasks
1000ml 2 nos
500ml 2 nos
250ml 2 nos
21 Measuring Cylinders
1000ml 3 nos
500ml 2 nos
250ml 2 nos
22 Beakers
1000ml 2 nos
500ml 2 nos
250ml 3 nos
23 Evaporating Disc 100mm 3 nos
24 Vernier Caliper 150mm 1 nos
25 Steel Ruler 300mm 1 nos
26 Pairs of heat resistant Aesbestos handgloves 2 nos
27 Set of sampling tools all materials 1 nos
28 Set of crowbar, pick and spade 2 nos
29 Gunnybags and plastic bags 100 nos
GI Sieve 450mm dia Size; 75, 69, 50, 37.5, 31.5, 25, 20,
30 1 nos
14, 16, 12.5, 9.5, 6.3, 4.75, Lid and pan set of 15 pcs
Brass Sieve 200mm dia Size; 4, 2.8, 2.36, 2, 1.18mm,
31 1 nos
600, 425, 300, 150, 75 mic, Lid and pan set of 12 pcs
Dynamic Cone Penetrometer equipment complete with 2
32 1 nos
extra cones and 2 extension rods
34 Water Testing kit (set) 1 nos
35 Organic Content testing kit (set) 1 nos
36 Sample Splitters (Riffle boxes) 50 mm 1 nos
37 Liquid limit device with grooving tools and counter 1 nos
38 Glass Plate 400x600x6mm 2 nos
39 Specific Gravity Bottle 100ml 2 nos
Compaction Mould 100mm, 150mm and Rammer 2.5kg
40 2 nos
and 4 kg
41 Sand Pouring Apparatus 200mm 2 nos
42 Sand Pouring Apparatus 100mm 2 nos
43 Core Cutter Apparatus 1 nos
44 Aggregate Impact Value Test Apparatus 1 nos
45 Los Angeles Abresion Test Apparatus 1 nos
46 Aggregate Crushing Value Appartus 1 nos
47 Flakiness 1 nos
48 Elongation Test Gauge 1 nos
49 Standard Measure 30, 15 and 3 Lit 1 nos
50 Tamping Rod 1 nos
51 CBR Apparatus
CBR Load Frame - 1
Dial Guage 0.01.25mm - 2
Annular W eight 2.5kg - 3
Central Hole W eight 2.5kg - 3
CBR Mould 150mm - 3 1 set
Perforated Plate Brass - 3
Space Disc - 3
Penetration Piston - 1
Tripod – 3
Rammer 2.6kg - 3
52 Penetrometer with standard needle automatic 1 nos
53 Viscometer 1 nos
54 Standered spray trays 12 nos
55 Centrifuge Type land operated bitumen extractor 500ml 1 nos
56 3 m straight edge 1 nos
57 Camber board and spirit level 2 nos
Marshall Compaction Appartus, complete with all
58 1 nos
accessories(with 180 N Marshall Moulds)
59 Vicat Apparatus 1 nos
60 Slums Test Apparatus 1 nos
61 Cube Mould 150mm 18 nos
62 Cube Mould 70.6 mm 18 nos
Compression Strength Testing machine 100 tonne hand
63 1 nos
Operated
Sand equivalent test set, complete with graduate plastic
64 1 nos
cylinder, manual or mechanical shaker and stock solution
65 Curing tank for test cubes (2*2*0.75m) 1 nos
66 Heavy Duty W orking table (2.01.2X0.9 m) 1 nos
Equivalent Shelves and Racks, wash basin, and other
67 1 nos
facilities as shown in the drawing (Set)
Core cutter for asphalt (petrol engine fitted with diff
68 1 nos
sized(100/150 mm) core bits and sampler
Specific gravity apparatus test for asphalt core with
69 1 set
buoyancy balance of 5 kg capacity complete set
70 Filter paper for marshal and extractor test 1 set
Water bath (digital automatic temp controller) for marshal
71 1 nos
sample
Thermometer (Range up to2000C with sensitivity of
72 1 nos
2.50C)
73 Bitumen Laboratory Mixer inculding required accessories 1 set
74 Ductility Meter 1 set
75 Softening point (ring and ball) and others as required 1 set
Hiring one no of 1600 CC new brand four wheeler vehicle
for Quality control officer throughout project duration with
76 full time driver and fuel and maintenance all complete and 24 months
after project completion vehicle will be return to the
contractor as in existing condition.
After the completion of the Works, the laboratory equipment shall become the property of the client.
Laboratory and field control equipment anticipated for the W orks are listed in above Tables.
Measurement and Payment
Measurement and Payments for the work under Clause 309 will be made in relevant monthly
statement on the basis of lump sum price quoted in the BOQ. It shall be paid in the following manner:
- 50% after installation of the equipment in the site laboratory to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and
- the remaining 50% after 80% completion of the W orks.
The cost of execution of tests either in the laboratory or in the field shall be covered by the
Contractor's overhead included in unit rates of other items in the BOQ.
313 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MATERIAL AWAY FROM SITE
Some tests on construction material shall be conducted periodically off the site at reputable
institutions in Kathmandu as directed by the Engineer.
The frequency of tests shall be developed in the Quality Assurance Plan that shall also prescribe test
results and reporting formats. However, some details on the tests are listed tentatively below under
Table 300.3.
T ABLE 300.3: LIST OF TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED OFF-SITE TESTS
(Locations subject to the approval of the Engineer)
S.No. Description of Tests
1. UTM Tensile Test for Re-bar
2. Zinc Coating and Tensile test of GI wire
3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test
4. UTM tensile Test for Anchor Bar
5. Specific Gravity of Aggregates
The tests listed above are subject to the Contractor's Quality Assurance Plan approved by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall also determine the number of tests while executing the W orks.
The Contractor shall keep records of all tests in a format approved by the Engineer. Two copies of
any test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
Measurement
Measurement of work under this Clause shall be in number of tests fully executed to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
Payment
Payment will be made from the Provisional Sum set aside for the purpose and shall be full and final
compensation for all material, labor, and equipment to complete the works as specified.
314 SURVEY AND SETTING
All traverse stations and reference points shall be clearly marked and protected to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary assistance for checking the setting out,
agreement of levels and any other survey or measurement which the Engineer needs to carry out in
connection with the W orks during the entire period of Contract. Such assistance shall include:
- Provision of suitably qualified surveyors to work under the direction of the Engineer as

required.
- Provision of all necessary support for these surveyors including assistants, chainmen, labor,
survey equipment (theodolites, levels, etc.), hand tools, pegs, and other incidental material.
The survey equipment shall be of the quality approved by the Engineer.
315 USE OF THE CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY WORKS
Unless otherwise specified under the Contract, the Contractor shall allow the Employer, the Engineer
or the Nominated Subcontractor the use of temporary access, crossings and other Temporary W orks
at site insofar that such use is related with the W orks.
316 PROVIDE AND PLACE LARGE PERMANENT SIGNS AND MARKINGS
The Contractor shall provide and erect large permanent signs and markings in steel at locations as
directed by the Engineer.
The large signs shall be of the size as indicated in the Standard Drawings of Department of Roads
and shall be mounted and fixed in position as directed by the Engineer. The lettering, painting and
color configuration shall conform to Standards set by Department of Roads.
The signs and marking shall be erected by embedding them one meter in a 200 mm x 200 mm hole in
the ground. The bottom 600 mm shall be filled with river sand and the remaining with M15/37.5
concrete.
317 DAY WORK
Day work shall mean provisional sum payable to the Contractor for works executed on a daily or
hourly basis as instructed in writing by the Engineer. This item is categorized in three groups namely:
(i) Labor
(ii) Equipment
(iii) Material
The Engineer however shall have the right to obtain further information on the rates and if appropriate
to negotiate changes in the rates or demand new prices for additional equipment, staff, or material
before or after the award of the Contract.
The Engineer shall have the right to calculate new prices for Day work on the basis of rate analysis.
The hourly or daily rates of labor or equipment and the unit price for material submitted by the
Contractor shall deem to cover all expenses and shall be inclusive of overhead, taxes, and profit.
Non-working hours or idle time/down time of labor and equipment respectively shall not be considered
for payment.
318 REPORTS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit four copies of Progress Report on a monthly basis. The
Reports shall highlight the targeted and achieved progress, problems at site, and brief description of
the claims during the month and the Engineer's response, and other information relevant to the
Project. It shall be supplemented with necessary charts, tables, data, and at least 36 photographs.
On completion of the W orks, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Completion Report that shall
deal comprehensively on all aspects covered in the Monthly Report. Additional information such as
improvement in construction methods/techniques, lessons learnt from the Project, important
considerations for maintenance, etc. should also be highlighted.
319 SITE DIARY
The Contractor shall keep Site Diaries wherein full details of the work carried out during each day
shall be fully recorded. The diaries shall be available for inspection by the Engineer any time during
normal office hours. The Site Diaries shall include:
- W eather Conditions, rainfall/snowfall, and river water level
- Description, quantity, and location of work performed
- Shifts and working hours
- Number and category of workers working at site
- Plant in use and idle, or broken down

- Test carried out and results
- Inspection carried out by the Engineer

- Site instructions
- Visitors
- Accidents
Measurement and Payment
The cost for works under Sub-Clauses 314 and 316 shall be covered by the Contractor's overhead
included in unit rates of other items in the BOQ.

CHAPTER 4
400 MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
401 SCOPE
This section covers the general requirements relating to materials, the specific requirements for basic
materials, the tests and methods of testing which are required for the selection and quality control of
materials.
402 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
The materials supplied and used in the works shall comply with the requirements of these
Specifications. They shall be new, except as provided elsewhere in the contract or permitted by the
Engineer in writing. The materials shall be manufactured, handled and used skillfully to ensure
completed works to comply with the contract.
403 SOURCES OF MATERIALS
The use of any one kind or class of material from more than one source is prohibited, except by
written permission of the Engineer. Such perm ission, if granted, shall set forth the conditions under
which the change may be made. The sources or kinds of material shall not be changed without written
permission of the Engineer. If the product of any source proves unacceptable, the Contractor shall
make necessary arrangements for the supply of acceptable material. Any claims for compensation
associated with such arrangements or changes shall not be considered, unless the source of the
unacceptable material is designated in the contract as a source of material.
When any manufactured product, either new or used, is to be furnished by the Employer, the location
at which such material shall be delivered to the Contractor shall be designated in the contract. In such
cases, the Contractor shall haul the materials from the designated delivery point to the point of use.
The compensation for such hauling shall be included in the contract unit rate for placing the materials
in the finished work.
404 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS
Final inspection and acceptance of materials shall be made only at the site of the work. The Engineer
reserves the right to sample, inspect, and test the materials throughout the duration of the works and
to reject any materials which are found to be unsatisfactory.
A preliminary inspection of materials may be made at the source for the convenience and
accommodation of the Contractor, but the presence of a representative of the Engineer shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing materials complying with their Specifications.
The representative of the Engineer shall have free entry at all times to those parts of any plant which
concern production of the materials ordered.
405 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES
(1) Order for Materials and Manufactured Articles
The Contractor shall, before placing any order for materials and manufactured articles for
incorporation in the W orks, submit to the Engineer the names of the firms from whom he
proposes to obtain such materials and manufactured articles, giving for each firm a
description of the materials and manufactured articles to be supplied, their origin, the
manufacturer's specification, quality, weight, strength and other relevant details. The
Contractor shall submit the samples of such materials and manufactured articles when
requested by the Engineer and when appropriate, manufacturer's certificates of recent test
carried out on similar materials and manufactured articles shall also be submitted.
(2) Storage
All materials and manufactured articles shall be stored on site in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall carefully protect all work, materials and manufactured articles
from the weather and vermin.
(3) Test Certificates
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to him all Test Certificates from
the suppliers/manufacturers of the materials and/or manufactured articles to be used for the
contract. Such certificates shall certify that the materials and/or manufactured articles
concerned have been tested in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. All

Test results shall be enclosed along with such certificates. The Contractor shall provide
adequate means of identifying the materials and/or manufactured articles delivered on the site
with the corresponding certificates.
406 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
All materials not conforming to the requirements of the contract shall be rejected whether in place or
not. They shall be removed immediately from the site unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Even after rectification of the defects, no rejected material shall be used in the work unless approved
by the Engineer in writing. Upon failure of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the
Engineer given under this Clause, the Engineer shall have authority to cause the removal and
replacement of rejected material and to deduct the cost thereof from any monies due to the
Contractor.
407 TRADE NAMES AND ALTERNATIVES
For convenience in designation in the contract, certain articles or materials to be incorporated in the
work may be designated under a trade name or the name of a manufacturer and his catalogue
information. The use of an alternative article or material which is of equal or better quality and of the
required characteristics for the purpose intended shall be permitted, subject to the following
requirements:
(1) The proof as to the quality and suitability of alternatives shall be submitted by the Contractor.
He shall also furnish all information necessary as required by the Engineer. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability of alternative articles or materials and
his decision shall be the final and binding upon the Contractor.
(2) W henever the specifications permit the substitution of a similar or equivalent material or
article, no tests or action relating to the approval of such substitute material shall be made
until the request for substitution is made in writing by the Contractor accompanied by
complete data as to the equality of the material or article proposed. Such request shall be
made well in advance to permit approval without delaying the work.
408 FOREIGN MATERIALS
Materials which are manufactured, produced or fabricated outside Nepal shall be delivered at a point
in Nepal as specified in the contract where they shall be retained for a sufficient time to permit
inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts
or events occurring outside Nepal and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to deliver materials
obtained from outside Nepal to the point of delivery in Nepal. The Contractor shall supply the facilities
and arrange for testing required at his own cost. All testing by the Contractor shall be subject to
witnessing by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a "Certificate of Compliance" with the specifications from
the manufacturer, producer or fabricator of foreign material where required. In addition, certified mill
test reports clearly identifiable to the lot of material shall be furnished where required in these
Specifications or otherwise requested by the Engineer. W here structural materials requiring mill test
reports are obtained from foreign manufacturers, such materials shall be furnished only from those
foreign manufacturers who have previously established, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
sufficiency of their in-plant quality control, as deemed necessary by the Engineer or his
representative, to give satisfactory assurance of their ability to furnish material uniformly and
consistently in conformance with their Specifications. At the option of the Engineer, such sufficiency
shall be established whether by submission of detailed written proof thereof or through in-plant
inspection by the Engineer or his representative.
If the welding of steel for structural steel members or the casting and pre-stressing of pre-cast pre-
stressed concrete members is to be performed outside of Nepal, the following requirements shall
apply:
(1) Such fabrication shall be performed only within the plants and by fabricators who have
previously established, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that they have the experience,
knowledge, trained manpower, quality control, equipment and other facilities required to
produce the quality and quantity of the work required. At the option of the Engineer,
prequalification of the plant and fabricator shall be established either by the submission of
detailed written proof thereof or through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or his

representative, or both.
(2) The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for approval for such foreign

fabrication at the earliest possible time and in no case later than 60 calendar days in advance
of the planned start of fabrication. The application shall list the specific units or portion of a
work which shall be fabricated outside of Nepal.
(3) The Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, at least 20 calendar days in advance of
the actual start of any such foreign fabrication.
(4) All documents pertaining to the contract, including but not limited to, correspondence, tender
documents, working drawings and data shall be written in the English/Nepali language and all
numerical data shall use the metric system of units of measurement.
409 DEFINITION OF GENERAL TYPES OF MATERIALS
The following definitions shall apply to materials in this Section and other relevant Sections.
(1) "Topsoil" shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. It shall include all turf
acceptable for turfing.
(2) "Suitable Material" shall comprise all that is acceptable in accordance with the contract for
use in the works and which is capable of being compacted to form a stable fill having side
slopes as indicated in the Drawing. The material used in fill (except rock fill) shall not contain
rock fragments with dimensions of more than 75 mm.
(3) "Unsuitable Material" shall mean other than suitable material and shall include:
(a) Material from swamps, marshes or bogs;
(b) Peat, logs, stumps, perishable material, organic clays;
(c) Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
(d) Material in a frozen condition;
(e) Clay of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 45.
Materials stated above in d), if otherwise suitable shall be classified suitable when unfrozen.
(4) "W ell Graded Granular Material" consisting of gravel and/or sand shall conform to Clause
609.
(5) "Rock fall", coarse alluvial material shall be loose soils such as moraines, debris, or alluvial
material containing large blocks or large boulders. Individual blocks or boulders of hard
materials greater than 0.3m 3 each in volume, shall be classified as hard material.
(6) "Hard Material" shall mean any material which conform to the requirements of Sub-clause
903(4)
410 SIEVES
IS sieves shall be used for all tests. Based on IS-460 the standard sieves series shall be as follows:
125; 90; 75; 63; 50; 45; 40; 37.5; 31.5; 25; 22.4; 20; 19; 16; 12.5; 11.2; 10; 9.5; 8; 6.3 ;5.6; 4.75; 4.00;
2.8; 2.36; 2; 1.7; 1.4; 1.18; 1; 0.85; 0.71; 0.6; 0.5; 0.425; 0.400; 0.300; 0.250; 0.212; 0.180; 0.150;
0.125; 0.090; 0.075 mm.
411 SOILS AND GRAVELS
(1) Sampling and Samples
Sampling of soils and gravels shall be carried out as specified or as directed by the Engineer.
Samples shall be prepared for testing as indicated in IS 2720 part I, except that:
a) The mass (in g) of a sample required for sieve analysis is about 400D, D being the
maximum particle size (mm).
b) Sample containing particles larger than 19 mm size shall be prepared for compaction
and CBR tests as described hereunder, provided the proportion in weight of such
particles is less than 30% :
An adequate quantity of representative material shall be sieved over the 50 mm and 19 mm
sieve. The material passing the 50 mm sieve and retained on the 19 mm sieve shall be
weighed and replaced with an equal mass of material passing the 19 mm sieve and retained
on the 4.75 mm sieve. The material for replacement shall be taken from the remaining portion
of the main sample.
When preparing gravel samples, the aggregations of particles shall be broken with a wooden
or rubber hammer or pestle. Care shall be taken that no individual particles are crushed in the
operation.

(2) Standard Methods of Testing
Tests on soils and gravels shall be performed in accordance with the standard methods given
in Table 400.1
T ABLE 400.1: TESTS PROCEDURES APPLICABLE TO DISTURBED/UNDISTRIBUTED S AMPLES OF SOILS AND
GRAVELS
Tests Test procedure
Determination of:
i) Moisture Content IS 2720 Part 2 (Oven-drying method)
ii) Liquid Limit IS 2720 P a r t 5 ( C o ne P ene t r ometer or by C a sag r and e
Apparatus)
iii) Plastic Limit IS 2720 Part 5
iv) Plasticity Index IS 2720 Part 5
v) Linear Shrinkage IS 2720 Part 20
vi) Specific Gravity of Particles IS 2720 Part 3
vii) Particle Size Distribution IS 2720 Part 4
viii) Organic Matter Content IS 2720 Part 22
ix) Total Sulphate Content IS 2720 Part 27
x) pH Value IS 2720 Part 26 (Electrometric Method)
xi) Mica Content - Manual mineralogical counting
xii) Density-Moisture Content IS 2720 Part 7
relationship (2.5 kg rammer)
xiii) Density-Moisture Content IS 2720 Part 8
relationship (4.9 kg rammer)
xiv) California Bearing Ratio IS 2720 Part 16
xv) Sand Equivalent IS 2720 Part 37 ( Mechanical Shaker or Manual Sh a ker
method)
xvi) Field Dry Density IS 2720 Part 28/Part 29
xvii) Unconfined compression test IS2720 Part 10
xviii) Consolidation test IS2720 Part 15
xix) Direct shear test 1S2720 Part 13
xx) Triaxial test IS2720 Part 11,12
xxi) Hydrometer analysis IS 2720 Part 4
xxii) Vane shear test IS 2720 Part 30
It is further specified that:

a) W herever in the text of these Specifications and the Special Specification the term
"x% of the MDD (IS 2720 Part 27 or IS 2720 Part 28) is used it shall mean that a
standard of compaction shall be achieved such that the dry density of the compacted
material is x% of the maximum dry density determined from the respective tests
mentioned in Table 6.4. Samples for the compaction tests shall be taken before
compaction of the layers begins unless in the opinion of the Engineer the compactive
effort proposed or applied by the Contractor is such that the material characteristics
have changed in which case the samples for the tests shall be taken after all
compaction is complete.
b) Compaction tests: when the material is susceptible to crushing during compaction, a
separate and new sample shall be used in the determination of each point on the
moisture/density curve.
c) The dry density of material placed in the works shall be determined by the Sand
Replacement Method unless the Engineer directs to use a nuclear method or other
method. In the case of nuclear method, tests shall be done at least at the same

frequency required when using the Sand Replacement Method, but at each nuclear
densometer test location the average of three readings taken at positions rotated by
90° shall be used. A check/comparison test using the Sand Replacement Method
shall be carried out at 10 test interval.
Initial calibration of the nuclear density testing equipment shall be done by carrying out at
least fifty tests in parallel with the Sand Replacement Method for each different material
encountered. The check tests shall be used to update the initial calibration of the nuclear
density testing equipment.
412 STONE, AGGREGATE, SAND AND FILLERS
(1) Sampling and Preparation of Samples
Sampling shall be carried out as per ASTM-D75 and the samples shall be prepared in
accordance with IS 2386 or according to sampling procedures specified for the Standard
Methods of testing given in Table 400.2.
(2) Standards Methods of Testing
Tests on stone, aggregate, sand and filler shall be performed in accordance with the standard
procedures given in the Table 400.2.
T ABLE 400.2: TESTS PROCEDURES APPLICABLE TO STONE AGGREGATE AND FILLERS
Tests Test Procedure
Determination of:
i) Particle Size Distribution IS 2386 P arti
(Gradation)
ii) Clay, Silt, Dust in Aggregates IS 2386 Part 2

iii) Flakiness index IS 2386 P arti
iv) Specific Gravity IS 2386 Part 3
v) Moisture Content IS 2386 Part 3

vi) Bulk Density, Voids & Bulking IS 2386 Part 3
vii) Soluble Chloride Content BS812 Part 117

viii) Mica Content Manual mineralogical counting
ix) Water Absorption 1S2386 Part 3
x) Crushing Ratio Manual counting & weighing
xi) Los Angeles Abrasion IS 2386 Part 4
xii) AIV – ACV IS 2386 Part 4
xiii) Polished Stone Value IS 2386 Part 4
xiv) Degradability Test NFP94-067 ■
xv) Sodium Sulphate Soundness IS 2386 Part 5

xvi) Alkali Aggregate Reactivity Test IS 2386 Part 7
xvii) Deleterious Substances IS 2386 Part 2
xviii) Sand Equivalent IS 2720 Part 37
xix) Crushing Strength of stone IS 2386 Part 4
413 CEMENT
Ordinary and High Strength Portland Cement (OPC and HSPC), Portland Slag Cement (PSC),
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) shall be sampled according to IS 3535 and tested according to IS
4031.

Chemical and physical requirements for Ordinary Portland Cement, High Strength Portland Cement,
Portland Slag Cement and Portland Pozzolana Cement shall be in accordance with IS 269, IS 8112,
IS 12269, IS 455, IS 1489 respectively.
The requirements on their physical characteristics shall be as given in Table 400.3
T ABLE 400.3: REQUIREMENTS ON THE PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF CEMENT
S.N. Physical characteristics OPC /PSC HSPC Test Procedure
i) Fineness, m2/kg: (by Blaine's Air Permeability 225 225 IS-4031

method) Part 2
ii) Setting Time:
(a) Minimum Initial Setting Time (minutes) 45 45
IS 4031 Part 5
(b) Maximum Final Setting Time (minutes) 600 600
iii) Soundness by Lechatelier method, mm, 10 10 IS 4031 Part 3

Maximum
iv) Compressive Strength:
Minimum Average Compressive Strength of
three mortar cube(N/mm2)
(a) 3 days 16 27
(b) 7 days 22 37 IS 4031 Part 6
(c) 28 days 33 53
414 LIME
Limes shall be sampled and tested in accordance with BS 890 and shall comply with all requirements
specified therein.
Lime for treatment of road materials shall be Hydrated Calcium Lime or Quicklime and, unless
otherwise specified, shall comply with the requirements given in Table 400.4.
T ABLE 400.4: REQUIREMENTS OF LIME FOR TREATMENT OF ROAD M ATERIALS
S. No. Characteristics Hydrated lime Quicklime

i) Fineness Residue on 0.212 mm sieve - Maximum 1% 10% 10%
Residue on 0.075 mm sieve - Maximum 50%
>i) Chemical requirements Free lime content - 50% 60%

Minimum Hydrated lime content - Maximum 5%
415 LIME TREATED MATERIALS

(1) Sampling
Sampling and preparation of samples of lime treated material shall be carried out as specified
or as instructed by the Engineer except that:
Samples containing particles larger than 19 mm shall be prepared for compaction and CBR
tests as specified in Sub-clause 412 (1)b). (The fraction coarser than 19 mm shall be replaced
by an equal weight of material passing through 19mm sieve and retained on 4.75 sieve).
(2) Standard Methods of Testing
The tests on lime treated materials shall be performed in accordance with the Standard
methods given in Tables 400.1 and 400.5.

T ABLE 400.5: ADDITIONAL TESTS PROCEDURES APPLICABLE TO LIME TREATED M ATERIALS
Tests Test Procedure
Determination of: (i) Unconfined Compressive BS1924-Part2

Strength (UCS) (ii) Effect of immersion on BS 1924 -Part 2
UCS (iii) Lime Content BS 1924-Part 2
416 CONCRETE
Sampling and testing on concrete shall be carried out in accordance with the standard methods given
in the Table 400.6.
T ABLE 400.6: TESTS PROCEDURES APPLICABLE TO CONCRETE
Tests Test Procedures
Determination of:
(i) Air contents of fresh concrete BS 1881-106
(ii) Density of hardened concrete BS 1881-114
(iii) Compressive strength of concrete cubes BS 1881-116
(iv) Tensile splitting strength BS 1881-117
(v) Flexural strength BS 1881-118
(vi) Compressive strength of concrete cores BS 1881-120

(vii) W ater absorption BS 1881-122
(viii) Mixing and sampling fresh concrete in
Laboratory BS 1881-125
(ix) Normal curing of test specimens (20° C
method) BS 1881-111
(x) Accelerated curing of test specimens BS 1881-112
(xi) Making test cubes from fresh concrete BS 1881-108
Non destructive tests shall be carried out in accordance with the standard method and
recommendations given in Table 400.7 as and when required.
T ABLE 400.7: NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTS APPLICABLE TO CONCRETE
S.No. Tests References to Test Procedures

(i) Method of testing hardened concrete for other
than strength BS 1881-5
(ii) Guide to the use of non destructive methods of
test for hardened concrete BS 1881-201
(iii) Recommendation for surface hardened testing by
rebound hammer BS 1881-202
(iv) Recommendation for measurement of velocity of
ultrasonic pulses in concrete BS 1881-203
(v) Recommendation on the use of electromagnetic
cover meters BS 1881-204
(vi) Recommendation for the assessment of concrete
strength by near to surface tests. BS 1881-207

The test specimen s shall be cured at a temperature of 27°C ± 2°C. W ater to be used in concrete shall
be tested as specified in BS 3148.
The total chloride content, expressed as chloride ion, arising from all ingredients in a mix including
cement, water and admixtures shall not exceed the following limits, expressed as a percentage of the
weight of cement in the mix :-
For pre-stressed concrete, steam cured concrete or concrete containing sulphate resisting or super-
sulphated cement : 0.1 per cent
For any other reinforced concrete : 0.4 per cent
The total sulphate content expressed as SO3 of all the ingredients in a mix including cement, water
and admixtures shall not exceed 0.4 per cent by weight of the aggregates or 4.0 per cent of the weight
of the cement in the mix, whichever is the lesser.
417 REINFORCING STEEL
All reinforcement for use in the W orks shall be tested for compliance as specified in Clause 614 in a
Laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and two copies of each test certificate shall be supplied to the
Engineer. The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS 84 -2042 and NS 191-
2045. In addition to the testing requirements described above, the Contractor shall carry out additional
testing as instructed by the Engineer.
418 TESTING OF WELDS
(1) The tests shall be carried out by the methods described in BS 709. The following
requirements shall also be met with.
(a) General
In any aspect, the test results of welded joints shall not be inferior to the British Standard test
requirements for the parent material.
(b) Procedure Trials
(i) Tensile and Bend Test
Should any one of the weld joint pieces selected for transverse tensile and transverse and
longitudinal bend test fail to comply with the requirements applicable to the parent metal of
the joint, 2 additional test pieces shall be taken from the joint material represented by the test.
Both the test pieces shall comply with the requirements in order to qualify for the acceptance.
(ii) Charpy V-notch Tests
Should the average impact value obtained from any set of 3 Charpy V-notch tests on
specimens fail to comply with the requirements, 3 additional test pieces f rom the same
sample shall be tested. The average of the 6 test results shall comply with the test
requirements in order to qualify for acceptance.
(iii) Revised Procedures
In the event of failure to meet the requirements, the Contractor shall carry out further trials,
using revised procedures, and further tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(c) Production Tests
(i) Tensile and Bend Tests
Should any one of the weld joint test pieces selected for transverse tensile and transverse
bend tests fail to comply with the test requirements applicable to parent metal of the joint
represented by the test, additional specimens shall be taken from the same production test
plates and the test shall be repeated. Should any of the additional tests fail to comply with the
requirements, the joint shall be rejected.
(ii) Charpy V-notch Tests
Should the average impact value obtained from any set of 3 Charpy V-notch specimens
selected fail to comply with the test requirements, 3 additional test pieces from the same
production test plates shall be tested. Should the average of the 6 results fail to comply with
the test requirements the joint shall be rejected.
(iii) Re-welding and Re-Testing
In the event of failure to meet the test requirements the welded joint represented by the tests
shall be completely cut out. The joint shall then be re-welded and the test repeated.
(iv) Non-destructive Testing

A method of non-destructive testing agreed with the Engineer shall be used for the
examination of butt welds in tension members.
419 PAINTS FOR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
The Contractor shall submit the proposal to the Engineer about the paint system to be used in the
Works.
The system shall be defined at least by the following information, supported by the paint
manufacturer's data sheets:
Type of system, composition of each component,
Minimum thickness of each coat,
Drying time at 10°C and 20°C within a range a relevant hygrometric conditions, including
handling conditions, minimum and maximum time of overlap,
Type of painting method and thinner content, (airless spray, brush, roller etc.)
Thinner type,
Blending ratio,
Maximum time limit of use, by 75% of relative humidity and for a relevant range of
temperature and hygrometric conditions,
Ripening time for a relevant range of temperatures and at least for 20°C and 30°C.
Weather conditions constraint for painting and drying, including minimum and maximum
ambient temperature and temperature of surfaces to be painted.
420 BRICKS
Bricks shall conform to NS-1-2035 with the exceptions specified in Sub-clause 702(1).
421 MORTAR
Mortar shall comply with Sub-clause 702(2).
422 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES
Reinforced concrete pipes shall comply with the requirements of NS 80-2042/IS 458:1988.
423 HIGH DENSITY POLYTHENE PIPES
High density polythene pipes shall comply with the requirements of NS 40-2040.
424 GEOTEXTILES
Geotextiles used shall be made of polyethylene or polypropylene or polyester or similar fibers, either
woven or non-woven. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, the geotextiles shall:
a) sustain a load of not less than 10 kN/m at break and have a minimum failure strain of 10
percent when determined in accordance with BS: 6906 or shall have a grab tensile strength
more than 0.4 kN/m and grab elongation corresponding to this limit in accordance with ASTM
D4632.
b) have apparent opening size as shown on the Drawing. If no size is shown on the Drawing,
then the apparent size shall be 0.1 mm.
c) allow water to flow through it at right angles to its principal plane, in either direction at a rate of
not less than 50 liters/sq.m./sec. under a constant head of 100 mm, determined in
accordance with BS: 6906 (Part 3) or ASTM D4491, unless otherwise shown on the Drawing.
The flow rate determined in the test shall be corrected to that applicable to a temperature of
15°C using data on variation in viscosity of water with temperature.
d) have a minimum puncture resistance of 200 N when determined in accordance with ASTM D
4833.
e) have a minimum tear resistance of 350 N when determined in accordance with ASTM D
4533. Geotextiles used for drilled sub-surface drains shall be as specified in Clause 2405.
425 TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL WORKS
Timber used for structural works shall comply with IS:883.

426 MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES
Manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron and shall comply with IS: 1726-1991. For manholes

constructed in carriageway and shoulders, heavy duty circular covers and frames shall be used. In
footpaths, medium duty circular covers shall be used. In other locations light duty covers and frames
shall be used.
427 PRE-CAST CONCRETE CHANNELS
Pre-cast concrete channels, kerbs, edging, quadrants and gutters shall comply with the requirements
of IS: 5758-1984.
428 CAST IRON DRAINAGE GRATINGS
Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes shall comply with the requirements of IS: 5961 -1970.
429 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
If otherwise not specified in the contract, no separate measurement and payment shall be made for
sampling, samples and testing of materials, trials and construction control/process control testing. It
shall be deemed to have included in the rates of the relevant items for complying with the
requirements of this Section 400.

CHAPTER 5
500 EARTHWORKS
501 SCOPE
This Section covers the works related to the excavation for foundation, backfilling, excavation for
drains, etc. The Contractor shall examine the Site and ascertain for himself the nature thereof and the
types of materials to be excavated.
502 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(1) Earthwork includes two types of operations i.e. (i) earth excavation and disposal of the
excavated materials (ii) earth excavation and use of excavated materials. The use of
excavated materials may be in the form of backfilling, filling other areas as required.
Earth excavation and disposal implies excavation of all types of materials including part of the
structures below ground level except for otherwise specified, shaping the exposed surface of
excavation as specified or directed by the Engineer, removal, hauling and disposal of the
excavated material at the locations and in the manner as specified or directed by the
Engineer.
Excavation and filling implies excavation of materials and shaping the exposed surface of
excavation as stated above, removal, hauling and use of the excavated material at the
location and in the manner as specified or directed by the Engineer.
Excavation and disposal shall include:
(i) Excavation and disposal of any type of material indicated on the Drawing.
(ii) The excavation and disposal of existing surfacing,
(iii) Excavation and disposal of unsuitable materials.
(iv) Excavation for foundation and disposal of materials.
(2) The following definitions of earthwork materials shall apply to this and other Clauses of these
specifications, if otherwise not specified.
(i) "Topsoil" shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. It shall include
all turf acceptable for turfing.
(ii) "Rock material" shall comprise material, which in the opinion of the Engineer can be
removed either with drilling and blasting with explosives or continuous manual
chiseling or mechanical chipping with pneumatic tools.
(iii) "Common material" shall comprise all material that is not classified as rock material.
Common material shall include soil mixed with boulders that need not to be blasted.
(iv) "Suitable Material" shall mean all excavated material that can be used as construction
material in the W orks in accordance with these Specifications.
(v) "Unsuitable materials" shall mean material other than suitable material. Material from
swamps, marshes, bogs, organic material, silt, and clay or their mixture, discarded
top soil etc. in general are unsuitable material.
Classification of common and rock material made by the Engineer shall be final and binding
on the Contractor.
Measurement will be limited to the lines, grades, slopes, and dimensions shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Original lines and levels of surfaces for measurement of depth shall be determined by
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval before commencement of excavation
and will be arithmetic mean of representative levels taken at suitable intervals prior to the
execution of all earthworks.
(3) No excavated suitable material other than surplus to requirements of the contract shall be
removed from the site except on the direction of the Engineer. Should the Contractor be
permitted to remove suitable material from Site to suit his operational procedure, then he shall
make good at this own expense any consequent deficit of filling arising there from.
(4) Material in surplus to the total requirements of works, and all unsuitable materials shall,
unless the Engineer permits otherwise, be run to spoil dumps.
(5) W here the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials the

Contractor shall carry out the excavation in such a manner that the suitable materials are
excavated separately for use in the works without contamination by the unsuitable materials.
(6) The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the stockpiling of top-soil and/or suitable
material.
(7) At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not damaged by weather or traffic.
In the event of such damage, the Engineer may withdraw approval from the affected works
until the Contractor has carried out repairs to restore the works to their original condition.
Earthworks for preparation of plinth of building and mass excavation for preparation of formation level
are incorporated under this Clause. The item covers all depths and water conditions for common
material.
503 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION
1 Earthwork in excavation in the Formation:
Due to uneven topography of the Site, the leveled ground shall be prepared with the
formation level as indicated in the drawings or to such lesser or greater extent as the
Project Engineer may advice. Excavated earth shall or shall not be placed within the
premises of the project boundary. The Project Engineer may direct the Contractor to
place excavated earth at particular filling area or to be dispose off.
2 Earthwork in Excavation in Foundation:
Foundation trench shall be due to the exact width and depth and levels as indicated in the
drawings or to such lesser or greater extent as the Engineer may advice. Sides of trenches
shall be vertical. In case the soil does not permit vertical sides, the Contractor shall protect
side with timber shoring. Excavated earth shall not be placed within 1.5 meter of the edge of
the trench. The Project Engineer may direct the Contractor to place excavated earth at a
particular site up to 30 meter away from the building. The bottom of the trench shall be
perfectly leveled both longitudinally and transversely. The bed shall be lightly watered and
well-rammed. Excess digging if done through mistake shall be filled with 1:4:8 concrete.
Water, if any accumulated in the trench, shall be baled out and all necessary precaution taken
to prevent surface water from entering the trench. Soft and defective spot in the trench shall
be dug out and removed and filled with concrete or materials prescribed by the Project
Engineer. If rocks or boulders are found during excavation, they should be removed and the
bed trench shall be leveled and made hard by consolidating the earth, at no extra cost. Above
mentioned items or any variation thereof from the Bills of Quantities shall be measured and
valued by the Engineer as a variation. After the completion of foundation masonry, the
remaining portion of the trench not filled by masonry shall be filled up with earth in layers of
15cm, watered and well-rammed. Such filling shall be free from rubbish, refuse matters and
clods, surplus earth, if any shall be removed and site shall be leveled and dressed.
Trenches shall be measured as per drawings and rate shall be for complete Work including
trench filling, for 30 meter lead and 1.5 meter lift including all tools and plants required for the
completion of the work, removal of boulders, side shoring, pumping, and filling in voids by
mass concrete (1:4:8).
No excavation or foundation work shall be filled in or covered up before the inspection and
approval of the Project Engineer.
The starting level for excavation shall be deemed to be ground level or such level as may be
specified by the Project Engineer, before the commencement of the W ork.
504 EXCAVATION FOR FORMATION OF PLINTH OF BUILDING AND PARKING WORKS
This Clause deals with excavation for formation of plinth of buildings and Parking. All suitable material
shall be used insofar as practicable in the construction
Measurement
Measurement of all works will be made in m³.
Measurement for payment under the contract will be limited to the lines, grades, slopes and
dimensions shown on the Drawings or as determined by the Engineer as the work proceeds on the
basis of his evaluation of the soil/rock characteristics and site-conditions set forth in the Clause.
All required and accepted excavation shall be measured from its original position. The volume shall be
determined in cubic meters by average area method to be computed from the original and final cross-
sections of the completed works as per the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. W here it is not

practicable to use the above method of measurement, the Engineer may use volumetric method or
any other method that in his opinion is best suited for accurate assessment.
Any over-excavation shall be reinstated at the risk and cost of the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.
Payment
Payment for work under these clause will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the
BOQ.
The payment will be full and final compensation for all material, labor, and equipment to complete the
works as specified.
505. BACKFILL
This work is related to all types of structures that require filling with specified material in the remaining
volume or space of excavation left unoccupied by any permanent construction.
Activities involved are collection and transportation of suitable material from local borrow pits or hill
side excavation, placing the specified backfill material in layers, removal of foreign material if any,
watering, compacting to required density, lines and levels as indicated in the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer.
Compaction shall proceed after the Contractor together with the Engineer identify the optimum
thickness of each layer of suitable material, its optimum moisture content, and the corresponding
number of passes required for a roller to arrive at the corresponding OMC. Prior to the start of works,
the contractor shall prepare a trial stretch to establish the above parameters and shall repeat it as
often as necessary due to change in layer thickness, borrow pits, and /or change in equipment. The
Contractor may use the Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridge W orks of HMG, MW OT, DOR
as guide for the above purpose.
Backfill, classified according to their nature, are presented in the following Sub-Clauses.
1 Backfill in Plinth of Building and Parking
This work shall consist of filling for construction of embankment for plinth of building, road
works and parking area and includes furnishing, placing, watering, compacting and shaping
suitable material obtained from approved sources in accordance to lines, levels, grades,
dimensions shown on the Drawings and or as required by the Engineer. Fill material used
shall not exceed 150 mm and 75 mm within the 300 mm and 150 mm of formation le vel
respectively. Fill material shall not have organic content value exceeding 5% and soaked
CBR value less than 6% unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Activities involved shall be preparation of surface, scarifying, supply, and laying of suitable
material in layers. Except where material is laid close to the formation level, each layer shall
not exceed 300 mm in thickness before compaction. Each layer of material shall then be
watered and compacted to 95% dry density at optimum moisture content. Testing shall be
carried out by sand cone using relevant BS or ASTM Standards.
The top level of such fill executed shall be regarded as the formation level.
PLINTH FILLING
Filling in plinth with materials brought from outside or by excavated material in 0.15 m. layers
under floors including watering, ramming consolidation and dressing complete.
a) Sand
b) Earth
c) Gravel filling
The backfilling shall be done after the concrete or masonry has fully set and shall be done in
such a way as not to cause under-thrust on any part of the structure. W here suitable excavated
material is to be used for backfilling, it shall be brought from the place where it was temporarily
deposited and shall be used in backfilling. The earth for filling shall be brought from within the site
within a lead of 300 meters to be approved by the Engineer's Representative, prior to filling. If the
earth from within the site were of unsuitable quality, earth shall be brought from outside the site, which
shall be measured and paid as an extra item. The sand shall be either a pit sand or river sand as
approved. In sand filling, pit sand is not allowed at any cost. Sand to be filled shall be approved by
Engineer’s Representative prior to filling. Sand used for any concrete or brick structure shall be used
for filling the plinth. After the available suitable excavated materials are exhausted as backfilling, the

contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge of the fact and levels taken jointly with Engineer- in-
charge. The earth, murrum, sand, gravel etc. or such materials suitable for filling proposed to be filled
under floors and so mentioned in the item of schedule of quantities shall then be brought to site from
approved locations and sources.
The work shall be done with earth/sand in 0.15 m. layers, each layer being well watered and
rammed with mechanical vibrator thoroughly. Any cement bags, grass lying, pebbles, shrubs shall be
removed prior to filling.
MEASUREMENT
The measurement shall be taken for the consolidated thickness of earth/sand and
paid in cubic meter. Pit or stack measurement shall not be done for payment. Quantity of
earth fill under this item shall be arrived at by calculation that is sum total of earth filling
required in trenches around foundations, over raft, under floors or any other filling less the
total quantity involved in foundation excavation. It shall include site clearance for the
area, excavation of earth/sand, transportation, screening if necessary, filling and the
cost of labor etc. all complete
2 Common backfill in structures
Common backfill includes stacked suitable material recovered from excavations or material
transported from outside. This may include granular material passing through 75 mm sieve or
sandy soil. The backfill material shall be spread uniformly in layers, leveled, watered and then
compacted to 95% of its optimum density in layers not exceeding 200 mm for buildings works
and 250 mm for others. Compaction may be done manually or with mechanical means.
Manual compaction in each layer will be done using 2 to 5 kg rammers made of cast-iron or
wood. Mechanical compaction shall be executed with either plate compactors, earth rammers,
depending on site conditions.
Compaction tests shall be conducted with sand cones using relevant BS or ASTM standards.
506.TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF EXCESS DISPOSABLE MATERIAL
This work will be required in connection with transportation of materials from demolition works (unless
otherwise specified) and excess suitable or unsuitable material from excavation. Transport will include
all distance beyond the initial lead (30m unless otherwise specified) for safe disposal as specified by
the Engineer.
Activities involved will be supply of necessary means of transport, loading, and transportation safely
without damage/loss, unloading and leveling properly at disposal sites. The disposed materials shall
be laid in layers mechanically or manually compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The excess material shall be disposed manually with or without equipment like wheelbarrows or by
trucks depending on the location of disposal sites.
Measurement
Measurement will be based first in m³ of loose volume of accepted works with 35% deduction for
voids for all leads indicated in the BOQ. The measurement will be made at the disposal site.
Payment
Payment for work under this Clause will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the
BOQ.
works as specified.

CHAPTER 6
600 CONCRETE WORK
601 SCOPE
This Section covers the materials, design of mixes, mixing, transport, placing, compaction and curing
of concrete (plain and reinforced), either cast-in-situ or pre-cast and mortar required in the civil
engineering and building construction works. It also covers reinforcement for concrete.
602 DEFINITIONS
Structural concrete is any class of concrete which is used in reinforced, pre-stressed or un-reinforced
concrete construction which is subject to stress.
Non-structural concrete is composed of materials complying with the Specification but for which no
strength requirements are specified and which is used only for filling voids, blinding foundations and
similar purposes where it is not subjected to significant stress.
A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould, bay or formwork, etc. and also to
the volume which has to be filled. Pours in vertical succession are referred to as lifts.
603 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
(1) General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all materials which he proposes to
use for making concrete. No concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer has
approved the materials of which it is composed. In accordance with Clause 403, approved
materials shall not thereafter be altered or substituted by other materials without the consent
of the Engineer.
(2) Cement
Cement shall comply with the requirements of Clause 413.
Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the manufacturer's
sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement shall be transported in vehicles provided
with effective means of ensuring that it is protected from the weather.
Bulk cement shall be transported in vehicles or in containers built and equipped for the
purpose.
Cement in bags shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof structure of which the interior shall
be dry and well ventilated at all times. The floor shall be raised above the surrounding ground
level not less than 30cm and shall be so constructed that no moisture rises through it.
Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked together in one place. The bags shall be
closely stacked so as to reduce air circulation with min gap of 500mm from outside wall. If
pallets are used, they shall be constructed so that bags are not damaged during handling and
stacking. Stack of cement bags shall not exceed 8 bags in height. Different types of cement in
bags shall be clearly distinguished by visible markings and shall be stored in separate stacks.
Cement from broken bags shall not be used in the works. Cement in bags shall be used in the
order in which it is delivered.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weather proof silos which shall bear a clear indication of the
type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement shall not be mixed in the same
silo.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient storage capacity on site to ensure that his anticipated
program of work is not interrupted due to lack of cement.
Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the Specification in any
way shall be removed from the Site.
All cement for any one structure shall be from the same source as far as possible.
All cement used in the works shall be tested by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall
provide the results of tests as given in Table 600.1 and 600.2 for each supply and for the last
six months of his production. The Contractor shall supply two copies of each certificate to the
Engineer.

T ABLE 600.1: TEST RESULTS FOR CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF CEMENT
Compounds % Mean Min Max. Standard

deviation
Lime CaO
Silica SiO2
Alumina AI2O3
Iron Oxide Fe2O3
Magnesia MgO
Sulphur Trioxide So3
Soda, Potash Na2O,K2
T ABLE 600.2: TEST RESULTS FOR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF CEMENT
Characteristics Requirements Nominal Mean Min Max St.

Dev.
Fineness, M2/KG : (by Blaine's 225
Air Permeability Method)
Minimum Setting time (initial), 45
minutes
Maximum Setting time (final), 600
minutes
Soundness (by. Le Chatelie 10
method) mm, maximum
Minimum Average Compressive
Strength of three mortar cubes,
(N/mm2)
3 days 16,27*
7 days 22,37*
28 days 33,53*
*denotes the requirements of High Strength Portland Cement.
Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer on samples taken from cement which is
subsequently delivered to site shall relate to no more than one day's output of each cement
plant.
The Contractor shall constitute, from each delivery and each type of cement and not less than
one samples for every 200 tons or part of it, representative samples to be tested when
instructed by the Engineer in a laboratory acceptable to him, in case of the concrete mixes do
not comply with the requirements of this Specification.
Cement which is stored on site for longer than one month shall be tested in such laboratory
for every 200 tons or part thereof and at monthly intervals thereafter.
The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the manufacture, delivery; testing
and the cement used in the works and shall provide the Engineer with two copies thereof.
(3) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be natural sand, crushed gravel
sand or crushed rock sand complying with IS 383. AH the material shall pass through a 4.75
mm IS sieve and the grading shall be in accordance with IS 383. In order to achieve an
acceptable grading, it may be necessary to blend materials from more than one source.
The deviation from the initial fineness modulus shall be no more than ± 0.30 for ordinary
concrete and ± 0.20 for high quality concrete.
However, in respect of the presence of deleterious materials the fine aggregate shall not
contain iron pyrites, iron oxides, mica, shale, coal or other laminar soft or porous materials or
organic matter unless the Contractor can show by comparative tests on finished concrete as
set out in Clause 617 and as per the direction of the Engineer, that the presence of such
materials does not affect the properties of the concrete.

(4) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock, crushed gravel or natural
gravel corresponding to the following classes:
Class A: Aggregate shall consist of crushed igneous or quartzite rock from an approved
source.
Class B: Aggregate shall consist of crushed quarry rock other than Class A from an approved
source.
Class C: Aggregate shall consist of natural or partly crushed gravel, pebbles obtained from an
approved gravel deposit. It may contain a quantity of material obtained from
crushing the oversize stone in the deposit provided such material is uniformly mixed
with the natural uncrushed particles.
Class D: Aggregate shall consist entirely of crushed gravel. The crushed gravel shall be
produced from material retained on a standard sieve having an opening at least
twice as large as the maximum size of aggregate particle specified.
Class E: Aggregate shall consist of an artificial mixture of any of the above classes of
aggregate the. The use of Class E aggregate and the relative proportions of the
constituent materials shall be approved by the Engineer.
Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal size called for in the contract and shall be
of the grading as single sized aggregate or graded aggregate of nominal size 40 mm, 20 mm,
12.5 mm and 10 mm in accordance with IS 383.
Other properties shall be as set out below:
Flakiness Index. W hen tested in accordance with IS 2386 Part 1, the Flakiness Index of the
coarse aggregate shall be as set out hereunder:
For ordinary concrete : not more than 25
For high quality concrete : not more than 15
If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate varies by more than five units from the average
value of the aggregate used in the approved trial mix, then a new set of trial mixes shall be
carried out if the workability of the mixes has been adversely affected by such variation.
Water Absorption: The aggregate shall not have a water absorption of more than 2 per cent
when tested as set out in IS 2386 Part 3.
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA): The aggregate shall have LAA not more than 45% for
ordinary concrete, and not more than 35% for high quality concrete, when tested in
accordance with IS 2386 Part 4.
Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV): The aggregate shall have ACV not more than 30% for
pavement structure and not more than 45% for other structure when tested in accordance
with IS 2386 Part 4.
Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: The aggregate shall comply with IS 383/3.2 notes when tested
in accordance with IS 2386 Part 7.
(5) Testing Aggregates
(a) Acceptance Testing
The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer samples containing not less than 50 kg of any
aggregate which he proposed to use in the works and shall supply such further samples as
the Engineer may require. Each sample shall be clearly labeled to show its origin and shall be
accompanied by all information called for in IS 2386 Part 1 to 8. Tests to determine
compliance of the aggregates with the requirements of Sub-clause 2003 (3) and (4) shall be
carried out by the Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to the
Engineer. If the tested materials fail to comply with the Specification, further tests shall be
made in the presence of the Contractor and the Engineer. Acceptance of the material shall be
based on the results of such tests.
All the materials shall be accepted if the results of not less than three consecutive sets of test
executed in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 1-8) show compliance with the Sub-clauses 2003
(3) and (4).
b) Compliance Testing/Process Control Testing
The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of aggregates for compliance with the

Specification during the period that concrete is being produced for the works. The tests set
out below shall be performed on aggregates from each separate source on the basis of one
set of tests for each day on which aggregates are delivered to site provided that the set of
tests shall represent not more than 100 tons of fine aggregate and not more than 250 tons of
coarse aggregate, and provided also that the aggregates are of uniform quality.
Grading : IS 2386 Part 1
Silt, Clay Contents and Organic Impurities: IS 2386 Part 2
If the aggregate from any source is variable, the frequency of testing shall be increased as
instructed by the Engineer.
In addition to the above routine tests, the Contractor shall carry out the following tests at the
stated frequencies:
Chloride Content: As frequently as may be required to ensure that the proportion of chlorides
in the aggregates does not exceed the limit stated in the Specification. Sulphate Content and
Alkali Aggregate Reactivity; As frequently as may be required according to the variability of
sulphate content and alkali reactivity assessed from the laboratory tests carried out during the
concrete mix design.
(6) Delivery and Storage of Aggregates
Aggregates shall be delivered to site in clean and suitable vehicles. Different type or sizes of
aggregates shall not be delivered in one vehicle.
Each type or size of aggregate shall be stored in a separate bin or compartment having a
base such that the contamination of aggregate is prevented. Dividing walls between bins shall
be substantial and continuous so that no mixing of types or sizes occurs.
The storage of aggregates shall be arranged in such a way that drying out in hot weather is
prevented in order to avoid sudden fluctuations in water content. Storage of fine aggregates
shall be arranged in such way that they can drain sufficiently before use in order to prevent
fluctuations in water content of the concrete.
(7) Water for Concrete and Mortar
Water shall be clean and free from harmful matter and shall comply with the requirements of
IS 456.
Brackish water containing more than 1000 ppm chloride ion or 2000 ppm sulphate ion shall
not be used for mixing or curing concrete.
The Contractor shall carry out tests in compliance with IS 456 to establish compliance with
Specifications.
(8) Admixtures
(a) General
The use of admixtures in concrete may be required under the contract to promote special
properties in the finished concrete or may be proposed by the Contractor to assist him in
compliance with the Specification.
In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the admixture he
proposes to use and the manner in which he proposes to add it in the mix. The information
provided shall include:
(i) The typical dosage, the method of dosing, and the detrimental effects of an excess or
deficiency in the dosage.
(ii) The chemical names of the main active ingredients in the admixture.
(iii) W hether or not the admixture contains chlorides, and if so the chloride ion content
expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture.
(iv) W hether the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at the
manufacturer's recommended dosage, and if so the extent to which it does so.
(v) Details of previous uses of the admixture in Nepal.
The chloride ion content of any admixture shall not exceed 1 per cent by weight of the
admixture nor 0.02 per cent by weight of the cement in the mix.
Admixtures shall not be mixed together without the consent of the Engineer.
Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used in pre-stressed
concrete.

Admixtures may be supplied as liquid or as powder. They shall be stored in sealed and
undamaged containers in a dry, cool place. Admixtures shall be dispensed in liquid form and
dispensers shall be of sufficient capacity to measure at one time the full quantity required for
each batch.
(b) W orkability Agents
Workability agents shall comply with BS 5075 and shall not have any adverse eff ect on the
properties of the concrete.
604 THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
(1) Classes of Concrete
The classes of structural concrete to be used in the works shall be as shown on the Drawing
and designated in Table 600.3, in which the class designation includes two figures. The firs
figures indicates the characteristic strength f ck at 28 days expressed in MPa (N/mm 2 ) and the
second figure is the maximal nominal size of aggregate in the mix expressed in millimeters.
Letter M in the class designation stands for Mix, letters SM stand for Special Mix.
Consistence of the mix, assessed through the Slump Test where the slump is measured in
millimeters, is designated as follows:
S: Stiff consistence, for slump < 40
P: Plastic consistence, for slump > 40 and < 90
VP: Very Plastic consistence, for slump >90 and < 150
F: Flowing consistence for slump > 150
T ABLE 600.3: CONCRETE CLASSES AND STRENGTH
Trial mixes Early works test cubes

Maximum Minimal
Characteristic Any one result Average of 3
Classes of Type of Nominal Size Target
Consistence Strength (f ck) Strength (aver, of 3 consecutive
concrete uses of Aggregate
MPa (N/mm 2 ) fd=1.1fck cubes) results
(mm)
MPa (N/mm 2) MPa (N/mm 2 ) MPa (N/mm 2)
M 10/75 S Ordinary 10 75 11 10 14
M 10/40 S Ordinary 10 40 11 10 14
M 15/20 S Ordinary 15 20 16.5 15 19
M 15/40 S Ordinary 15 40 16.5 15 19
M 20/20 S Ordinary 20 20 22 20 24
M 20/40 S Ordinary 20 40 22 20 24
M 25/20 S Ordinary 25 20 27.5 25 29
M 25/40 S Ordinary 25 40 27.5 25 29
(2) Design of Proposed Mixes

Concrete mixes shall comply with Clause 617.
The Contractor shall design all the concrete mixes called for in the Drawing using the
ingredients which have been approved by the Engineer in accordance with Clause 603 and in
compliance with the following requirements:
(a) The aggregate portion shall be well graded from the nominal maximum size of stone
down to the 150 micron size.
(b) The cement content shall be such to achieve the strength called for in Table 600.3
but in any case not less than the minimum necessary as shown in Table 600.4
(c) The workability shall be consistent with ease of placing and proper compaction
having regard to the presence of reinforcement and other obstructions.
(d) The water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with adequate workability but
in any case not greater than 0.5 for classes of concrete from M20 to M50 taking due
account of any water contained in the aggregates. The Contractor shall take into
account that this requirement may in certain cases require the inclusion of a
workability agent in the mix.

T ABLE 600.4 M INIMUM CEMENT CONTENT
Classes of concrete Minimum cement content in kg per m concrete of compacted
Moderate exposure Intermediate exposure Severe exposure
M15/40, M15/20 150 200 225
M20/40, M20/20 250 300 325
M25/20, M25/40 300 325 350
Note: The minimum cement contents shown in the above table are required in order to achieve
impermeability and durability. In order to meet the strength requirements in the Specification
higher contents may be required.
The categories applicable to the works are based on the factors listed hereunder: Moderate
exposure :Surface sheltered from severe rain, buried concrete. Intermediate
exposure :Surface exposed to severe rain; alternate wetting and
drying; traffic; corrosive fumes; heavy condensation.
Severe exposure :Surface exposed to water having a pH of 4.5 or less,
groundwater containing sulphate.
(3) Laboratory Trial Mixes
For each mix of concrete for which the Contractor has proposed a design, he shall prepare
the number of concrete batches specified hereunder:
Nominal composition :3 separate batches
Modified compositions, the quantities of other constituents being unchanged :
Water : +10% 1 batch
Water : -10% 1 batch
Cement : +15% 1 batch
Cement : -15% 1 batch
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the following action taken, all in accordance with
BS 1881:
(a) The slump of the concrete shall be determined.
(b) Six tests cubes shall be cast from each batch. In the case of concrete having a
maximum aggregate size of 20 mm, 150 mm cubes shall be used. In the case of
concrete containing lager aggregate, 200 mm cubes shall be used and in addition any
pieces of aggregate retained on a 50 mm IS sieve shall be removed from the mixed
concrete before casting the cubes.
(c) The density of all the cubes shall be determined before the strength tests are carried
out.
(d) All faces shall be perpendicular to each other.
(e) Three cubes from each batch shall be tested for compressive strength at seven days
and the remaining three at 28 days.
For "Smaller Contracts works", the following composition are suggested as a starting basis for the
Laboratory trials for one m 3 of concrete:
Concrete Class Characteristic Cement (kg) Total aggregates Fine aggr./ Total Water (max) Workability
Strength N/mm (kg) Aggr. (lit.)
(%)
M 15/40-1 M 15 20 250 300 1900 1875 35-45 35-45 160 165-170 Stiff-Plastic
15/20 M 20/20 Stiff
A "result" being the average strength of the three cubes from one batch, the average of the three
results from tests at 28 days for the nominal composition shall not be less than the Minimal Target
Strength shown in Table 20.3.

One result from the modified compositions shall not be less than the nominal strength as shown on
Table 600.3.
(4) Site Trials
At least six weeks before commencing placement of concrete in the permanent works, site
trials shall be prepared for each class of concrete specified.
For each mix of concrete for which the Contractor has proposed a design and successfully
tested in Laboratory, he shall prepare three separate batches specified hereunder using the
materials which have been approved for use in the works and the mixing plant which he
proposes to use for the works. The volume of each batch shall be the capacity of the concrete
mixer proposed for full production.
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the action taken similar to the above Sub-clause
604 (3) (a) to (e).
The average of the three results of tests at 28 days shall not be less than the Minimal Target
Strength shown in Table 600.3.
The Contractor shall also carry out tests to determine the drying shrinkage of the concrete
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Based on the results of the tests on the Laboratory trial and site trial mixes, the Contractor
shall submit full details of his proposals for mix design to the Engineer, including the type and
source of each ingredient, and the results of the tests on the trial mixes.
If the Engineer does not agree to a proposed concrete mix for any reason, the Contractor
shall amend his proposals and carry out further trial mixes. No mix shall be used in the works
without the written consent of the Engineer.
(5) Quality Control of Concrete Production
(a) Sampling
For each class of concrete in production at each plant for use in the works, samples of
concrete shall be taken at the point of mixing or of deposition as instructed by the Engineer,
all in accordance with the sampling procedures described in BS 1881 and with the further
requirements set out below.
Six 150 mm or 200 mm cubes as appropriate shall be made from each sample and shall be
cured and tested in accordance with BS 1881 three at seven days and the other three at 28
days. W here information samples are required, such as for post-tensioning operations, three
additional cubes shall be made.
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as following:
For 1-5 m 3 quantity of work - 1 no. of sample
For 5-20 m 3 quantity of work - 2 no. of sample
For 20 m 3 and more quantity of work - 3 no. of sample plus one
additional for each 20m 3 or part
thereof.
At least one sample shall be taken from each shifts of work.
Until compliance with the Specification has been established the frequency of sampling shall
be three times that stated above and not less than 3 samples/day for each class of concrete
in production at each plant or such lower frequency as may be instructed by the Engineer.
(b) Testing
(i) The slump of the concrete shall be determined for each batch from which
samples are taken and in addition for other batches at the point of production
and deposition or at the frequency instructed by the Engineer.
The slump of concrete in any batch shall not differ from the value established
by the trial mixes by more than 25 mm or one third of the value whichever is
the less.
(ii) The air content of air entrained concrete in any batch shall be within 1.5 times
of the required value and the average value of four consecutive
measurements shall be within the required value expressed as a percentage
of the volume of freshly mixed concrete.
(iii) Early W orks: Until such time as sufficient test results are available to apply

the method of control described in (iv) below, the compressive strength of the
concrete at 28 days shall be such that no single result (average of 3 cubes) is
less than the characteristic strength fck as shown in Table 600-3 under the
heading "early works test cubes" and also that the average of three
consecutive results is not less than f ck +4 as shown in Table 600-3 under the
same heading.
The 7-day cube result may be used as an early strength indicator, at the
discretion of the Engineer.
(iv) W hen at least 20 consecutive results on tested batches are available for any
class of concrete mixed in any one plant, no single result shall be less than f ck
+4 (N/mm 2) and also the average of any group of three consecutive results
shall not be less than f ck+4 (N/mm 2).
In addition the Coefficient of Variation shall be less than the figure given below:
Number of batches Maximum coefficient of variation

Where
Ordinary concrete High quality concrete the
After 20 tested batches After 50 18% 15% 15% 12%
tested batches
Coefficient of Variation = (Standard

Deviation of the results/Average value of the
result)
(v) Failure to comply with Requirements:
If any one result in a group of three consecutive results is less than fCk-4
(N/mm_), but the other results of group satisfy the strength requirement, then
only the batch from which the failed result was obtained shall be deemed not
to comply with the Specification.
If the average strength of the group is less than the strength requirement then all the batches
between those represented by the first and the last result shall be deemed not to comply with
the Specification, and the Contractor shall immediately adjust the production procedure or the
mix design subject to the agreement of the Engineer to restore compliance with the
Specification.
The Contractor shall take necessary action to remedy concrete which does not comply with
this Specification. Such action may include but not necessarily confined to the following :
Increasing the frequency of sampling until control is again established.
Carrying out non destructive testing such as ultrasonic measurements, load tests
or other appropriate methods,
Cutting test cores from the concrete and testing in accordance with BS 1881
Carrying out strengthening or other remedial work to the concrete where possible
or appropriate.
Removing the concrete.
Accepting as sub standard
605 MIXING CONCRETE
Before any batching, mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and finishing and curing the concrete
ordered or delivered to site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details including Drawing
of all the plant which he proposes to use and the arrangements he proposes to make.
Concrete for the works shall be batched and mixed in one or more plants or concrete mixer unless the
Engineer agrees to some other arrangement. If concrete mixers are used, there shall be sufficient
number of mixtures including stand by mixers.
Batching and mixing plants shall be complying with the requirements of IS 1791 and capable of
producing a uniform distribution of the ingredients throughout the mass. Truck mixers shall comply
with the requirements of IS 4925 and shall only be used with the prior approval of the Engineer. I f the
plant proposed by the Contractor does not fall within the scope of IS 1791 it shall have been tested in

accordance with IS 4634 and shall have a mixing performance within the limits of IS 1791.
All mixing operations shall be under the control of an experienced supervisor.
The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities arranged so that the drainage
water is not discharged to the weigh hoppers. Each bin shall be drawn down at least once per week
and any accumulations of mud or silt shall be removed.
If bulk cement is used, the scale and weight hopper for cement shall be distinct from the scale and
weight hopper for aggregates.
Cement and aggregates shall be batched by weight. W ater may be measured by weight or volume.
The weighing and water dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. Their accuracy
shall be maintained within the tolerances described in IS 1791 and not more than plus or minus one
percent, and checked against accurate weights and volumes when required by the Engineer.
The weights of cement and of each size of aggregate and the weight or volume of water as indicated
by the mechanism employed shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus three per cent of the
respective weight per batch agreed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide standard test weights at least equivalent to the maximum working load
used on the most heavily loaded scale and other auxiliary equipment required for checking the
satisfactory operation of each scale or measuring device. Tests shall be made by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer during the site trials described in Sub-clause 604 (4) and then at intervals to
be determined by the Engineer but not less than once per three months. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with copies of the complete results of all check tests and shall make any adjustments,
repairs or replacements necessary to ensure satisfactory performance.
The nominal drum or pan capacity of the mixer shall not be exceeded. The turning speed and the
mixing time shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but in addition, when water is the last
ingredient to be added, mixing shall continue for at least one minute after all the water has been
added to the drum or the pan.
The blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer of
the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerances by
adjustment.
Mixers shall be fitted with an automatic recorder registering the number of batches discharged.
The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the amount of free water contained in the
coarse and fine aggregates. This amount shall be determined by the Contractor by a method agreed
by the Engineer immediately before mixing begins each day and thereafter at least once per hour and
for each delivery of aggregates during concreting. W hen the correct quantity of water, determined as
set out in the Specification, has been added to the mix, no further water shall be added, either during
mixing or subsequently.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any
fresh concrete is mixed. Mixers shall be cleaned out before changing to another type of cement.
606 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the works by means which shall
prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and shall ensure that the concrete is of the
required workability at the point and time of placing. The loss of slump between discharge from the
mixer and placing shall be within the tolerances specified in Sub-clause 604 (5) (b) (i).
The capacity of the means of transport shall not be less than the full volume of a batch.
The time elapsing between mixing transporting placing and compaction altogether of a batch of
concrete shall not be longer than the initial setting time of the concrete. If the placing of any batch of
concrete is delayed beyond this period, the concrete shall not be placed in the works.
607 PLACING OF CONCRETE
(1) Consent for Placing
Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer's consent has been given in writing. The
Contractor shall give the Engineer at least two full working day notice of his intention to place
concrete.
If concrete placing is not commenced within 24 hours of the Engineer's consent the
Contractor shall again request consent as specified above.
(2) Preparation of Surface to Receive Concrete

Excavated surfaces on which concrete is to be deposited shall be prepared as set out in
Section 500.
Existing concrete surfaces shall be prepared as set out in Clause 612. Before deposition of
further concrete they shall be clean, hard and sound and shall be wet but without any free-
standing water.
Any flow of water into an excavation shall be diverted through proper side drains to a sump or
be removed by other suitable method which will prevent washing away the freshly deposited
concrete or any of its constituents. Any under drain constructed for this purpose shall be
completely grouted up when they are no longer required by a method agreed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer surfaces against which concrete is to be placed
shall receive prior coating of cement slurry or mortar mixed in the proportions sim ilar to those
of the fines portion in the concrete to be placed. The mortar shall be kept ahead of the
concrete. The mortar shall be placed into all parts of the excavated surface and shall not be
less than 5 mm thick.
If any fissures have been cleaned out they shall be filled with mortar or with concrete as
instructed by the Engineer.
The amount of mortar placed at one time shall be limited so that it does not dry out or set
before being covered with concrete.
(3) Placing Procedures
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be placed so
as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the reinforcement, other
embedded items or formwork. It shall be brought up in layers approximately parallel to the
construction joint planes and not exceeding 300 mm in compacted thickness unless otherwise
permitted or directed by the Engineer, but the layers shall not be thinner than four times the
maximum nominal size of aggregate.
When placing on a nearly horizontal surface, placing shall start at the lower end of the surface
to avoid de-compaction of concrete.
Layers shall not be placed so that they form feather edges nor shall they be placed on a
previous layer which has taken its initial set. In order to comply with this requirement, another
layer may be started before initial set of the preceding layer.
All the concrete in a single bay or pour shall be placed as a continuous operation. It shall be
carefully worked round all obstructions, irregularities in the foundations and the like so that all
parts are completely full of compacted concrete with no segregation or honey combing. It
shall also be carefully worked round and between water stops, reinforcement, embedded
steelwork and similar items which protrude above the surface of the completed pour. All work
shall be completed on each batch of concrete before its initial set commences and thereafter
the concrete shall not be disturbed before it has set hard. No concrete that has partially
hardened during transit shall be used in the works and the transport of concrete from the
mixer to the point of placing shall be such that this requirement can be complied with.
Concrete shall not be placed during rain which is sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash
mortar from coarse aggregate on the exposed faces of fresh concrete. Means shall be
provided to remove any water accumulating on the surface of the placed concrete. Concrete
shall not be deposited into such accumulations of water.
In dry weather, covers shall be provided for all fresh concrete surfaces which are not being
worked on. W ater shall not be added to concrete for any reason.
When concrete is discharged from the place above its final deposition, segregation shall be
prevented by the use of chutes, down pipes, trunking, baffles or other appropriate devices.
Forms for walls shall be provided with openings or other devices that will permit the concrete
to be placed in a manner that will prevent segregation and accumulations of hardened
concrete on the formwork or reinforcement above the level of the placed concrete.
When it is necessary to place concrete under water the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer his proposals for the method and equipment to be employed. The concrete shall be
deposited either by bottom-discharging watertight containers or through funnel-shaped
tremies which are kept continuously full with concrete in order to reduce to a minimum the
contact of the concrete with the water. Special care shall be taken to avoid segregation.
If the level of concrete in a tremie pipe is allowed to fall to such extent that the water enters

the pipe, the latter shall be removed from the pour and filled with concrete before being again
lowered into the placing position. During and after concreting under water, pumping or de-
watering in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended if there is any danger that such work
will disturb the freshly placed concrete.
(4) Interruptions to Placing
If the concrete placing is interrupted for any reason and the duration of the interruption cannot
be forecast or is likely to be prolonged, the Contractor shall immediately take the necessary
action to form a construction joint so as to eliminate as far as possible feather edges and
sloping top surfaces and shall thoroughly compact the concrete in accordance with Clause
2008. All work on the concrete shall be completed before elapse of initial setting time and it
shall not thereafter be disturbed until it is hard enough to resist damage. Plant and materials
to comply with this requirement shall be readily available at all time during concrete placing.
Before concreting is resumed after such an interruption the Contractor shall cut out and
remedy all damaged or un-compacted concrete, feather edges or any undesirable features
and shall leave a clean sound surface against which the fresh concrete may be placed.
If it becomes possible to resume concrete placing without contravening the Specification and
the Engineer consents to a resumption, the new concrete shall be thoroughly worked in and
compacted against the existing concrete so as to eliminate any cold joints.
In case of long interruption concrete shall be resumed as directed by Engineer.
(5) Dimensions of Pours
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall not be more than two meters high and
shall as far as possible have a uniform thickness over the plan area of the pour. Concrete
shall be placed to the full planned height of all pours except in the circumstances described in
Sub-clause 607 (4).
The Contractor shall plan the dimensions and sequence of pours in such a way that cracking
of the concrete does not take place due to thermal or shrinkage stresses.
(6) Placing Sequence
The Contractor shall arrange that the intervals between successive lifts of concrete in one
Section of the works are of equal duration. This duration shall not be less than three days or
not more than seven days under temperate weather conditions unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer.
Where required by the Engineer to limit the opening of construction joints due to shrinkage,
concrete shall not be placed against adjacent concrete which is less than 21 days old.
Contraction gaps in concrete shall be of the widths and in the locations as shown on the
Drawing and they shall not be filled until the full time interval shown on the Drawing has
elapsed.
608 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
Concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the placed layer. It shall be thoroughly
worked against the formwork and around any reinforcement and other embedded item, without
displacing them. Care shall be taken at arises or other confined spaces. Successive layers of the
same pour shall be thoroughly worked together.
Concrete shall be compacted with the assistance of mechanical immersion vibrators, unless the
Engineer agrees another method.
Immersion and surface vibrators shall operate at a frequency of between 70 and 200 hertz. The
Contractor shall ensure that vibrators are operated at pressures and voltages not less than those
recommended by the manufacturer in order that the compactive effort is not reduced.
A sufficient number of vibrators shall be operated to enable the entire quantity of concrete being
placed to be vibrated for the necessary period and, in addition, stand-by vibrators shall be available
for instant use at each place where concrete is being placed.
Vibration shall be continued at each point until the concrete ceases to contract, air bubbles have
ceased to appear, and a thin layer of mortar has appeared on the surface. Vibrators shall not be used
to move concrete laterally and shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids.
The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to penetrate the layer underneath at regular
spacing which shall not exceed the distance from the vibrator over which vibration is visibly effective
and some extent of vibration is overlapped.

Vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall the vibrators be allowed to touch
reinforcement, sheathing ducts or other embedded items.
609 CURING OF CONCRETE
(1) General
Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from loss of moisture and from
the development of temperatures differentials within the concrete sufficient to cause cracking.
The methods used for curing shall not cause damage of any kind to the concrete.
Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to achieve the above objectives
but not less than seven days or until the concrete is covered by successive construction
whichever is the shorter period.
The above objectives shall be dealt with in Sub-clauses 609 (2) and 609 (3) but nothing shall
prevent both objectives being achieved by a single method where circumstances permit.
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough to resist damage
from the process. In the case of large areas or continuous pours, it shall commence on the
completed Section of the pour before the rest of the pour is finished.
(2) Loss of Moisture
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be closely covered with impermeable sheeting, properly
secured to prevent its removal by wind and the development of air spaces beneath it. Joints in
the sheeting shall be lapped by at least 300 mm.
If it is not possible to use impermeable sheeting, the Contractor shall keep the exposed
surfaces continuously wet by means of water spray or by covering with a water absorbent
material which shall be kept wet, unless this method conflicts with Sub-clause 609 (3).
Water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used for mixing.
Formed surfaces may be cured by retaining the formwork in place for the required curing
period.
If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, in addition to the curing provisions set out
above provide a suitable form of shading to prevent the direct rays of the sun reaching the
concrete surfaces for at least the first four days of the curing period.
(3) Limitation of Temperature Differentials
The Contractor shall limit the development of temperature differentials in concrete after
placing by any means appropriate to the circumstances including the following:
(a) Limiting concrete temperatures at placing as set out in Sub-clause 2011 (2);
(b) Use of low heat cement for mass concreting, subject to the agreement of the
Engineer;
(c) Leaving formwork in place during the curing period. Steel forms shall be suitably
insulated on the outside;
(d) Preventing rapid dissipation of heat from surfaces by shielding from wind.
610 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE
Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and from water running over the surface until
it is sufficiently hard to resist damage from these causes.
Concrete placed in the works shall not be subjected to any loading including traffic until it has attained
at least its characteristic strength as defined in Clause 604.
611 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER
(1) General
The Contractor shall prevent damage to concrete arising from exposure to extreme
temperatures, and shall maintain in good working order all plant and equipment required for
this purpose.
In the event that conditions become such that even with the use of equipment the
requirements cannot be met, concrete placing shall immediately cease until such time as the
requirements can again be met.
(2) Concrete Placing in Hot Weather
During hot weather the Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure that the

temperature of concrete at the time of placing in the works does not exceed 30°C and that the
concrete does not lose any moisture during transporting and placing.
Such measures may include but are not necessarily limited to the following:-
(a) Shielding aggregates from direct sunshine.
(b) Use of a mist water spray on aggregates.
(c) Sun shields on mixing plants and transporting equipment.
Surfaces in which concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from direct sunshine and
surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted to reduce absorption of water from the concrete placed
on or against them.
After concrete has been placed, the selected curing process shall be commenced as soon as
possible. If any interval occurs between completion of placing and start of curing, the concrete
shall be closely covered during the interval with polythene sheet to prevent loss of moisture.
612 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Whenever concrete is to be bonded to other concrete which has hardened, the surface of contact
between the Sections shall be deemed a construction joint.
Where construction joints are shown in the Drawing, the Contractor shall form such joints in such
positions. The location of joints which the Contractor requires to make for the purpose of construction
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Construction joints shall be in vertical or horizontal
planes except in sloping slabs where they shall be normal to the exposed surface or elsewhere where
the Drawing require a different arrangement.
Construction joints shall be arranged as to reduce to a minimum the effects of shrinkage in the
concrete after placing, and shall be placed in the most advantageous positions with regard to stresses
in the structures and the desirability of staggering joints.
Feather edges of concrete at joints shall be avoided. Any feather edges which may have formed
where reinforcing bars project through a joint shall be cut back until sound concrete has been
reached.
The intersections of horizontal and near horizontal joints and exposed faces of concrete shall appear
as straight lines produced by use of a guide strip fixed to the formwork at the top of the concrete lift, or
by other means acceptable to the Engineer.
Construction joints formed as free surfaces shall not exceed a slope of 20 per cent from the
horizontal.
The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal joints shall be thoroughly cleaned
and roughened by means of high pressure water, and air jets or wire brush, when the concrete is hard
enough to withstand the treatment without the leaching of cement. The surface of vertical or near
vertical joints shall be similarly treated if circumstances permit the removal of formwork at a suitable
time.
Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be successful, the surface whether
formed or free shall be thoroughly scrabbled by mechanical means, manually or wet sand blasted and
then washed with clean water. The indentations produced by scrabbling shall not be less than 10 mm
deep and shall be away from the finished face by 40mm.
If instructed by the Engineer the surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly brushed with a thin layer
of mortar composed of one part of cement to two parts of sand by weight and complying with Sub-
clause 2502 (2) immediately prior to the deposition of fresh concrete. The mortar shall be kept just
ahead of the fresh concrete being placed and the fresh layer of concrete shall be thoroughly and
systematically vibrated to full depth to ensure complete bond with the adjacent layer. No mortar or
concrete shall be placed until the joint has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
613 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING
Records of the details of every pour of concrete placed in the works shall be kept by the Contractor in
a form agreed by the Engineer. These records shall include class of concrete, location of pour, date
and duration of pour, ambient temperature and concrete temperature at time of placing and all
relevant meteorological information such as rain, wind etc., moisture contents of the aggregates,
details of
mixes, batch numbers, cement batch number, results of all tests undertaken, part of the structure and
place where test cube samples are taken from.

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of these records each week covering work
carried out the preceding week. In addition he shall supply to the Engineer monthly histograms of all
28 day cubes strength results together with cumulative and monthly standard deviations, Coefficient
of Variation, and any other information which the Engineer may require concerning the concrete
placed in the works.
614 REINFORCEMENT
(1) General
Reinforcement as plain bars and deformed bars and steel fabric shall comply with the
following Indian Standards.
IS 1786 for high strength deformed steel bars and wires.
IS 1566 for steel mesh fabric.
IS 432 mild steel and medium tensile steel bars.
All reinforcement shall be from an approved manufacturer and, if required by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall submit the ISI certification mark or other test certificate from the
manufacturer acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all information as
manufacturer's certificate, invoice, and other relevant details to ensure the quality of steel.
The reinforcements shall have no crack, scale or rust or foreign particles that will destroy or
reduce the bond. The bars shall be accurately bent and formed to the dimension indicated in
the Drawings. The Contractor shall prepare bending schedules for each structure and
calculate the weight of the reinforcement. The schedule of bars and the calculations shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Binding wire used to bind reinforcements shall be annealed galvanized binding wire of 20
gauge.
The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS 84-2042 and NS 191-
2045. All reinforcement not complying with the Specification shall be removed from site.
(2) Storage of Reinforcement
All reinforcement shall be delivered to site either in straight lengths or cut and bent. No
reinforcement shall be accepted in long lengths which have been transported bent over
double.
Any reinforcement which is likely to remain in storage for a long period shall be protected from
the weather so as to avoid corrosion and pitting. All reinforcement which has become
corroded or pitted to an extent which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will affect its properties
shall either be removed from site or may be tested for compliance with the appropriate Indian
Standard in accordance with Sub-clause 614 (1) at the Contractor expense.
Reinforcement shall be stored at least 150mm above the ground on a clean area free of mud
and dirt and sorted out according to category, quality and diameter.
(3) Bending Reinforcement
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, bending and cutting shall comply with IS 2502.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of any bar bending schedules supplied
and shall be responsible for cutting, bending, and fixing the reinforcement in accordance with
the Drawing.
Bars shall be bent mechanically using appropriate bar benders. Bars shall be bent cold by the
application of slow steady pressure. At temperatures below 5°C the rate of bending shall be
reduced if necessary to prevent fracture in the steel.
Bending reinforcement inside the forms shall not be permitted except for mild steel bars of
diameter less or equal to 12 mm, when it is absolutely necessary.
After bending, bars shall be securely tied together in bundles or groups and legibly labeled as
set out in IS 2502.
(4) Fixing Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned. All dirt, scale, loose rust, oil and other
contaminants shall be removed before placing it in position. If the reinforcement is
contaminated with concrete from previous operations, it shall be cleaned before concreting in
that Section.
Reinforcement shall be securely placed and fixed in position as shown in the drawing or

Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall be either tied together
with not less than 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wire and the end of the wire turned into
the body of the concrete, or shall be secured with a wire clip of a type agreed by the
Engineer.
Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is maintained on the
reinforcement. Blocks shall be as small as practicable and of a shape agreed by the
Engineer. They shall be made of mortar mixed in the proportions of one part of cement to two
parts of sand by weight. Wires cast into the block for tying in to the reinforcement shall have
not less than 1.6 mm diameter and shall be soft annealed iron.
Alternatively another type of spacer block may be used subject to the Engineer's approval. All
reinforcement shall be checked of shape, size, diameter and number where necessary.
Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that it remain intact during placing of concrete. Any
fixers
made to the formwork shall not remain within the space to be occupied by the concrete being
placed.
No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on the Drawing or agreed
by the Engineer. Splice lengths shall be as shown on the Drawing or directed by the
Engineer.
Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by the contract or agreed by the
Engineer. If welding is employed, all welded splices shall be full penetration butt welds
complying with the procedures set out in IS 2751 or IS 9417 as applicable. Mechanical splices
shall not be used unless the Engineer agrees otherwise. Acceptance for welded or
mechanical splices of approved design shall be based on qualification tests to be carried out
by the
Contractor prior to start of the work. Construction control testing as instructed by the Engineer
shall be also carried out.
The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the works shall not suffer
distortion, displacement or other damage. W hen it is necessary to bend protruding
reinforcement aside temporarily, the radius of the bend shall not be less than four times the
bar diameter for mild steel bars or six times the bar diameter for high yield bars. Such bends
shall be carefully straightened without leaving residual kinks or damaging the concrete round
them before concrete placing. In no circumstances heating and bending of high yield bars
shall be permitted.
Bars complying with IS 1786 or other high tensile bars shall not be bent after placing in the
works.
615 CONCRETE FOR SECONDARY PURPOSES
(1) Non-structural Concrete
Non-structural concrete (NS concrete) shall be used only for non structural purposes where
shown on the Drawing.
NS concrete shall be compound of ordinary Portland cement and aggregates complying with
this Specification.
The weight of cement mixed with 0.3 cubic meters of combined aggregate shall not be less
than 50 kg. The mix shall be proportioned by weight or by volume. The maximum aggregate
size shall be 40 mm nominal.
The concrete shall be mixed by machine or by hand in accordance with Sub-clause 615 (3) to
a uniform color and consistency before placing. The quantity of water used shall not exceed
that required to produce a concrete with sufficient workability to be placed and compacted
where required.
The concrete shall be compacted by hand towels or rammers or by mechanical vibration.
(2) No Fines Concrete
No Fines concrete (NF concrete) is intended for use where a porous concrete is required and
shall only be used where shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
The mix shall consist of Ordinary Portland cement and aggregate complying with this

Specification. The aggregate size shall be 40 mm to 10 mm only. The weight of cement mixed
with 0.3 cubic meters of aggregate shall not be less than 50 kg. The quantity of water shall
not exceed that required to produce a smooth cement paste which will coat evenly the whole
of the aggregate.
(3) Hand Mixed Concrete
Concrete for structural purposes shall not be mixed by hand. W here non structural concrete is
required, hand mixing may be carried out subject to approval of the Engineer.
For making hand mixed concrete, cement, sand and aggregate shall be batched separately
by volume or by weight as applicable. Then cement and sand shall be mixed dry to uniform
color. The aggregate shall be stacked in a proper shape upon which cement sand mix shall
be spread and whole mix shall be turned up and down to have uniform mix of all ingredients.
Then water shall be added as specified in Sub-clause 2015 (1) and shall be mixed to uniform
consistency.
For hand mixed concrete the specified quantities of cement shall be increased by 10% and
not more than 0.25 cubic meter shall be mixed at one time. During windy weather precautions
shall be taken to prevent cement from being blown away in the process of gauging and
mixing.
616 EARLY LOADING
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the specified curing period has expired, and
thereafter loading shall be allowed after approval by the Engineer. The Engineer's decision shall be
based on the type of load to be applied, the age of concrete, the magnitude of stress induced and the
propping of the structure.
No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes have attained the specified minimum 28 days
strength as defined in Clause 2004.
617 MEASUREMENT
(1) Concrete
Concrete laid in place as specified in the Drawing or directed by the Engineer shall be
measured in cubic meter separately for each class. No deduction shall be made in the
measurement for:
a) bolt holes, pockets, box outs an cast in components provided that the volume of each
is less than 0.15 cubic meters;
b) mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves, chamfers and the like of 100
mm total width or less;
c) reinforcement
(2) Blinding Concrete/Non Structural Concrete
Blinding concrete laid in place shall be measured in cubic meter. No deduction shall be made
for openings provided that the area of each is less than 0.5 square meters. Blinding concrete
over hard material shall be measured as the volume used provided that the maximum
thickness of 150 mm allowed for over break is not exceeded.
(3) Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agents
Measurement of these items shall be carried out as specified in the contract.
(4) Reinforcement
All types of reinforcement shall be measured in metric ton
Only that reinforcement which is required and placed in work as per Drawing or as directed by
the Engineer shall be measured. In addition, other reinforcement not shown on the Drawing
but directed by the Engineer such as splices, chairs, hangers and the like shall also be
measured.
Rolling margin or cutting waste shall not be measured. Length along centre line of the
individual reinforcement of each type placed as described above shall be measured including
their hooks, and bents, if any. An average weight of at least 5 samples each one meter length
shall be determined by the laboratory approved by the Engineer. The weight of each type of
the reinforcement shall be determined by multiplying average weight of the respective
reinforcement by its length.
(5) Fabric Reinforcement

Fabric reinforcement laid as per Drawing or as directed by the Engineer shall be measured in
square meter. No allowance shall be made for laps and wastage.
618 PAYMENT
(1) Concrete
Every class of concrete shall be paid as per respective contract unit rate. In addition to those
specified in Clause 112 the respective rate shall also include the cost of:
a) admixtures and workability agents including submission of details unless specified.
b) class of UF1,2 or 3 surface finish.
c) laying to sloping surfaces not exceeding 15° from the horizontal and to falls.
d) formwork to lean concrete.
e) placing and compacting against excavated surfaces where required including any
additional concrete to fill over break and working space.
f) complying with the requirements of Clauses 2001 to 2013,1806 and 1807.
(2) Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agents
Payment shall be made at contract unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation
to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and for all specified in the contract.
(3) Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be paid at contract unit rate. In addition to those specified in Clause
112 the rate shall also include compensation for the cost of providing , cutting to length, splice
lengths additional to those shown on the Drawing, laps, bending, hooking, waste incurred by
cutting, cleaning, spacer blocks, provision and fixing of chairs or other types of supports,
welding, fixing the reinforcement in position including the provision of wire or other material for
supporting and tying the reinforcement in place, bending reinforcement aside temporarily, and
straightening, placing and compacting concrete around reinforcement and for complying with
Clause 614.
(4) Fabric Reinforcement
The fabric reinforcement shall be paid at contract unit rate which shall be also inclusive of
compensation for wastage and laps.
PILING WORKS.
RCC Piles
Rcc piles should be constructed below the raft foundation in different sizes and depths as
provided in the bill of quantity and drawings. The re-bar used in the rcc piles should be same
as of item and the quality of concrete should be same as of item. Under reamed should be
provided to all Rcc piles as per drawings.
Workmanship
Steel circular columns should be placed in bore holes in the way that the steels should not be
contacted with soil and the columns should be straight while placing in the bore holes for
piles. Treamie Pipe with cone in top should be used while placing of concrete in the boreholes
so that the concrete will not come in contact with soil. In case of water emerge in the piles; it
must be dewatered before concreting works. The concrete should be well compacted by
needle vibrators. The vibrators must reach to the full depth of the piles so that we can assure
well compaction of the concrete of the works.
Measurement
The measurement for the Rcc piles will be in linear meter. No sepearte re-bar, concrete,
formwork, boring works and others like admixtures, bentonite powder and any kind of labour
works will be paid. Also the re-bar connecting to the piles and raft will not be paid separately.

MICROPILES
Providing and drilling 76mm diamicropiles.
MICROPILING
On completion of the temporary platform, the piling rigs shall be moved in assembled and ready for
work on the installation of micropiles. A test pile for vertical pile shall be carriedout.
Micropiles are cast-in-situ with 76 mm dia MS medium pipe formed by excavating a hole of the
specified size, to the required depth and inserting the MS medium pipe into the hole, pressure
grouting the excavated hole with cement grout of specified strength with the required pressure 2-3
times for surrounding the grout into the soil and spreading the slurry from perforated pipe after
completing process the reinforcement is lowered into the hole.
POSITIONING OF BORING
The Micropile points setting out shall be provided by a qualified Surveyor and Engineer. The
compressor pipe will be moved to the pile point intended for excavation. The tripod and water wash
boring or augur is placed just above the pile point. Then the positions of the auger are checked against
the pile point.
Adjustment should be made so that the center of the auger is nearest to the pile point. The boring
equipment is then lowered and boring operating commenced.
Reasonable care should be taken so that the pile position and vertically are constructed within the
specified tolerance i.e. 75 mm and 1 in 150 respectively.
ANTI CORROSIVE COATING
Before insert the MS pipe into boring hole, anti-corrosive paint coating shall be applied to the
periphery of the pipe
REINFORCEMENT
After pressure grouting, the reinforcement of the required dia shall be cut to the required length. It
shall be placed inside the MS pipe.
PERFORATION
The MS pipe shall be perforated by drilling machine or welding machine to a dia 12.5 mm dia at
200 mm interval at the periphery of the MS pipe.
PRESSURE GROUTING
After inserting the MS pipe into the bore hole, the pressure pipe shall be inserted into the MS pipe
and shall be cleaned by air pressure. After cleaning the inside of MS pipe, the cement grout slurry
be put into the hole and required pressure shall be applied.
CEMENT GROUTING
Cement grouting conforming to the specification will be mixed at site by mixer or grout pump.
The piles shall be grouted in one or more continuous operation immediately after the excavation
has been completed and inspected where inspection is required by the specification. If the
continuity of placing the concrete is interrupted, no further concrete shall be placed without the
prior approval of the Engineer.
MEASUREMENT
It is measured in running meter of the depth of pile. The rate is inclusive of black pipe, anti-
corrosive paint, making holes in staggered pattern, cement grouting and application of bentonite
where required for protecting side collapse, and clearing the site when the work is done.

CHAPTER 7
700 BRICK MASONRY WORK
701 SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and construction of brick works for structures in
accordance with the detail shown on the Drawing and these Specifications or as directed by the
Engineer.
702 MATERIALS
(1) Bricks
Burnt clay bricks shall conform to the requirements of NS-1/2035 except that minimum
compressive strength when tested flat shall not be less than 8 N/mm 2 for individual bricks and
10 N/mm 2 for average 5 specimens and that the size may be according to local practice with
a tolerance of + 5 percent.
(2) Mortar
Mortar shall comply with IS 2250-1981; Code of Practice for preparation and use of masonry
mortar. The mortar used in work shall have the strength not less than 5 N/mm2 or 7.5 N/mm2
at 28 days as specified.
However, if provided in the Contract, cement and sand may also be mixed in specified
proportions. Cement shall be proportioned only by weight, by taking its unit weight as 1.44 ton
per cubic meter and sand shall be proportioned by volume after making due allowance for
bulking.
Sand shall comply with Clause 412. Cement shall comply with Clause 413.
The mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer unless hand-mixing is permitted by the
Engineer. If hand-mixing is allowed, the operation shall be carried out on a clear watertight
platform. in the required proportion cement and sand shall be first mixed dry to obtain an
uniform color. Then required quantity of water shall be added and the mortar shall be mixed to
produce workable consistency. The mortar shall be mixed for at least three minutes after
addition of water in the case of mechanical mixing. In the case of hand mixing, the mortal
shall be hoed back and forth for about 10 minutes after addition of water in order to obtain
uniform consistency.
Only that quantity of mortar shall be mixed at a time which can be used completely before it
becomes unworkable. Any mortar that has become unworkable due to loss of water before
elapsing the initial setting time of cement, shall be rewet to make it workable and shall be
used in the works. On no account mortar shall be used after elapsing the initial setting time of
cement.
703 SOAKING OF BRICKS
Bricks shall be soaked in water for a minimum period of one hour before use. W hen bricks are soaked
they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently in advance so that at the time of laying they are skin
dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place where they are not spoilt by dirt, earth, etc.
704 LAYING OF BRICKS
All bricks work shall be laid in English bond, even and true to line, plumb, level and all joints
accurately kept. W hole bricks used on the face shall be selected ones of uniform size and true
rectangular face.
Bricks shall be laid with frogs up, if any, on a full bed of mortar. W hen laying, bricks shall be slightly
pressed so that the mortar gets into all the surface pores of bricks to ensure proper adhesion. All
joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no hollow spaces are left.
Before laying bricks in foundation, a layer of not less than 12 mm of mortar shall be spread to make
the surface on which the brick work will be laid even. Immediately thereafter, the first course of bricks
shall be laid.
The brick work shall be built in uniform layers. Corners and other advanced work shall be raked back.
Brick work shall be done true to plumb or in specified batter. No part of it, during construction, shall
rise more than one meter above the general construction level, to avoid unequal settlement and
improper jointing.
Toothing may be done where future extension is contemplated but shall be used as an alternative to

raking back.
705 JOINTS
The thickness of joints shall not exceed 10 mm.
706 JOINTING WITH EXISTING STRUCTURES
When fresh masonry is to be placed against existing surface of structures, the surface shall be
cleaned of all loose materials, roughened and wetted as directed by the Engineer so as to effect a
good bond with the new work.
707 CURING
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work in cement mortar shall be
kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days. The top of the masonry work
shall be left flooded with water so as not to disturb or washout the green mortar.
During hot weather, all finished or partly completed work shall be covered or wetted in such a manner
as to prevent rapid drying of the brick work.
708 SCAFFOLDING
The scaffolding shall be sound and strong to withstand all loads likely to come upon it. The holes
which provide resting space for horizontal members shall not be left in masonry under one meter in
width or immediately near the skew backs of arches. The holes left in the masonry work for supporting
the scaffolding shall be filled and made good.
709 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment used for mixing or transporting mortar and bricks shall be clean and free from set
mortar, dirt or other injurious foreign substances.
710 FINISHING OF SURFACES
(1) General
The surfaces can be finished by 'jointing', 'pointing' or 'plastering', as specified. For a surface
which is to be subsequently plastered or pointed, the joints shall be squarely raked out to a
depth of 15 mm while the mortar is still green. The raked joints shall be well brushed to
remove dust and loose particles and the surface shall be thoroughly washed with water,
cleaned and wetted.
The mortar for finishing shall be prepared as per Clause 702.
(2) Walling Finish:
Where walling is to be finished with a fair face of the workmanship and quality, the brick s are
to be selected so that the exposed face is free from defects and the joints finished flush as the
works proceed. The faced work shall be kept perfectly clean and no rubbing down of
brickwork will be allowed.
Where bricks work is to be plastered the joints shall be raked out as the work proceeds.
(3) Walling Building:
Bricks shall be wetted before being laid and the top of walling where left off shall be wetted
before re-commencing building. W alls to be kept wet three days after building.
Bricks shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid and the brickwork carried up evenly
course so that no part is allowed to be carried up more than 90cm higher at any time than any
other part.
(4) Cavity Walling Building
The two layer of half brick wall with half brick cavity is cavity walling of the building. Bricks
shall be wetted before being laid and the top of walling where left off shall be wetted before
re-commencing building. Each left brick wall shall be connected by 10G GI links made as per
design at every five course vertically and at the 60cm spacing horizontally or as per drawing.
The two courses below sill will be solid wall. One or both half brick wall will be laid in fair face
in stretcher bond. The walls are to be kept wet three days after building.
Bricks shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid and the brickwork carried up evenly
course-by-course so that no part is allowed to be carried up more than 90cm higher at any
time than any other part.
(5) Setting Out Walling

The contractor shall provide proper setting- out rods and set out all work on it for corners,
openings, heights, etc. And shall build the walls and piers etc. To the width, depth and height
indicated on the drawings and as directed and approved by the Engineer in-charge.
(6) Bonding Walls
Load bearing brickwork generally shall be of Quota bond (nominal thickness 350mm) and
reinforced as shown on the detailed drawings. One brick walls (nominal thickness 230mm)
shall be in English bond and half brick walls (nominal thickness 115mm) in Stretcher bond. No
broken bricks or bats shall be used unless required to from bond.
All propounds, quoins, reveals and other angles of walls shall be built strictly true and square.
Cement &sand shall be as before specified.
Lime shall be freshly burnt lime slaked at least one month before being used by drenching
with water, well broken up and mixed and the slurry passed through a 3mm mesh screen to
remove all lumps and impurities.
(7) Mortar
Unless otherwise specified, all mortar shall consist of cement and sand in the proportion as
described in the Bill of Quantities.
The ingredients of mortars shall be measured in proper gauge boxes on a boarded platform
all bring mixed dry and again whilst adding water. In the case of cement/ lime mortar, the
sand and lime shall be mixed dry and then the cement added. All mortars shall be thoroughly
mixed to a uniform consistency with only sufficient water to obtain a plastic condition suitable
for trawling. Mortar, which has commenced to set, shall not be used or knocked up again for
use.
(8) Filling for Brick work
Where brickwork cavities are specified to contain reinforcing bars they shall be filled with
concrete mix as previously described. The filling shall be placed and consolidated in section
not exceeding 90cm in height. Cavities that are to be filled shall be kept free of all mortar
dropping.
(9) Brick Lintels
Lintels over doors and under openings except where in concrete, shall be formed in brick
work by reinforcing the three concrete immediately above the opening with steel wire
reinforcement projecting 45cm at either end of the opening and the rates are to include for
any necessary centering.
(10) Putlog Holes
All putlog holes shall be not less than one course deep and carefully filled with brick s cut to fit
size of opening with beds and joints filled with mortar well tamped in after scaffolding is
removed.
(11) Keeping Clean
The contractor shall allow in his rates for keeping the fair-faced brickwork free from mortar at
all times and for cleaning the work at completion.
(12) Construction Joints between Walls
Where Construction joints indicated on the drawings should be filled by 25*100m flexible jute
carpet coated with bitumen and covered by 16G galvanized steel sheet in exposed faces. All
the construction debris shall be removed before placing it.
(13) Jointing
In jointing, the face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished
surface flush with the face of the brick-work. The faces of brick-work shall be cleaned to
remove any splashes of mortar during the course of raising the brick-work.
(14) Pointing
For pointing, the mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints, before giving the
required finish. The pointing shall then be finished to proper type given on the Drawing. If type
of pointing is not mentioned on the Drawing the same shall be ruled pointing. For ruled
pointing after the mortar has been filled and pressed into the joints and finished off level with
the edges of the bricks, it shall while still green be ruled along the centre with a half round tool
of such width as may be specified by the Engineer. The superfluous mortar shall then be cut
off from the edges of the lines and the surface of the masonry shall also be cleaned of all

mortar.
(15) Plastering
Plastering shall be started from top and worked down. All putlog holes shall be properly filled
in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. W ooden screeds 75 mm
wide and of the thickness of the plaster shall be fixed vertically 2.5 to 4 meters apart to act as
gauges and guides in applying the plaster. The mortar shall be laid on the wall between the
screeds using the plaster's float and pressing the mortar so that the raked joints are properly
filled. The plaster shall then be finished off with a wooden straight edge reaching across the
screeds. The straight edge shall be worked on the screeds with a small upward and sideways
motion 50 mm or 75 mm at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off with a plaster's
wooden float. Metal floats shall not be used.
When recommencing the plastering beyond the work suspended earlier the edges of the old
plaster shall be scraped, cleaned and wetted before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas.
No portion of the surface shall be left out in a condition to be patched up later on.
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required by the Engineer.
The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified thickness. The minimum
thickness over any portion of the surface shall not be less than the specified thickness minus
3 mm.
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions, which sound hollow when tapped, or
are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and re-done
as directed by the Engineer.
(16) Curing of Finishes
Curing shall be started as soon as the mortar used for finishing has hardened sufficiently not
to be damaged when watered. It shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this
period, it shall be suitable protected from all damages.
711 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of mortar test cubes from each source
of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the mortar to the specified strength. Each set shall
comprise two cubes, one to be tested at 7 days and the other to be tested at 28 days. Testing shall be
in accordance with IS 2250. During construction the Contractor shall make and test mortar cubes at
the rate of three for every 10m3 or part of it of brick work to assess the strength of the mortar subject
to a minimum of 3 sample cubes for a days work. The brick shall be tested for compressive strength
and water absorption as per NS-1/2035 and shall meet the requirement of this Specification.
712 DRY BRICK WORKS
(1) Flat Brick Soling
The flat brick soling shall be made in foundation and floor. The brick shall conform to clause
100. The brick soling shall be done over the 5cm sand filling in line and level. The bricks are
then rammed with spreading sand and water.
(2) Brick On Edge Soling
The Brick on Edge brick soling shall be made in foundation and floor. The brick shall conform
to clause 100. The brick soling shall be done over the 5cm sand filling in line and level. The
bricks are then rammed with spreading sand and water.
713 MEASUREMENT
All brick work shall be measured in cubic meters except soling.
The work of plastering and pointing shall be measured in square meters separately.
714 PAYMENT
The brick works, plastering and pointing shall be paid at their respective contract unit rate which shall
be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 to complete the work as
per these Specifications.

714 DACHI APPA BRICK WORK
Dachi Appa brick work in super structure in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4sand) and concrete band
shall be as per specified in the bill of quantity.
Bricks shall be of uniform color, thoroughly burnt without being vitrified, regular in shape and size and
shall have sharp and square sides and edges and parallel faces to ensure uniformilty in the thickness
of the courses of brickwork.
The quality of the brick shall be approved by the Engineer and free from grit and other impurities.
SCAFFOLDING
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall
be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks shall be
fixed. In buildings upto two stories, single scaffolding shall be allowed. In this case, the inner end of
the horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided in the header course only. Only one header
for each pole shall be left out. The holes left in masonry work for supporting the scaffolding shall be
filled and made good, before plastering. The contractor shall be responsible for providing and
maintaining sufficiently strong scaffolding so as to withstand all loads likely to come upon it.
MEASUREMENT
The work done of Dachi Brickworks shall be paid as mentioned in the bill of quantity.
SHORING WORKS
Providing and performing the Shoring works for temporary retaining of excavated edges in basement
by MS sheet piling with embedding 4” dia MS pipes and proper supports should be provided to the
sheets and pipes. The Pipe should be embedded vertically and the sheet should be placed in line also
the welding shall be done in pipes with the sheets. The Shoring system shall be removed after the
completion of basement Shear wall. The shoring system shall be done in such manner so that there
will not be any damages to the neighborhood property. The contractor should provide shop drawing of
the shoring system to the engineer for approval. Measurement of the Shoring works shall be in
Square meter .The height for shoring works will be given for excavtion depth only, pipe embedded in
earth will not be calculated as shoring height.

CHAPTER 8
800 STONE MASONRY WORK
801 SCOPE
This Section covers furnishing of materials and construction of different types of stone masonry works
in accordance with the Drawing and this Specification or as directed by the Engineer.
802 MATERIALS
All requirements in respect of stones and cement sand mortar described herein shall be applicable in
all Clauses of this Section, if otherwise not specified.
(1) Stone
The stones to be used shall be durable and angular in shape. If boulders are used they shall
be broken into angular pieces. The stones shall be sound, hard, and free from iron bands,
spots, sand holes, flaws, shakes, cracks or other defects. The stone shall not absorb water
more than 5 per cent. The specific gravity of the stone shall not be less than 2.50. Except
otherwise described in the contract, the length of any stone shall not exceed three times its
height. The breadth of the stone on the bed shall not be less than 150 mm nor greater than
3/4 the thickness of the wall. At least 85% of the stones used in masonry, except those used
for chinking as chips or spalls of stones shall have individual volumes of more that 0.01 m3
The chips or spalls used including voids in the dry stone masonry shall not be more than 20%
of the stone masonry by volume. In case of mortared masonry the total volume of mortar and
spalls taken together shall not be more than 30% of the mortared masonry. Representative
samples of the stones intended for use in the works shall be submitted to the Engineer for
prior approval. Further representative samples shall be submitted for approval whenever
there is a change in the type or strength of the rock that the Contractor intends to use in
masonry work.
(2) Mortar
Mortar for masonry shall conform to Sub-clause 702 (2). Sand shall comply with IS 2116 and
cement shall comply with Clause 414.
803 CONSTRUCTION
The method of construction described herein shall hold good in all Clauses of this Section, wherever
applicable.
(1) General
Construction shall be carried out in accordance with I.S. 1597-1992, Code of Practice for
construction of stone masonry, Part 1 Rubble stone masonry or Part 2 Ashlar Masonry as
appropriate. All stratified stone possessing bedding planes shall be laid with its natural bed as
nearly as possible at right angles to the direction of load. In the case of arch rings, the natural
bed shall be radial. Facework groins shall be built to a height not exceeding one meter in
advance of the main body of the work and adjacent walling stepped down on either side.
Masonry face work between the groins shall then be built to a height not exceeding 500 mm
above the backing which shall then be brought up level with the completed facework. At no
time shall the backing be built up higher than the facework.
Except for dry rubble walling, all joints (gaps) shall be sufficiently thick to prevent stone to
stone contact and the gaps shall be completely filled with mortar. Stones shall be clean and
sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water from mortar.
Placing loose mortar on the course and pouring water upon it to fill the gaps in stones shall
not be allowed. Mortar shall be fluid, mixed thoroughly and then poured in the joints. No dry or
hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all its faces
completely covered with mortar of the thickness as specified for joints.
The bed which is to receive the stone shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of
fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and vertical joints and settled
carefully in place with a wooden mallet immediately after placement and solidly embedded in
mortar before it has set. Clean and wet chips and spalls shall be wedged into the mortar joints
and bed whenever necessary to avoid thick joints or bed of mortar. W hen the foundation
masonry is laid directly on rock, the bedding face of the stones of the first course shall be
dressed to fit into rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. For

masonry works over rock, a leveling course of M15/40 or M15/20 concrete 100mm thickness
shall be laid over rock and then stone masonry work shall be laid without foundation concrete
block.
In case, any stone already set in mortar is disturbed or the joints broken, it shall be taken out
without disturbing the adjoining stones and joints. Dry mortar and stones thoroughly cleaned
from the joints and the stones shall be reset in fresh mortar. Sliding one stone on top of
another which is freshly laid, shall not be allowed.
Shaping and dressing of stone shall be done before it is laid in the work. Dressing and
hammering of the laid stones which will loosen the masonry, shall not be allowed.
Building up face wall tied with occasional through stones and filling up the middle with stones
spalls and chips or dry packing shall not be allowed. Vertical joints shall be staggered.
Distance between the nearer vertical joints of upper layer and lower layer in coursed rubble
masonry shall not be less than half the height of the course.
Masonry in a structure between two expansion joints shall be carried up nearly at one uniform
level throughout but when breaks are unavoidable the masonry shall be raked in sufficiently
long steps to facilitate jointing of old and new work. The stepping of raking shall not be more
than 45 degrees with the horizontal.
Masonry shall not be laid when the air temperature in the shade is less than 3°C. Newly laid
masonry shall be protected from the harmful effects of weather.
(2) Concrete Capping
Where masonry structures are to receive a concrete capping, the joints to the upper surface
of the masonry shall be raked out to a depth of 10 mm prior to placing of the concrete to the
capping. The concrete for capping shall be as per the Drawing or as directed by Engineer and
shall conform to Section 2000.
(3) Pointing
Where external faces of the mortared masonry work will be backfilled or otherwise
permanently covered up, the mortared joint shall be finished flush to the faces of the adjacent
stonework.
Where mortared masonry faces will remain exposed, the mortar joints shall be pointed to a
consistent style as shown on the Drawing. Pointing shall be carried out using mortar 1:3 by
volume of cement and sand or as shown on the Drawing. The mortar shall be filled and
pressed into the raked out joints before giving the required finish. The pointing, if not
otherwise mentioned, shall be ruled type for which it shall, while masonry work is still green,
be ruled along the centre with half round tools of such width as may be specified by the
engineer. The excess mortar shall,
then, be taken off from the edges of the lines and shall not be unnecessarily plastered over
the exposed stone works. The thickness of the joints shall not be less than 3mm for Ashlar
masonry.
However, the maximum thickness of joints in different works shall be as follows:
Random Rubble : 20mm
Coursed Rubble : 15mm
Ashlar Masonry : 5mm
804 ASHLAR
All stones shall be dressed to accurate planes on the beds and joints and they shall be fair and neatly
or fine tooled on the face unless otherwise described in the contract.
805 BLOCK-IN-COURSE
Beds and joints shall be squared and dressed for a distance of at least 220 mm from the exposed
face. Bond stones shall form at least one sixth of the area of the exposed face and shall extend at
least 900 mm into the wall or for the full thickness of the wall if the latter is less than 900 mm. Unless
described in the contract as tooled or drafted, the exposed face of all stones shall be blocked and left
rough. Arises shall be dressed square at all beds and joints.
806 SQUARE RUBBLE-COURSED OR BROKEN COURSES
All stones shall be truly squared and dressed for a distance at least 120 mm from the face of the wall.
Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of at least one to every 0.8 m2 of exposed face and shall

measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full
thickness of the wall, whichever is the less. Vertical joints in any layer shall be broken in the next layer
and the horizontal lapping of the stones shall not be less than 100 mm.
807 RANDOM RUBBLE - COURSED OR UNCOURSED
All stones shall be carefully set with a bond stone provided at the rate of at least one to every 0.9 m 2
of exposed face. Bond stones shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the exposed face
and not less than 450 mm in length or the full thickness of the wall, whichever is the less.
808 DRY RANDOM RUBBLE
Dry random rubble masonry shall be constructed generally to the requirements of coursed random
rubble masonry as specified in Clause 2607 but with the omission of mortar. All stones shall be
carefully shaped to obtain as close a fit as possible at all beds and joints, any interstices between the
stones being filled with selected stone spalls. The stones in courses shall be laid perpendicular to the
batter face. The exposed tops or capings of dry rubble structures shall be formed as shown on the
Drawing.
809 COMPOSITE RANDOM RUBBLE
Materials for composite random rubble shall comply with Clause 2602 and construction with Clause
2603. Mortar masonry shall be coursed and comply with Clause 2607 and the dry stone insets with
Clause 2608. The dry stone insets shall be constructed when the level of the surrounding mortared
masonry surround has reached the top of the dry stone inset.
810 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of mortar test cubes from each source
of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the mix to the specified strength. Each set shall comprise
two cubes, one to be tested at 7 days and the other to be tested at 28 days. During construction, the
Contractor shall make and test mortar cubes at the rate of three cubes for every 10 m3 of masonry to
assess the strength subject to a minimum of 3 cubes samples for a days work. Testing of cubes shall
be in accordance with IS 2250. The stones shall be tested for the water absorption as per IS: 1124
and it shall not be more than 5 percent. The stones shall also be tested for Specification gravity and it
shall not be less than 2.65. Sand shall be tested as per Clause 613 or as directed by the Engineer. At
least 3 set of tests for stone and sand shall be conducted for every source.
About one square meter (1mx1m) measured in front face of the completed stone masonry in every
200 sq.m or part of it shall be dismantled during the process of construction up to complete depth and
the aggregate volume of the stones having volume more than 0.01m3 shall be obtained by the
method of displacement of water to find the volume of spalls and mortars in the case of mortared
masonry and the volume of spalls and voids in the case of dry masonry. The dismantling shall be
made in such a manner that the quality of the surrounding work is least affected. W hile dismantling,
the tightness of the joints shall also be compared with the thickness of joints as specified for
assessment of the quality of work. If the volume of spalls and mortars is more than the specified
volume and/or the joints are not filled completely with mortar, then the entire work which the sample
and test represent, shall be rejected.
The dismantled portion shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost after completion of the
test.
811 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry shall be measured in cubic meters. The pointing shall be measured in sq.m.
812 PAYMENT
The stone masonry and the pointing shall be paid at the respective contract unit prices which shall be
the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.

CHAPTER 9
900 FORM WORK
901 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
This section covers the preparation, construction and removal of formwork for concrete structures. It
also covers the quality requirements for surface finish on formed and unformed surfaces.
Definitions used in this Clause and other relevant Clauses of this Section and other relevant Sections
of these Specifications are as follows:
Formwork means the surface against which concrete is placed to form a face. All the
immediate supports necessary to retain the surface in position while concrete is placed, shall
be treated an integral part of formwork.
A formed face is one which has been cast against formwork.
An unformed surface means a horizontal or nearly horizontal surface which is not cast against
formwork.
An exposed face is one which will remain visible when construction has been completed.
902 GENERAL
Form works shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the concrete together
with all temporary construction for their support.
Form works shall be designed and erected by the Contractor so that concrete can be properly placed
and compacted in a manner that the hardened concrete conforms to the required shape, position, and
level subject to the specified tolerances and standards of finish. It shall be assembled with adequate
nails and /or nuts and bolts. It shall consist of wooden boards, sheet metals, and any other suitable
material that prevent loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated.
Special care shall be taken to maintain the stability of the form works and the tightness of the joints
particularly during concrete vibrating operations.
The formworks shall be as specified in the BOQ with adequate ribs for the beam, column and slabs.
The Engineer shall approve the material and position of any ties passing through the concrete. The
whole or part of the tie shall be capable of being removed such that any remaining part shall be
embedded in the concrete by at least the specified thickness for reinforcement cover. Any holes
formed by removal of ties shall be filled with concrete or mortar of approved composition.
Form works at top shall be provided where the slope of the formed surface exceeds one in four.
Before each concrete operation commences, form works shall be cleaned of all rubbish and other
foreign particles.
Concrete operations shall not commence until the erected form works has been inspected and
approved. The Contractor shall give at least 48 hours notice for such inspection. On rejection f or any
reason, the Engineer shall require another 48 hours to inspect the rectified errors.
The inside surface of forms shall be coated with an approved material to prevent the adhesion of
concrete. Such material shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and shall not come in contact with the reinforcement or anchors.
903 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE
(1) Construction of Formwork
Joints in formwork for exposed faces shall, unless otherwise specified, be evenly spaced and
horizontal or vertical and shall be continuous in a regular pattern.
All joints in formwork shall be water tight. W here reinforcement projects through formwork, the
form shall fit closely round the bars.
Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the work without damage
to the faces of the concrete. It shall also incorporate provisions for making minor adjustments
in position, if required, to ensure the correct location of concrete faces. Due allowance shall
be made in the position of all formwork for movement and settlement under the weight of
fresh concrete.
Surfaces at slopes less than 20° may be formed by screeding. Surfaces at slopes between
20° and 30° shall generally be formed if the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that such slopes can be screeded with the use of special screed boards to hold

the concrete in place during vibration.
Horizontal or inclined formwork to the upper surface of concrete shall be adequately secured
against uplift due to the pressure of fresh concrete. Formwork shall also be tied down or
otherwise secured against floating within the body of the concrete.
The internal and external angles on concrete surfaces shall be formed with fillets and
chamfers of the sizes shown on the Drawing unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
Supports for formwork may be bolted to previously placed concrete provided the type of bolt
used is acceptable to the Engineer. If metal ties through the concrete are used in conjunction
with bolts, the metal left in shall not be close to the face of the concrete by less than 50mm.
Formwork shall not be re-used after it has suffered damage which is sufficient to impair the
finished surfaces of the concrete.
Where circumstances prevent easy access within the form, temporary openings shall be
provided through the formwork for cleaning and inspection.
Shear keys of the size and shape as indicated on the Drawing shall be provided in all
construction joints.
Where pre-cast concrete elements are specified for use as perm anent formwork, or proposed
by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer, they shall comply with the requirements of
formwork as specified in the Specifications in respect of surface finish, strength and rigidity.
Such elements shall be set true to line and level within the tolerances prescribed for the
appropriate class of finish in Clause 906 and fixed so that they cannot move when concrete is
placed against them.
(2) Preparation of Formwork
Before any reinforcement is placed into position within formwork , the latter shall be thoroughly
cleaned and then dressed with a release agent. The agent shall be either a suitable oil
incorporating a wetting agent, an emulsion of water suspended in oil or a low viscosity oil
containing chemical agents. The Contractor shall not use an emulsion of oil suspended in
water nor any release agent which causes staining or discoloration of the concrete, air holes
on the concrete surface, or retards the set of the concrete or affects the strength of concrete.
In order to avoid color differences on adjacent concrete surfaces, only one type of release
agent shall be used in any one section of the works.
In cases where it is necessary to fix reinforcement before placing formwork, all surface
preparation of formwork shall be carried out before it is placed into position. The Contractor
shall not allow reinforcement or pre-stressing tendons to be contaminated with formwork
release agent.
Before placing concrete all dirt, construction debris and other foreign matter shall be removed
completely from within the placing area.
Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting devices shall be secured
against movement during concrete placing and the Contractor shall maintain a watch on the
formwork during placing to ensure that no movement occurs. If any movement noticed, the
formwork shall be set right immediately.
(3) Removal of Formwork
The Contractor shall give 24 hours notice of his intentions to strike any form works. Forms
shall be removed without shock vibrations or other damage to the concrete.
Formwork shall be carefully removed without shock or disturbance to the concrete. No
formwork shall be removed until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to withstand any
stresses safely to which it may thereby be subjected.
The minimum periods which shall elapse between completion of placing concrete and
removal of forms are given in Table 18-1 and apply to ambient temperatures higher than
10°C. At lower temperatures or if cement other than ordinary Portland are involved, the
Engineer may instruct longer periods.
Alternatively, formwork may be removed when the concrete has attained the strength set out
in Table 900.1, provided that the attained strength is determined by making test cubes and
curing them under the same conditions as the concrete to which they refer.
Compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to delay
removal of formwork until the removal can be completed without damage to the concrete.

If the Contractor wishes to strip formwork from the underside of arches, beams and slabs
before the expiry of the period for supports set out above, it shall be designed so that it can
be removed without disturbing the supports. The Contractor shall not remove supports
temporarily for the purpose of stripping formwork and subsequently replace them.
As soon as the formwork has been removed, bolt holes in concrete faces other than
construction joints which are not required for subsequent operations shall be completely filled
with mortar sufficiently dry to prevent any slumping at the face. The mortar shall be mixed in
the same proportions as the fine aggregate and cement in the surrounding concrete and with
the same materials and shall be finished flush with the face of the concrete.
After removal of the formwork, the date of casting of concrete shall be marked on the surface
of related concrete by water proof paint/marker for estimation of curing time.
T ABLE 900.1: M INIMUM T IME FOR FORM WORKS
Form work Normal Cold Weather Strength to
Weather (days) (days) be attained
1.Vertical or near vertical faces of mass 24 hours 0.2 f ck

concrete
2. Beam sides, walls and unloaded columns 48 hours 1.5: 0.3 f ck
3. Sophist of slabs and beams :

a. Spans up to 3m 4 days 7 days fck
b. Spans over 3m to 6m 11 days 17 days fck
c. Spans over 6m to 12m 14 days 24 fck
d. Spans over 12m 21 days 30 fck
Note: f ck is the Characteristic Strength for the class of concrete used.

904 SURFACE FINISH ON FORMED SURFACES
Classes of Finish
The surface finish to be achieved on formed concrete surfaces shall be as shown on the Drawing and
are defined hereunder:-
(1) Class F1 Finish
This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed. Formwork
may be sawn boards, sheet metal or any other suitable material which will prevent the loss of
laitance from the concrete being placed.
(2) Class F2 Finish
This finish is for surfaces which are permanently exposed to view but the highest standard of
finish is not required. Forms to provide a Class F2 finish shall be faced with wrought
thickened tongued and grooved boards with square edges arranged in a uniform pattern and
close jointed or with suitable sheet material. The thickness of boards or sheets shall be such
that there shall be no visible deflection under the pressure exerted by the concrete placed
against them.
Joints between boards or panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed. In
this type of finish pitting, fins, surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied
at the time and by methods agreed by the Engineer.
(3) Class F3 Finish
This finish is for surfaces which will be in contact with water flowing at high velocity, and for
surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance is of special im portance. To
achieve this finish, which shall be free of board marks, the formwork shall be faced with
plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved
uniform pattern. W herever possible, joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with
architectural features or changes in direction of the surface.
All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed. Suitable
joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of the
sheets. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be permitted for Class F3

finish. The Contractor shall ensure that the surface is protected from rust marks, spillages and
stains of all kinds.
(4) Curved Surfaces
For curved surfaces where F2 or F3 finishes are called for, the formwork face shall be built up
of splines cut to make a tight surface which shall then be dressed to produce the required
finish.
Alternatively single curvature surfaces may be faced with plastic or plywood linings attached
to the backing with adhesive or with escutcheon pins driven flush. Linings shall not bulge,
wrinkle or otherwise deform when subjected to temperature and moisture changes.
(5) Tolerances
All parts of formed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the Drawing within
the tolerances set out in Table 900.2.
In cases where the Drawing call for tolerances other than those given in Table 18.2 the
Drawing shall rule.
Where pre-cast units have been set to a specified tolerance, further adjustments shall be
made as necessary to produce a satisfactory straight or curved line. W hen the Engineer has
approved the alignment, the Contractor shall fix the units so that there is no possibility of
further movement.
T ABLE 900.2: TOLERANCES
Class of finish Tolerances in mm (See Note)

A B C
F1 F2 F3 10 5 2 10 10 5 + 25 to-10 ± 15 ± 10
Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
A is an abrupt irregularity in the surface due to misaligned formwork or defects in the
face of the formwork.
B is a gradual deviation from a plane surface as indicated by a straight edge 3 m long.
In the case of curved surfaces the straight edge shall be replaced by a correctly
shaped template.
C is the amount by which the whole or part of a concrete face is displaced from the
correct positions shown on the Drawing.
905 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES
Horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces which are not cast against formwork shall be finished to the
class shown on the Drawing and defined hereunder.
(1) UF1 Finish
All surfaces on which no higher class of finish is called for on the Drawing or instructed by the
Engineer shall be given a UF 1 finish.
The Concrete shall be leveled and screeded to produce a uniform plain or ridged surface,
surplus concrete being struck off by a straight edge immediately after compaction.
(2) UF 2 Finish
This is a floated finish for roof or floor slabs and other surfaces where a hard trawled surface
is not required.
The surface shall first be treated as a Class UF 1 finish and after the concrete has hardened
sufficiently, it shall be floated by hand or machine sufficient only to produce a uniform surface
free from screed marks.
(3) UF 3 Finish
This is a hard trowelled surface for use where weather resistance or appearance is important,
or which is subject to high velocity water flow.
The surface shall be floated as for a UF 2 finish but to the tolerance stated below in Sub-
clause 906 (5). W hen the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, it shall be steel-trowelled
under firm pressure to produce a dense, smooth uniform surface free from trowel marks.

(4) Tolerances
All parts of unformed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the Drawing within
the tolerances set out in Table 18.3.
In cases where the Drawing call for tolerances other than those given in Table 18.3 the
Drawing shall rule.
T ABLE 900.3: TOLERANCES
Class of finish Tolerances in mm (see Note)
A B C
UF1 UF2 UF3 plicable Nil Nil 10 10 5 + 20 to-10 + 20 or-10
+12.5 or-7.5
Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
A is the maximum allowable value of any sudden change of level in the surface.
B is the maximum allowable value of any gradual irregularity of the surface, as indicated
by the gap between the surface and a three meter long straight edge or correctly
shaped template placed on the surface.
C is the maximum allowable value of the difference in level or position between a three
meter long straightedge or correctly shaped template placed on the surface and the
specified level or position of that surface.
906 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES
If on removal of any formwork the concrete surface is found to be defective in any way, the Contractor
shall make no attempt to remedy such defects prior to the Engineer's inspection and the receipt of any
instructions which the Engineer may give.
Defective surfaces shall not be made good by plastering.
Areas of honey combing which the Engineer agrees, shall be repaired after cutting back to sound
concrete when the concrete is no more than 3 day old. Care shall be taken that reinforcement and
sheathing ducts are not damaged. The cavity shall have sides at right angles to the face of the
concrete. After cleaning out with water and compressed air, a thin layer of cement grout shall be
brushed on to the concrete surfaces in the cavity. It shall then be filled immediately with the concrete
of the same class as the main body. The concrete shall be prepared from the aggregate of maximum
size 0.5 times the depth of the cavity or 20 mm whichever is the smaller. A form provided with a lip to
enable concrete to be placed shall be used against the cavity. The form shall be filled above the top
edge of the cavity.
After seven days the lip of concrete shall be broken off and the surface shall be ground smooth.
When the concrete is more than three day old, areas of honey combing shall be repaired using an
epoxy bonding agent with a method approved by the Engineer.
Surface irregularities which are outside the limits of tolerance set out in Clause 1806 shall be ground
down in the manner and to the extent instructed by the Engineer.
Blowholes in vertical surfaces shall be filled with laitance, or mortar using fine aggregate not larger
than 0.3 mm, rubbed over the affected area with a rubber face float and finished with polythene.
Defects other than those mentioned above shall be dealt with as instructed by the Engineer.
907 MEASUREMENT
Except as stated below, formwork shall be measured in square meter of formwork actually in contact
with the finished face of the concrete. No deduction shall be made in the measurement for openings,
pipes, ducts and the like, provided that the area of each is less than 0.50 square meters. Unless
otherwise stated, if the volume or area of concrete has not been deducted when measuring the
concrete, formwork to form box or the void shall not be measured.
Formwork required for lean concrete, to form construction joints and shear keys for future concrete
and other construction surfaces shall not be measured and the costs shall be included in the rates for
other work.
Formwork to contraction and expansion joints shall be measured in square meter on one face only.
The rates shall include for the costs stated below and for forming recesses for sealant and channels
for grout.

The measurement of formwork is inclusive of the measurement for formwork finished surface, shoring,
staging, scaffolding and other accessories required for erection and removal of the formwork.
908 PAYMENT
The formwork shall be paid as per the contract unit rate. In addition to those specified in Clause 112
the rates for formwork shall include the cost of submission of details, transportation and use of all
materials for formwork, erection including provision of supports, fillets and chamfers 75 mm and less
in width, bolts, ties, fixings, cutting to waste, drilling or notching the formwork for reinforcement where
required, working around pipes, ducts, conduits and waterstops, temporary openings, cleaning,
dressing, removal of formwork, filling bolt holes and any remedial work and for complying with
Clauses 607, 609, 612, and Section 900 including all incidental works required to complete the work
as per Specification.
The payment for unformed surfaces of concrete shall be deemed included in the contract unit rate of
the relevant concrete.

CHAPTER 10
1000 WOOD WORK
1001 SCOPE
This Section covers timber construction of permanent works at locations as shown in the Drawing.
The work specified herein may not be relevant not for the temporary facilities and formwork (centering
and shuttering).
1002 MATERIAL
(1) Timber
Timber for carpentry shall be straight and free from twist, sapwood, shakes, dead and loose
knots, worm holes, other holes, signs of decay and other defects, and seasoned and shall
comply with the requirements of IS 883-1994 The natural moisture content of any untreated
timber delivered to site shall not exceed those as recommended by IS 287-1993.
All beams and scantling shall be sawed along grain and under no condition beams, rafters,
wall plates, blocks etc. shall be sawed across grain. All timber and assembled woodwork shall
be protected from weather for which temporary shed shall be built. All timber shall be stored
at least 750mm above ground level or more, if deemed necessary, and individual members
shall be separated by strips so that air may circulate around all four sides. All wood work
except door/window frames or ceiling shall be painted with two coats of creosote confirming to
IS 218 1952.
(2) Hardware
Hardware shall consist of bolts, with the necessary nuts and washers, timber connectors, drift
pins, dowels, nails, screw nails, coach bolts, spikes and other metal fasteners. They shall be
galvanized or un-galvanized as specified. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be mild steel and
comply with IS 1363-1992. Drift Pins and dowels shall be mild steel. Nails shall comply with IS
723-1972. Screw nails and screws shall comply with IS 451-1972/IS 2585-1968. Coach bolts
shall comply with IS 2609-1972. Spikes and other metal fastenings shall be of mild steel.
All panels except where specified in the drawing shall be fitted with frames having steel
double breasted butt hinges. W indow frames shall have three 7.5cm / 2.00 mm thick hinges
on each panel whereas the size of hinges for door panels shall be as follows:
Width of panels (up to 75cm) :10cm double breasted butt hinge, 2.00mm thick, 3
nos.
Width of panels exceeding 75cm :12.5cm double breasts butt hinges, 2.25mm thick,
3 nos.
Following shall be the size of the screw:
For 7.5cm hinges : 25mm long No. 8
For 10cm hinges : 30mm long No. 9
For 12.5cm hinges : 45mm long No. 10
Above No. refers to Nettlefolds or equivalent screws only.
Doors shall be fitted with double-action automatic hydraulic door closers wherever instructed.
Tower Bolt
All tower bolts shall be of aluminum with bolt casted monolithic with the handle. Following
shall be size of the tower bolt.
Windows Panels 15cm top and bottom
Door 15cm top
15cm bottom (wherever necessary)
All screws shall be of Nettlefold or equivalent suitable lengths and diameter.
Handles
All door shall be provided with handle on both sides and all windows with handles on the inner
side only. Door handled shall be minimum 15cm clear inside and window handle 10cm clear.
All door shall be fitted with mortise lock of heavy quality, preferably of aluminum.
Note

A sample of hardware (tower bolts, handles, hinges, catch and allotrope and screws) will be
displayed at the site at Project Engineer's office as the sample of desired quality and design.
The Contractor shall submit samples of hardware in writing to Project Engineer for approval.
(3) Timber Preservation
When described in the contract or shown on the Drawing timber shall be treated with
preservative in accordance with the Indian Standard Code of Practice for the preservation of
timber IS 401-1982.
Insect Damage
All timber shall be free from live barer beetle or other insect attack when brought upon the
Site. The Contractor shall be responsible to the end of the maintenance period for executing
at his own cost all W ork necessary to eradicate insect attack of timber which becomes
evident, including the replacement of timber attached or suspected of being attack ed, not with
standing that the timber concerned may have already been inspected and passed as fit for
use.
Seasoning of Timber
All timber shall be seasoned to a moisture content of not more than 22% for carpentry and
15% for joinery. The Contractor's price must include for any kiln drying that may be necessary
the achieve these figures.
Inspection and Testing
The Project Engineer shall be given facilities for inspection of all works in progress whether in
Workshop or on Site. All timber as it arrives on the Site and not approved by them must be
removed forthwith, failing which the Employer, with the advise of the Project Engineer, may
arrange for the removal of the rejects and impose of them as they may consider advisable at
the Contractor's expenses.
Notwithstanding approval having been given as above, any timber incorporated in the W orks
found to be in any way defective before the expiry of the maintenance period shall be
removed and renewed at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor is to allow for testing or
prototypes of special construction units and the Project Engineer shall be at liberty to select
any samples they may require for the purpose of testing i.e. for moisture content, or
identification of species, strength, etc.
Where timbers need to be extended into a wall, they shall be thoroughly "Brush Treated" with
a wood preservative approved by the Project Engineer, and as much clear air space
maintained around the timber where it adjoins the wall as possible.
Clearing Up
The Contractor is to clear out and destroy or remove all cut and shavings and other wood
waste from all parts of the building and the Site generally, as the work progress and at the
conclusion of the work.
(4) Galvanizing
When described in the contract or shown on the Drawing, all hardware shall be galvanized in
accordance with the Indian Standard Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron
1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
(1) Timber
Generally the timber for carpentry and joinery shall be Sal wood of the best quality obtained
from an approved saw mill. The timber shall be reasonably straight grained. All timber shall be
seasoned and are to be open stacked. All timber as it arrives on the site shall be inspected by
the Engineer In-charge, and any unapproved timber at the must be removed forthwith. All
timber of assembled woodwork shall be protected from the weather and stored in such a way
as to prevent attack by termites, insects or decay fungi.
The minimum compressive strength of the timber shall be 70 kg/cm2.
site. The contractor shall be responsible up to the end of the maintenance period for
executing at his own cost all work necessary to eradicate insect attack of timber which
becomes evident, including the replacement of timber attached or suspected of being
attacked, not with standing that the timber concerned may have already been inspected and
passed as fit to use before.

All timber shall be seasoned to moisture content of not more than 22% for frames and 15%
for shutter. The contractor’s price must include for any kiln drying that may be necessary to
achieve these figures.
All timber and assembled wood work shall be protected from the weather and stored in such a
way as to prevent attach by termites, insects or decay fungi.
(2) Carpentry
All carpentry shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality. Scantlings and boarding
shall be accurately sawn and shall be of uniform width and thickness throughout. All
carpenter's work shall be left with sawn surface except where particularly specified to be
wrought.
All carpenter's work shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings and
shall be framed together and securely fixed in best possible manner with properly made
joints. All necessary brads, nails and screws, etc. shall be provided as directed and approved.
Actual dimensions of scantlings for carpentry shall not vary from the specified dimensions by
more than 3mm in deficiency or excess but must be uniform throughout. Boards 25mm thick
or less shall hold up to the specified sizes. All timbers shall be as long as possible and
practicable, in order to eliminate joints.
(3) Joinery
Generally all joiner's work shall be accurately set out on boards to full size for the information
and guidance of the artisans before commencing the respective works, with all joints, iron
work and other works connected therewith fully delineated. Such setting out must be
submitted to the Project Engineer and approved before such respective works are
commenced.
All jointer's work shall be cut out and framed together as soon after the commencement of the
building as is practicable, but is not to be wedged up or glued until the building is ready for
fixing same. Any portions that warp, wind or develop shakes or other defects within twelve
months after completion of the works shall be removed and new fixed in their place on
Contractor's own expense.
All work shall be properly mortised, tennoned, housed, shouldered, dovetailed, notched,
wedged, pinned, braided, etc., as directed and to the satisfaction of the Project Engineer and
all properly glued up with the best quality approved glue.
Joints in joinery must be as specified or detailed, and so designed and secured as to resist or
compensate for any stresses to which they may be subjected. All nails, springs, etc. are to be
punched and puttied. Loose joints are to be made where provision must be made for
shrinkage, glued joints where shrinkage need not be considered and where sealed joints are
required. Glue for load-bearing joints or where there is damp conditions must be of the resin
type. For non-load-bearing joints or where dry conditions may be guaranteed casein or
organic glues may be used. All exposed surfaces of joinery W ork shall be wrought and all
arises "eased-off" by planing and sand papering to an approved finish suitable to the specified
treatment.
Dimensions
Joinery shall hold up to the specified sizes and as measured.
Fixing Joinery
All beads, fillets and small members shall be fixed with round or oval brads on nails on nails
well punched in and stopped. All large members shall be fixed with screws, the heads let in
and palliated to match the grain.
Unless otherwise specified, plugs of external work shall be of hardwood, plugs for internal
work may be of softwood. Holes for plugging must be made with a proper drilling tool and the
holes completely filled with the plugging material.
Unless otherwise specified all skirting, window, grounds and backings for same, fillets etc.
shall be plugged at intervals not exceeding 60cm.
Budding Joiner
All door and window frames, sills, wooden bars etc., which are fixed to brickwork, concrete by
means of grounds, lugs, etc., shall be bedded solid in mortar as previously described and
pointed with a recessed joint 6mm deep to the approval of the Project Engineer.

Plywood’s, Blackboards, Chipboards etc., shall be of a standard quality. They shall be bonded
with synthetic resin or "interior" type unless otherwise stated. W here stated to be "exterior"
type, they shall be weatherproof. All exposed edges of blackboard and clipboard shall be
lipped with hardwood as described below.
Samples of all such materials and their source of manufacture must be approved by the
Project Engineer before used in the works.
Plastic Sheeting
Shall be approved laminated sheeting 1.5mm thick, securely fixed by means of Aerodux 185
adhesive, and in colors approved by the Project Engineer.
(4) Ironmongery
All locks and Ironmongery shall be fixed with screws, etc., to match. Before the woodwork is
painted, handles shall be removed, carefully stored and re-fixed after completion of painting
and locks oiled and left in perfect working order.
Prices for fixing locks must include for organizing master-keying systems if required and all
keys shall be labeled with door references marked on approved labels before handling the
Project Engineer on completion.
1004 BEAMS LINTEL, RAFTERS, PURLINS, WALL PLATES, POST/COLUMN
All wood work shall be planed neatly and truly finished to the exact dimensions. All joints shall be neat
and tight, truly and accurately fitted. W all plates, purlins and rafter shall be painted with 2 costs of
creosote conforming IS 218 1952.
All beams shall be bedded on (1:2:4) RCC beds of 10cm x 7.5cm x 4.5cm dimension with a minimum
of 15cm bearing or as specified in the drawing. All portion of timber in contact with masonry shall have
6mm gap sides. All beams shall rest on bearing.
Measurement of wood work shall be in volumes. for the finished work, including fixing, sawing,
planning, joining, nails, screws etc. W ooden blocks/joints wherever specified may be measured in
number.
1005 DOORS AND WINDOWS FRAMES
Timber for carpentry shall be of salwood of best quality, free from saps, fissures, and knots, sore
and/or other defects. All beams and scantling shall be sawed along grain and under no condition
beams, rafters, wall plates, blocks etc. shall be sawed across grain. All timber and assembled
woodwork shall be protected from weather for which temporary shed shall be built. All timber shall be
stored at least 750mm above ground level or more, if deemed necessary, and individual members
shall be separated by strips so that air may circulate around all four sides. All wood work except
door/window frames or ceiling shall be painted with two coats of creosote confirming to IS 218 1952.
1006 WOODEN DOOR AND WINDOWS FRAME
(1) Material
Generally the timber for carpentry and joinery shall be Sal wood of the best quality obtained
from an approved saw mill. The timber shall be reasonably straight grained. All timber shall be
seasoned and are to be open stacked. All timber as it arrives on the site shall be inspected by
the Engineer In-charge, and any unapproved timber at the must be removed forthwith. All
timber of assembled woodwork shall be protected from the weather and stored in such a way
as to prevent attack by termites, insects or decay fungi.
The minimum compressive strength of the timber shall be 70 kg/cm2.
site. The contractor shall be responsible up to the end of the maintenance period for
executing at his own cost all work necessary to eradicate insect attack of timber which
becomes evident, including the replacement of timber attached or suspected of being
attacked, not with standing that the timber concerned may have already been inspected and
passed as fit use before.
All timber shall be seasoned to moisture content of not more than 22% for frames and 15%
for shutter. The contractor’s price must include for any kiln drying that may be necessary to
achieve these figures.

(2) Construction Procedures
Clearing Up:

The contractor is to clear out and destroy or remove all cut and shavings and other wood
waste from all parts of the building and the site generally, as the work progress and at the
conclusion of the work.
Carpentry:
All carpentry shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality. Scantling and boarding
shall be accurately sawn and shall be of uniform width and thickness throughout. All
carpenter’s work shall be left with sawn surface except where particularly specified to be
wrought.
All carpenter’s work shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings and
shall be framed together and securely fixed in best possible manner with properly made
joints. All necessary brads, sheet metal screws, etc. shall be provided as directed and
approved.
Joinery:
All joints shall be accurately set out on boards to full size for the information and guidance of
the artisans before commencing the respective works, with all joints, iron work and other
works connected therewith fully delineated. Such setting out must be submitted to the
Engineer In-charge and approved before such respective works are commenced.
All jointer’s work shall be cut out and framed together as soon after the commencement of the
building as is practicable, but is not to be wedged up or glued until the building is ready for
fixing same. Any portions that warp, wind or develop shakes or other defects within six
months after completion of the works shall be removed and new fixed in their place on
contractor’s own expense.
All work shall be properly mortises, tenons, house, shouldered, dovetailed, notched, wedged,
pinned, braided, etc., as directed and to the satisfaction of the consultants and all properly
glued up with the best quality approved glue.
Joints in joinery must be as specified or detailed, and so designed and secured as to resist or
compensate for any stresses to which they may be subjected. All nails, springs, etc. are to be
punched and puttied. Loose joints are to be made where provision must be made for
shrinkage, glued joints where shrinkage need not be considered and where sealed joints are
required. Glue for load-bearing joints or where conditions may be damp must be damp must
be of the resin type. For non-load-bearing joints or conditions may be guaranteed casein or
organic glues may be used. All exposed surfaces of joinery work shall be wrought and all
arise “eased-off” by plaining and sand papering to an approved finish suitable to the specified
treatment.
Dimensions:
Joinery shall hold up to the specified sizes and as measure.
Fixing Joinery:
All beads, fillets and small members shall be fixed with round or oval brads on nails well
punched in and stopped. All large members shall be fixed with brass screws, the heads let in
and palette to match the grain.
Unless otherwise specified, plugs of external work shall be of hardwood; plugs for internal
work may be of softwood. Holes for plugging must be made with a proper drilling tool and the
holes completely filled with the plugging material.
Unless otherwise specified all skirting, window, grounds and backings for same, fillets etc.,
shall be plugged at intervals not exceeding 600mm.
Bedding Joinery:
All door and window frames, sills, wooden bars etc., which are fixed to brickwork, concrete by
means of grounds, lugs, etc., shall be bedded solid in mortar as previously described and
pointed with a recessed joint 6mm deep to the approval of the Engineer In-charge.
Plywood, Block boards, Chipboards and MDF board, shall be bonded with synthetic resin of
“interior” type and sheet metal screws unless otherwise stated for the doors. W here stated to
be “exterior” type, they shall be weatherproof.
All exposed edges of block board and chipboard shall be lipped with hardwood as described
below.
Samples of all such materials and their source of manufacture must be approved by the

Engineer In-charge before used in the works.
(3) Inspection and Testing
The Engineer In-charge shall be given facilities for inspection of all works in progress whether
in workshop or on site. All timber as it arrives on the site and not approved by them must be
removed forthwith, failing which the Employer, with the advise of the Engineer In-charge, may
arrange for the removal of the rejects and impose of them as they may consider advisable at
the contractor’s expenses.
Notwithstanding approval having been given as above, any timber incorporated in the works
found to be in any way defective before the expiry of the maintenance period shall be
removed and renewed at the contractor’s expense. The contractor is to allow for testing or
prototypes of special construction units and the Engineer In-charge shall be at liberty to select
any samples they may require for the purpose of testing i.e. for moisture content, or
identification of species, strength, etc.
Where timbers need to be extended into a wall, they shall be thoroughly “Brush Treated” with
a wood preservative approved by the Engineer In-charge, and as much clear air space
maintained around the timber where it adjoins the wall as possible.
(4) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in m³ of works as specified.
(5) Payment
The payment will be full and final compensation for all material, labor, and equipment to
complete the works as specified.
1007 WOODEN WINDOW SHUTTERS
(1) Material
The material shall conform as in Clause 1006(1)
The window shutters shall have minimum of 100mm steel hinges with steel screws, one
aluminum handle and 150mm two tower bolts of super brand or equivalent with steel screws.
(2) Construction Procedure
The window shutters may be fully paneled, fully glazed, partly glazed and partly paneled,
battened or Venetian as specified. Styles and panels shall be neatly planed and truly finished
to exact dimensions. Styles and rails shall be framed properly and accurately with mortise and
tenon joints and fixed with bamboo pins as per drawing. Glue shall be applied at al joints
before clamping and fixing with bamboo pins. Panels shall be of one piece without any joints
and shall be housed with 12.5mm insertion into rails and styles.
Panels shall be of thickness as specified in the drawing. All rails above 100mm in width shall
have double tenon. No tenon shall exceed 6mm the thickness of the member. In case of
swing door, swing door hung in lace shall not be rebated together. It shall be fitted with vision
panels.
The construction procedure shall conform as in Clause 1006(2)
(3) Testing and Inspection
The Testing and Inspection shall conform as in Clause 1006(3)
(4) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in m 2 of works as specified.
(5) Payment
1008 GLAZED WINDOW SHUTTERS
(1) Material

All glass shall be IAG free from flaws like bubbles, specks, waves and other imperfections.
Glass panes shall be cut to sizes to fit the openings with not more than 1.5mm play all round

and where puttied shall be sprigged to wood or clipped to metal frames.
Glass shall be of quality and type as follows:
Clear sheet glass O.Q. quality
Cast and/ or obscured glass pattern similar to sample approves by the Engineer
In-charge.
Plate-glass S.G. quality or “Float” Glass
Putty for glazing in wood frames shall be composed of pure linseed oil and whiting powder
free from grittiness.
Rebates of metal frames receiving glass shall be prepared and treated with primer for putty
prior to glazing and putty shall be primed ten days after glazing (See Painting).
Glass louvers shall have ground edges and be fixed in accordance with the instruction of the
louver frame manufacturer.
Mirrors shall be 4mm S.G. silvered plate glass or Swan brand with polished edges, and shall
be drilled for and fixed with four chromium plated screws with detachable dome heads.
On completion remove all broken, scratched or cracked panes and replace with new to the
satisfaction of the Engineer In-charge. Clean inside and out with approved cleaner. On no
account shall scraping with glass clean windows.
The thickness of the glass, if not specified in the detail drawing, shall be as follows:
i. For a pane of more than 1160 sq. cm. but less than 2790 sq. cm. the thickness shall
be 4mm or more as decided by the site In-charge.
ii. For a pane of not more than 1160 sq. cm. area, thickness should not be less than
3mm.
iii. For a pane more than 2790 sq. cm. thickness of glass shall be 5mm or more as
decided by the Engineer In-charge.
iv. For vision pane in swing window-thickness should be 4mm minimum.
All glass panes shall be fitted with wooden beads.
All wooden beads shall be from hard wood fitted against the glass. W ooden beads shall be
bedded against the rebate and secured by 12.5mm glass nails fixed at 75mm apart. The
rebate depth shall be 12.5mm W ooden beads shall not project beyond the rebate.
All glass panes shall have edge-clearance, when fitted of 1.5mm all round.
Beads shall be painted with approved paint before fixing glass pane.
The window shutters shall have minimum of two-piece 100mm steel hinges with steel screws,
one aluminum handle and two pieces of 150mm tower bolts of super brand or equivalent with
steel screws.
panels.
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment

1009 WOODEN PANELED DOOR SHUTTERS
(1) Material
The door shutters are polished with clear chapra polish and painted with two coats of touch
wood polish.
The Door shutters shall have minimum of three pieces of 150mm brass hinges with brass
screws, one IPSA Mortise lock of heavy duty or equivalent, two pieces of 150mm brass tower
bolts of good quality with brass screws, 75 mm doorstopper.
The door shutters may be fully paneled, fully glazed, partly glazed and partly paneled,
panels.
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment
1010 WOODEN SOLID CORE DOOR SHUTTERS
(1) Material
Wooden solid core of lightwood with 4mm Teak plywood in both sides glued and lipped with
mould salwood of sample approved by project engineer. The tolerances for the overall size
are +-3mm +-1mm in thickness.
Where described as “External Quality” flushes doors are to be finished with weatherproof
plywood as before described and the Engineer In-charge must approve sample doors before
the doors are completed. The door shutters are polished with clear chapra polish and painted
with two coats of touch wood polish.
The doors shall be sticked with molding of approved design in the shape as shown in the
drawing.
The Door shutters shall have minimum of three pieces of 150mm brass hinges with brass
screws, one IPSA Mortise lock of heavy duty or equivalent, two pieces of 150mm brass tower
bolts of good quality with brass screws, 75 mm doorstopper.
to exact dimensions. Styles and rails shall be fram ed properly and accurately with mortise and

panels.
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment
1011 WOODEN CARVING DOOR AND WINDOWS FRAME AND SHUTTERS
(1) Material
The construction procedure shall conform as in Clause 1006(2). The carving of the doors and
windows should be refined aesthetically with reflection carving craftsmanship as approved by
Architect
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment

CHAPTER 11
1100 PLASTER AND POINTING WORK
1101 SCOPE
This Section covers furnishing of materials and construction of different grades of plaster works in
accordance with the BOQ, Drawing and this Specification or as directed by the Engineer.
Plastering shall be made up of mortar consisting of cement, sand in the different proportion as
indicated in the BOQ as specified in the drawing.
1102 MATERIAL
Cement shall be fresh and free from impurities and as specified in clause 413, river bed sand shall be
used. Sand for plastering shall be finer than the sand used for concreting or stone work. Following
shall be proportion of different size of grains.
Grain Percent
0 to 0.5 mm = 30%
0.5 to 2 mm = 50%
2 to 3 mm = 20%
Water shall be clean and free from pollution by soil particles, humus, mud, dirt, natural or vegetable
oil, soap and other impurities.
1103 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
The surface to be plastered shall be brushed clean mortar joints of brick masonry or hollow concrete
walls or any other surface to be plastered shall be raked to a depth of approximately 12mm, and the
surface brushed down with a stiff brush and thoroughly wetted. The surface shall be free of all dust,
loose materials, grease etc.
The mortar shall be first dry mixed, by measuring with boxes to required proportion, and then water
added slowly and gradually and mixed thoroughly to uniform consistency.
The thickness of the plaster shall not be less than 12 mm not more than 20mm. In case of plaster
thicker than 20mm, it shall be built by two or more coats each coat not exceeding 12mm in thickness.
Cement shall be as specified above.
Sand shall be as before specified but shall be graded to a suitable fineness in accordance with the
nature of the plaster, etc., in order to obtain the finish required.
Lime for plastering shall be as before described in clause 414 and slaked and run at least four weeks
before use.
All other mixes shall be constructed in a like manner.
Moist curing shall be accomplished by keeping the plaster uniformly damp by suitable means. Moist
curing shall start during application and continue for not less than 7 days.
Hacking
Prices of all paving and plastering etc. shall include for hacking concrete ceilings, beams, floors etc.,
by approved means and for raking out joints of walls 12mm deep to form a proper key. Plastering on
walls generally shall be taken to include flush faces of lintels etc., in same.
Surfaces to be paved or plastered must be brushed clean and well wetted before each coat is applied.
All cement plaster shall be kept continually damp in the interval between application of coats and for
seven days after application of the final coat.
Dubbing out where required shall be composed of similar material to that following.
Partially or wholly set material will not be allowed to be used or re-mixed.
Samples
The Contractor shall prepare sample square meter of the plastering and paving as directed until the
quality, texture and finish required is obtained and approved by the Project Engineer after which all
plastering or paving executed shall conform with the respective approved sample. No payment shall
be accounted for such sampling.
Finish
Care shall be taken to insure that finished plaster surfaces shall be plumb, square, straight and true to

line.
Generally all screeds and paving shall be finished smooth, even and truly level (unless specifically
required to falls and currents, etc.), and paving shall be steel troweled or floated.
Rendering and plastering shall be finished plumb, square, smooth and even.
All surfaces to be plastered shall be thoroughly wetted before any plastering is commenced and the
Contractor shall allow in his prices for dusting external angles with neat cement to give additional
strength.
No plastering will be allowed to take place until all chases for service have been cut, services installed
and chases made good. On no account may finished plaster surface be chased and made good.
All W ork shall be to approval and any not complying with the above shall be hacked away and
replaced, as directed, and at the Contractor's expense.
Arises and Angles in Plastering
All arises shall be clean and sharp or slightly rounded as directed including neatly forming miters.
All making good shall be cut out to a rectangular shape, the edges undercut to form dovetail key and
finished flush with face of surrounding plaster. All cracks, blisters and other defects must be cut out
made good and the whole of the paving and plastering W ork left perfect on completion.
Screeds shall be in cement and sand (1:4) and rates shall include for thoroughly hacking, cleaning
and soaking the receiving structure in water. No creed shall be laid on a dry structure in any
circumstances.
Where changes of floor finish occur they shall be divided by strips as specified.
The Contractor's special attention is drawn to the fact that all screeds, immediately after the initial set
has taken place, will be required to be continuously covered in water by the sand trap or other
approved method for at least 10 days. Any screed panel that is found to be dry before the end of this
period shall be removed at the discretion of the Project Engineer.
Waterproofed external rendering shall consist of minimum 12mm cement and sand (1:4) rendering at
the rate of 2.05 liter to 41 kgs of cement all in accordance with the m anufacturer's instructions and
finished perfectly true and even with a wood float.
External Plastering and Rendering:
Waterproofed External Plaster or Rendering work shall consist of minimum 12.5mm to 16mm as
detailed in the Bill of Quantity with cement/ sand ratio 1:3 or 4 at the rate of 1/2 gallon to 90 lbs of
cement all in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and finished perfectly true and even
with a wood float.
Internal Plastering and Rendering:
Internal Plastering or Rendering shall consist of minimum 12.5mm to 16mm as detailed in the Bill of
Quantities with cement/ sand ration 1:3, 4 finished perfectly true and even with a wood float.
1104 PUNNING AND POINTING WORKS
(1) Materials
The materials required for punning and pointing works are cement, sand and water and shall
be in accordance with the requirements of clause 1002.
Before applying the punning and pointing, the base surface shall be cleaned, any dust or
loose particles removed and thoroughly wetted. The surface shall be free of all dust, loose
materials, grease etc. The average thickness of the punning and pointing work shall not be
less than 3 mm. The pattern shall be as per instruction of the Engineer or as shown in the
drawings.
The mortar shall be first dry mixed, by measuring with boxes to required proportion, and then
water added slowly and gradually and mixed thoroughly to uniform consistency.
The coat shall be finished by rubbing with a steel trowel and any depression shall be filled in
and rubbed to shining surface.
Cement shall be as specified above.
Sand shall be as before specified but shall be graded to a suitable fineness in accordance
with the nature of the plaster, etc., in order to obtain the finish required.
All other mixes shall be constructed in a like manner.

Moist curing shall be accomplished by keeping the plaster uniformly damp by suitable means.
Moist curing shall start during application and continue for not less than 7 days.
1105 MEASUREMENT
1106 PAYMENT
works as specified.

CHAPTER 12
1200 PAINTING
1201 SCOPE
This Section covers furnishing of materials and construction of different types of painting works in
1202 DELIVERY AND APPLICATION OF PAINT:
All materials shall be delivered on site intact in the original drums or tins and shall be mixed and
applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and to the approval of the Engineer.
All cement paints and washable distemper shall be applied b y brush; emulsion paints shall be applied
by means of a brush then rolled. All enamel paints are applied by brush or sprayed, and bitumen and
bituminous base aluminum paints are applied by brush. Before application of any paint, adjoining
surfaces shall be covered by cloth, or paper and wherever paints stains it shall be removed before
leaving the work in same day.
The only addition, which will be allowed to be made locally will be liquid thinners supplied or
recommended by the manufacturers and none shall be, thinned more than approved by the Engineer.
1203 PREPARATION AND PRIMING OF SURFACES:
Concrete and Cement rendered surfaces shall be smooth and free from defects and shall be allowed
to dry out thoroughly. Surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed down and left free from all efflorescence,
dirt and dust.
All such surfaces, which are to be finished with oil or enamel paint, shall be primed with two coats of
alkali resisting primer.
Plaster surfaces shall be perfectly smooth and free from defect. All such surf aces shall be allowed to
dry for a minimum period of four weeks. Surfaces shall be stopped with approved plaster compound,
rubbed down flush, thoroughly brushed down and left free from all efflorescence, dirt and dust.
Fair-faced surfaces shall be dry, brushed down and free from dust or dirt and shall be treated with an
approved alkali resisting primer (for plastic emulsion).
Metal work generally shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove all scale, rust, and through sand
papering shall be done before any painting is done. Where severe rust exists, the special anti-rust
primer must be used. After painting it shall be stored in covered shed and 60cm above ground.
Shop primed surfaces shall have bare places touched up with an approved metal primer.
Un-primed surfaces shall be given one coat of primer as last.
Galvanized surfaces, which are thoroughly weathered, shall be, brushed down with white spirit,
washed down and given one coat of zinc chromate primer.
Bituminous-coated surfaces shall be given as isolating coat of shellac knotting followed by an
approved metal primer.
Woodwork generally shall be rubbed down, given one coat shellac knotting, one coat wood self
knotting primer, and all cracks, nail holes, defects, and uneven surfaces, etc., stopped and faces up
with hard stopping rubbed down flush.
Before oiling woodwork all stains must be removed and uniform color obtained and filled.
1204 COLORS AND PRIMING:
The priming undercoats and finishing coats shall each be of differing tints and the priming and
undercoats shall be of the correct types and tints to suit the respective finishing coats in accordance
with the following instructions. All finishing coats shall be of colors and tints selected by the Engineer.
The paintwork shall have and uniform finish and all paint for external work shall be exterior quality
only.
(1) Rubbing Down:
Each coat of paint shall be properly dried and shall be well rubbed down with fine glass paper
before the next coat is applied. The paintwork shall be finished smooth and free from brush
marks.
Samples Cards of all paints, etc., shall be submitted to and samples prepared for approval of
the Engineer before laying on and such samples, when approved, shall become the standard
for work.

(2) Program:
The contractor shall so arrange his program of work that all other Trades are completed and
away from the area to be painted when the painting begins.
(3) Ironmongery, Protection and Cleaning Up:
All ironmongery shall be removed from joinery before painting is commenced and shall be
cleaned and renovated of necessary and re-fixed after completion painting.
Cover up all floors, etc., with non-resinous sawdust or other approved covering when
executing and all painting decorating work.
Paint splashes, spots and stains shall be removed from floors, woodwork, etc., and damaged
surface touched up and the whole of the work left clean upon completion.
(4) Materials:
All paint materials of specified brand shall be obtained the manufacturer or authorized dealer.
All sealers, primers and undercoating are to be obtained from the makers of the finishing
materials and are to be in accordance with their recommendation for the particular finish
required.
(5) Knot Sealer:
For use on knots and resinous portions of woodwork.
Stopping and Filling composed of parts putty to one part of stiff white lead.
(6) Lacquer:
Approved polyurethane eggshell clear lacquer applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Polish shall be an approved brand of wax polish.
Oil shall be best quality linseed oil.
Filler for polished or oiled surfaces to be Beeswax filler.
(7) Wood Preservative:
All wood work, as specified or instructed shall, be treated after cutting and preparation but
before assembly or fixing with three coats of solution consisting of one part if Atlas “A” wood
preservative brown grade to three parts of water. The solution is to the brushed in all faces of
all timbers unless exposed to view and painted. This is applicable in the wood frame contact
with masonry and roof purling, batten and counter rafter.
The contractor shall note that this solution is HIGHLY POISONOUS and shall take all
necessary precautions and instruct his workmen accordingly.
(8) Paint Application:
Painting Items as described hereafter shall comprise the following, and shall all include for
preparing and priming surfaces as above described: -
Cement Paint :Apply two coats.
Plastic Emulsion :Apply a minimum of three coats, using a thinning medium or
water only if and as recommended by the manufacturer. An
approved plaster primer tinted to match may be substituted
for the first coat.
Paint :Apply two undercoats and one finishing coat of enamel gloss
oil paint.
Flat oil paint :Apply two coats of flat oil paint, using thinning medium in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Oil :Apply two coats of linseed oil.
Wax Polish :Apply a minimum of two coats to approval.
Lacquer :Apply three coats of Polythene lacquer as described, to
approval.
Prime :Prepare and prime only before fixing.
1205 CEMENT PAINT
Cement paint shall be of ready mixed type in sealed container of Approved brand. It shall be procured
either in 50 kg. Container or 25 kg. Container. All such container shall have unbroken seal with

manufacturer’s name and trade marks as well as a description of contents all clearly marked. Such
paint shall be mixed and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and with
the approval of site In-charge. All materials shall be stored in dry place.
Only fresh cement paint shall be used, hard or set paint shall not be used. The container shall be
made loose by rolling and shaking the container before opening.
First a paste shall be prepared by mixing 2 parts of cement paint powder with one part of water by
volume and immediately this shall be thinned by adding another part of water to have uniform solution
of consistency of paints.
Before application of paint all dust and foreign materials shall be removed from the surface by use of
wire brush. The surface shall be allowed to run off. The fresh mixed point shall be frequently stirred
during application and no mixture (paint) shall be used after an hour of mixing. The first coat shall be
kept wetted for at least 24 hours before the second coat is applied. The surface shall be thoroughly
wetted before the second cost is applied.
The final painted surface shall exhibit uniform and good finished appearance. Measurement shall
being square meter of actual covered area. No extra shall be allowed for scaffolding, curing and
painting corners, plaster strips etc.
1206 ENAMEL PAINT
The enamel paint shall be of Approved Brand. All surfaces to be painted shall be planed and
thoroughly sand papered, first by using No. 120 sandpaper. Ordinary putting shall fill up nail holes,
cracks or other in equalities. Putting shall be made up of 2 parts of best quality whiting (absolutely
dead stone lime) 1 part if white lead mixed together in linseed oil and kneaded (3 oz. of linseed oil to 1
lb. of whiting). A primer coat shall be locally applied in holes, cracks etc. before putty is applied.
After the surface is dry, it shall be sand paper by using No. 60 sandpaper.
Surface so prepared shall be painted with one coat of primer. The primed surface when dry shall be
sand papered by using No. 100 sand paper.
The primed surface so prepared shall be painted with one coat of selected enamel using bristle brush
and not horsehair ones. The paint shall be applied in thinnest possible layers with parallel strokes.
Care shall be taken to ensure the surface being free from dust or other foreign material before priming
or enameling the surface. No paint shall splash on the floor, wall jambs, sill or other part of the
building.
Primers and paints shall be of first class approved quality and of approved manufacturer as specified.
These materials shall be ready mixed and in sealed tins with manufacturer’s name, color and
instruction clearly painted in the container.
1207 WASHABLE DISTEMPER
Washable distemper shall be of approved Brand. The Engineer shall examine the paints before seal is
broken.
Only fresh distemper shall be used, hard or set shall not be used.
1208 PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT
Approved brand of plastic emulsion paint shall be used in the plaster of Paris or lime punned surfaces.
1209 BITUMINOUS ALUMINUM PAINT
Bituminous Aluminum paint shall be of approved Brand. The Engineer shall examine the paints before
seal is broken.
1309 RED LEAD PRIMER
Red Lead primer paint shall be approved brand. The lead content in the paint shall be less than 60%
by weight. The site in charge shall examine the paints before seal is broken.
1210 CHAPRA POLISH
Before application of Chapra polish, the timber surfaces shall be thoroughly sand papered to obtain
smooth surfaces and all the dust are removed from the surfaces. A coat of primer of chalk power
mixed with resign is applied and sand papered to fill in the voids and joints.
The chapra polish is prepared from the chapra mixed with spirit. The chapra must completely dissolve
in the spirit. Over the primed surfaces, two layers of resin is applied by the smooth cotton clothes and
dried.

1211 POLYURETHANE PAINT
Approved polyurethane or equivalent eggshell clear lacquer applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Polish shall be an approved brand of wax polish.
Oil shall be best quality linseed oil.
Filler for polished or oiled surfaces to be Beeswax filler.
1212 WHITE WASHING
Fresh white lime slaked at Site of W ork shall be mixed with clean water to make thin cream. It shall be
screened through a coarse cloth, and gum (glue) in the proportion of 100 grams to 16 liters of water
shall be added.
The surface to be white washed must be dry and thoroughly cleared from dust and dirt. The wash
shall be applied with "Babio" or brush, vertically and horizontally alternately, and the wash kept stirring
in the container while using as per standard code of practice..
No paint should splash on floor or door/window frames and panels.
1213 MEASUREMENT
Prices of paints, etc., shall include for preparation of surfaces, rubbing down between each coat,
stopping, knotting, etc., and all other W ork in connection as described and as necessary to obtain a
first class and proper finish. Should the description stated in the items of the bills be insufficient in the
Contractor's opinion to obtain such a finish, the Contractor must allow in his prices for such extra
coats, materials or W ork necessary to obtain such a finish to the Engineer's approval. Price must
include for the provision of all necessary scaffolding, plant and tools, and also for applying different
colors and cutting into where and as necessary.
Painting Items as billed hereafter shall comprise the following, and shall all include for preparing and
priming surfaces as above described:-
Cement Paint - Apply two coats.
Plastic Emulsion - Apply a minimum of three coats, using a thinning medium or water
only if and as recommended by the manufacturer. An approved plaster primer tinted to match may be
substituted for the first cost.
Paint - Apply two undercoats and one finishing coat of enamel
gloss oil paint.
Flat oil paint - Apply two coats of flat oil paint, using thinning medium
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Oil - Apply two coats of linseed oil.
Wax Polish - Apply a minimum of two coats to approval.
Lacquer - Apply three coats of Polyurethane lacquer as
described, to approval.
Prime - Prepare and prime only before fixing.
Measurement of all the painting works will be made in m 2 of works as specified except for the grills,
handrails, railing and cornices.
1214 PAYMENT
works as specified
ANTI-TERMITE WORKS
Pre constructional anti-termite treatment is a process in which soil treatment is applied to a building in
early stages of its construction. The purpose of anti-termite treatment is to provide the building with a
chemical barrier against the sub-terrain termites. Anti-termite treatment being a specialized job, calls
for thorough knowledge of the chemicals, soils, termite to be dealt with and the environmental
conditions, in order to give effective treatment and lasting protection to the property undergoing
treatment. It is therefore imperative that the works of anti-termite treatment should be got executed
through specialized agencies only.

The pre constructional soil treatment is required to be applied during the construction stages of the
sub-structure up to plinth level. The contractor has to be watchful of the various stages of sub-
structure works and arrange to carry out the soil treatment in time after proper coordination with
Department and other contractors if any, working at site.
Materials
Chemicals: Any one of the following chemicals in water emulsion to achieve the percentage
concentration specified against each chemical shall be used:
(i) Chlorphriphos emulsifiable concentrate of 20%
(ii) Lindane emulsifiable concentrate of 20%
To achieve the specified percentage of concentration, Chemical should be diluted with water in
required quantity before it is used. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemical with
water in the required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of concentration.
Safety Precautions
Chemical used for antitermite treatment are insecticides with a persistent action and are highly
poisonous. This chemical can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin,
inhaled as vapours or spray mists or swallowed. The containers having emulsifiable concentrates
shall be clearly labeled and kept securely closed in stores so that children or pet cannot get at them.
Storage and mixing of concentrates shall not be done near any fire source or flame. Persons carrying
out chemical soil treatments should familiarize themselves and exercise due care when handling the
chemicals whether in concentrated or in diluted form. After handling the concentrates or dilute
emulsion, worker shall wash themselves with soap and water and wear clean clothing especially
before eating and smoking. In the event of severe contamination, clothing shall be removed at once
and the skin washed with soap and water. If chemical has splashed into the eyes, they shall be
flushed with plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention shall be sought. The use of
chemical shall be avoided where there is any risk of wells or other water supplies becoming
contaminated.
Treatment
Treatment along outside of foundations: The soil in contact with the external wall of the building
shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 litres per square metre of vertical surface of
the substructure to a depth of 300 mm. To facilitate this treatment, a shallow channel shall be
excavated along and close to the wall face. The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the wall
at 1.75 litres per running metre of the channel. Rodding with 12 mm diameter mild steel rods at 150
mm apart shall be done in the channel. If necessary, for uniform dispersal of the chemical to 300 mm
depth from the ground level. The balance chemical of 0.5 litre per running metre shall then be used to
treat the backfill earth as it is returned to the channel directing the spray towards the wall surface. If
there is a concrete or masonry apron around the building, approximately 12 mm diameter holes shall
be drilled as close as possible to the plinth wall about 300 mm apart, deep enough to reach the soil
below and the chemical emulsion pumped into these holes to soak the soil below at the rate of 2.25
litres per linear metre. In soils which do not allow percolation of chemicals to desired depth, the
uniform disposal of the chemical to a depth of 300 mm shall be obtained by suitably modifying the
mode of treatment depending on site condition.
In case of RCC foundations the soil (backfill) in contact with the column sides and plinth beams along
with external perimeter of the building shall be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5
litres/sqm of the vertical surface of the structure. To facilitate this treatment, trenches shall be
excavated equal to the width of the shovel exposing the sides of the column and plinth beams upto a
depth of 300 mm or upto the bottom of the plinth beams, if this level is less than 300 mm. The
chemical emulsion shall be sprayed on the backfill earth as it is returned into the trench directing the
spray against the concrete surface of the beam or column as the case may be.
Treatment of Soil under Floors: The points where the termites are likely to seek entry through the
floor are the cracks at the following locations:
(a) At the junction of the floor and walls as result of shrinkage of the concrete;
(b) On the floor surface owing to construction defects;
(c) At construction joints in a concrete floor, cracks in sections; and
(d) Expansion joints in the floor.
Chemical treatment shall be provided in the plinth area of ground floor of the structure, wherever such
cracks are noticed by drilling 12 mm holes at the junction of floor and walls along the cracks on the
floor and along the construction and expansion joints at the interval of 300 mm to reach the soil below.
Chemical emulsion shall be squirted into these holes using a hand operated pressure pump to soak
the soil below until refusal or upto a maximum of one litre per hole. The holes shall then be sealed
properly with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) finished to match the existing floors. The
cement mortar applied shall be cured for at least 10 days as per instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
Treatment of Voids in Masonry: The movement of termites through the masonry wall may be
arrested by drilling holes in masonry wall at plilnth level and squirting chemical emulsions into the
holes to soak the masonry. The holes shall be drilled at an angle of 45 degree from both sides of the
plinth wall at 300 mm intervals and emulsion squirted through these holes to soak the masonry using
a hand operated pump. This treatment shall also be extended to internal walls having foundations in
the soil. Holes shall also be drilled at wall corners and where door and window frames are embedded
in the masonry or floor at ground. Emulsion shall be squirted through the holes till refusal or to a
maximum of one litre per hole. Care shall be taken to seal the holes after treatment.

CHAPTER 13
1300. FLOORING
1301 SCOPE
This Section covers furnishing of materials and construction of different types of flooring works in
The flooring works shall include cement mortar or adhesives for laying the finished material.
(1) Protection
All finishing on completion are to be adequately protected against damage by following trades
or any other clause to the satisfaction of the Engineer In-charge until the works are handed
over to the owner.
(2) Where Changes in Floor Finish Occur
Where changes of floor finish occur they shall be divided by strips as specified.
The contractor’s special attention is drawn to the fact that all screeds, immediately after the
initial set has taken place, will be required to be continuously covered in water by the sand
trap or other approved method for at least 10 days. Any screed panel that is found to be dry
before the end of this period shall be removed at the discretion of the Engineer In-charge.
(3) Earthwork in Filling
Earth filling in floor shall be done with proper ramming in 23mm layers, after sprinkling with
water and consolidating to 15cm. Earth shall be free from rubbish, organic or vegetable
growth including roots, weeds etc. All clods shall be first broken.
Particular care shall be exercised not to dump earth clods in space between foundation trench
and inside face of the masonry.
Measurement shall be in cu.m. of consolidated actual Work.
(4) Brickbat Filling
Brickbat boulders shall be hard, tough, sound and durable. No brickbat shall be more than
5cm. Boulders shall be laid in their natural bed. Smaller size boulders/pebbles shall be used
to fill up gaps between boulder in order to form uniform well-knitted floor structure.
Measurement shall be in cubic meter of actual length, breadth and depth.
1302 CONCRETE FLOORING
Plain cement concrete in floors with cement, sand and stone aggregate including mixing, laying
finishing to approved level, lines and dimensions, curing including centering, shuttering all complete
shall be measured in sq. m. with thickness specified.
The concrete shall be either 1:2:4 mix or 1:4:8 mix or as specified in the drawing.
Cement used shall confine to IS and shall be free from lump or such defects.
Aggregate of 12mm nominal gauge shall be properly gauged. Sieving may be insisted upon in which
case the contractor shall provide/ supply necessary sieves and labor at his own cost.
Sand shall be clean inner bed. Grain distribution shall be same as described under ‘Plastering’.
All mix shall be by volume except cement, which shall be proportioned by weight and as specified.
Mixing shall be done on a watertight platform. Material shall be dry mixed after accurately gauging
different materials in wooden boxes. The dry mixture shall be turned over thrice (at least) till the color
is uniform and then twice while wet. W ater shall be added gradually and no more than necessary to
sufficiently wet the materials. Only that much concrete shall be mixed which can be used within half
an hour. Each stock of dry mix shall not be larger than consuming one bag of cement.
Before laying the concrete, the surface shall be covered with one layer of building paper running along
the room length. Site lap of such paper shall be 150mm or m ore. Building paper shall be smoothly
curved up to upper level of DPC along the floor edge.
Concrete shall be laid in horizontal layers and gently rammed.
After lying, the concrete shall be allowed to harden. Harden concrete shall be kept wet for 15 days.
In case of machine mixing IS. code shall be strictly followed and the mixing done under the
supervision of the site In-charge.
1303 FLAG STONE FLOORING
Floor stone shall be of uniform color free from cracks and other defects. Each of the four edges shall
be trimmed to four straight lines with right angle to other edge. The size of the flagstone shall be of
uniform in width of 45cm and the variable length not less than 30cm. Thickness of the slab shall not
exceed more than 50mm nor be less than 30mm.
Sample of floor stone shall be produced before site In-charge for approval and the contractor shall
procure only those stone slabs that clearly and definitely confirm with the approved sample. At any
case, the procured slabs shall be exhibited before using as floor slab.
Stone slab shall be laid on 1:4 cement sand bed. Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and shall not
exceed 6mm and all the joints are pointed with 1:1 Cement sand mortar.
Laying shall start from one side in the slope as indicated in drawing or instruction. Under no
circumstances shall the contractor insert small stone chips underneath the slab to raise its level to
desired level. After the slabs of stone are laid, the mortar in the joints shall be rak ed to a depth of
12.5mm to 20mm. Joints flush pointed with 1:1 cement sand mortar. Special care shall be taken to
protect the floor from walking over it before it is completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3 days.
1304 PLAIN AND COLORED CERAMIC TILES
Ceramic tile shall be of approved quality and size mm size or as shown in the drawings. Ceramic
vitreous tiles, colors as selected by the Engineer, and glazed tile shall conform to the IS 777.
Mortar shall comply with IS 2250-1981; Code of Practice for preparation and use of masonry mortar.
The mortar used in work shall have the strength not less than 5 N/mm2 or 7.5 N/mm2 at 28 days as
specified.
However, if provided in the Contract, cement and sand may also be mixed in specified proportions.
Cement shall be proportioned only by weight, by taking its unit weight as 1.44 ton per cubic meter and
sand shall be proportioned by volume after making due allowance for bulking.
Sand shall comply with Clause 412. Cement shall comply with Clause 413.
The mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer unless hand-mixing is permitted by the Engineer. If
hand-mixing is allowed, the operation shall be carried out on a clear watertight platform. in the
required proportion cement and sand shall be first mixed dry to obtain an uniform color. Then required
quantity of water shall be added and the mortar shall be mixed to produce workable consistency. The
mortar shall be mixed for at least three minutes after addition of water in the case of mechanical
mixing. In the case of hand mixing, the mortal shall be hoed back and forth for about 10 minutes after
addition of water in order to obtain uniform consistency.
Only that quantity of mortar shall be mixed at a time which can be used completely before it becomes
unworkable. Any mortar that has become unworkable due to loss of water before elapsing the initial
setting time of cement, shall be rewet to make it workable and shall be used in the works. On no
account mortar shall be used after elapsing the initial setting time of cement.
(1) Installation of Tiles on Walls
Wall surfaces shall be brushed cleaned and wetted and approximately 12 mm thick level and
plumb scratch coat of cement mortar 1:3 applied. The scratch coat shall be moist cured for at
least 24 hours before application of floating coat. Before applying floating coat the scratch
coat shall be thoroughly wetted. The floating coat, plastic mix of neat cement of approximately
3 mm thickness shall be applied even with screeds to true plane. Floating coat shall be
applied over areas no larger than can be covered with tile while the mortar is still plastic (half
set). Glazed tile shall be soaked, completely immersed in clean water at least 30 minutes and
drained. Individual tile that exhibits drying along edges shall be allowed to remain on the
backs of tile at the time of setting.
Tiles shall be installed by applying a skin coat of a plastic mix of neat cement to backs of tile
and firmly pressing tile into the floating coat to true plane and position. W hite cement shall be
used for the skin coat where white joints are required.
During the process of setting tiles, continuous horizontal and vertical cuts every 40cm to 60
cm shall be made through the floating coat while plastic, using the point of a trowel turned
edge wise, Care shall be taken to prevent cutting into the scratch coat.
Where full size tile cannot be laid, it shall be cut (sawn) to required size and edges rubbed
smooth to ensure a true and straight joint.
(2) Joints in Tile Work
Joints in tile work shall be accurately aligned with horizontal joints level and vertical joints
plumb. Joints shall be maintained uniformly wide by aligning spacer lugs on tile edges if tiles
are so manufactured or by use of wetted strings.
(3) Tile Layout
Layout tile work so that no tile less than half size occurs, where tile must be cut at edges or
penetrations, the cut edges shall be carefully fitted and neatly ground. No chipped, cracked or
broken tile shall be used and all defective work shall be replaced and repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense.
All tile work finishing shall be adequately protected from damage during the progress of
construction and any damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.
(4) Grouting the Tile Joints
After tiles have been set firm and strings removed, the tiles shall be dampened and joints
grouted full with a plastic mix of neat cement by trowel, brush or finger application. Unless
otherwise directed, grout shall be white cement. During grouting all excess grout shall be
cleaned off the tile surface with damp cloth sponges.
1305 MARBLE FLOOR
Marble from Quarries in Nepal or India, shall conform to IS. Marble shall be not less than 18 mm thick
and dimensions shall be based on the Drawings with adjustments, depending upon availability of
sizes as directed by the Engineer. Samples shall be selected based on color and texture approved by
the Engineer.
1306 TERRAZZO TILES FLOORING:
The tiles shall confirm to IS: 1237 having the color approved by the consultant and the rate shall
include provision of border tiles and of different colors in pattern if directed. The mosaic or terrazzo tile
shall be of 200*200*20mm from Sidecar Tile factory. The mosaic topping of lighter shade tiles shall be
made of white cement with an approved shade pigment and neutral shade tiles shall be of gray
cement with an approved shade pigment. The type of tiles shall be as specified in respective items of
Work.
The sub-grade shall be thoroughly wetted after cleaning of all dirt, laitance and loose material. A bed
of white cement mortar consisting of one part of cement and two parts of sand shall be laid and
properly leveled to an average thickness of 25mm and the surface shall be kept slightly rough to form
a satisfactory key for tiles, neat cement plaster or honey like consistency shall be spread over mortar
bed, over such area at a time as would accommodate about 20 tiles. The tiles shall then be fixed with
a thin coat of cement plaster on back of each tile and then each tile being gently tapped with a
wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with adjoining tiles. Joints shall be fine and as
imperceptible as possible.
After tiles have been laid in a room or a day’s a fixing work is completed, surplus cement grout that
may have come out of the joints may be wiped off gently and joints cleaned. A cement slurry shall be
spread over it and rubbed by rubbing machine so as to seal even a thinnest joint between the tiles
and make it impervious and finished according to IS: 1443.
1307 IN SKIRTING, RISERS ETC
Stone slabs shall be laid on a backing plaster or cement mortar 1:4 of 15mm to 50mm thick on the
plinths protection, stairs risers and tread.
1308 GLAZED WALL TILING
Glazed wall tiles shall be of Approved quality in cushion edged eggshell finish approved color tiles
with spacer lugs, well soaked in water and bedded with straight joints in cement and sand (1:3) and
pointed in white cement and cleaned down on completion to approval.
The contractor shall submit samples of tile for selection and approval by the Engineer In-charge and
all tiles delivered to the site shall conform to the approved samples with regard to size, quality, texture
and color.
Pressed Cement W all tiling shall be of local manufacture of a minimum thickness of 20mm and
applied as directed foe glazed wall tiling including special fittings and cutting.
1309 NON SLIPPERY TILES IN FLOORING
Non-Slippery tile from Approved Manufacture conforming to IS: 777 shall be used. They shall be of
specified size and thickness. All specials viz. coves, internal and external angles corners, beads etc.
shall be used wherever directed. Under layer of specified thickness and mortar of stipulated
proportion shall be laid as described in marble mosaic flooring. Tiles shall be washed clean and set in
cement grout and each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in
level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to
surplus cement grout shall be cleaned off.
The joints shall be cleaned off the gray grout with a wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5mm and all
dust a loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be kept wet for seven days. After curing, the surfaces
shall be washed with mild hydrochloric acid and clean water. The finished floor shall not sound hollow
when tapped with a wooden mallet.
1310 TIMBER FLOORING
(1) Eucalyptus Planks
The seasoned and aldrin treated Timber Planks of finished size of 450mm x65mm x15mm of
Eucalyptus semi hardwood or as directed by the consultant shall b e used and laid in
approved type of pattern over leveled cement punned surfaces and fixed to the floor with
Dendrite glue or water repellent Glue and each tile is screwed to ground with two nos. sheet
metal screws and grip. At the edges, of floor the plank should have minimum of 8mm gap for
the expansion and contraction. The top surface shall be finished in perfect line and level.
The planks shall be painted with chapra paints as per the specifications and finished with 2
coats of Polyurethane paints as wearing coat. The texture of the floors shall be in mat or as
instructed by the Project In-charge.
0
(2) Nemo Parquets
Nemo parquets shall be prepared from seasoned sissoo wood of different pattern made in the
tile form. The minimum thickness of parquets is 10mm. These wooden tiles are laid over the
dust and grease free cement surface floor. The floor is adequately spread with adhesive and
tiles are laid. The joints of one tile to other tile should +-. 05mm. After laying is complete the
wooden surfaces are cleaned and machine grinded to smooth surfaces and sand papered.
The chapra polish is carried to obtain natural color of wood. Over these surface two coats of
transparent lacquer paints are applied.
0
1311 TELIA TILE
Locally manufactured leveled Telia tile shall be used for the flooring. The size of Telia tile shall be of
150*150*25mm laid over the 16mm thick 1:4 Cement sand mortar with 1:1 cement sand mortar and
joints should be 2mm and pointed with 1:1 Cement sand mortar.
1312 MARBLE FLOORING
The marble from Rajas than or Jaipur shall be used. The sample shall be produced for the approval.
The size of marble shall be of uniform with more than 45cm and the minimum length of 1200mm to fit
in the counter and floor. No small marble will be allowed except in the thin wall or skirting or the
edges. The marble must be backed with the nylon grip net. The marble shall be of minimum thickness
of 20mm. The marble is laid in 20mm thick 1:4 Cement sand mortar with 1:1 cement sand dry mortar.
The marble after being laid shall be polished by salt polish and waxed.
1313 POLYTHENE SHEETING
Underlay sheeting shall be “Visqueen” polythene building sheet 0.25mm thick and lay over sand in
floors or as directed by the Engineer In-charge. The overlapping of sheet shall be not less than 25cm.
1314 PAVING, SKIRTING ETC
In-situ Granolithic Paving, Skirting, etc. shall be of a total thickness as measured in the Bills of
Quantities with topping of one part of cement to two parts of hard stone chippings from as approved
local quarry, graded from 10mm to 20mm gauge, free from dust and impurities and washed to give
the approved color and finish. The topping shall be at least 10mm thick and on a cement and sand
screed (1:4) or backing coat and ground with carborundum to expose the aggregate and polished to
approval.
The terrazzo/ mosaic finish shall be laid on an under layer of thickness as specified in the respective
items. In addition to the under layer, unless otherwise specified, a cushioning layer of lime mortar of
lime concrete with brick bat aggregate of specified proportion shall also be provided to the specified
thickness. The topping shall consist of a layer of marble ships of selected sizes, color and design
approved by consultant, mixed with cement with desired shade of pigment
For lighter shade mosaic/ terrazzo white cement shall be used and for neutral shade, gray cement
shall be used. The proportion of terrazzo mix shall be three parts of cement and one part of marble
powder mix, the proportion of marble aggregate by volume shall be 1-1/2 parts unless otherwise
specified.
The topping shall be mixed and laid in panels as described in IS: 2114 and as per decorative designs
prepared by consultants. The dividing strips for panels shall be aluminum or as specified in the
schedule of quantities. It shall be polished as specified in IS: 2114.
MEASUREMENT
Measurement of all the works will be made in m of works as specified.
P AYMENT
works as specified.
1315 FLOOR HARDENER
Approved non-rust abrasion resistant floor hardener/ topping to be laid over the “green” concrete
(1:1.5:3) floor using 20mm down well graded coarse aggregate and concrete admixture (conforming
to IS: 9103-1979), after the bleed water has evaporated. The hardener shall be from a ready mix
combination of hard aggregates on mineral non-metallic in origin and binder; sprinkled over the green
concrete @ 6kg/m and allowed to stand over the green concrete for 10-15 minutes to absorb moisture
of the concrete slab. Toweling operation on the surface will be done with hand/ mechanical trowel on
the surface will be done to ensure that the hardener/ topping becomes monolithic with the concrete
base and the appearance is reasonably smooth. Shrinkage joints on the floor will be maintained by
using aluminum/glass strips in both directions as shown on the drawings. The cost of hardener/
topping application shall be included in the unit rate of concrete slab item as mentioned in the
schedule of quantities.
1316 POLYTHENE/ POLYTHENE SHEETS
Polythene/ Polythene sheet used over the hardcore soling shall be used under the concrete floor base
as a damp proof membrane (DPC) over a layer of sand blinding above the hardcore.
Material: Polythene sheet of 10.25mm (1000 gauge) supplied in rolls.
Application: After a blinding of sand had been spread over the hardcore surface, the polythene sheet
will be laid over the blinding and lapped 150mm at joints and continued across surrounding walls
under dip for full wall thickness. The overlap joint between the sheets shall be sealed with mastic or
mastic tape and the joints completed with polythene joining tape.
All protection against damage during, subsequent building operations and in the spreading or laying of
spread or concrete is the full responsibility of the contractor.
1317 DAMP PROOF COURSE
The damp proof course shall P.C.C. or R.C.C. 1:2:4 cement, sand and stone aggregate fixture as
specified in the drawing mixed with 2% of Accoproof, Impermo or cement seal by weight of cement.
Cement shall be fresh Portland cement conforming to IS 15:269. Sand shall be clean coarse of
4.76mm size and down free from mica and clay. Stone aggregate shall be hard and tough of 19mm
size well-graded and free from dust and dirt. W ater proofing compound other than Accoproof, Imperio
or Cement seal may be used after obtaining permission from the Project Engineer regarding the
acceptability of the compound and quantity required for desired result.
Cement shall be thoroughly mixed with required amount of waterproof, and then mixed dry with the
required volume of sand to make a proportion of 1:2. The cement sand mix then be thoroughly mixed
dry with stone aggregate to maintain proportion of 1:2:4. Clean water shall then be mixed gradually to
give a plastic mix of required consistency. The mixing shall be done by turning at least three times to
give a uniform and homogeneous concrete. All the mixing shall be done on impervious masonry
platform.
Before laying concrete, the level of the surface of the plinth shall be checked longitudinal and
transversely. All joints shall be raked and surface moistened by pouring clean water on it. Concrete
shall be laid uniformly by tamping to make dense concrete, leveled both transversely and
longitudinally. The damp proof course shall be laid continuously. Construction joints, if unavoidable
shall be given at the Site for doors or wall opening. Such joints shall be sloped, and such sloped
surface shall be applied with neat cement wash before starting concreting on following days. Harden
concrete shall be cured for 15 days. Shuttering may be removed after three days.
1318 MEASUREMENT
Measurement of all the works will be made in m 2 of works as specified.
1319 PAYMENT
works as specified.
CHAPTER 14
1400 ROOFING WORK AND FALSE CEILING WORK
1401 CLAY TILES
Roofing tiles are to be clay tile from Harisiddhi Brick Factory or equivalent locally made tile. The clay
tile single lap inter-locking at head and side and with ridge tiles etc. to match. They are to be uniform
in size, shape and color and free from twist and other defects, in every respect equal to samples to be
deposited with and approved by the Engineer In-charge. Each tiles are hooked by 16g GI strap to
eaves board (fascia) and in verges too. Before laying tile the gutter should be fixed.
Replaced cracked or damaged tiles and clean down and leave roofs watertight on completion.
(1) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in m 2 of plan area of works as specified for the width not
less than 250mm.
Measurement of works for in vertical plane will be made in linear length of m of works as
specified for the width less than 250mm.
(2) Payment
1402 RIDGE AND VERGE COVER
The clay ridge cover fitting to the clay tiles shall be used. These covers shall be laid in 1:4 Cement
sand mortar over the tile.
(1) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in m of linear length of works as specified for the width
not less than 250mm.
Measurement of works for in vertical plane will be made in linear length of m of works as
(2) Payment
1403 ASBESTOS CEMENT ROOFING
(1) Laying and Fixing of AC. Sheets and Ridge and Verges
Roofs to be covered with Standard Asbestos-Cement Corrugated Sheets and to be fixed in
accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. The sheets to be correctly mitered and laid with
one and a half corrugation side lap and 150mm minimum end lap. W hen fixed to steel purling
or rails, the sheets are to be secured with 6mm diameter galvanized hook -bolts. If fixed to
timber purling or rails the sheets to be secured by 75mm long x 6mm galvanized drive
screws. The fixing holes should be drilled through the crowns of corrugations, not punched.
All hook-bolts drive screws etc. to be fitted with plastic washers and caps. The fixing
accessories shall conform to IS: 730 (1956).
Ridge capping and other fittings shall be as specified in drawings and/ or as directed by the
Engineer In-charge.
Sawing and Drilling:
Sheets shall be cut with a wood saw. Holes in the sheets shall be drilled and shall be 2mm
larger than the diameter of the fixing bolts, and shall always be drilled through the crown of
corrugation and not valleys.
Holes for fixing the sheets shall be drilled in the center of the end lap of sheets to suit the
purling. No holes shall be nearer than 40mm to any edge of sheets. The holes shall be drilled
after laying the sheets in correct position.
(2) Measurement
Measurement of works for asbestos roofing will be made in m 2 of plan area of works as
specified for the width not less than 250mm.
Measurement of works for in vertical plane will be m ade in linear length of m of works as
(3) Payment
1404 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE ROOFING
All as described under the heading “Concrete”.
1405 GALVANIZED CORRUGATED IRON SHEET (CGI SHEET) ROOFING AND RIDGE AND
VERGE COVER
The corrugated iron sheet shall be of the gauge 24 B.G. (63mm thick) weighing 5.4kg/m2. The sheet
shall be free from rust and the zinc covering at the time of fixing shall be on perfect condition. Each
sheet shall have 10 corrugations 75mm wide and 19mm deep with overall flat width of 800mm,
referred to as 24 B.G. 10/3 sheets.
Each sheet shall be laid on wooden or steel purling with an end overlap of 150mm minimum or as per
drawing and side overlap of two and half corrugations. The sheet shall be joined together with
galvanized hook-bolts of L type of 8mm diameter, with bitumen and limpet washers. L hook shall be
fixed at 300mm interval along bearer and 600mm along edge. Each bolt shall have “limpet” dome
washer in addition to bitumen washer.
Wind ties of 40mm x 6mm flat iron shall be fixed at the eaves ends of the sheets fixing the same with
purling by L hook bolts at 1200mm center to center distance.
Ridge and hips shall be covered by special ridges and shall be bolted with 300mm lap on either side
so as to prevent the rain driving under it.
Holes in sheets shall be made on the ground; the sheets shall be placed on trestles and holes
punched in the ridge of corrugations from below upward. Unnecessary holes made on the roof shall
be rejected in total.
(1) Measurement
(2) Payment
1406 SLATE ROOFING:
(1) Material
A good slate should be hard, tough and durable, of rough texture, ring bell-like when struck,
not split when holed or dressed, practically non-absorbent and of a satisfactory color. Those
which feel greasy are generally of inferior quality and may show white patches or marc site
(iron pyrites) decay readily, especially if subjected to a smoky atmosphere; patches of lime
also adversely affect durability.
When left immersed in water to half its height for twelve hours, the water line on the slate
should not be more than 3mm above the level of water in the vessel. In slates of poor quality,
the water is readily absorbed and rises several inches up the slates; such slates are easily
destroyed by frost action (due to the absorbed water freezing and disintegrating the slate). If a
dry slate is kept in water which is kept boiling for forty-eight hours, its increase in weight
should not exceed 0.3 percent, and if a specimen of slate is immersed for ten days in solution
of sulphuric acid it should not show any signs of flaking or softening.
In the event of the lack of quality control for the slate quarrying, the Engineer In-charge shall
reserve the right to reject whole or a portion of the slates brought to the site form previously
approved quarry site. Only the selected pieces shall be allowed to remain at site, the rest
shall have to be removed immediately as ordered.
(2) Preparation for Laying
The slates shall be hand tool punched 30cm x 45cm and other required sizes and the
thickness is maintained to a uniform size of 6mm (approximately). The slates shall be fixed
with Copper or CP steel nails. The use of GI nails will not be permitted.
1407 WATER PROOFING FOR CONCRETE ROOFS
On leveled surface of the roof two coats of polymer modified, flexible water proofing slurry (approx.
1.5 to 2 kg/sq.m per coat) shall be applied.
Description: Cement based two coat of polymer-modified water proofing slurry. It is to be used on
roofs and terraces.
Surface Preparation: Concrete mortar and masonry surface must be clear, free from grease, oil and
loosely adhering particles. Steel and iron surfaces must be free from scale, rust, grease and oil. All
surfaces must be as true and flat as possible, saturate absorbent surfaces thoroughly.
Mixing: The consistency of the mix can be altered by reducing the amount of component. A liquid to
be used. Under normal circumstances, when the full quantities of both components are mixed
together, a slurry consistency will result. For a trowel able consistency use slowly adding the powder
component to the liquid component and stirring with slow speed mixer.
Application: W hilst the surface is still damp from saturation, apply the first coat and leave to harden (2-
6 hours). For slurry consistency apply with a hard plastic brittle brush or broom. For slurry consistency
apply with hard plastic brittle brush or broom. For trowel able mortar use a notched trowel. Second
coat should be applied after the first dries up. Overlapping of about is essential to ensure eliminat ion
of joints. Each coat should be continued up to the top of the parapet wall to eliminate the chance of
percolation of water. After the second coat has been applied finish by rubbing down with a soft, dry
sponge.
Curing: Normally curing procedure is followed up to 3 to 4 days.
Under laying: Average 20mm thick cement mortar (1:8) screening shall be provided in required slope.
The surface of the concrete slab shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brush and water jet, before
laying the cement.
Insulation: Above water proofing membranes, one layer of hollow concrete block (400*200*100) shall
be laid in flat. The top surface of such soling shall be in level / required slope. The hollow concrete
block shall be laid with minimum possible the gaps shall be filled with fine sand.
Wearing Coat: 50mm thick concrete screed (1:2:4) shall be laid in panels to proper slope for wearing
coat. This concrete screed shall be mixed with a concreter admixture (IS: 2465-1979). The joints (if
any) shall be filled and finished neatly by 1:1 cement sand mortar. The top level of the wearing coat
shall be finished in required slope, line, pattern and level.
(1) Measurement
(2) Payment
1408 WATER PROOFING FOR TILED ROOFS
(1) Material
Plain Galvanized Sheets having galvanization of 50gm/m2 on both sides. The mild steel
should conform to IS standard.
The screws shall be either copper coated or zinc coated. The limpet washers and bitumen
washers.
32 Gauge plain galvanized sheets shall be laid between the wooden rafters. The sheet shall
sag at the middle. The sheets are laid with 20mm overlap at the ridges of rafter and at the
disconnected sheets. The sheets are screwed with limpet washers and steel screws. No nails
are allowed.
(3) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in net plan area in m 2 of works as specified.
(4) Payment
1409 LAYING TAR FELT SHEETS
Prior to the laying of the roofing materials on the slope or flat roofs, one layer of finished underlay
shall be provided on thin news paper sheets. The underlay shall work as the false ceiling for the room
as well as shall act as the water-sealing agent to the room. This is achieved through the following:
Waterproof and Termite resistant Plywood:
Kit Plywood of Phenol Bonded, hot pressed and termite resistant special plywood with manufacturer’s
guarantee towards their reliability to the specifications, of the kind, as per the Indian Standards. The
sizes and the thickness shall be as per the detail designs and as specified in the bill of quantities.
Samples of the materials and their manufacturer’s warranty card shall be submitted for Project In-
charges approval.
Tar felting and Bitumen Paints:
i. Tar felt: Shalimar Tar felt or equivalent shall be according to IS. Tar felt supplied should be
packed in rolls with IS Certification mark. Tar felt shall be free from visible external defects,
such as holes, oil patches, ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, protuberances and
indentations. Unless otherwise stated, tar felt supplied shall be in widths of 90 cm and 100cm
and generally in lengths of 10m and 20m. The sample should be submitted to the Engineer
In-charge before bulk purchase, and should be approved by him.
ii. Bitumen Mastic: Shall be of approved quality conforming to IS: 3037-1965. This shall be
supplied in sealed tins with IS Certification mark.
iii. Laying: The felt shall be laid in lengths at right angles to the direction of the run off gradient,
with paper or plastic barrier between tar felt and concrete, commencing at the lowest level
and working up to the crest such that the overlaps of the adjacent layers of felt offers the
minimum obstruction to the flow of water. In the next layer, mastic asphalt or bitumen is
spread, and tar felt is laid. The tar felt laid should be in three layers.
iv. The bitumen mastic (binding material) shall be prepared by heating to the correct working
temperature and conveyed to the point of work in a bucket or pouring can. Each coat of each
bay shall be spread evenly and uniformly by means of a float to the recommended thickness,
on to the previously prepared surface, the isolating membrane or the preceding coat. Each
coat of bitumen mastic shall be followed, without delay by the succeeding, since exposure to
contamination (by dust or dirt) might impair adhesion and cause blistering. The finished floor
shall not sound hollow when tapped with wooden mallet.
The tar felt before laying shall be first cut to the required lengths, cleaned of dusting materials and laid
out flat on roof. Each length of felt prepared for laying shall be laid in position and rolled up for a
distance of half of its length. The hot binding material shall be poured on to the roof across the full
width. In case of rolled felt, the felt is steadily rolled out and pressed down. The excess bonding
material is squeezed out at the ends and is removed as the laying spreads. W hen the first half of the
strip of felt has been bonded to the roof, the other half shall be rolled up and then unrolled on to the
hot bonding material in the same way. Minimum overlap at the ends and the sides of strips of felt shall
not be less than 15cm. All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with hot bitumen. The laying of second
layer of felt shall be so arranged that the joints be staggered with those of the layer beneath it.
(1) Measurement
(2) Payment
CHAPTER 15
1500 CEILING WORKS
1501 ACOUSTIC CEILING
The acoustic ceilings are provided in the class rooms and meeting hall for the reduction of echo.
(1) Material
12.5 mm Gypsum board tiles of 610 x 610 mm size conforming to IS 2095: 1982 & 2542-
1981. The tiles shall have full square holes in regular pattern. These are to be backed by non-
woven lining to absorb unwanted sound.
The suspenders are galvanized mild steel straps of 28G and horizontal and transverse
members are galvanized mild steel channel of 16 G. Construction Procedures
The acoustic ceilings are suspended from the truss and purling by steel hangers to suspend
the horizontal steel channels. The horizontal members are screwed with steel screws and grip
in the wall. The suspenders are clamped to the truss and purling with steel screws. After the
framing is completed the engineer in charge shall check the framing before allowing fixing the
ceiling boards.
The ceiling boards free of damages are fixed to the framing in perfect line and level. The
joints are sealed with plaster of Paris and non-woven paper tapes with out forming any
bubble.
Once laying of ceiling is completed the dust and floors are cleaned for the painting works.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
1502 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
The Gypsum board ceilings are provided in the office rooms and meeting hall. These boards are in
various design and texture.
(1) Material
9.5 mm Gypsum board tiles of 610 x 610 mm size conforming to IS 2095: 1982 & 2542-1981.
The tiles shall have texture and design pattern.
The suspenders are galvanized mild steel straps of 28G and horizontal and transverse
members are galvanized mild steel channel of 16 G. Construction Procedures
The board ceilings are suspended from the concrete ceilings, and or truss and purling by steel
hangers to suspend the horizontal steel channels. The horizontal members are screwed with
steel screws and grip in the wall. The suspenders are clamped to the truss and purling with
steel screws. After the framing is completed the engineer in charge shall check the framing
before allowing fixing the ceiling boards.
The ceiling boards free of damages are fixed to the framing in perfect line and level. The
joints are sealed with plaster of Paris and non-woven paper tapes with out forming any
bubble.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
1503 MARINE BOARD CEILING
The marine boards of 16mm are laid over the purling of slope roof where no ceiling will be required.
(1) Material
The marine waterproof boards of 16mm thickness are used for the roof ceiling in slope. These
boards can be of size 210x120cm or of any size available in market. It should conform to
Indian standard.
The board ceiling are laid over truss and purling with U-hooks. U-hooks are of 8mm
Galvanized mild steel. All the nuts and bolts are tightened with limpet washers and bitumen
washers. In order to achieve water tightness luster of silicon is placed over the nut and bolt.
The board joints are sealed with silicon.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
(5) Testing
The marine board samples shall be soaked in hot water for 24 hours. The sample should not
bulge and separation of marine sheet shall not occur.
CHAPTER 16
1600 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
1601 GENERAL
(1) Scope
This Section covers fabrication, storage, handling and erection of steel structures excluding
those covered by Sections 1600 and 1900.
(2) Codes of Practice
The fabrication, storage, handling and erection of structural steelworks shall comply with the
relevant Sections of the IS and IRC, if otherwise not specified in the contract.
Should there be any disagreement between IS and IRC, the provision in the IRC shall prevail
to the extent of the disagreement.
1602 MATERIALS
(1) Materials for use in connection with the protection of the steel work against corrosion are
specified in Clause 2209. Other materials used in connection with steel structures such as
concrete, bearing pads, etc., shall be governed by the appropriate Sections of these
Specifications. Unless otherwise specified or described in the contract, structural steel
materials shall comply with the appropriate standards listed below.
IRC 24-1967 : Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges.
IS 2062-1992 : Steel for General Structural Purposes
IS 9550-1980 : Specification for Bright bars.
IS 3757-1985 : Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts.
IS 6623-1985 : Specification for High Strength Structural Nuts.
IS 6649-1985 : Specification for Hardened and Tempered W ashers for High
Strength Structural Bolts and Nuts.
1603 FABRICATION : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(1) General
This Clause shall apply to all operations undertaken in the fabrication in the workshop or
elsewhere whether on or off the site. The requirements contained herein shall not be waived,
nor shall be modified to conform to any set of rules that any shop adopted as its standard
unless so authorized in writing by the Engineer.
Substitution of structural Sections of different dimensions, weight or strength from those
specified in the contract may be made only when approved in writing by the Engineer. No
payment shall be made for increased weight or strength/properties resulting from approved
substitution, but any decrease in weight shall be deducted from the final pay quantity.
The various components/elements of the steel structure shall be fabricated in accordance
with the approved shop Drawing. Any errors or omissions in them shall be reported to the
Engineer, and his decision for their correction shall be final.
(2) Shop Detail Drawing
The Contractor shall furnish shop detail Drawing for the complete fabrication of all
components/elements required by the contract. W hen it is specified in the contract that the
employer shall furnish prints of standard shop detail Drawing, the Contractor shall be required
to make any additions or revisions to the detail Drawing as may be necessary to produce a
finished structure in accordance with the contract. Shop detail Drawing shall consist of
detailed Drawing showing the dimensions and sizes of the components/elements, bolt lists for
field erection, a match marking diagram, complete field erection Drawing and such other
details and information as may be necessary for fabrication.
Shop detail Drawing of widening or reconstruction work shall contain sufficient field
dimensions, so that the shop Drawing may be checked. The Drawing shall also contain a note
to the effect that these are field measurements which the Contractor has furnished and for
which he is responsible. Such detail Drawing shall also show a portion of the existing work,
using light dotted lines or colored ink for this purpose.
Shop detail Drawing shall be prepared in a neat and legible form, on the dull side of tracing
cloth, with India ink, or by other methods approved by the Engineer. Each sheet shall have a
title in the lower right hand corner giving the fabricator's name, the fabricator's contract
number and brief description of the details shown on the sheet.
Bills of material and bolt lists may be furnished on the fabricator's own standard sheets.
The Contractor shall submit blueprints of shop Drawing to the Engineer for approval. No work
shall be done in the shop until such Drawing has been finally approved. In general, 2 sets of
preliminary prints shall be required, but the Contractor shall furnish additional prints free of
charge upon request. Only checked Drawing in complete sets shall be submitted for
approval. The
details of anchorages, bearing plates, castings, etc., shall be submitted in advance, in order to
avoid delay in construction.
When changes on the submitted Drawing are requested by the Engineer, or when the
Contractor makes additional changes, other than those requested, attention shall be called to
the changes on the blueprints submitted for approval by encircling or underscoring all change
with contrasting colored ink or rayon.
After the Drawing has been finally approved, the Contractor shall, without direct
compensation thereof, furnish to the Engineer 4 sets of prints of the corrected Drawing, and
such additional prints as may be required. The shop Drawing as approved by the Engineer
shall become a part of the contract.
shop Drawing shall be at the Contractor's risk and cost. No changes shall be made in any
approved Drawing without the written authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer's approval
of shop Drawing shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the accurate assembly
and fitting of all structural members. After the shop work has been completed, the Contractor
shall deliver to the Engineer all of the original tracings of the shop details, or photo positives
thereof, on cloth.
(3) General Shop Practice
(a) Storage
Before and after fabrication, all materials shall be so stored that they are not
deformed or damaged, and shall be protected against the accumulation of water, dirt,
oil or other foreign matter. Material that has become pitted from exposure or other
causes shall not be acceptable for any use. Material that has been damaged during
storage shall be replaced with equivalent or better material.
(b) Identification
Structural alloy steel shapes and Sections shall, in addition to standard mill practice
identification, be further identified during all operations, from the mill to the completely
fabricated structure, by the use of, and continued maintenance of, color coding in
accordance with IS 2049.
Alloy steel and non-ferrous alloy bolts shall be identified by coded markings
embossed or impressed on the head or tip during manufacture. Pieces on which
identification has been lost shall be rejected.
(c) Workmanship and finish
All metals shall be neatly and accurately cut to required size with proper allowance as
may be necessary or required for finishing operations.
All fins, ragged or distorted edges resulting from shearing, speed sawing, or flame
cutting shall be removed by milling, chipping, or grinding.
Shearing shall not be used for the purpose of cutting non-ferrous metals where the
thickness is greater than 13mm.
(d) Flame cutting
The gas cutting torch may be employed in the operation of cutting metals or preparing
joints provided that the metal is not carrying stress during the operation. Carbon steel
above 0.30 carbon alloy steels, heat treated steel or aluminum, wrought non-ferrous
metals and plated metals shall not be flame cut unless subsequent corrective
treatment is provided which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
When the cutting torch is used, the burned edges shall be trimmed smooth to exact
lines by milling, chipping or grinding. Maximum deviation for "free hand" cutting shall
be 1.5mm from true lines. A mechanical guide shall be used for the flame cutting
torch on all work requiring precision cutting on which the maximum deviation
permitted shall not be greater than 0.8mm. All "notch effects" shall be completely
removed from the portions of members where the extreme fiber is subject to flexure,
tension or perpendicular shear.
Where the ends of members which are to take bearing, are cut with a torch, a suitable
allowance in their length shall be made to permit proper milling or planning.
Joints for welding may be prepared by "flame cutting" or "flame gouging" provided all
slag and oxidized metal are removed.
(e) Re-entrants
Interior and re-entrant corners shall be filleted to a 25 mm radius unless a shorter
radius is indicated in the plan. Fillets less than 25 mm in radius shall be formed by
drilling.
(f) Bending
All bending or crimping shall be done at the bend lines shown, by a mechanical
operated press, without unnecessary loss of Section in the metal being bent. The
bends shall conform to wood or metal templates. All low carbon steel and other
wrought metals shall be bent cold when the required bending will not produce cracks
or fractures. W hen heating is necessary to accomplish bending of ferrous metals, the
material shall be carefully heated to and bent at or above a temperature evidenced by
a dark red color,
but in no case at a lower temperature. All material bent below such temperature shall
be rejected and annealing shall not be considered a corrective measure. Heated
material shall be slowly cooled after the bending operation. Heat treated metals shall
be shaped before heat treatment. Material having fractures or other defects caused
by bending shall be rejected.
Cold-bent load-carrying rolled steel plates shall conform the following:
(i) They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bent-line is at right
angles to the direction of rolling.
(ii) The radius of bends, measured to the concave face of the metal shall be
more than specified below.
Angle through which plate is bent Radius
61° to 90° LOT
91° to 120° 1.5 T
121° to 150° 2.0 T
Where T is the thickness of the plate undergoing bend.
(iii) Before bending, the corners of the plate shall be rounded to a radius of
1.5 mm throughout that portion of the plate at which the bending is to occur. If
a shorter radius is essential, the plates shall be bent hot.
(g) Straightening Material
All wrought and extruded Sections must be made straight or cambered as shown in
the plan before being marked, punched or otherwise worked on in the shop. If
straightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods which will not change the
physical properties, reduce the Section, or otherwise damage the metal. Material
which develops kinks, fractures or evidence of embrittlement shall be rejected.
Materials that are warped by cutting, punching or welding shall be straightened to
correct lines and dimensions before being assembled. Sections that are distorted
during assembly and/or welding shall be straightened by methods that will not shear,
fracture, or pre-stress the welds or connecting members. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, Sections can not be properly straightened after assembly, the bent material
shall be taken out, straightened and reassembled in the unit. Any material damaged
during such operations shall be replaced with equivalent or better material.
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, structural steel Sections which
deformations do not exceed normal rolling tolerances will be acceptable without
straightening. W hen the plans so indicate, beams shall have unwrapped webs with
flanges at true right angles
thereto. Such beams shall, if necessary, be straightened cold by an approved method
of web pressing.
(h) Layouts and Templates
Full scale layouts will be required for intricate portions of structures that present
problems of fabrication or erection. When requested by the Engineer, such layouts
shall be made available to him for checking purposes. Duplicate work shall be
fabricated with the aid of templates or jigs. W ood or metal templates shall be used for
all miter joints except when an approved jig is used. Reaming or drilling templates
shall be made of metal, using hardened steel bushings 25 mm thick.
Sweeps for laying out and checkingWcurved surfaces shall be made of wood or
metal and shall be of sufficient length to produce accurate results.
Working points and working lines shall be clearly marked on all templates and sweeps. All
templates shall be made available for the Engineer's use.
(i) Built-up Members
A built-up member shall be true to detailed dimensions and it shall be free of twists,
bends, open joints, or other defects resulting from faulty fabrication or workmanship.
The assembly shall be such that all field joints will have the planned clearance. The
joints shall be smooth, and free from all burrs or other obstructions.
Closed Sections or pockets which might harbor moisture or dust and which cannot be
readily cleaned and painted shall be filled with plates or closed by caulking or
welding. Filler plates shall be full size and fitted sufficiently tight to exclude all
moisture and dust after being painted. Tack welding may be employed to hold fillers
in place.
(j) Incidental Items
The following items shall be furnished by the Contractor without additional paym ent
unless otherwise provided for in the contract:
(i) Pilot Points and Driving Nuts:
One new pilot point and one driving nut for each size of shouldered pin.
(ii) Erection Pins, Bolts and W ashers:
All erection pins, bolts and washers necessary for field erection.
(iii) Field Rivets:
Extra rivets of each size and length, in the amount of 10 rivets plus 10 per cent of the
number actually required for field erection, to compensate for losses due to misuse,
improper driving or other contingencies.
(iv) Field Shims:
Shims 3 mm or more in thickness shall be made of structural steel and those thinner
than 3 mm shall be made of sheet brass.
"Field shims" shall be constructed to mean all metal plates which are required,
because of inequalities or inaccuracies in fabrication or erection or because of the
substitution of Sections by the fabricator, to bring metal surfaces of members into
contact or to bring the structure to the required grade and alignment. "Fillers" shall be
constructed to mean metal plates which are required by the design to bring metal
surfaces of members into contact or to bring the structure to the required grade and
alignment, and shall be included in the quantities for which payment shall be made.
(v) Sections:
Increase of Sections over net size required in the contract, and other Sections,
metals, parts, or equipment added for the purpose of erection only which may or may
not subsequently remain a part of the finished structure.
(4) Machining
(a) Definition of Terms
(i) Rough Finish:
The surface shall be true but may show very slight grooves.
(ii) Finish:
The surface shall be true and smooth and shall show no visual evidence of grooves.
(iii) Smooth Finish:
The surface shall be true and perfectly smooth to the touch.
(iv) Polished Finish:
The surface shall be true, smooth and polished.
(v) Milled Finish:
The surface shall be the same as the defined for rough finish.
(vi) Bored Finish:
The surface shall be the same as that defined for smooth finish.
(b) Machine Lubricant
Soap water solution shall be used as a lubricant on all structural material requiring
machine work. The use of oil or grease shall not be permitted for this purpose.
Cutting oil shall be used on machinery parts and bolt stock.
(c) Edge Planning
Structural steel plates with sheared edges having a thickness of more than 16 mm
and structural alloy plates having a thickness of 13mm or more, except web plates for
built-up girders, sole or base plates, and fillers, shall be planed to correct size with
square edges by removing not less than 6 mm of metal. The use of mechanically
guided needle torch may be permitted in lieu of specified edge planning of expansion
plates when used for the purpose of making bevel cuts.
(d) Bearing Surfaces
After a column has been otherwise completely welded and before the cap or base
plates are attached, the bearing surfaces shall be milled true to the angle shown in
the plan. End connection angles shall be welded to the main member before milling.
Cap and base plates of columns shall have full contact with the milled surface after
assembly. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full contact with the flanges.
Warped or deformed plates shall be machine finished or otherwise straightened by an
approved method to secure an accurate and uniform contact. Countersunk river
heads or extruding weld metal shall be chipped smooth and flush with the
surrounding surface.
Castings shall be machined as indicated in the plan. Bronze bearing plates shall have
a "Polished Finish".
(e) Abutting Joints
The ends of members shall not be milled until such members have been completely
welded. Members whose ends are improperly milled shall be rejected.
The ends of members forming a compression joint or splice shall be accurately milled
to proper length, alignment and bearing, using a wood or steel template as a guide.
Gusset plates connecting milled ends of members shall conform to the same wood or
metal templates from which the milled ends were formed. The use of bevel square
shall not be permitted.
Joints in main chord tension members shall be close and neat, and in no case shall
the opening be more than 3 mm.
(f) Boring Pin Holes
Pin holes shall be accurately located as detailed, and bored true to exact dimensions.
They shall be bored smooth, straight, and at right angles to the axis of member. A
finishing cut, which shall be a complete and separate operation, will be required.
Unless otherwise indicated in the plans, the difference in diameters of the pins and
the pin holes shall be 0.8 mm exact.
(g) Pins and Rollers
Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the detailed dimensions. The final
surface shall be smooth, straight, and free from flaws. The final surface shall be
machined to a smooth finish.
All bridge pins and rollers 150mm in diameter and smaller shall be made of Bright
steel bars complying with IS 9550.
All segmental rollers and all pins whose nominal diameter is to be greater than
150mm shall be made from annealed forging.
A hole 50mm in diameter shall be bored longitudinally through the centre of each pin
or roller having a diameter greater than 230mm. Pins or rollers showing defective
interiors shall be rejected.
Pins shall be held in place by recessed nuts. The nuts shall be hexagonal in sharp
and shall be made of malleable iron, pressed or cast steel. The grip face of the nut
shall be machined square to the axis of the pin. Pins and nuts shall be accurately
made so that the recessed face of the nut will bear uniformly against the end face of
the pin when the nut is turned up tight. The threaded portion of the pin shall project at
least 6mm through the nut after assembly. W here a recessed cut is made between
the threads and the shoulder of the pin, it shall not be wider than 6 mm nor deeper
than the base of the thread.
(5) Marking and Dispatching
All material shall be accurately and legibly marked according to the field erection plan, prior to
dispatch. Such markings shall be made with contrasting paint on previously painted surfaces.
The omission of marks on duplicate pieces shall not be permitted unless otherwise authorized
by the Engineer.
When practicable, loose connection plates for a member shall be bolted in position thereon
for shipment. All rivets, bolts, nuts and washers shall be parceled separately as to size. They
shall be shipped in suitable containers, but the gross weight of any single container shall not
exceed 100 kg. A list and description of the included material shall be plainly marked on the
outside of each container.
Pins, roller nets, name plates, sheet lead, and small parts shall be boxed or crated for
shipment. Pins shall be shipped with the nuts in place.
When the Engineer directs, finished work shall be weighed in the presence of the Inspector.
The fabricator shall supply satisfactory scales and shall do the handling and weighing. W hen
requested by the Engineer, members weighing more than 300 kg shall be marked to show
their scale weight.
The loading, unloading, handling, transportation and storing of structural material shall be
carefully conducted so that the metal will be kept clean and free from damage. All girders,
partly assembled trusses, and large I beams shall be transported in an upright position.
Cambered members shall be securely blocked to prevent any loss of camber. All sheets land
copper waterstops shall be crated for transport.
Anchor bolts, pier nose angles, and other anchorage or grillage materials shall be dispatched
in advance of other material to suit the requirements of the construction work.
(6) Shop Painting
All ferrous metals which have not been plated, galvanized or enameled shall be given one
shop coat of paint of the kind specified in the contract. Non-ferrous metals shall not be
painted or otherwise surface treated unless so specified in the contract. All cleaning and
painting shall conform to Clause 2209.
(7) Inspection and Testing
(a) General Requirements
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer as to the actual date and place of
preparation of materials so that sufficient time may be had, prior to such preparation,
to arrange for inspection. This inspection will be dependent upon the character and
importance of the work and may involve inspection in the mill, the foundry, the
fabricating shop and the field, as may be considered necessary by the Engineer.
Information relative to the time of beginning various operations, such as mill rolling,
foundry casting, heat treating, shop layout, punching, riveting, welding, milling,
assembling, painting and shipping, shall be furnished to the Engineer in sufficient
time so that he may provide for the proper supervision and inspection of the work. In
general 28 days shall be considered as the required time of advance notice. Failure
to furnish such information shall result in the rejection of the material involved.
The Employer may depute structural-metals-inspectors for the inspection of all metals
at the plant or in the field. When such inspection service can be furnished in the usual
routine manner without any additional expenditures, no charge shall be made against
the Contractor. W hen such inspection service entails additional costs, the Contractor
shall be charged for the expense incurred but such charges shall not be greater than
the amount specified in the contract per person per ton, based on the total metal
tonnage of the contract.
As soon as the progress of the work permits, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer 2 copies, or more, if required, of each of the following:
Mill or purchase orders, certified reports of physical characteristics and
chemical analysis of all materials involved, and the fabricator's shipping
statements showing the net scale weight of each shipment. W hen requested,
the scale weights of individual member or Sections shall be furnished.
All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and Engineer's
agreement. The inspection of materials and fabrication shall as far as possible be
carried out at the place of manufacture.
Except as provided for above no fabricated steelwork shall be dispatched to the Site
before it has been inspected and agreed. All inspected and agreed steelwork shall be
marked in accordance with the agreed procedures.
(b) Inspector's Authority
The Inspector shall reject the materials and/or the workmanship which do not fulfill
the requirements of the contract. However, in cases of dispute, the Contractor may
appeal to the Engineer, whose decision shall be the final.
Inspection at the mill and shop is provided for the purpose of facilitating fabrication
work and to avoid errors, but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correction of errors and faulty workmanship or for the
replacement of imperfect materials.
(c) Facilities for Inspection
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities, tools, and such assistance as the Inspector
may require for the inspection of material and workmanship in the mill, foundry or
shop. The inspector shall be granted free access to the plant premises for the
required inspection service. All fabricated parts shall be piled separately in such a
manner as to facilitate inspection.
The Contractor shall furnish office space at the fabrication plant for the Inspector's
use during the period of fabrication, assembly and paintings.
(d) Testing
Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish test specimens as specified,
and all labor, testing machines and tools necessary to prepare the specimens and to
make the prescribed tests. W here check tests are required by the Engineer to
determine the suitability of any materials, the Contractor shall furnish representative
samples for further testing by the Engineer before such material is finally approved for
use.
Where no specific tests are provided for in the contract, tests for metals shall be
conducted in accordance with the Engineer's directions.
(e) Rejection
Rejected materials and workmanship shall be promptly replaced with satisfactory
material and workmanship. Any shipment of materials that has been damaged in
transit shall not be unloaded until an agreement as to its disposition has been
reached with the Engineer.
1604 FABRICATION OF BOLTED STRUCTURES
(1) End Connection Angles
End connection angles of floor beams, stringers and diaphragms shall be accurately
assembled to the dimensions shown in the plan, and the length, back to back of angles, shall
be exact. Unless otherwise specified, the finishing of end connection angles shall not be
required except as a correction to a faulty assembly. W hen finishing is necessary for such
correction, the thickness of the angle shall not be reduced by more than 3mm but in no case
shall the final thickness of the angle be less than 9 mm. Portions of members extending
beyond the face of the connection angles shall be chipped or ground flush. No portion of a
web or a connecting member shall be recessed more than 9mm from the face of the
connection angles.
(2) Stringers
Stringers shall be straight and their bearing surfaces shall be true, and free from all burrs and
distorted edges.
The fixed ends of stringers supported on brackets or on the top flanges of floor beams shall
be secured by means of bolts having hexagonal heads and nuts.
The maximum clearance between abutting ends of stringers shall be 13mm unless otherwise
specified. Stringers supported on brackets shall have a maximum clearance of 13mm
between the end of the stringer and the web of the floor beam.
(3) Expansion Devices
Expansion and deflection devices shall be fabricated to exact dimensions, and no tolerance in
materials or dimensions shall be allowed. Unless otherwise indicated in the plan these
devices shall be secured to stringers or floor beam by means of bolts having hexagonal
heads, hexagonal nuts and lock washers.
(4) Bolted Plate Girders
The web plate of a finished girder shall in no case project beyond the face of the flange
angles or end stiffener angles. In girders with full-length cover plates, the edges of the web
shall not be more than 6 mm inside the face of the flange angles except that, in cases of
cambered beams, the width of the web may be 13 mm less than the distance (back to back)
between the flange angles provided the web is centered. In girders without cover plates, the
edges of the web shall not be more than 3 mm below the face of the top flange angles. In
girders with partial length cover plates, the above requirements shall apply together with the
additional requirement that, unless the edges of the webs are flush with the faces of the
flange angles at the ends of the cover plates, any space between them shall be plugged with
a weld at least 13 mm long. In no case shall the ends of the webs be more than 9 mm inside
the face of the end stiffener angles.
Holes in all girder web splices shall be sub-punched or sub-drilled. After assembly these
holes shall be reamed to specified size.
Splicing of flange angles shall not be permitted, unless required by the contract, except when
girders are to be constructed with curved ends, in which case the flange angles shall be
spliced near the curved portion to facilitate bending and assembly. Curved and flange angles
shall be bent in pairs. After bending, the curved angles shall be true to the plan radius and
free of all wrinkles or waves. After assembly, these curved end angles shall be butt welded to
the flange angles, and the weld shall then be ground smooth.
When splices in flange angles are required by the contact, the abutting ends of the angles
shall be milled to a close fit. All holes in such splices shall be sub-punched and reamed, or
drilled from the solid. Smoothly ground butt welds will be acceptable for joints in flange angles
in lieu of milling. Such welds shall not be considered as a substitute for the splice plates or
angles as detailed.
Unless otherwise indicated in the plan, end stiffeners and intermediate stiffeners intended for
supports for concentrated loads shall be milled or ground smooth to secure a uniform, even
bearing against the top and bottom flange angles. When welding is indicated or permitted in
lieu of milling or grinding, the welds shall be of sufficient size to develop fully the stiffener in
bearing and they shall be so placed as to completely seal the stiffener ends against
entrapment of moisture. Welding transversely across the tension flanges of beams or girders
which have a flange stress of more than 75 per cent of their designed capacity, shall not be
permitted. At locations of higher stress, wedge fillers shall be incorporated in conjunction with
longitudinal welds.
Intermediate stiffeners shall fit sufficiently tight to exclude moisture after being painted. Fillers
under stiffeners shall fit within 1.5mm at each end. Crimped stiffeners angles or tees shall be
properly bent to a steel template, and they shall have full contact bearing against the flange
and the web plates.
(5) Holes for Unfinished Bolts
(a) General
All holes shall be true to the shape and size specified, clean-cut, perpendicular to the
axis of the member and free from all burrs and distorted, torn or ragged edges.
The minimum distance from the centre of a hole to a sheared edge shall be 38mm,
and the minimum distance to a planed or rolled edge shall be 1.5 times the diameter
of the bolt specified for such hole, except as hereinafter provided or otherwise
indicated in the plan. The edge distance for lace bars shall be not less than 1.6 tim es
the diameter of the rivet or bolt.
(b) Type
When reaming or drilling is not specified in the contract, full size punched holes in low
carbon and low alloy steels may be acceptable, provided the thickness of the metal
does not exceed the diameter of the hole to be punched, and provided no more than
5 thickness of metal are to be connected. W hen there are more than 5 thicknesses of
metal or when any of the material is thicker than the diameter of the hole, all of the
holes in the material composing such connections shall be formed by subpunching
(or subdrilling) and reaming or by drilling from the solid, as hereinafter specified.
Stress-carrying high-carbon steels, non-ferrous metals and alloys 13mm in thickness
or less shall be subpunched (or sub-drilled) and reamed. W here such metals are of
greater thickness the holes shall be drilled from the solid with all parts assembled.
Railing Sections may be jig drilled full size.
When general reaming is specified in the contract for low carbon and low alloy steels,
all bolt holes, including connection holes to main members, shall be subpunched (or
subdrilled) and reamed, or drilled from the solid; except for the following, which may
be full punched:
Holes for unfinished bolts, or plug welds.
Holes in expansion and deflection devices, stringer diaphragms and railings.
Holes in laterals and lateral plates; away frames other than in towers or
bents;
brackets; sole, bearing or anchor plates; and grillages.
(c) Punched Holes
The diameter of full-sized punched holes shall be 1.5mm larger than the nominal
diameter of the rivet or bolt. The diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter of
the punch by more than 1.5mm.
All holes shall be so accurately punched that, after the assembly of the component
parts of a member, and before any reaming is done, a cylindrical pin whose diameter
is 3mm less than the nominal diameter of the punched hole shall pass freely through
at least 75 per cent of the holes in any group. Correspondingly, a pin whose diameter
is 5mm less than the nominal diameter of the punched holes shall pass freely through
all holes in any group. Material failing to meet either of the above requirements shall
be rejected. Reaming shall not be permitted as a corrective measure.
(6) Holes for Turned Bolts
The diameter of holes for turned bolts shall be 0.4 mm larger than the diameter of the bolt. If
the bolts are to be inserted in the shop, the holes may be either drilled from the solid, or
subpunched and reamed. If the bolts are to be inserted in the field, the holes shall be
subpunched or subdrilled in the shop and reamed in the field. All drilling or reaming for turned
bolts shall be done after the parts to be connected are assembled and securely fastened
together. No offsets shall be permitted in holes for turned bolts.
(7) Slotted Holes
Slotted holes shall be securely located, true to planned dimensions. W here full size slot
punches are not used for this purpose, the holes shall be made under size and subsequently
finished to true size and shape by chipping grinding or filing.
(8) Bolts
(a) Unfinished Bolts
Unless otherwise specified, all bolts for steel construction shall be unfinished and
shall have hexagonal heads, hexagonal nuts and lock washers. The length of the bolt
shall be such that, after placement, it will project through the nut not less than 3mm
nor more than 9mm. The material for and the manufacture of bolts shall conform to
the equipments of IS 1364 or IS 3757 as appropriate.
(b) Turned Bolts
The heads and the nuts shall be hexagonal. The bolt shall be machined from a
hexagonal bar, the size of which shall be the same as the bolt head. The shank of the
bolt shall be turned and given a smooth finish to exact diameter. The length of the
unthreaded portion of the bolt under the head shall be 3mm greater than the
thickness of material it is to pass through. The diameter of the unthreaded portion of
the bolt shall have a diameter at least 2.4 mm less than the diameter of the
unthreaded portion of the bolt, and it shall be the nearest standard bolt size. The
threads shall extend from the end of the bolt to within 1 thread distance from the
shoulder. W ashers 6mm in thickness shall be used under all nuts, and the hole in the
washer shall be the same size as the reamed or drilled hole.
(c) Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be of the swage type and shall have hexagonal nuts. Bolts for
expansion joints shall be provided with 2 nuts. Those portions of bolts which extend
above masonry or concrete shall be painted 1 shop coat of paint.
(d) High Strength Friction Grip Bolts
High Strength friction grip bolts shall comply with IS 3757.
All load indicators shall be suitably marked for identification purposes and shall be of
standard black, lightly oiled, finish and shall be packed prior to dispatch, by the
manufacturer, in waterproof containers and shall be stored in those containers under
cover until required for use in the works.
Only general grade load indicators shall be used with general grade high strength
friction grip bolts.
Each high strength friction grip bolt when installed in the works shall be complete with
one washer placed under the nut and one load indicator placed under the bolt head
and each bolt shall be tightened at all stages by rotating the nut only, the bolt head
being completely restrained against rotational movement.
Alternatively, in joints where accessibility is limited to the extent that bolts must be
tightened by rotating the bolt heads, then washers shall be laced under the bolt heads
and both load indicators and nut face washer shall be placed under the nuts. In these
cases each bolt shall be tightened at all stages by rotating the bolt head only, the nut
being completely restrained against rotational movement.
All high strength friction grip bolts shall first be tightened sufficiently to secure the
structural steelwork during its erection or assembly. Following the completion of the
erection or assembly of each portion of the structural steelwork those bolts shall be
finally tightened until the gaps between the load indicators and either the bolt heads
or the nut face washers have been reduced to:
(i) 0.400mm where load indicators are fitted under the bolt heads.
(ii) 0.250 mm where load indicators are fitted under the nuts and beneath nut
face washers.
The bolts may be tightened by a part-torque part-turn method. The part-torque
tightening for bedding down shall be in accordance with BS 4604: Part 1 except that it
shall be carried out by a calibrated tightening device such as a torque-controlled
manual wrench or power operated wrench. The bedding torque to be applied to the
bolts shall be as given in Table 22.1.
T ABLE 1600.1: PRELIMINARY TIGHTENING OF NUTS
Nominal dia of bolt Bedding torque ± 10 percent

mm Nm
16 80
20 160
22 210
24 270
27 340
30 460
After bedding down of the joints, each nut and the protruding threads of the bolt shall
be permanently marked to record their relative positions. The nuts shall then be
tightened to the approval of the Engineer by the part-turn of the nut method in
accordance with BS 4604: Part 1.
1605 CASTINGS AND HEAT TREATMENT
(1) Foundry Practice
Patterns for casting shall be furnished by the Contractor. They shall be constructed to
produce a finished casting in true conformity to the dimensions and details shown in the plan.
All sharp angles shall be boldly filleted. Fillets shall be of such size that there is no reduction
in planned clearances due to their addition. External corners on all castings, except
ornamental type, shall be rounded to a 5 mm radius. Proper allowance for shrinkage shall be
made in all patterns. Sufficient materials shall be provided on all surfaces which are to receive
a finish so that, after finishing, the castings will be the planned size, and the finished surfaces
will be true, free from pockets, sand intrusions, or other defects. Draft provided shall allow the
plan dimensions and shall not reduce the thickness of metal specified. All patterns shall be
painted, indicating in different colors, the metal, cores and finished surfaces.
Split cores shall not be permitted between unfinished surfaces of restricted clearance. The
number and spacing of chaplets shall be such that the strength of the casting is not impaired
by their use.
The casting shall be accomplished by a method that will ensure the complete filling of all
corners, arises and edges. Castings requiring undercut surfaces shall be cast by the "lost wax
process" or equivalent. Where practicable, castings having one machined surface shall be
cast with the surface down. Metal from different melts shall not be permitted in the same
casting.
Castings shall not be withdrawn from the mould until they have properly cooled. Quenching of
casting to speed up the cooling shall not be permitted.
All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned of molding and core sand by sand blasting or by
other approved methods. All high spots and rough edges resulting from pouring connections
shall be ground smooth.
All castings shall ring true when suspended and struck with a hammer. W hen ordered by the
Engineer, the soundness of the casting shall be further tested by drilling, planing, magnetic
particle test or X-ray.
Any structural defect in a casting such as blow holes, pipes, sand holes, cracks, checks, slag
inclusions, cold shuts, unfilled arises, warped surfaces, or deformation from core or flask
movement shall be cause for rejection.
Castings with minor defects shall not be repaired until the Engineer has given his permission.
The method employed in such repair work shall be approved by the Engineer.
(2) Heat Treatment
The term "heat treatment" shall mean any method of intentionally and systematically applying
heat, at a temperature below the melting point, to any casting after it has cooled. This heat
may be applied one or more times irrespective of cooling the procedure.
The term "annealing" shall mean either normalizing (air cooling) a casting or full annealing
(furnace cooling) a casting.
Full annealing shall consist of a heat treatment in which the casting is heated slowly to the
proper temperature above the critical range, maintained in such temperature for the required
time, and allowed to cool slowly in the furnace until the temperature has fallen to 260 degrees
F or less. The casting may then be withdrawn from the furnace and air cooled. The furnace
temperature shall be controlled by pyrometers.
All other castings shall be annealed when so specified in the contract.
All forgings, and such other steel Sections as may be required by the contract, shall be full
annealed. Other steel members, except primped web stiffeners, that have been partially-
heated shall be full annealed unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
1606 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
(1) General
Welding shall be generally in accordance with IS 1024 and relevant British Standards as
further amplified in the following Sub-clauses.
(2) Materials
Welding materials unless specified in the contract or agreed by the Engineer shall comply
with the appropriate Indian Standard listed below:
(a) IS 814 -1991 covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon
and carbon manganese steel (fifth revision).
(b) IS 1278-1972 filler rods and wires for gas welding (second revision)
Classification and color coding of electrodes shall be in accordance with IS 814-1991.
(3) Welding Equipment
Welding equipment shall comply with the appropriate Indian Standard listed below unless
otherwise stipulated in the contract or agreed by the Engineer.
IS 2635 -1975: DC electric welding generators (second revision).
IS 4804 (Part 1) -1968: Single-phase transformers.
IS 4804 (Part 2) -1968: Single-phase rocker arm spot welding machines.
IS 4804 (Part 3) -1969: Single-phase spot and projection welding machines.
IS 4559 -1993: Single operator rectifier type DC arc welding power source (second
revision).
IS 2641 -1989: Electrical welding accessories (first revision).
The welding plant and equipment employed on the works shall be of sufficient capacity to
carry out the agreed procedures and suitable for the types of electrodes in use. All necessary
staging and screens shall be provided for the welders, supervisors and inspectors and all
plant and equipment shall be maintained in an efficient condition. Suitable tong test ammeters
shall be provided for measuring the current, except only, when efficient means of so doing are
incorporated as part of the welding plant.
The strength of the welding current shall be within the range recommended by the
manufacturer of the particular electrode being used and shall be towards the upper limit of the
range rather than the lower.
Welding shall wherever possible be carried out in covered workshops and under the specified
conditions of temperature, where continuous supervision is exercised. Machine welding may
be allowed where approved machines are in use correctly controlled by qualified operators.
Site welding shall not be carried out unless prior written agreement from the Engineer has
been obtained. All such welding shall be subject to 100% non-destructive testing.
(4) Qualification of Welders
All welding operators shall be qualified persons in accordance with Clause 23 of BS 5135 and
the names of all operators and details of their qualifications shall be submitted to the Engineer
for agreement. Any operator whose standard of workmanship is unsatisfactory shall be
immediately suspended. The operators shall be produced by the Contractor for re-testing and
verification of his qualification once he has received further instruction in this respect. Routine
testing of all operators shall be required in every six months.
(5) Workmanship
(a) Assembly
Material that is to be welded shall be free form loose mill scale, rust, or other foreign
matter on the surface to be welded and for a distance of at least 50 mm on each side
of the weld. The preparation of edges for welding may be made by milling, chipping or
cutting with a torch. All traces of overheated metal caused by torch cutting shall be
removed. For this chipping to expose clean metal may be required. Grinding shall not
be permitted on any surface or edge which is to be welded, unless the surface is
subsequently thoroughly cleaned of carborundum and metal particles.
Members or parts which have been painted shall have all of the paint removed from
the area which will be affected by the heat of the arc. This shall be accomplished by
burning with a blow torch or blow pipe and brushing with a wire brush.
(b) Welding
Welding shall not be done in rain, snow or wind, or when the temperature of the metal
is below 4°C, unless satisfactory protection such as shelters, wind-breaks and heat is
provided.
During moderately cold weather the use of small movable shelters and preheating the
metal by means of blow torches will be in general satisfactory. W hen the temperature
is below - 10°C, the span or portion of structure undergoing welding shall be entirely
housed in and heated to a minimum of 5°C. The use of open salamanders for such
heating shall not be permitted.
Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to the minimum
practicable and local distortion is rendered negligible in the final structure.
All welding procedures including those items listed in Clause 20 of BS 5135 shall be
submitted to the Engineer in advance for agreement. All welding procedures
submitted for agreement shall have previously been approved by an Independent
Inspector, from authentic documented experience gained with welding of joints similar
to that for which the welding procedure applies. W here no such approval is available,
then the welding procedure shall be subject to approval after testing in accordance
with the requirement of BS4870.
All welds shall be of the specified size and shape, and they shall be placed at the
locations designated. W elds which are not in conformity with those required or welds
which are defective, shall be chipped out and redone in an approved manner. Weld
protrusions which interfere with later work or which present an uneven or un-
workmanlike appearance shall be finished smooth by chipping and grinding.
Deposited weld metal must be completely fused to all metal with which it is in contact.
The weld shall be free of all pits, porous Sections, cold shuts, or slag inclusions. All
pits and craters shall be filled and all ends shall be boxed.
An electrode of the proper size shall be selected for the weld desired. The electric
current shall be adjusted for the electrode so that full fusion will be obtained without
undercutting. Undercut welds shall be chipped back to bright metal and re-welded.
The arc shall be kept uniform and steady and shall be applied in a manner which will
fuse the metal without boiling, running or unnecessary spatter.
The placement of welds shall be such as to minimize shrinkage or distortion of the
members. Members in which there is distortion caused by welding must be
straightened to the satisfaction of the Engineer without structural damage to the
member or to the welds.
Peening for welds shall not be permitted.
(c) Final Finish of Welds
The final finished surface of the weld shall be smooth and regular and shall conform
as closely as practicable to the design requirements. All slag shall be removed from
the finished weld. All flux deposit which may cause paint to rot shall be entirely
removed. The entire surface shall be thoroughly wire-brushed before painting. If
required by the Engineer, the final surface shall be finished smooth by chipping and
grinding the weld deposit.
(d) Weld Inspection
Inspection shall be made during the welding process and after the weld is completed
and cooled in accordance with IS 3600. All defects shall be entirely removed or
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall designate at least 25
mm of every 2500 mm of welding for removal, to determine the penetration, fusion
and porosity of the weld.
Plug borings shall be furnished when requested with the use of "X-ray" or magnetic-
particle examinations may be made where the proper testing equipment is available.
In such cases the inspection practice shall be in accordance with IS 1182 or IS 5334
as appropriate.
(6) Safety Precaution
Suitable shoes, helmets, hand shields, glasses, gloves, aprons, screens, canvas, wind
shields and all other equipment necessary for the protection of the work, the welders, the
helpers and the Engineer's Inspector shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The provisions of IS 818 -1968 Code of Practice of Safety and health requirements in electric
and gas welding and cutting operations (first revision) shall be observed.
(7) Procedure Trials
When directed by the Engineer and before fabrication is commenced, welding and flame
cutting procedure trials shall be carried out using representative samples of materials to be
used in the work.
The samples of material shall be selected and marked by the Engineer when the materials for
the work are inspected at the mills.
Trials on material 20mm thick shall be taken to include all material up to but not exceeding
20mm thick. Trials on material 38mm thick shall be taken to include material over 20mm and
up to but not exceeding 38mm thick. Material over 38mm thick shall be tested for every
thickness increment of 6mm.
The welding and flame cutting trials shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer the
procedures to be adopted in the fabrication of the work which shall include:
a) W elding procedure in accordance with BS 5135-1984.
b) The heat control techniques required to ensure that the flame cut surfaces of steel
are free from cracks, local hardness, and any other defects which would be
detrimental to the finished work.
The trials shall include specimen weld details representative of the actual construction which
shall be welded in a manner simulating the m ost unfavorable conditions liable to occur in the
particular fabrication. W here primers are to be applied to the work prior to fabrication, they
shall be applied to the sample material before the procedure trials are made. After welding the
specimens shall be held at a temperature not less than 10° for a period of not less than 72
hours and shall then be sectioned and examined for cracks and other defects.
The following groups of tests as per BS 709 shall be carried out in accordance with Clause
621.
(i) Butt Welds
Transverse tensile test
Transverse and longitudinal bend tests
Separate tests shall be performed in each case with the root of the weld in
tension and compression respectively.
Charpy V-notch impact tests BS 4360
Macro examination test
(ii) Fillet Welds
Fillet weld fracture test
Macro examination test
(8) Use of Electrodes
Electrodes and fluxes shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(9) Butt Welds
Unless otherwise described in the contract, all butt welds shall be complete penetration welds
made between prepared fusion faces.
In the fabrication of built-up assemblies, all butt welds in each component part shall be
completed, whenever possible, before the final assembly.
The position of welds required for temporary attachments shall be agreed by the Engineer
before the work commences.
Where automatic or semi-automatic process are used back gouging of deposited weld shall
not be required where the Engineer is satisfied that the root run is free from imperfection.
Where butt welds are to be ground flush, there shall be no loss of parent metal. The final
grinding shall be in the direction described in the contract.
Strud shear connector shall be welded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
In butt joints the root edges or root faces shall not be out of alignment by more than 0.125
times the thickness of the thinner material for material up to 12mm thick or by more than 2mm
for thicker material.
Requirements for "run-on" and run-off" plates shall be as follows:
a) One pair of run-on plates and one pair of run-off plates all prepared to the same
thickness and profile as the parent metal shall be attached by clamps to the start and
finish respectively of all butt welds. Unless otherwise required by the Engineer,
approximately 1 in 5 pairs of run-off plates, for butt welds in tension flanges and 1 in
10 pairs for other butt welds, shall be production test plates. The combined size of
each pair of production test plates shall be either 225mm, 300mm or 375mm wide X
200mm long as shown in Table 22.2 the length being measured in the rolling direction
of the metal and at right angles to the weld.
T ABLE 1600.2: SIZES OF RUN-OFF PRODUCTION TEST PLATES
Material Combined size (per pair) of run-off production test plates

Plates up to Plates from 30mm to Plates over 75mm thick
30mm thick 75mm thick
IS-1915 300x200 375 x 200 Sizes to be agreed by the Engineer

b) Butt welds shall run the full length of the joint and extend at full weld profile for a
minimum distance of 25mm into the run-off plates, and for a minimum distances of
200mm, 275mm, 350mm respectively into the 225mm X 200mm X 200mm run-off
production test plates.
c) On completion of the welds the run-off production test plates shall not be removed
until they have been marked in a manner agreed by the Engineer to identify them with
the joints to which they are attached.
d) W hen removing the run-on and run-off plates by flame cutting the cuts shall not be
nearer than 5mm to the sides of the parent metal and the remaining metal shall be
removed by grinding or other method agreed by the Engineer.
e) Specimens for the following tests to be carried out in accordance with Clause 621
shall be selected from the run-off production test plates by the Engineer:
i. Transverse tensile test(s): The number of test shall be sufficient to cover the full
thickness of plate,
ii. Transverse bend test
(10) Camber
Main girders shall be fabricated to the cambers shown on the Drawing. Plates shall be
prepared to produce a profile which approximates to a parabolic curve, from the supports to
the midspan point of the girder.
M
(1) Handling and Storage of Materials
Structural metals shall be carefully unloaded manually or by means of suitable equipment so
as to avoid damage to the materials or their painted surfaces. Under no circumstances shall
structural steel be dropped or skidded off cars or vehicles, nor shall it be dragged over the
ground. Beams and girders shall be transported and handled in upright position. Pin holes, or
other field connection holes, shall not be used as places for "hook-on".
Material not to be placed directly in the structure shall be stored above probable high water,
on skids or platforms in a manner that will prevent distortion in the members or the
accumulation of water or dirt on such members. Beams and girders shall be stored in an
upright position and securely stored. Provision shall be made to protect all metals against
corrosion.
All damaged metals shall be rejected
(2) Preparation for Bearing Area
Before placing column bases, bed plates or shoes and the bearing shall be prepared to
proper elevation.
(3) Straightening Bent Metal
Straightening of bends in main structural members shall not be permitted in the field. Such
members shall be returned to the fabricator for proper repair or replacement.
Bent material shall be straightened, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and under his direct
supervision, before such material is incorporated into the structure.
The straightening of bends shall be done by methods that will not produce embrittlement,
fracture or damage. All material shall be straightened cold when practicable. No plated,
galvanized, enameled, heat treated aluminum and similar metals shall be heated. W hen
metals of these types can not be satisfactorily straightened cold, they shall be returned to the
fabricator for repair or replacement.
Mild steel and structural grade steel may be heated when necessary to accomplish
straightening. Other carbon steel and low alloy steels shall not be heated unless specific
approval is granted by the Engineer. Heating and straightening shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-clause 2203
(3) (g).
1608 ASSEMBLING AND BOLTING
(1) General
All field contact surfaces, including shims, which have not been given a shop coat of paint,
shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a coat of the specified "shop coat" paint, except when
such surfaces are to be completely sealed by welding. Assembly of Sections shall be made
while the contact paint is still plastic. All surfaces of metal which will be inaccessible after
erection shall be thoroughly cleaned of al! foreign matter, spot coated and field painted in
accordance with the provisions of Clause 2209.
Immediately before assembly, all pins shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a coat of red
lead. The pins shall be inserted into the holes before the red lead is dry and the pin nuts are
drawn tight. The exposed threads shall be effectively burred or checked at the face of the nut.
Fabricated Sections which have been assembled, reamed, and match marked in the shop
shall be erected in exact conformity with such match marks. The interchanging of parts shall
not be permitted.
Steel structures shall be assembled to correct line and elevation before any welding is
undertaken.
(2) Trusses
Truss spans, except those portions erected by the cantilever method, shall be erected on
blocks so placed as to provide required camber. The camber shall be secured by adjusting all
panel points to the elevations as shown in the plan or as directed by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken that trusses are in perfect alignment and that all milled ends of
compression members are in full contact. The spans must be fully erected, including all
portals, laterals, struts and sways, and all field connections, except connection for stringers,
rails and expansion devices, shall be securely drift pinned and bolted before any of these is
permitted. In case of cantilever spans, the Engineer may permit welding portions of the
anchor spans before the cantilever arms are completely erected.
(3) Simple Girders
Simple girder and beam spans shall be accurately set to square or skew as required in the
Drawing, with all diaphragms drift pinned and bolted in place before field welding is permitted.
Truss, girder or beam spans designed continuous over supports shall be completely erected
before any welding is permitted.
Unless otherwise provided in the contract, suspended spans shall not be erected until the
adjoining spans are completely erected. No welding shall be permitted until the erection is
complete.
For continuous or cantilever spans, the number of fitting-up bolts and drift pins required shall
be determined by the Engineer for the stresses developed in the various joints during
erection. Drift pins and bolts shall be used in equal proportions and shall be located as to hold
effectively the joint members in close contact and in correct position during all welding
operations.
Erection washers not less than 5 mm in thickness and not less than 50 mm in diameter shall
be used with all erection bolts.
(4) Welding
Connections to be welded shall be held in tight contact by means of bolts and clamps before
welding and the welding shall conform to the requirements of Clause 2206.
(5) Bolted Connections
Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, grease, paint lacquer, or
other foreign material before assembly. All bolts shall be installed with a hardened washer
under nut or bolt head whichever is the element turned in tightening. Bolts may be tightened
by any method to the required tension. The torque value needed to develop the required bolt
tension shall be determined by the Engineer. Bolt tension shall be checked at locations
determined by the Engineer in the presence of the Contractor and in such manner that the
Engineer can read the torque gauge. Other methods of determining bolt tension may be used,
provided the prior approval of the Engineer is obtained in writing. Nuts shall be positioned
whenever practicable on the side of the member which will not be visible from the traveled
way. Nuts for bolt which can be partially bedded in concrete shall be positioned on the side of
the member that will be encased in concrete. Bolts up to 6mm larger in diameter of those
shown in the Drawing may be used provided that the required clearance and edge distances
are not reduced below those required for the larger bolt.
1609 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION
(1) Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Paint
Before paint is applied to any surface other than metal-coated surfaces the appropriate
surface preparations as described in the contract shall be carried out in accordance with the
following:
(a) Bare Metal Surfaces
Blast cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with BS4232 to the quality of
surface finish as described in the contract. The m aximum grade of abrasive permitted
shall be as specified in Table 2 of BS4232. Non-metallic abrasives shall not be
permitted. The abrasive used for blasting shall be free from contamination and any
recovered material shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer before re-use.
The maximum amplitude (peak to trough) of the blast-cleaned surface shall not
exceed 0.10 mm. Surfaces shall be protected within the following time of having been
blast cleaned :
2 hours if humidity in air is < 85%
A sample blast-cleaned steel panel measuring not less than 150 mm x 150 mm x 6
mm adequately protected by sealed clean polythene wrapping shall be submitted to
the
Engineer for approval before any work is put in hand. The approved sample shall
then be retained by the Engineer's inspectors for comparison with the prepared
steelwork.
(b) Mechanical Cleaning.
Mechanical cleaning shall be carried out by power-driven tools, such as carborundum
grinding discs, chipping hammers and needle guns, followed by steel-wire brushing
and dusting to remove all loosened material. Excessive brushing of the metal through
prolonged application of rotary wire brushes shall be avoided. Surfaces shall be
protected within the time as specified above in Sub-clause 2209 (1) (a) after they are
mechanically cleaned.
(c) Welds and Areas Affected by Welding
Unless otherwise described in the contract, welds and surfaces which have been
affected by welding shall be prepared for painting by the same process as described
in the contract for the adjoining metal.
(d) Painted Surfaces
Painted surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust immediately prior to the application of
further paint. Any loose paint and rust shall be removed. Areas contaminated by oil
and grease shall be cleaned with white spirit. W here required by the Engineer, the
whole surface shall then be cleaned by washing down with a solution of an approved
liquid detergent followed by rinsing with clean fresh water and allowed to dry
thoroughly before paint is applied.
(2) Treatment of Surfaces
(a) High Strength Friction Grip Bolt Interfaces
The treatment of interfaces to be jointed by high strength friction grip bolts shall be as
described in the contract. Paint work shall be stopped off at a distance of 75 mm from
the joints and all interfaces shall be cleaned by wire brushing before assembly.
(b) Untreated Surfaces
Steel work surfaces which will have concrete cast against them shall be left
unpainted. The surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to remove loose rust, mill
scale and surface contamination.
(3) Storage of Paint
Paint shall be stored in sealed containers in a lock-up store in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Paint which has not been used within the "shelf life" period
specified on the containers or within 12 months of the date of manufacture, whichever is the
lesser, shall not be used.
Paint from painter's kettles shall be returned to store at the end of each working period where
it shall be kept in a sealed container. Before it is re-issued for use it shall be thoroughly mixed
and no fresh paint or thinners shall be added.
(4) Application of paint
All paint shall be supplied from the store to the painters ready for application. The addition of
thinners or of any other material shall be thereafter prohibited. Any instructions given by the
paint manufacturer shall be strictly followed.
All painting shall be carried out by skilled painters under competent supervision. Paint shall be
applied to dry surfaces which have been prepared in accordance with Sub-clause 2209 (1).
The interval between preparation of the metal surface and the application of the first priming
coat of paint shall be in accordance with the relevant requirements of Sub-clause 2209(1).
Paint shall not be applied under the following conditions:
a) W hen the ambient temperature falls below 4°C or the relative humidity rises above
90° except if otherwise stated in the manufacturer's instructions.
b) During rain or mist.
c) W hen condensation has occurred or is likely to occur on the steel.
Each coat of paint shall be applied by the method instructed by the manufacturer to produce a
continuous film paint of uniform and even thickness. As soon as the first priming coat has
dried, an extra stripe coat of paint shall be applied by brush to edges, corners, crevices, bolt
heads and welds, using paint of similar composition to the subsequent undercoat, but in a
contrasting shade. Successive coats shall have different shades for identification and each
coat shall be thoroughly dry before the application of a further coat.
The total dry paint film thickness of the paint system on bare steel surfaces and on metal
coated surfaces shall be as described in the contract. The dry paint film shall be measured by
Elcometer or other instrument approved by the Engineer.
In order to obtain the dry film thickness specified, the Contractor shall ensure that the
coverage rate given by the paint manufacturer shall enable this thickness to be attained.
Wet film thickness gauges may be used for checking but shall not be permitted as a means of
predicting the dry film thickness.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer the paint system applied at the works shall be
applied under cover, in controlled conditions, at the fabricator's works. One undercoat plus
one finishing coat shall be applied at Site within the time limit stipulated by the paint
manufacturer.
No paint shall be used after the expiration of the "pot-life" stipulated by the manufacturer. The
paints of expired "pot life" shall not be mixed with fresh paint or have thinners added to them.
(5) Storage of Painted Steelwork
Painted steel work which is to be stored prior to erection shall be kept clear of the ground and
shall be laid or stacked in an orderly manner that will ensure that no water or dirt can
accumulate on the surfaces. Suitable packing shall be laid between the layers of stacked
materials. W here cover is provided, it shall be ventilated.
Prime painted steelwork which is to be stored out-doors or transported prior to fabrication
shall not be exposed for periods longer than the following, before being overcoated:
Blast primers -1 coat Maximum 8 weeks, including 2 weeks of this time out-doors.
(6) Repairs to damaged Surfaces.
Areas of paint which have been damaged during handling, storing, loading and off-loading,
transportation, erection and construction shall be cleaned to bare metal, and the edges of the
undamaged paint leveled with sandpaper.
The full specified painting system shall then be re-applied and the new paint shall overlap the
existing paint by at least 50 mm all round the affected area.
(7) Painting of Joints
As soon as possible after joints have been made and passed by the Engineer the parent and
joint material, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and washers, weld and weld affected areas shall
be prepared as stated in the contract and brought up to the same state of painting as the
adjoining surfaces.
(8) Painting Methods
Coat of paint in a system of painting shall be applied each by one of the following methods:
a) Brush
b) Roller (for shop painting only), supplemented by brush where necessary
c) Air pressure spraying
d) Airless spraying
(9) Protective systems
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate copies of the manufacturer's data
sheets for the paints he proposes to use. Following the Engineer's written instruction the
requirements of the paint manufacturer's data sheets shall be adopted for the W orks.
Where called for by the Engineer the Contractor shall carry out paint application procedure
trials, either at the fabricator's works or at Site as appropriate, with the equipment and labor to
be used in the works. The Contractor shall supply suitable blast cleaned steel and sufficient
paint for the trials and must demonstrate his ability to apply each coat of paint of a designated
paint system in accordance with the Specification and the paint manufacturer's data sheet. No
painting of the contract steelwork shall be permitted until the procedure trials have been
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any adjustment to the registered paint
formulation shown to be required by the trials, other than an increase in the amount of
thinners, must be agreed by the Engineer and made at the paint manufacturer's works before
the final stage of a paint procedure trial and before delivery of the first batch of paint.
All requirements of the paint manufacturer's data sheets shall be complied with. Paint shall be
supplied from the Contractor's paint store to the painters ready for application, the only
adjustment of formulation being as provided in paragraph 2 above. Any addition of thinners
must be made in the store under the supervision of the Engineer and only as allowed under
the manufacturer data.
(a) Superstructure Steelwork
(i) Steelwork Members
Surface preparation at works : Blast clean to Ist quality (including joint areas)
BS7079.
Painting: as shown on the following Table:
Painting at Coat Paint Method of application

works
1st Zinc Chromate/Red Oxide Airless Spray

Blast Primer
Excluding (Stripe to edges etc.) Zinc Phosphate epoxy ester Brush (Airless Spray grade
joints 2nd 3rd 4th undercoat As Stripe Coat paint)
As Stripe Coat As Stripe Coat Airless Spray Airless Spray
Airless Spray
At site 5th Micaceous Iron Oxide Brush

Phenolic/tung oil undercoat
6th Micaceous Iron Oxide Brush

Phenolic/tung oil Finish Dark
Grey
(ii) High Strength Friction Grip Bolted Joints

a. Cover Plates
Surfaces preparation at works: Blast clean to 1 st quality BS7079.
Painting at works (excluding : One coat, Zinc Chromate/Red Oxide
contact surfaces) Blast primer applied by Airless
Spray.
Surface Preparation at site : Before assembly, wire brush contact
surfaces by hand.
After assembly, wire brush works coat of
blast primer.
Painting at site (after bolting) : Coats 1, Stripe and 2 to 6 as (i) above but all
applied by brush and coat within 4 hours of
wire brushing works blast primer.
Minimum total dry film thickness at stripe
coated areas: 250 micron.
b. Contact Surfaces of Steelwork Members
Surface preparation Before assembly, mask around contact
at site: surface apply paint stripper and scrape off works
coat of blast primer. W ash off stripper and wire brush
by hand when dry.
b. Bolts, Nuts and Washers
At site: Remove oil than prepare surfaces and paint
as for cover plates above.
(iii) Painting System for Repairs to Damaged Surfaces
Coats 1, Stripe (if relevant) and 2 to 6 as above but all applied by brush
(b) Parapets and Guard-rails
Surface Preparation: Pickling
Metal Coating : Hot-dip galvanizing Minimum weight of galvanizing
1610 g/m_ or minimum thickness 85 micron.
(10) Metal Coatings
Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer procedures for applying metal coatings shall be in
accordance with the following :-
(a) BS729 Part 1: Hot-dip Galvanized Coatings
Part 2: Sherardised Coatings
Metal coatings to BS 729 shall only be applied to components of a tensile strength up to and
including that of General Grade HSFG bolts unless specified by the Engineer.
(b) BS2569 Part 1 Sprayed metal Coatings (Zinc and Aluminum). The nominal thickness
of coatings to be 100 micron.
(c) BS3382 : Part 1 and 2. Electroplated Coatings on Threaded Components( Cadmium
and zinc). This British Standard shall be deemed to cover the electroplating of
components up to and including 36mm diameter. The minimum thickness of coating
to be 5 micron.
Where a metal coating is required only on part of an assembled Section it shall be applied
before the rest of the Section receives its priming cot.
(11) Etch Primers and Blast Primers
Etch primers and blast primers shall be suitable for continuous spray application. They shall
not be used on phosphated steel nor shall they be overcoated with zinc rich primers.
1610 MEASUREMENT
The structural steel shall be measured in ton and shall be based on the n et weight of metal in
the fabricated/erected structure computed on the basis of nominal weight of the elements.
While computing the weight, the specific gravity of steel shall be adopted 7.85 ton per cubic
meter. The weight shall be determined from the dim ensions shown on the Drawing. The
weight so measured shall be inclusive of weld fillets and weight of protective coatings, if any.
All operations like cutting, bending, straightening, heat and cold treatments, machining,
temporary and permanent erections, connections, bolts, nuts and washers, welding, painting
and protection against corrosion and other ancillary and incidental operations shall be
deemed included in the weight of the steel structure as measured above.
1611 PAYMENT
The structural steel as measured shall be paid at the contract unit rate which shall be the full
and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and also for the cost of all
operations required for fabrication, connections, oiling, painting, temporary erection,
inspection, tests and final erection including all other ancillary and incidental works needed to
complete the work as per these Specifications and/or directed by the Engineer.
CHAPTER 17
1700 METAL WORK
Generally all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds, free from defects, and to be obtained
from approved manufactures. All work shall be carried out in a workman like manner and strictly as
directed by the Project Engineer. The materials in all stages of transportation, handling and storage
shall be kept clean, free from injury and breaking, bending and distortion prevented.
All smith's work shall be forged clean from the anvil, all screwed work shall have full internal and
external threads.
Balustrades, etc., shall be well framed together and all connections properly fitted, shouldered, drilled,
tapped and screwed together with set screws counter sunk flush with the surface where indicated.
Welded joints shall be neatly made, filed smooth and left clean and adequate means shall be
employed for temporarily fastening the parts to be welded together until the joints are welded.
Nails, Spikes and Bolts shall be of approved manufacture and best quality mild steel or wrought iron
of lengths and weights approved by the Project Engineer.
Nails shall comply with the relevant British or Indian standard Specification.
(1) Windows and Frames
Windows shall not be forced into openings which are out of square or too small. The windows
shall be secured at head jamb and sill, and care shall be taken that windows shall be sec ured
distorted when screwing up to lugs and fixing screws. Windows shall be grouted with cement
mortar into the prepared openings and joints between building openings and window frames
shall be caulked with mastic cement obtained from the window manufactures.
(2) Building in
Unless otherwise described, all items of metal work shall include for "building in" to concrete
or walling etc. and for "making good" finishing thereto.
1701 ALUMINUM WINDOWS FRAME AND SHUTTERS
(1) Material
These shall be fabricated from 15 micron natural or color anodized Aluminum profiles
conforming to IS: 733-1983.
The glazing glass shall be clear IAG float glass or equivalent without any distortion.
The window shall be made out of extruded aluminum section (Al. Mg. Si.) and shall conform
to IS – 63400, AA-6063 unless otherwise directed. Aluminum sections shall be anodized and
the anodic film shall be 12-15 microns. The colors shall be as directed. The 2-3 tracks on
outer frame of standard size otherwise directed shall be fixed in the position by using heavy
duty plastic grips with necessary plugs and fillers. All the sliding shutters shall be provided
with two ball bearing rollers and ratting pieces/guides one each at the top and bottom,
weather strips all around. Open able window shall be double weather stripped, one strip shall
be provided in outer frame and outer shall be in the shutter frame. The hinges or stay hinges
of open able window shall be strong. Pin of the hinges shall be of non-corroding materials,
preferably nylon/steel. All the joints shall be mechanically fixed. All the window shutter shall
be provided with special locking arrangement. Glass shall be fixed in the shutter by means of
rubber gaskets.
The sliding window frames are of two-track design and the shutters are to be jointed by
special cleats for extra strength. Rollers mounted on ball bearings are to be fitted to obtain
smooth operation. The sliding shutters shall have provisions for grooves for weather strips to
exclude wind, water or dust ingress. The shutters are glazed with 4mm thick approved quality
and clear transparent glass using gaskets of ethylene- propylene or PVC (EPDM/ PVC). The
doorframe shall be made of aluminum extrusion as per design. The ventilator frames with
fixed glass shall be of same dimension as the sliding two-track frame. The frames and
shutters are to be fabricated by using the crimping method of corner jointing. Corners of
frames are to be miter cut on high speed TCT saw machines to give burr free corners. Sturdy
corner cleats should hold the frames with only a hairline corner joint visible and the frames
should be square/ rectangular and free from distortions. The frames shall be firmly secured to
the walls in line and level. Only aluminum screws shall be used for joining and no welding will
be allowed. The joint between the frame and the plaster on walls, sill and lintel beam shall be
filled with silicon sealant. The aluminum windows/ ventilators/ doors shall be free from
scratches and other visible defects.
The frames are fixed to the wall with plastic grips and steel screws of suitable color.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
1702 MILD STEEL FOLDED DOOR AND WINDOWS FRAME AND SHUTTERS
(1) Materials
Specifications and Codes: All work shall conform to relevant Indian/ British or American
Standard specifications and codes of practice for materials, methods and practices.
1. All metals shall be free from defects impairing strength durability or appearance and
shall be of best commercial quality for each intended purpose.
2. Fastenings, which are exposed, shall be of the same materials, color and finish the
metal to which they are applied, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or
specified. All items employed with galvanized iron and steel shall be galvanized
ferrous metal.
3. Steel: Mild steel shall comply with B.S. 15, where a guaranteed yield stress is
required and shall comply with B.S. 3706 Grade –I for other general uses where a
guaranteed yield stress is not required that rolled sections shall comply with B.S. or
Mild rolled steel sections/ frames for windows, doors etc. shall be as B.S. 990: Pt2:
1972 or B.S.1787, 1951 or IS 2062-1962. Pressed steel sections & frames for
windows, doors & ventilators shall comply with IS 4351 1976.
4. Sheet Steel: Shall conform to the requirement of British Standard Specifications.
5. Filter Metal for W elding: Welding electrodes for manual shielded metal are welding
shall conform to British Standard Specification.
6. Details and Specification: of accessory items for which standard products are
available are representative guides to requirements for such items Standard products
generally meeting such equipments will be accepted, if details of construction and
installation are approved of the consultant.
Painting and Protection:
1. All ferrous metal surfaces, except pre-finished galvanized items and those obviously
not to be painted, shall before leaving the shop or manufacturing plant, be cleaned of
all scale, rust, grease and other foreign matter and shall be given one (1) thorough
step coat on all surfaces, of an approved primer of red lead until and unless changed,
ready and compatible for finish painting at the building site under painting Section.
Primer shall be compatible with materials to be used infield painting and shall be used
directly from factory-labeled containers. Touch-up damaged and abraded spots after
installation using same paint. Steel fully embedded in concrete shall be left unpainted.
Workmanship
1. All work shall be executed by experienced mechanics and shall conform to details, be
clean and straight with sharply defined profiles. Unless otherwise particularly noted,
finished surfaces shall have smooth finish.
2. Curved work shall be formed to true radius and punching shall be done cleanly so as
not to deform or mar adjacent surfaces.
3. Shop connections shall be welded or rivaled and field connections bolted unless
otherwise indicated. Use flat-head counter-sunk rivets finished flush where riveted
connections are exposed to view in finished work. Bolts shall be turned up tight and
threads deformed to prevent loosening.
4. Castings shall be sound and free from warp, holes and other defects that impair
strength and appearance. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish with sharp
well-defined lines and arises. Machined joints shall be milled to a close fit. Provide all
necessary logs, brackets and similar items so that work can be assembled and
installed in a neat, substantial manner.
5. Flanges shall be concealed where pre thickness of metal/ metal sheets and sheets
and details of assembly and support shall be such as to provide sample strength and
stiffness.
6. Provide holes and connections as required to accommodate the work of other trades
and for site assembly of metal work. Holes shall be drilled or punched and reamed in
the shop.
7. Joints and connections exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water.
8. All materials and workmanship under this section shall be subject to inspection in the
mill, shop and field by the consultants.
Doors, windows, ventilators and other frames required for fixing glazing/ shutter shall be out
of high strength aluminum or steel as described above. All samples are to be approved by the
consultant prior to fixing, and the units shall not be forced into opening which are out of
square or too small. The doors, windows and ventilators shall be secured at head jamb and
sill, and care shall be taken that the units are not distorted when screwing up to lugs and
fixing screws. Frames shall be grouted with cement mortar into the prepared openings and
joints and the frames shall be caulked with mastic cement/ synthetic resin obtained from the
window manufacturers, or as approved and specified. Metal doors, windows and ventilators
shall be provided with one shop coat of rust inhibitive paint and three coats of enamel or
aluminum paint upon installation. Metal windows shall be installed in masonry or concrete
with steel holdfasts in an approved manner and shall be installed in plumb line & level.
i. Each window shall be complete including anchors, clips, bolts, mullions, hardware
and attachments required.
ii. Drips and weep holes shall be provided.
iii. Mullion covers shall be provided for mullion.
iv. Openable sections of windows shall be watertight and water stripped.
v. All glazed panels shall be provided with glazing arrangements with clips, beads or
other approved method. Glass shall be as per specification and conform to IS: 2835-
1977. Putty for fixing shall not be less than 185gms per meter of glass per meter.
Steel Door and W indows Frames shall be made from M.S. Steel sheet of 18G and shutter
from 20G M.S. Steel sheet folded to the shape as shown in drawing. The bending joints are
welded smoothly and grinded to form the same surface as the section and shall be in perfect
line and level. Doors and Windows shall not be forced into openings, which are out of square
or too small. The doors and windows shall be secured by three holdfast in each side if
required on the top and bottom, and care shall be taken that doors and windows shall not be
distorted when screwing up to lugs and fixing screws. Doors and W indows shall be grouted in
M15 Concrete at hold fast point into the prepared openings and joints between building
openings.
For each doorframe, sal wood timber of 250mm*internal section shape shall be fixed at each
hinge location.
Welded joints shall be free from slag, neatly made, filed and grinded smooth and left clean
and adequate means shall be employed for temporarily fastening the parts to be welded
together until the joints are welded. All welding scrape shall be removed before painting
primer.
The Engineer In-charge shall of Indian manufacture and best quality mild steel or wrought iron
of lengths and weights approve nails, Spikes and Bolts.
Nails shall comply with the relevant British or Indian standard specification.
Building in unless otherwise described, all items of metal work shall include for “building in” to
concrete or walling etc. and for “making good” finishing thereto.
(3) Testing
The Engineer In-charge shall be at liberty at all reasonable tim es to enter the site of the
works, or any other premises in which the work in being prepared for the purpose of
inspection. Any work found defective or which is not in accordance with the drawings or the
specification, engineer in charge shall reject and such defective work shall be at once make
good at the contractor’s expenses.
(4) Measurement
Measurement of works will be made in m2 of works as specified.
(5) Payment
complete the works as specified
1703 MILD STEEL GRILL
(1) Material
The Mild steel grills are fabricated from the Mild Steel flat, angle and channels conforming to
the BS 15 or equivalent. The welding shall be butt-welding conforming to sub clause 170.1
The grips are of plastic or metal. The screws shall be steel screws.
The mild steel grill shall be made according to pattern given as per drawing. Welded joints
shall be neatly made, filled smooth and left clean, the consultant is to be informed when the
welded work is ready for inspection and any such work must be left unprimed until the
consultants gives his approval. The contractor shall furnish at his own expenses all necessary
tools and all materials, which he may require for the safe erection of the work and remove the
same when the work is completed. The contractor shall be solely responsible for any damage
doe to the structure during erection and any member, which has been bent or otherwise
distorted either before or during erection, shall be straightened or replaced in an approved
manner at his own expenses. The grillwork shall be finished with two coats of red lead
followed by three coats of aluminum or enamel paint and fixed in the opening, as per
instructions of the consultants.
The grills are fixed to window opening by plastic grips with steel screws firmly to the faces of
opening.
The erected fencing shall deform any post and wires shall be straight with out sagging.
(4) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in m² of opening in vertical plan completed as specified.
(5) Payment
Payment for the work will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the BOQ. The
payment will be full and final compensation for all material, labor, and equipment to
1704 MILD STEEL COLLAPSIBLE GATE
The Mild steel collapsible gates are fabricated from the Mild Steel flat, angle and channels conforming
to the BS 15 or equivalent. The welding shall be butt-welding conforming to relevant clause of this
specification
The grips are of plastic or metal. The screws shall be steel screws.
The gate is primed with two coats of red lead primer.
The gate is painted with two coat of enamel or bituminous aluminum paint as specified in the BOQ, to
get uniform painted surfaces.
(1) Measurement
(2) Payment
Payment for the work will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the BOQ.
1705 MILD STEEL MAIN GATE
The Mild steel gates are fabricated from the Mild Steel flat, angle and channels conforming to the BS
15 or equivalent. The welding shall be butt-welding conforming relevant clause of this specification
The grips are of plastic or metal. The screws shall be steel screws. The gate shall of steel sheet
conforming to BS 15 or equivalent of 20G.
The gate is painted with two coat of enamel of bituminous aluminum paint to get uniform painted
surfaces.
(1) Measurement
(2) Payment
1706 CATTLE TRAP
The Cattle Traps are built before the gates to prevent cattle entering the compound. The cattle trap
consist of 75mm NB "Heavy Class" Galvanized pipes laid in parallel at the interval 150mm center to
center. These pipes are embedded in the concrete works.
(1) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in m of pipe laid completed as specified.
(2) Payment
Payment for the work will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the BOQ. The
payment will be full and final compensation for all material, labor, and equipment to
1707 MILD STEEL MAIN GATE
The Mild steel grills are fabricated from the Mild Steel flat, angle and channels conforming to the BS
15 or equivalent. The welding shall be butt-welding conforming to sub clause 170.1
The grips are of plastic or metal. The screws shall be steel screws. The gate shall of steel sheet
conforming to BS 15 or equivalent of 20G.
The gate is painted with two coat of enamel of bituminous aluminum paint to get uniform painted
surfaces.
(1) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in m² of opening in vertical plane completed as specified.
(2) Payment
PERFORM ANCE REQUIREMENTS

Glazed aluminum curtain wall and structural glazing systems shall be provided for the
meeting or exceeding the following performance requirements:
19.2.1 Structural Properties
a. Wind Loads:
1. Exterior Walls: The glazed aluminum curtain wall work, including glass, shall be designed,
fabricated and installed to withstand the maximum inward and outward wind of 150 kg/m2
pressure loads normal to the wall plane.
b. Deflection Limitations:
1. Deflections: Base calculations for the following deflections, upon the combination of
maximum direct wind loads, building deflections, thermal stresses, and erection tolerances.
i. The deflection of any framing member in a direction normal to the plane of the wall when
subjected to the full required wind loads specified above shall not exceed L / 175 of its clear
span or 19 mm (3/4 inch) whichever is less, except limit deflection of glass to 25 mm (1 inch)
for exterior wall, when tested in accord with ASTM E330. Span is defined as the distance
between anchor center lines; for cantilevers, span is defined as the distance between anchor
center line and the end of the cantilever.
ii. Glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be included to contribute to framing member
strength, stiffness or lateral stability.
iii. Cantilever Deflection: The deflection of a framing member overhanging an anchor point
shall be limited to L/175 where L is the length of the cantilevered member.
2. Do not permit any permanent deformation in the metal forming work. Permanent
deformation, fastener, weld, or gasket failure, component breakage or disengagement shall
not occur under wind loading equal to 1.5 times the wind loads (positive or negative).
Permanent deformation shall be taken as deflection without recovery exceeding L/1000 time’s
span.
3. Dead Loads:
i. Maximum full dead load deflections, parallel (in-plane) to wall plane, of framing members
shall not reduce glass bite or glass coverage, to less than 75% of the design dimension, and
shall not reduce edge clearance to less than 25% of design dimension or 3 mm (I/8 inch)
whichever is greater.
ii. Twisting (rotation) of the horizontals due to the weight of the glass shall not exceed 1
degree, measured between ends and center of each span.
19.2.2 Air Leakage

Air leakage through each glazed aluminum curtain wall and structural glazing assembly, by
infiltration and exfiltration, shall not exceed 0.003 m3/s/m2 of fixed wall area when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 30.5 kg/m2.
19.2.3 Water Penetration

1. No uncontrolled water penetration shall occur when each glazed aluminum curtain wall
assembly is tested in accordance with the ASTM E331 and AAMA 501.1 for one 15 minute
cycle at a static and dynamic pressure difference of 58 kg/m2 minimum.
2. Provision shall be made to drain to the exterior face of the wall, any water entering the
system.
19.2.4 Thermal Movement

Fabricate the exterior glazed aluminum curtain wall work to accommodate for such expansion
and contraction of component materials, and supporting elements, as will be caused by
surface temperatures as defined by the project, without causing noise, buckling, glass
breakage, failure of joint sealants, undue stress on metal members and fasteners, failure of
doors or other operating units to function properly, reduction of performance, and other
detrimental effects.
19.2.5 Condensation Resistance
Design, fabricate, and install the glazed aluminum curtain wall and structural glazing systems
to prevent the formation of condensation on the indoor face with the building heating and
ventilating system in normal operation. HVAC operation parameters will be available from the
mechanical engineer.
19.2.6 REFERENCES
The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following stand ards relating
to the Steel doors and its accessories, or approved equal, except as they are modified and
supplemented herein:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Indian Standards (IS)
British Standards (BS)
19.2.7 RELATED WORK

All work under this Division shall be properly coordinated with the work of other
Divisions/Sections. Special attention shall be given to the Article no. 1 of this Division for
Glazing W orks.
19.2.8 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals are required prior to start of the works:
a. Product Data: Submit detailed manufacturer's product data sheets on each product to be
used, including; detailed specification of construction and fabrication, installation instructions,
certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with performance requirements specified
herein. Provide sealant manufacturer's data with surface preparation and application of each
type of sealants proposed.
b. Shop Drawings: Submit production shop drawings and structural calculations to the
Engineer. The production shop drawings shall show scaled elevations, plans, and sections of
the glazed aluminum curtain wall and structural glazing work. Full scale details shall be
prepared and submitted for assemblies that cannot be shown in the elevations or sections.
Include with shop drawings: metal thickness of all metal components, glass thicknesses,
location of permanent safety glass markings on each glass type, metal finishes, and all other
pertinent information as necessary or requested by the Engineer to indicate compliance with
the Contract Documents. Details of field connections, anchorage, and their relationship to the
work of others shall be clearly indicated for the coordination of the work by other building
trades. Details of fastening, sealing methods, and product joinery shall be shown to ensure
proper performance of the field installation. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings
for that work have been approved by the Engineer for fabrication. In addition to above, the
Contractor shall clearly show the following items in the shop drawings:
i. Details of special shapes.
ii. Reinforcing details.
iii. Drainage details and flow diagrams.
iv. Anchorage system.
v. Interfacing with building construction.
vi. Provision to system expansion and contraction.
vii. Thermal break
viii. Conditions at adjacent and dissimilar construction, corners, terminations, parapets, soffits,
sill, etc.
c. Samples: Submit samples of the following before any work is fabricated:
300 mm x 300 mm samples of each type of glass.

Manufacturer's samples of each type of sealant.
300 mm length samples of each type of structural glazing gasket.
300 mm long samples of principal extrusions.
Manufacturer's samples of each type of aluminum finish.
d. Mock-up: Provide full scale complete mock-up for curtain wall and structural glazing work for
the evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
19.2.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer: The Contractor will award the fabrication of glazed aluminum curtain wall
components to a firm specializing in the fabrication of custom aluminum curtain wall
components who has successfully produced work similar in design and extent to that required
for the project, in not less than two projects of similar scope, and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of five (5) years.
Installer: All installation works shall be carried out with the installer experienced to perform
work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for
this project. Submit reference list of completed project.
19.2.10 MEASUREMENT
Measurement of glazed curtain wall and structural glazing works for payment shall be made in
square mete for the completed work including glazing works or as indicated in the Bill of
Quantities. No additional measurement shall be made for additional reinforcing required to
install the system
CHAPTER 18
1800 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
1801 HUME PIPES
(1) Material
RCC pipes will be used for culverts to collect water from side drains.
RCC pipe 900 mm in diameter and its collar will be factory made and will conform to Pakistan
Standard. The pipes shall be of heavy-duty non-pressure class and made of reinforced
concrete. The ends of pipes shall be suitable for collar joints. Concrete used for
manufacturing pipes will have minimum compressive strength of 49 N/mm² at 28 days in
works tests. Pipes shall be straight and free from cracks. The ends of the pipes shall be
square with their longitudinal axis so that when placed in a straight line in the trench, no
opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 to 6 mm. The outside and inside surfaces of
the pipes shall be smooth, dense and hard and shall not be coated with cement wash or other
preparation unless otherwise directed. They will also be free from local bends or bulges
exceeding 3 mm in depth and exceeding over a length in any direction greater than 120 to
200 mm. The deviation from straight in any pipe throughout its entire length tested by means
of a rigid straight edge parallel to the longitudinal axis of the pipe shall not exceed 3 mm per
meter run. Joints shall be made of concrete M15/37.5.
Other material required includes M15/37.5 for pipe haunches and bed, emulsion and jute for
pipe connection.
Activities involved include supply of specified factory made pipes, collars, jute, and emulsion
and transportation. Hume pipe shall be placed on a prepared bed of 100 mm thick M150/37.5
concrete bed. Pipe segments shall be connected by applying jute soak ed in emulsion to
render it water tight and pushed into connection. The joints shall then be cleaned and
concreted such that the minimum thickness of the concrete from the edge of the pipe shall not
less than 150 mm. The Engineer shall specify the lines and levels required in the trench for
laying of pipe.
The top of the home pipe shall be hunched for protection.
Testing Control
The Contractor shall submit a sample of above RCC pipe along with the factory certificate for
the approval of the Engineer. The factory certificate shall include testing details along with
reinforcement, concrete strength and quality assurance of whole work.
(3) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in linear meters of pipe laid completed as specified.
Collars will not be measured separately.
(4) Payment
1802 GRASS PLANTATION
Materials required are indigenous grass slips either from nurseries or collected from other land in the
locality.
Activities involved are setting out, selection and supply of grass slips wit roots and shoots longer than
100 mm, making adequate holes at specified distance and of specified pattern, planting of grass slips,
pressing holes from the sides, compaction of loose material, watering of plants and leveling of the
surroundings.
(1) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in m² completed as specified.
(2) Payment
1803 BARBED WIRE FENCING ON TIMBER POLES:
(1) Material
The barbed wire fences shall be two-strand galvanized barbed wire (Minimum of 100gm/m2)
over the Mild steel wires of required diameter should be used for fencing. The Mild Steel
should conform BS 15 or equivalent.
The concrete in concrete post shall conform to the design drawings.
The concrete posts are erected over the foundation. The barbed wire is tightened to the post
in the hooks. A tension not exceeding 400 kg/m2 is applied while erecting the wires in layers
as per the design. At the end diagonal bracing shall be made.
The erected fencing shall deform any post and wires shall be straight with out sagging.
(4) Measurement
The above work shall be measured in m² of fence in vertical plan above the foundation
completed as specified.
(5) Payment
1804 PRECAST RCC WORKS
This work shall be required to prepare M15/37.5 reinforced cement concrete precast units of drains
and slab covers for channels or for other works specified by the Engineer. These works shall be done
at locations that allow proper inspection.
Quality of materials for concrete works, form works and reinforcing bars will be according to the
relevant Clauses of this Specification.
Precast works shall be made true to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. They must be transported safely without damage from place of fabrication to the site
designated by the Engineer and stacked properly for use. Any defects/damages to the precast works
during transport shall be rectified and made good at Contractor's costs.
Precast elements shall be handled, placed and fixed in position as directed by the Engineer. Elements
shall be connected and fixed in position by cement sand mortar of 1:4.
The tolerance of dimensions and installation shall be ± 2 mm.
(1) Measurement
Measurement of works under this Sub-Clause will be made in numbers of elements
fabricated, transported, and placed as specified.
(2) Payment
Payment for work under Sub-Clause 90.5 will be made from the Provisional Sum set aside for
the purpose.
1805 DAMP PROOF COURSES:
The damp proof course shall consist of minimum 5cm thick 1:1.5:3 cement, sand and stone aggregate
fixture as detailed below mixed with 2% of Accoproof, Impermo or Cement seal by weight of cement
and painted with two coal tar paint over it. Damp proof Course will be provided to all walls, which do
not have tie beam above ground level as per the details of the working drawing.
Cement shall be fresh Portland cement confirming to IS 15:269. Sand shall be clean coarse of 5mm
size and down free from mica and clay. Stone aggregate shall be hard and tough of 12.mm size well
graded and free from dust and dirt. W ater proofing compound other than Accoproof, Impermo or
Cement seal may be used after obtaining permission from the site-in –charge regarding the
acceptability of the compound and quantity required for desired result.
Cement shall be thoroughly mixed with required 2%by weight of waterproofing compound, and then
mixed dry with the required volume of sand to make a proportion of 1:2. The cement sand mix shall
then be thoroughly mixed dry with stone aggregate to maintain proportion of 1:1.5:3. Clean water shall
then be mixed gradually to give a plastic mixed of required consistency. The mixing shall be done by
turning at least three times to give uniform and homogeneous concrete.
All the mixing shall be done in an impervious masonry platform.
Before lying concrete, the level of the surface of the plinth shall be checked longitudinally and
transversely. All joints shall be racked and surfaces moisten by pouring clean water on it. The inside
of the formwork shall be covered with polyethylene sheet so as to make watertight joint between the
formwork and the concrete.
Concrete shall be laid uniformly by tamping to make dense concrete, leveled both transversely and
longitudinally.
The damp proof course shall be laid continuously except across doorways. Construction joints if
unavoidable shall be given at the site of doors or wall opening. Such joints shall be sloped, and such
sloped surface shall be applied with neat cement wash before starting concerning on following days.
Hardened concrete shall be cured for 15 days. Shuttering may be removed after 72 hours.
Two coats of hot coal tar shall be applied on the cured cement concrete. The first coat shall be
applied at 1.5 Kg. per sq. and the paint shall be blinded immediately with coarse sand and the surface
is tamped lightly. Second coat of hot coal tar shall be applied at the rate of 1 Kg. per sq. uniformly
over the surface. Such surface shall be immediately blinded with coarse sand and tamped lightly. Lay
over the full width of the walls and at the height shown on the drawings a mortar screed of sufficient
thickness to form a level surface and cover the screed with two coats of hot bitumen.
(1) Measurement
Measurement of works under Sub-Clause 90.3 will be made in m³ of works as specified.
(2) Payment
Payment for work under Sub-Clause 90.3 will be made on the basis of contract unit price
indicated in the BOQ.
complete the works as specified under Sub-Clause 90.3.
1806 HOLES, PIPES, ETC.:
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the incorporation of electrical conduits, soil and
drain pipes, fixing blocks, chases, sleeve holes etc., in concrete members as required. The Contractor
shall submit full details of these items to the Engineer in-charge for approval before the work is put in
hand. Concrete fixing blocks may be embedded in the concrete provided that the strength or effective
cover of any part of the structure is not adversely affected or the finished work damaged by any
movement of the blocks. All fixing blocks, chases, holes etc., to be left in concrete shall be accurately
set out and cast with the concrete. No openings, chases, holes or other voids shall be cut or formed in
concrete without the approval of the Engineer in-charge.
No measurement shall be taken for this work and the rate should be included in the concrete works.
CHAPTER 19
1900 DISMANTLING WORK
1901 DISMANTLING OF GABIONS
The Contractor shall dismantle any sound or damaged gabions as indicated in the drawings or as
ordered by the Engineer. The resulting property shall be the property of the Employer and all suitable
materials shall be stockpiled for reuse within a lead of 30 m as directed by the Engineer. Unsuitable
material shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
Gabion dismantling shall include labor, cutting of the binding wire, opening the crate, emptying the
stones, transporting the stones and dismantled gabions, stockpiling and all incidental and provisions
necessary to complete the work.
1902 DISMANTLING OF CEMENT MASONRY WORKS
The Contractor shall dismantle any cement masonry works as indicated in the Drawings or as ordered
by the Engineer. The resulting material shall be the property of the Employer and all suitable materials
shall be stockpiled for reuse purposes within a lead of 30 m as directed by the Engineer. Unsuitable
material shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
Cement masonry dismantling shall include use of labor and proper equipment, transporting,
stockpiling and all incidental and provisions necessary to complete the work.
1903 DISMANTLING OF PLAIN CONCRETE/REINFORCED CONCRETE
The Contractor shall dismantle any plain or reinforced concrete works as indicated in the Drawings or
as ordered by the Engineer. The resulting material shall remain the property of the Employer and all
suitable materials shall be stockpiled for reuse purposes within a lead of 30 meter. Unsuitable material
shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
Concrete/reinforced concrete dismantling shall include use of labor and proper equipment,
transporting, stockpiling and all incidental and provisions necessary to complete the work.
1904 DISMANTLING OF DRY STONE MASONRY WALL
The Contractor shall dismantle any dry stone masonry wall as indicated in the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. The resulting material shall remain the property of the Employer and all
suitable material shall be stockpiled for reuse purposes within a lead of 30 m as directed by the
Engineer.
1905 MEASUREMENT
Measurement of works in Sub-Clauses 1901 to 1904 shall be in m³ according to the average cross-
sections at various levels and corresponding lengths measured at site.
1906 PAYMENT
Payment for the above works will be made on the basis of contract unit price indicated in the BOQ.
works as specified.
CHAPTER 20
2000 Other Works
2001 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
(1) Scope and Definitions
This Clause covers the application of a bitumen prime and tack coat to be applied on a prepared
pavement layer. A prime coat means a thin layer of low viscosity bituminous binder applied to an
absorbent non-bituminous surface. If the prime coat is to be trafficked, it shall be covered with binding
material. A tack coat means a thin layer of bituminous binder applied to a bituminous surface.
(2) Materials the primer shall be cationic bitumen emulsion SS1 grade conforming to IS: 8887 or
medium curing cutback bitumen conforming to IS: 217 or as specified in the Contract. The primer t
shall comply with Section 600 from a source approved by the Engineer. The grade and the rate of
application of cutback to be used shall be instructed by the Engineer on site after field trials. Following
Spray rate may be used as guidelines. Quantity of SS1 grade Bitumen Emulsion for Various Types of
Granular Surfaces Type of Surface Rate of Spray (kg/sq.m) W MM/W BM 0.7-1.0 Stabilized soil
bases/Crusher Run Macadam 0.9-1.2 Type and Quantity of Cutback Bitumen for Various Types of
Granular Surface Type of Surface Type of Cutback Rate of Spray (kg/sq.m) WMM/W BM MC 30 0.6-
0.9 Stabilized soil bases/ Crusher Run Macadam MC 70 0.9-1.2 For Tack coat, the binder shall be an
either Cationic bitumen emulsion (RS 1) complying with IS: 8887 or suitable low viscosity paving
bitumen of VG 10 grade conforming to IS: 73. The use of cutback bitumen RC: 70 as per IS: 217 shall
be restricted only for sites at sub-zero temperatures or for emergency. Applications as directed by the
Engineer. No dilution or heating at site of RS 1 bitumen emulsion shall be permitted. Paving bitumen if
used for tack coat shall be heated to appropriate temperature in bitumen boilers to achieve viscosity
less than 2 poise. The normal range of spraying temperature for a bituminous emulsion shall be 20°C
to 70°C and for cutback, 50°C to 80°C. The method of application of tack coat will depend on the type
of equipment to be used, size of nozzles, pressure at the spray bar, and speed or forward movement.
The Contractor shall demonstrate at a spraying trial, that the equipment and method to be used is
capable of producing a uniform spray, within the tolerances specified. Following Spray rate may be
used as guidelines. Rate of Application of Tack Coat Type of Surface Rate of Spray of Binder in Kg
per sq. m Bituminous surfaces 0.20-0.30 Granular surfaces treated with primer 0.25- 0.30 Cement
concrete pavement 0.30-0.35 The binding layer, if any shall be crushed rock or river sand having
grading within the limits of the table below. The aggregate shall be clean, hard and free from
excessive dust. It shall contain no clay, loam or other deleterious materials. Grading Envelope for
Sand for Prime Coat Sieve size (mm) Percentage Passing ( by mass) 4.75 100 2.36 80-100 1,18 60-
95 0.6 30-80 0.3 20-55 0.075 10-30
(3) Preparation of Surface. The surface to be sprayed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping with
mechanical brooms and/or washing or other approved means. All laitance of soil or binder material,
loose and foreign material shall be removed. All loose material shall be swept clear of the layer to
expose the full width of the layer upon which prime/tack coat shall be applied. The surface to be
sprayed shall be checked for line, camber and level, and the surface corrected, made good as
necessary and approved by the Engineer before any bituminous spray is applied. The Engineer’s
approval, or otherwise, of the surface shall be given immediately prior to the Contractor’s intention to
start spraying. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, immediately prior to the application of prime
coat, the surface of the layer shall be sprayed with water to dampen the surface, but in no case the
surface shall be made saturated. If the water is over applied, the surface shall be allowed to dry until
dampness is uniform over the entire surface. In order to bring the surface to be primed to the condition
required, water shall be applied in small increments by a distributor. Any water on the surface after
spraying shall be allowed to drain away before the prime coat is applied. No traffic shall be allowed on
the prepared surface
(4) Spraying of Prime Coat and Tack Coat Soon after the surface to be sprayed has been prepared as
specified in as per relevant IS codes (3) and approved by the Engineer, the edges of the area shall be
marked out with a line of string or wire pegged down at intervals not exceeding 15 m on straights or
7.5 m on curves. The prime or tack coat shall be sprayed on to it at the specified rate. Spraying shall
be carried out not later than 12 hours after the surface has been prepared. The quantity of binder
used shall give complete coverage of the surface with a slight trace of run-off in places. Shall the
specified rate of spray appear to be incorrect, the Contractor shall immediately stop spraying, inform
the Engineer and amend the spray rate as instructed by the Engineer. The temperature for storage
and spraying shall be as given in the as per relevant IS codes Temperature for Storage Type of Prime
Maximum storage temperature o C Up to 24 hrs. Over 24 hrs. Cutback bitumen’s MC-80 MC-100
Bitumen shall be sprayed from a pressure distributor complying with the requirements of as per
relevant IS codes (6) and no spraying shall be permitted except in small areas, or to make good a
defective area caused by a blocked nozzle. The nozzle shall be arranged to give a uniform spray and
shall be tested prior to spraying by discharging on to suitable material (such as building paper, metal
sheets, etc.,) or into special troughs made for this purpose. Testing shall not take place on the road,
and any bitumen spilt on the ground shall be cleaned off. If during spraying, a nozzle becomes
blocked or develops a defect, the spraying shall be made good with a hand spray, and the machine
repaired before further spraying is commenced. W hen commencing and stopping spraying, sheets of
building paper or metal at least 2 m wide shall be spread across the full width to be spread across the
full width to be sprayed to give a clean sharp edge. The metal sheets used for stopping and starting
work shall be cleaned after each run and the troughs used for testing shall be cleaned at the end of
each day’s work. During spraying all kerbs, road furniture, culvert headwalls, tree boles and the like
which are liable to be disfigured by splashing of bitumen shall be protected, and any such feature
which is accidentally marred by bitumen shall be cleaned off with a suitable solvent or made good.
(5) Curing and Blinding of Prime Coat If after application of the prime coat, the bituminous material
fails to penetrate within the time specified of if the road must be used by traffic, blinding material shall
be spread in the amount required to absorb any excess bituminous material and to protect the primed
surface. Blinding material shall be spread from trucks in such a manner that no wheel shall travel on
uncovered bituminous material. Unless the Engineer permits otherwise, all loose material on the
sprayed surface, including any blinding material, shall be removed before any further layer of the
pavement is laid.
(6) Tolerances the actual rate of application of bituminous binder across the width of each spray run
shall not vary by more than ± 5% pf the rate ordered and the actual of application of binder for each
single run of the spray shall not vary from this specified rate by more than 0.03 liter per square meter.
(7) Testing Tray tests shall be taken at least twice a day during priming operation to check calculations
based on dipping of spray trucks. The minimum testing frequency for the purpose of process control
shall be as given as per relevant IS codes (8) Measurement Binding material shall be as per BOQ.
2002 ASPHALT CONCRETE/ BITUMINOUS CONCRETE
(1) Scope This Clause covers the materials, method of construction and requirements for the
construction of Asphalt Concrete. / Bituminous concrete this work shall consist of construction of
Bituminous Concrete, for use in wearing and profile corrective courses. This work shall consist of
construction in a single layer of bituminous concrete on a previously prepared bituminous bound
surface. A single layer shall be 30 mm/40 mm/50 mm thick
(2) Material
(a) Bitumen The bitumen shall be viscosity grade paving bitumen complying with the Indian Standard
Specification IS: 73, modified bitumen complying with IS 15462 or as otherwise specified in the
Contract.
(b) Coarse Aggregates The coarse aggregates shall be generally as specified in respective IS codes
(2), except that the aggregates shall satisfy the physical requirements of as provided in IS codes and
where crushed gravel is proposed for use as aggregate, not less than 95 percent by weight of the
crushed material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces. Physical
Requirements for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Concrete Property Test Specification Method of
Test Cleanliness (dust) Grain size analysis Max 5% passing 0.075 mm sieve IS:2386 Part I Particle
shape Combined Flakiness and Elongation Indices Max 35% IS:2386 Part I Strength Los Angeles
Abrasion Value or Aggregate Impact Value Max 30% Max 24% IS:2386 Part IV Durability Soundness
either: Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate Max 12% Max 18% IS:2386 Part V Polishing
Polished Stone Value Min 55 BS:812-114 W ater Absorption W ater Absorption Max 2% IS:2386.Part Ill
Stripping Coating and Stripping of Bitumen Aggregate Mix Minimum retained coating 95% IS:6241
Water Sensitivity Retained Tensile Strength* Min 80% AASHTO 283 * If the minimum retained tensile
test strength falls below 80 percent, use of anti-stripping agent is recommended to meet the
requirement.
(c) Fine Aggregates the fine aggregates shall be all as specified in respective IS codes (2) (c).
(d) Filler Filler shall be as specified in respective IS codes (2) (d).
(e) Aggregate Grading and Binder Content W hen tested in accordance with IS: 2386 Part 1 (W et
grading method), the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregates and filler shall fall within
the limits shown in Table 13.24. The grading shall be as specified in the Contract. Composition qt
Page | 2
Bituminous Concrete Pavement Layers Grading 1 2 Nominal aggregate size* 19 mm 13.2 mm Layer
thickness 50 mm 30-40 mm IS Sieve1 (mm) Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing 45
37.5 26.5 100 19 90-100 100 13.2 59-79 90-100 9.5 52-72 70-88 4.75 35-55 53-71 2.36 28-44 42-58
Page | 3
1.18 20-34 34-48 0.6 15-27 26-38 0.3 10-20 18-28 0.15 5-13 12-20 0.075 2-8 4-10 Bitumen content %
by mass of total mix Min 5.2* Min 5.4** Notes: * The nominal maximum particle size is the largest
specified sieve size up on which any of the aggregate is retained. ** Corresponds to specific gravity of
aggregate being 2.7. In case aggregate have specific gravity more than 2. 7, the minimum bitumen
content can be reduced proportionately. Further the region where highest daily mean air temperature
is 30°C or lower and lowest daily air temperature is - 10°C or lower, the bitumen content may be
increased by 0.5 percent
(3) Mix Design
(a) Requirements for the Mix as per relevant IS codes (3) (a) shall apply.
(b) Binder Content as per relevant IS codes (3) (b) shall apply.
(c) Job Mix Formula as per relevant IS codes (3) (c) shall apply.
(d) Plant Trials - Permissible Variation in Job Mix Formula The requirements for plant trials shall be as
specified in as per relevant IS codes (3) (d), and permissible limits for variation as given in as per
relevant IS codes Permissible Variations in Plant Mix from the Job Mix Formula Description
Permissible Variation Aggregate passing 19 mm sieve or larger ±7% Aggregate passing 13.2 mm, 9.5
mm ±6% Aggregate passing 4.75 mm ±5% Aggregate passing 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, 0.6 mm ±4%
Aggregate passing 0.3 mm, 0.15 mm ±3% Aggregate passing 0.075 mm ±1.5% Binder content ± 0.3%
Mixing temperature ± 10°C
(e) Laying Trials The requirements for laying trials shall be as specified in as per relevant IS codes. (3)
(.e). The compacted layers of bituminous concrete (BC) shall have a minimum field density equal to or
more than 92 percent of the average theoretical maximum specific gravity (Gmm) obtained on the day
of compaction in accordance with ASTM 02041.
(4) Construction Operations
(a) W eather and Seasonal Limitations The provisions of Clause as per relevant IS codes (5) shall
apply.
(b) Preparation of Base the surface on which the bituminous concrete is to be laid shall be prepared in
accordance with as per relevant IS codes as appropriate, or as directed by the Engineer. The surface
shall be thoroughly swept clean by mechanical broom and dust removed by compressed air. In
locations where a mechanical broom cannot get access, other approved methods shall be used as
(c) Geosynthetics W here Geosynthetics are specified in the Contract, this shall be in accordance with
the requirements stated in as per relevant IS codes
(d) Stress Absorbing Layer W here a stress absorbing layer is specified in the Contract, this shall be
applied in accordance with the requirements of as per relevant IS codes
(e) Tack Coat: The provisions as specified in as per relevant IS codes shall apply.
(f) Mixing and Transportation of the Mix the provisions as specified in as per relevant IS codes 4
(g) Spreading the general provisions of as per relevant IS codes apply, as modified by the approved
laying trials.
(h) Rolling the general provisions of as per relevant IS codes shall apply, as modified by the approved
laying trials.
(5) Opening to Traffic Provisions in as per relevant IS codes (4) shall apply.
(6) Surface Finish and Quality Control The surface finish of the completed construction shall conform
to the requirements of as per relevant IS codes.
(7) Arrangements for Traffic During the period of construction, arrangements for traffic shall be made
in accordance with the provisions as per relevant IS codes
(8) Measurement Binding material shall be as per BOQ.
2003 GLASS CANOPY IN CARBON STEEL SECTION

Providing and fixing of Canopy in entrance area as per drawing with carbon steel section and the
laminated glass with thickness mentioned in the BOQ ,should be fixed in spider fitting of 304 grade
including providing best quality silicon between the glass to make it water tight all complete.
Measurement of the items shall be done in Square Meter
Page | 4
2004 WATER STOPPER
Supply and installing hydrophilic resin and elastomer based strip Swell seal 3V of 20mm x 10mm fixed
Page | 5
with nailing or adhesive fixer for construction joint treatm ent at required locations such as (i) Junction
of raft/retaining wall & (ii) at all other locations as mentioned in drawings. Measurem ent of water
stopper should be in Rm if not m entioned in BOQ.
2005 SCAFFOLDING WORKS

Providing and erecting at site conventional steel Double scaffolding to reach any place of work on the
external facade of the building including approaches, extensions, working platform s, ladders, lifting
tackle for m anpower and materials etc. all com plete, inclusive of covering by safety net dism antling
and taking awa y all m aterials after the com pletion of proposed work etc. all com plete. And the
scaffolding should be rem oved after com pletion of all the works.
The measurement of this item shall be in Square Meter or as provided in the bill of quantity
2006 PEA GRAVEL CONCRETE (SHOT CRETE)

Providing and laying shot-crete in the work with PEA gravel of size 1/8” to 3/8” well graded by
spraying the concrete through a hose and pneum atically projected at high velocity by m achines in the
required area. The ratio of m ixing should be as m entioned in the bill of quantity and thickness of the
concrete shall be as m entioned in the drawing.
2007 Boundary Rope

Providing and laying professional quality weatherproof and rot resistant UV treated rope of size 24 mm
dia.
2008 Sight Screen

Providing maneuverable cricket screen measuring 4m (13.1 ft) wide X 4.5m(14.8 ft) high. Portable sight
screen boasts removable slats that come in white for test cricket or white or black for T20. 360 degree
wheels allows quick and easy movement of sight screen which is built for highest level of international
cricket.
2009 Score Board

Providing and placing digital metal LED score board of size 20ft X 10ft of single color with Wi-Fi
controller built for highest level of international.
MEASUREMENT
These shall be m easured in cubic m eter of the work done as per drawings.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR PLUMBING WORK:
1. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.1 GENERAL
All materials shall be new and of the best quality and shall conform to the latest Indian Standard
Specification.
All materials shall be of approved quality as per samples and origins approved by the Engineer.
As and when required by the Engineer, the contractor shall arrange to test the materials and/or
portions of the works at his own cost to prove their soundness and efficiency. If after tests any
materials, work or portions of work are found defective or unsound by the Engineer, the
contractor, shall remove the defective materials from the site, pull down and re-execute the
works at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer. To prove that the materials used are
as specified, the contractor shall furnish to Engineer with original vouchers on demand.
All works executed shall be as directed and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlike manner.
Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of elbows shall
be restricted to short connections.
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance
and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable G.I. clamps, hangers, channels
and I section at intervals as specified.
Clamps, hangers, channels, I section and supports on RCC walls, columns & slabs shall be
fixed only by means of approved make of expandable metal fasteners inserted by use of power
drills.
All pipes clamps, supports, nuts, bolts, washers shall be galvanized MS steel throughout the
building. Painted MS clamps & nuts, bolts & washers shall not be accepted.
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located so as to provide easy accessibility for operations,
maintenance and repairs.
Access, doors for fittings and clean outs shall be so provided that they are easily accessible
for repair and maintenance.
B: SANITARY FIXTURES, C.P. FITTINGS AND TOILET ACCESSORIES
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of this section consists installation, testing and commissioning of following items:
a. Sanitary fixtures and chromium plated brass fittings.

b. Janitor sink & stainless steel sinks
c. Toilet accessories like towel rails, toilet paper holders, soap dish tray, liquid soap dispensers,
coat hooks etc.
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF FIXING THE FIXTURES
Sanitary fixtures and chromium plated brass fittings for toilets, stainless steel sinks, bathroom
accessories like towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, tray liquid soap dispensers, towel rails coat
hooks etc. and listed in the Schedule of Quantities shall be supplied free of cost by the Site Engineer.
Screws for fixing shall be half round head chromium plated (CP) brass screws, with CP brass washers
or any other accessories. .
All materials shall be of first quality.
The contractor shall fix all sanitary fixtures and toilet accessories as per manufacturer’s instructions
and connection to the fixtures shall be done with extension piece, if required.
a. Water Closet
Water Closet shall be floor / wall mounted type as per details from ID / BOH consultant, low
volume flushing from 5-7 litres of water, flushed by means of a porcelain / PVC flushing
cistern.
WC shall be provided with seat, cover, cistern, rubber buffers and flush pipe.
WC shall be provided with 110 mm dia PVC connector including connection with
C.I. pipe.
b. Toilet Paper Holder
Toilet paper holder shall be of chrome plated. Model and type as per Bill of Quantity fixed by
screw and rawl plugs.
c. Wash Basin
Wash basins shall be white glazed vitreous china. Type and Model as specified in Bill of
quantities.
Basin shall be provided with CI brackets painted MS angle and clips and the basin securely
fixed to wall/counter slab. The MS angle shall be provided with two coats of synthetic enamel
paint over a coat of primer.
Each basin shall be provided with 32mm dia CP waste with overflow, pop-up waste or with
rubber plug and CP brass chain as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
Each basin shall be provided with hot and cold water mixing fitting or as specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.
d. Kitchen Sinks
Sinks shall be stainless steel with single / double drain board as mentioned in the Schedule of
Quantities.
Each sink shall be provided with CI brackets with painted MS sinks fixed with suitable painted
angle iron brackets as per manufacturer’s specifications. Each sink shall be provided with
40mm dia CP waste and rubber plug with CP brass chain as given in the Bill of Quantities. The
MS angle shall be provided with two coats of synthetic enamel of approved shade over a coat
of primer.
e. Shower Set
Shower set shall consist of concealed diverter, shower rose (rain shower for guest room toilet),
shower arm and wall flange as mentioned in Bill of Quantities.
f. Towel Rail
Towel rail shall be of brass chromium plated stainless steel and fixing shall be done with screw
and rawl plug.
g. Janitor's Sink
Janitor's sink shall be vitreous china / stainless steel with single bowl provided with 40mm dia
waste and C.I. / M.S. bracket painted with two coats of enamel paint over a coat of primer,
painted R.S. or CI brackets and clips and securely fixed.
h. Liquid Soap Dispenser
Liquid Soap Dispenser shall be wall mounted. The locking arrangement shall be concealed
with body.
3. MOCKUP AND TRIAL ASSEMBLY
The installation of the Sanitary fixtures and toilet accessories shall be as per the approved shop
drawings..
4. FINAL INSTALLATION
The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and toilet accessories at final location with the complete
accessories as per approved shop drawing.
5. PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE
The contractor shall take care & necessary precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures and
C.P. fittings against damage like cracking & breakage by providing proper wrapping and locking
arrangement till the completion of the execution. The contractor shall clean all the fixtures and fittings.
Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and
new fixtures and fittings shall be installed at his own cost to complete the work.
6. MEASUREMENT
a. Rate for fixing only of sanitary fixtures and toilet accessories.
b. Rates for all items under specifications and bill of quantities shall be inclusive of cutting holes and
chases and making good the same, CP screws, nuts, bolts and any fixing arrangements required and
recommended by manufacturers, testing and commissioning and making good to the same.
7. TESTING
All sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be tested after the installation.
Protection for the sanitary fixtures / fittings before handing over (wrapping and plywood protection) shall be
ensured by the contractor.
C: WATER SUPPLY (PIPING AND FITTING MATERIAL)
1. PIPING SCHEDULE
1.1 Water Supply System
S. No. Description Type of Material
1.
Potable water tank drains,
CPVC pipes
overflows and warning pipes.
2. Incoming potable water pipe from
Municipal authority. CPVC pipes
3. External Potable cold water main

CPVC pipes
distribution pipe
4. Domestic water supply CPVC pipes
5. Flushing water supply CPVC pipes
6. Hot water supply CPVC pipes
7. External irrigation system UPVC pipes
1.2. Notes on Pipe work
All fittings for pipe work shall conform to the relevant IS Specification.
1.3. All pipe work shall be free from dust, rust and scale and shall be thoroughly cleaned before
erection. Open ends during the progress of work shall be blanked-off with purpose-made of
metal caps. Plastic caps or use of wooden plugs is forbidden. Should any stoppage in the
circulation occur after the various systems have been put into operation, owing to non-
compliance with this requirement, the Contractor shall rectify the matter at no extra cost to
the Contract.
1.4 Pipes shall be installed with correct falls for venting and draining and attention shall be paid to
neatness of installation, i.e. groups of pipes shall be accurately spaced and valves, joints, etc.,
symmetrically arranged. Where two or more pipes are visible and change direction together,
bends shall be struck from a common radius point. Adequate clearances shall be maintained
in all cases, to allow for the application of the insulation materials and finishing.
1.5 The Contractor shall note the restricted space available in certain service ducts, it is absolutely
necessary to ensure that all pipe work is installed in the correct sequence, manner and position
to ensure that operation of all valves and maintenance is possible.
1.6 All reductions in pipe sizes shall be made using approved standard reducing fittings. Reducing
bushes shall not be used without approval. Connections between lengths of pipes shall be made
using standard fittings. Long threads must not be used.
1.7 All pipe work in pump rooms, plant rooms, and on roof level shall be installed with flanges
or unions at intervals not exceeding 6m for ease of dismantling.
1.8 Changes in direction of pipes shall be made with long radius bends or elbows, as far as
practicable. Under no circumstances shall pipes be bent without the use of fittings.
1.9 All pipe runs when not installed underground or in duct shall be concealed as far as possible
by careful positioning or shall be chased into walls, laid in screed etc, or as directed by the
Engineer.
1.10 All pipe work within the fire protected areas must be enclosed to satisfy the local
municipal/fire authority requirements and such enclosures shall be supplied and installed by
the Contractor.
1.11 The pipes and rainwater outlets when pass through roof slabs, the Contractor shall leave
suitable openings during casting. The Contractor shall install the pipe, rainwater outlets, etc.,
taking into account the water proofing installation method as detailed by the Engineer.
1.12 Floor drains shall be installed in the same manner as rain water outlets. Openings will be
formed in the slabs. Detailed dimensions and locations shall be supplied by the Engineer.
1.13 The Contractor shall locate all valves, traps, cleaning eyes, and similar items where they are
easily accessible for operation, inspection, and maintenance.
2. PIPING SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Galvanized Iron Pipes
All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall be ductile iron pipe of
class specified. When class is not specified they shall be heavy class.
Fittings of G.I. pipes shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings, of approved make. All fittings shall
have manufacturer’s trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for G.I. pipes shall include Couplings, Bends,
Tees, Reducers, Nipples, Unions, Bushes and Flanges. Fittings shall be of I.S:1879 – (part I to X) 1975.
Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed fittings. Care shall be taken to remove burr from the
end of the pipe after cutting by a round file. Genuine red lead with grumet and a few strands of fine
hemp shall be applied. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the
drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets in the pipe by providing air vent at suitable location.
CPVC pipes inside the toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well above the floor. No pipes shall be run
inside a sunken floor as far as possible.
2.2 PIPE INSTALLATION
2.2.1 Laying and Jointing of GI Pipes and fittings
All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The pipes shall be
fixed to walls with standard G.I. slotted angles and channelsÙ’ shape threaded bolts, nuts for clamping
pipes to angles. Slotted angles & channels, I – sections, shall be grouted to RCC work with dash fasteners
of size so as to fit tightly on the pipes when tightened with screwed bolts. These slotted angles and
channels shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight lengths and heights.
2.2.2 UPVC PIPES
UPVC Pipes and fittings shall be heavy class manufactured to Indian Standard IS: 4985(Specification
for UPVC pipes & fittings). The Pipes shall be of desired working pressure as specified in the Schedule
of Quantities. On delivery to site, the pipes and fittings shall be inspected for thickness, cracks etc. The
pipes shall be stored in a sheltered roof as protection against direct sunlight.
2.2.3 CPVC Pipes & Fittings
The pipes shall be CPVC (Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride) for flushing water supply piping system
wth pipes as per CTs SDR -13.5 at a working pressure of 300 PSI at 23 deg C and 80 PSI at 82 deg.C,
using solvent welded CPVC fittings etc. including transition fittings (connection between CPVC &
Metal pipes / GI / Cu / or any other materials) i.e. Brass adapters (both Male & Female threaded and
all conforming to ASTM D-2846 with only CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM F-493, with
clamps / hanger/ structural metal supports as required as per site condition including cutting chases
and making good the same, including painting of the exposed pipes with one coat of desired shade of
enamel paint. All termination points for installation of faucets shall have brass termination fittings.
i. Joining Pipes & Fittings
a. Cutting:
Pipes shall be cut with a wheel type plastic pipe cutter or by hacksaw blade.
b. Deburring / Beveling:
Burrs from pipe & fittings shall be removed from the outside and inside.
c. Fitting preparation:
A clean dry cloth should be used to wipe dirt and moisture from the fitting sockets
and from tubing end. The tubing should make contact with the socket wall 1/3 or 2/3
of the way into the fitting socket.\
d. Solvent Cement Application:
Only CPVC solvent cement confirming to ASTM-F493 should be used for joining
pipe with fittings.
e. Assembly:
After applying the solvent cement on both pipe and fitting socket, pipe should be
inserted into the fitting socket within 30 seconds, and rotating the pipe ¼ to ½ turn
while inserting so as to ensure even distribution of solvent cement with the joint. The
assembled system should be held for 10 seconds ( approximately) in order to allow
the joint to set up.
Solvent cement set and cure times shall be strictly adhered to as per manufacturer’s
specifications.
f. After completing the installation
The system should be hydrostatically pressure tested at 150 psi(10 Bar) for one hour.
ii. Threaded Sealents
Teflon tape shall be used to make threaded connections leak proof.
iii. Hangers and supports
The support should be provided at 3 foot (90 cm) intervals for diameters of one inch and below
and at 4 foot (1.2m) intervals for larger sizes.
Supports should be as per the below mentioned table:
Size of Pipe 21°C 49°C 71°C 82°C

Inch Ft. Ft. Ft. Ft.
½” 5.5 4.5 3.0 2.5
¾” 5.5 5.0 3.0 2.5
1” 6.0 5.5 3.5 3.0
1¼” 6.5 6.0 3.5 3.5
1½” 7.0 6.0 3.5 3.5
2” 7.0 6.5 4.0 3.5
2.2.4 COPPER PIPES
Copper tubes conforming to EN:1057 in 10 ft. length and thickness as per Table `X’. Dimension must
be strictly as pre EN:1057 & Chemical Composition of copper pipes to be as follows:
Copper% - 99.9%
Phosphorus - 0.015% to 0.040%
For sizes 15mm and above, hard drawn tubes will be used. The tubes shall be totally cylindrical and
of uniform thickness free from flaw, pin holes, cracks and other skin detects. The maximum working
and burst pressure of tubes shall be as EN:1057. All tubes shall be eddy current tested to ensure the
tubes are free from any internal blow holes / flaw or eccentricity. Tubes from manufacturers who do
not have eddy current testing facility will not be accepted. The buyer / user reserves the right to inspect
the facility of the manufacturer to ensure that eddy current testing facility is prevalent and being done.
Carbon film or Carbon content test must be conducted on Copper Tubes as per EN:1057.
The sizes and dimensions for Table `X’ are as follows:

TABLE `X’
Tube Outer Diameter Thickness Inner Calculated Maximum

Size Dia Burst Pressure working
pressure
Max. Min. (bar) (PSI) (bar) (PSI)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
15 15.045 14.965 0.7 18.6 240 3480 58 841
22 22.055 21.975 0.9 20.2 215 3117.5 51 739.5
28 28.055 27.975 0.9 26.2 165 2392.5 40 580
35 35.07 34.99 1.2 32.6 175 2537.5 42 609
12 42.07 41.99 1.2 39.6 145 2102.5 35 507.5
54 54.07 53.99 1.2 51.6 110 1595 27 391.5
67 66.75 66.60 1.2 64.6 105 1522.5 20 290
76.1 76.30 76.15 1.5 73.1 100 1450 24 348
108 108.25 108.00 1.5 105 70 1015 17 246.5
133 133.50 133.25 1.5 130 - - 14 203
159 159.50 159.25 2.0 155 - - 15 217.5
(1) COPPER FITTINGS
Fittings made of Dezincification Resistant materials i.e. Copper, DZR Brass (Alloy CZ 132) or Gun
Metal conforming to BS:864/EN:1254. Ordinary or Duplex fittings are not allowed to be used.
Dimensions of fittings must confirm to EN:1254 Part II and EN:1057 to ensure proper jointing. The
distance between the socket and neck of the fitting should be sufficient to allow proper capillary action
and flow of lead free solder. Threads on all fittings must be BSP threads and all made threads must be
tapered and female ends parallel. Fittings must have BS:864 or EN:1254 imprinted on the fitting itself.
• All fittings will be embossed with the BS symbol mentioning the specification BS:864
or with EN:1254.
• For 15mm to 28mm sizes Integral Solder Ring Fittings will be used for all internal services.
• For sizes 35mm and above, End feed fittings will be used for all external services.
• Fittings of sizes 15mm to 28mm will be joined with copper pipes by the use of soft lead free
solder wire as per specifications mentioned below.
• For fittings for sizes 35mm and above, the process of joining will be by brazing as per details
given below. Under no circumstances will fittings for 35mm and below be brazed and under
no circumstances will fittings of 35mm and above be soft soldered.
(a) FOR END FEED FITTINGS
The fittings must be capable of End Feeding, Solder Wire to be used with these fittings must be soft
solder capable of melting at approx. 230 deg C and must confirm to BS:219 / EN BS 29453. Solder
wire must be absolutely lead-free. Copper tin or Silver Tin Solder is acceptable only. All fittings of
35mm and above will be of End Feed type.
(b) FOR SOLDER RING FITTINGS
All plain end of fittings must be provided with enough amount of lead-free solder in the neck of the
fitting itself to ensure proper capillary action. The solder must be soft solder and lead- free with melting
temperature of approx. 230 deg C and must be capable of melting with an ordinary blow lamp and on
melting must be sufficient to form a complete leak proof to cover
the annular space in between to BS:219/BS EN:29453 specification. All fittings of 15mm to 28mm will
be Integral Solder Ring Type.
(2) SOLDER WIRE
Legislation has resulted in a ban on the use of lead containing solders on both new and repaired potable
water systems. All integral solder ring fittings contain lead free solder. In the case of End Feed Fittings,
the onus is on the specifier and installer to ensure that lead- tree, Tin-copper or Tin-silver solders, as
specified in BS:EN:29453 (Formerly BS:219) are used exclusively in potable water installations.
(3) FLUX
(i) Flux should be Non-Acidic, Lead-tree

(ii) The Flux should be supplied in paste form packed in small Tin container of 500 gms or small
packaging, and should have compatibility to use with Solderwire (Lead-free & as per BS:219 or
equivalent)
(iii) The Flux should be water soluble and should be used in recommended quantity. Excess use of
Flux not recommended.
LAYING AND JOINTING OF COPPER PIPES AND CAPILLARY FITTINGS
• The copper pipes and fittings shall run wall chase or ceiling or as specified. The fixing shall be done by
means of standard pattern holder but clamps keeping the pipes about 1.5 cm clear of the wall where to
be laid on surface. Where it is specified to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted. For pipes fixed
in shafts, ducts, etc. there should be sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. As far as
possible, pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is given against damage
and where so required special care to be taken at joints. Where directed by the Owner’s site
representative / Architect, pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a wall or
floor for reception of the pipes and allow freedom for expansion and contraction and other movements.
In case pipe is embedded in walls or floors, it shall be covered with a protective tape wrapped around
the pipes & fittings.
• Copper pipe shall be joined with approved above mentioned fittings conforming to BS:864 Part II and
EN:125. Care shall be taken to remove any bulk from the end of the pipes after cutting. Only fittings of
the size suitable to the pipe shall be used. The ends of the tube shall be cut to the correct size using a tube
cutter or a line bladed hacksaw. Care shall be taken to ensure that the ends of the tubes are cut
perpendicular to the axis of the tube and that the ends remain undamaged and free of burrs. Any burrs
remaining shall be removed with a smooth file. Clean the outside surface of the tube that shall go into
the fitting.
• Flux shall be applied on the pipe surface ensuring even and uniform application. Insert the tube into the
fitting and push home until the stop is reached. Wipe off excess flux with a soft cloth. Now the
assembled joint shall be heated with a blow torch or any similar appliance that emits a clean, blue,
soot free flame. The heat shall be turned off once complete ring of solder has appeared on the mouth
of the fitting.
2.2.5 VALVES
2.2.5.1 General
1. The Contractor shall supply and installation of all valves as indicated on the drawings and as
required for the proper and efficient operation and maintenance of the entire systems.
2. All valves supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and test pressure of the various
water supply systems. Test pressure shall be 150% higher than the working pressure.
3 All valves other than automatic control valves shall be full line size.
4 Each valve shall have a purpose made reference number plate or label engraved or stamped
indicating the manufacturer’s catalogue number, pressure and temperature ratings. Valves
shall be arranged so that clockwise rotation of the spindle will close the valve. Demo labels
are not acceptable.
5 All valves shall be furnished with accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not
shown on drawings.
6 All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated with oil and
graphite. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
7 Where possible locate all valves at convenient positions of operation from the floor with valve
stems upright.
8 Valves that are flanged shall have flanges comply with BS 4504 as for pipe work.
9 All valves shall be with screwed or flanged ends as required by the piping system in which they
are installed.
10 Valves shall be selected for the working pressure required for the project.
2.2.5.2 Ball Valves
A. Valves 65mm dia and below shall be lever operated Brass ball valves with SS ball / stem
or specified in the schedule of quantities, having working pressure not less than 10
Kg./Cm2.
B. All valves shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before they are allowed to be used
on work.
2.2.5.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Valves 80 mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve to be used for isolation.
The valves shall be bubble tight, resilient seated suitable for flow in either direction and
seal in both direction. Valves shall be provided with matching flanges with neoprene
insertion gasket 3 mm thick
B. All valves 80mm dia and above shall be C.I double flanged or wafer type single flanged.
2.2.5.4 Butterfly valve shall be of first quality conforming to IS: 13095-1991.
2.2.5.5 AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valves shall be single acting type air valves with bronze/gunmetal internal parts
and plastic float.
2.2.5.6 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
The pressure reducing valves shall be provided with 3 nos ball valves on inlet, outlet, and
bye-pass,1 No GM pressure reducing valve with screw / flanged connection, 1 No. `Y'
strainer, 2 Nos Pressure 'gauge on inlet & outlet, and 1 No. 15 mm dia safety valve. The
complete system is tested to suitable for working pressure of 10 Kg / Sqcm.and suitable to
reduce the pressure upto 1.5 Kg/Sq.cm) Including flanges/ unions, nuts, bolts and washers
complete as required.
2.2.5.7 Execution
A. All valves shall be installed only in the upright vertical or horizontal positions unless
specifically otherwise required.
B. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for repair or
replacement.
C. All valves shall be Installed with operating clearance for handle and stem.
D. All isolation valves shall be installed on equipment so that valve and piping do not interfere
with equipment removal or maintenance. Install unions or flanges on equipment side of
valves.
E. Provide 25mm drain valves with threaded ends for hose connections at drain points, at main
shutoff valves, low points of piping systems, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.
F. It is necessary to provide by contractor required manual or automatic vent valves at high

points of piping systems to facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet and smooth operation.
G. All valves shall be provided with renewable seat rings and bronze spindles for cast iron body
valves.
H. Furnish and install other valves, check valves, cocks, etc., as required for the complete and
proper valving of the entire installation.
I. Install butterfly valves in horizontal piping with stem in the horizontal position so that
bottom of disk lifts in the direction of flow.
J. Install butterfly valves in vertical piping and at pump outlet with stem perpendicular to
pump shaft.
2.3. STRAINERS
2.3.1 Strainers shall be installed in all pump suctions.
2.3.2 Strainer under 65mm dia shall be pipeline Y-type strainer. Strainer of 65mm or above shall be of
vertical (bucket) type, S.S. strainer cast iron body with flanged connectors or otherwise specified
in the schedule of quantities.
2.3.3 Strainer mesh shall be stainless steel 316 with filtering area of al least three times the sectional
area of the pipe inlet.
2.4. FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR
A. Flexible connectors shall be of synthetic fiber reinforced rubber, twin sphere type for flush water
and 316 stainless steel bellow type for type fresh water system.
B. Pressure rating of the flexible connectors shall be the same as the water supply system pressure
unless otherwise noted on drawings
Flexible connectors shall be installed in the locations shown on drawings and at all pump suctions and
discharges. The materials of the flexible connectors shall be suitable for the substances to be conveyed.
3. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

GENERAL
Water supply system to cater for drinking, washing, flushing & other requirements shall be installed as
called for on the drawings.
The piping system consists of PB pipe & fittings. The size and makes are specified in the Schedule of
Quantities.
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Supply and installation of the cold water system including incoming water mains, all distribution
pipe work, transfer pumps, multistage pressure booster pump sets, valves, fittings, supports,
equipment supporting frameworks, etc. as per the Drawings.
B. Municipal water connections shall be provided at the plot boundary by Municipal Authority.
C. The incoming water mains shall be routed to water storage tanks in the vicinity. Water supply
distribution system to various usage points will be through hydropneumatic system as per design
drawings. .
D. Water hose points shall be provided to the basement plant rooms, roof and other areas as shown on
the drawings.
3.2 FERRULES
The ferrules for connection with municipal water supply shall generally conform to IS:2692. It shall be of
non- ferrous materials with a C.I bell mouth cover and shall be of nominal bore as specified. The ferrule
shall be fitted with a screw and plug or valve capable of completely shuttering of the water supply to
the communication pipe, if and when required.
3.3 MAKING WATER CONNECTION
A pit of suitable dimension and depth shall be dug at the point where the connection is to be made with
ring main and earth removed upto 150mm below the main. The flow of water in main shall be
disconnected by operating the nearest valve on the main. The main shall be drilled and slopped at 45
deg to the vertical and the ferrule of required size shall be screwed in. The ferrule shall be fitted in a
manner so that no portion of projection of the shank shall be left projecting within the main into which it
is fitted. Ferrule shall be non-ferrous material with a CI bell mouth cover and shall be of nominal bore
as required.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER AND STOP COCK
The GI / UPVC lines shall be cut to the required lengths at the position where the meter and stop cock are
required to be fixed. Then end of the pipe shall be threaded. The meter and stop cock shall be fixed in a
position by means of connecting pipes, GI jam nut and socket etc. The stop cock shall be fixed near the inlet
of the water meter. The paper disc inserted in the ripples of the meter shall be removed. And the meter is
installed exactly horizontal in the flow line in the direction shown by the arrow on the body of the meter.
Care shall be taken that the factory seal of the meter is not disturbed. Wherever the meter shall be fixed to a
newly fitted pipe line, the pipe line shall be completely cleaned from inside and outside before fitting the
meter.
4. TESTING
a) All water supply system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure test of at-least one and half time the
maximum working pressure but not less than 9kg/sq.cm. for a period of not less than 24hours.
All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified and got approved by
the Site Incharge.
b) Piping installed, subsequent to the above pressure test shall be resettled in the same manner.
c) System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be entirely resettled on completion.
d) The contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is achieved through all
coils and other heat exchange equipment in the system concerned. In case of improper circulation,
the contractor shall rectify the defective connections. Contractor shall bear all expenses for
carrying out the above rectifications including the tearing up and refinishing of floors and walls
as required.
e) Contractor shall ensure for labeling of all the pipes.
f) Acoustic treatment for all the pipes in public areas shall be provided by the contractor.
g) Testing of the pipes shall be done before and after the interior designer works.
h) Hilti anchor fastener shall be used by the contractor.
i) Fire sealants shall be provided by the contractor in case of any opening where pipes are passing.
5. SHIFTING OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Contractor shall make sure to shift the surplus excavated material within the site limits as directed by
Engineer within the site limit.
6. PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION
All embedded piping material and accessories shall be suitably protected against corrosion. All
embedded GI pipes and fittings shall be protected by applying pypkoat primer (@ 100 gm/sqm)
protection coating by thermo fusion process and overlap shall be maintained by 15mm with 100mm
thick fine sand all-round in additions to the protective coating as stated above.
7. LAWN HYDRANT
Lawn hydrants shall be of 25mm with ball valves and nipple to receive hose pipes of approved design and
lawn hydrants shall be located in masonry chambers.
8. MASONRY CHAMBER
All masonry chambers for valves and water meter etc. shall be built in brick work. The excavation for
chambers shall be done as per the size of chamber given in the Bill of Quantities. Cement concrete
shall be of 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone
aggregate 40 mm nominal size. Brick shall be of class designation 75 in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement :
5 fine sand). Inside Plastering not less than 12 mm thick shall be done in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement
: 3 fine sand) finished with a floating coat of neat cement.
9. MEASUREMENT
All pipes above ground shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm) and shall be inclusive of
all fittings e.g. coupling, tees, bends, elbows, unions, flanges and U clamps with nuts, bolts & washers
fixed to tall or other standard supports.
Jointing as per procedure specified above.
Cutting holes, and chases in walls, floors, any pipe support required for pipes below ground & making
good the same.
D: SOIL, WASTE AND RAIN WATER SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
Drainage system to cater for soil, waste, vent & rain water shall be installed as called for on the approved
drawings.
The piping system consists of cast iron system. The size and makes shall be as specified in the Schedule
of Quantities.
Soil/Waste and Rain Water System
S.No. Description Type of Material
1. Rain water pipe UPVC/ SWR
2.
Waste water pipe UPVC/ SWR
3. Waste water pipe upto 75 mm dia

UPVC/ SWR
and below
4. Kitchen waste pipe UPVC/ SWR
2. SCOPE OF WORK
Work under the section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipments and appliances
necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes as required by the
drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the schedule of quantities.
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the soil, waste, vent, and rainwater pipes system shall
include the following:-
a) Vertical and Horizontal soil, waste and vent pipes, rainwater pipes and fittings, joints, clamps
and connections to fixtures.
b) Connection of all pipes to sewer and storm water lines as shown on the approved drawings.
c) Waste pipe connections from all fixtures W.C. Wash Basin, Sinks, Urinals, Kitchen equipment
and Plant room equipment.
3. SOIL, WASTE, VENT & RAINWATER PIPES & FITTINGS
3.1. SCOPE OF WORK
Work under the section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipments and appliances
necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes as required by the
drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the schedule of quantities.
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the soil, waste, vent, and rainwater pipes system shall
include the following:-
a) Vertical and Horizontal soil, waste and vent pipes, rainwater pipes and fittings, joints, clamps
and connections to fixtures.
b) Connection of all pipes to sewer and storm water lines as shown on the approved drawings.
c) Waste pipe connections from all fixtures W.C. Wash Basin, Sinks, Urinals, Kitchen equipment
and Plant room equipment.
3.2. CAST IRON PIPES FOR DRAINAGE
a) All drainage lines passing under building, floors and roads with heavy traffic, in exposed position
above ground e.g. service floor and basement ceiling shall be cast iron pipes conforming to
IS:3989. Position of such pipes shall generally be shown on the drawings.
b) Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to I.S: 3989. Quality certificates
shall be furnished.
3.3 JOINTING
All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be jointed with drip seal joint.
3.4 TRAPS
All traps shall be of deep seal trap.
3.4.1 FLOOR TRAP INLET
Bath room traps shall be provided a special type fabricated GI pipe inlet Hopper with or without three inlet
G.I. sockets to receive the waste from the fixture waste. Joint between waste hopper inlet socket shall be
drip seal joint.
3.5 C.P./STAINLESS STEEL GRATINGS
Floor traps shall be provided with C.P./ Stainless steel cockroach trap grating, with frame.
3.6 JOINTING OF PIPES
Cast Iron Soil, Waste vent and rainwater pipes shall be jointed with drip seal joint / refined Pig lead
confirming to IS: 89-1977 sufficient skin of jute row shall be caulked to make minimum space for the
pig lead as given in 3.1.2 to be poured in. After the pouring the lead shall be caulked into the joint with
caulking tool and hammer. All surplus lead should be cut and joint left flush with the edge of socket
neatly. Alternative to lead joint, cast iron pipes may also jointed with Drip Seal Joint as per manufacturer
recommendations. All PVC SWR systems for drainage shall be jointed with rubber lubricant ring joints.
3.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts at the base of all soil, waste and leader stacks, at all changes in direction of
horizontal piping, at every floor of sanitary, at vent and rain water stacks, at all branch connections
to stacks, and at every 15m of horizontal pipe runs. Cleanout plugs shall be threaded and provided
with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be fixed to the pipe by a GI socket and lead caulked
joint.
B. Extend cleanouts to walls and floor with long sweep bend or "wye" and 1/8 bends with plugs
and face or deck plates to conform to the architectural finish in the room. Where no definite finish
is indicated on drawings provided by other Divisions of this Specification, use stainless steel wall
plates and floor plates of nickel bronze.
3.8 Cast Iron Class (LA) pipes
All drainage passing under building floor and passing through retaining wall shall be cast iron class (LA)
pipes (IS : 1536)
Cast iron class (LA) pipe shall be such that they could be cut, drilled or machined. Pipe centrifugally cast
in unlined water cooled moulds shall be heat treated in order to achieve the necessary mechanical
properties and to relieve casing stress; provided that the specified mechanical properties are satisfied
material
Cast iron pipe shall be centrifugally spun cast iron pipe and conforming to IS:1536-1976 Fittings
Fittings shall be used for cast iron class (LA pipes shall conform to IS:1538-1976). Whenever possible
junction from branch pipe shall be made by wyes.
All cast iron water main pipes and fittings shall be manufactured to IS:1536 of tested quality. The pipes
and fittings shall either be spigot and socket type or as called for. The pipes and fittings shall be of uniform
material throughout and shall be free from all manufacturing defects.
PVC SWR Pipes and Fittings (For Pipes diameters 75mm and above)
The pipes shall be round and shall be supplied in straight lengths with socketed ends. The internal and
external surfaces of pipes shall be smooth, clean, free from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be
cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The pipes shall be designed by external diameter and shall
conform to IS:13592. The pipes shall be of Type B.
Fittings
Fittings shall be of the same make as that of pipes, injection moulded and shall conform to Indian
Standard 14735.
Laying and Jointing
The pipes shall be laid and clamped to wooden plugs fixed above the surface of the wall. Alternatively
plastic clamps of suitable designs shall be preferred. Provision shall be made for the effect of thermal
movement by not gripping or disturbing the pipe at supports between the anchors for suspended pipes. The
supports shall allow the repeated movements to take place without abrasion.
Jointing for PVC SWR pipes shall be made by means of solvent cement for horizontal lines and ‘O’
rubber ring for vertical line. Rubber lubricant must be used to fix the O’ rubber ring ïn the groove. The
type of joint shall be used as per site conditions / direction of the Owner’s site representative. Where PVC
SWR pipes are to be used for rain water pipes, the pipe shall be finished with GI adopter for insertion in
the RCC slab for a water proof joint complete as directed by Owner’s site representative.
Supports
PVC SWR pipes require supports at close intervals. Recommended support spacing for unplasticised PVC
pipes is 1400 mm for pipes 50 mm dia and above. Pipes shall be aligned properly before fixing them on
the wooden plugs with clamps. Even if the wooden plugs are fixed using a plumb line, pipe shall also be
checked for its alignment before clamping, piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from
clamps, hangers as specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets,
saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and be responsible for their structural sufficiency. Pipe supports
shall be primer coated with rust preventive paint.
Repairs
While temporary or emergency repairs may be made to the damaged pipes, permanent repairs shall be
made by replacement of the damaged section. If any split or chip out occur in the wall of the pipe, a short
piece of pipe of sufficient length to cover the damaged portion of the pipe is cut. The sleeve is cut
longitudinally and heated sufficiently to soften it so that it may be slipped over the damaged hard pipe.
4. UPVC Pipes and Fittings (For Pipes diameters 65mm and below)
The pipes shall be round and shall be supplied in straight lengths with socketed ends. The internal and
external surfaces of pipes shall be smooth, clean, free from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be
cleanly cut and square with the axis of the pipe. The pipes shall be designed by external diameter and shall
conform to IS:4985-1981. The pipes shall be of Class- III; 6 Kg/sqcm pressure rating.
Fittings
Fittings shall be of the same make as that of pipes, injection moulded and shall conform to Indian
Standard 7834.
Laying and Jointing
The pipes shall be laid and clamped to wooden plugs fixed above the surface of the wall. Alternatively
plastic clamps of suitable designs shall be preferred. Provision shall be made for the effect of thermal
movement by not gripping or disturbing the pipe at supports between the anchors for suspended pipes. The
supports shall allow the repeated movements to take place without abrasion.
Jointing for UPVC pipes shall be made by means of solvent cement. The type of joint shall be used as per
site conditions / direction of the Owner’s site representative.
Supports
UPVC pipes require supports at close intervals. Recommended support spacing for unplasticised PVC
pipes is 1400 mm for pipes 50 mm dia and above. Pipes shall be aligned properly before fixing them on
the wooden plugs with clamps. Even if the wooden plugs are fixed using a plumb line, pipe shall also be
checked for its alignment before clamping, piping
shall be properly supported on, or suspended from clamps, hangers as specified and as required. The
Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and be
responsible for their structural sufficiency. Pipe supports shall be primer coated with rust preventive paint.
Repairs
While temporary or emergency repairs may be made to the damaged pipes, permanent repairs shall be
made by replacement of the damaged section. If any split or chip out occur in the wall of the pipe, a short
piece of pipe of sufficient length to cover the damaged portion of the pipe is cut. The sleeve is cut
longitudinally and heated sufficiently to soften it so that it may be slipped over the damaged hard pipe.
5. HDPE pipes and fittings (Where specified)
HDPE pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from PE 63, Pe 80 and PE 100 HDPL raw material and
of pressure as specified, confirming to IS: 4984-1995.
Jointing shall be done as per the manufacturers recommendation. The pipes and fittings must have
matching dimensions for a perfect joint. Loose or excessively tights joints in the system shall not be
accepted.
6. Fittings
Fittings shall confirm to same Indian standards as for pipes. Contractor shall use pipes and fittings of
matching specifications.
Fittings Shall be required curvature with or without access door. The fixing shall be air and water tight.
7. Joining
The HDPE Pipe and Fittings shall have Butt fusion welding joint as recommended by the Manufacturer.
The jointing shall be done using fully automatic Butt fusion Welding machine. The Welding shall be done
by using automatic machine only. No other method for Welding shall be accepted.
Horizontal pipes shall be laid true to slope and adjusted to proper levels.
Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during construction. He shall provide all
information to the Engineer- in-charge for making such provisions in the structure as necessary. All
damages shall be made good to restore the surfaces.
8. WASTE PIPE FROM APPLIANCES
Waste Pipe from appliances e.g. washbasins, sinks, urinals, water coolers, shall be of galvanized steel / PVC
, as given in the schedule of quantities.
All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the out falls of drains. Pipes shall be in chase unless otherwise
shown on approved drawings.
9. INSTALLATION
A. General
1. All materials shall be new and installed in a first class manner.

2. All drainage piping, unless otherwise indicated, shall be pitched at a minimum rate in direction
of flow, in accordance with Indian Standard.
3. Branch connections to stacks or main drain shall not be made in a manner which will permit
backflow.
4. The Contractor shall handle fittings into and out of store to job site and they shall be well
protected from damage. After the installation, the fixtures shall be covered by protective
cratings with carton cardboard and plastic sheets until handover to the employer.
5. The Contractor shall supply all jointing and fixing materials and seal to structure with
polysulphide sealant and make all connections to water supply services, overflows and waste.
6. All pipe work and fitting connected to pit shall be cast in prior to pouring of concrete.
7. Rainwater drain shall be set in position and made good. The Contractor shall ensure that the
works are well coordinated.
8. All materials shall be new and installed in a first class manner.
9. All drainage piping, unless otherwise indicated, shall be pitched at a minimum rate in direction
of flow, in accordance with Indian Standard.
10. Branch connections to stacks or main drain shall not be made in a manner which will permit
backflow.
11. The Contractor shall handle fittings into and out of store to job site and they shall be well
protected from damage. After the installation, the fixtures shall be covered by protective
cratings with carton cardboard and plastic sheets until handover to the employer.
12. The Contractor shall supply all jointing and fixing materials and seal to structure with
polysulphide sealant and make all connections to water supply services, overflows and waste.
13. All pipe work and fitting connected to pit shall be cast in prior to pouring of concrete.
14. Rainwater drain shall be set in position and made good. The Contractor shall ensure that the
works are well coordinated.
B. Testing
1. All testing to be carried out in accordance with the local authority requirements and Indian
Standards.
2. During the progress of the work, test the waste and storm drainage systems to permit general
construction and building in of rough work to proceed.
3. Provide all apparatus and temporary work for tests. Take all due precautions to prevent
damage to any part of the building.
4. No caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks shall be permitted except where lead and oakum
joints are used.
5. Each sections of drainage and roughing piping tested shall have all openings tightly closed with
screw plugs, or equal device, and shall stand without loss of level for a period of four hours
when filled with water to produce at least a 3meter head at the highest point of the section
tested.
6. The Contractor shall maintain system until handover and ensure that at handover the systems are
clean and free of blockage.
7. Test Procedure
Before use at site, all CI soil pipes shall be tested by filling up with water for at least 30 minutes.
After filling, pipes shall be struck with a hammer and inspected for blow holes and cracks. All
defective pipes shall be rejected and removed from the site.
Pipes shall be tested after installation, by filling up the stack with water. All openings in
connection shall be suitably plugged. The total head in the stack shall, however, not exceed 3 m.
Alternatively, contractor may test all soil and waste stacks by smoke testing machine. Smoke
shall be pumped into the stack after plugging all inlets and connections. The stack then be
observed for leakages and all defective pipes and fittings removed or repaired as directed by
the owner/consultant.
8. All testing to be carried out in accordance with the local authority requirements and Indian
Standards.
9. During the progress of the work, test the waste and storm drainage systems topermit general
construction and building in of rough work to proceed.
10. Provide all apparatus and temporary work for tests. Take all due precautions to prevent
damage to any part of the building.
11. Each sections of drainage and roughing piping tested shall have all openings tightly closed with
screw plugs, or equal device, and shall stand without loss of level for a period of four hours
when filled with water to produce at least a 3meter head at the highest point of the section
tested.
12. The Contractor shall maintain system until handover and ensure that at handover the
systems are clean and free of blockage.
13. Contractor shall ensure for labeling of all the pipes.
14. Acoustic treatment for all the pipes in public areas shall be provided by the contractor.
15. Testing of the pipes shall be done before and after the interior designer works.
16. Hilti anchor fastener shall be used by the contractor.

17. Fire sealants shall be provided by the contractor in case of any opening where pipes are passing.
10. Air Admittance Valves (AAV) (McAlpine, UK / STUDOR, UK)
Air admittance valves shall be made in ABS/PVC capable of operating at temperatures between 0
degree c and 60 degree c. The AAV shall be of suitable flow rate and installed in main discharge stacks
and / or branches. Design based on air flow capacity required in proportion to the discharge unit
capacities. The vendor is to supply data sheet showing relevant calculations and drawings indicating
location and type of AAV as required.
AAV’s to have following performance parameter:
• Temperature range: -20 degree Celsius to 60 degree Celsius.

• Open pressure: -70 pa (-0.010 psi)
• Max. Pressure rating tightness: 10,000 pa (1 m/40” h2o) at 0 pa or higher
11. Maxi Filtra:
Maxi Filtra shall be in black ABS to be installed at the outlet of the vent pipe discharging gases in the
atmosphere. They are fitted with active carbon filters with iodine level being 1050mg/g. The
replaceable carbon filters must be changed regularly as per manufacturer’s specifications.
MacFit Pan connector (McAlpine)
The WC pan connector shall be of Macfit type, soft and shall be made of single body construction with
integral fins, made from EVA (Ethyl Vinyl Acetate). The pan connector must confirm to BS
5627:1984.The pan connector must be supplied with one seal made of TPE (Thermoplastic
Elastomeric). The pan connector must be supplied with factory fitted spring loaded seal guard
fixed on the seal.
The connector shall not be allowed to come in contact with mineral oil, grease, putty or any compound
containing mineral oil or grease.
The pan connectors must be stored away from direct sun light and flames.
Fixing: The soil pipe must be reasonably clean and smooth on the inner surface; in case the soil piping
is in C.I. then supplier supplied bush/adaptor shall be used. The connector socket is pushed fully home
onto the pan spigot; thereafter the WC is placed in position gently pushing the fitment to ensure that
the connector end fits into the spigot of the pipe. The pan connector must be pushed in such a way as
to ensure that the seals and fins turn inward to ensure proper sealing.
12. CEMENT CONCRETE
Cast Iron soil and Waste pipes under floor in sunken slabs and in wall chases (vane cut specially for
the pipe) shall be encased in cement, concrete in 1:2:4 mix with required thickness as mentioned in Bill
of Quantity. The encased pipe shall be supported with suitable cement, concrete, pillars of required
height and size at intervals as directed by owner/ consultant.
13. PAINTING
Painting for Pipes shall be measured per linear metre over finished surface and shall include all the
fittings for which no deduction shall be made.
14. CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD
Contractor shall provide required holes, cutouts in slab and chases in the wall as per the site requirement and making
good the same with cement concrete 1:2:4 ( 1 cement :2 coarse sand
:4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1cement : 2 coarse sand) and the surface
restored to original condition.
15. MEASUREMENT
General
Rates for all items quoted shall be inclusive of all work and items given in the above mentioned specification
and schedule of quantities and applicable for the work under floor, in shafts or at ceiling level at all heights
and depths.
All rates shall be inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry work and making good the
same.
All rates are inclusive of pre-testing and on site testing of the installations, materials and
commissioning.
Pipes (Unit of Measurement). Linear meter to the nearest centimeters.

Pipes shall be measured net when fixed correct to a centimeter including all fittings along its length.
Soil, waste, vent and rain water pipes shall be measured overall along the centre line correct to a centimeter
including all fittings along its length. The rate for these pipes shall be inclusive of all fittings, holder bat
clamps, lead caulked joints painting and all other items described in the schedule of quantities. Traps
structural clamps and cement concrete shall, however, be paid separately under the relevant item.
Pipes shall be measured per running meter correct to a centimeter for the finished work, which shall include
fittings e.g. bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, sockets, nipples, nuts and painting. The length shall
be taken along the centre line of pipes and fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to
their diameter, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality and finish diameter shall be nominal
diameter of internal bore. Pipe shall be described as including all cutting and waste. Incase of fitting of
an equal bore, the large bore shall be measured.
Cement concrete around pipe shall be measured along centre of the pipe line per linear meter. Slotted
angels/channels and required support shall be with bolts & nuts and shall be part of the item.
Painting
Painting of pipes shall be measured in meter along the centre line of pipes installed. The rate shall include
the painting of clamps, suspenders and supports.
Structural Clamps
Structural Clamps and U clamps shall be inclusive of all anchor fasteners, nuts, bolts, drilling, cutting,
welding & painting and shall be part of item. Weight of clamps shall be calculated from the actual
length used in structural member multiplied by its theoretical weight given in manufactures catalogue.
Weight of nuts, bolts shall not be taken into account.
Excavation for pipes
No extra payment shall be admissible with respect to excavation, refilling and disposal of surplus earth
for pipes.
16. TRENCHING FOR PIPES AND DRAINS
16.1 General
All the material shall be new of best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the approval of
the Architects. Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles. All drainage work shall
be done in accordance with the local municipal by-laws.
Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system from the municipal or
any other competent authority. Location of all manholes, catch basins etc. shall be finalized and shown in
approved shop drawings before the actual execution of work at site. All work shall be executed as directed
by the Project Manager.
16.2 Alignment & Grade

The sewer and storm water drainage pipes shall be carefully laid to levels and gradients shown in the
plans and sections but subject to modifications as shall be ordered by the Architects from time to time to
meet the requirements of the works. Great care shall be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes.
The pipes between two manholes shall be laid truly in straight lines without vertical or horizontal
undulations. The body of the pipes shall rest on an even bed in the trench for its length and places shall be
excavated to receive collar for the purpose of jointing. No deviations from the lines, depths of cuttings or
gradients as called for on the drawings shall be permitted without the written approval of the Architect.
All pipes shall be laid at least 60cms below the finished ground level or as called for on the drawings.
16.3 Setting out Trenches
The contractor shall set out all trenches, manholes, chambers and such other works to true grades and
alignments as called for. He shall provide the necessary instruments for setting out and verification for
the same. All trenches shall be laid to true grade and in straight lines and as shown on the drawings. The
trenches shall be laid to proper levels by the assistance of boning rods and sight rails which shall be fixed
at intervals not exceeding 10 meters or as directed by the Project Manager.
16.4 Trench Excavation
The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated with bottoms formed to level and gradients as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. In soft and filled in ground, the Project Manager may
require the trenches to be excavated to a greater depth than the shown on the drawings and to fill up such
additional excavation with concrete (1:4:8) consolidated to bring the excavation to the required levels as
shown on the drawings.
All excavations shall be properly protected where necessary by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting as
approved by the Project Manager. All timbering and sheeting when withdrawn shall be done gradually to
avoid falls. All cavities be adequately filled and consolidated. No blasting shall be allowed without prior
approval in writing from the Architect. It shall be carried out under thorough and competent supervision,
with the written permission of the appropriate authorities taking full precautions connected with the
blasting operations. All excavated earth shall be kept clear of the trenches to a distance equal to 75 cms.
16.5 Timbering of Sewer and Trenches
The Contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of all the trenches and other
excavations by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting and they shall be close timbered in loose or sandy
starta and below the surface of the sub soil water level.
All timbering, sheeting and piling with their wallings and supports shall be of adequate dimensions and
strength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse or subsidence of the walls of the trench
shall take place.
The Contractor shall be held responsible and shall be accountable for the sufficiency of all timbering,
bracings, sheeting and piling used and also for, all damage to persons and property resulting from improper
quality strength placing, maintaining or removing of the same.
16.6 Shoring of Buildings
The Contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the stability of which is liable to be
endangered by the execution of the work and shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons or
property resulting from any accident.
16.7 Obstruction Road
The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of any road
or street and sufficient space shall then be left for public and private transit. He shall remove the materials
excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain
the consent of the Project Manager in writing before closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot
walks must be clear at all times.
16.8 Protection of Pipes etc.
All pipes, water mains, cables etc. met in the course of excavation shall be carefully protected and
supported. Care shall be taken not to disturb the cables, the removal of which shall be arranged by the
contractor with the written consent from the Project Manager.
16.9 Trench Back Filling
Refilling of the trenches shall not be commenced until the length of pipes therein has been tested and
approved. All timbering which may be withdrawn safely shall be removed as filling proceeds. Where the
pipes are unprotected by concrete hunching, selected fine material shall be carefully hand-packed around
the lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them to the sides of the trench.
The refilling shall then be continued to 150mm over the top of the pipe using selected fine hand packed
material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipes with a wooden hammer. The process of filling
and tamping shall proceed evenly in layers not exceeding 150mm thickness, each layer being watered and
consolidated so as to maintain an equal pressure on both sides of the pipe line. In gardens and fields the
top solid and turf if any, shall be carefully replaced.
16.10 Contractor to restore settlement and Damages
The contractor shall at his own costs and expenses, make good promptly during the whole period for the
works in hand if any settlement occurs in the surfaces of roads, beams, footpaths, gardens, open spaces
etc. in the public or private areas caused by his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable
for any accident caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expense and charges, repair (and make good)
any damage done to building and other property. If in the opinion of the Project Manager he fails to make
good such works with all practicable dispatch, the Project Manager shall be at his liberty to get the work
done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractor or deducted from any money
that may be or become due to him or recovered from him by any other manner according to the laws of
land.
The contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all surplus materials not
required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled, surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the
surface shall be properly restored and roadways and sides shall be left clear.
16.11 Removal of Water from Sewer, Trench etc.
The contractor shall at all times during the progress of work keep the excavations free from water which
shall be disposed by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public health nor to the public or
private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of any road or streets, nor
cause any interference with the use of the same by the public.
If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width of the specified cross section of
the sewer with its cover, the full width of the trench shall be filled with concrete by the contractor at his
own expense and charges to the requirements of the Project Manager.
16.12 Removal of Filth
All night soil, filth or any other offensive mater met with during the execution of the works, shall not be
deposited on the surface of any street or where it is likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or
drain but shall be immediately, after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cess pool, put into the carts
and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the Contractor.
16.13 Width of Trench
The Project Manager shall have power by giving an order in writing to the Contractor to increase the
maximum width/depth for excavation and backfilling in trenches for various classes of sewer, manholes
and other works in certain length to be specifically laid down by him, where on account of bad ground on
other unusual conditions, he considers that such increased width/depths are necessary in view of the site
conditions.
17. PIPING MATERIAL
17.1 RCC pipes
All pipes shall be centrifugally spun RCC pipes NP2. Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform bore
throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the work. All pipes shall be tested by the
manufacturer and the Contractor shall produce, prior to use on site, a certificate to that effect from the
manufacturer.
The pipes shall be with or without reinforcement as required and of the class as specified. These shall
conform to IS:458-1971.
All pipes shall be true to shape, straight, perfectly sound and free from cracks and flaws. The external and
internal surface of the pipes shall be smooth and hard. The pipes shall be free from defects resulting from
imperfect grading of the aggregate mixing or moulding.
Laying
RCC spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed of cradles as specified and shown on the detailed
drawings. The cradles may be precast and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and breakage in handling.
The invert of the cradles shall be left 12 mm below the invert level of the pipe and properly placed on the
soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed on `the bed concrete or cradles and set for the
line and gradient by means of sight rails and boning rods, etc. Cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if
directed by the Project Manager.
Jointing
Semi flexible type collar joint.
Hemp rope soaked in neat cement wash shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by means of
caulking tool. More skein of yarn shall be added and rammed home. Cement mortar with one part of cement
and two part of sand and with minimum water content but on no account soft or sloppy, shall be carefully
inserted, punched and caulked into the collar and more cement mortar added until the space of the collar
has been filled completely with tightly caulked mortar. Provision of rubber sealing ring in the collar joint
shall also be made. The joint shall then be finished off neatly outside the socket at an angle of 45 deg.
Curing:
The joint shall be cured for at least seven days. Refilling at joints will be permitted only on satisfactory
completion of curing period.
Cement Concrete for Pipe Supports:
a. Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager cement concrete for bed, all round or in haunches
shall be as follows:
upto 1.5 m upto 3 m beyond 3 m
depth depth depth
In In
Stoneware pipes buried in open ground All round
Haunches Haunches
(no sub soil water) (1:3:6)
(1:3:6) (1:3:6)
In In
All round
RCC or SW in sub soil water Haunches Haunches
(1:3:6)
(1:3:6) (1:3:6)
b. Pipes may be supported on brick masonry or precast RCC or in situ cradles. Cradles shall be as
c. Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or stone masonry pillars as
Measurement:
a. Excavation
Measurement for excavation of pipes trenches shall be made per linear meter.
b. Trenches shall be measurement between outside walls of manholes at top and the depth shall be
the average depth between the two ends to the nearest cm. The rate quoted shall be for a depth
upto 1.5 metre or as given in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment for trenches more than 1.5 m in depth shall be made for extra depth as given in the Bill of
Quantities and above the rate for depth upto 1.5 m.
c. RCC pipes shall be measured for length of the pipe line per linear meter.
i. Length between manholes shall be recorded from inside of one manhole or inside of
other manhole.
ii. Length between gully trap and manhole shall be recorded between socket of pipe near
gully trap and inside of manhole.
18. CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLE
Where manholes are to be constructed, the excavation, filling back and ramming, disposal of surplus earth,
preparation of bottom and sides etc. shall be carried out as described earlier under trench excavation.
Manhole shall be sized and depths as called for in the drawings and Bill of Quantities.
The manhole shall be built on a base concrete 1:3:6 of 150mm thickness for manholes upto 1500mm
depth and 250mm thickness for manholes from 1500 to 2500mm depth and 300mm thickness manholes
of depth greater than 2500mm. Reinforcement as shown shall be provided in the base slabs.
The walls shall be of brick work of thickness as shown in drawings built in cement mortar 1:5. The joints
of brick work shall be raked and plastered internally in cement mortar 1:3 (at least 12 mm thick) and
finish with a coat of neat cement, external plaster shall be rough plaster in 1:3, PCC benching & semi
circular channels of the same diameter as the pipes shall be provided and finished with neat cement
coating.
Above the horizontal diameter, the sides of channel shall be extended vertically to the same level as the
crown of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The branch channels shall also
be similarly constructed with respect to the benching but at their junction with the main channel an
appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the direction of flow in the main channel shall be given. All
manholes / sumps shall be provided with poly propylene coated steel reinforced foot rest. The
polypropylene shall confirm to ASTM D-4101 specification, injection moulded around 12 mm dia IS-
1786 grade FE-415 steel reinforcing bar. These rungs shall be set at 30cms interval in two vertical runs
at 380mm apart horizontally. The top rung shall be 450mm below the manhole cover. Unless otherwise
mentioned, manholes shall be constructed to the requirements of Indian Standard IS:4111 (Part I). All
manholes shall be constructed so as to be water tight under test. All angles shall be rounded to a 75mm
radius with cement plaster 20mm thick. The benching at the side shall be carried out in such a manner so
as to provide no lodgment for any splashing in case of accidental flooding. Manhole cover with frame
shall be of cast iron of an approved make. The covers and frame shall generally be double seal as specified
in the Bill of Quantities.
18.1 Measurements
Manhole shall be measured in numbers as indicated in the Bill of Quantity. The depth of manhole shall
be measured from invert of channel to the top of manhole cover.
Manhole with depth greater than specified under the main item shall be paid for under Èxtra Depth’ and
shall include all items as given for manholes depth will be measured to the nearest cm. Depth of the
manholes shall be measured from top of the manhole cover to bottom of channel. The following are
inclusive in the cost of manhole viz;
i. Bed concrete
ii. Brick work.
iii. Plastering (inside & outside)
iv. R C C top slab, benching and channeling including drop connections.
v. Supply and fix foot rests.
vi. Keeping holes and embedding pipes for all the connections.
vii. Excavation, refilling, necessary de-watering and disposing off surplus soil to a places as directed
by Project Manager.
viii. Curing.
ix Cost of angle frame and embedding the frame in concrete bed.
x Testing.
xi De-watering of chambers.
18.2. Drop Connection
Drop connection shall be provided between branch sewer and main sewer in the main sewer itself in steep
ground when the difference in invert level of two exceeds 60 cms of the required sizes. Drop connections
from gully traps to main sewer in rectangular shall be made inside the manholes and shall have CI special
types door bend on to top and heel rest bend at bottom connected by a CI pipe. The pipe shall be supported
by holder bat clamps at 180 cms intervals with atleast one clamp for each drop connection. All joints shall
be lead caulked joints 25mm deep.
Drop connections from branch sewer to main sewer shall be made outside the manhole wall with CI / CI
class LA pipe, connection, vertical pipe and bend at the bottoms. The top of the tee shall be finished upto
the surface level and provided with a CI hinges type frame and cover 30cms x 30cms. The connection and
tee upto the surface chamber of the tee.
Drop connection made from vertical stacks directly into manholes shall not be considered as drop
connections.
18.3 Making Connections
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting the walls benching and
restoring them to the original condition. A new channel shall be cut in the benching of the existing
manhole for the new connection. Contractor shall remove all sewage and water if encountered in making
the connection without additional cost.
19. TESTING
All rights of the sewer and drain shall be carefully tested for water tightness by means of water pressure
maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. All
pipes shall be subject to a test pressure of 1.5 meter head of water. The test pressure will however, not
exceed 6 meters head at any point. The pipes shall be plugged preferably with standard design plugs
or with rubber plugs on both sides,
the upper end shall, however, be connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required head
poured at one time.
Sewer lines shall be tested for straightness by :
i. Inserting a smooth ball 12 mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe. In the absence of
obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball shall roll down the invert of the
pipe and emerge at the lower end.
ii. means of a mirror at one end a lamp at the other end. If the pipe is straight the full circle of light
will be seen otherwise obstructions or deviations will be apparent.
iii. The contractor shall give a smoke test to the drain and sewer at his own expense and charges, if
directed by the Developer’s site representative.
iv. A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor and Developer’s
site representative.
E: WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
1 FILTRATION
SCOPE
The scope is inclusive of supply, installation, testing and commissioning of FRP composite vessel or
Mild Steel Media Filters with multiport valve / valve / frontals, piping media etc and related support
arrangement for frontals.
FRP COMPOSITE VESSEL FILTER
The material of construction of the media filter shall be FRP with inner shell of integrated polyethylene,
polypropylene and/or other material as per manufacturer's standard suitable for 1.5 times the design
working pressure.
The internal distribution system shall be of hub & lateral type and /or as per manufacturer's standard l. The
filter shall have necessary inlet/outlet flanged opening of adequate size for piping / valve connection, tripod
as base and vacuum breaker to avoid any collapse of internal lining for making the installation completed.
.
MILD STEEL FILTERS
Media filter shall be designed in accordance with code of unfired pressure vessel conforming to ASME
Section VIII, DIV B. or IS 2825 for steel constitution as mentioned in the Bill of Quantities.
Media filters shall be vertical type of required diameter in accordance to the BOQ. The filter shall have
necessary frontals of MS, inlet/outlet flanged opening of adequate size for piping
/ valve connection and at least one pressure tight manhole cover internally painted with black bituminous,
non toxic corrosion resistant epoxy paint (50 Micron on each coat) or as mentioned in the Bill of Quantities
and externally coated with Zinc chromate finished with two coats of approved synthetic enamel colour or
hammertone. The internal distribution system shall comprise of inverted manifold plate and the under bed
draft off system shall comprise of bed plate with PP strainers or as per manufacturer standards.
FRONTAL PIPING
Each filter shall be provided with interconnecting frontal piping comprising of inlet, outlet, and backwash
complete with butterfly / ball / diaphragm valves. The frontal piping to be designed at a velocity of 1.5 to
1.8 m/sec.
ACCESSORIES
Each filter shall be provided with following accessories :-
a. Inlet and outlet pressure gauge
b. Sampling cock / valve on raw water inlet and filter water outlet
c. Individual drain connection with gunmetal fullway valve for each filter.
d. Pressure gauge with valves at inlet and outlet
e. Air release valve with connecting pipe

f. Water meter at outlet
FILTERING MEDIA
The media filters should have support & related media in accordance to the type of application and filtration
rates as per the Bill of Quantities. The cut-section / General arrangement drawings of the filter along with
filter media detail shall be subject to approval by the Owner / Architect / Consultant.
2. WATER SOFTNER
SCOPE
The scope is inclusive of supply, installation, testing and commissioning of FRP composite vessel or
Mild Steel Media Filters with multiport valve, valves, frontals, ejector, media, resin, brine tank assembly
etc and related support arrangement for frontals.
SOFTENER
The material of construction of the softener shall be FRP/MS with inner shell of integrated polyethylene,
polypropylene and/or other material as per manufacturer's standard incase of FRP and in accordance with
code of unfired pressure vessel conforming to ASME Section VIII, DIV B. or IS 2825 for steel constitution
as mentioned in the BOQ suitable for
1.5 times the design working pressure.
The internal distribution system shall be of hub & lateral type and /or as per manufacturer's standard having
necessary inlet/outlet flanged opening of adequate size for piping / valve connection, tripod as base and
vacuum breaker incase of FRP vessels to avoid any collapse of internal lining and necessary frontals, air
vent, internals and at least one pressure tight manhole cover incase of MS for making the installation
complete
Softeners shall be designed to give an output of zero commercial hardness.
Softeners shall be vertical type of required dimensions absed on parameters eg flow, OBR, TH etc in
accordance with the BOQ. The filter shall have necessary frontals inlet/outlet flanged opening of adequate
size for piping / valve connection. The MS softeners shall be internally painted with non toxic corrosion
resistant epoxy or anti corrosive paint (50 Micron on each coat) or as mentioned in the BOQ and externally
coated with Zinc chromate finished with two coats of approved synthetic enamel colour or hammertone.
The internal distribution system shall comprise of inverted manifold plate and the under bed draft off
system shall comprise of bed plate with PP strainers or as per manufacturer standards.
FRONTAL PIPING
Each softener shall be provided with interconnecting frontal piping comprising of inlet, outlet, and
backwash complete with butterfly / ball / diaphragm valves. The frontal piping to be designed at a velocity
of 1.5 to 1.8 m/sec.
ACCESSORIES
Each softener shall be provided with the following accessories :
a. One set of frontal piping, multiport valve, valves, hydraulic injector assembly, brine delivery
pipes, air vent etc .
b. One no. HDPE / FRP brine tank and provided with brine delivery piping and complete brine
assembly. The tank shall be of capacity as given in the schedule of quantities with suitable slow
speed SS agitator as mentioned in the Bill of Quantities.
c. One orifice board for indicating wash and rinse rate to be filtered in drain sump.
d. One charge supporting gravel, sand and “Cation” exchange resin in requisite quantity.
e. One water testing kit with instruction for testing water samples.
f. Inlet and outlet pressure gauges. Outlet sample valve.
FILTERING MEDIA & RESIN
The softener should have support media if required and resin quantity in accordance to the Bill of Quantities.
The cut-section / General arrangement drawings of the softener along with media and resin detail shall be
subject to approval by the Owner / Consultant.
F: WATER STORAGE TANKS
1. GENERAL
The following provisions should be made by the Plumbing contractor in the Water Storage Tanks
1. Opening with sealed manhole cover of required size as per approved drawing.
2. Manhole with double sealed manhole cover.
3. Inlets, outlets over flows, drains and insect proof vent cowls as required on approved Drawings.
Necessary perforations (including puddle flanges where required) for the inlet and outlet pipes shall be
provided. Each storage tank shall be equipped with overflow, warning pipes, and vent pipes, and drain sumps
(located directly below the manhole) with watertight hinged cover and locking device.
2. LEVEL CONTROLLERS
A. All level controllers with potential free contact, level sensors, level switches and alarms shall be
provided and installed by the contractor.
B. Each probe shall be of the correct length for its particular application and tank location. Electrodes shall
be polished stainless steel 20mm outside diameter. Electrode holders shall be weather proof in all
respect.
C. The earthing probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth system.
D. Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 200mm-diameter PVC pipe acting as a wave barrier.
E. The level switch set shall be operated with a stepped down voltage at 24V maximum. Stepped down
transformer shall be provided for each set of control probes and shall be installed inside centralized
control cubicles inside pump room.
F. Provide interface unit at each equipment, pump, NONC contacts, control panel for the levels to be
monitored by BMS (refer to drawing). BMS system to be added.
3. EXECUTION
1. Tank Disinfection
A. Disinfect all potable water tanks including concrete water tanks according to the following
method:
B. A solution of 200-mg/L available chlorine shall be applied directly to the surfaces of all parts of
the storage facility that would be in contact with water when the storage facility is full to the
overflow elevation.
C. The chorine solution may be applied with suitable brushes or spray equipment. The solution
shall thoroughly coat all surfaces to be treated, including the inlet and outlet piping, and shall
be applied to any separate drain piping such that it will have available chlorine of not less
than 10mg/L when filled with water. Overflow piping need not be disinfected.
D. The disinfected surfaces shall remain in contact with the strong chlorine solution for at least 30-
min. after which potable water shall be admitted, the drain piping shall be purged of the 10-
mg/L chlorinated water, and the storage facility shall then be filled to its overflow level.
Following this procedure, and subject to satisfactory bacteriological testing and acceptable
aesthetic quality, water may be delivered to the distribution system.
G: PUMPS AND EQUIPMENTS
1. WATER SUPPLY PUMPS
A. Pumps: Vertical multistage, centrifugal type of 2850 RPM speed. Materials of

construction shall be as follows:
1. Impellers…………………………. Stainless steel 304

2. Diffusers………………………….. Stainless steel 304
3. Shaft………………………………. Stainless steel 304
4. Stage pieces……………………… Stainless steel 304
5. Top plate………………………….. Stainless steel 304
6. Pump suction/discharge casing. Stainless steel 304
7. Pump seal ..................................................Mechanical bellow seal
8. Motor bracket……………………… Cast iron, treated with special anti
corrosive epoxy paint.
9. Pump mounting foot………………. Cast iron, treated with special anti
corrosive epoxy paint
1.1 EXECUTION
A. Completely align and level pumps, motors and bases. Where pumps and motor are shipped as a unit,
realign them in the field.
B. Grout base plates completely to provide a non-deflecting support.
C. Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendation.
D. Pump manufacturer or his represented to set packing, adjust impellers and check alignment prior
to start-up.
E. Pump shall be mounted according to vibration isolation section.
F. Repair all surface damaged during shipping and installation or prior to client’s acceptance of the building.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR HVAC WORK:
1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The air conditioning and ventilation system for the Hotel shall be achieved through variable
refrigerant flow system (VRF). VRF system shall be heat pump type, which shall also fulfill the
heating requirement in winters.
VRF system shall consist of various configurations of indoor units as mentioned above and
outdoor condensing units connected through insulated refrigerant piping. The outdoor units
shall be installed at the designated locations as indicated in the drawings. Each indoor unit
shall be provided with direct expansion cooling coil, and supply air blower.
Ductable type indoor unit shall be located above ceiling space. The unit shall be accessible
through a removable access panel in ceiling. Conditioned air shall be supplied through an
acoustically lined duct & return air shall be brought back through return air grille provided in the
suspended ceiling.
Outdoor unit selection is based on the principle of achieving maximum diversity. The Outdoor
unit shall consist of compressor, condenser and condenser fans. The electronic expansion
valve will continuously adjust the flow of refrigerant volume in response to load variation in
indoor unit. Each indoor unit shall be provided with remote controller for self- adjustment of
individual comfort requirement.
All public toilets shall be mechanical exhausted. This shall be connected to 2 Nos. common
exhaust fans each of 100% capacity with duty cycling control panel, installed on terrace.
The DX type Double skinned (for noise control) AHUs shall be provided for Reception,
Conference Hall, Meeting Room, Pre-function, Banquet kitchen and Staff Cafeteria. These
AHUs shall be fitted with return / exhaust air fan to remove foul smell from these areas, beyond
their usage time.
Supply air ducts shall be installed in ceiling spaces. Conditioned supply air shall be discharged
through supply air grilles and diffusers. Return air shall be taken back to the air handling unit
through false ceiling/return air duct.
TFA air handling units (DX Type) shall be provided on every guest floor for supplying treated
fresh air to each guest room and corridors. TFA Supply air ducts shall be located above the
false ceiling space in corridor. All TFA AHUs shall be provided with 8 row deep cooling coil for
maximum dehumidification.
Each guest room bay shall be provided with an independent indoor unit located above
suspended ceiling space in the entrance vestibule. The indoor unit shall be accessible through
a removable access panel in the vestibule ceiling. Conditioned air shall be supplied through
an acoustically lined duct & return air shall be brought back through return air grille provided
in the suspended ceiling over the vestibule.
Treated fresh air @ 50 CFM per room shall be provided and @ 60 CFM shall be exhausted
through toilet. TFA AHU shall be located on each floor and TFA supply air ducts shall be
installed in the false ceiling space in corridor.
Kitchens shall be provided with supply air and exhaust air system. The kitchen exhaust shall
be collected from the kitchen hoods and shall be let out to atmosphere. Kitchen hoods shall
be provided with U/V grease removal system (part of hood) Kitchen shall be maintained at a
Page 1
slight negative pressure to prevent spread of food smell to adjacent occupied areas. In
addition, working counters shall be provided with spot cooling through treated fresh air unit
and distributed through high velocity supply air nozzles/grilles.
All public toilets shall be air conditioned in addition to having mechanical exhaust system.
Exhaust air from guest room toilets shall be collected over WC and shower area, and
connected to vertical exhaust duct.
The fire escape staircase and lift shafts shall be provided with pressurization system,
consisting of fans installed on terrace and a vertical duct down takes. Guest corridors shall
be provided with smoke evacuation system.
In case of fire, ventilation exhaust @ 12 ACPH shall be picked up from affected guest corridor
and one floor above and from one floor below or any other combination that may be
programmed. Smoke evacuation fans shall be designed to evacuate smoke, simultaneously
from maximum three guest floors, in accordance with international safety codes.
Each lift machine room shall be provided with air conditioning through dedicated air-cooled
split units for controlled environment and to protect from dust, the electronic equipment
provided therein.
Thermal insulation shall be provided for all roofs exposed to sun, by the civil contractor. This
may consist of 50 mm thick extruded polystyrene laid on roof slab. Duct and pipe insulation
shall be with TF quality expanded polystyrene / glass wool / nitrite rubber which are all non-
combustible and fire retardant.
A. VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW UNITS
SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of
Variable Refrigerant Volume System conforming to these specifications and in accordance
with the requirements of Drawings and Schedule of quantities.
TYPE
Unit shall be air cooled, variable refrigerant volume air conditioner consisting of one outdoor
unit and multiple indoor units. Each indoor unit having capability to cool independently any
room as per its requirement.
It shall be possible to connect multiple indoor units on one refrigerant circuit as shown in the
drawings or as indicated in schedule of quantities. The indoor units on any circuit can be of
different type and also controlled individually. Following type of indoor units shall be connected
to the system:
Ceiling mounted ductable type
Compressor(s) installed in outdoor unit shall be equipped with inverter controller, and capable
of changing the rotating speed to follow variations in cooling requirement. Outdoor unit shall
be suitable for mix-match connection of all type of indoor units.
The refrigerant piping between indoor units and outdoor units shall be extended up to 100m
with maximum 50 m level difference (vertical) without any oil traps. Oil recovery system shall
be managed without disturbance to normal operation cycle of the system / compressor.
Both indoor unit and outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, tested and pre-charged with first
charge of refrigerant before delivery at site.
Page 2
OUT DOOR UNIT
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weather proof casing constructed from heavy
gauge mild steel panels with powder coated finish.
All outdoor units above 5 HP rating shall have minimum two number scroll compressors.
In case of outdoor units with multiple compressors, the operation shall not be disrupted with
failure of any compressor.
The noise level shall not be more than 60 dB (A) at normal operation measured horizontally
1m away and 1.5 m above ground level.
The outdoor unit shall be modular in design with possibility of future expansions.
The unit shall be provided with microprocessor control panel.
COMPRESSOR
The compressor shall be high efficiency scroll type and capable for capacity controlling. It shall
change the speed / refrigerant mass flow rate in accordance to the variation in cooling load
requirement.
The inverter if used shall be IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor) type for efficient and quiet
operation.
All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation and
indoor unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be sufficiently lubricated. Forced
lubrication may also be employed.
Oil heater shall be provided in the compressor casing.
HEAT EXCHANGER
The Heat Exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminum fins to form a cross fan coil and larger surface area.
The fins shall have anticorrosion treatment for Heat Exchanger Coil. The treatment shall be
suitable for areas of high pollution, moisture and salt laden air.
The casings, fans, motors etc. shall also be with anticorrosion treatment as a standard
features.
The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise level propeller
type fans arranged for vertical / horizontal discharge. Each fan shall have a safety guard.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
The refrigerant circuit shall include a liquid receiver /accumulator, liquid & gas shut off valves
and a solenoid valve. All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety
operation of the system.
SAFETY DEVICES
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the system.
Page 3
Following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit: high pressure switch, low pressure
switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current protection for inverter, and short
recycling guard timer.
PIPING
All connections of Refrigerant piping shall be in high grade Copper of Refrigeration quality
with Eddy Current Testing and material test Certificates.
All connections, tees, reducers etc. shall be standard make fittings.
Insulation of cold lines shall be carried out with approved make insulation sheets and tubes
of appropriate thickness so that condensation does not occur.
For individual piping, 50 / 100 mm wide Aluminum Tape shall be used at joints of Piping with
Bands for identification.
For outdoor piping, the finish shall be woven GRP Mat finished with colored epoxy paints to
withstand outside ambient conditions and UV Radiation.
OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long
refrigerant piping.
System shall be designed for proper oil return to compressor along with the distribution of oil
to individual compressor.
The refrigerant piping shall be extended upped 100 M with 50-M level difference without oil
traps.
INDOOR UNITS
Units shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and tested.
Units shall have DX coils with copper tubes and bonded aluminum fins for highly efficient
heat transfer.
Units shall have Centrifugal fans for adequate amount of Air circulation and low Noise.
Units shall have inlet filters, which are easily cleanable and replaceable.
All components of Units are easily accessible for connection, repairs and maintenance.
Units shall have very low noise.
All units shall be fitted with, Grills having auto swing feature for proper Air distribution.
All units shall be controlled by electronic Expansion Valves only.
All units mounted inside the ceiling shall have fans capable of sustaining duct connections,
and special filters if necessary.
Visible indoor units shall have wireless remotes. Price of the same shall be included in cost
Page 4
of unit by default.
Concealed indoor units shall have sensor mounted on supply air grilles / diffusers which can
be controlled with wireless remotes.
Anti-corrosion treatment for avoiding corrosion of coils.
All units shall have adequate insulation or Lining to avoid condensation.
HIGH WALL MOUNTED TYPE UNIT
The unit shall be Wall mounted type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan section and DX-coil
section. The housing of the unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The body shall be
light in weight and shall be possible to suspend from four corners.
Unit shall have a external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have Continuous
supply air grilles on sides and return air grille at top. Each unit shall have high liftdrain pump.
FLOOR STANDING TYPE INDOOR UNIT:
Unit shall be Floor standing type. The unit shall include pre filter, fan section & DX-coil section.
The housing of the unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The body shall be light in
weight.
Unit shall have a external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have Continuous
supply air grilles on sides and return air grille at top. Each unit shall have high lift drain pump.
The unit shall have high static fan for ductable arrangement.
CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER (OPTION IF SPECIFIED IN BOQ) :
A multi-functional centralized controller (central remote controller) shall be supplied as an

optional accessory.
The controller shall be able to control up to min. 64 zones of 64 groups (each group consisting
of max. 16 units) or 128 nos. of indoor units with the following functions.
Temperature setting for each zone, or group, or indoor unit.
On/Off as a zone or individual unit.
Indication of operating condition.
Select ON of all operation modes for each zone.
The controller shall have wide screen liquid crystal display and shall be wired by a non polar
2 wire transmission cable to a distance of 1000m away from the indoor unit.
The controller shall be integrated to BAS system thru software for monitoring & controlling of
all above parameters including start/ stop of each indoor / outdoor unit. All necessaryinterface
cards / units should be supplied as a part of the system to integrate to the BAS Software.
UNIFIED ON/OFF CONTROLLER (OPTIONAL, IF SPECIFIED IN BOQ) :
Unified ON / OFF controller shall be supplied as an optional accessory.
Page 5
The controller shall be able to control minimum 2 groups (each group containing maximum
16 indoor units) or 128 nos. of indoor units with the following functions.
On / Off as a zone or individual unit.

Indication of operation condition of each group.
Select one of 4 operation modes.
The controller shall be wired by a non-polar 2 wire transmission cable to distance of 1 km away
from indoor unit.
The controller shall be integrated to BAS system thru software for monitoring & controlling of
all above parameters including start/ stop of each indoor / outdoor unit. All necessaryinterface
cards / units should be supplied as a part of the system to integrate to the BAS Software.
CONDENSATE:
PVC pipes & fittings shall be used condensate from Evaporator Unit to drain point. The joints
shall be properly sealed so that there is no water leakage. U-trap shall be provided at the end.
Additional insulation drain tray shall be provided below the Evaporator Unit, if required.
MOUNTING:
All indoor units shall be mounted with brackets, hangers etc. with proper size anchor
Fasteners.
B. AIR HANDLING UNITS / TREATED FRESH AIR UNITS
SCOPE
This section includes double skin air handling units, conforming to these Specifications and
in accordance with Schedule of Quantities and approved shop drawings. Air handling units
shall be designed for lowest operating noise level.
All air handling units shall be draw-thru type, of specified capacities, comprising of filter
section, coil section, fan section and mixing box (where the return air and fresh air are ducted).
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure feasibility of the AHU’s supplied by the
manufacturer as per site conditions. The arrangement of AHU (i.e. side/top throw, direction of
coil connections, access panel etc.) shall be as per site conditions and in accordance with
interior layouts.
The AHU’s shall comprise of double skin panels. The outer panel shall be 0.8 mm thick
galvanized pre-plasticized sheet and inner panel shall be 0.8 mm plain G.I. Sheet with
pressure injected PU foam insulation of density 40 kg/cum.
The base for mounting the framework shall be aluminum / galvanized steel. The panels shall
be sealed to the framework by heavy duty Ò’ ring gaskets. All air handling units shall have
detachable panels. The material for hinges shall be aluminum and for screws shall be stainless
steel. Larger units if supplied in sections shall be assembled at site. The units assembled at
site shall be finished to the approved quality.
All Treated Fresh Air AHU’s and AHU’s with mixing box shall be provided with thermal break
profile as per the requirement of schedule of quantities.
Condensate drain pan shall be fabricated from 18 gauge stainless steel sheet. Drain pan shall
be isolated from bottom panel by 25 mm heavy duty TF expanded polystyrene / urethane
foam.
Page 6
Double skin access door shall be provided with each air handling unit to enable easy access
to the fan section and also to the filter section.
FAN & MOTOR
AHU Fans shall be centrifugal type, both statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be
backward curved plenum/plug fan with aerofoil design blades for Floor Mounted /Ceiling
Suspended units so as to give minimum efficiency of 70% for given duty condition along with
VFD to regulate air and for energy saving purpose. Entire fan assembly shall be made of
galvanized steel sheet/ aluminum. Fan shaft shall be made of grounded C40 carbon steel and
supported in self-aligning Plummer block. All AHU fan motors shall be suitable for 415±10%
volts, 50 Hz, three phase AC supply with speed limited to 1450 RPM. Motors shall be TEFC
with class `F’ insulation. Motors shall be installed on slide rails. Motors shall be selected to
ensure quiet and vibration free operation. All AHU fan motors shall be provided with IP-55
protection. AHU motor(s) shall be IE3 premium efficient/ inverter-duty type designed as per IS
12615:2011 standard
COOLING COILS
Cooling coils shall be minimum 12.5 mm dia tubes, minimum 0.5 mm thick with sine
wave aluminum fins firmly bonded to copper tubes assembled in zinc coated steel frame.
Face and surface areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and
such that the air velocity across the coil shall not exceed 150 meters per minute. The coil
shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall have copper header
with chilled water supply & return connections protruding out of AHU casing by minimum
150mm and fitted with dielectric coupling for connection with MS pipes. Each coil shall be
factory-tested at 21 kg per sq. m air pressure under water. Tube shall be hydraulically
/ mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Fin spacing shall
be 4 - 5 fins per cm. Water pressure drop in coil shall not exceed 10 PSIG.
Number of rows of cooling coils for various areas shall be as follows:
I Areas with high SHF - 4 rows

II Public areas – minimum 6 rows
III Treated Fresh Air AHU’s – 8 rows
FILTERS
The filter section of the AHU shall be factory assembled, designed to allow easy removal
and placing of filters. The filter section shall contain anodized aluminum frame synthetic
washable filters having minimum 90% efficiency down to 10 microns. The filter media shall
be supported with HDP mesh on one side and aluminum mesh on other side. Filter banks shall
be easily accessible and designed for easy withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter
framework shall be fully sealed and constructed from aluminum alloy. A manual air vent at
upper level and drain plug in the bottom of the coil shall be provided.
INSTALLATION
All AHU’s shall be installed on a concrete foundation. Cushy foot mounts shall be provided for
vibration isolation/ Seismic vibration isolators shall be provided. Site assembled units shall
have prior approval from Engieer/Owner
Page 7
C. FANS
This section includes centrifugal and axial fans, in line, propeller and roof extract units,
conforming to following Specifications and in accordance with Schedule of Quantities and
approved shop drawings.
1. CENTRIFUGAL FAN
Centrifugal fan shall be DWDI / SWSI Class I construction arrangement 3 (i.e. bearings on
both the sides) for DWDI fans complete with access door, squirrel-cage induction motor, V-
belt drive, belt guard and vibration isolators, direction of discharge / rotation, and motor
position shall be as per the Approved shop drawings. Centrifugal fans shall be tested and
rated in accordance with AMCA standards and bear their certified rated program seal.
a. Housing shall be constructed of 14 gauge sheet steel welded construction. It shall be

rigidly reinforced and supported by structural angles. Split casing shall be provided
on larger sizes of fans, however neoprene / asbestos packing should be provided
throughout split joints to make it air-tight.
18 gauge galvanized wire mesh inlet guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided on

both inlets. Housing shall be provided with standard cleanout door with handles and
neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on the housing extended
inlet collars for duct connections.
b. Fan Wheel shall be backward-curved non-over loading type. Fan wheel and housing
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. For fans up to 450 mm dia, fan outlet
velocity shall not exceed 550 meter/minute and maximum fan speed shall not exceed
1450 rpm. For fans above 450 mm dia, the outlet velocity shall be within 700
meter/minute and maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1000 RPM. High static
pressure fan speed shall be as per manufacturer.
c. Shaft shall be constructed of SS, turned, ground and polished.
d. Bearings: shall be of the sleeve / ball-bearing type mounted directly on the fan housing.
Bearings shall be designed especially for quiet operation and shall be of the self-
aligning, oil / grease pack pillow block type. Minimum life average shall be 100,000
operating hours.
e. Motor : Fan motor shall be energy efficient and suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles,
3 phase AC power supply, squirrel-cage, totally enclosed, fan-cooled motor,
provided with class F insulation, and of approved make. Motor name plate
horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 10%. Motor shall be
designed especially for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm.
The fan and motor combination selected for the particular required performance shall
be of the most efficient (smallest horse power), so that sound level is lowest.
f. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable motor sheave and a
standard belt guard. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type.
g. Vibration Isolation : MS base shall be provided for both fan and motor, built as an
integral part, and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through
Page 8
resistoflex vibration isolators. The concrete foundation shall be at least 15 cm above
the finished floor level, or as shown in approved shop drawings.
2. AXIAL FLOW FAN
Fan shall be complete with motor, motor mount, belt driven (or direct driven) and vibration
isolation type, suspension arrangement as per approved shop drawings.
Axial Fans wherever to be used should seek Hyatt’s approval.
a. Casing: shall be constructed of heavy gage sheet steel. Fan casing, motor mount and
straightening vane shall be of welded steel construction. Motor mounting plate shall
be minimum 15 mm thick and machined to receive motor flange.
An inspection door with handle and neoprene gasket shall be provided. Casing shall
have flanged connection on both ends for ducted applications. Support brackets for
ceiling suspension shall be welded to the casing for connection to hanger bolts.
Straightening vanes shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum efficiency by
converting velocity pressure to static pressure potential and minimizing turbulence.
Casing shall be bonderized, primed and finish coated with enamel paint.
b. Rotor: hub and blades shall be cast aluminum or cast steel construction. Blades shall
be die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum efficiency and shall vary in twist and width
from hub to tip to effect equal air distribution along the blade length. Fan blades
mounting on the hub shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Extended grease
leads for external lubrication shall be provided. The fan pitch control may be manually
readjusted at site upon installation, for obtaining actual air flow values, as specified
and quoted.
c. Motor: shall be energy efficient squirrel-cage, totally-enclosed, fan cooled, standard

frame, constant speed, continuous duty, single winding, suitable for 415±10% volts,
50 cycles, 3 phase AC power supply, provided with class `F’ insulation. Motor shall be
specially designed for quiet operation. The speed of the fans shall not exceed 1000
RPM for fans with impeller diameter above 450 mm, and 1440 RPM for fans with
impeller diameter 450 mm and less. For lowest sound level,fan shall be selected for
maximum efficiency or minimum horsepower. Motor conduit box shall be mounted on
exterior of fan casing, and lead wires from the motor to the conduit box shall be
protected from the air stream by enclosing in a flexible metal conduit. Fan motor(s)
shall be IE3 premium efficient/ inverter-duty type designed as per IS 12615:2011
Standard
d. Drive: to fan shall be provided through belt drive with adjustable motor sheave and
standard sheet steel belt guard with vented front for heat dissipation. Belts shall be of
oil-resistant type.
e. Vibration Isolation: The assembly of fan and motor shall be suspended from the slab
by vibration isolation suspension of rubber-in-shear type.
f. Accessories: The following accessories shall be provided with all fans :I
Outlet cone for static pressure regain.

ii. Inlet cone.
Fan silencers may be provided where specifically called for in Schedule of Quantities.
Fans shall be factory assembled and shipped with all accessories factory-mounted.
Page 9
3. DUCTLESS VENTILATION FANS
Ductless Jet fans shall be supplied as completely assembled having characteristics as of high
performance ventilation with small air volume. Each unit shall consist of fans havinginlet cones
of GSS construction, protective screen, two silencers, terminal box and mounting arms/
brackets.
fans shall be axial flow type, both statically and dynamically balanced. The fans shall have
adjustable aluminum impeller or shall be fully welded. The complete fan assembly with its
casing, impeller, motor and silencer shall be sourced from single manufacturer and certified
as tested for smoke extraction application (suitable for 300o C for 2 hours).
Fan casing shall be GSS construction with flanges at both the ends and the protection
guards at the inlet side.
Silencers shall be GSS construction with minimum length of 900 mm.
If asked for in the BOQ, the system shall be complete with CO sensors, and required panels,
wiring control wiring and earthing. At the time of low parking density, based on low CO level,
the ventilation fans shall be automatically turned off.
Contractor to submit CFD report from manufacturer and factory tested.
4. PROPELLER FAN
Propeller fan shall be direct-driven, three or four blade type, mounted on a steel mounting
plate with orifice ring.
a. Mounting Plate shall be of steel construction, square with streamlined venturi inlet
(reversed for supply applications) coated with baked enamel paint. Mounting plate
shall be of standard size, constructed of 12 to16 gauge sheet steel depending upon
the fan size. Orifice ring shall be correctly formed by spinning or stamping to provide
easy passage of air without turbulence and to direct the air stream.
b. Fan Blades shall be constructed of aluminum or steel. Fan hub shall be of heavy
welded steel construction with blades bolted to the hub. Fan blades and hub assembly
shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the manufacturer’s works.
c. Shaft shall be of steel, accurately ground and shall be of ample size for the load
transmitted and shall not pass through first critical speed thru the full range of specified
fan speeds.
d. Motor shall be standard (easily replaceable) permanent split capacitor or shaded pole
for small sizes, totally enclosed with pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, designed
for quiet operation with a maximum speed of 1000 rpm for fans 60 cm diaor larger
and 1440 rpm for fans 45 cm dia and smaller. Motors for larger fans shall be
suitable for 415±6% volts, 50 cycles 3 phase power supply, and for smaller fans
shall be suitable for 220 ± 6% volts, 50 cycles single phase power supply. Motors shall
be suitable for either horizontal or vertical service as indicated on Drawings and
in Schedule of Quantities.
e. Accessories : The following accessories shall be provided with propeller fans :
i. Wire guard on inlet side and bird screen at the outlet.

ii. Fixed or gravity louvers built into a steel frame at the outlet.
iii. Regulator for controlling fan speed for single phase fan motor.
Page 10
iv. Single phase preventers for 3 phase fans.
5. ROOF MOUNTED FAN
Roof mounted fan shall be propeller type or centrifugal fans, direct driven or belt driven
as shown on drawing and in Schedule of Quantities, complete with motor drive, and housing
with weather-proof cowl.
a. Housing: shall be constructed of 16 gage steel sheet. The housing shall have an
adjustable flange to facilitate installation and shall be especially adapted to receive
fan, motor, and drive. The housing shall have a low silhouette. For belt driven units,
motor shall be installed in ventilated water proof housing outside the air stream.
The discharge cowl shall be hinged along one edge for easy access to motor and
drive, for inspection and maintenance. The entire assembly shall be weatherproof
and raised from the roof terrace sufficiently to prevent downflow of rain
water accumulated on the terrace. 18 gage galvanized steel mesh bird screen shall
be provided on all discharge cowls around the outlet area.
b. Fans: shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal wheel or propeller type as required,

designed for maximum efficiency, minimum turbulence and quiet operation. Fan shall
be statically and dynamically balanced.
c. Motor: shall be shaded pole, of split capacitor type with lubricated sleeve or ball
bearings, designed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be designed for vertical
mounting. Motor name-plate horse-power shall be such that the motor shall not be
overloaded in the entire range of rated speed. Motor and fan assembly shallbe
easily removable. Motor power supply characteristic and maximum speed shall be as
specified for propeller fans and as indicated in the Schedule of Quantities. Fanmotor(s)
shall be IE3 premium efficient/ inverter-duty type designed as per IS 12615:2011
Standard
d. Fan Bearing: shall be heavy duty, self aligning sleeve/ball bearings designed for thrust
load and sealed for grease retention.
e. Back-draft Damper: Where called for in the Schedule of Quantities, roof-mounted fan
shall be equipped with a rattle-free back-draft damper to prevent air from re- entering
the fan when fan is not in operation, thus sealing completely in closed position. Damper
shall be chatter-proof under all conditions.
f. Vibration Isolation: The motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from the base with
vibration isolators.
6. PERFORMANCE DATA
All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity ratings, power
consumption, with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted and verified at the
time of testing and commissioning of the installation.
7. TESTING
Capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured air flow capacities shall
conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed
from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.
Page 11
D. KITCHEN SCRUBBER
1.0 DRY TYPE KITCHEN SCRUBBER
Electrostatic precipitation technology based dry type air cleaner to remove oil, smoke and
fumes from the kitchen exhaust air.
1.1 Enclosure/Housing:
Enclosure shall be made of 16 gauge galvanized sheet coated with high bake epoxy powder
access door shall be provided to pull out scrubber sections for periodic maintenance /
cleaning. It shall be provided with washable type aluminium mesh pre and post filters.
1.2 Ionizer:
Stainless steel spiked ionizers shall be provided to create high voltage DC field.
1.3 Collector plate:
Aluminium collector plates shall be provided, which shall be alternatively charged positive and
negative with large connecting area with 14” deep cell, to work as magnet for charged smoke
and toilet particles. Average efficiency of 90-95% in single pass shall be achieved as per
ASHRAE test method.
Electrostatic Precipitator shall be able to change particles from 0.01 micron to 10 micron
through solid state power supply.
Collector cell should be of permanent type and slide out facility for easy removal of cleaning.
1.4 Power Supply:
Power supplies shall be 100% solid state UL listed and operate on 230 VAC, 50 Hz, 1 Phase
input and provide a dual high voltage output of (+) 12 to 13 KVDC for the ionizer and (+) 6.0
to 6.5 KVDC for the collector. Module of capacity above 3000 CFM shall be equipped with
Pulse width modulating.
(PWM) to maintain the specified collection efficiency by maintaining a constant charge in the
event of Low/High voltage from source thus ensuring that the unit functionality is not affected
with these voltage fluctuations. Power consumption should not be more than 50 watts per cell.
1.5 Miscellaneous:
System should be fitted with interlock switch for safety. The system shall be connected to a
fan section to achieve air flow of 500 FPM across the air cleaner and should be interlocked
with the fan to prevent dry run of the units.
E. OZONE DEODORIZATION SYSTEM FOR STP EXHAUST
Material of construction of all parts shall be Stainless Steel. It shall comprise individual
compartments for Ozone Generator, Fan, and Electrical / Instrumentation Components.Ozone
Generator Compartment shall comprise set of multi plate, double sided corona discharge
plates operating at high voltage, to produce adequate quantity of ozone at medium
concentration. The system shall not require any replacement consumable except airfilter, and
Page 12
maintenance shall be minimum or near zero subject to timely replacement ofintake air
filter to the unit. Feed air shall be plant room air. Use of annular tube type corona with
compressed air as feed gas is not permissible, so as to prevent deposition of nitrogen oxides
on the corona surface. To minimize maintenance cost, labor and time, and operational
consumable, use of oxygen feed system is not permissible. The ozone generating corona and
ozone wetted parts shall be confined in a fully welded stainless steel enclosure to prevent
ozone leaks. It shall be provided with openable glass or plexi glass panel for inspection of
corona plates while the equipment is in operation. The outer enclosure of the equipment shall
be provided with lockable doors to provide easy access to the glass inspection panel. The
corona chamber shall not have any trace of exhaust air whileit starts and operates. Necessary
ROHS compliant and UL listed electrical relay shall be provided to ensure this safety feature.
The electrical compartment shall be isolated from all other compartments, and rated to NEMA
4X (IP 66). The transformer shall be electrical induction type, UL listed. It shall not damage,
burn, or elevate in temperature even if short circuit occurs. Shall revert to normal operation
upon removal of short circuit. The transformer shall be fully encapsulated and housed in
metallic enclosure for safety against moisture and water impregnation. Passage of high
voltage conductors across metallic enclosure shall be through UL listed liquid tight
connectors.The equipment shall be UL listed. Where used todeodorize Kitchen Exhaust
Air, the equipment shall be compliant to NFPA 96, subject to field provided fire damper
at exit of the equipment. High voltage cable shall be silicon insulated, ozone and corona
resistant, rated for 20 KV, and UL listed with UL flame test rating.
Following accessories shall be provided in the electrical compartment;
a. UL listed Manual Regulator to modulate production of ozone.
b. UL listed Hour Meter housed in NEMA 4 enclosure for timely maintenance.
c. Air Pressure Manometer for measurement of air pressure in fan chamber.
d. UL listed switches such as DPST Main On Off Switch, Fan On Off Switch, Indicating
Lamps, and Terminal Block.
Fan chamber shall comprise backward curved non overloading fan driven by thermal
protected, UL listed TEFC motor to inject ozonized air into exhaust air stream. External static
pressure of the fan shall be rated for injection into airstreams from 0.25” WG (60 Pa) upto 2”
WG (500 Pa). Air intake shall be through grille with filter track and UL listed MERV 11 filter.
Contact Chamber of stainless steel construction of adequate volume shall be field or
manufacturer provided for design contact volume. .As optional item and if called for, Ozone
Monitor shall be provided to display ozone concentration in exhaust air to OSHA mandated
level. It shall comprise Relay potential free dry contact rated for 250 V, 10 Amps AC/DC. The
monitor shall display alarm condition and relay condition. It shall have 0 to 10 VDC analog
output for BMS interface. The monitor shall be UL listed to UL 867A. The system shall be rated
for operation on 110 / 120 V (220 / 240 V)1 Ph, 50 / 60 Hz (Please specify). Automatic
Modulation (Option if specified)
Regulation for automatic modulation of ozone generator;
a. A VOC Sensor (or H2S Sensor for Sewage / Waste Water Treatment Plants) shall be
shipped for field installation to detect level of VOC (or H2S) in the air exhausted from
contact chamber. It shall deliver 0 to 10 VDC Analog Signal to Auto Controller to modulate
production of ozone in relation to level of VOC (or H2S) in the exhaust air (option)
b. Change over switch for Auto/Manual Operation
Page 13
F. AIR DISTRIBUTION
1. SCOPE
This section includes supply, fabrication, installation and testing of all galvanized sheet metal
/aluminum ducts, fire cum smoke dampers, grilles and diffusers as per specifications laid
below and in line with the schedule of quantities..
2. GOVERNING STANDARDS
The construction, erection, testing and performance of the ducting system shall conform to the
ASHRAE 90.1 (Latest Edition) & SMACNA for gauge, reinforcing support, insulation and air
tightness.
Duct velocities:
1. Fan outlet: 6.5-10m/s
2. Main duct:5-6.5m/s
3. Branch duct:3-4.5m/s
4. Risers:3-3.5m/s
5. Guest room risers:3-4.5m/s
3. MATERIAL FOR FABRICATION

Galvanizing shall be Class VII – light coating of zinc, nominal 180gm/sq.m surface area and
Lock Forming Quality prime material along with mill test certificates. In addition, if deemed
necessary, samples of raw material, selected at random by owner’s site representative shall
be subject to approval and tested for thickness and zinc coating at contractor's expense.
4. DUCT CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
All transverse duct connectors (flanges/cleats) and accessories/related hardware such as

support systems shall be zinc-coated (galvanized).
5. FABRICATION STANDARDS & EQUIPMENT
All ductwork including straight sections, tapers, elbows, branches, show pieces, collars,
terminal boxes and other transformation pieces must be factory-fabricated conforming to
ASHRAE 90.1 (latest edition) /SMACNA standards. Equivalency will require fabrication by
utilizing the following machines and processes to provide the requisite quality of ducts and
speed of supply:
a. Coil lines to ensure location of longitudinal seams at corners/folded edges only to
obtain the required duct rigidity and low leakage characteristics. Longitudinal seams
shall not be permitted along any face side of the duct.
b. All ducts, transformation pieces and fittings to be made on CNC profile cutters for
required accuracy of dimensions, location and dimensions of notches at the folding
lines.
c. All edges to be machine treated using lock formers, flangers and roller for turning up
edges.
d. Sealant dispensing equipment for applying built-in sealant in Pittsburgh lock where
sealing of longitudinal joints are specified.
Page 14
6. SELECTION OF GALVANIZED GAUGE AND TRANSVERSE CONNECTORS
Duct Construction shall be in compliance with 1” (250 Pa) w.g./2” (500 Pa) w.g. static norms
depending upon application, as per SMACNA.
All transverse connectors shall be 4 bolt slip – on flanges system with built-in sealant.
The specific class of transverse connector and duct gauge for a given duct dimensions will
be as per Table below for the suitable pressure class.
Ducts with external SP up to 250 Pa
Rectangular External Pressure up to 250 Pa

Ducts G. S. Duct Section Length 1.2 m
Duct Dimension Gage Joint Bracing
Spacing
1–1000 mm 26 4 Bolt Transverse Duct Nil
Connector-E (TDC) with
built in sealant
1001 – 1500 24 4 Bolt TDC –E Nil
mm
1501 – 1800 22 4 Bolt TDC-H Nil
mm
1801 – 2100 20 4 Bolt TDC- H Nil
mm
2101 – 2700 18 4 Bolt TDC- J Nil
mm
For Round Ducts
Duct Up to 50 mm Wg 51 – 250 mm Wg Up to 50 mm Wg
diameter static pressure (+ve) static pressure (+ve) static pressure (-ve)
mm Spiral Longitudinal Spiral Longitudinal Spiral Longitudinal
seam seam seam seam seam seam
gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge
Up to 650 26 24 24 22 24 22
651-900 24 22 22 20 22 20
901 – 1250 22 20 20 20 20 18
7. DUCT CONSTRUCTION
a. The fabricated duct dimensions shall be as per approved shop drawings and all
connecting sections shall be dimensionally matched to so as not to have any gaps. All
sheet metal joints and seams in SAD to be sealed with fire resistant duct sealant&
be UL listed.
b. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractor for beams,
pipes, or other obstructions in the building, whether or not the same are shown on
Page 15
the drawings. Where necessary to avoid beams or other structural work, plumbing or
other pipes, and conduits, the ducts shall be transformed, divided or curved to one
side (the required area being maintained) all as per the site requirements.
c. Dimensional Tolerances: All fabricated dimensions will be within + 1.0mm of specified

dimension. To obtain required perpendicularity, permissible diagonal tolerances shall
be + 1.0 mm per metre.
i. Each duct piece shall be identified by color coded sticker which showsspecific
part numbers, job name, drawing number, duct sizes and gauge.
ii. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside. Longitudinal seams shall
be airtight and at corners only, which shall be either Pittsburgh or Snap Button
Punch as per SMACNA practice, to ensure air tightness.
iii. Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual (between 1:4
and 1:7). Turning vanes or air splitters shall be installed in all bends and duct
collars designed to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable
turbulence.
iv. Self adhesive Neoprene rubber or UV resistant PVC foam lining of 5 mm

nominal thickness shall be used between duct flanges and between duct
supports for all duct installations.
v. Plenums shall be shop/factory fabricated panel type and assembled at site.
vi. The deflection of transverse joints should be within specified limit for
rectangular duct deflection as given in SMACNA. Page no. 7.6.
Reinforcement of ducts shall be achieved by either cross breaking or straight beading

depending on length of ducts As per SMACNA page no.1.74,fig.1-8
8. SUPPORT SYSTEM
A completely galvanized system consisting of fully threaded rods, slotted angles or double-L
bottom brackets (made out of 3.0 mm M.S. sheet) nuts, washers and anchor bolts, generally
conforming to SMACNA standards should be used.
As an alternative, slotted galvanized brackets attached to the top two bolts system may also
be used as appropriate for the site condition.
To provide the required thermal break effect, Neoprene or equivalent material of suitable
thickness shall be used between duct supports and duct profiles in all supply air ducts not
enclosed by return air plenums.
9. INSTALLATION PRACTICE
All ducts shall be installed strictly as per approved shop drawings and in close coordination
with other services in the ceiling space.
i. The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may berequired
to carry out the intent of these specifications and drawings. The work shall meet with
the approval of Owner’s site representative in all its parts and details.
ii. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractor for beams,
pipes, or other obstructions in the building whether or not the same are shown on the
drawings. Where there is interference/fouling with other beams, structural work,
Page 16
plumbing and conduits, the ducts shall be suitably modified as per actual site
conditions.
iii. Ducting over false ceilings shall be supported from the slab above, or from beams. In
no case shall any duct be supported from false ceilings hangers or be permitted to rest
on false ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time
so as not to delay other contractor’s work in the building.
iv. All duct work shall be independently supported from building construction. All
horizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with
trapeze hangers formed of galvanized steel rods and galvanized steel angle/channel
under ducts at no greater than 2 meter centre. All vertical duct work shall be supported
by structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized
steel insert plates left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a
hole for passing the hanger rods shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger formed
of galvanized steel rods and angles/ channels shall be hung through these cleats.
Wherever use of metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash
/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger
rods shall then hang through the cleats.
v. Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25mm
thick appropriate insulation around the duct and totally covered with firebarrier
mortar for complete sealing.
vi. All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever
ductwork is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause
vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be provided with a flexible connection, located at the
unit discharge.
vii. All guest bath rooms shall be acoustically treated sheet metal.
viii. All sheet metal jointsand seams in supply air duct shall be sealed with fire resistant
duct sealants and to be UL listed.
10. DOCUMENTATION & MEASUREMENT FOR DUCTING
All ducts fabricated and installed should be accompanied and supported by following
documentation:
1. Bill of material/Packing list for every duct section supplied. Measurement

sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and external surface
area along with summary of external surface area of duct gauge- wise.
Each and every duct piece to have a tag number, which should correspond to the serial
number, assigned to it in the measurement sheet. The above system will ensure speed
and proper site measurement and verification.
Duct measurements shall be taken before application of the insulation. The external
surface area shall be calculated by measuring the perimeter comprising overall width
and depth, including the corner joints, in the center of each duct section, multiplying
with the overall length from flange face to flange face of each duct section and adding
up areas of all duct sections. Plenums shall also be measured in a similar manner.
For tapered rectangular ducts, the average width and depth shall be considered for
perimeter, whereas for tapered circular ducts, the diameter of the section midway
Page 17
between large and small diameter shall be adopted, the length of tapered duct section
shall be the centerline distance between the flanges of the duct section.
For special pieces like bends, tees, reducers, branches and collars, mode of
measurement shall be identical to that described above using the length along the
centerline.
2. Measurement sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and
external surface area along with summary of external surface area of duct gauge-
wise.
3. All duct pieces to have a part number, which should correspond to the serial number,
assigned to it in the measurement sheet. The above system will ensure speedy and
proper site measurement, verification and approvals.
4. The quoted unit rate for external surface of ducts shall include all wastage allowances,
flanges and gaskets for joints, nuts and bolts, hangers and angles with double nuts for
supports, rubber strip 5mm thick between duct and support, vibration isolator
suspension where specified or required, inspection chamber/access panel, splitter
damper with quadrant and lever for position indication, turning vanes, straightening
vanes, and all other accessories required to complete the duct installation as per the
specifications. These accessories shall NOT be separately measured nor paid for.
11. TESTING
After duct installation, a part of duct section may be selected at random and tested for
leakage. The procedure for leak testing should be followed as per SMACNA- “HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual” (First Edition).
12. DAMPERS
Dampers: All duct dampers shall be opposed blade louver dampers of robust 16 G GSS
construction and tight fitting. The design, method of handling and control shall be suitable for
the location and service required. All supply air terminals should have equalizing device.
Dampers shall be provided with suitable links levers and quadrants as required for their proper
operation. Control or setting device shall be made robust, easily operable and accessible
through suitable access door in the duct. Every damper shall have an indicating device clearly
showing the damper position at all times.
Dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return air duct connection, whether
or not indicated on the Drawings, for the proper volume control and balancing of the air
distribution system.
13. MOTORISED FIRE DAMPERS - SMOKE & FIRE DAMPER
Fire Dampers shall be installed in the openings / passage formed by Supply and Return air
ducts when they pass through AHU room walls as well as when passing through all floors as
shown in the drawing.
Fire Dampers shall be motor operated with at least 120 minutes fire rating as per UL 555-
1995.
Fire Dampers shall be multi leaf type. The blades & outer frame shall be made of 16G
galvanized steel sheets. Fire damper assembly shall be factory fitted in a sleeve made of 18
Page 18
G galvanized steel sheets of minimum 400 mm long. The blades shall be pivoted on both sides
using chrome plated spindles in self lubricated bronze bushes. Metallic compression seal shall
be provided on both ends to prevent smoke leakage. Stop seals shall be providedon Top &
bottom. Dual side linkage shall be provided for better structural stability. The construction of
the fire damper shall allow maximum free area to reduce pressure drop & noise in the air
passage.
For wall mounted fire dampers retaining angles shall be supplied & installed by HVAC
contractor as per established installation procedure. Whereas the Fire damper is also to be
used for Smoke management (smoke & fire damper) the same shall be as per UL 555S –
Class I.
Every motorized fire damper / smoke & fire damper shall be tested for in the factory and will
be certified by the manufacturer in form of the test certificate. Fire damper shall also be
supplied with spring locked fusible link rated for 720C (UL stamped) to close fire damper in
event of rise in duct temperature.
For fire dampers / smoke fire dampers of size higher than one approved by certifying agency
the damper shall be supplied in multiple units of size not exceeding the tested damper by
CBRI. All the multiple units shall be housed in a common factory fitted sleeve.
14. ACTUATORS
The actuator used shall be maintenance free direct coupled spring return type suitable to work
on 24 V electric supply. The torque rating of the actuator shall exceed at least by 15% over
torque required to open / close the damper. The selection of actuator size shall be the
responsibility of the manufacture of the fire damper. Spring return time shall be 20 secondsor
less at ambient temperature other features of the damper actuator shall be as under.
1. It shall have tamper proof housing with IP-54 protection rating.

2. Shall have mechanical integrity of at least one hour at 9000C.
3. It shall be capable to withstand temperature of 75o C for 24 Hrs.
4. Shall have electronic over load or digital sensing circuit to prevent damage to actuator.
5. Should be capable of changing direction of rotation by changing mounting orientation.
6. Shall have manual over ride facility
15. CONTROL PANEL
The Control Panel shall be supplied by damper manufacturer fitted on damper compatible
with damper actuators. The control panel shall have at least following features.
1. Power on indicating lamps with 230 V / 24 V Transformer.

2. Damper close & open indication
3. Reset push button
4. Push button for manual running of actuator for periodic inspection
5. Auxiliary contacts 24V & 230 V
6. Contact points to receive signal from smoke defector / fire alarm panel
The control panel shall receive 230 V A/C supply & interconnecting wiring between control
panel & actuator shall be done using fireproof cables.
Access door will be provided in the duct before each fire damper.
Page 19
Note
The actuator used shall be maintenance free direct coupled spring return type suitable to
work on 24 V electric supply. Other features of the damper actuator shall be as per
specification.
The control panel shall have at least following features:
Power on indicating lamps with 230 V / 24 V Transformer.
Damper close & open indication.
Reset push button.
Push button for manual running of actuator for periodic inspection.
Auxiliary contacts 24V & 230 V.
24 VDC, 2 Amp, Potiential free contact points to receive signal from detector / fire alarm
system.
The control panel shall receive 230 V A/C supply from HVAC Starter panel & interconnecting
wiring between control panel & actuator shall be done using fire survival cables. Necessary
wiring from fire alarm panel up the control panel shall be provided by the fire alarm vendor &
further from Control panel to actuator shall be provided by air
conditioning contractor.
16. AIR REGISTER
The scope of this section includes supplying, installation, testing, balancing and commissioning
of various air distribution products as specified here under. All air distribution products shall
have guaranteed performance rating as regards to air quantity, throw, andnoise level and
pressure drop etc. Contractor shall provide selection curves at the time of supply.
17. SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS:
Supply and return air registers and ceiling terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum section
as specified in BOQ. The registers/terminals shall be either anodized or powdercoated in
finish as given in BOQ. Supply air registers/terminals shall be provided with screw operated
opposed blade volume control device of extruded aluminum in mill finish. Theregisters shall be
suitable for fixing arrangement concealed or visible screw as approved by architect/consultant.
All registers shall be selected as per selection curves and in consultation with
architect/consultant. All registers shall have soft continuous rubber/ foam gasket between the
periphery of the registers/terminals and the surface on which it has to be mounted.
18. LINEAR REGISTERS:
Linear continuous supply or return air register shall be extruded aluminum construction with
fixed horizontal bars at 0o or 15o inclination with one way or two way deflection and flanges on
both sides. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall be minimum 5 mm in front and the flange
shall be 20 mm wide with round edges. The register shall be suitable for concealed fixing and
horizontal bars of the register shall be mechanically crimped from the back to hold them.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in mill finish shall be provided in
S.A. duct collars.
19. LINEAR REGISTER:
Linear continuous air register shall be of extruded aluminum construction with fixed horizontal
bars at 0o or 15o inclination with one way or two way deflection and border on both sides as
approved by the architect/consultant. The thickness of fixed bar shall be 6 mm from front with
visible border of 5 mm width.
Page 20
The register core shall have removable arrangement with reinforcing channel mounted in the
frame assembly to give register robust design.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black mat finish shall be provided
in S.A. duct collars.
20. RECTANGULAR FIXED BAR REGISTER.
Supply/Return air all side flange air register shall be extruded aluminum construction with
fixed horizontal bars at 0o or 15o inclination with one way or two way deflection and flanges on
both sides. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall be minimum 5 mm in front and the flange
shall be 20 mm wide with round edges. The register shall be suitable for concealed fixing and
horizontal bars of the register shall be mechanically crimped from the back to hold them.
21. SQUARE CEILING AIR DIFFUSER:
Square/Rectangular ceiling air terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum construction with
flush fixed pattern. The terminals shall have Anti-Smudge ring and spring loaded removable
central core in various pattern for air flow direction. The terminal shall be mounted by concealed
screw fixing arrangement. The supply air terminal to be supplied with Volume control device of
extruded aluminum construction in black mat finish.
22. CURVED BLADE CEILING TERMINALS
Square /rectangular curved blade ceiling terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum. The
terminals shall have individual adjustable blades mounted on nylon bushes which facilitate to
adjust the direction of air as per site conditions. The terminals shall have 20 mm wide flanges
all around and concealed screw fixing arrangement. The supply air registers to be supplied with
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black mat finish.
23. MULTI SLOT CEILING AIR TERMINALS:
Multi slot air terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum with various slot width and air pattern
deflectors. Deflectors in each slot provide an adjustable air pattern of 180 degree full.A special
plenum shall be provided for each supply air terminal. The Linear terminals shall have alignment
strips to give straight look while installation.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black mat finish shall be provided
in S.A. duct collars.
24. LINEAR CEILING MOUNTED AIR TERMINALS:
Linear ceiling mounted air terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum surface mounted
one way or two-way pattern. The Linear terminals shall have alignment strips to give straight
look while installation.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in mill finish shall be provided in
S.A. duct collars.
25. VOLUME CONTROL DEVICE:
Opposed blade volume control device shall be made of all extruded 16 G aluminum
construction in black mat finish. Opposed blades shall be pivoted to extruded aluminum frame
with Nylon bushes. Specially designed blade has an overlapping lip which ensures a tight
closure. The dampers shall be provided with suitable links, levers and quadrants as required
for proper and easy operation. Every damper shall have an indicating deviceshowing the
Page 21
damper position. Damper shall be provided in every branch supply and return air duct
connection.
26. FRESH AIR INTAKE LOUVERS:
Fresh air intake louvers 50 mm deep wherever required as per shop drawing will be made of
extruded aluminum construction duly Anodized or Powder coated. Bird/insect screen will be
provided with the intake louvers. The blades are inclined at 45 (on a 40 mm blade pitch to
minimize water ingress. The lowest blade of the assembly shall extend out slightly to facilitate
disposal of rain water without falling in door/wall on which it is mounted.
Wherever specified, the intake louvers shall be provided with factory fitted all aluminum
construction volume control dampers in black mat finish.
27. AIR TRANSFER DOOR REGISTER:
Extruded aluminum construction air transfer door register will be provided as per approved
shop drawings. The register will be complete with single /double register frame to bemounted
on door panel from both sides. The central core shall be NO-SEE-THRU type. The register
shall be powder coated. The register shall be provided with insect screen to prevent movement
of insects from inside to outside or vice versa.
28. JET NOZZLES

Fully adjustable Jet Nozzles shall be made of heavy gauge steel in round construction for
longer throws. The large free area shall allow handling of large air flow rates. The core of the
product shall be in round shape duly fixed on square panel capable of rotating through 360oC
and tilting up to 30oC from mid position to produce a wide variation in air jet angle. The product
will be in powder coat finish with single or multi element construction on one panel and shall
have certified ratings of air quantity / velocity / throw and noise level.
Approval of selection shall be obtained from architect/consultant and necessary submittals

shall be given.
Special Items for Air Distribution shall be measured by the cross-section area perpendicular
to air flow, as identified herewith:
i. Grilles and registers - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges. Volume control
dampers shall form part of the unit rate for registers and shall not be separately
accounted.
ii. Diffusers - cross section area for air flow at discharge area, excluding flanges.Volume
control dampers shall form part of unit rate for supply air diffusers and shall not be
separately accounted.
iii. Linear diffusers - shall be measured by cross-sectional areas and shall exclude
flanges for mounting of linear diffusers. The supply air plenum for linear diffusers shall
be measured with ducting as described earlier.
iv. Fire Dampers - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular to the
direction of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary collars and flanges for
mounting, inspection pieces with access door, electrical actuators and panel. No
special allowance shall be payable for extension of cross section outside the air
stream.
v. Flexible Connection - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular

to the direction of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary mounting
Page 22
arrangement, flanges, nuts and bolts and treated-for-fire requisite length of canvas
cloth.
vi. Kitchen Hoods - shall be measured by their cross sectional area at the capture point
of fumes, parallel to the surface of kitchen equipment. Quoted ratesshall include
the grease filters, provision for hood light, suspension arrangement for the hood,
profile to direct the air to ventilation ducts and provision for removable drip tray.
29. TESTING AND BALANCING
After the installation of the entire air distribution system is completed in all respects, all ducts
shall be tested for air leaks by visual inspection.
The entire air distribution system shall be balanced using an anemometer. Measured air
quantities at fan discharge and at various outlets shall be identical to or less/excess than5
percent in excess of those specified and quoted. Branch duct adjustments shallbe
permanently marked after air balancing is completed so that these can be restored totheir
correct position if disturbed at any time. Complete air balance report shall be submitted for
scrutiny and approval, and four copies of the approved balance report shall be provided with
completion documents.
G. INSULATION
1. SCOPE
This section includes thermal insulation on air conditioning ducts & chilled water pipes and
acoustic lining of ducts conforming to these specifications and in accordance with Approved
Drawings and Schedule Of Quantities. Thickness of the insulation for each application shall
be as specified herein or as included in Schedule Of Quantities. Manufacturer’s test certificate
bearing density, thermal conductivity, water vapor permeability and fire properties shall be
delivered with each lot of material.
Sample of insulation from any of the lots may be gotten tested by owner’s site representative
for insulation properties of the material at contractor’s cost. Adhesive used for applying
insulation shall be non flammable.
2. DUCT ACOUSTIC LINING
Duct Acoustic Lining shall be done by using 32 kg/ CuM density resin bonded fibre glassof
thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.034 K Cal/(hr-sq.m-deg C/meter) or 0.23 BTU/(hr.sq.ft.-
deg F)/inch) at 32 deg C (90 deg F) mean temperature. Acoustic lining for AHU shall be
6metres from fan. Each return air duct should also be acoustically insulated fora distance of 6
meter from intake plenum.
Thickness of the fibre glass for duct acoustic lining shall be 25 mm or 50 mm as included in
schedule of quantities.
Ducts so identified on approved drawings shall be provided with acoustic lining of specified
thickness for a distance of minimum 6 meters as described below:
The inner surface of the duct shall be applied with a thin film of adhesive, and then provided
with 22 gauge GI Channels of 25 mm x thickness of insulation screwed back to back. The
spacing of the GI channels shall be in order to form a square frame of 600 mm x 600 mm.
Resin bonded fibre glass cut into 600 mm x 600 mm sections shall then be placed in the
square frames. The surface shall then be covered with fiberglass tissue and 28 gage
perforated aluminum sheet with minimum 20% perforations, screwed to the GI channels.
Page 23
If called for in the schedule of quantities, acoustic lining of AHU rooms/plant rooms/DG
rooms shall also be provided in the manner described above but with 26 gage perforated
aluminum sheet with minimum 20% perforations.
3. DUCT INSULATION
Air conditioning ducts as identified on approved drawings and all refrigerant pipes shall be
thermally insulated with closed cell Elastomeric nitrile rubber thermal insulation orCross
linked polyethylene foam. Thermal conductivity of the insulation material shall not exceed
0.036 W/moK at an average temperature of 23oC. The product shall have temperature range
of –40 oC to 110oC. The insulation material shall be fire rated for Class 1as per BS 476 Part 7,
1987. The material shall have approval from the Chief Fire Officer.
The external thermal insulation of specified thickness shall be applied on the cleaned duct
surface as described below:
Thermal insulation sheet shall be cut to piece as per the dimensions of the duct with sufficient
allowance to ensure that insulation material is not stretched under any circumstances.
Adhesive shall be applied to the outer surface of duct and inner surface of insulation material.
After adhesive becomes tack dry, insulation material sheet shall be placed in position and
pressed firmly. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed with 3 mm thick 50 mm
wide nitrile rubber tape.
4. DRAIN PIPING INSULATION
All condensate drain pipes shall be insulated as described below:
All pipes shall be cleaned and provided with one coat of zinc chromate primer. A thin layer of
adhesive shall be applied to the pipe before applying the insulation. After adhesive becomes
tack dry, insulating material shall be placed in position. For smaller diameter pipes,insulating
sleeves shall be provided on the pipes. Upon putting the sleeve/ sheet in position, it shall be
pressed firmly. Wherever insulating sheet is used, it shall be cut to correct dimension with
sufficient allowance to ensure that insulation material is not stretched. All cutting of sheets
shall be done with appropriate tools as recommended by the manufacturer. All longitudinal
and transverse joints shall be sealed with 3 mm thick, 50 mm wide nitrile rubber tape. All valves
and fittings shall be insulated in the same manner. Complete chilled water piping insulation
shall be done in supervision of insulation manufacturer and shall be gotten approved by him.
The thickness of thermal insulation shall be as per table below unless included otherwise in
schedule Of Quantities:
Pipe size (mm) Insulation thickness (mm)
15 - 25 mm 19 mm
30 mm - 100 mm 25 mm
Condensate drain pipes As included in schedule of quantities
5. PROTECTIVE COATING OVER INSULATION
To provide mechanical strength and protection from damage all pipe / duct insulated with nitrile
rubber shall be covered with fibreglass fabric of minimum 7 mil thickness (flame retardant).
All Insulated ducts and pipes exposed to Sun/weather shall be covered with fibreglass fabric
for UV protection. Two coats of epoxy compound shall be applied over the fabric.
Page 24
6. OVERDECK INSULATION
Over-deck insulation shall be done with 75 mm thick extruded polystyrene of density 45-48
kg/cm3 & thermal conductivity of 0.21 Btu in / ft2 hroF (at 24oC as per ASTM C – 518). Minimum
compressive strength as per ASTM D-2842 shall be 570 kPa water absorption as per ASTM
D-2842 shall not be more than 1%.
Method of Application
(a) Clean RCC slab and make it free from dust and other laitance matter.
(b) Lay cement based water proofing on roof with a minimum slope of 1:100 and average
thickness of 110 mm using brickbats of appropriate size and shape suitable to achieve the
required slope laid over 15 mm thick waterproof c3ement mortar 1:4 and finishedwith
20 mm thick waterproof plaster wing cement mortar 1:4 and making false squares of 300
mm size including rounding off the junction of roof and parapet walls for a height of 300
mm with brickbats and 20 mm thick waterproof plaster and conducting necessary
leakage / dampers tests, etc.
(c) Lay 65 mm thick extruded polystyrene boards over prepared surface fixing with
adhesive. Adhesive shall be strictly as per recommendations from manufacturer.
(d) Lay 80 gsm geotextile fabric over insulation board
(e) Lay 40 x 40 x 4 cm precast paver blocks.
(Note: If contractor is awarded work of waterproofing + over-deck insulation, follow all steps
from (a) to (e). if contractor is awarded work of only over-deck insulation follow step (c) and
(d). Rest will be done by Civil Contractor).
7. UNDERDECK INSULATION
Under deck insulation shall be 50mm thick TF Quality expanded polystyrene (32 Kg/m3) or
30mm thick phenotherm. Under deck surface of ceiling shall be cleaned and made dirt free.
Insulation panels shall be pasted on this surface with black CPRX compound. 28g wire net
shall be tightened around insulation so as to avoid any kind of sagging. Ends of net shall be
overlapping by at least 25mm. Overlaps shall be screwed with galvanized screws to avoid
rusting.
8. MEASUREMENT OF INSULATION
Unless otherwise specified measurement for duct and pipe insulation for the project shall
be on the basis of centre line measurements described herewith
a. Pipe Insulation shall be measured in units of length along the centre line of the installed
pipe, strictly on the same basis as the piping measurements described earlier. The
linear measurements shall be taken before the application of theinsulation. It may be
noted that for piping measurement, all valves, orifice plates and strainers are
separately measurable by their number and size. It is to be clearly understood that for
the insulation measurements, all these accessories including cladding, valves, orifice
plates and strainers shall be considered strictly by linear measurements along the
centre line of pipes and no special rate shall be applicable for insulation of any
accessories, fixtures or fittings whatsoever.
b. Duct Insulation and Acoustic Lining shall be measured on the basis of surface area
Page 25
along the centre line of insulation thickness. Thus the surface area of externally
thermally insulated or acoustically lined be based on the perimeter comprising centre
line (of thickness of insulation) width and depth of the cross section of insulated or
lined duct, multiplied by the centre-line length including tapered pieces,bends, tees,
branches, etc. as measured for bare ducting.
H. SUPPORTS
DUCT SUPPORT
• Supply/return air outlets, FA grilles and accessories shall be constructed from

extruded aluminum sections.
• Flanges for matching duct sections, stiffening angles (braces) and supporting angles
shall be of rolled steel sections, and shall be of the following sizes.
Application Duct Width Angle size
Flanges Upto 1000 mm 35 mm x35 mm x 3 mm

1001mm to 2250 mm 40 mm x40 mm x 3 mm
More than 2250 mm 50 mm x50 mm x 3 mm
Bracings Upto 1000 mm 25 mm x25 mm x 3 mm

More than 1000 mm 40 mm x40 mm x 3 mm
Support angles Upto 1000 mm 40 mm x40 mm x 3 mm

1001 mm to 2250 mm 40 mm x40 mm x 3 mm
More than 2250 mm Size and type of RS section shall be
decided in individual cases
i) Hanger rods shall be of mild steel and of at least 10 mm dia for ducts upto 2250 mm
size and 12 mm dia for larger sizes.
ii) All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc plated steel. All rivets shall be galvanized or
shall be made of magnesium-aluminum alloy. Self-tapping screws shall not be used.
INSTALLATION PRACTICE
All ducts shall be installed strictly as per approved shop drawings and in close coordination
with other services in the ceiling space.
i. The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may be required to
carry out the intent of these specifications and drawings. The work shall meet with the
approval of Owner’s site representative in all its parts and details.
ii. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractor for beams,
pipes, or other obstructions in the building whether or not the same are shown on the
drawings. Where there is interference/fouling with other beams, structural work, plumbing
and conduits, the ducts shall be suitably modified as per actual site conditions.
iii. Ducting over false ceilings shall be supported from the slab above, or from beams. In no
case shall any duct be supported from false ceilings hangers or be permitted to rest on
false ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time so as
not to delay other contractor’s work in the building.
iv. All duct work shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal
ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with trapeze
Page 26
hangers formed of galvanized steel rods and galvanized steel angle/channel under ducts
at no greater than 2 meter centre. All vertical duct work shall be supported by structural
members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates
left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a hole for passing the
hanger rods shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger formed of galvanized steel
rods and angles/ channels shall be hung through these cleats.Wherever use of metal
insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash
/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger rods
shall then hang through the cleats.
v. Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25mm
thick appropriate insulation around the duct and totally covered with fire barrier mortar
for complete sealing.
vi. All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever
ductwork is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause
vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be provided with a flexible connection, located at the
unit discharge.
PIPE SUPPORT
• The installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the detailed drawings
prepared by the Air-conditioning Contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
• Air-conditioning contractor shall utilize the structural provisions for Air-conditioning
services wherever provided by the Department in the building and make his own
arrangements for additional changes.
• Expansion loops or joints shall be provided to take care of expansion or contraction of
pipes due to temperature changes.
• Tee-off connections shall be through equal or reducing tees, otherwise ferrules welded
to the main pipe shall be used. Drilling and tapping of the walls of the main pipe shall not
be resorted to.
• Wherever reducers are to be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reducers shall be used if
the piping is to drain freely, in other locations, concentric reducers may be used.
• Open ends of piping shall be blocked as soon as the pipe is installed to avoid entrance
of foreign matter.
• All pipes using screwed fittings shall be accurately cut to the required size and threaded
in accordance with IS: 554 and burs removed before laying.
• Piping installation shall be supported on or suspended from structure adequately. The
Air conditioning contractor shall design all brackets, saddles, clamps, hangers etc. and
shall be responsible for their structure integrity.
• Pipe supports, preferably floor mounted shall be of steel, adjustable for height and prime
coated with zinc chromate paint and finish-coated gray. Spacing of pipe supports shall not
be more than that specified below:
Extra supports shall be provided at the bends and at heavy fittings like valves to avoid undue
stress on the pipes. Pipe hangers shall be fixed on walls and ceiling by means of metallic or
rawl plugs or approved shear fasteners.
• Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue pressure on the
insulation.
Page 27
• Anti vibration pads, springs or liners of resilient and non-deteriorating, material shall be
provided at each support, so as to prevent transmission of vibration through the supports.
• Pipe sleeves of diameter larger than the pipe by least 50 mm shall be provided wherever
pipes pass through walls and the annular spaces shall be filled with felt and finished with
retaining rings.
i. Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall be straight and
plumb. Risers passing from floor to floor shall be supported at each floor by clamps
or collars attached to pipe with a 12 mm thick rubber pad or any other resilient
material as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
ii. The space in the floor cut outs around the pipe work (after insulation work where
applicable) shall be closed using cement concrete (1 :2:4 mix) or steel sheet, from
the fire safety considerations, taking care to see that a small annular space is left
around the pipes to prevent transmission of vibration to the structure.
iii. Riser shall have suitable supports at the lowest point.
• Where pipes are to be buried under ground, the top of the pipes shall be not less than 75
cms from the ground level. Where this is not practicable, permission of the Engineer-in-
charge shall be obtained for burying the pipes at lesser depth. The pipes shall be
surrounded on all sides by sand cushion of not less than 15 cms. After the pipes have
been laid and top sand cushion provided, the trench shall be refilled with the excavated
soil and any extra soil shall be removed from the site of work by the Air conditioning
contractors.
• All pipes and their steel supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one primer coat
of Zinc chromate before being installed.
• After all the water piping has been installed, pressure tested in accordance with clause
5.10, all exposed piping in the plant room shall be given two finish coats of paint, approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. Similar painting work shall be done over insulated pipe work,
valves etc. The direction of flow of fluid in the pipes shall be indicated with identifying
arrows.
• 3mm gasket shall be used for flanged joints.
I. QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1. SCOPE
The following quality assurance, inspection, testing and commissioning procedures shall be
required to be carried out upon award of work.
I. Provide quality assurance program (QAP), works quality assurance program

(WQAP), field quality assurance program (FQAP) and quality plan.
II. Tests at manufacturer’s works.
III. Perform site tests and commissioning.
2. SUBMITTALS
I. After award of work following information shall be submitted.
a. Quality Assurance Program (QAP)

b. Works Quality Assurance programme (WQAP)
Page 28
c. Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP)
II. For inspection and testing, submit inspection and testing procedures, programme,
and record sheets applicable at each hold point.
III. After completion of testing, submit test records, packaging, transportation and
storage instructions and methods.
IV. For site installation and commissioning, submit installation methods or procedures,
notification and procedures for pre-commissioning and commissioning.
V. After commissioning, submit site test records, as-built drawings, manufacturer’s

operation maintenance manuals and list of recommended spares and tools.
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE CONCEPT AND CONTROL
I. Minimum requirements for establishing and implementing a quality assurance

programme shall be applied to all aspects of the work necessary for carrying out the
contract. Quality assurance shall extend to material parts, components, systems and
services as a means of obtaining and sustaining the reliability of critical items,
operating performance, maintenance and safety.
II. Acceptance of the Contractor’s quality assurance programme does not relieve the
Contractor’s obligation to comply with the requirement of the contract document. If the
programme is found to be ineffective, then the Owner’s site representativereserves
the right to request for necessary revisions of the programme.
III. The Contractor is required to produce readily identifiable documentary evidence

covering the extent and details of both his own and his sub contractor’s quality
assurances system as follows:
a. Quality Assurance Program (QAP)

b. Works Quality Assurance programme (WQAP)
c. Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP)
d. Quality Plan.
IV. These documents shall be prepared separately and submitted to the Owner’s site
representative at the time of starting the work.
V. Quality Plan and Manual shall be prepared by the Contractor for all items and services
to be supplied, after the contract has been placed, but before commencement of
fabrication, and shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Owner’s site
representative before start of work.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL (QAM)
I. The QAM shall be a general comprehensive document outlining the Contractor’s basic
organization, policies and procedures. The information to be given in the QAM shall
include but not limited to:
a. Quality Policy.
b. Quality Assurance Programme
c. Organization Structure showing inter relationships.
Page 29
d. Functional responsibilities and levels of authority.
e. Lines of communication.
f. Customer relations.
g. Laboratory Facilities.
5. WORKS QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME (WQAP)
I. The WQAP shall identify the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Programme at works
applicable throughout all phases of Contract performance, including design,
procurement, manufacture, inspection and testing. It shall identify each of the
programme elements to be designed, developed, executed and maintained by the
Contractor for the purpose of ensuring that all supplies and services comply with these
specifications.
II. The information to be given under this programme shall include but not limited to:
a. Organization and Responsibility.
b. Contract Review.
c. Design and Document Control.
d. Procurement Control.
e. Production Control.
f. Control on Sub-contractors.
g. In-process Quality Control and Traceability.

h. Inspection and Testing.
j. Control of Non-conformances.
k. Corrective Action.
l. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment.
m. Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery.
n. Records.
p. Quality Audits.
q. After Sales Servicing.
6. FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME (FQAP)
I. This programme shall identify the Contractor’s Quality Assurance Programme at site
applicable throughout site construction, erection and commissioning. It is the
underlying philosophy that the quality built into the product at works shall be
maintained throughout the construction and commissioning stages.
II. While, in principle, the FQAP shall include the items discussed in WQAP, it shall,
Page 30
however, be approached differently to take into account site conditions.
III. The FQAP shall include, but not limited to the following information:
a. Organization and responsibility.
b. Control of Drawings and Documentation.
c. Product Checklist.
d. Control and Traceability of Purchased materials and services.
e. Receipt Inspection of materials at site.
f. Material Storage Control.
g. Inspection and Examination Procedures.
h. Control of Painting and Insulation Works.
j. Pre-commissioning.
k. Commissioning.
l. Control of Non-conformances.
m. Corrective Action.
n. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment.
p. Records.
q. Completion Documents.
r. List of recommended spares and tools.

s. Personal Training.
t. Servicing during Defects Liability Period.
7. QUALITY PLAN
I. The contractor shall be required to prepare manufacturing and construction/erection

quality plans for all equipment items and services. The quality plan shall also define
the involvement of Owner’s site representative in the inspection and testprogrammes.
II. The Quality Plan shall incorporate as appropriate:
a. Charts indicating flow of materials, parts and components through

manufacturing quality control inspection and test to delivery and erection.
b. The charts shall indicate the location of hold points for quality control,
inspection and test beyond which manufacture shall not continue until the
action required by the hold point is met, and the documentation required is
generated.
c. The control documents associated with each hold point, i.e. drawings,
material, specification, Works Process Schedule (WPS), Process Quality
Records (PQR), quality control methods and procedures and acceptance
standards.
Page 31
8. SITE QUALITY CONTROL SECTION
I. The Contractor’s Quality Control (Q.C.) section shall be headed by an experienced

Quality Control Engineer. He shall be assisted by other supervisors. The section shall
be an independent one, reporting to the contractor’s Site Manager only on
administrative matters, but otherwise under full control by the Contractor’s Corporate
Quality System Management.
II. The Contractor’s Q.C. Section shall liaise closely with the Owner’s site representative
in charge of Quality Assurance/Quality Control, and to whom it shall give fullest
cooperation. It is the underlying principle of this contract document that while the
Contractor’s Q.C. Engineer implements the Contractor’s Quality Programme, the
adequacy and effectiveness of that implementation shall be audited by the Owner’s
site representative whose recommendations on improving or maintaining quality shall
be acted upon promptly by the Contractor’s Q.C. Section.
9. INSPECTION AND TESTING
I. All equipment and components supplied may be subjected to inspection and tests by
the Consultant/ Owner’s site representative during manufacture, erection/installation
and after completion. The inspection and tests shall include but not be limited by the
requirements of this contract document. Prior to inspection and testing, the equipment
shall undergo pre-service cleaning and protection.
II. Tenderers shall state and guarantee the technical particulars listed in the Schedule
of Technical Data. These guarantees and particulars shall be binding and shall not
be varied without the written permission of the Owner’s site representative.
III. No tolerances shall be allowed other than the tolerances specified or permitted in the
relevant approved Standards, unless otherwise stated.
IV. If the guaranteed performance of any item of equipment is not met and / or if any item
fails to comply with the specification requirement in any respect whatsoever at any
stage of manufacture, test or erection, the Owner’s site representative mayreject
the item, or defective component thereof, whichever he considers necessary; and after
adjustment or modification as directed by the Owner’s site representative, the
contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and /or test.
V. The approval of the Owner’s site representative of inspection and/or test results shall
not prejudice the right of the Owner’s site representative to reject an item of equipment
if it does not comply with the contract document when erected, does notor prove
completely satisfactory in service.
VI. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely transmission of the relevant and
appropriate sections of the contract document to manufacturers and sub-contractors
for the proper execution of all tests at their works as per contract specifications.
10. TESTS AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS
I. All tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and inspection shall be

agreed with the Consultant/ Owner’s site representative prior to commencement of the
work. The Contractor shall prepare the details of the schedule and submit these to the
Consultant/ Owner’s site representative for approval. It must be ensured that adequate
relevant information on the design code/standard employed, the manufacture
/fabrication/assembly procedure and the attendant quality control steps proposed are
Page 32
made available to the Consultant/Owner’s site representative who will mark in the
appropriate spaces his intention to attend or waive the invited tests, or inspections.
Contractor shall arrange inspection and factory witness test for Air cooled screw chiller.
II. A minimum of twenty-one days’ notice of the readiness of equipment for test or
inspection shall be provided to the Owner’s site representative by the Contractor
(whether the tests are held at the Contractor’s or Sub-contractor’s works). The subject
items should remain available for Owner’s site representative inspection and test up
to a minimum 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test. Every facility in
respect of access, drawings, instruments and manpower shall be provided by the
Contractor and sub-contractor to enable the Owner’s site representative to carry out
the necessary inspection and testing of the Plant.
III. No plant shall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the purpose of
packing for shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected, all tests called for
have been successfully carried out in the presence of the Owner’s site representative
or approved for shipment, or alternatively inspection has been waived.
IV. Functional electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out on completed
assemblies in the works. The extent of these tests and method of recording the results
shall be submitted to, and agreed by, the Owner’s site representative in sufficient time
to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnesses, or if necessary for any changes
required to the proposed programme of tests to be agreed.
V. The Consultant/Owner’s site representative reserves the right to visit the
Manufacturer’s works at any reasonable time during fabrication of equipment and to
familiarize him with the progress made and the quantity of the work to date.
VI. Within 30 days of completion of any tests, triplicate sets of all principal test records,
test certificates and correction and performance curves shall be supplied to the
Owner’s site representative.
VII. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests,
whether or not they have been witnessed by the Owner’s site representative or not.
The information given on such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify
the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and should also bear the
Contract reference title.
VIII. When all equipment has been tested, the test certificates from all works and site
tests shall be compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an approved from
complete with index and four copies of each volume shall be supplied to Consultant/
Owner’s site representative.
IX. Stage wise inspection of equipment in factory in waived.
11. PERFORMANCE TESTS AT MANUFACTURER’S WOKS
I. All equipment may be subjected to routine performance tests at the Manufacturer’s

Works in accordance with the relevant ANSI, ASME, ASTM, IEC/ BNBC/ BS standard
including operating tests of complete assemblies to ensure correct operation of
apparatus and components.
II. Pumps, fans, compressor, and other rotating equipment shall be given full load tests,
and run to 15% over speed for 5 minutes to check vibration. Main and auxiliary gear
boxes shall be subjected to shock load tests and a six-hour endurance run at rated
speed and maximum torque.
III. The Contractor shall submit single line diagrams including the layout of the Plant
together with the location of test instrumentation and the principal dimensions of the
Page 33
layout. All calculations to derive performance data shall be made strictly in accordance
with format given in the approved standards. Any alterations or deviations from the
approved standard test layout or formulae shall be subjected to the prior approval of
the Owner’s Site Representative.
IV. The performance test shall be conducted over the full operating range of the pump to
a closed valve condition and a minimum of five measurement points covering the full
range shall be taken. Curves indicating Quality vs. Head, Quantity vs. Power
absorbed, and Quantity vs. Pump efficiency shall be provided. In addition a curve of
the NPSH required vs. Quantity shall be provided except when the suction conditions
do not require this test. Any proposal for the omission of this test shall be to the
approval of the Consultant/ Owner’s site representative.
V. On completion of the tests the Contractor shall submit a report showing the test results
obtained together with the curves corrected to the site operating conditions.
J. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. SCOPE
a. Testing, adjusting and balancing of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems

at site.
b. Testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC Hydronic system at site.
c. Testing, adjusting and balancing of exhaust system at site.
Comply with current editions of all applicable practices, codes, methods of standards
prepared by technical societies and associations including:
ASHRAE : 1995 HVAC Application.
SMACNA : Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of air

distribution system.
2. PERFORMANCE
a. Verify design conformity.
b. Establish fluid flow rates, volumes and operating pressures.
c. Take electrical power readings for each motor.
d. Establish operating sound and vibration levels.
e. Adjust and balance to design parameters.
f. Record and report results as per the formats specified.
3. DEFINITIONS
a. Test : To determine quantitative performance of

equipment.
b. Adjust : To regulate for specified fluid flow rates and

air patterns at terminal equipment
(e.g. reduce fan speed, throttling etc.)
Page 34
c. Balance : To proportion within distribution system
(sub-mains, branches and terminals) in
accordance with design quantities.
4. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PROCEDURES
The following procedures shall be directly followed in TAB of the total system.
Before commencement of each one of the TAB procedure explained hereunder, the contractor
shall intimate the PMC about his readiness to conduct the TAB procedures in the format given
in these specifications.
5. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND REQUIREMENTS
Adjust and balance the following system to provide most energy efficient operation
compatible with selected operating conditions.
a. All supply, return and outside air systems.

b. All exhaust air systems.
c. All chilled water systems.
d. Emergency purge systems.
6. AIR SYSTEMS
I. Air Handlers Performance
The TAB procedure shall establish the right selection and performance of the AHUs
with the following results:
a. Air-IN DB and WB temperature.

b. Air-OUT DB and WB temperature.
c. Dew point air leaving.
d. Sensible heat flow.
e. Latent heat flow.
f. Sensible heat factor.
g. Fan air volume.
h. Fan air outlet velocity.
i. Fan static pressure.
j. Fan power consumption.
k. Fan speed.
II. Air distribution
Both supply and return air distribution for each AHU and for areas served by the AHU
shall be determined and adjusted as necessary to provide design air quantities.It shall
cover balancing of air through main and branch ducts utilizing telescoping probes of
Electronic Rotating Vane Anemometers and Accubalance for grilles and diffusers.
III. The Preparatory Work
To conduct the above test, following preparatory works are required to be carried out
including the availability of approved for construction shop drawings and submittals:
Page 35
a. All outside air intake, return air and exhaust air dampers are in proper
position.
b. All system volume dampers and fire dampers are in full open position.
c. All access doors are installed & are air tight.
d. Grilles are installed & dampers are fully open.
e. Provision and accessibility of usage of TAB instruments for traverse

measurements are available.
f. All windows, doors are in position.
g. Duct system is of proper construction and is equipped with turning vanes and
joints are sealed.
h. Test holes and plugs for ducting.
8. READINESS FOR COMMENCEMENT OF TAB
Before starting of any of the tests, the readiness to do so should be recorded as per the
prescribed check list.
9. TAB INSTRUMENTS
I. Air Measuring Instruments
a. For measuring DB and WB temperature, RH and dew point, microprocessor

based TSI USA make VelociCalc Plus Meter, Model 8386, or equivalent shall
be used. This instrument shall be capable of calculating the sensible, latent
total heat flows, sensible heat factor and give printouts at site and have data
logging/downloading facility.
b. For measuring Air velocity, DB temperature and Air volume, TSI USA make
VelociCalc meter model 8386/ 8345 or equivalent shall be used. It shall be
able to provide instant print out of recorded Air volume readings.
c. Pitot tube.
d. Electronic Rotary Vane Anemometer TSI make or equivalent.
e. Accubalance Flow Measuring Hood TSI make or equivalent.
All above instruments shall have a valid certification from a reputed testing
institution.
K. PAINTING AND FINISHES
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises of colour scheme required for each piece of equipment
Page 36
2. COLOUR SCHEME.
Description Standard Colour & Lettering Colouring

Reference
Exposed Duct Work To Architect’s

(other than plant room)
instruction
Air Conditioning BSS 111 Pale Blue Black

Duct Work (Plant Rooms)
Ventilation Duct BSS 111 Pale Blue Black

Duct Work (Plant Rooms)
Conditioner Casings, BSS 111 Pale Blue Black

Air Handling Units,
Filter Plenums
Electrical (Conduit Ducts BSS 557 Light Orange Black

and Motors )
Chilled Water Pipe Jade Green Black
Drains Black White
Vents White Black
Fans BSS 111 Pale Blue Black
Valves and Pipe Line White with black Black

Fittings handles
Belt guards Black and yellow

diagonal stripes (45 25
mm wide)
Switchboards - exterior BS 366 Light Beige

- interior White
Machine Bases, Inertia

Bases and Plinths Charcoal Grey
Page 37
L. NOISE CONTROL
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises of the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
noise and vibration control equipment and accessories.
2. STANDARDS
The testing of all noise control equipment and the methods used in measuring the noise rating
of air conditioning plant and equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of
the following British Standards, unless otherwise stated :
BS 4718 : 1971 Methods of Test of Silencers for Air Distribution Systems.
BS 2750 :
Parts 1-9:1980 Laboratory and Field Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation of
Various Building Elements.
Recommendations for Field Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
and Impact Sound Transmission in Buildings.
BS 3638 : 1987 Methods of Measurement of Sound Adsorption in a Reverberation

Room.
BS 4773 :
Part 2: 1976 Acoustic Testing.
BS 4856 :
Part 2: 1976 Acoustic performance without additional ducting of forced fan
convection equipment.
Part 5: 1976 Acoustic performance with additional ducting of forced fan

convection equipment.
BS 4857:
Par 2:1978 (1983) Acoustic Testing and Rating of High Pressure Terminal Reheat
Units.
BS 4954:
Par 2:1978 (1987) Acoustic Testing and Rating of Induction Units.
BS 5643 : 1984 Glossary of Refrigeration, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

Terms.
3. GENERAL
Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain noise
and the transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source where
illustrated on the tender drawings and plant and equipment schedules to achieve acceptable
noise rating specified for occupied areas.
In addition to the provisions specified in the Specification, particular attention must be given
to the following details at time of ordering plant and equipment and their installation:-
Page 38
a. All moving plant, machinery and apparatus shall be statically and dynamically
balanced at manufacturers works and certificates issued.
b. The isolation of moving plant, machinery and apparatus including lines equipment from
the building structure.
c. Where duct work and pipe work services pass through walls, floors and ceilings, or
where supported shall be surrounded with a resilient acoustic absorbing material to
prevent contact with the structure and minimize the outbreak of noise from plant
rooms.
d. The reduction of noise breakout from plant rooms and the selection of externally
mounted equipment and plant to meet ambient noise level requirements of the
Specifications.
e. Electrical conduits and connections to all moving plant and equipment shall becarried
out in flexible conduit and cables to prevent the transmission of vibration to the
structure and nullify the provisions of anti-vibration mountings.
f. All duct connections to fans shall incorporate flexible connections, except in cases
where these are fitted integral within air handling units.
Duct work connections to the fan inlets / outlets shall be concentricity aligned so that
the flexible connections are not subjected to any strain and not used as a means of
correcting bas misalignment.
g. All resilient acoustic absorbing materials shall be non flammable, vermin and rot proof
and shall not tend to break up or compress sufficiently to transmit vibration or noise
from the equipment to the structure.
h. Where practicable, silencers shall be built into walls and floors to prevent the flanking
of noise the duct work systems and their penetrations sealed in the manner previously
described.
Where this is not feasible, the exposed surface of the duct work between the silencer
and the wall subjected to noise infiltration shall be acoustically clad as specified.
5. ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS.
All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from thestructure
by the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either
concrete bases, inertia blocks or support steels as indicated.
Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated from the frame of the air
handling unit by suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan discharge air connections shall befitted
with approved flexible connections internally isolating the fan scroll from the air handling unit
casing.
Axial flow fans shall be mounted on steel legs as diaphragm plates supported on neoprene
in shear anti-vibration mountings, or suspended using spring loaded hangers to suite the
application.
Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases consisting of reinforced concrete sub-
base, anti-vibration mountings and concrete filled steel upper plinth. The Contractor shall be
responsible for issuing the steel upper plinth and mountings to the Contractor for building-in.
Page 39
Pipe work connections to circulating pumps, chillers, cooler coils and other equipment shall
be made with flexible connections as per Specifications.
The construction of the anti-vibration mountings shall generally comply with the following:
6. Enclosed Spring Mounting (Caged or Restrained Springs)
Each mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom housing enclosing
one or more helical steel springs as the principle isolation elements, and shall incorporate a
built- in leveling device.
The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and
be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound.
The bottom plate of each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to
attenuate any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
Mountings incorporating snubbers of restraining devices shall be designed so that the

snubbing damping or restraining mechanism is capable of being adjusted to have no
significant effect during the normal running of the isolated machine.
Restrained isolator shall be provided on chillers subject to approval by the manufacturers.
7. OPEN SPRING MOUNTINGS.
Each mounting shall consist of one or more helical steel springs as the principal isolation
elements, and shall incorporate a built-in leveling device. The spring shall be fixed or otherwise
securely located to cast or fabricated top and bottom plates, and shall have an outside
diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and shall be selected to have at least
50% overload capacity before becoming coil-bound.
The bottom plate shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate any high
frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
8. NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR MOUNTINGS.
Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base plate completely embedded in oil
resistant neoprene. Each mounting shall be capable of being fitted with a leveling device, and
bolt holes in the base plate and tapped holes in the top plate so that they may be bolted to the
floor and equipment where required.
Page 40
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE-FIGHTING WORK:
A. GENERAL
1. BASIC CONCEPTION
a. City water supply line shall be connected to the under water storage tanks.
b. Fire Protection system for the Building comprising of Internal Hydrant, ExternalHydrant,
Sprinklers and portable fire extinguishers shall be as per NBC.
2. DESIGN BASIS
The Fire Protection System for the Complex is designed to take care of the following:
Fire Protection appurtenance as per NBC such as fire hydrants, sprinkler hose reel and fire
extinguishers
i. The materials used for the project shall be as per the latest I.S. specifications
ii. The work shall be in compliance with the NBC & NOC issued by FireDepartment.
3. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.1 GENERAL
All materials shall be new and of the best quality and shall conform to the latest Indian Standard
Specification.
All materials shall be of approved quality as per samples and origins approved by the Engineer.
As and when required by the Engineer, the contractor shall arrange to test the materials and/or portions
of the works at his own cost to prove their soundness andefficiency. If after tests any materials, work or
portions of work are found defective or unsound by the Engineer, the contractor, shall remove the
defective materials fromthe site, pull down and re-execute the works at his own cost to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. To prove that the materials used are as specified, the contractor shall furnish to
Engineer with original vouchers on demand.
All works executed shall be as directed and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in aneat workmanlike
manner.
Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use ofelbows shall be
restricted to short connections.
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and
shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable G.I. clamps, hangers, channels and I
section at intervals as specified.
Page 1
Clamps, hangers, channels, I section and supports on RCC walls, columns & slabsshall be fixed only
by means of approved make of expandable metal fasteners inserted by use of power drills.
All pipes clamps, supports, nuts, bolts, washers shall be galvanized MS steel throughout the building.
Painted MS clamps & nuts, bolts & washers shall not beaccepted.
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located so as to provide easyaccessibility for operations,
maintenance and repairs.
Access, doors for fittings and clean outs shall be so provided that they are easily accessible for repair
and maintenance.
B: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. SCOPE
1.1 Work under this sub-head consists of furnishing all Labour, Materials, equipment and accessories
necessary and required to complete installation of the Fire protection systemetc.
1.2 (A) Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work of Fire ProtectionSystem shall
include the followings:
a) Providing M.S (ERW) heavy class black steel pressure pipe line main including Valves,
Fire Hydrants, Excavation for Pipe, Laying of pipe, Protection for Underground pipes,
Painting of pipe and Making Connection tosupply system.
b) M.S./ Black Steel Pipe, Mains Laterals, Branches, Valves, G. I. supports and
Appurtenances.
c) Swinging Hose Reels with drum, Rubberized fabric lined hose pipes, Nozzles, Hose
cabinets, Sprinkler heads and Landing Valves.
d) Portable Fire Extinguishers

e) Sprinkler system including hydraulic calculations etc.
f) All materials shall be as per latest relevant IEC/ BS codes.
(B) The Bill of Quantities includes the total works of Fire Fighting system for the project.
It will be the decisions of the Client to award the entire work either to one vendor orparts of
the work to different vendors. However, the system will be ultimately commissioned in
totality and therefore all party concerned shall be responsible forsuccessful commissioning
and assisting in getting approval from all concerned authorities.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the Specifications and subject tothe approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.2 Pipes and Fittings shall be fixed truly Vertical, Horizontal or in slopes as required in a neatworkman
like manner.
Page 2
2.3 Pipes shall be fixed in such a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair andmaintenance
and shall not cause any obstruction in Shaft, Passage etc.
2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceiling by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only
approved type supports with anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings.
2.5 Valves and other appurtenance shall be suitably located so that they are easily accessiblefor operation,
repairs and maintenance.
3. PIPE WORK
3.1. PIPING, FITTING AND BASIC MATERIALS
3.1.1 General
All pipe work, valves and fittings, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with relevant clauses in
the NBC(Part-IV)/NFPA regulations. Supply, deliver and install all pipe work materials and fittings
for the pipe work services installation. Pipe work shall follow the routes and approximate positions
indicated on the approved drawings. Pipe work, ancillaries, valves and demountable joints shall be
installed for convenient and safe routine maintenance and renewals. All drain pipe work shall be
installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and venting. Pipe work shall be run in a neat
manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical and at right angles to or parallel to adjacent walls.
No joints shall be formed in wall or floor thickness. All pipe work, fittings and valves shall be free
from corrosion, scale and internal obstruction. Pipe work ends shall be cut square, reamedfree from
burrs and finished full bore. Sufficient unions and flanged joints shall be provided to install and
dismantle sections of pipe work.
Unions or flanges shall be provided at all valves and equipment for easy dismantling. Connections to
coils, pumps, and other equipment shall be made in such a manner so as toeliminate undue strains in
piping and equipment. Necessary fittings and bends shall be furnished to avoid springing of pipes
during assembly.
Care shall be taken in placing unions to allow freedom to spring apart. Unions and flangesshall not be
placed in inaccessible positions. Where pipe work is installed in inaccessible places, a union or flange
shall be installed, prior to the pipe passing into the wall or floor. Unions shall have two bronze conical
seats ground in. Long screw connections shall notbe accepted.
All G.I. mild steel pipe work in wall chases / exposed shall be jointed with grooved coupling
/ threaded fitting as specified in schedule of quantities.
Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used and fabricated fittings will not be accepted without
approval.
Bends and tees shall be of the easy sweep type, except at air vents, drain points and deadlegs where
square tees shall be used.
Changes in diameter of horizontal pipe work shall be formed eccentrically.
Prior to any work being "covered up", the installer shall request the Engineer's approval tothat part of
the installation in question.
Pre-fabricated pipe work shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses.
Take appropriate measures to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are connected.
Page 3
3.1.2 Piping Materials Schedule
Pipe work up to and including 150mm. nominal bore shall be carried out in G.I. / black mildsteel heavy
quality tube to IEC/ BS.
Above this bore, carbon steel pipes shall comply toIEC/ BS.
Service Nominal Size Pipe Fittings

Wet Riser 15mm to Mild steel to IEC/ Forged fittings
System, Fire 40mm BSheavy class.
Hose Reel
System Sprinkler
Risers
50mm to Mild steel to IEC/ MS fitting with welded
150mm BSheavy class. joint
Above 150mm Carbon steel to
BS 3600.
On Floor Sprinkler 50mm and less Mild steel to IEC/ Forged fitting
Piping BSheavy class.
50mm to Mild steel to IEC/ MS fitting with welded
150mm BSheavy class. joint
.
Above 150mm Black mild steel to MS fitting with welded
IEC/ BS thickness joint
min.7mm.
Drains All Mild steel to IEC/ MS fitting with welded

BSheavy class. joint
3.1.3 Fittings for Dry Riser and Sprinkler Systems.
A. Pipes and fittings main tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers and all suchconnecting
devices that are needed to complete the piping work in its totality
B. Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50mm and below .
C. Jointing
Joints between M.S pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fitting havingwelded
joints.
3.1.4 Pressure Ratings
The pressure rating of all pipe works shall be1.5 times of pressure head specified for pump.
All valves and fittings used in the piping system shall not have a pressure rating less thanthat of the
pipe work.
Page 4
3.1.5 Sleeves
A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, and floors
.
B. Sleeve Materials
Sleeve materials shall be galvanized steel.

C. Sleeve Sizes
Sleeves for Un-insulated Piping: One pipe size larger than pipe passing through sleeve or a
minimum of 12mm clearance between inside of sleeve and outside of pipe. Adequate clearance
shall be provided to install fire stopping material.
D. Sleeve Lengths
Location Sleeve Length

Floor All floor sleeves to extend minimum of 50mm above
finished floor level.
Walls and Partitions Equal to depth of construction and terminated flush with
finished surfaces.
Sleeves which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are fire barriers shall beadditionally
packed with a non-combustible material for the entire length to form a fire/smoke stop of the
required fire rating.
The material shall be subject to approval and must comply with Building Control and the
Building Regulations.
The ends of sleeves packed with material which shall have suitable fire resistant masticapplied to
seal the fibers and present a neat appearance.
3.1.6 Gauges
A. Provide pressure gauges, conforming to the requirements of IEC/ BS, where indicated on the
drawings and in accordance with the schedule given below. All gauges shall beprovided with
snubbers. Gauges shall have 100mm diameter dial, white coated with black figures and
graduations. Shutoff cock shall be provided between gauge and pipingto permit gauge removal while
system is under pressure.
B. Gauges shall have graduation such that at normal working pressure the needle is in thecenter of the
field Gauge Location
Inlet and Outlet of Pumps

Sprinkler floor control valves
Top and bottom of all sprinkler and hose reel risers.
C. Mount gauges no higher than 1.5m above finished floor.
D. All gauges shall be calibrated in kg./sq.cm. to a maximum of not less than 1-1/3 timesand not
more than 2 times the operating pressure.
Page 5
3.1.7 Pressure Switch Assembly
A. A pressure switch assemblies shall be provided for the operation of fire pumps. The assemblies
shall consist of pipe work, pressure switches, pressure gauge, valves, orificeplates, and the like and
such arrangement shall conform to NFPA Standards and shallbe accepted by local fire authority.
3.1.8 Execution
A. During the progress of the work, test the wet Riser, Sprinkler, and Hose Reel systemspiping.
1. The piping shall be tested in accordance with local fire

requirements and NFPA, but in no case shall the system be
tested at less than 15kg/sq.cm. Hydrostatic pressure or 1½
times working pressure for two (2) hours.
2. Defects disclosed by the tests shall be repaired or replaced

with new work. Testsshall be repeated as directed, until all
work is proven satisfactory.
3. Take due precautions to prevent damage to the building and

its contents as a result of such tests. Repair any damage
caused.
4. During construction, properly cap all lines and equipment

nozzles so as to preventthe entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each
system of piping shall be flushed (for the purposeof removing
grit, dirt, sand, etc., from the piping for as long a time as is
required tothoroughly clean the system).
Screwed Joints: Do not damage fitting surface, remove burrs and ream smooth.
1. Screw joints should be factory made with external taper threads/ parallel internal threads
properly cut to IEC/ BS.All site cut threads to be equal to “factory” made.
2. All screw joints should be executed to cover the complete length of the “useful thread” as
recommended by IEC/ BS.
3. Make joints using suitable compound. Clean joint thoroughly of excess jointing material.
Teflon (PTFE) tape shall be used and apply tape to male threads only.
4. The use of cotton threads roll is not permitted.
5. Threads shall be full and clean cut and burrs formed in cutting shall be reamed. Inscrewing
up the pipe, care shall be taken that the pipe does not extend into the fitting obstructing the
waterway. Joint compound shall be applied to the threads of the pipeand not to the fittings or
sprinklers. Pipe shall be straightened before installation toprevent pockets.
Flanged Joints: Use matched flange faces and 4mm thick compressed gaskets in accordance
with IEC/ BS.
Jointing face of flanges shall be parallel to each other.
Flanged joints shall be used on pipe work to enable easy removal of equipment or valves for
inspection or repair. Flanges shall be of the forged steel, flat faced slip on type in accordance with
Page 6
IEC/ BSwith pressure class suitable for the system working pressure involved but in no case less
than 16 Bar. Jointing face of the flanges shall be truly parallel to each other and in alignment. A
suitable gasket of the approved type minimum 1.5mm thick shall be used between each jointing
flange. Bolts shall be of hexagon head and shall be of adequate length such that at least three
complete threads protrude through the hexagonal nut with washers when the flanged joints are
fully tightened.
B. Expansion Joints
1. Expansion joints shall be provided for all pipe work passing through any building expansion
joint and where necessary as specified.
2. They shall be of axial pattern bellow type and shall have screwed or flanged ends as
appropriate to facilitate replacement. They shall incorporate internal liners if required and
shall be manufactured from approved material appropriate to the system and shall be
designed to withstand at least two times of the system pressure.
3. Each joint shall be securely held by guides on both sides.
C. Underground pipe work
1. Underground pipes shall be protected against corrosion and against mechanical damage.
2. The pipes shall be laid in trenches at minimum 1.0 M depth, the pipe line shall be cleaned
after jointing and treated with approved quality of bituminous paint then wrapped with 4mm
thick pypkote layer as per IEC/ BS. The internal surface of thetape shall be heated with the
blower and then wrapped around the pipe with a minimum overlay of 12 mm and bedded in
washed sand free of all salts or sieved soil before the trench is back filled.
3. Pipe work shall be hydraulic tested before the trench is back filled.
4. Anchor blocks shall be made at appropriate locations for thrust bearing. The contractor is to
note that it is their responsibility to design the trust blocks and issue to the engineer for
verification.
5. Pipe work shall be supported at not more than 3m interval.
D. Orifice Plates
1. Orifice plates for system balancing, where applicable, shall be provided as requiredfor proper
commissioning of the systems. Wherever necessary to suit the pump orsystem performance
or in respect of system balance, an orifice shall be provided even if they are not indicated in
drawings.
2. Orifice plates shall be generally constructed in S.S. as specified in the Scheduleof Quantities
and installed according to NFPA Rules for sprinkler and curtain nozzlesystem installations.
Pipe cleaning and draining
1. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, etc., before installation. During the course
of the installation, all open ends of pipes shall be plugged or capped to prevent ingress of dirt.
Page 7
2. After installation and sealing of joints, all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned with clean water under
pressure to the satisfaction of Engineer. Water samples test may be required if the Engineer considers
as necessary. Any temporary pipe workand equipment necessary for the above cleaning shall be
provided by the contractor.
3.1.9 Pipes supports spacing

< -------------------- Pipe diameter in mm-------- ----------- --
S.No. Pipes & Position 15/20 20/25 32/40 50 75/80 100/110 150/160 200
1 Vertical
1.1 GI /MS 2.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.5 4.5 5.4 5.4
2 Horizontal
2.1 GI /MS 2.0 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.5 4.5
4. FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTION
4.1 Fire Brigade Inlet connection shall be provided near the pump house and to the wet riser system as
specified and as described in the Schedule of Quantities, for the following purposes:
i) Fire Brigade suction draw out connection for fire static tank with provision of footvalve.
ii) Fire brigade inlet connection to fire static tank.
iii) Fire brigade inlet connection to the wet riser system. Each connection shall be inaccordance
with similar dia of Butterfly valve and Non return valve.
4.2 The locations of these Fire brigade connection shall be suitably decided with the approval of
Consultant/Landscape Architect and with a view that these are easily accessible to the fire brigade,
without any possible Hindrance.
5. SYSTEM DRAINAGE
The Fire Protection System shall be provided with drainage arrangement with drain valves ofrequired size at
suitable location.
6. VALVES
6.1. FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
6.1.1 General
All Fire Protection water control valves within the building shall be either wedge gate valves with
painted iron wheel handles and shall have gland followers in stuffing boxes, and shallbe constructed
so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure, or slow- closing gear-operated butterfly
valves.
Page 8
A. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on body.
B. All Fire Protection valves are to be IEC/ BS STANDARDS/NFPA approved.
C. All valves shall be with screwed, flanged, or mechanical coupling ends as required bythe piping
system in which they are installed.
D. Valves shall be selected for the working pressure required.
E. All isolating valves and control valves shall be provided with the proper and efficient operation
and maintenance of the entire systems and as may be required by the WaterSupplies Department.
F. All valves supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and test pressure of various water
supply system.
G. Furnish all valves and accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not shownon drawings
as follows.
H. All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated withoil and
graphite. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
I. Plastic or metal plates (rustless) shall be provided to indicate the open/close status aswell as the
use of each valve in the pump and tank rooms, and in the town main.
6.1.2 Butterfly Valves
A. Use for riser control valves.
B. All butterfly valves shall be provided with built in tamper switch.
C. Butterfly valves to have cast iron full lug body, 316 stainless steel stem with bronze bushings
and aluminum bronze disc, valve shall be confirming to IEC/ BS.
D. The stem journals will be a multiple seal design providing for completely independentseals. The
stem disc assembly will be such that the need for pins, screws or bolts is notrequired. Positive stem
retention to be provided to permit removal of handle or actuatorwhile under full operating pressure.
E. The valve seats to consist of replaceable neoprene or equivalent material.
F. Valves to size 150mm to be supplied with multi-position handles; size 200mm and above to be
supplied with enclosed worm gear
G. Valve body to be full-lug pattern to comply with and be compatible with flanges of appropriate
pressure rating. No semi-lug valves are acceptable.
6.1.3 Check Valves
A. Check valves to IEC/ BS shall be of materials similar to the gate valves for the appropriate systems
in which they will be installed. All check valves shall be of quick closing type to eliminate the
sudden surge in the pipe line on closing.
B. Swing Type: Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller withscrewed
bonnet, screwed end to IEC/ BS; 65mm and larger with bolted bonnet, flangedend or grooved end.
Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
Page 9
C. Silent Type: Use wet riser pumps. Valves to have cast iron body and bronze or stainlesssteel trim
and to be of the center guide type, with flanged end or grooved end.
D. Working pressure shall be 150% greater than the system pressure and of minimum PN16 rating.
6.1.4 Ball Valves
A. Use for sprinkler floor control valve trim, pump trim, hose reel system and as drain valves.
B. Provide ball valves of the bronze top-entry body type, having a straight-through full port flow
passage. Design to permit disassembly without removing body from line.
C. Construct seats and all gland packing of Teflon. Lever handle to be vinyl covered. Bodyto be 2-
piece screwed end.
D. Provide lever for quarter turn operation; lever to indicate open or closed position.
E. When used as drain valves, provide with hose thread and brass cap with chain. Cap tobe rated for
full system pressure.
F. Ball float valves in nominal sizes up to and including 50mm dia shall confirm
1. to BS1212 part 1
2. In brass with copper float to BS1968
G. Ball float valves in nominal sizes up to and including 76mmdia. shall confirm
1. to BS1212 part 1
2. In cast iron with bronze trim and copper ball float to BS1968
3. With flanged ends, flanges to BS4504, part I, rated at working pressure involved butin no case
less than PN10 rating.
6.1.5 Air Vents and Drain Valves
Air vents and drain valves shall be provided at high points, low points and loop pipingrespectively in
all piping systems.
Air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel float and guides,and non-
corrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a ballvalve.
Drain valves shall be connected to the nearest building floor drain or drain point of adequatesize.
6.1.6 Valve List
Service Type Size Ends

Up to 15 kg./sq.cm. Ball Upto 65mm Thread / Flanged
Butterfly 80mm dia and above Flanged
Check-Swing Upto 65mm Thread / Flanged
Check-Swing 80mm and above Flanged
Execution
Page 10
A. All valves shall be installed only in the upright vertical or horizontal positions unless specifically
otherwise required by the drawings.
B. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for repair or
replacement.
C. All valves shall be installed at convenient positions or operation from the floor.
D. Each valve shall have a purpose made reference number plate or label engraved or stamped
indicating the manufacturer's catalogue number, pressure and temperature ratings. Valves shall
be arranged so that clockwise rotation of the spindle will close the valve. Demo labels are not
acceptable.
6.1.7. PRESSURE SWITCH
The pressure switches shall be suitable for starting and shutting down the operation of fire pumps
automatically through in-line pressure. The Pressure Switch shall be electronic type. The set pressure
shall be adjustable.
6.1.8. PAINTING
All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of Red Lead and two coats of Synthetic
Enamel paint of approved shade and quality as specified in Schedule of Quantity
6.1.9. EXCAVATION
The excavation for pipe works shall be open cutting unless the permission of the Site Incharge
for the ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing. Where the pipe has to be laid below ground.
The excavated soil shall be brought back later on for refilling thetrenches or tunnel.
6.1.10. REFILLING
After the pipes or other work has been laid and proved to be water tight, the trench or otherexcavations
shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damageshall be caused to the
sewer and other permanent work. After this has been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be
refilled carefully in 15 cms layers with materials takenfrom the excavation, each layer being watered
to assist in the consolidation unless the Engineer-in-Charge shall otherwise direct.
6.1.11. ANCHOR BLOCK
Suitable anchor blocks shall be provided at all bends and tees to encounter the excessive thrust
developed due to water hammer.
6.1.12. FIRE HYDRANTS
EXTERNAL YARD HYDRANTS
The Contractor shall provide External Fire Hydrant in the Ring or on External Fire Line, as per
specifications as specified in Schedule of Quantities and as shown in drawings. The spacing of the
hydrants and the distance from the building shall be maintained as per relevant requirements of latest
relevant codes, unless specified herewith.
Each External Fire Hydrant shall be provided with an External Fire Hose Cabinet of S.S, size as
Page 11
specified in Schedule of Quantities approved by the Architect to equipped with 63 mm dia non
percolating reinforced rubber line(RRL) hose and accessories as required. The cabinet shall be
installed near the Hydrant as per details, approved by the Engineer- in-Charge/Architect.
6.1.13 INTERNAL HYDRANTS
The Internal Hydrant outlet shall comprise “Twin Single Headed Single Outlet Gunmetal Landing
Valve” conforming to type ‘A’ of IEC/ BS. Separate valve on the head shall form part of the landing
valve construction.
A cap with chain is provided on one head of the outlet. The hydrant will have aninstantaneous
pattern female coupling for connecting to Hose Pipe.
The Landing Valve shall be fitted to a Tee connection on the wet riser at the landing.
6.1.14 FIRST-AID HOSE REEL EQUIPMENT
First aid hose reel equipment shall comprise reel, drum which can swing upto 170 degs width hose
guide fixing wall bracket hose tubing globe valve, stopcock and nozzle. This shall conform to IEC/
BS. The hose tubing shall confirm to IEC/ BS.
The hose tubing shall be 20 mm dia and 36.5m long. The G.M nozzle 5mm and globe valveshall be of
20 mm size.
The fixing bracket shall be of swinging type. Operating instructions shall be engraved on the assembly.
This heavy duty mild steel and cast iron brackets shall be conforming to IEC/BS. The first-aid hose reel
shall be connected directly to the G.I. pipe riser taken independently from ring.
6.1.15 HOSE PIPES, BRANCH PIPES AND NOZZLES
Hose pipes
Two numbers Hose Pipes shall be rubber lined woven jacketed (RRL) and 63mm in dia. 15m long.
They shall confirm to type A (Reinforced rubber lined) of IEC/ BS. The hose shall be sufficiently
flexible and capable of being rolled.
Each run of hose shall be complete with necessary coupling at the ends to match with thelanding valve
or with another run of hose pipe or with branch pipe. The couplings shall beof instantaneous spring
lock type. This shall be conforming to IEC/ BS.
6.1.16 BRANCH PIPE
Standard short sized Branch pipe shall be of Copper, Gunmetal or Aluminum alloy 63 mmdia as
specified in the schedule of quantity and be complete with male instantaneous springlock type coupling
for connection to the hose pipe. The branch pipe shall be externally threaded to receive the nozzle.
Nozzle
The nozzle shall be of Copper or Gunmetal as specified in the schedule of quantity, 20 mmin (internal)
diameter. The screw threads at the inlet connection shall match with the threading on the branch pipe.
The inlet end shall have a hexagonal head to facilitate screwing of the nozzle on to the branch pipe
with nozzle spanner.
End Couplings, Branch pipe, and Nozzles shall conform to IEC/ BS
Page 12
Two hoses of 15m length with couplings shall be provided with each External (Yard) Hydrant. Two
hoses of 15m length, as specified, with couplings shall be provided with eachInternal Hydrant. Two
nozzles and two branch pipes with coupling shall be provided with each Yard Hydrant.
6.1.17 HOSE CABINET (INTERNAL)
The internal hose cabinet shall accommodate the Hose Pipes, Branch Pipe, Nozzle and Hydrant
Outlets and shall be fabricated from 16 gauge S.S sheet as specified in Scheduleof Quantities. The
overall size shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. This shallhave lockable centre opening
glazed doors as per the requirement and as per Architecturaldetails. Where the niche for wet riser is
provided with shutters, separate hose cabinet as above may be dispensed with.
The hose cabinet shall be painted red and stove enameled.
6.1.18 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTIONS
Fire Brigade Inlet connection shall be provided near the pump house and to the wet riser system as
specified and as described in the Schedule of Quantities for the following purposes:
i) Fire Brigade suction draw out connection for fire static tank with provision of footvalve.
ii) Fire brigade inlet connection to fire static tank.
iii) Fire brigade inlet connection to the wet riser system. Each connection shall be inaccordance
with similar dia of Butterfly valve and Non return valve.
The locations of these Fire brigade connection shall be suitably decided with the approval of
Consultant/Landscape Architect and with a view that these are easily accessible to the fire brigade,
without any possible Hindrance.
7. SPRINKLER SYSTEM
7.1 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
I. Sprinkler Heads
A. Quick response spray type, with 15mm nominal discharge orifice. Ordinary temperature rating
68 C throughout except where special conditions exist which will require highertemperature
sprinklers or when indicated on the drawings. All heads shall be listed andapproved by NFPA.
B. Types
1. Upright: Quick response factory bronze finish. Quick response for use in car park,void area
within the false ceiling.
2. Pendent: Quick response factory model chrome plated brass with matchingescutcheon
/rosette in building core areas. 68oC rating, 15mm orifice.
3. Sidewall: Horizontal quick response type sidewall sprinkler with extended throw.
C. Samples shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
D. Sprinkler orifice size shall be 15mm.
Page 13
E. In addition to the heads actually required, furnish a stock of extra sprinklers of amounts as
recommended by NFPA including a minimum of six heads of each type and temperature rating
used and two suitable socket wrenches, contained in neat steel boxes, suitable for use as a service
kit on the job. The steel boxes shall be installed inthe fire pump room and fire command center.
II. Water Flow Switch
A. Paddle type, inserted into horizontal piping systems. The paddle shall actuate a pneumatic time-
delay mechanism between the paddle stem and the micro-switch. Afterthe preset time delay, the
micro-switch shall operate and either open or close the electrical circuit. Time delays shall be
adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. The normal factory setting is from 35 to 45 seconds. Wire flow
switch to fire alarm panel.
The water side of the switches shall be completely separated from the electrical side.Contacts
shall be suitable for the working voltage and current of the circuits.
Water flow switches shall be capable of standing a test pressure of 21kg/sq.cm for sixhours.
III. Sprinkler Installation control valve
A. Sprinkler control valve sets shall be NFPA approved type. Each control valve set shallbe complete
with the following:
Main stop valve and subsidiary stop valveAlarm valve

Water motor alarm gong
Pressure gauges to indicate ‘upstream’ and ‘down-stream’ system pressureTest and drain
valve
Every stop valve in the sprinkler installation including the main stop valve shall besecured
open by a leather strap and brass lock under the master key system.
B. The working pressure of alarm valve shall not be less than 1.25 times the static head difference
between the valve and the highest sprinkler on the installation and of minimum 15kg/sq.cm.
IV. Inspector’s Test Connection (Open Drain)
A. Bronze female pipe connection with orifice equivalent to one sprinkler head flow. NFPAapproved.
Quarter turn ball valve shall be provided with the test assembly.
V. Execution
Information included in this specification and of various agency requirements are given as aguideline
only. The contract documents do not relieve Contractor's responsibility from providing all work and
equipment necessary to complete the installation in accordance withall requirements.
VI Installation
A. No pipes or other apparatus shall be installed so as to interfere in any way with the fullswing of the
doors. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, drains, valves, etc., shown on the
drawings shall be taken as a close approximation and while they shallbe followed as closely as
possible, the right is reserved by the Architect / Owner to change the locations to accommodate
any conditions which may arise during the progress of the work without additional compensation to
such changes, provided that thechanges are requested prior to the installation of this work.
B. All piping shall be laid with the coordination of other services wherever offset required asper site
requirement, in the piping system contractor shall be bound to provide withoutany extra cost.
Page 14
C. All piping shall drain back to the risers or be provided with drain valves. Special precautions must
be taken to avoid electrical work and ventilation ducts, and no pipingshall pass below lighting
fixtures in luminous ceilings.
D. All piping shall be unexposed except in no-ceiling areas. Where required, heads shallbe located
below ducts. Diffusers and lighting fixtures take preference in room layout.
E. No heads shall be nearer than 150mm to a ceiling support, and heads shall be installedin a straight
line.
F. In areas with restricted head room, heads and piping shall be tight to ceilings and provided with
guards.
G. Sprinkler heads below false ceiling shall be installed at the exact centre of ceiling tilesas shown
in the RCP drawing. Positions shown on the fire services layout plans are for guidance only. The
Contractor shall be responsible for locating the sprinkler headsin the exact positions according to
the suspended ceiling layout drawings. The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary
bends, tees, etc. to divert the pipe work to avoid structural beams and any other mechanical
and electrical services
installations to reach the sprinkler heads in their locations as shown on the Drawingsand as site
conditions may dictate.
H. Intermediate level sprinkler heads shall be fitted with 75mm diameter metal water shield.
VII Sprinkler Coverage
A. For determination of sprinkler systems, spacing and sizing, the contractor must ensure that all
hazard classification is in line with the requirements as given in NBC/local fire authority.
B. All areas of the building shall be sprinkled.
C. Pre-Calculated System: Provide automatic sprinkler system throughout the entire project. The
system shall be designed to provide a density based on NFPA and localfire requirements.
D. Provide drains at base of riser, valved sections inside building, ends of main runs, andat other
locations indicated or requiring same for complete drainage of systems. Drains shall be valves
and/or plugs as indicated and/or required. Pipe drains to locations as required.
8. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided as per Bill of Quantities and shall confirmto IEC/
BS.
9. FIRE PUMPS AND EQUIPMENTS
9.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fire pumps, jockey pumps, as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be completed with
driving motors and motor starters. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900rpm, for all fire services
pumps.
B. Each fire and sprinkler pump shall have performance complying with the detailed requirements
Page 15
of the latest NFPA requirements for net fire riser and Automatic Sprinkler Installations with
classified Hazard Group in BS and local codes.
C. All fire and sprinkler services pump construction shall in general conform to the Fire Engineering
Specification. The fire pumps and jockey pump shall be of horizontal split casing multi-stage
centrifugal type with foot-mounted motors, and capable of continuous running under no flow
condition without overheating.
9.2 FIRE PUMPS & ACCESSORIES:
9.2.1 Pump Construction:
A) The electrical pump shall be end suction type designed for continuous operation and shall
have a continuously rising head characteristics without any zone of instability. The pump
shall conform to BS and Local codes and shall be of the following construction:
Page 16
S.No. Pump Description Horizontal end suction
1. Casing Cast Iron/Cast Steel
2. Impeller Bronze
3. Shaft High Tenstile Steel
4. Bearings Heavy duty Ball/Roller Bearings
5. Base Plate Cast Iron/Fabricated M.S.
6. Flanges Conforming to BS and local codes
7. Packing Mechanical Seal
8. Max. Speed 1500 RPM/2900 RPM
9. Starter DOL
B) Pump and driver shall be mounted on a single bed-plate and directly driventhrough
flexible coupling in case of horizontal split casing pumps.
9.2.2 Accessories and Fittings:
i) The following accessories shall be provided with each pump among other standardaccessories
required:
A) Coupling guard for horizontal split casing pumps.

B) Lubrication fittings and seal piping.
C) Test and/or air vent cocks.
ii) Following fittings shall be provided with each pump among other standard fittings required
:
A) Suction and discharge shut off valves (gate type) and discharge check valves Y-Strainers,
as specified under section "Piping".
B) Pressure gauge at discharge of size not less than 100mmdia and of theappropriate rating
with gauge valves etc.
C) 25 mm GI gland drain.
9.2.3 Pumps
A) FRAME:
Pump frame shall be made out of heavy class grained cast iron accurately machined. The
base of the frame shall be accurately machined to give exact heightof centre line above the
base plate.
B) SHAFT:
Shaft shall be fabricated from EN-8 Stainless steel with bronze sleeves to protectthe shaft
Page 17
from corrosion.
Page 18
C) BALL BEARINGS:
Double row deep groove ball bearing at the pulley end to take radial as well as axial load
shall be provided. Single row deep groove ball bearing at the impeller end to take the radial
load shall be provided.
D) IMPELLER:
The impeller shall be close type, of bronze construction and hydraulically & dynamically
balanced. Gun metal/ bronze wearing ring shall form a part of the impeller.
E) CASING:
Pump casing shall be close-grained cast iron, accurately machined & fitted with gunmetal
wearing ring.
F) SEALING ARRANGEMENT:
Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seals.
Pump shall be provided with close-grained C.I. suction head accurately machined& fitted
with gun metal/bronze wearing ring. Pumps shall be fitted with an air release valve, grease
lubrication nipples, drain plug and seal connections.
G) MOTOR:
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, having class `B' insulation. The motorshall be
suitable for 415 ± 10% volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, AC power supply.
H) COUPLING:
The pump & motor shall be supplied with either love joy or spacer type coupling as specified
in the schedule of quantities. A coupling guard made of sheet steel, duly painted mounted on
a common base shall be provided.
9.2.4 Electric Motor
The motor shall be designed not to draw starting current more than 3 times normal runningcurrent.
Motor shall be capable of driving the pumps at 150% of its rated discharge and shall be designed for
continuous full load duty. The cooling fans shall be directly driven from the motor shaft. The motor
shall be suitable for 415 V, 3phase, 50 Hz, ±10% supplysystem.
The motors shall be wound for Class-B insulation and the winding shall be vacuum impregnated with
head and moisture resisting varnish.
A) The motor shall be totally enclosed or drip proof type.

B) The 415 volts power terminals shall be suitable for receiving 1.1KV grade armoredpower
cable. The cable boxes shall be designed to enable easy disconnection and replacement of
cables.
9.2.5 Installation & Testing
A) Pump shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. Pump-sets shallbe mounted

on machinery isolation cork or any other equivalent vibration isolation fitting. Concrete
foundation shall be provided by the Owner as per approved shop
Page 19
drawings and specifications. The isolation pads, foundation bolts etc shall be supplied by the
contractor. Contractor shall however ensure that the foundation bolts are correctly embedded.
B) Pump-sets shall preferably be factory aligned, wherever necessary, site alignmentshall be

done by competent persons. Before the foundation bolts are grouted andthe couplings are
bolted, the bedplate levels and alignment results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
C) Tenderers shall submit the performance curves of the pumps supplied by them. They shall
also check the capacity and total head requirements of each pump to match their own piping
and equipment layout.
D) On completion of the entire installation, pumps shall be tested, wherever possible,for their
discharge, head, flow rate, B.H.P. Where it is not possible at least the discharge, head and
B.H.P. (as measured on the input side) shall be field tested.Test results shall correspond to
the performance curves.
E) After complete installation and testing, pumps, accessories and fittings shall be given two
coats, three mil each of approved finishing paint.
9.2.6 Diesel Engine
A) The Diesel Engine shall conform to BS:5514,
B) The Diesel Engine shall be multi-cylinder type four-stroke cycle with mechanical (airless)
injection, cold starting type.
C) The continuous engine BHP (after accounting for all aux. power consumption) andcorrection
for temperature and altitude at the site condition shall be at-least 20% greater than the
requirement at the duty point of pump at rated RPM and in no case less than the maximum
power requirement at any condition of operation of pump.
9.2.7 Starting
A) The Engine shall be capable of both automatic and manual starting. The normal mode of
starting is automatic initiated by a fall in pressure in water supply pipe, but in the event of
failure of automatic start or at the discretion of the operator theengine shall be capable of
manual starting either from locally or from remote station.
B) Engine shall able to start without any preliminary heating of combustion chamber.Manual
cranking mechanism shall also be provided. All controls/mechanisms which have to be
operated in the starting process shall be within easy reach of operator.
C) A day oil tank of adequate capacity shall be provided as per manufacturers guideline.
D) Automatic cranking shall be effected by a battery driven D.C. motor having high torque to
over come full engine compression. The battery shall hold adequate retainable charge to
provide the starting of the diesel engine.
E) Starting power shall be supplied from two sets of storage batteries. One set of battery is for
auto starting of engine and other shall act as a standby for manual starting. A selector switch
shall be provided on the control panel to select any of the two sets of batteries. The battery
capacity shall be adequate for ten consecutive starts without recharging with a cold engine
under full compression.
Page 20
F) The batteries shall be used for no other purpose other than starting of the engineand shall be
fully charged at all times with provision of trickle and boost charging.After starting of the
Engine, the charger shall be disconnected, the battery being fed from the engine dynamo.
G) Each engine shall be provided with 2Nos. static battery chargers of air cooled design. Each
charger shall have capacity to recharge one set of battery at a time.
9.2.8 Governing System
The engine shall have a speed control device which will control the speed under all conditions of
load. The governor shall be suitable for operation without external power supply.
The Governor shall offer following features:
An adjustable governor to regulate engine speed within a range of 10% between shut-off and
maximum load conditions of the pumps. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at
maximum pump load.
An over speed shutdown device to shutdown the engine at a speed approximately 20% above rated
engine speed with manual reset, so that the automatic engine controller will indicate an over speed
signal until the device is manually reset to normal operating position.
9.2.9 Fuel System
The diesel engine is to run on High Speed Diesel, the tank provided being enough to holdthe volume
required for 6 hours (minimum) continuous operation. The location and other connection details are
shown in the drawing. The Day Oil Tank shall be supplied by the Generator Manufacturer. The Tank
shall be of M S sheet of thickness approved by the Generator Manufacturer with an internal lead sheet
lining to prevent contact between tankand oil.
9.2.10 Accessories
The engine shall be mounted on a base plate of fabricated steel construction. Adequate access shall
be provided to the big end and main bearings, camshaft and governor drives,water jackets etc.
The engine shall have a base plate made from M S sections. There shall be reasonable space at the
big end, camshaft, water jackets, governor drives and main bearings.
The engine shall be provided with intake and discharge ductwork, inlet filter and silencer,outlet
muffler, expansion joints, dampers etc. as necessary for efficient operation. Intake air should be taken
from inside the building in which the engine is located, but the exhaustshould be discharged into the
air at approx0.8 M above ground. The pipe shall run vertically and finally discharge into the air at the
terrace level. The exhaust pipe shall be adequately sized for minimum pressure drop as per relevant
code/ standard, and shall berouted clearing man height.
The flywheel shall have graduated markings around the periphery to facilitate checking ofvalve and
fuel pump timings.
9.2.11 Instrumentation:
The diesel engine shall be provided with adequate instrumentation. The gauges etc. as required are
provided for provided for in the Engine Panel.
Page 21
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL WORK:
1. SCOPE
In general, the contractor shall supply, store, erect, test and commission all the equipment
required for Electrical Installation. The contractor shall provide all the materials, labour,
tools and equipments required for the electrical work, as shown in the accompanying
drawings and in the schedule of quantities and specifications hereinafter described.
3. DEFINITIONS
The following abbreviations used in the bill of quantities specifications and drawings
represents:
BS - British Standard (where specifically called for)

BSCP - British Standard Code of Practice (if called for).
HRC - High Rupturing Capacity
GI - Galvanised Iron
MS - Mild Steel
CI - Cast Iron
APLSTS - Aluminium conductor, paper insulated lead sheathed, Double steel tape
armoured and serving.
PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride.
XLPE - Cross Linked Polyethylene.
HT - High Tension.
LT - Low Tension.
A-Amp - Ampere.
KV - Kilo Volts.
PT - Potential Transformers.
CT - Current Transformers.
OCB - Oil circuit Breakers
VCB - Vacuum Circuit Breaker
ACB - Air Circuit Breakers
SFU - Switch fuse Unit
COS - Change Over Switch
CFS - Combination Fuse Switch
MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker.

MCB - Miniature Circuit Breaker
IC - Iron Clad
ICTPN - Iron Clad Triple Pole and Neutral
ICDP - Iron Clad Double Pole
DB - Distribution Board
KVA - Kilo Volts Ampere.
KVAR - Kilo Volts Ampere - Reactive.
NC - Normally Close
NO - Normally open
SWG - Standard Wire Gauge.
1
REGULATION & STANDARDS
The installation shall conform in all respects to Indian standard Code of Practice for Electrical
Wiring Installation I.S. - 732 and ‘National Building Code’. It shall be in conformity with the
current I.E Rules and Regulations and requirements of the local Electric Supply Authority in-
so-far as these become applicable to the installation. Wherever this specification calls for a
higher standard of materials and/or workmanship then those required by any of the above
regulations, these specifications shall take precedence over the said regulations and
standards.
In general, the materials, equipments and workmanship not covered above, shall conform to
the following Indian Standards (Latest Edition) unless otherwise called for:
SWITCHGEAR
a. Requirements of A.C. Circuit Breakers.

(ACBs & MCCBs) : IS 13947-1, 2/IEC 60947-1, 2
b. Switches and Switch Isolators above 1000V

But Not Exceeding 1.1 KV : IS 4710
c. Markings & arrangements for switchgear

bus-bars, main connection & auxiliary
wiring : IS 375
d. Specification for normal duty air break

switches & composite units for air break
switches and fuses for voltage not
exceeding 1000 Volts. : IS 4064
e. Heavy duty air-break switches and

composite units of air-break switches and
fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000
Volts. : IS 4047
f. Specification for miniature circuit breakers. : IS 8828
g. Specification for enclosed distribution, fuse

boards and cut-outs for voltage not
exceeding 1000 Volts : IS 2675
h. Installation and maintenance of

switchgear. : IS 3072 (Part I)
i. HRC cartridge fuse links 650 Volts. : IS 9224
2
2. CABLE
a. Specification for XLPE insulated armoured,

PVC : IS 7098 (Part-II)
Sheathed cables (11kV/22kV/33kV)
b. Specification for PVC insulated (Heavy Duty) : IS 1554

electric cables for Voltage upto 1100 Volts
c. Specification for XLPE insulated cables (for

voltage upto 1100 V) with Aluminium
conductors. : IS 7098 (Part-I)
3. Specification for rigid steel conduit for

electrical wiring. : IS 9537
4. Specifications for rigid non metallic

conduits for electrical installations. : IS 9537
5. Specifications for accessories for rigid steel

conduits for Electrical wiring. : IS 3837
6. Box for the enclosure of electrical

accessories steel and C.I. Boxes. : IS 5133 (Part I)
7. 3Pin plugs and sockets outlets : IS 1293
8. Ceiling Roses : IS 371
9. Adhesive insulating tapes for Electrical

purposes (Part- I & II) : IS 2448
10. General and safety requirements for

Electrical lighting fittings. : IS 1913
11. Watertight electric light fittings. : IS 3553
12. Flood Lights. : IS 1947
13. Ceiling fans and regulators. : IS 374
14. Propeller type AG Ventilating fans : IS 2312
15. Code of Practices for earthing. : IS 3043
16. Glossary of terms for electrical cable and

conductors. : IS 1885
3
17. Code of Practice for buildings (General)
Electrical installation : IS 1646
18. Protection of buildings and allied

structures against lightning. : IS 2309
19. Current Transformers : IS 2705 (Part-I to III)
20. Voltage Transformer : IS 3156 (Part-I to III)
21. Power Transformer : IS 2026-1977 (Part-I to IV)
22. Installation Transformer : IS 10029
23. Shunt capacitors for Power system : IS 2834
24. Direct acting electrical indicating

instruments : IS 1246
25. Factory assembled switchgear : IS 8623
26. Rating for Cable : IS 3961 (Part -II)
27. Earthing : IS 3843
6. DRAWINGS
The drawings, specifications and schedule of quantities shall be considered as a part of this
contract and any work or materials shown on the drawings and not called for in the
specifications or vice-versa, shall be executed as if specifically called for in both. The
contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of various equipment and
wiring, etc. and are essentially diagrammatic. The drawings indicate the point of
termination of conduit runs and broadly suggest the routes to be followed. The work shall
be executed as per approved working drgs, subject to any minor changes, if found essential
to co-ordinate installation of this work with other trades. All such changes shall be done
without any additional major cost to the owners. The data given in the documents and
drawings are
approximate & their complete accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and data furnished
are meant for guidance & assistance to the contractor. The exact dimension, location,
distance and levels, etc., will be governed by the site conditions. The contractor shall
examine all Architectural, structural, plumbing and sanitary and air-conditioning drawing
before starting the work and report to the architect/consultant any discrepancy which in
his opinion appear on them, and get the same clarified. He shall not be entitled to any
extras for omissions or defects in electrical drawings or when they conflict with other work.
4
VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS (11 KV)
1. GENERAL:
Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be of latest state of art technology of vertical isolation
horizontal drawout type. It shall be of proven design the Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall be
rated for continuous current capacity at Rated System voltage.
2. SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be suitable for the following parameters :
a. Rated System Voltage : 11KV, 50Hz, 3Phase AC.
b. Highest System Voltage : 12 KV
c. Rated Current : 630 Amp.
d. Rated breaking Capacity : 500 MVA at 11 KV
e. Rated making capacity : 46, 83KA at 11 KV
f. Power Frequency withstand : 28 KV.
g. Impulse withstand : 75 KVP
h. Opening time : less than 40 milli secs.
3. CODES & STANDARDS:
The breaker shall conform to IS 3427/IEC 298. IEC 62271-100, IEC 62271-200.
Breaker shall be fully tested as per codes/ standards a test certificate from CPPI shall be
furnished.
a. Circuit breaker compartment
b. Bus bar compartment
c. CT & cable compartment
d. L.T Compartment for mounting meters & instruments.
Breaker compartment shall be mounted in vertical isolation horizontal draw out truck with
front plate which covers the cubicle when the breaker is in service position. The document
truck shall have ‘isolated’/’test & service’ positions.
Bus bars shall be air insulated & mounted on cast epoxy insulated to withstand short current
of 44 KA for 3 Sees.
CT & cable compartment shall be preferably located on rear side. CTS shall be epoxy
insulated. Provision for terminating 2Nos. 3 core cable shall be provided. The cable entry
shall be from the bottom of the panel.
4. TECHNICAL FEATURES:
The VCB shall have the following technical features:
5
a. VCB shall have a mech. Endurance of 50.000 to 60.000 operations.
b. VCB shall not require routine inspection upto 10,000 mech. operations or shall not
require major inspection upto 30,000 mech. operations.
c. VCB shall be totally restrike free. Auto-reclosing shall be posing any problem. The
dielectric strength shall be recovered fast enough to perform multiple open-close-
open-operations.
d. VCB shall have negligible contact erosion even after 20,000 operations at rated
current.
5. ACCESSORIES
The Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall provided the following accessories:
a. Auxiliary Switch
b. Closing Solenoid
c. Tripping Solenoid
d. Mech. Operation Counter
e. Shunt release
f. Motorised spring charging mechanise
g. Earthing switch
h. Space heaters
i. ON/OFF/TEST/ISOLATED Indicators & name plate.
j. Earth bus (copper) with earthing bolts for all VCB jointed together by bus links/bolts.
6. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
VCB panel shall be provided with the following:
a. One 11KV/ 110V, 100 VA PT of epoxy cast resin

b. 3Nos. (double secondary) cast epoxy resin CTS of the following characteristics :
i. 15VA burden/ class 1.0 for core-1

ii. Class 5 P10 for core-2
c. Terminal strip for all CTS/ PTS & control wiring with 1.5sq.mm. copper wiring cables.
7. SAFETY INTERLOCKS:
The VCBs shall have following safety & interlocking features:
a. VCB truck can’t be moved when in ‘ON’ position.

b. VCB can’t be switched ‘ON’ when the truck is in any position between test or service
position.
c. Front part of the truck can’t be removed when breaker is in ‘ON’ position.
d. Low voltage plug & socket can’t be disconnected in any position except test/isolated
position.
e. Earthing switch can’t be switched ‘ON when truck is inside the panel.
f. The truck cannot be moved inside the panel when LT plug & socket is disconnected.
g. Truck can’t be inserted when earthing switch is in ‘ON’ position.
h. Individual explosion vents for all channels on the top of the panel.
i. Self-locking safety shutters to close automatically when the truck is withdrawn to
test/ isolated position.
6
8. METERING
a. One 0-15 KV 96 sq. mm square voltmeter with selector switch & fuse.
b. One no. Ammeter with selector switch.
c. One Trivector meter for 3 Phase, 3wire unbalanced loads with ½ max. demand
indicator.
d. One KWH meter.
e. Indicating Lamps:
i. VCB ‘closed’ lamp (1 No.)

ii. VCB ‘open’ lamp (1 No.)
iii. VCB ‘Autotrip’ lamp (1 No.)
iv. VCB ‘Heating trip’ lamp (1 No.)
v. VCB ‘spring charged’ lamp (1 No.)
vi. Non-trip alarm (1 No.)
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR: DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (11 KV)
1.0 GENERAL:
The power transformers shall be supplied & installed as per the requirements furnished in the
equipment Schedule & bill of Quantities.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
The transformers shall conform to the following codes & standards:

A. IS : 2026 (Part I to IV)
B. IS : 10028 (Part II)
C. IEC : 76
SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
The transformers shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated KVA under the following system
parameters:
a. Nominal Voltage- Primary : 11,000 Volts
b. Maximum Voltage- Primary : 12,000 Volts
c. Frequency : 50 Hz
d. Frequency Variation : +/ - 5%
e. Voltage variation : As/ standards
7
f. Secondary Voltage : 415 Volts.
g. Transformer shall be able to withstand short- circuit current as per relevant standards between
phases & between phase to ground with full voltage maintained at the other side without any injury
to the transformer. The duration of the short circuit shall be as called for in the relevant standard
(Refer IS: 2026 Part- I clause 8 & 9).
SALIENT FEATURES:
The transformer shall have the following salient features:
Transformer shall be oil immersed, natural cooled & double wound.

Windings shall be made of electrolytic copper conductor.
Tank shall be made of good quality low carbon steel of adequate thickness & electrically welded.
All welded joints shall be stress relived.
All access holes, manholes etc., shall be so designed as to prevent any ingress of moisture into the
tank.
All gaskets shall be non- deteriorating, hot oil resistant, weatherproof & resilient type.
Tank shall not be deformed & joints shall not yield due to the system short- circuit allowable as per
IS: 2026.
Transformer cores shall be of low loss, non- aging, high quality, cold reduced grain oriented silicon
steel laminations.
The core fabrication shall be done in such a manner as to avoid hum & vibration and should be of
boltless construction type. The core lamination insulation shall be resistant to oil & high
temperature
encountered.
Insulation of the winding shall be of very high quality & shall be resistant to the action of hot oil &
high temperature encountered.
ACCESSORIES & FITTINGS :
The transformer shall be fitted with accessories & fittings as listed in “Equipment Schedule”.
COOLING :
Transformers shall be of “ONAN” type unless otherwise called for in the equipment schedule & BOQ.
Transformer shall be provided with radiators mounted directly on the tank. The oil used for insulation
& cooling shall conform IS: 355 in all respects.
TAPPINGS :
Tappings shall be provided on HV winding as specified. The transformer shall be capable of operation
at the rated KVA at any tap position provided the voltage variation is limited to +/ - % of the voltage
corresponding to the tap. The variation in impedance shall be limited a minimum over the entire range
of taps.
TAP CHANGIN GEAR :
Off load tap changing shall be effected by a 3-phase gang operated tap switch. The operating shaft shall
be brought out of the tank & a hand wheel at a convenient height. A visual indicator to indicate the
8
position of the tapping in use shall be provided. It shall be possible to padlock the handle in each tap
position. A suitable interlock shall be provided so that padlocking is not possible unless the tapping
contacts are engaged. On- load tap changing gear may be provided, if specifically called for in
“Equipment Schedule” & BOQ.
CONSERVATOR :
A detachable conservator of liberal capacity & equipped with oil level indicator, drain valve,
detachable cover at one end shall be provided. The conservator shall be connected to the tank with
necessary piping & valves.
The following oil valves of high quality gun metal shall be provided :
Drain valve & oil sampling valve for the tank.

Conservator drain valve.
Flanged valve between buchholz relay & conservator.
TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT :
HIGH VOLT CABLE CONNECTION:
i. High volt terminals of the transformer shall be brought out through side wall bushings to a
cable end- box suitable for terminating 3- core 11 KV H. T. cable.
ii. Cable end box shall be self supporting weatherproof type complete with detachable cover,
suitable no. of cable entries, etc, as required.
L. T. CABLE CONNECTION :
i. 415 Volts terminals shall be brought out through side-wall mounted bushings to a cable end
box with self supporting disconnection chamber or terminal box suitable for 1100 volts,
aluminum conductor, armored PVC cable < as per drawing>.
TEST :
Routine test shall be conducted on all transformers at manufacturer’s works as per IS: 2026. In addition,
transformer tanks shall be subjected to leak tests & vacuum tests. Original test certificate shall be furnished
along with transformers.
HANDLING, STORING, INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING :
Transformers shall be installed as per IS 10028 part- II & regulation of local authorities.
HANDLING:
Transformer & its accessories shall be handled carefully in its upright position as indicated on the packing case
or as per the direction of the manufacturer. Lifting lugs & jacking pads shall be used for lifting of the
transformer. Jacking pads shall be used with utmost care. Traction eyes with steel wire ropes shall be used for
pulling or dragging of the transformer on sleepers or rollers.
STORAGE:
Transformer shall be stored in covered place which is free from moisture. No explosive/
immflamable materials shall be stored near the transformer. Transformer shall be covered with
heavy polythene cover or any other water proof material. All gaskets shall be tightened to
avoid any leakage into the transformer.
CABLING & EARTHING:
9
Cables shall be terminated at H. T. & L. T. sides only after IR values are measured & found to
be in order. Cable terminations shall be carried out with utmost care using correct termination
materials as specified in BOQ. H. T. cable termination shall be carried out in dry weather
conditions. Transformer neutral shall be provided with double run of copper earth tapes &
connected to 2 Nos. copper plate earth stations. Body of the transformer shall be also be
provided with effective earthing by means of double run of GI earth tapes to GI plate earth
station.
PRE- COMMISSIONING TESTS:
The following pre-commissioning tests shall be carried out before the transformer is
commissioned:
Position & inclination of the transformer shall be checked with respect to buchholz relay.
General inspection of bolts, nuts, gaskets & accessories shall be carried out.
Dielectric strength of oil shall be got tested from three samples taken from the bottom of
transformer tank.
IR Values on HV and LV windings shall be tested with 1000 V DC megger.
Voltage ratio on each step of tap changer to be checked.
MOUNTING & ERECTION:
The transformer shall be lifted by lugs or shackles or any other suitable means (such as dragging on
rollers) and mounted on the concrete plinth prepared for the purpose. Care shall be taken to see that
transformer is not titled during lifting and erection of transformer. The rollers shall be checked to
prevent movement of the transformer after being positioned on the plinth. Adequate & necessary
clearance from walls, other equipments, etc. shall be provided as indicated on the drawing.
All accessories and parts such as conservator tank, buchholz relay, breather, explosion vent,
thermometer, etc. shall be mounted on the transformer. All bolts shall be tightened & all
leakage’s shall be checked.
Oil level shall be checked & topped up, if necessary, with new oil. Di- electric strength of oil shall be
tested as per IS specifications.
Insulation resistance of winding shall be measured with a 1000 volts magger & nesults shall tally with
relevant IS specificaitons.
If di-electric strength of oil is found to be lower than the required level as per ISS, the oil shall be
dried by filtration through a streamline filter plant.
Phasing out test with 415 volts applied to HV windings & voltage across LV windings shall be
checked.
Measurement of neutral & body earth resistance shall be checked & the value shall not exceed 0.5
ohm.
Functioning of buchholz relay, thermometer, oil level indicator, Max. Temperature alarm & trip shall
be checked & adjusted, if required. The transformer shall not be charged unless all above tests are
successful & approval of local electrical inspectorate.
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR UNITIZED SUB STATION
Package Sub- Station
10
1.1 The complete package sub-station shall be factory assembled with separate access to
transformer, 11KV RMU and LT panel board as per specification / BOQ / Equipment schedule
and each component housed in separate compartment. It should be possible to install the
package sub-station in congested areas with blocked walls on two sides.
1.2 The sub-station enclosure shall be of modular design made from G.I sheet of 2.0 mm thickness
(minimum) with polyurethane paint finish as per color shade approved by client. The enclosure
should not require any artificial cooling through exhaust fans, etc. It should be naturally air-cooled.
1.3 There should be proper provision of internal lighting of each MV and LV compartments
1.4 Sufficient space should be available inside the package sub-station for performing any
maintenance activity.
1.5 Package sub-station shall be placed on RCC plinth to avoid ingress/collection of water during
rainy season and also to facilitate sufficient cable bending radius for incoming HT and outgoing
LT cables. The plinth height shall be 600 mm (minimum) above NGL. This shall also facilitate
ease of operation and maintenance.
1.6 The package sub-station shall be delivered as a complete unit ready for direct installation on the
plinth and no other assembly work is required/to be made at site other than termination of both
types of cables.
The Package sub-station will have the following provisions: -
11KV RING MAIN UNIT (RMU)
The 11KV RMU of Package Sub Station shall be non-extendable metal clad single compartment and
comprising of 1No.Vacuum circuit breaker & load break switches as supply source for distribution
transformer. The 11 KV RMU shall be rated for 200A at 11 KV level, with Vacuum as arc
quenching medium and suitable for manual & Electrical closing aided by spring mechanism charged
with handle. 11 KV VCB / SF6 with integral earth switch with interlocking facility and of suitable
making capacity, 11KV (HT) RMU shall have the provision of ammeter, voltmeter, trivector meter to
monitor various parameters with facility to indicate maximum current/demand attained at any point of
time with reset facility as asked in BOQ/ Equipment schedule.
The breaker shall be provided with self powered microprocessor-based set of 2 nos. Over current and
1 nos. Earth Fault relay, Power Pack (suitable for 3 tripping), Master tripping relay, trip circuit
supervision relay, indicating lamps etc as required for completion of scheme as asked in BOQ/
Equipment schedule.
TRANSFORMER:-
The distribution transformer of corrugated design shall be of three phase 50 Hz 800KVA rating with
Dyn 11 vector group and with 5.0% as percentage impedance. It should be Oil immersed (Oil type)
Natural Air cooled with no load ratio of 11000/415 volts having both low and high voltage winding of
high purity electrolyte copper. The transformer shall be complete with rating and diagram plate, 2 Nos.
earthing terminals, and oil temperature indicator with Trip facility and with all standard accessories
The distribution transformer shall be provided with ON load tap changer +5% to – 15% in steps of
1.25% each on HT side . The loss figures of the transformer shall be indicated by the
bidder/manufacture.
However, current density should be restricted to 2.4 Amp./sq.mm. The bidder should attach GTP of
the Transformer to be supplied by him.
L.T PANEL COMPARTMENT
11
1 No. 4 pole Air circuit breaker (ACB) with Microprocessor based release for over current, short circuit
& Earth Fault protection..
- 3 Nos. Metering CTs of suitable ratio with 15VA burden and of 1.0 accuracy class.
- 1 No. Digital ammeter with built-in selector switch.
- 1 No. Digital voltmeter (0-500V) with built-in selector switch.
- 4 pole bus bar of suitable current rating having current density not less than 0.7 AMP. / SQ. MM.
- 3 Nos. R/Y/B Indicating Lights (LED- Type)
(Note:-LT Panel components shall be as indicated in BOQ / Equipment schedules of respective

Unitised Sub-station.)
Interlocking
Each compartment shall be provided with interlocking facility to avoid opening of each compartment
in case supply is ON. However, in case of inadvertent error, facility of Hooter alarm should be
provided.
HIGH TENSION CABLE (XLPE) 11KV / 22KV / 33KV
1. GENERAL
The high tension cable shall be aluminium conductor, cross linked, polyethylene insulated,
steel armoured construction. The conductors shall be made from electrical purity
aluminium wire conforming to IS : 8130. The conductor shall be circular or sector shaped
standard conductors. The cables shall conform to IS : 7098 Part II with latest amendments.
2. RATING
The cable shall be rated for a voltage for 11KV/ 22KV/ 33KV (As indicated in BOQ)
3. CONSTRUCTION
Insulation shall be of high quality unfilled insulating compound of natural colour. Insulation
shall be applied by extrusion process and shall be chemically cross-linked in continuous
vulcanisation process.
The cable shall be provided with conductor shielding and insulation shielding comprising of
extruded semi-conducting compound. In addition, insulation shield shall be provided with
semi-conducting and metallic-tape shield over the extruded insulation shield.
Inner conductor shielding, XLPE insulation and outer shielding shall all be extruded in one
operation by a special extrusion process to ensure prefect bonding of inner and outer
shielding with insulation.
Multi-core cable, cores shall be stranded together with suitable non-hygroscopic filler in the
interstices and provided with common covering of plastic tape wrapping, or wrapped inner
sheath, extruded inner sheath could be provided.
12
The cable shall be provided steel armouring and tough outer PVC sheath (IS : 5831)
4. CORE INDENTIFICATION
Cores shall be identified by numbers 1, 2 & 3 printed on the insulation.
5. CURRENT RATING
The current rating shall be based on the following conditions:-
a. Max. conductor temperature : 90OC

b. Ambient air temperature : 40OC
c. Ground temperature : 30OC
d. Depth of laying : 90 cm for cables upto 11 KV,
105cm for 22 KV & 33 KV
e. Thermal resistivity of soil : 105OC cm/ Watt.
6. SHORT CIRCUIT RATINGS
Short circuit ratings for the cables shall be based as per IS: 7098. However the rating shall
be based on the following:-
a. Max permissible conductor temperature

under full load conditions : 90OC
b. Max. permissible short circuit
temperature : 250OC
7. SELECTION OF CABLES:
The cables have been selected considering the followings:
a. Max connected load.

b. Ambient temperature.
c. Grouping of cables.
d. Short circuit level.
The contractor shall recheck the sizes before the cables are ordered, installed and
connected to the services.
8. STORING, LAYING AND JOINTING
H.T cables shall be laid in trenches or ducts unless otherwise specified. Generally, laying,
jointing and commissioning shall be as per the regulations of local authorities.
a) STORING:
On receipt of H.T cables at site, cable shall be inspected to detect any damage. The
ends of cables shall be in sealed condition. After inspection, cables shall be stored in a
13
proper place with battens of cables drums being replaced. The cable drums shall not
stored “ON FLAT” with flanges horizontal.
b) CABLES IN OUTDOOR TRENCHES IN GROUND
i. H.T cables shall be laid in outdoor trenches, if specifically called for, wherever
cables are laid in outdoor trenches; the depth of the trenches shall not be less than
900mm plus radius of cable, from the upper surface of the ground. Where more
than one multicore cable is laid in the same trench, a horizontal internal spacing of
30cm mm shall be left in order to reduce mutual heating & also be ensuring that
fault occurring on one cable will not damage the adjacent cable. The trenches shall
be cut square with vertical side walls and with uniform depth. Suitable shoring and
propping may be done to avoid caving in of trench walls. The floor of the trench
shall be rammed, levelled & shall be covered with 10cm thick layer of sand.
ii. The cables shall be laid in trenches over the rollers placed inside the trench (shall
be removed after lying of cable & before filling of send). The cable drum shall be
rolled in the direction of the arrow for rolling. Wherever cables are bent, the
minimum bending radius shall not be less than 12times the diameter of the cable.
The cable shall be covered with a sand of 100mm thick layer. Over this sand layer, a
layer of cable protection tiles / burnt bricks to overlap cables by 50mm on either
side shall be provided. Trenches shall be back-filled with earth and consolidated.
Suitable cable markers made on concrete or cast iron indicating the voltage grade
& direction of run of the cables shall be installed at regulator intervals.
c) CABLES IN INDOOR TRENCHES:

Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches where specified. The trenches shall be made
of brick masonry with smooth cement mortar finish. The dimensions of the
trenches shall be determined depending upon the maximum number of cables that
is expected to be accommodated. Suitable clamps, hooks and saddles shall be used
for securing the cables in position. Spacing between the cables shall not be less
than 300mm centre to centre. Wherever specified, trenches shall be filled with fine
sand and covered with RCC precast slabs or steel chequered covers. Unless
otherwise called for specifically in SOQ, the making of indoor trenches is outside
the scope of this work.
d) CABLES IN HUME PIPE IN GROUND:
Cable shall be laid in Hume pipe at a depth of not less than 1000mm from Ground level.
Suitable size of Masonry man holes shall be used at an interval of 25 meters. The
making of masonry man holes is outside the scope of this work.
9. CABLE JOINTING (STRAIGHT THROUGH):
Cable jointing shall be made as per the instruction of the cable manufacturer. Cable jointing
shall be carried out only by qualified and competent cable jointers. A copy of
manufacturer’s recommendations shall be submitted to the Consultants for approval and
jointing shall not be done without prior approval of the Consultant. Straight through cable
joint shall be carried out by using crimped type ferrule to the conductors. The ferrule shall
then be taped with self amalgamating tape covering the cores upto the armour. A suitable
14
stress core shall be provided. The joint shall be encapsulated in a special cast-resin
compound and cable joint box. Armour bonding conductor and heavy duty clamp shall also
be fitted before the cable is encapsulated in cast resin compound.
10. END TERMINATION:
XLPE cables shall be terminated into H.T. switchgear by using cable jointing kit.
a. Raychem
b. 3M
11. TESTING
a. Insulation resistance of both sections of the cables to be jointed should be checked by a

1000V megger.
b. H.T cable shall be pressure tested with stand a test voltage, as given below, for 15 minutes.
i. 11KV cable 15 KV
ii. 22KV cable 25 KV
iii. 33 KV cable 35 KV
However, local regulations with regard to test voltage and duration of application shall take
precedence over the above.
L. T. PANELS (POWER CONTROL CENTERS & SWITCH

BOARD PANELS)
1.1 GENERAL:
Medium voltage power control centres (generally termed as switch board panels) shall be
in sheet steel clad cubicle pattern, free floor standing type, totally enclosed,
compartmentalized design. This specification shall cover the following types of panels:
a) Air circuit breaker panels - Drawout type with single or double tier arrangement as per
design shown on the drawings.
b) Panels with one or more Air circuit breakers with Draw-out arrangement and switch-fuse
units of non-drawout design.
c) Panels with switch- fuses of non- drawout type. However, the switch-fuse units can have
drawout fuse-carriage if a particular make of switch-fuse is used.
d) The panels shall generally be of extensible type with provision for bus extension on or both
sides as desired at the time of approved of shop drawings.
1.2 CODE/STANDARDS:
15
The panels shall generally conform to the requirements of following codes/ specifications:
a) IS-8623 h) IS-2705
b) IS-4237 i) IS-722
c) IS-2147 j) IS-4064
d) IS-3072 k) IS-2208
e) IS-375 l) IS-6875
f) IS-1248 & 2419 m) IS-6005
g) IS-5082
The equipment shall conform to Indian Electricity Rules as amended upto-date.
The supplier shall examine the provision of these codes and confirm or indicate his
comments.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION:
Power control centres/ switch board panels shall of free standing type, with sheet steel
enclosure having following features:
a) The panel shall be constructed of sheet steel of minimum 2.0 mm thickness. The
internal frames shall be made of structural steel angles or made up sections (as per
standard design of the manufacturer) specifications of which shall be submitted
along with offers.
b) The panel shall be compartmentalised to accommodate one feeder in each

compartment. The main bus bar chamber shall be provided at the top of panel or
bottom of the panel as required. The compartments shall be arranged in section
with metallic/ phenolic barrier in between.
A vertical cable alley of at least 200mm width shall be provided to serve one/ two vertical
section of feeders. Cable alley shall have hinged door/
doors with rubber gaskets. Suitable cable clamping arrangement with slotted steel
members shall be provided in the cable alley. Similarly, vertical bus bar shall be housed in-
between two feeder compartments in a separate bus chambers. The opening between bus
chamber and feeder compartments shall be properly covered with Bakelite/ Hylam sheets
of 3mm minimum thickness. The vertical bus chamber shall be provided with removable
bolted covers on the front and back side. All the interconnecting links to the feeders shall
be shrouded so as to avoid accidental contact, by means of phenolic barriers.
c) Each compartment shall have its own hinged door with concealed hinges. The
doors shall have heavy duty rubber gasket fixed on the inner side of the door. The
door shall have interlocking facility with the feeder unit.
d) The Panel shall have punched openings for mounting meters, lamps, push buttons,
relays, etc.
16
e) The dimensions of feeder compartments, bus chambers and cable alleys shall be as
shown on the relevant drawings. However, the following minimum dimensions
shall be strictly adhered to :
i. ACB compartment : Drawout -600mm wide x 1000mm deep x

900mm
high.
ii. SWITCH FUSE UNITS/MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BRACKER (NON-DRAWOUT TYPE) :
Up to 63A/ 100A : 300mm wide x 225mm high x 400mm deep

250A : 400mm wide x 400mm high x 400mm deep
400A to 630A : 400mm wide x 500mm high x 400mm wide.
(Or vice- versa).
iii. BUS CHAMBER:
Main bus (Horizontal) : 400mm high x 300mm deep
Vertical bus (Feeder bus) : 300mm wide x 400mm deep
iv. Cable alley : Min. 200mm wide.
These dimensions are furnished as a guide and the clearances required in between each
live bus/ link and between bus/ links to the earth (panel wall/ sheet) shall be as per relevant
Indian Standard Code of practice. However, minimum clearance between neutral bus and
earth shall not be less than 25mm. The panel supplier shall furnish detailed sectional
drawings and also arrange to get the panel inspection done at intermediate stages of
fabrication to avoid fault defective fabrication of the panels (however, the compliance of
these specifications shall entirely be the supplier’s responsibility).
BUS BARS:
a) The bus bars shall be suitable for 3 phase, 4 wire, 415 volts 50 Hz AC supply. The bus bars
shall be made of high conductivity aluminium. The bus bars shall have uniform cross-
section throughout the length. The bus bars shall be designed for carrying rated-current
continuously. The bus bars and links shall be designed for a maximum temperature of 75OC.
The max. current density of bus bars shall be as follows:
i. Copper : 1.2 Ampere/ Sq.mm. of cross section area.

ii. Aluminium : 1.0 Ampere/ Sq.mm. of cross section area.
It may be noted that these ratings are the upper limit to which the bus could be stressed.
Suitable derating factors shall be applied to arrive at the correct cross section of bus bars.
b. Bus bars shall be supported on suitable non hygroscopic, non combustible, material such as
DMC/ SMC at sufficiently close intervals to prevent bus bar sag. All bus bar joints shall be
provided with high tensile steel bolts (electro plated with suitable metal such as Nickel/
Cadmium), spring washer and nuts so as to ensure good contact. Alternatively,
electroplated/ tinned brass bolts shall be used. The joints shall be formed with fish-plates
on either side of bus bar to provide adequate contact area. Bus supports shall be provided
on either side of joints (max. unsupported distance from the joint 400mm)
17
c. Power shall be distributed to feeders in dual section by a set of vertical bus bars
(Phases+neutral). Individual module shall be connected to the vertical bus bars through
sleeved connections.
d. Bus bars shall be insulated with PVC sleeves (heat shrink type) with colour coding (Red/
Blue/ Yellow/ Black).
e. The bus bars and their supports shall be able to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses
due to the system short-circuits. The supplier shall furnish calculations along with his
drawing establishing the adequacy of bus bars both for continuous duty and short -circuit
rating. Short circuit withstand capacity shall be for one second. Calculations for spacing of
supporting of supports shall also be furnished.
1.5 EARTHING:
The panels shall be provided with a copper earth bus running throughout the width of the
switchboard. Suitable earthing eye/bolts shall be provided on the main earthing bus to
connect the same to the earth grid at the site. Sufficient number of star washers shall be
provided at the joints to achieve earth continuity between the panels and the sheet metal
parts.
1.6 MOUNTINGS:
Panels incorporating switch fuse units shall have suitable compartments of standard width.
Each compartment shall incorporate a heavy duty load break switch fuse and HRC fuses.
Suitable cable termination arrangement shall be provided for switch fuse/ fuse-switch unit
feeders. Equipment shall be provided with proper fastening arrangements to ensure
vibration free operation. Proper designation as given on the respective drawings shall be
provided for every equipment.
Circuit breakers shall be mounted such that they are accessible from the front of the panel.
More than two circuit breakers shall not be incorporated in a vertical section. The breakers
compartment shall be divided into two parts, one for the breaker and the other for
incorporating associated control gear. The necessary instrumentation shall be provided on
the door of the compartment.
1.7 INTERLOCKING
The panels shall be provided with the following interlocking arrangements:
a. The door of the feeder compartments is so interlocked with the switch drive or
handle that the door can be opened only if the switch is in “OFF” position. De-
interlocking arrangement shall also be provided for inspection.
b. It shall not be possible for the breakers to be withdrawn when in “ON” position.
c. It shall not be possible for the breakers to be switched “ON” unless it is either in
fully inserted position or for testing purposes it in fully isolated position.
18
d. The breaker shall be capable of being racked into “testing”, “isolated” and
maintenance position and kept in any of these positions.
e. A safety catch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the breaker as it is
withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the cubicle.
1.8 PROTECTION AND INSTRUMENTATION:
Protection and instrumentation shall be as per standard specification.
1.9 WIRING
All the interconnections between the incoming, bus and the outgoings of 100A and above
rating shall be done by insulated links/ strips of suitable sizes. Switch fuses and equipments
below 100A rating shall be wired with PVC insulated copper conductors. The wiring for
instrumentation protection and control equipment shall be carried out with PVC insulated
flexible copper conductors.
The Power interconnections shall be carried out by means of bolted connections with
washers. The wiring shall be terminated by using crimping sockets. Wring shall be laid out
neatly in bunches which are fastened to the steel members of the panel. All the potential
circuits shall be protected by fuses mounted near the tap-off point from the main
connections.
1.10 TERMINALS:
All the control, instrumentation and protection wiring shall be provided with printed PVC
ferrules at both ends. For terminating control cables on to the equipment in the panels,
suitable terminals blocks shall be provided. The terminal shall also be numbered for easy
identification and maintenance.
1.11 SURFACE TREATMENT
All sheet metal accessories and components of power, control centres and switchboard
panels shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased, derusted and phosphatised before redoxide
primer is applied. The panel shall be stove enamelled to the required final finish. The
interior surfaces of the panel shall also be painted to required shade. The supplier shall
indicate in his offer, if there is any deviation from the treatment specified above.
1.12 ENCLOSURES
The panel enclosure shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable for indoor
installation. Enclosure design shall be in accordance with the requirements of IP 54 as per
IS-2147-1962. The supplier shall confirm whether this requirement is met and a type test
certificate furnished. If type test certificate for IP-54 is not available, the same shall be
brought out clearly in his offer.
1.13 NAME PLATE
19
The panel as well as the feeders compartment doors shall be provided with name plates
giving the switchboard/ feeder descriptions as indicated on the drawings.
1.14 TESTING
The power control centres shall be tested at factory after assembling of all components and
completion of all interconnections and wiring. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with
the requirements relevant IS Codes/ specifications.
a. INSULATION TEST
i. Insulation of the main circuit, that is, the insulation resistance of each pole to the
earth and between the poles shall be measured.
ii. Insulation resistance to earth of all secondary wiring should be tested with 1000V
megger. Insulation test shall be carried out both before and after high voltage test.
iii. Surface finish and paint thickness test along with bus bar tightening & clearing test.
iv. Functional of equipments test and Secondary injection test.
v. Dimensional, appearance & sheet thickness test.
b. HIGH VOLTAGE TEST :
A high voltage test with 2.5KV one minute shall be applied between the poles and earth.
Test shall be carried out on each pole in turn with the remaining poles earthed. All units
racked in position and the breakers closed. Original test certificate shall be submitted along
with panel.
1.15 STORING, ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING
a. STORING
The panels shall be stored in well ventilated, dry places. Suitable polythene covers shall be
provided for necessary protection against moisture.
b. ERECTION
Switchboards shall be installed on suitable foundation. Foundation shall be as per the

dimensions supplied by the panel manufacturer. The foundation shall be flat and levelled.
Suitable grouting holes shall be provided in the foundation. The switch boards shall be
properly aligned and bolted to the foundation by at least four bolts. Cable shall terminate
on the bottom plate or top plate as the case may be, by using brass compression glands.
The individual cables shall then be lead through the panel to the required feeder
compartments for necessary terminations. The cables shall be clamped to the supporting
arrangement. The switch board earth bus shall be connected to the local earth grid.
c. PRECOMMISSIONING TESTS :
20
Panels shall be commissioned only after the successful completion of the following tests.
The tests shall be carried in the presence of engineer-in-charge.
i. All main and auxiliary bus bar connections shall be checked and tightened
ii. All wiring terminations and bus bar joints shall be checked and tightened.
iii. Wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is according to the drawing.
iv. All wiring shall be tested for insulation resistance by a 1000V megger.
v. Phase sequence/ rotation shall be estimated.
vi. Suitable injection tests shall be applied to all the measuring instruments to
establish the correctness and accuracy of calibration and working order.
vii. All relays and protective devices shall be tested for correctness of settings and
operation by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit.
viii. Functional of equipments test and Secondary injection test.
xi. Tightness of fish plates.
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1.0 GENERAL
21
1.1 Air Circuit breakers shall be air break, metal clad horizontal draw out type fully interlocked
and meeting the requirements of Indian Standards. Breakers shall be rated for a medium
voltage of 690V and rated full load amperes as indicated on drawings. Breaker shall be
capable of making and breaking system short circuits as specified.
1.2 Breakers shall be manually operated with remote operation facility, complete with front-of-
the-panel operating handle, isolating plug with safety shutters, mechanical ON/OFF
indicator, silver plated arching and main contacts, arc chutes suitably designed to provide
larger arc elongation, trip free operation. Breakers shall be capable of being racked out into
‘Testing’, ‘Isolated’, 'Service' and ‘Maintenance’ position and kept locked in any position.
Breakers for remote operation shall be motor operated spring charged. Each pole shall have
complete isolation from the other.
2.0 Technical parameters
The Circuit Breaker shall be of air break type of robust and compact design, suitable for
indoor mounting and conforming to IS / IEC 60947 part 1 &2 with symmetrical rupturing
capacity at 415 Volts as per BOQ and drawings. All circuit breakers shall be provided with
over current/ short circuit and earth fault releases.
The ACB should be designed at an ambient temperature (free air temperature) of 50 Deg C.
However there should be no de rating of ACB at inside panel temperature of 50 deg C.
The Rated insulation voltage shall be 1000 volts AC & Rated impulse withstand Voltage shall
be 12kV for main circuit.
Rated Service short Circuit Breaking capacity (Ics) shall be 50KA/65KA or as per BOQ and
should be equal to the Rated ultimate Short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) and short circuit
withstand values (Icw) for 1 sec.
All 4 Pole ACBs should have 100% neutral rating.
3.0 Constructional features
3.1 Each Circuit Breaker shall be housed in a separate compartment enclosed on all sides. The
Circuit Breaker cradle shall be designed and constructed to permit smooth withdrawal and
insertion. The movement shall be free of jerks, easy to operate and positive.
3.2 Air Circuit Breakers shall be provided in fully draw out cubicles. These cubicles shall be such
that draw out is possible without disconnection of the wires and cables. The power and
control circuits shall have self-aligning and self-isolating contacts. The fixed and moving
contacts shall be easily accessible for operation and maintenance. Mechanical interlocks
shall be provided on the draw out cubicles to ensure safety and compliance to relevant
Standards.
22
3.3 Self-aligning cluster type isolating contacts shall be provided for the Circuit Breaker, with
automatically operated shutters to screen live cluster contacts when the Breaker is
withdrawn from the cubicle. Sliding connections including those for the auxiliary contacts
and control wiring shall also be of the self aligning type. The fixed portion of the sliding
connections shall have easy access for maintenance purposes.
3.4 The automatic shutters shall be earthed and connected to the earth bus.
3.5 A slow closing facility should be available to close the contacts slowly for contact alignment
& adjustment as a maintenance feature.
3.6 Electrical life of breaker without maintenance should be 10000 operations up to 2000A and
5000 operations for 2500A -5000A breaker.
3.7 ACB to be provided with adaptor terminals for better termination.
4.0 Operating mechanism
4.1 The Circuit Breaker shall be trip free with independent manual dual co-axial spring operated
and/or motor wound dual co-axial spring operated mechanism as specified with mechanical
ON/OFF indication. The operating mechanism of the circuit breaker is free at all time to open
immediately when the trip coil is energized. The operating handle and mechanical trip push
button shall be at the front of and integral with the Circuit Breaker.
4.2 The Circuit Breaker shall have the following three distinct and separate positions, which shall
be indicated on the face of the panel.
"Service" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts closed
"Test" -- Main isolating contacts open and secondary isolating contacts closed
"Isolated" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts open
5.0 Circuit breaker interlocking
5.1 Sequence type strain free interlocks shall be provided to ensure the following:
a) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be withdrawn from the cubicle when in the "ON"
position. To achieve this, suitable mechanism shall be provided to lock the Breaker in the
tripped position before the Breaker is isolated.
b) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be switched "ON" until it is either in the fully
inserted position or, for testing purposes, it is in the fully isolated position.
23
c) It shall not be possible for the Circuit Breaker to be plugged in unless it is in the OFF
position.
d) A safety catch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the Breaker, as it is
withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the cubicle, thus preventing its
accidental fall due to its weight.
6.0 Anti pumping
Mechanical and electrical anti-pumping devices shall be incorporated in the Electrically

operated circuit breakers.
7.0 Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum 4 N.O. and 4 N.C. auxiliary contacts rated at 16 A
415 volts 50 Hz. These contacts shall be approachable from the front. They shall close before
the main contacts when the Circuit Breaker is plugged in and vice versa when the Circuit
Breaker is Drawn Out of the cubicle.
8.0 Protective Devices
All ACBs except bus couplers should be equipped with micro-controller based to offer
accurate and versatile protection with complete flexibility and shall offer complete over
current protection to the electrical system in the following four zones:
• Long time protection with adjustable time delay.

• Short time protection with intentional delay.
• Instantaneous protection.
• Ground fault protection.
ACB releases shall have LED/LCD display of Phase & Neutral currents
In addition to above the Release of Incomer Level ACBs (Transformer & DG Set) shall have
display and protection of all Energy & Power parameters, and last 5 fault / trip history and
provide actual %age loading at any instant, Temperature monitoring & Tripping of breaker,
Communication on MODBUS RTU protocol using RS485 port and additional Protections (as
per SOQ) like –Under & Over Voltage, Under & Over Frequency, Directional S/C protection,
Harmonics measurement, Phase Sequence, Maximum Demand, Leading & Lagging Power
Factor etc.
8.0 Type test certificates
The Contractor / venders shall submit type test certificates for Combined test sequence as
per Standards from a recognized test house for each type of Circuit Breakers offered.
24
GENERAL SPCIFICATION FOR: MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
1.1 GENERAL:
Moulded case circuit breakers or fuse free breaker shall be incorporated in the switch
board wherever specified. MCCBs should be current limiting type with trip time of less than
10 msec under short circuit conditions. MCCBS shall conform to IS/IEC60947 part 1 & 2 in
all respects. MCCBS shall be suitable either for single phase 230V or three phase 415volts.
The rated insulation voltage shall be 800V and impulse withstand voltage should be 8Kv.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION:
The MCCB and case shall be made of high strength heat resistant and flame retardant
thermo-setting insulating material. Operating handle shall be quick make/quick break, trip-
free type. The operating handle shall have suitable “ON”, “OFF” and “TRIPPED” indicators.
Three phase MCCBS shall have a common operating handle for simultaneous operation and
tripping of all the three phase. Suitable arc extinguishing device shall be provided for each
contact. Contact tips shall be made of suitable arc resistant, sintered alloy for long
electrical life. Terminals shall be of liberal design with adequate clearances.
1.3 ACCESSORIES:
MCCBS shall be provided with the following accessories, if specified in schedule of

quantities:
i. Under voltage release

ii. Shunt release
iii. Trip alarm
iv. Auxiliary contacts.
All MCCBs above 63A shall be provided with Silver Plated Copper Spreader Links for
enhancing termination capacity
1.4 INTERLOCKING:
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocking devices for
interlocking the door of switch board:
a. Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulation of the breaker.

b. Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in “ON”
position.
c. De-interlocking device to open the door even, if the breaker is in “ON” position.
25
1.5 BREAKING CAPACITY:
The moulded case circuit breaker shall have a Rated Service Short Circuit breaking capacity
(Ics) of not less that 25kA rms at 415 VAC (Ics = Icu), Wherever required, higher breaking
capacity breakers of Rating 35kA / 50kA / 65kA to meet the system short circuit fault shall
be used. All such ratings shall be as per equipment schedule/S.O.Q.
1.6 Protective Release
All MCCBs above 100A shall have Variable Thermal (O/L) & Variable Magnetic (S/C)
protection settings.
All MCCBs of 250A and above shall be of Microprocessor Based with adjustable Overload,
Short Circuit and In-Built Earth Fault Protection.
In case 3 Pole MCCBs are specified for 3 Phase 4 Wire Systems, and the MCCB are with Micro
processor base release with earth fault protection, the Vendor should provide external
Neutral CT from MCCB Manufacturer.
For Motor application, motor duty type MCCBs shall be selected with reference to Type 2
coordination chart provided by the manufacturer.
1.6 TESTING:
a. Original certificate of the MCCBS as per latest standards specified shall be furnished.
b. Pre-commissioning tests on the switch boards panel incorporating the MCCB shall be
done as per specifications.
26
METERING, INSTRUMENTATION AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
The Specifications hereinafter laid down shall cover all the meters, instrumentation and
protective devices required for the electrical work. The ratings, type and quantity of meters,
instruments and protective devices shall be as per the schedule of quantities and drawings.
2.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
a. Current Transformers :
Current transformers shall be in a conformity with IS:2705 (Part I, II and III) in all respects. All
current transformers used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for 1 KV. Current
transformers shall have rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as specified
in the schedule. However, the rated secondary current shall be 5A unless otherwise specified.
The acceptable minimum class of various applications shall be as given below.
Measuring : Class 0.5 to 1

Protection : Class 5P10
Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and

thermal stresses due to short circuit fault of 35 MVA on medium voltage system. Terminals of
the current transformers shall be paired permanently for easy identification of poles. Current
transformers shall be provided with earthing terminals for earthing chassis frame work and
fixed part of the metal casing (if any). Each C.T shall be provided with rating plate indicating
the following:
i. Name and Make.

ii. Serial Number
vi. Transformation ratio
iv. Rated burden
vii. Rated Voltage
viii. Accuracy class
Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection,
maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CTs shall be with copper conductor PVC
insulated wires with proper termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps
and fixed to the panel structure in a neat manner.
b. Potential Transformers:
27
Potential Transformers shall be provided if specifically called for. Potential transformers shall
comply with the requirements of IS: 3156 (Part I, II and III) in all respects.
3.0 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:
a. General
Electrical instruments shall be digital type and shall be in conformity with IEC – 62053-22.
The accuracy of direct reading shall be 1/.5 for Voltmeters and 1/.5 for ammeters. Other
type of instrument shall have accuracy of 1/.5. The errors due to variations in temperature
shall be limited to a minimum. The meters shall be Suitable for continuous operation
between 0OC and 55OC. All meters shall be of flush mounting type with 96x96 sq. mm. The
meter shall be enclosed in a dust tight housing. The housing shall be of ABS Body. The design
and manufacture of the meters shall ensure the preventing of fogging of instrument glass.
Instrument meters shall be sealed in such a way that access to the measuring element and
to the accessories within the case shall not be possible. Meters shall be provided with 12.5
mm height LED display. Suitable selector switches shall be provided for all ammeters and
voltmeters intended to be used on three phase supply.
b. Ammeters:
Ammeters shall be of digital LED display type. The ammeters shall be manufactured and
calibrated as per the latest edition of IEC 62053-22. Ammeters shall be instrument
transformer operated and shall be suitable for 5A/1A secondary of instrument transformer.
The ammeter shall have sensitivity of 5% minimum.
The scale shall be calibrated to indicate primary current, unless otherwise, specified. The
ammeter shall be capable of carrying substantial overloads upto 120% of ratio current
during fault condition without damage or loss of accuracy.
c. Voltmeters :
Voltmeters shall be of digital LED display type as per IEC 62053-22. The range of 400 Volts, 3
Phase Voltmeter shall be 0 to 500 Volts. inbuilt selector switch shall be provided for each
voltmeter to read voltage between any two lines of the system. The voltmeter shall be
provided with protection fuse of suitable capacity.
d. Wattmeter, Frequency Meters, Power Factor Meters:
i. Watt meters shall be of three phase, electronic type suitable for use with current &
potential transformers associated with the particular panel. As per IS: 13779
Accuracy class 1/.5 IEC 62053-22/CB 1P-88.
ii. Power Factor Meters:

Poly phase power factor meters shall be of digital type with current and potential
coils suitable for operation with current transformers and potential transformers
associated with the particular panel. The scale shall be calibrated for 50% lag-100%-
50% lead readings. Phase angle accuracy shall be + 2 degrees/1 degrees.
iii. Energy meters and reactive power meters:

Trivector meters shall be two elements, integrating type kilowatt hour, KVA kilovolt-
ampere-hour reactive meters. The meters shall conform to IEC 62053-22/ CB 1P- 88
in all respects. Energy meters, KVAH and KVARH meters shall be provided with
28
integrating registers. The registers shall be able to record energy consumption of
500 hours corresponding to maximum current at the rated voltage and unity power
factor. These meters shall be suitable for operation with current and potential
transformers associated with the particular panel and can also be integrated with PC
with RS 485 port for energy management system.
4.0 RELAYS:
a. General
Protection relays shall be provided wherever required to trip and isolate the particular
section under fault. All the relays shall be provided with flag type indicators to indicate the
cause of tripping. The flag indicators shall remain in position unit they are reset by hand
reset.
Relay shall be designed to make or break the normal circuit current with which they are
associated. The relay contacts shall be of silver or platinum alloy. The contacts shall be
designed to withstand repeated operation without damage. The relays shall be of draw-out
to facilitate testing maintenance Draw-out case shall be dust tight with a finish suitable for
tropical country. The relays shall be capable of disconnecting the faulty section of the net
work or fault equipment without causing interruption or disturbance to the remaining
sections. The analysis of setting shall be made considering relay errors, pick-up and
overshoot errors and shall be submitted to the Owners Engineer/Architect/Consultant for
approval.
b. Over current Relay:
Over current relay shall be induction type with inverse definite minimum time lag
characteristics. The over circuit relays shall be provided with adjustable current and time
settings. The setting for current shall be 50 to 200% in step of 25%. The IDMT over current
relays shall have time lag (delay) of 0 to 3 seconds. The time setting multiplier shall be
adjustable from 0.1 to unity. Over current relays shall be fitted with suitable tripping device
with trip coil being suitable for operation on 5Amp.
c. Earth Fault Relay:
Earth fault relay shall have current setting of 10% to 40% in steps of 10% otherwise; the
earth fault relay shall conform to specification laid down for over current relays.
d. Under Voltage Relays:
Under Voltage Relays shall be induction type and shall have inverse limit operation
characteristics, with pick up voltage range of 50-90% of the rated voltage.
5.0 TESTING
5.1 Instrument transformers shall be tested at factory as per IS: 2705 and IS: 3156. The test shall
incorporate the following:
29
Routing Tests:
Original test certificates in triplicate shall be provided.
5.2 Meters shall be tested as per IS: 1248. The tests shall include routine tests. Original test
certificate in triplicate shall be furnished.
5.3 Suitable injection tests shall be applied to the secondary.
a. Circuit of every instrument to establish the correctness of calibration and working order
all relays and protective devices shall be tested to establish the correctness of setting
and operation by introducing a current generator and an ammeter in the circuit.
POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT SYSTEM:

1.1 GENERAL:
The Power factor improvement system shall comprise of capacitors and associated
switchgear and control gear as per the requirements so as to achieve power factor of 0.995.
1.2 CAPACITORS:
Power factor correction capacitors shall be MPP- Heavy duty / Gas filled (as per BOQ)
conform in all respects to IS 13340 -1993, IS 13341-1992, IEC 60831-1+2 . Capacitors shall
have approval of fire insurance association of India. The capacitors shall be suitable for 3 Ø
415 V, at 50 Hz frequency & shall be available in three phase units of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 50
KVAR sizes. The capacitors shall be suitable for indoor use up to ambient temperature of 500
C. The permissible overloads shall be as given below:-
a. Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15% for 30 min in a 24
hour cycle.
b. Current overload shall be 15% for continuous operation and 50% for 6 hours in a 24
hour cycle.
c. Overload of 30% continuously and 45% for 6 hours in a 24 hour cycle.

Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in sturdy corrosion proof, sheet steel
containers and impregnated with non-inflammable synthetic liquid. The
capacitors shall have suitable discharge device to reduce the residual voltage
from crest value of the rated voltage to 50 V or less within one minute after
capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. The Power losses of
capacitor shall not exceed 0.5W/Kvar. The capacitors shall withstand voltage of
2500 V ac (power frequency test voltage) for one minute. The insulation
resistance between capacitors, terminals and containers when test voltage of
500V DC is applied shall not be less than 50 mega ohms.
30
1.3 DETUNED REACTORS:
Suitable Copper wound detuned (7% or 14% as per BOQ) reactors shall be provided to
mitigate harmonics in electrical network. The reactors shall be copper wound with high
degree of linearity. The reactor shall be provided with thermal cut off facility.
When used in series with 7% / 14% detuned reactor, the capacitors shall be rated for 480 /
525V respectively. The KVAR shall be selected accordingly.
1.4 APFC RELAY:
Micro controller based relay / controller having required number of steps shall be
provided. The relay shall measure KVAR and display instantaneous value of power factor,
alarms for under / over compensation, capacitor over load etc.
1.5 CAPACITOR CONTROL PANEL:
The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise of following:
a) Power factor correction relay

b) Step controller with reversing motor.
c) Time delay and no-volt relays.
d) Contactor & fuses/ MCCBs/ MCBs for individual capacitor banks.
e) Auto- manual selector switch for either manual or automatic operation.
f) Current Transformers (On main LT Panel)
g) ON/OFF indicating lamps with fuses for each bank
h) ON/OFF Push Buttons for each bank.
1.6 CONTROL PANEL:
The capacitor control panel shall be fabricated out of 2.0 mm thick for load bearing members
and 1.6 mm thick non load bearing member, sheet steel suitably rust inhibited and stove
enamelled. The panel shall have adequate space for mounting the capacitors. The panel shall
be of dust and vermin proof construction with suitable ventilation arrangement for capacitors.
Panels shall be dead front pattern and floor mounting type, complete with cabling
arrangement, bus bars and earthing, etc.
SWITCH GEAR & PROTECTION

Incomer switchgear shall be TP&N breaker appropriate rating. Suitable capacitor duty contactor for
each step shall be used and must be capable of capacitor switching duty at each step for short circuit
protection. Busbars shall be suitably colour coded and must be mounted on appropriate insulator
supports.
All capacitors shall be suitably protected against over current and short circuit by suitably rated HRC
Fuses/ MCCB as mentioned in SOQ.
31
Power cables used shall have superior mechanical, electrical and thermal properties, and shall have
the capability to continuously operate at very high temperatures upto 125 deg.C.
Internal wiring between main bus-bars, breaker, contactor and capacitors shall be made with
1100 V grade, FRLS PVC insulated, copper conductor cable of appropriate size, by
using suitable copper crimping terminal ends etc. Suitable bus links for input supply
cable termination shall be provided
GENERAL SPCIFICATION FOR: MEDIUM VOLTAGE

CABLES
1.1 TYPE:
Medium voltage cables shall be aluminium conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed or XLPE
and steel wire armoured or steel tape armoured construction. Aluminium conductors up to
10sq.mm may be solid, circular in cross section, and sizes above 10sq.mm shall be stranded.
Sector shaped stranded conductors shall be used for sizes above 25sq.mm. The cable shall
conform to IS 1554 (Part I) for PVC & IS 7098 (Part-I) for XLPE Cables.
1.2 RATING
The cable shall be rated for a voltage of 650/1100 Volts.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION
The conductors for power cables shall be made of high conductivity aluminium & Copper /
control cable from annealed high conductivity copper (complying with IS 8130- 1984). The
conductors shall be insulated with high quality PVC base compound. A command covering
(bedding) shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion or wrapping of a filling
material containing unvulcanized rubber or thermoplastic material, armouring shall be
applied over the inner sheath of bedding, over the armouring a tough outer sheath of PVC
sheathing shall be extruded. The outer sheath shall bear the manufacturers name and trade
mark at every 30 meter interval.
1.4 CORE IDENTIFICATION:

Core shall be provided with the following colour scheme of PVC insulation.
i. 1 Core : Red/ Yellow/Blue
32
ii. 2 Core : Red and Black
iii. 3 Core : Red, Yellow, and Blue
iv. 3.5/4 core : Red, Yellow, Blue and black.
1.5 CURRENT RATINGS:
The current rating shall be based on the following conditions.

PVC
XLPE
i. Maximum conductor temperature : 70OC

90OC
ii. Ambient air temperature : 40OC/50OC
iii. Ground temperature : 35OC /40OC
iv. Depth of laying : 75cm
1.6 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING:

Short circuit ratings for the cables shall be as specified in IS: 1554 Part -I. for PVC & IS 7098
(Part-I) for XLPE Cables.
1.6 VOLTAGE DROP:

Voltage drop for the feeders shall not exceed 2% at the design load, Voltage drop for the
branch circuit shall not exceed 3% at design load.
1.7 SELECTION OF CABLES:

Cables have been selected considering the conditions of the maximum connected load,
ambient temperature, grouping of cables & the allowable voltage drop. However, the
contractor shall recheck the sizes before the cables are fixed and connected to the service.
a. Storing
All the cables shall be supplied in drums. On receipt of cables at site, the cables shall
be inspected and stored in drums with flanges of the cable drums in vertical position.
b. Laying
Cables shall be laid as per the specifications given below. The system adopted for this
job shall be as per SOQ:
i. Duct system
Wherever specified cables shall be laid in underground ducts, the duct system
shall consist of a required number of reinforced “HUME” pipes with simplex
joints. Wherever asbestos cement pipes are used, the pipes shall be enclosed in
concrete of 75mm thick; the ducts shall be properly anchored to prevent any
movement. The top surface of the cable ducts shall be laid with a gradient of
atleast 1:300. The ducts shall be provided with inspection manholes and all
direction changes and at required regular intervals for drawing the cable. The
manholes shall be of reinforced concrete either cast-in-situ or precast. The
manhole cover and frame shall be of cast iron and machine finished to ensure a
perfect joint. The manhole cover shall be installed flush with ground or paved
surfaces. The duct entry to the man holes shall be made leak proof with lead-
33
wool joints. The ducts shall be properly plugged at the ends to prevent entry of
water rodents, etc. Suitable duct markers shall be placed along the run of the
cable square embedded in concrete, indicating the voltages, no of ducts and
the direction of run of the cable duct. Suitable cable supports made of angle
iron shall be provided in the manholes for supporting the cables. Proper
identification tags shall be provided for each cable in the manholes.
ii. Cables in outdoor trenches:

Cables shall be laid in outdoor trenches wherever called for. The depth of the
trenches shall not less than 75cm from the final ground level. The width of the
trench shall not be less than 45cm. However, where more than one cable is
laid, an axial distance of not less than 15cm shall be allowed between the
cables. The trenches shall be cut square with vertical side walls and with
uniform depth. Suitable shoring and propping may be done to avoid caving in of
trench walls. The floor of the trench shall be rammed, levelled & shall be
covered with 8cm thick layer of sand. The cables shall be laid in trenches over
the rollers placed inside the trench. The cable drum shall be rolled in the
direction of the arrow for rolling. Wherever cables are bent, the minimum
bending radius shall not be less than 12times the diameter of the cable. The
cable shall be covered with 8 cm. thick sand cushion. Over this, a course of
cable protection tiles or burnt brick shall be provided to cover the cables 50mm
on either side. Trench shall be backfilled with earth and consolidated. Cables
shall be laid in Hume pipes at all road crossings and in CI pipes at the wall
entries. Approved cable markers made of aluminium or CI indicating the
voltages, no. of cables and the direction of rep. Of the cables shall be installed
at a regular interval of 30 meters.
iii. Cables in indoor trenches:

Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches where specified. The trenches shall be
made of brick masonry with smooth cement mortar finish. The dimensions of
the trenches shall be determined depending upon the maximum number of
cables that is expected to be accommodated. Cables shall be arranged in tier
formation inside the trenches. Suitable clamps hooks and saddles shall be used
for securing the cables in position. Spacing between the cables shall not be less
than 15cm centre to centre. Wherever specified, trenches shall be filled with
fine sand and covered with RCC precast slabs or steel chequered covers. Unless
otherwise called for specifically in SOQ, the making of indoor trenches is
outside the scope of this work.
iv. Cable on Tray/ Racks:

Cables shall be laid on cable trays/ racks wherever specified. Cable racks/trays
shall have ladder type or channel design suitable for the purposes. The nominal
depth of the trays/ racks shall be 150mm. The width of the trays shall be as per
the design shown on drawing. The cable trays shall be made of steel or
aluminium. The trays/ racks shall be completed with end plates, tees, elbows,
risers, and all necessary hardware. Steel trays/ Rack shall be painted with two
coats of enamel paint of approved shade over a coat of red oxide primer. Cable
trays shall be erected properly to present a neat and clean appearance.
Suitable cleats or saddles made of aluminium strips with PVC covering shall be
34
used for securing the cables to the cable trays. The cable trays shall comply
with following requirements:
1. The trays shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide adequate supports
for all contained cables.
2. It shall not present sharp edged, burrs or projections injurious to the insulation
of the wiring/ cables.
3. If made of metal, it shall be adequately protected against corrosion or shall be

made of corrosion resistant material.
4. It shall have side rails or equivalent structural members.
5. It shall include fittings or other suitable means for changes in direction and
elevation of runs.
1.9 INSTALLATION
1. Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Trays shall be supported properly
from the building structure. The entire cable tray system shall be rigid.
2. Each run of the cable tray shall be completed before the installation of cables.
3. In portion where additional protection is required, non combustible covers/

enclosures shall be used.
4. Cable tray shall be exposed and accessible.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR: MEDIUM VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1.1 General:
Distribution boards for Power & light circuit distribution shall be factory built and shall be
suitable for 415volts, 3phase or 230 volts single phase supply as specified in BOQ. The
voltage drop at the distribution level should not exceed 3% of the total power usage. The
distribution boards shall conform to IS 8623 (for factory built assemblies).
1.2 Makes:
Makes of DB’s shall be as per Acceptable Material / Approved List.
1.3 Type
The following boards shall be of cabinet design, totally enclosed and shall provide
protection against ingress to IP 42 of IS 2147. Only those types of DBs which have been type
tested and passed by a national laboratory for IP 42 shall be offered.
35
However, if none of the type available from the approved makes to meet the above
requirements, alternative makes can be offered with technical literature and copy of test
certificate.
1.4 Components:
Distribution boards shall generally be provided with the following major components:
a. Miniature circuit breeders

b. Earth leakage circuit breakers
c. Bus Bars
d. Neutral links/bus
e. Earth Bus
1.5 Miniature Circuit Breakers:

MCBs shall generally conform to IS 8828. The breaking capacity of MCBs shall not be less
than 10kA the miniature circuit breakers shall suitable for snap fixing on a standard DIN rail.
The MCBs shall be suitable for operating under full load under ambient temperature
conditions (i.e. -10OC to 55OC in India. MCBs shall have terminals suitable for receiving
aluminium cables of adequate cross section. (Upto 32A rating 16sq.mm. & 40, 50, 63A
35sq.mm cable). Three phase MCB’s shall have common trip bar so that all the poles make
and break simultaneously.
1.6 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers:

Earth leakage circuit breakers shall be used as incomers in distribution boards wherever
specially called for in SOQ, ELCB shall be suitable for incorporation in standard DB
manufactured by the approved manufacturers. ELCBs shall be of core balance type and shall
not cause nuisance tripping. The ELCB shall be rated for 100mA fault circuit tripping. ELCB
shall be provided with a test lamp and push button to test the healthiness of the circuit
1.7 Bus Bars:

The bus bars shall be of copper and duly tinned or plated. The bus bar rating shall be atleast
100A as per manufacturers design.
Single phase DBs shall have Bus bars solidly anchored with single pole MCBs of specified
ratings. The bus bars shall be fully shrouded. The bus bars shall be able to accept single,
double or triple pole MCBs.
Three phase DBs shall have single piece bus bar and coupling link avoiding drilling and
bolting of bus bars.
However, if the above ‘unique bus bars’ system is not available from the approved
manufacturers alternative makes can be offered with full technical particulars.
1.8 Cabinet:
The DB cabinet shall be made of atleast 1.6 mm thick sheet steel duly stove enamelled or
powder coated (as per standard manufacturing product). The cabinet shall be suitable for
either recess mounting or surface mounting.
36
The cabinet shall be provided with conduit cable entry knock-outs at top and bottom or top
and bottom plates shall be of detachable construction. The cabinet shall be dust and vermin
proof with proper gaskets for the front door.
The DB cabinet and internal mounting arrangements shall be such that the entire bus and
MCB assembly could be easily detachable from the cabinet.
1.9 DIRECTORY
Distribution boards shall be provided with a write and protect directory indicating the area
of loads served by each circuit breakers, the rating of breakers, size of conductors, etc. The
directory shall be mounted in front of cabinet with an acrylic door.
1.10 INSTALLATION:
Distribution boards shall be surface mounted or recessed mounted as required. DBs shall be
mounted at the locations as shown on the approved execution drawings.
Surface boards shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clamps and bolts. All the cables/
conduits shall be properly terminated using glands/ check nuts etc. Wiring shall be
terminated properly using crimping lugs/ sockets & PVC identification ferrules. Distribution
boards shall be bonded to the earth at least on two points using brass bolts & lugs. Suitable
name plate and danger plate, indicating the voltage shall be fixed to the front cover.
1.11 TESTING:
Distribution boards shall be tested at factory as per IS 8623 and original test certificate shall
be furnished.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR: MEDIUM VOLTAGE

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(Internal lighting & Power Wiring)
1.1 GENERAL:
Medium voltage distribution system shall be applicable for wiring 3Phase, 4 wire 415 Volts,
50 HZ, AC supply and single phase, 2 wire 230 Volts, 50 HZ, AC supply.
37
1.2 REGULATION AND STANDARDS
The system shall be governed by the requirements of IS: 732 and I.E Rules and NEC. IS
standards and Codes applicable for medium voltage distribution is also listed in
specification.
1.3 REGID STEEL/PVC CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES:
1.3.1 Rigid ERW steel/PVC conduit (as per SOQ) shall be screwed, sheet steel electric resistance
welded and black stove enamelled (outside) and shall conform to IS 9537 Part I.
1.3.2 Makes of DB’s shall be as per Acceptable Material / Approved List.
1.3.3 In case, any of the above makes does not bear ISI certification mark the contractor shall
furnish a list of makes, which bear ISI certification mark, to choose from.
1.3.4 The conduit shall be routine tested at the works as per IS specifications and original test
certificate furnished along with each major consignment delivered. The engineer-in-charge
will determine size of the consignments requiring the original test certificate.
1.3.5 In general, conduits shall be of good quality and shall form to the following requirements:
a. Shall be free from welding burrs.

b. Wall thickness shall be uniform as far as possible.
c. Ends shall be screwed.
1.3.6 Conduit accessories such as bends, inspection tees, round junction boxes, elbows, draw
boxes etc. shall be of good quality and shall generally in conformity with IS specifications.
The fittings and accessories shall have threads or shall have internally tapped spouts.
Junction boxes/ inspection boxes shall have suitable covers with screws.
1.3.7 Installation of conduits:
a. Open/ Surface conduit system:
Wherever, specifically called for, surface conduit system shall be adopted. Conduits
shall be run in square and symmetrical lines. Before the conduits are installed the
exact route shall be marked at site and approval of the engineer shall be obtained.
Conduits shall be fixed by saddles, secured to suitable raw plugs, at an interval of not
more than 0.6 meter. Wherever couplers, bends or similar fittings are used, the
saddles shall be provided on either side at a distance as directed by the engineer-in-
charge. Conduits shall be jointed by means of screwed couplers and screwed
accessories only. In long distance, straight runs of conduit inspection type couplers or
running type couplers with jamnut shall be provided,. Threading shall be long enough
to accommodate pipes to the full threaded portion of the couplers and accessories.
Cut ends of conduits shall have neither sharp edges nor any burrs left to avoid damage
to the insulation of the conductors. The cut ends/edges shall be filed before
installation.
38
Bends in conduit run shall be done by bending conduits by pipe bending machine or
any other suitable device as far as possible. Bends which cannot be made by a pipe
bends shall be accomplished by introducing solid bends, inspection bends or cast iron
inspection box. Not more than two equivalent 90O bends shall be used in a conduit run
from the outlet to outlet.
All the conduit openings shall be properly plugged with PVC stoppers/ bushes. A
breather-drainer shall be provided in the lowest position of the conduit system. The
conduits shall be adequately protected against rust by applying two coats of approved
synthetic enamel paint after the installation is completed.
Wherever conduits terminate into point control box, outlet box, distribution board,
etc. conduits shall be rigidly connected to the box/board with check nuts on either
side of the entry to ensure proper electrical and mechanical continuity.
b. Recessed Conduit System:
All the conduits including, bends, unions, junction boxes etc. shall be cleaned and
painted with one coat of bituminous paint before they are fixed in position. Conduits
which are to be taken in the ceiling slab shall be laid on the prepared shuttering work
of the ceiling slab before concrete is poured. The conduits shall be properly threaded
and screwed into sockets, bends, junction boxes, outlet boxes. The conduits in ceiling
slab shall be straight as far as possible to facilitate easy drawing of wires through
them. Before conduits are laid in the ceiling the position of outlet points, point control
boxes, Junction boxes shall be set-out clearly so as to minimize offset and bends.
Conduits recessed in walls shall be secured rigidly by means of steel hooks/ staples at
intervals as directed by the engineer. Before conduit is concealed in the walls, all
chases, grooves shall be neatly made to proper dimensions to accommodate the
required number of conduits. The outlet for drawing wires and proper size earth
continuity wire shall be run throughout the length of the conduit with the earth wire
being efficiently fastened to the conduit by means of special clamps. Copper clamps
shall be used for copper earth wire and GI clamps for GI wires.
1.4 CABLE TRUNKING/ RACEWAYS:
1.4.1 Cable trunking or raceways shall be of sheet steel construction or G.I. sheet. The thickness
of sheet steel shall not be less than 16 gauge or as per Mentioned in S.O.Q. The sheet steel
before fabrication shall be given a rigorous anticorrosive treatment. The trunking shall be
provided with removable, covers of 1 meter length. The trunkings shall be supplied in
suitable lengths. However, the maximum length of a single trunking shall not exceed 6
metre. The trunking shall be complete with 90O bends 145O bends, adopters, tee-pieces,
couplers etc. Removable cable retainers shall be provided wherever required.
1.4.2 INSTALLATION
Trunking/ raceways shall be installed in readily accessible places. Trunking shall be

supported at regular intervals of 1.0 metre to 2.0 metres as required. Trunking shall be
aligned properly during the erection to present a neat appearance. Standard lengths of
trunkings shall be jointed together by suitable couplers. Wherever required right angles
bends, 145 O bends, tees, etc. shall be provided in the run of cable trunk/ raceways.
39
Trunking shall be so arranged that not more than 30 cables run in any section. However,
not more than 60% of cross-sectional area of the raceway shall be occupied by the
conductors at any section. Trunking/raceways shall be bonded to the earth by a suitable
size earth continuity conductor. Trunking shall be painted with two coats of approved
synthetic enamel paint.
1.5 ENCLOSURE FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES:
Enclosure for electrical accessories such as switches, sockets, fan regulators, etc. shall be
mild steel conforming to IS: 5133 Part-I. The dimensions of the enclosures shall be as per
clauses 3.1 to 6.3.1 of IS: 5133. The wall thickness of MS enclosures shall be not less than
1.6mm wherever specially called for; galvanised sheet steel boxes shall be provided. The
enclosure boxes shall be provided with a minimum of four fixing lugs located conveniently
for fixing the covers. All fixing lugs shall have tapped holes to take machined brass screws.
1.5.1 Sufficient number of knockouts of 38mm/32mm/ 25mm/ 20mm dia shall be provided for
conduit entries. Enclosures shall be sufficiently strong to resist mechanical damage under
normal service conditions. Provisions shall be made for bonding the enclosures to the
earth. The enclosures shall be adequately protected against rust and corrosion both inside
and outside with suitable air drying paint. The enclosures shall be provided with 3mm
thick phenolic laminated cover for mounting switches, sockets, etc. wherever different
phase conductors are brought into the same enclosure, phase barriers shall be provided.
Phase barriers shall be of MS of hylam inserted in the box with slide-fit arrangement.
Alternatively, boxes could be partitioned during construction.
1.6 WIRING CONDUCTOR
16.1. All wiring conductors shall be FRLS PVC insulated, standard copper conductors of 1100V
Grade. Wiring conductors shall conform in all respects to IS: 694 (Latest Edition). Solid
conductors may be used if specifically called for.
The current ratings for wiring conductors shall be based on the following parameters.
i. Ambient temperature - 400C

ii. Conductor temperature - 700C
Wiring Conductor shall be supplied in Red, Black, Yellow & Blue colours for easy
identification of wires. The wiring conductors shall be supplied in sealed coils of standard
length. The wiring conductor shall bear manufacturer’s trade mark, name, voltage grade &
size etc.
1.6.2 Installation of wiring conductors/ cables
The wiring conductors shall not be drawn into the conduits until the works of any nature
that may cause damage to the wires are completed. Before drawing the wires the conduits
shall be thoroughly cleaned, drained and ventilated. Proper care shall be taken in pulling
the wires. The installation and termination of wires shall be carried out with due regard to
the followings:
40
a. While drawing the wiring conductors, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and
kinks which cause breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp ends in the
conduit system.
b. Insulation shall be shaved off like sharpening a pencil.
c. Strands of the wires shall not be cut for connecting to the terminals or lugs. The
terminals shall have adequate cross section to take all the strands.
d. Ends of the wiring conductors shall be terminated by using crimping sockets.

Soldering of sockets shall not be done unless otherwise approved by the engineer-
in-charge.
e. Brass flat washers of large area shall be used for bolted terminals.
f. Bimetallic connectors should be used wherever copper conductors are tapped from
aluminium mains or vice-versa.
1.6.3 Wiring for power and lighting circuits shall be carried out in separate and distinct wiring
system. Wiring for emergency system shall also be carried out in a separate and distinct
wiring system. Balancing of circuits in a three phase system shall be arranged before the
installation is taken up.
1.6.4 The wiring system envisaged is generally shown on the layout drawing and line diagrams,
however, a brief account of the general wiring system is given below:
a. Sub mains wiring - Wiring from switch boards to the individual distribution boards.
b. Circuit Wiring - Wiring from switch boards to the individual distribution boards.
c. Power Wiring - Wiring from DBs to the power socket outlets.
1.6.5 The sub main wiring shall be either in 3 Phase 4 wire, or Single Phase, 2 wire system. Each
sub main wiring circuit shall also have its own copper earth continuity wire. The number
and size of copper earth continuity wire. The number and size of copper earth continuity
wire shall be as per the detailed drawings and specification.
1.6.6 Circuit wiring shall generally be of single phase however, a maximum of 3 to 4 single phase
circuits belonging to the same phase/ pole could be installed in the same conduit or
raceway. Each circuit wiring shall be provided with suitable copper earth continuity
conductor as per Earthing specifications. Not more than ten light points/ fan points shall
be grouped on one lighting circuit. The load per circuit shall not exceed 800 Watts. The
minimum size of conductor for wiring of lighting circuits shall not less than 2.5sq.mm. in
case of copper conductor. Power wiring shall not have more than two sockets connected
to one circuit. 4.0sq.mm. copper conductors shall be used upto the power socket. All the
wiring shall be carried out in looping-in-loop system.
The maximum number of various size conductors that could be drawn in various sizes of
conduits shall be as per table II of IS: 732 (Latest Edition). The wiring shall be colour coded
for easy identification of phases and neutral. The following colour code shall be adopted.
41
Phase : R - Red
Y - Yellow/ White
B - Blue
Neutral : - Black
Earth : - Green
1.6.7 All circuit wiring shall be provided with printed PVC identification ferrules at either and
bearing the circuit number and designation.
1.6.8 The circuit wiring may be separately measured or included in point wiring as per the
nomenclature given in BOQ equipment schedule/ particular specifications.
1.7 SWITCHES, SOCKETS, SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES
1.7.1 General Requirements
Light control switches shall be 5A rating for controlling upto four light points and 16A
rating for more than four light points. Light control switches shall be of modular type of
poly carbonate with PVC moulded front plate & GI boxes design suitable for flush
mounting for general lighting. Wherever specifically called for surface mounting.
1.7.2 All sockets 6A and 16A ratings shall be modular type flush mounting with control switches
of the same rating as that of the sockets. All sockets shall be of poly carbonate with pins
made of brass alloy and plated with a noble metal. Sockets shall be mounted on PVC
moulded front plate & GI boxes.
1.7.3 Industrial type Sockets
Industrial type sockets shall be provided wherever specifically called for. Industrial sockets
shall be totally metal clad with porcelain base incorporating the pins. Socket shall have
3Pins for single phase application and 5pins for 3 phase application. The sockets shall be
provided with suitable metal clad plug top with suitable cable entry. Sockets shall have
metal covers with chain. Industrial type sockets shall be provided with a suitable sheet
steel housing made of 16 Gauge with the sockets mounted in flush with cover of the
housing.
1.7.4 Lamp holders, ceiling roses, etc.
Accessories for light outlets such as lamp holders, ceiling roses, etc. shall be in conformity
with requirements of relevant IS specifications. Only approved make of accessories shall be
supplied, if required.
1.7.5 Installation of Switches, sockets and accessories
All the switches shall be wired on phase. Connections shall be made only after testing the
wires for continuity, cross phase etc. with the help of a megger. Switches, sockets, fan
regulator etc. shall be housed in proper GI boxes with PVC moulded front plate covers.
42
Regulators shall be fixed on adjustable MS flat straps inside the enclosure. The
arrangement of switches and sockets shall be neat and systematic, fixed to the enclosure
in plumb with counter sunk head. For wall plug sockets, the conductors shall be
terminated directly into the switches and sockets. The outlets, point control boxes etc.
shall be set out as shown on the drawings. Before fixing these, the contractor shall obtain
clearance from the engineer-incharge with regard to their proper locations. The
enclosures of sockets/ and 3rd pin of the sockets shall be connected to the ground through
a proper size earth continuity wires as laid out in specification of earthing section.
1.7.6 Sensors
Lighting control for the common area, corridors, Toilets should be done through Occupancy
sensors for the energy conservation, daylight/Lux sensors will be required as per the BOQ.
1.8 LUMINAIRES
1.8.1 General
All the materials used in the construction of luminaires shall be of such quality, design and
construction that will provide adequate protection in normal use, against mechanical,
electrical failures/ faults and exposure to the risk of injury or electric shock and shall
withstand the effect of exposure to atmosphere.
1.8.2 Fluorescent lamp luminaires
Luminaries shall be supplied as per the design specified in the schedule of quantities
(S.O.Q.). Luminaries shall be complete in all respects with basic mounting channel, shock
proof insert contact rotor lamp holders, starter with holder, polyester ballast, connector
block, internal wiring and decorative attachments, if any. The mounting channel shall be
made of mild steel sheet suitably rust inhibited and stove enamelled. A dust proof cover
stove enamelled to white shade shall be provided from the channel to protect the
accessories and wiring from dust and vermin and to act as reflector. Ballast shall be silent
in operation. Ballast shall have a long life and shall be highly reliable. A suitable capacitor
to improve the power factor of luminaries to at least 0.9 lag shall be provided. Capacitors
shall be hermetically sealed.
Diffusers, louvers, etc shall be of opal acrylic or polystyrene diffusers, louvers, and similar
decorative attachments. The attachments shall be guaranteed against decolourization,
warping and deformation under continuous operation. Fluorescent lamps shall conform to
BS: 1853 in all respects. Fluorescent lamps shall be of bi-pin pattern. The colour of the light
shall be white or cool day light, as required. Unless otherwise specified, the lamps shall be
of 40W, 36W or 28W and 1200mm long. Luminaires shall be provided with an earthing
terminal for bonding the body of the luminaire to earth. Luminaires shall be installed as
specified on the drawing. Wherever luminaires are fixed on the false ceiling, suitable
supporting and fixing arrangements independent of the frame work of false ceiling shall be
provided. Suspended luminaries shall be provided with swivel type hangers, comprising of
suspension pipes, swivel sockets, screws, bolts etc., for installing the luminaires.
Luminaires shall be suspended true to alignment, plumb and level and capable of resisting
all lateral and vertical forces. Lead-in-wires shall be protected from abrasion. Erection of
43
fixtures shall include assembling of all components of the fixtures such as chokes,
condensers, starters, decorative attachments, etc.
1.8.3 Incandescent lamp luminaires
Incandescent lamp luminaires shall be supplied as per the design and type mentioned in
the schedule of quantities (S.O.Q.). Incandescent lamp luminaires shall be provided with
lamp holders suitable for lamps with standard bayonet cap upto 200 watts. For luminaires
suitable for lamps above 200 Watts, holders to suit Edison screw or Goliath screw caps
shall be provided with lamp holders with cord grips. Incandescent lamp luminaires shall be
complete with reflector shade, decorative attachment (if any) and cover as specified any
required. Incandescent lamps shall conform in all respects to BS: 161.
1.8.3 Light Track
Light tracks, wherever required, shall be suitable for flush mounting with all mounting
accessories. The light track shall consist of an extruded aluminium section with two
insulated copper conductors on either side, tack adopter/current collectors for fixing the
luminaires, and the accessories. Live end and couplers shall be die-cast aluminium with
injection moulded ends, cover and connectors. The current collector/adopter fitting shall
be suitable for sliding on the light track with locking arrangement in any position for
engaging the live conductors and earthing the track adopter/ current collector.
1.9 FANS
1.9.1 Ceiling fans
Ceiling Fans shall conform to IS: 374 (Latest Edition) all respects fan shall be smooth and
silent in operation. The fan motor shall be a capacitor type motor with internal starter and
external rotor pattern. The blades shall be made of aluminium sheets painted in off white
shade. The design and construction of blades shall be such that maximum quantity of air is
displaced in smooth manner. The motor and blades shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. The fans shall be provided with ball bearing which is accessible for lubrication.
The ceiling fan shall be provided with rubber shackle and a down rod of at least 12” long.
The suspension arrangement shall be jointed to the fan motor by means of a thread joint
and a safety locking arrangement. Fans shall be provided with bottom cover and a top
canopy. A regulator for 5 speed operation and stop shall be provided with every fan.
Electronic stepless regulators shall be provided, if specified. Ceiling fans shall be
suspended from the special hooks or special fan hook boxes. Where hooks are used the
wiring to the fan shall be from a ceiling rose. Wherever special fan hook boxes are used,
the fan wiring shall be terminated in porcelain/ PVC auto way connector. Lead-in-wires
shall have cross-section area of not less than 1.5mm (Copper).
1.9.2 Exhaust Fans
Propeller type exhaust fan shall conform to IS: 2312 (Latest Edition) in all respects. The
motor shall be of die cast aluminium case. The fan motor shall be of sq. cage induction
design. Single phase motors shall be capacitor-start and run type. Exhaust fans be
44
provided with a special anticorrosive treatment to withstand normal concentrations of
chemical fumes in the environment.
The fan shall be designed to withstand the effects of moisture under normal conditions of
use. The design of motor and its windings shall be such that moisture in surrounding is not
absorbed by the winding. Exhaust fans shall be complete with mounting rings, ring arms
and a resilient suspension. The motor and blades shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. The blades shall be of mild steel sheets and so designed that they operate
smoothly with minimum noise. The fans shall be finished to be a glossy gray shade with
approved enamel paint. The fans shall also be provided with gravity louvers for exhaust
arrangement or bird screen for inlet arrangement.
Exhaust fans shall be fixed at the locations shown on the drawings. The fans shall be fixed
by means of rag bolts grouted in wall. Exhaust fan be connected to the exhaust fan point
by means of a flexible cord.
1.10 POINT WIRING
Point wiring shall commence from the first point control box/ local control box for the
points connected to the same circuit. Point wiring for lights, fans, 5A sockets, call bells, etc.
shall be carried out with copper conductor PVC insulated wires of 1.5 sq.mm cross section
or as per SOQ. The point wiring shall be inclusive of 20mm/ 25mm/ 32mm sheet steel
conduits of standard and approved make (as specified herein-before) along with approved
quality conduit accessories such as bends, inspection bends, reducers, junction boxes, etc.
together with wiring accessories such as switches, ferrules, PVC bushes, connectors, point
control boxes (enclosure for electrical accessories) etc. point wiring shall be provided with
1.5sq. mm. PVC insulated copper earth continuity wire for earthing 3rd point of sockets,
luminaries and fan fixtures. Light control shall be either single, twin or multiple points
controlled by a switch as specified.
1.11 TESTING AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

1.11.1 Testing and installation shall be as per IS : 732-1963
a. The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth and the whole
system of conductors or any section thereof with all fuses in places and all switches
closed and except in earthed concentric wiring all lamps in position or both poles of
the installation otherwise electrically connected together, where a direct current
pressure of not less than twice the working pressure, provided that it need not exceed
500 Volts for medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from the three
wires (A.C. or D.C) or a poly phase system the neutral pole of which is connected to
earth direct or through added resistance, the working pressure shall be deemed to be
that which is maintained between the outer or phase conductor and the neutral.
b. The insulation resistance measured as above shall not be less than 50 divided by the
number of points on the circuits provided that the whole installation shall be required
to have an insulation resistance greater than one meg-ohm.
c. Control rheostats, hearing and power appliances and electric signs may, if required, be
disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in event the insulation resistance
between the case of frame work and all live parts of each rheostat appliance and sign
45
shall not be less than that specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specification or
where there is no such specification shall not be less than half a meg-ohm.
d. The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all conductors connected to
one pole or phase conductor of the supply and all the conductors connected to the
middle wire or the natural or to the other pole or phase conductors of the supply and
its value shall not be less than specified I sub-clause (b).
e. On completion of an electric installation (or an extension to an installation) a
certificate shall be furnished by the Contractor countersigned by the certified
supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. The
certificate shall be in prescribed from as required by the local electric supply
authorities.
1.11.2 Testing of earth Continuity Path

The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and metallic boxes / enclosure of
in all cases shall be tested for electric continuity and the electrical resistance of the same
along with the earthing lead but excluding any added resistance or leakage circuit breaker
measured from the connection with the earth electrodes to any point in the earth
continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one meg-ohm.
1.11.3 Testing of polarity of non-linked single pole switches

a. In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all non linked single pole
switches have been fitted in the same conductor throughout and such conductor shall
be labelled or marked for connection to an outer on phase conductor or to the non-
earthed conductor of the supply.
b. In a three wire or four wires installation a test shall be made to verify that every non-
linked single switch is fitted in a conductor which is labelled, marked for connection to
one of the outer phase conductor of the supply
46
GENERAL SPECIFICAITON FOR: EARTHING FOR
ELECTRICAL WORK
1.1 General
All non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical installation shall be earthed as per IS:
3043. All metal conduits, trunkings, cable armour, switchgear, distribution boards, meter,
light fixtures, fans and all other metal parts forming part of the work shall be bonded
together and connected by two separate and distinct conductors to earth electrodes.
Earthing shall also be in conformity with the provisions of Rules 32, 61, 62, 67 & 68 of IER
1956. These specifications apply to both copper and GI earthing system. The material to be
used shall be as per that give in SOQ.
1.2 Earthing Conductors
1.2.1 All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper or GI and shall be protected
against mechanical damage and corrosion. The size of earth conductors shall not be less
than half that of the largest current carrying conductor. The connection of earth continuity
conductors to earth bus and earth electrodes shall be strong and sound and shall be easily
accessible. The earth tapes shall be joined together using double rivets. The earthing
conductor shall be laid in cable trenches, cable trays or conduits or on cable by using
suitable clamps made of non-ferrous metals compatible with the earthing conductor. The
following earthing conductors and required to be used for various sections of the
installations.
a. All fixtures - lighting, fan and switch enclosures, lighting conduits shall be earthed with
16 SWG bare copper wire or 1.5sq.mm. Copper conductor, PVC insulated wires or 16
SWG GI wire. (As per SOQ)
47
b. 3rd pin of power socket outlets upto 20A shall be earthed with 1.5 sq.mm. copper
conductor PVC insulated wire (As per SOQ)
c. All single phase switches and DBs above 20A and upto 30A rating shall be earthed with
one run of 10SWG bare copper wire or 2.5sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated wire
or GI wire.
d. All single phase switches and DBs above 30A and upto 63A rating shall be earthed with
one run of 8SWG bare copper wire or 4sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated wire or
GI wire.
e. All three phase switches/ DBs upto 30A rating shall be earthed with 2 runs of 10SWG
copper wire or 2.5sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated wire or GI wire.
f. All three phase switches/ DBs above 30A and upto 63A shall be earthed with 2 runs of
8 SWG copper wires or 4sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated wire or GI wires.
g. All three phase switches/DBs above 63A and upto 100A shall be earthed with 2 runs of
25x3mm Copper Strip/GI Strip.
h. All three phase switches/DBs of 200A rating and above shall be earthed with 2 runs of
25x6mm copper Strip / GI Strip.
i. All motor frames shall be earthed by two earthing conductors of specified cross
section.
Earth conductors shall be properly terminated with bolts to the frames of

panels/equipments and provided with crimped sockets in case of wires.
1.2.2 Main earth bus shall be taken from the main medium voltage panel to the earth
electrodes. The number of electrodes required shall be arrived at taking into consideration
the anticipated fault on the medium voltage net-work and soil resistivity.
1.2.3 All the sub mains and sub circuits shall be provided with earth continuity conductors as
specified and connected to the main earth bus. Earthing conductors for equipment shall
be run from the exposed metal surface of the equipment and connected to a suitable
point on the sub main or main earthing bus. All switches shall be connected through
double earthing conductor to the earth bus. Earthing conductors shall be terminated at
the equipment using suitable lugs, bolts, washers and nuts.
1.2.4 All conduits, cable armouring, raceway, rising mains, etc. shall be connected to the earth
all along their run by earthing conductors of suitable cross sectional area. Sprinkler, pipes,
LPG pipes, water pipes, steel structural elements, cable trays/ racks lighting conductors
shall not used as a means of earthing an installation. The electrical resistance of earthing
conductors shall be low enough to permit the passage of fault current necessary to
operate a fuse/ protective device a circuit breaker and shall not exceed 2 ohms. As rough
guide the following sizes of earth continuity conductors shall be used for circuit wiring.
Size of circuit wires/ cables Size of copper or GI earth wires

a. 2.5 sq.mm. 16 SWG or 1.5sq.mm. Cu. PVC insulated
48
b. 4 sq.mm. 14 SWG or 2.5sq.mm. Cu. PVC insulated
c. 6 sq.mm. 12 SWG or 2.5sq.mm. Cu. PVC insulated
d. 10 sq.mm./ 16 sq.mm. 8 SWG or 4.0sq.mm. Cu. PVC insulated
e. 25 sq.mm. / 35 sq.mm. 6 SWG or 6.0sq.mm. Cu. PVC insulated
All Single phase wiring shall have one run of earth wire and three phase wiring shall be
provided with two runs of earth wires.
1.3 EARTHING ELECTRODES: (REFER IS : 3043)
1.3.1 Earthing electrodes shall be designed as per the requirements of clause 17.2 of IS : 3043.
The number and size of earth electrodes shall be calculated so that under fault conditions
no electrode is loaded above its maximum permissible current density. The resistance of
earth electrode shall be as low as possible, the maximum allowable value being one ohm.
Earthing electrodes of either plate of pipe electrode shall be decided according to the
anticipated fault level of the net-work and local soil conditions. Generally, plate electrodes
shall be used for sub-stations and large & medium voltage net work and pipe electrodes
for small & medium voltage net-work and installations.
1.3.1 Plate Electrode (REFER IS : 3043)
Plate electrode shall be made of copper plate of 3.15mm thick and 60x60 cm. Size or as
per S.O.Q. The plate shall be buried vertically in ground at a depth of not less than 2
meters to the top of the plate, the plate being encased in charcoal to a thickness of 15cm
all round. It is preferable to bury the electrode to a depth where sub soil water is present.
Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a GI pipe and connected to the plate electrode
with brass bolts, nuts and washer. GI pipe of not less than 19mm dia shall be placed
vertically over the plate and terminated in a funnel at 5cm above the ground. The funnel
shall be provided with a wire mesh. The funnel shall be enclosed in masonry chamber of
30cm x 30cm x 30cm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with CI frame and CI
cover. The earth station shall also be provided with a permanent identification label/ tag.
1.3.3 Pipe Electrode (REFER IS: 3043)
Pipe electrode shall comprise of a 4.5 meter long 75mm dia GI pipe or as per S.O.Q. with
holes drilled as per IS: 3043 and buried vertically in a pit of 35cm x 35cm size and filled
with alternate layers of charcoal, salt and river sand and connected at the top to a GI pipe
of 19mm, 1 metre long with a funnel at the other end, 5cm above ground. The earth lead
shall be properly clamped to the pipe electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. The
funnel and earth lead connection shall be enclosed in a masonry chamber of 30cm x 30 cm
x 30cm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with a CI frame and CI cover. Proper
permanent identifications tag/ label shall be provided for each electrode.
1.4 PRECAUTIONS:
1.4.1 Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be capable of retaining
low resistance even after passages of fault currents.
49
1.4.2 Joints shall be soldered, tinned and double riveted in case of copper and joints shall be
filed and doubled riveted in case of GI. All the joints shall be mechanically, electrically,
continuous and effective.
1.5 TESTING:
1.5.1 On the completion of the entire installation, the following tests shall be conducted.
a. Earth resistance of electrodes.
b. Earth loop impedance as per IS L 3043/NEC.
1.5.2 All meters, instruments and labour required for the tests shall be provided by the
contractor. The results shall be submitted in triplicate to the engineer-in-charge for
approval.
1.6 SUB-STATION AND GENERATOR EARTHING
i. H.T panels and transformer body shall be provided with double earthing with copper/ GI
tape of suitable size depending upon the anticipated fault level. The contractor shall furnish
detailed calculations in respect of the size of earth conductors and number of earth stations.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MAINTENANCE FREE EARTHING
Grounding System – Electrolytic Maintenance Free Earthing
The effective earthing connection surface should be smooth and free form paints and oxide coatings
A General
1 Self – contained ground electrode (s) using electrolytically enhanced grounding where
specifically indicated on the drawings.
2 The electrode shall operate by hygroscopic ally extracting moisture form the atmosphere to
activate the electrolytic process.
3 Electrode shall be UL ® Listed
4 Electrode shall be 100 % self – activating, sealed and maintenance free. No additions of
chemical or water solutions required.
B. Technical Specifications
Type and Technical Specifications (Long Life Maintenance Free Earthing Solution)
Type Soil Warranty Current Electrode Details Back Test Well

(Years) Capacity Fill Cover
GI / Length Outer Thickness Qty
Copper (feet) (inch) (mm) (Bags
Electrolytic Earthing Rocky 20/30 1 kA/9Se 10 2 2 3 Polyplastic
50
Note: Each Bags Contain 22.6 Kg materials.
1. The specifications with performance warranty and technical spec details shown in the tables.
2. The ground rod shall be filled from the factory with non – hazardous metallic salts to form
the electrolytic process and enhance the grounding performance.
3. Ground rod shall be a minimum of ten feet long.
4. 2Nos 40x5 mm GI Strip at the top of the electrode for the connections and inspection
purpose.
C. Protective Test Well
1. Polyplastic well for non – traffic applications. Includes bolt down flush cover with “breather
ports”
D. Environment Friendly Backfill Material
1. Non – corrosive, electrically conductive and ground enhancing backfill. Backfill will lower the
contact resistance to earth by up 63% when in conjunction with copper grounding
equipment.
2. No mixing or tamping shall be required for backfill application.
E. Excavation
1 Bore a hole in to the earth (minimum diameter 6”) Hole should be bored to allow installed
unit to be as close to vertical as possible.
2. A 14” Hole must be provided for the cover box.
3. Depth of hole must be 6” deeper than the vertical length of the system.
4. Top vent ports must be left open to the atmosphere for continuous air circulations by using
the protective test well provided.
F Installation
1 Remove sealing tapes from bottom of unit only. Tapes must be saved and made available to
the electrical inspector to verify removal and proper installation. Do NOT remove the green
and white “Bury to Here” marker from the top of the unit.
2. Position the unit in the hole. Use green and white “Bury to Here marker as a guide to depth
in which unit shall be buried in TerraFill®. Three bags of TerraFill® are included with each 10’
electrode.
3 Pour BackFill® (Each bag contain 22.6Kg Materials) around electrode in augured hole. Do not
mound backfill past green and white marker.
4. Place box with cover over the top of the electrode so that the cover is at grade level. Use
backfill to stabilizer box around the electrode .This keeps the breather holes free of
obstructions and debris. Top of box should not contact the top of the electrode.
5. Remove top sealing tape ONLY after backfill is complete. This prevents soil from blocking
the vent ports.
D. Connection
51
1 Connect grounding conductor to ground rod pigtail exothermally/ Stainless steel nut and
bolts.
2 Burry grounding conductor 30inch below grade.
SPECIFICATION LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM

EXTERNAL LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM AS PER INDIAN STANDARDS
IS/IEC 62305-3 & NBC-2016
General
There are no devices or methods capable of modifying the natural weather phenomena to
the extent that they can prevent lightning discharges. Lightning flashes to, or nearby,
structures (or lines connected to the structures) are hazardous to the structures, their
contents and installations as well as to lines. This is why lightning protection measures are
essential
Lightning Protection System shall be in accordance with IS IEC 62305-3 & NBC-2016.
Lightning Protection consists of external Protection for the building with Air termination,
Down Conductors and Earthing and Internal protection for power lines with Surge Protective
devices.
52
Generally lightning between cloud and ground creates failures. However inter-cloud and
intra-could lightning also can create potential differences and failures in electronic
installation. More than 95 % of Lightning strikes are of Negative impulse and less than 5 %
are of positive impulse. Positive impulses are mainly due to dry lightning in cold areas.
Current parameters as per IS/IEC 62305 and the effects of lightning are as below
Current Lightning Protection Level

Paramete Symbol Unit Effect
I II III IV
rs
First positive Impulse
Peak Current I kA 200 150 100 Mechanical
Impulse charge QSHORT C 100 75 50 Thermal (arc)
Specific Energy W/R MJ/Ω 10 5.6 2.5 Mechanical & Thermal
Average
Steepnes di / dt kA / µS 20 15 10 Surges and flashover
s
Time Parameters T1 / T2 µS / µS 10/350
First Negative Impulse
Peak Current I kA 100 75 50 Mechanical
Average
Steepnes di / dt kA / µS 100 75 50 Surges and flashover
s
Time Parameters T1 / T2 µS / µS 1 / 200
Damages from lightning strike are due to Peak Current (I), Charge (C), Specific Energy (W/R)
& Rate of change of current (di/dt). Lightning protection is designed to take care of these
effects of lightning and hence the following parameters shall be strictly followed.
Effect of Lightning on External LPS (Air termination, Down Conductor and Earthing)
Effects on air-termination systems arise from both mechanical and thermal effects. Effects
on down-conductors are thermal effects due to resistive heating & mechanical effects in
parallel conductors and in Bends. The real problems with earth-termination electrodes are
linked with chemical corrosion and mechanical damage caused by forces other than electro
dynamic forces.
Sizing and fixing of Materials are selected to handle the mechanical and thermal effects.
Bends in down conductor shall strictly NOT be at 90 degree (right angles) & should have a
curved path of 45 degree bend. Earth electrodes are selected based on the current handling
capacity up to 1 second. To avoid corrosion problems as explained in IS/IEC 62305 (clause
E.4.3.4 and E.5.4.3.2), GI is strictly not recommended inside concrete and in soil.
Effect of Lightning on Internal LPS (SPD’s for POWER, DATA lines etc)
Effect on internal LPS is mainly due to coupling and the rate of change of current. Due to
Very high di/dt of the first negative stroke. The expected problem is the response time of
SPD and the voltage drop in the connecting wires. SPD’s at the incoming panels shall have a
53
response time less than 1 nano sec & shall be of BUSBAR Mounted type to avoid connecting
wire length.
LPL (Lightning Protection Level)
LPL is a number associated with a set of lightning current parameters relevant to the
probability that the associated minimum & maximum values do not exceed the normally
occurring lightning. LPL can be determined by Risk analysis as explained in IS IEC 62305-2 or
can be selected based on the guideline in NBC-2016.
Application LPL*
Computer Data Centers, Military Applications, Nuclear Power Stations, High raise 1
Hotels/Hospitals, airports, essential services such as telecom towers
EX-Zones in the industry and chemical sector, Low raise Hospitals & Hotels, fuel retail 2
outlets, gas station, compressor station etc
Schools, Banks, Residential Buildings, Temple, Churches, Mosques 3/4
LPL levels, probability and basic design consideration:
Class Lightning Lightning Interception Rolling Mesh Down Conductor

of LPS Current Current probability sphere size Spacing
MINIMUM MAXIMUM radius (m)
1 3 kA 200 kA 98% 20 5*5 10

2 5 kA 150 kA 95% 30 10*1 10
0
3 10 kA 100 kA 88% 45 15*1 15
5
4 16 kA 100 kA 81% 60 20*2 20
0
Protection angle w.r.t Height
54
Class of LPS
80
70
0
a 60
50
40
30
IV
I II III
20
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60
H m
Air termination system:
Material, Configuration and Minimum cross sectional area of air terminal & down conductors
Air Termination mesh conductor and down conductors: 8 mm Aluminium alloy round conductor (50
mm2)
Air Termination Rod: 10 mm, 16 mm & 40 mm solid Aluminium rods (combination of sizes) (tubes
are not allowed)
Joints / Connectors / Fixing materials:

Connection materials Connector type GI fixing materials shall not be used
Aluminium to Aluminium Aluminium or SS
Aluminium to Steel SS
Aluminium accessories if connection is between Aluminium materials are necessary. SS

accessories if connections are between aluminium and copper / copper coated materials.
Earth Termination Conductor: 10 mm solid copper coated steel conductor (100 microns min
coating)
Earth Termination Joints in soil: Exothermic welding
GI material for earthing shall not be used as per the recommendation in IS/IEC62305.
If the structure height is more than 60 meters, top 20% of the height of the structure shall
be protected with a lateral air termination system. This is needed because the probability of
flashes to the side is generally more for structures more than 60 meters in height. More
importance need to be provided to Corners, Edges and significant protrusions such as
balconies. Metallic handrails/ Aluminium frame of wall cladding if used in balconies shall be
conned to air termination / down conductors.
In PEB / Steel buildings where GI sheet roofing, air termination mesh / Rod shall be directly
mounted on the sheet. Fixing materials used shall be in good electrical contact with the
sheet, shall not create water leakage.
55
No drilling is allowed in the terrace for fixing the air terminal, if the roof is made of concrete.
Parapet wall is exception to this.
Air terminal holder:
Concrete Roof structure: Conductors shall be securely fixed on the terrace by means of
concrete air terminal holders with suitable fixing materials which is fixed on the roof by
adhesive or cement mortar taking care of varying weather conditions. Plastic air termination
conductor holder is not allowed. The minimum height of this air terminal holder shall be 50
mm to avoid the contact of conductor with water
Metal Roof structure: Conductors shall be securely fixed on the terrace by means of air
terminal holder which is fixed on the roof by metal conductor holder made of Stainless steel.
As metal roof structures are normally tapered at an angle, there are no min height criteria
for metal conductor holder.
Recommended fixing distance of air terminal and down conductors
Recommended distance
Arrangement
TAPE / Strip ROUND
Horizontal conductor on horizontal surface 500 mm 1000 mm
Horizontal conductor on vertical surface 500 mm 1000 mm
Vertical conductor from Ground to 20m 1000 mm 1000 mm
height
Vertical conductor above 20m height 500 mm 1000 mm
If antenna, Chillers or any other roof top electrical equipment is present in terrace, the same
have to be protected by using vertical air terminal after calculating the safety or separation
distance. The vertical air terminal has to have suitable supports to hold it. Wind speed need
to be taken into account. Vertical air terminal must be connected to horizontal air terminal
by using suitable connectors.
At the crossings of the horizontal air terminals, suitable Cross connector has to be used.
Safety or Separation distance: (not required for LPS using structural natural components)
To avoid flash over to electrical/electronic apparatus, this equipment shall be kept at a
distance away from LPS components more than the safety distance as per the following
calculation.
Safety/Separation distance (S) in m = (ki * kc*L) / km
Coefficient ki depends on class of LPL/LPS (ki = 0.08 for LPL1, 0.06 for LPL 2, 0.04 for LPL3
and 4)
Coefficient kc depends on no of down conductors: kc = 0.66 for 2 down conductors, kc = 0.44
for 3 or more down conductors
Value of coefficient km = 1
56
Value of L is the total distance between the equipment to be protected (for e.g. Antenna) to
the equi-potential bonding bar situated just above the ground.
Expansion piece
In order to take care the expansion of the metal in summer and contraction of the metal in
winter, expansion piece with suitable connectors have to be used at every 20m distance of
horizontal air termination mesh.
Joints and Bends

The lightning protective system shall have few joints as far as possible & air terminal &
down conductor have to be straight. Where it is not possible, it should NOT be bent at 90
degree (right angles) & should have a curved path of 45 degree bend.
Down conductor system

In order to reduce the probability of damage to electronic/electrical equipment, the down
conductors shall be arranged in equi distance in such a way that from the point of strike to
earth, several parallel current paths should exist & length of the current path should be
minimum. Down conductors should be installed at each exposed corner of the structure as a
minimum. Maximum distance between down conductors shall be as per the table above.
Test joints:
At the connection to the earth conductor, a test joint should be fitted on each down
conductor at a height of 1 m from the ground, except in the case of natural down conductors
combined with foundation earth electrode. The purpose of test joint is to measure the earth
resistance value. The remaining portion of down conductor (i.e., after the test joint should
be mounted inside a plastic pipe of minimum 3 mm thickness.)
Earth Terminations
For earth termination system, 2 basic types of earth electrode arrangements are applicable.
Type A & Type B arrangement.
Type A arrangement: Comprises of horizontal or vertical earth electrode installed outside

the structure to be protected connected to each down conductor. Minimum Length of
vertical earth electrode shall be as below
Class of Typical Length of each vertical earth electrode based on Soil resistivity
L Up to 500 Ω 1000 Ω M 2000 Ω M 3000 Ω M
P M
S
1 2.5 meter 10 meters 25 meters 40 meter
2 2.5 meter 5 meter 15 meters 22 meter
3 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter
4 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter 2.5 meter
57
If horizontal electrodes are used, the length shall be double. In type A arrangement, the total
number of earth electrodes shall not be less than two. Type A arrangement is suitable in
places where electronic equipment are not located.
Type B arrangement: This type of arrangement comprises either a ring conductor external to
the structure to be protected, in contact with the soil for at least 80% of its total length or a
foundation earth electrode. Ring earthing must be 1 meter away from the building and 0.5m
below the ground as a closed loop. Such earth electrodes can also be meshed. For structures
with extensive electronic systems or with high risk of fire, type B earthing is most preferable
method. There is no limit in the resistance of Ring Earthing if the ring radius of the ring is
larger than 50 meters or 80 meters for LPL 1 and 2. For LPL 3 and 4 this radius is about 5
meters. The overall resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 10 ohms.
Galvanised steel (GI) as earthing material shall not be used.
Lightning Counters: At least 2 down conductors in an installation shall have a lightning

counter tested as per IEC 62561. The counter shall be digital type with replaceable battery.
Battery life shall be minimum 3 years. The minimum measuring current is 1KA (8/20) and the
maximum is 100 KA (10/350). The counter shall be outdoor type, IP65 and shall be able to
record date, time and no of strikes.
Quality and Confirmations
All materials and accessories shall be tested as per IEC 62561 for its mechanical / corrosion
resistant / electrical conductivity. Vendor shall provide test reports along with completion
certificate. GI (Hot dip galvanised or zinc electroplated) fixing materials and fasteners are not
allowed.
References:
IS/IEC62305 – PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING:
Part 1: General Principles

Part 2: Risk Management
Part 3: Protection of structures
Part 4: Protection of Electrical & Electronic equipment within structure
NBC-2016: National Building Code of India – 2016
IS3043: 1987: Code of practice for earthing.
58
LIFE SAFETY & ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM / DIGITAL
VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
a. Provide Fire Detection and Alarm System in accordance with NFPA 72 (Latest edition)
and requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide a complete operable and intelligent
analog addressable Fire Alarm and Detection System with associated communication and
notification systems. The system shall include interfaces for foreign systems, as described
herein and in accordance with the Contract
Documents, and all applicable Codes, Standards and local Regulations, and be approved by
Fire Services.
b. All Plant furnished shall be new and the latest state-of-the-art, products of a single
Manufacturer engaged in the manufacturing of analog fire detection devices for at least 5
years.
c. All software licenses shall be supplied as part of the contract. Renewable & subscription
license are not acceptable.
d. The system shall be supplied, installed, tested, and approved by the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the
Contractor in an operational condition.
e. The subcontractor shall contract with a single supplier for the fire alarm Plant,
engineering, programming, inspection and tests, and shall provide a “UL Listing Certificate”
for the complete system.
f. Drawings: The Drawings shall serve to indicate the general arrangement of the various
Plant and their generic functional interconnections. However, layout of Plant, accessories,
specialties, conduit system and wiring, are diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate
every required device, fitting, etc., required for the complete
installation.
SCOPE:
59
A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed
in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.
Basic Performance:
Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded
on NFPA Style 6 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an
addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part of an
addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.
On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system
Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the
ability to report an alarm.
Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or
outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
NAC speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker circuit
per floor of the building or smoke zone which ever is greater.
Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal
and abnormal conditions.
NAC speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one (1)
speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system.
Two-way telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and short circuit
conditions.
DRAWINGS & TECHNICAL SUBMITTALS
General:
Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is
intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent
compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the
specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.
For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute
equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the
specified equipment.
Shop Drawings:
Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with

drawings and specifications.
60
Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment
layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
Manuals:
Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance
manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.
Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections
between the items of equipment.
Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information
required to properly operate the equipment and system.
Software Modifications
Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system
software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site
shall not exceed 4 hours.
Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify
the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits,
zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones.
The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software
modifications on-site.
Certifications:
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment
manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed
performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment
manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification.
WARRANTY:
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free
from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of
acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labour and materials required to correct any
defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.
POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE:
Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a
factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a
period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all
maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled
maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and
response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not
61
identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be
valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
Maintenance and testing shall be on a semi-annual basis or as required by the AHJ. A

preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the protocol
for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include:
Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations,
control panels, power supplies, relays, water flow switches and all accessories of the fire
alarm system.
Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semi-annually.
Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72
Chapter 7.
POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS:
The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labour to expand the system
specified, if so requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.
As part of the submittal, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and
test labour as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten
percent (10%). This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat
detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor modules and addressable
modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification (list
actual quantity of each type).
The quotation shall include installation, test labour, and labour to reprogram the system for
this 10% expansion. If additional FACP hardware is required, include the material and labour
necessary to install this hardware.
Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labour to
make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not
include the cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or notification
appliances connected to the addressable monitor/control modules.
Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be
accepted.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system
shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems
NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
62
NFPA 76 Telecommunication Facilities
NFPA 318 Clean Room Applications
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 90A Air conditioning & ventilation system
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:
UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9th Edition Listed
UL 268 A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
UL 228 Door Holders
NATIONAL BUILDING CODES

IS CODES
The Video Display Terminal (VDT) shall comply with Swedish magnetic emission and X-
radiation guidelines MPR 1990:10.
APPROVALS:
The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized
agencies:
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc (9th Edition)
The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 9th Edition (Control Units)
The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release
applications. The system shall support release of high and low pressure CO2.
PRODUCTS
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL:
All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the
National Fire Alarm Code.
All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,
schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.
All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly
in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and
supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
CONDUIT AND WIRE:
63
Conduit:
Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state
requirements.
Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not
exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained
within a single conduit.
Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall
not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC
Article 760-29.
Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar
power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling
line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system
shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss
of signals.
Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control
panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP
manufacturer.
Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum.
Wire:
All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.
Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760)
and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of
conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less
than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14
AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.
All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use
with a protective signaling system.
MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:
The main FACP Central Console shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing
Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment
used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors,
addressable modules, panel modules including initiating circuits, control circuits, and
notification appliance circuits, local and remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators,
and other system controlled devices.
1. In conjunction with intelligent Loop Control Modules and Loop Expander Modules, the main
FACP shall perform the following functions:
64
a. Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor modules connected
to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
b. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility by way of
connection to monitor and control modules.
c. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition. Operate
all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed. In the event of CPU failure,
all SLC loop modules shall fallback to degrade mode. Such degrade mode shall treat the
corresponding SLC loop control modules and associated detection devices as conventional
two-wire operation. Any activation of a detector in this mode shall automatically activate
associated Notification Appliance Circuits.
d. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory, security or alarm condition on
operator's terminals, panel display, and annunciators.
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices
or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system alarm LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall sound a distinctive signal.
c. The 80-character backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire
alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected
premises.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log and print the event information along with a
time and date stamp.
e. All system outputs assigned via pre programmed equations for a particular point in alarm
shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or
relays) shall be activated.
2. When a trouble condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating
devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system trouble LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall sound a

distinctive signal.
c. The 80-character backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated
with the trouble condition, including the type of trouble point and its location within the
protected premises.
e. All system outputs assigned via pre programmed equations for a particular point in trouble
shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (trouble notification appliances and/or
65
3. When a supervisory condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating
a. The system trouble LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall sound a

distinctive signal.
c. The 640-character backlit LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the
supervisory condition, including the type of trouble point and its location within the protected
premises.
e. All system outputs assigned via pre programmed equations for a particular point in trouble
shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (notification appliances and/or relays)
shall be activated.
4. When a security alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating
a. The system security LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall

sound a distinctive signal.
premises.
5. When a pre-alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating
a. The system pre-alarm LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric audible device in the control panel shall sound a distinctive
signal.
premises.
66
Operator Control
1. Acknowledge Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or
troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble
LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist,
depression of this switch shall advance the LCD display to the next alarm or trouble
condition. In addition, the FACP shall support Block Acknowledge to allow multiple trouble
conditions to be acknowledged with a single depression of this switch.
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
Signal Silence Switch:
Depression of the Signal Silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification
appliances and relays to return to the normal condition. The selection of notification circuits
and relays that are silence able by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the
confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and
auto-silence timers.
1. Drill Switch:
Depression of the Drill switch shall activate all programmed notification appliance circuits.
The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.
2. System Reset Switch:
Depression of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating
devices to return to their normal condition. Initiating devices shall re-report if active. Active
notification appliance circuits shall not silence upon Reset. Systems that de-activate and
subsequently re-activate notification appliance circuits shall not be considered equal. All
programmed Control-By-Event equations shall be re-evaluated after the reset sequence is
complete if the initiating condition has cleared. Non-latching trouble conditions shall not
clear and re-report upon reset.
3. Lamp Test:
The Lamp Test switch shall activate all local system LEDs, light each segment of the liquid
crystal display and display the panel software revision for service personal.
4. Scroll Display Keys:
There shall be Scroll Display keys for FIRE ALARM, SECURITY, SUPERVISORY,
TROUBLE, and OTHER EVENTS. Depression of the Scroll Display key shall display the
next event in the selected queue allowing the operator to view events by type.
67
5. Print Screen:
Depression of the PRINT SCREEN switch shall send the information currently displayed on
the 640-character display to the printer.
System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to 10 SLC modules. Each module
shall support a maximum of 318 analog/addressable devices for a maximum system
capacity of 3180 points. The system shall be capable of 3072 annunciation points per
system regardless of the number of addressable devices.
2. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and
annunciation panel that shall include a backlit 6 inch or 640-character liquid crystal display,
individual, color coded system status LEDs, and a QWERTY style alphanumeric keypad for
the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. Said LCD shall also support
graphic bit maps capable of displaying the company name and logo of either the owner or
installing company.
3. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without
special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm
control panel.
The FACP shall be able to provide the following software and hardware
features:
a. Pre-signal and Positive Alarm Sequence: The system shall provide means to cause alarm
signals to only sound in specific areas with a delay of the alarm from 60 to up to 180
seconds after start of alarm processing. In addition, a Positive Alarm Sequence selection
shall be available that allows a 15-second time period for acknowledging an alarm signal
from a fire detection/initiating device. If the alarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all
local and remote outputs shall automatically activate immediately.
b. Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel: To obtain early warning of incipient or
potential fire conditions, the system shall support a programmable option to determine
system response to real-time detector sensing values above the programmed setting. Two
levels of Pre-alarm indication shall be available at the control panel: alert and action.
c. Alert: It shall be possible to set individual smoke detectors for pre-programmed pre-alarm
thresholds. If the individual threshold is reached, the pre-alarm condition shall be activated.
d. Action: If programmed for action, and the detector reaches a level exceeding the pre-
programmed level, the control panel shall indicate an action condition. Sounders installed
will automatically activate with general evacuation on alarm level.
e. The system shall support a detector response time to meet world annunciation requirements
of less than 3 seconds.
f. Device Blink Control: Means shall be provided to turn off detector/module LED strobes for
special areas.
g. NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test: The system shall provide an automatic smoke
detector test function that meet the requirements of NFPA 72.
68
h. Programmable Trouble Reminder: The system shall provide means to automatically initiate a
reminder that troubles exist in the system. The reminder will appear on the system display
and (if enabled) will sound a piezo alarm.
i. On-line or Off-line programming: The system shall provide means to allow panel
programming either through an off-line software utility program away from the panel or while
connected and on-line. The system shall also support upload and download of programmed
database and panel executive system program to a Personal Computer/laptop.
j. History Events: The panel shall maintain a history file of the last 4000 events, each with a
time and date stamp. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and
programming entries. The control panels shall also maintain a 1000 event Alarm History
buffer, which consists of the 1000 most recent alarm events from the 4000 event history file.
k. Smoke Control Modes: The system shall provide means to perform FSCS mode Smoke
Control to meet NFPA-92A and 90B and HVAC mode to meet NFPA 90A.
l. The system shall provide means for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be auto
programmed into the system by specific address. The system shall recognize specific device
type ID’s and associate that ID with the corresponding address of the device.
m. Drill: The system shall support means to activate all silenceable fire output circuits in the
event of a practice evacuation or “drill”. If enabled for local control, the front panel switch
shall be held for a minimum of 2 seconds prior to activating the drill function
n. Passwords and Users: The system shall support two password levels, master and user. Up
to 9 user passwords shall be available, each of which may be assigned access to the
programming change menus, the alter status menus, or both. Only the master password
shall allow access to password change screens.
o. Block Acknowledge: The system shall support a block Acknowledge

for Trouble Conditions
p. Sensitivity Adjust: The system shall provide Automatic Detector Sensitivity Adjust based on
Occupancy schedules including a Holiday list of up to 15 days.
r. Environmental Drift Control: The system shall provide means for setting Environmental Drift
Compensation by device. When a detector accumulates dust in the chamber and reaches
an unacceptable level but yet still below the allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a
maintenance alert warning. When the detector accumulates dust in the chamber above the
allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a maintenance urgent warning.
s. Custom Action Messages: The system shall provide means to enter up to 100 custom
action messages of up to 160 characters each. It shall be possible to assign any of the 100
messages to any point.
t. Print Functions: The system shall provide means to obtain a variety of reports listing all
event, alarm, trouble, supervisory, or security history. Additional reports shall be available
for point activation for the last Walk Test performed, detector maintenance report containing
the detector maintenance status of each installed addressable detector, all network
parameters, all panel settings including broad cast time, event ordering, and block
acknowledge, panel timer values for Auto Silence, Silence Inhibit, AC Fail Delay time and if
69
enabled, Proprietary Reminder, and Remote Reminder timers, supervision settings for power
supply and printers, all programmed logic equations, all custom action messages, all non-fire
and output activations (if pre-programmed for logging) all active points filtered by alarms
only, troubles only, supervisory alarms, prealarms, disabled points and activated points, all
installed points filtered by SLC points, panel circuits, logic zones, annunicators, releasing
zones, spal zones, and trouble zones.
u. Local Mode: If communication is lost to the central processor the system shall provide added
survivability through the intelligent loop control modules. Inputs from devices connected to
the SLC and loop control modules shall activate outputs on the same loop when the inputs
and outputs have been set with point programming to participate in local mode or when the
type codes are of the same type: that is, an input with a fire alarm type code shall activate an
output with a fire alarm type code.
v. Resound based on type for security or supervisory: The system shall indicate a Security
alarm when a monitor module point programmed with a security Type Code activates. If
silenced alarms exist, a Security alarm will resound the panel sounder. The system shall
indicate a Supervisory alarm when a monitor module point programmed with a supervisory
Type Code activates. If there are silenced alarms, a Supervisory alarm will resound the
panel sounder.
w. Read status preview - enabled and disabled points: Prior to re-enabling points, the system
shall inform the user that a disabled device is in the alarm state. This shall provide notice
that the device must be reset before the device is enabled thereby avoiding activation of the
notification circuits.
x. Custom Graphics: When fitted with an LCD display, the panel shall permit uploading of a
custom bit-mapped graphic to the display screen. Graphic shall display when all systems
are normal.
y. Multi-Detector and Cooperating Detectors: The system shall provide means to link one
detector to up to two detectors at other addresses on the same loop in cooperative multi-
detector sensing. There shall be no requirement for sequential addresses on the detectors
and the alarm event shall be a result or product of all cooperating detectors chamber
readings.
z. Tracking/Latching Duct : The system shall support both tracking and

latching duct detectors.
aa. ACTIVE EVENT: The system shall provide a Type ID called FIRE CONTROL for purposes
of air-handling shutdown, which shall be intended to override normal operating automatic
functions. Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point shall cause the control panel to (1) initiate
the monitor module Control-by-Event, (2) send a message to the panel display, history
buffer, installed printer and annunciators, (3) shall not light an indicator at the control panel,
(4) Shall display ACTIVE on the LCD as well a display a FIRE CONTROL Type Code and
other information specific to the device.
bb. NON-FIRE Alarm Module Reporting: A point with a type ID of NON-FIRE shall be available
for use for energy management or other non-fire situations. NON-FIRE point operation shall
not affect control panel operation nor shall it display a message at the panel LDC. Activation
of a NON-FIRE point shall activate control by event logic but shall not cause any indication
on the control panel.
70
cc. Security Monitor Points: The system shall provide means to monitor
any point as a type security.
dd. One-Man Walk Test: The system shall provide both a basic and advanced walk test for
testing the entire fire alarm system. The basic walk test shall allow a single operator to run
audible tests on the panel. All logic equation automation shall be suspended during the test
and while annunciators can be enabled for the test, all shall default to the disabled state.
During an advanced walk test, field-supplied output point programming will react to input
stimuli such as CBE and logic equations. When points are activated in advanced test mode,
each initiating event shall latch the input. The advanced test shall be audible and shall be
used for pull station verification, magnet activated tests on input devices, input and output
device and wiring operation/verification.
ee. Control By Event Functions: CBE software functions shall provide means to program a
variety of output responses based on various initiating events. The control panel shall
operate CBE through lists of zones. A zone shall become listed when it is added to a point’s
zone map through point programming. Each input point such as detector, monitor module or
panel circuit module shall support listing of up to 10 zones into its programmed zone map.
ff. Permitted zone types shall be general zone, releasing zone and special zone. Each output
point (control module, panel circuit module) can support a list of up to 10 zones including
general zone, logic zone, releasing zone and trouble zone. It shall be possible for output
points to be assigned to list general alarm. Non-Alarm or Supervisory points shall not
activate the general alarm zone.
gg. 1000 General Zones: The system shall support up to 1000 general purpose software zones
for linking inputs to outputs. When an input device activates, any general zone programmed
into that device’s zone map will be active and any output device that has an active general
zone in its map will be active. It shall also be possible to use general zone as arguments in
logic equations.
hh. 1000 Logic Equations: The system shall support up to 1000 logic equations for AND, OR,
NOT, ONLY1, ANYX, XZONE or RANGE operators that allow conditional I/O linking. When
any logic equation becomes true, all output points mapped to the logic zone shall activate.
ii. 10 trouble equations per device: The system shall provide support for up to 10 trouble
equations for each device, which shall permit programming parameters to be altered, based
on specific fault conditions. If the trouble equation becomes true, all output points mapped
to the trouble zone shall activate.
jj. Control-By-Time: A time based logic function shall be available to delay an action for a
specific period of time based upon a logic input with tracking feature. A latched version shall
also be available. Another version of this shall permit activation on specific days of the week
or year with ability to set and restore based on a 24 hour time schedule on any day of the
week or year.
kk. Multiple agent releasing zones: The system shall support up to 10 releasing zones to protect
against 10 independent hazards. Releasing zones shall provide up to three cross-zone with
four abort options to satisfy any local jurisdiction requirements.
ll. Alarm Verification, by device, with timer and tally: The system
shall provide a user-defined global software timer function that can be set for a specific
detector or indicating panel module input. The timer function shall delay an alarm signal for
71
a user-specified time period and the control panel shall ignore the alarm verification timer if
another alarm is detected during the verification period. It shall also be possible to set a
maximum verification count between 0 and 20 with the “0” setting producing no alarm
verification. When the counter exceeds the threshold value entered, a trouble shall be
generated to the panel.
Central Processing Unit
1. The Central Processing Unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all other
modules within the control panel. Removal, disconnection or failure of any control panel
module shall be detected and reported to the system display by the Central Processing Unit.
2. The Central Processing Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event (including
Boolean functions including but not limited to AND, OR, NOT, ANYx, and CROSSZONE)
programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system.
Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and
shall not be lost with system primary and secondary power failure.
3. The Central Processing Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation, to the
second, of all system events. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary
and secondary power supplies fail.
4. The CPU shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring the use of any
external programming equipment. Systems that require the use of external programmers or
change of EPROMs are not acceptable.
5. Consistent with UL864 standards, the CPU and associated equipment are to be protected
so that voltage surges or line transients will not affect them.
6. Each peripheral device connected to the CPU shall be continuously scanned for proper
operation. Data transmissions between the CPU and peripheral devices shall be reliable and
error free. The transmission scheme used shall employ dual transmission or other equivalent
error checking techniques.
7. The CPU shall provide an EIA-232 interface between the fire alarm control panel and the
UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals.
8. The CPU shall provide two EIA-485 ports for the serial connection to annunciation and
control subsystem components.
9. The EIA-232 serial output circuit shall be optically isolated to assure protection from earth
ground.
10. The CPU shall provide one high-speed serial connection for support of network
communication modules.
11. The CPU shall provide double pole relays for FIRE ALARM, SYSTEM TROUBLE,
SUPERVISORY, and SECURITY. The SUPERVISORY and SECURITY relays shall provide
selection for additional FIRE ALARM contacts.
Display
72
1. The system display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system
operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters.
2. The display assembly shall contain, and display as required, custom alphanumeric labels
for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, and software zones.
3. The system display shall provide a 6 inch or 640-character backlit alphanumeric Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide ten Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that indicate
the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM,
SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, SYSTEM TROUBLE, OTHER EVENT, SIGNALS SILENCED,
POINT DISABLED, and CPU FAILURE.
4. The system display shall provide a QWERTY style keypad with control capability to
command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field
programming. Two different password levels with up to ten (one Master and nine User)
passwords shall be accessible through the display interface assembly to prevent
unauthorized system control or programming.
5. The system display shall include the following operator control switches:
ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, and LAMP TEST. Additionally, the
display interface shall allow scrolling of events by event type including, FIRE ALARM,
SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, and OTHER EVENTS. A PRINT SCREEN button
shall be provided for printing the event currently displayed on the 640-character LCD.
Loop (Signaling Line Circuit) Control Module:
1. The Loop Control Module shall monitor and control a minimum of 256 intelligent
addressable devices and additional capacity for Loop Cable Isolators. This includes 127
intelligent detectors, 127 monitor or control modules
2. The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of
operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable of
activating any or all addressable device outputs) in the unlikely event of a failure in the main
CPU.
3. The Loop Control Module shall provide power and communicate with all intelligent
addressable detectors and modules on a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be
capable of operating as a NFPA Style 6 (Class B) circuit.
4. The SLC interface board shall be able to drive an NFPA Style 6 twisted shielded circuit up
to 12,500 feet in length. The SLC Interface shall also be capable of driving an NFPA Style 6,
no twist, no shield circuit up to 3,000 feet in length. In addition, SLC wiring shall meet the
listing requirements for it to exit the building or structure. "T"-tapping shall be allowed in
either case.
5. The SLC interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all intelligent
detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble
conditions exist for that particular device. Each SLC Loop shall be isolated and equipped to
annunciate an Earth Fault condition. The SLC interface board software shall include
software to automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the
effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The
analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and the automatic
determination of detector maintenance requirements.
73
Enclosures:
1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush
mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime
coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.
2. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top.
3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening
for viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may be site configured for either right
or left hand hinging.
4. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and
future expansion.
Power Supply:
1. The Addressable Main Power Supply shall operate on 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shall
provide all necessary power for the FACP.
2. The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide sufficient power to the CPU, using a
switching 24 VDC regulator and shall incorporate a battery charger for 24 hours of standby
power using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge.
3. The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of
standby using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. The supply shall be
capable of charging batteries ranging in capacity from 25-200 amp-hours within a 48-hour
period.
4. The Addressable Main Power Supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth
detect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults.
5. The Addressable Main Power Supply shall be power-limited per 1995 UL864
requirements.
Auxiliary Addressable Power Supply
1. The auxiliary addressable power supply is a remote 24 VDC power supply used to power
Notification Devices and field devices that require regulated 24VDC power. The power
supply shall also include and charge backup batteries.
2. The addressable power supply for the fire alarm system shall provide up a minimum of 6.0
amps of 24 volt DC regulated power for Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power or 5
amps of 24 volt DC general power. The power supply shall have an additional .5 amp of 24
VDC auxiliary power for use within the same cabinet as the power supply. It shall include an
integral charger designed to charge 7.0 - 25.0 amp hour batteries.
3. The addressable power supply shall provide four individually addressable Notification
Appliance Circuits that may be configured as two Class "A" and two Class "B" or four Class
"B" only circuits. All circuits shall be power-limited per UL 864 requirements.
74
4. The addressable power supply shall provide built-in synchronization for certain Notification
Appliances on each circuit without the need for additional synchronization modules. The
power supply's output circuits shall be individually selected for synchronization. A single
addressable power supply shall be capable of supporting both synchronized and non-
synchronized Notification Devices at the same time.
5. The addressable power supply shall operate on 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
6. The interface to the power supply from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be via
the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) or other multiplexed means. Power supplies that do not use
an intelligent interface are not suitable substitutes. The required wiring from the FACP to the
addressable power supply shall be a single unshielded twisted pair wire.
7. The addressable power supply shall supervise for battery charging failure, AC power loss,
power brownout, battery failure, NAC loss, and optional ground fault detection. In the event
of a trouble condition, the addressable power supply shall report the incident and the
applicable address to the FACP via the SLC.
8. The addressable power supply shall have an AC Power Loss Delay option. If this option is
utilized and the addressable power supply experiences an AC power loss, reporting of the
incident to the FACP will be delayed. A delay time of eight or sixteen hours shall be Dip-
switch selected.
9. The addressable power supply shall have an option for Canadian Trouble Reporting and
this option shall be Dip-switch selectable.
10. The addressable power supply mounts in either the FACP back box or its own dedicated
surface mounted back box with cover.
11. Each of the power supply's four output circuits shall be DIP-switch selected for
Notification Appliance Circuit or General Purpose 24 VDC power. Any output circuit shall be
able to provide up to 2.5 amps of 24 VDC power.
12. The addressable power supply's output circuits shall be individually supervised when
they are selected to be either a Notification Appliance Circuit when wired Class "A" or by the
use of and end-of-line resistor. When the power supply's output circuit is selected as
General 24VDC power, the circuit shall be individually supervised when an end-of-line relay
is used.
13. When selected for Notification Appliance Circuits, the output circuits shall be individually
DIP-switch selectable for Steady, March Time, Dual Stage or Temporal.
14. When selected as a Notification Appliance Circuit, the output circuits of the addressable
power supply shall have the option to be coded by the use of a universal zone coder.
15. The addressable power supply shall interface and synchronize with other power supplies
of the same type. The required wiring to interface multiple addressable power supplies shall
be a single unshielded, twisted pair wire.
16. An individual or multiple interfaced addressable power supplies shall have the option to
use an external charger for battery charging. Interfaced power supplies shall have the option
to share backup battery power.
75
Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote
24 volt power supply or to power Notification Appliances and provide synchronization signals
to visual strobe devices.
1. The FCPS shall be available in two models offering either up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps
continuous) or 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. It shall include an
integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60-hour standby.
2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be
a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs
(two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification
devices.
3. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount back box.
4. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per
NFPA requirements.
5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL standards.
System Circuit Supervision:
1. The FACP shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, annunciators and conventional
peripherals and annunciate loss of communications with these devices. The CPU shall
continuously scan above devices for proper system operation and upon loss of response
from a device shall sound an audible trouble, indicate that device or devices are not
responding and print the information in the history buffer and on a printer.
2. Sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, PIV and main gate valves shall be
supervised for off-normal position.
Field Wiring Terminal Blocks:
All wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type and shall be capable of
terminating up to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed to the PC board
are not acceptable.
.Field Programming
1. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the
need for special tools, laptop computers, or other electronic interface equipment. There shall
be no firmware changes required to field modify the system time, point information,
equations, or annunciator programming/information.
2. It shall be possible to program through the standard FACP keyboard all system functions.
3. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
4. Two levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One
level shall be used for status level changes such as point/zone disable or manual on/off
commands(Building Manager). A second (higher-level) shall be used for actual change of
the life safety program (installer). These passwords shall be five (5) digits at a minimum.
76
Upon entry of an invalid password for the third time within a one minute time period an
encrypted number shall be displayed. This number can be used as a reference for
determining a forgotten password.
5. The system programming shall be "backed" up on a 3.5" floppy diskette utilizing an

upload/download program. This system back-up disk shall be completed and given in
duplicate to the building owner and/or operator upon completion of the final inspection. The
program that performs this function shall be "non-proprietary", in that, it shall be possible to
forward it to the building owner/operator upon his or her request.
The installer's field programming and hardware shall be functionally tested on a computer
against known parameters/norms which are established by the FACP manufacturer. A
software program shall test Input-to-Output correlations, device Type ID associations, point
associations, time equations, etc. This test shall be performed on an IBM-compatible PC
with a verification software package. A report shall be generated of the test results and two
copies turned in to the engineer(s) on record.
It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier /installer to ensure that all equipment
supplied will fit in locations designated on plans and in the specifications.
Specific System Operations
1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of
any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the system keypad or from
the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.
2. Alarm Verification: Each of the Intelligent Addressable Smoke Detectors in the system
may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm
verification function shall be programmable from 5 to 50 seconds and each detector shall be
able to be selected for verification during the field programming of the system or anytime
after system turn-on. Alarm verification shall not require any additional hardware to be added
to the control panel. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector
has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper
operator commands.
3. System Point Operations:
a. Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be enabled or disabled
through the system keypad or video terminal.
b. System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the system keypad or
the video terminal.
4. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic
functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated for the
parameters listed:
a. Device Status.
b. Device Type.
c. Custom Device Label.
d. Software Zone Label.
e. Device Zone Assignments.
f. Analog Detector Sensitivity.
77
g. All Program Parameters.
5. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report
will be generated and printed, listing all system statuses:
6. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a
history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 4000 system events. Each of these events
will be stored, with time and date stamp, until an operator requests that the contents be
either displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one
event at a time, and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed.
The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for
history storage are not acceptable.
7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically
interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a
period of time.
If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above
normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular Intelligent
Detector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional system
printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor
shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.
8. The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a "pre-alarm" condition.
This will be used to alert maintenance personal when a detector is at 80% of its alarm
threshold in a 60 second period.
Network Repeater Panel
A NRP shall be provided to display all system intelligent points. The NRP shall be capable of
displaying all information for all 200,000 possible points on the network. Network display
devices, which are only capable of displaying a subset of network points, shall not be
suitable substitutes.
The NRP shall include a minimum of 6 inch or 640 characters, backlit by a long life, solid
state LCD display. It shall also include a full QWERTY style keypad with tactile feel.
Additionally, the network display shall include ten soft-keys for screen navigation and the
ability to scroll events by type. i.e. Fire Alarm, Supervisory Alarm, Trouble, etc.
The network control annunciator shall have the ability to display up to eight events in order of
priority and time of occurrence. Counters shall be provided to indicate the total number of
events by type.
The NRP shall mount in any of the network node fire alarm control panels. Optionally, the
network display may mount in a back box designed for this use. The network shall support a
minimum of 103 network control annunciators (not to exceed total node capacity) and shall
connect to the network over either a wire or fiber interface.
The network control annunciator shall have an event history buffer capable of storing a
minimum of 1000 events in non-volatile memory. Additionally, the NRP shall have a fire
alarm history buffer capable of storing a minimum of 200 events in non-volatile memory.
78
Systems that do not protect fire alarm events from being overwritten by other events are not
suitable substitutes.
The NRP shall include two optically isolated, 9600 baud, industry standard EIA-232 ports for
UL864 listed printers and CRT's. These peripheral devices shall print or display network
activity.
The network control annunciator shall include control switches for system wide control of
Acknowledge, Signal Silence, System Reset, Drill, and local Lamp Test. A mechanical
means by which the controls switches are "locked out", such as a key, shall be available.
The NRP shall include long life LEDs to display Power, Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Security
Alarm, System Trouble, Supervisory, Signals Silenced, Disabled Points, Other (non-fire)
Events, and CPU Failure.
The network control annunciator shall include a Master password and up to nine User
passwords. Each password shall be up to eight alpha-numeric characters in length. The
Master password shall be authorized to access the programming and alter status menus.
Each User password may have different levels of authorization assigned by the Master
password.
The NRP shall allow editing of labels for all points within the network; control on/off of
outputs; enable/disable of all network points; alter detector sensitivity; clear detector
verification counters for any analog addressable detector within the network; clear any
history log within the network; change the Time/Date settings; initiate a Walk Test.
The network control annunciator shall support an optional Windows TM based program
utility. This utility shall allow the user create an NRP database, upload/download an NRP
database, and download an upgrade to the NRP executive. To ensure program validity, this
utility shall check stored databases for errors. A compare function shall be included to
identify differences between databases.
For time keeping purposes the NRP shall include a time of day clock.
Each NCA shall support up to 32 additional 80 character remote display annunciators for
displaying network activity. These "Terminal Mode" displays will mimic the activity appearing
on the corresponding NRP.
Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)
Each FACP or FACP network node shall support up to two SLCs. Each SLC interface shall
provide power to and communicate with minimum up to 127 intelligent detectors, 127
intelligent modules (monitor or control) of 256 devices. The addition of the optional second
loop shall double the device capacity, supporting a total of 600 devices. Each SLC shall be
capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.
CPU shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to
determine whether normal, alarm, pre alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector.
The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting
for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector.
The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the
automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.
79
SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
Addressable Devices - General
Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address
switches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.
However electronic addressing will be accepted only if all the devices can be fully
programmed for sensitivity settings, pre alarm level etc from the panel with no extra
programming tools and computer shall be used.
Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to
the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.
Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs.
Both LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be
placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition
has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the
system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an
external remote alarm LED.
The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field
programming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust
sensitivity.
Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation
and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors
shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA
Standard 72, Chapter 7.
The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with
tamper proof feature. Bases shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated
at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications.
The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and
report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself
(by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to
identify the type of device .
Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its
designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-
time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal
decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and
allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.
Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use
to identify the type of device.
A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall
report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.
80
Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm)
deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available.
Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)
Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data
to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication
module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that
after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use
of a key.
All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating
instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in
raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.
Intelligent Multi-Co-Operative Sensing type Photoelectric Smoke Detector
The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall be in position to work in advance multi Co-Operative Sensing, on
command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of
smoke density.
Intelligent Multi Criteria Acclimating Detector
1. The intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device that is
designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single sensing
device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a built-in
microprocessor to determine it's environment and choose the appropriate sensing settings.
The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot
obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow smoldering
fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device.
2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity

levels based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then
have the ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls
are moved or as the occupancy changes).
3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the
signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react
hastily in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish
between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the
thermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and
deceptive phenomena.
Addressable Control Module
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation
of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual
notification appliances.
2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1
amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation.
81
3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the
main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote power supply.
4. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a
minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
Addressable Relay Module
1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building
functions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0
Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the
same time on the same pair of wires.
Isolator Module
1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits

on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules
or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop
segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected
zone of the building.
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit

(disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall
automatically reconnect the isolated section.
3. The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall be
totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its
normal operation.
4. The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the
isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition
has been detected and isolated.
5. The isolator module shall not consume any detector or device address from the loop
capacity.
BATTERIES:
The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than
twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level
checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.
If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery and charger systems may be
used.
The Unit shall be UL / FM approved.
82
83
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF CEDA & NOT TO BE COPIED
OR USED WITHOUT THEIR WRITTEN PERMISSION.
15 16
14 17
18
13
19
12
20
11
21
10
22
9
23
8
24
7
25
6
DN
26
5
27
4
28
3
UP
600mm 2
29
Seismic Gap
30
1
79
31
ND
78
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
35
74
UP
36
73
72
37
600mm
Seismic Gap
MAIN ENTRY
38
38a
71
GALPUR
39
UP
DN
70
40
69
GATE 1
41
E
68
PU
D
42
67
43
66 B
A
E
44
PU
65
N
D
D
LIFT
VOID
45
LIFT
64 LIFT
VOID
VOID
C
46
63
B
47
62 A
48
61
49
60
WAY TO MAN
50
59
58 51
57 52
56 53
55 54
GATE 2 MAIN GATE MASTER KEY PLAN

4
692
2225
CONSULTANTS:
5
RO AD 3841
1 Architecture, Structure and Interior Design
OX.) I N
1095
PP R M A Team
6
MA A
8.6K PLAZ CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
RT (
3
2494 Kupondole, Nepal
RPO
R AI
7796
TPU
B H ARA 2388
56
A
PLAZ
2 9
TO 361
WAY
1008
7.0000
SANTICHOWK
4
MANGALPUR-7
140
Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing
92
Design Team
WAY TO HARIYA CHOWK 1172
05
CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
9012
GATE 3 Kupondole, Nepal
7.0000 6.0000
PARKING SPACE
7276
6241
7.0004
6M SERVICE
ROAD
8672
27636
.19
7256
242
164
7.0000
SECONDARY ROAD
AC E
G S P
K IN
PAR
30143
24268
PARKING
SPACE
6.0000
6588
8.0000
15868
18801
PARKING
6.0000
6023
46000
15 16
17
18
14 19
13
20
12
11 21
8872
GROU
UNFI ND LE
10 8872 A1.22
1 NISH VE
ED: L
-1.00 22
A6.20 M)
1027
2
887 7651
8872
TOWER -1
8872
7650 2585
1253
1027 2500 8872
3252 600 1221
9 2400
5482
0
2 765 800 8872
23
887 8072
8351
8.0000 4 W5 1
440
800
GATE 6
V2 W13 8872
W12
A
8072
1109
P
0 4464
1843
450
DUC D7
A LADI T
3000
U
W5
ES TO
8 72
115
2049
T1 ILET GROU 800 8872
88
RAMP
115 DW
685 1 UNFI ND LE
D5
UP
NISH VE
ED: L
B
D5 -1.00 GROU
M) 8072
W5
1000 DW UNFI ND LE
2354
1241 1
24
B VE
0 D4 NISH
ED: L
9775
5 835
76
506 1050 -1.00
6892 ADA 180 M)
2465
P
pU
11000
C
0 146 2.07x 800
22
6100
23 2
51
20
T2 2.24 21 4 25
26 2
m 20 7 28
29
Ra
85297
0 11
T3 19 30 3
72
1 32
1850
80
33 3
8872
8206
18 4 35
ADMI 5512
24313
17
88 ERY
2065
OFFI NISTRA 16
ST2
BATT ROOM
4791
15 DW
(14.6 CE TION RISE
14 13
12 TREA R = 150 1
V3
11 10 D= MM
5X 300
7
9 8 MM
8.20)
4275
P 6
ACKU
5
-1
4 3
CT
2 1
LE LOBB 23
72
98
B ±0.00 VEL-1
DU
GENT
C
(25.7 Y
M
362
TOILE S M LV
80
UP
ROO
L. 3X
T 9.22
46
L PASS )
125
ANE
UPS ENGE LE 44
) ROOM R ±0.00 VEL-1 03
R
HE X 9.5 LT P
LIF
4160 (2.3 T M LV 88
2319
2x
W5
4974 2.5) L. 72
0 (5.3
450 257
80
28
2 2
2175
2394
7 D1
W12
749
88
1375
8300
3000
1430 45
T2
D 00
95
C
1500
FH D3
25
860
2131
77
8250
4425
1540
D1
D10
FHC
72
12
731
ST2'
10
1500 D1 35 54
80
34 3
RY
3 32
1550
6 D7
31
30 2
GREEN
ADMI D1 1429 LE 9 28
±0.00 VEL-1
27 2
17726
OFFICNISTRA
6 25
T
24 23
564 22 DUCT
(22.1 E TION M LV 88
EN
W11
1109
5X L. RISE
21
20 72
0
1
11.67 2 3 4 TREA R = 150 19 1930
D= MM
76
80
UP 300
) 5 MM 18
D
450
6 7
50
OR
8 17
9 10
m
4320
11 12
LE 16
8m m
13
230
±0.00 VEL-1
14
22152 15
2 IT
1700
= 14 0 m M LV D1
1200
SPACE 7
309
MD
1200 515
ER = 30
2319
L.
88 50 IS RIS EAD
0
1035
7 V TR 450
PASS
ENGE
450
10
36
1200
W4
12350
1500
R
1177
FHC (2.3 LIFT 27

GROU
2 D1 2x
'
2.5) ELE D1
ST1
GROU W5
7 EQUI ND/ ME CTRIC
26
D1
UNFI ND LE ROOM
80
(17.2 PMENT DIA
9000
NISH VE D1 1945 D1
ED: L 7X
11.78 STORE 1500
D3
-1.00
UP M)
W4
)
115 BANQ
/CON UET
5
800 6275
0
6863
(12.1 FERENC
MD
A
570
80
1X BANQ
21.35 E ROOM
72
900 983 W3 172
65 STOR UET
BOH
UP CONF ) -1
3
(6.57 E
8728
2135
(10.0 EREN
88
2780
5300 7X CE X 10
72
11.67 ROOM .33

16 9300 )
10329
977 W2 )
B
Y
88
6568
TR
900
570 1992 W2
72
EN
4500
Y
80
50
75
8516 100
BB
65
103
17
97
R
1800 W1
27
D GROU
00
TO
LO
UNFI ND LE 5073
7000
2400
M
27
NISH VE
30
1800 ED: L
ND 6)
-1.00 A
SI
0
10
C
2400 M)
80
8600 W2
VI
18
RA X 1
4
72
1988 DW 121 4974
10 14
88
G W2
0
72
1 6500
0
(3
61
51
570
LE
88
8628 ±0.00 VEL-1 B

UP
19 W3 M LV
76
1988
3
8250
6226 L.
D1
0
0 2400 C P
5
00
D
M
76
1800 W4
RA
M
1 0
L- .
2400 D1
11
8600
7
20 GROU D1 1700
VE VL
34
1800 UNFI ND LE
2
53
D1
D
1a
1200
NISH VE
ED: L
36
5
LE L
11
00
28
4500 -1.00
12
W
RY
M) W4
39296
83
30
M 1992
1200
0 8516
TO
72
21 900
.0
16
983
Y M
UP
±0
5
88
570
MI
ST1
3
ER OO
W
72
00
5300
50
OR
93 3
TT R
264
88
977
00
76
22 9300 900
BA KUP
V
UP
800
Gap
570
55
0 m
D
m
30 m
0
m
C
= 48
D1
4
D =1
BA
2
673
00
6734
D1
E
TR ER
P
Seis m
EA
RIS
mic
23
5
90
pU
50
W
C
27
m
FH
23
m
4
600
30
0
)
M
Ra
9.5
29
V
44
00
72
4
OO
673
X
34
(5 S
88
HI
67
50
.3
LR
72
20
00
3
2
39
D1
NE
R7
88
45
00
PA
D7
P
T1
-2
45
-14
LT
V3 p U
1b
CT
34
CT
RY
DU
5
1
m
06 67
05
DU
W1
Ra
17
IT
34
44
RM
)
67
L
.5
(8.1 OM RICA
HE X 9
VO
2
(5.3
R
.5)
RO ECT
887
30
T2
STAND-4
X9
19672
4
0
00
EL
817
765
112
0
2
34
690
1
D1
67
FHC
W5
79
20
D1
800
39
3
4
67
W2
2
192
8m m
m
= 14 0 m
ER = 30
2
887
RIS EAD
2
TR
31
807
5
34
7
73
815
67
6
PU
TRY
78
ST1
UP
RAM
35
34
60
MD
67
800
49
EN
67
26
6298
26
OR
0 0
D10
110
VISIT
8872
6
8072
139
35
34
8872
13
67
3
111
67
32
0
300
D
7052
9
7795
304 0
450
MD
b
Y4
77
OR
4
673
IT
800
RM
673
0
9
10
1100 1112 854 VO
3675
OBBY
0
P
STAND A
1026
PU
3000
0
RAM
5 NOS OF PITCH
392
8872
ND L
1160
8072
1
5
X 16)
4
673
8872
D10
673
7651
GATE 5 GRA
OM
33
MD
33
LEVE .
(31
L
L-1
ENTRY
W5
BACK ERY
119
M LV
UP RO
15751
800
STAND-1
6735
76
BATT
6734
±0.00
D1
5
1253
1706
VISITOR
67884
8872
8072
6735
8872
MD
L ROOM
7650
6734
D14
W5
34
LT PANE
800
'
4500
D13
ST1
75
UP
RY 4a
6735
VORMITO
7125
3920
6734
4405
TREAD = 300 mm
RISER = 148 mm
8872
7650
26493
DUCT-3
11200
W5
Ramp UP
8872
6735
D7
6734
4500
V3
HER
D12
T2
35
FHC
1630
(5.3 X 9.5)
74
15168
6735
D12
Ramp UP
STAND B
FHC
6734
5500
HIS
8872
11200
26604
T1
TREAD = 300 mm
RISER = 148 mm
W5
7650
D7
8872
V
DUCT-13
6735
3027
6734
600
3914
00
L
ELECTRICA
36
RY 2a
UP
(8.1 X 9.5)
VORMITO
D13
800
'
W11
ST1
ROOM
4500
D11
73
Gap
6735
8872
6734
8934
MD
Seis m
mic
8072
8872
m
ENTRY
RY
4405
600
R ENT
6735
1706
6734
CRICKET FIELD
1
7665
VISITOR
800
37
VISITO
W24
BBY
33
6900
72
119
8174
MD
9301
5
O
673
8549
D10
4
8072
673
ND L
8872
3049
STAND-3
.
3000
3
LVL
EL-1
GRAX 16)
391
1922
P
PU
8
11000
5
3674
0M
LEV
673
1113
0
3626
4
3675
(31
673
RAM
±0.0
0
800
00
38
450
49
b
MD
Y2
01
1076
0
650
405 R 116
38a
ITO
RM
71
VO
Y
8157
3
NTR
35
8072
D1
000 3 2
34
111
67
8872
67
E
CRICKET FIELD
17156
D10
OR
0 0
110
35
IT
67
92
73
2
800
VIS
49
4
6
ST1
MD
26
26
P
UP
PU
39
2
RAM
M
887
2
70
35
8m m
O
UP RY
m
= 14 0 m
807
RO
34
67
2
ER = 30
E
887
67
BA ATT
RIS EAD
6
TR
35
102
CK
B
67
W5
800
34
14
W5
67
39
8480
1
765
M
2
FHC
37
35
D1
OO
40
25
2
67
T1
887
00
0
LR
765
112
5
69
3
NE
67
887
93
1
76
53
PA
HIS
2 3b
55 3
95
12
W5
Y
LT
4 6 R
06
00
UP
O
D7
80
A6.10
17
IT
45
V
-4
7461
17
M
1
CT
mp
35
R
VO
67
DU
50
35
0
Ra
A1.1
67
-12
76
13
00
72
CT
39
55
T2
88
41
DU
3
)
D1
17
D7
72
AL
EL OM 17.
UP
68
Ra V3
88
IC
0 5
RO .1 X
W1
5
60 673 673
94053
TR
8
mp
11
05
(8
EC
7
28
44
C
62
FH
m m
9895
00
m
30 m
2
E
0
STAND-2
= 148
D1
90
6735
D1
0
0
EA =
TR ER
800 900
50
D
93
3a
RIS
00 6735 264
00
1000 9300
4
72
GROU 61
UP
570
30
UNFI ND LE
RY
45
NISH VE 5260
00
88
ED: L
TO
-1.00
ST1
4974 M) 1000
45
72
42
W
UP 570 900
MI
8516
4
1992
1
88
60
1200
UP
L- .
5
0
R
W
67
44
W4
VE VL
4500
VO
00
0
20
83
LE L
1800
D
0 D1
11
8600
00
2400
UP
59
D1
1800
0 M
11
50
D1
8250
P W4 2400 .0
M
±0
76
D
C LE 6226
RA ±0.00 VEL-1 1988
8250
0
M
M LV 8628
50
3
72
L. W3 58
B 6500 D1
76
88
00
102
4974 PLAY
AREA ERS' GR W2
72
61
DUCT 1881 1988

-5 (17.7 OUND
2400 GROU 8600
88
4X WAI
0
2400 57
Y
15.53 TING UNFI ND LEVE

43
W2
Y
80
693 ) TEAM 1800

TR
C
NISH
BB
L
A ED:
D7 D9 2 RO LOB -1.00 2400 )
16
OM B M)
66
(4.9 Y
00
EN
LO
D1 1800
3X W1
00
6.24 X D
30
Leve 8516
1
75
72
)
7
56
(SSL l 1
4500
D
25
(3 M
R
97
AN
: ±0
80
2367
TO
mm
) 1992
W2
GR
900
SI
72
playe 1000
rs 570 9300
(39.1 dinnin
E
VI
1
88
g W2
B
A1.22a D1 7X
8.53 5260 55
RECO D1 A6.22 )
72
(6.56 VERY
TEAM
D1 1000 0
80
X 10 ROOM UP
W3 900
88
.33
) D1 1 RO DUCT 570 800
MD
A
OM -6
1
44
D7 A1.22a
9000
W4
D5 D4 A6.21
LADIE
UP
2
07
12350
(2.6 S TO GROU
65
D1
PLAYERS
9 x 5.9 ILE
2) T D1
ADA D1 UNFI ND LE
'
8
ST1
D5 (2.3
4 x 2.1 D1 NISH VE
ED: L
RY
0)
50
W5 D1 -1.00
M)
72
BANQ
DOPIN
STOR UET
W4
m
T 7
8m m
EN 36
CONT G VIP
88
LEGEND:
LO LE
GENT (4.7x3 ROL E (17.7 UNGE ±0.00 VEL-1 = 14 0 m
1200
(3.9 S TOILE .88)

5X 4X
15.53 AREA M LV ER = 30
PARKING
4.58 T
RIS EAD
MD OR
0
)
) L.
80
TR
T
D
V5
D7 LIFT
SI
VI
PAS VOID
SEN
VOID FHC
V5
DUCT
D3
VIP
ENTR
LIFT
(2.3
GER
6 x 2.51
D11 7 2
49
)
Y
80 45
ELE
ROO CTRIC
SPACE
WA
SHRO LE M DUCT
76
±0.00 VEL-1
(2.3
(5.0
7x3.64 OM LE 2X
D7 -8
DUCT ±0.00 VEL-1
2.64
) UP M LV )
D10
8250
UP
8300
-7
10
3000
64
M LV L. LIFT
V11 L. VO
72
ID
T1
LIF
T D3
VIP VOID C
88
LIFT D FH
(2.7
4x D8
0
8825
GRAN
80
W7 1.87)
D1
(26.3 D LO 2
1X BB D1
ICA
L D1
W5
15.61 Y FHC ADA 4974
CTR
A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
) TOILE
ELE M
D7
HIS
HIS T
362
-11 72
D4
W7 ROO 9.5)
(8.1
X DU
CT
80 1.
C
D5 HER DUCT
STAIRCASE NUMBER.
D5 -10
Leve
CONF
(13.7 EREN
D7
V 0 87
2 46 ST-#
80
l
(SSL 1
8
11000
UP
1X 6.5 CE HA
6100
: ±0 3) LL
0
mp 20
W10 mm ELE
ROOCTRIC
) M
Ra 11
(2.3
2X
MD
0
2.64
)
D3
C 5
W1
1 76
D: DOOR, W: WINDOW, RS: ROLLING SHUTTER,
9775
GROU D1 CCTV
63 UNFI ND LE CENT /SECUR B
811
UP
NISH VE (16.8 RAL CO ITY

ED: L D1 0
178 72
4X
-1.00 7.38) NTRO
B
M) L
3000
88
RAMP
W10 D1
UP
0 47
8070 DUCT
D7
A W5
8
550
2. D-##
A
W7
287
62 LE
W10
W5
450
0 887
2 TYPE NUMBER
±0.00 VEL-1
4404
DUCT
M LV -9
7
L.
102
48
7650 887
2
TOWER-2 2500
3. E ELEVATION AND SECTION NO.
17675
61
GROU
8872
A-#
UNFI ND LE
NISH VE
ED: L
-1.00
M)
8872
49 REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
60
50
59 51
52
58
53
57
56
55 54
General Notes:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
17632
PRACTICE
15883
PRACTICE 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE

PITCH MEASURED/ SCALED.
PITCH
3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
116757
4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD

BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
25313
IMMEDIATELY.
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
29894
FUTURE EXPANSION
REV.NO. DESCRIPTION DATE BY

REVISIONS LOG
5038
BUILDING TYPE :
FUTURE EXPANSION STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
61445
BHARATPUR MUNICIPALITY
Bharatpur, Chitwan
79564
Location :
11966
Rampur, Chitwan
Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
9986
INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
4819
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
3986
23090
27505
SITE PLAN WITH
8008
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
11896
6080 9315 4592

12627 22926
2426
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M
13384
1891
2 (270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
1697 1532
3 (20 Bigha 6 Katha 0 Dhur 0 Kanwa )
8
15796 19938
Date : Feb 2024
... A1.00
SITE AREA=154506.9694 SQ.M (22 BIGHA 16 Kattha 1 DHUR 1.12 KANWA)
Drawing Number: Scale:
INSIDE USABLE AREA=1328.762 SQ.M
1:900
A1.01
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF CEDA & CLIENT ONLY.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO BE COPIED OR USED WITHOUT
THEIR WRITTEN PERMISSION.
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Architecture, Structure and Interior Design
Team
Kupondole, Nepal
1
A1.10 A2.10
600mm
Seismic Gap Design Team
77 78 79 1 CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
Kupondole, Nepal
76 2
75 3
74 4
8872 8157
73 8872 8174 5
8872 8872
1026 1922 6900
7651
8872 1253 4405 8872
72 7650 4500 6
4405
3027
5500 887
A1
.1 0
1
2
887 4500 163
2 A3
0 .10
0 765 7
71 2 765 RAMP UP RAMP UP
W24
0
800 887
887 800 0 W5 113 2
1 120 Ram 47
p UP W5 W11 p UP
2 Ram 807
807 2
0 V 80 88
2 80 V3 0 10
87 Y 72
11000
11000
9 8 DUCT
-3 77 8
4 TR
70
76 EN D7 BATTERY HIS 95
10 W5 OOM ELEC DUC W5
OR 80
(5.3
72 T HE
R OOM BACKUP R TR
ROOM ICAL
T-2 X 9.5) 72
80 I D12 NEL R D12
D7
VIS LT PA (8.1 X
9.5) T1 80
00 VIS
1112
FHC
0
RY
1113
FHC
8 T2 88
2 ITO
88
7
E NT RE 36
72
0
75 OR NT 75
0
69 72 36 IT RY 80 9
80 VIS D1 MD 72
MD
3049 3000
3000
m D11 RIS
48 m
= 1 0 mm D14 D10 D10
E
TRE R = 1
AD 4
0
ER
RIS AD =
TRE
30 = 3 8 mm
00 m 80
80 0
5 m
2 36
26 ST1' ST1 88
887 36
74
8 MD 72
UP
MD UP VI 80
1 80
72
T RY SI
TO
72
EN
68
A1.10 A6.10
R
10
R Y 1396 GR EN 80
11601
BB
0 AN MD
80 TO MD
TR 0
72 SI LO
(31 D
LO 88
8549
88
VI X1 BB Y 72
A 6) ND 6) Y 76
50 50
76 GR31 X 1 ±0 LE
VE M 11
20 LEGEND:
0 D ( .00 D
20 M M L-1 0
67
11
11
LV
80
L. 1. A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.

17
-1
72
88
L 3 D1 ST-# STAIRCASE NUMBER.
D1 3
VE L.
45
88
72
5
W
LE LV
00
00
W
55
5
ST1 0M ST1' 2. D-##
0.0 TYPE NUMBER
1b
±
VO
D1
44
UP
UP
m
12
Ra
RY
m
8 mm R
2
78
UP
TR ISE
04
RM
14 0
D = 30 EA R
m
28
E ELEVATION AND SECTION NO.
ITO
R = D =1
E D FH
3.
p
= 48
p
C
ITO
66
IS A
C
12
30 m
FH
R RE
A-#
m
0 REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
UP
V3
T m m
RM
Ra
m
2
88
HE .3 X
RY
7
00
(5
R 9
VO
88
72
S
45
2
HI
76
a
DU
T1 3
.5
2649 11933 2660
50
T2
CT
4
-1
93
D7
04
76
95
6734
-4
55 6734 D1
44
CT
3
11
12
D1 6734 3
DU
W
6734
53
W
6734 6734
40
5
6734
65
13
LT
50
88
72
General Notes:
1a
4 4 392
673 6734
PA
72
88
391 0
VO
Y
1
65
50
76
OR
NE
76 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
RM
45 Y 2b
76
673
51
IT
LR
673 UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
2 17
IT
4
00
RM
6 4 0
06
O
OO
65
R
17
VO
4 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE
L
673
M
CA
34 A1.10 A2.10 MEASURED/ SCALED.
10
(8 OM TRI
67
)
.17
5
W
W
27
1027
RO EC
17
5
67
00
EL
34 RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
BA
.1
25
BA UP
67
BO
72
88
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
CK
34
64
14
TT RO
H
88
72
34
ER OM
67 39
13 20 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
Y
RA
MP 39 34 U P BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
UP 67 MP IMMEDIATELY.
67 RA
34
67
11 34 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
00 34 00
0
0 67 11
2
D1
0
49
D1
26
0
34
26
49
2
67
30 00 36
3
300 00 30 0
300
67
0
34
610 0
0
11 25 0 610
67
4 37 5
60 3
23
34
34
0 2 1
67
1
830 0
0 830
A A
34
B B
67
900 0
67
C
0 900 C
34
34
D D REVISIONS LOG
67
A1.10
1 2
A2.11
A2.11 E E A1.10
BUILDING TYPE :
STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Location :
A1.01 A1.10 Rampur, Chitwan
SLAB AREA=6296.458 SQ.M
INSIDE USABLE AREA=3594.86 SQ.M Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
FLOOR PLAN AT LEVEL-1
(±0.00M LVL. STAND-A)
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
(20 Bigha 6 Katha 0 Dhur 0 Kanwa )
Date : Feb 2024
0m 17.5M 35.0m Drawing Number: Scale:

1:350
SCALE 1:350 A1.10
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
E E
67
D D
35
0
C 900
35
900 C
67
0
67
35
B B
A 0 A
830 830
67
0 12 0
35 3
35
12 50
35
0
67
610 610
0
0
300 30
35
2 00 00 36 300
36 30
67
2 0
67
26
35
2
49
49
3
67
26
11
D1
0
0
00
D1
35 00
11
0
0
35
67
35
67 67 RA
P UP 35 MP
M 39 0 UP
RA 13 67 92
OM
35 3
UP RY
RO
CK TE
35
72
88
67
53
BA BAT
88
72
5
25
673
00
67
27
1027 35
D1
673
5
W
10
W
5
1
17
5
0 5
66 06
M
45
5 17
00
5 673
VO
3a
673
OO
00
45
EL OM 9.5
RM
51
RY
RO .1 X
76
EC
LR
(8
391 673 6735 0
76
50
392
TR
IT
4 5
NE
IT
OR
72
88
IC
RM
6735
PA
AL
88
72
VO 6735 6735
)
26
52
4b
LT
6735 6735
53
5
W
6735
12
W
D1 6735 3
44
D1
DU
11
3
LEGEND:
0
CT
D7
2649
4
14
-1
4
2 11933 2660
-
1
CT
50
T2
DU
76
T1 A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
45
5)
1.
72
88
3b
9.
VO
450 ORY
HI
0
00
(5 ER
STAIRCASE NUMBER.
V
ST-#
X
RM 450
88
72
UP
S
RY
H
.3
Ra
RM
0
m
R m
Ra 3
ITO
m
p
TR ISE 8 mm
51
IT
14 0
27
V
FH
m
28
EA R C
p
C = 30 FH
D =1
D ER D
=
D-##
04
UP
2.
78
12 = 48
30 m IS EA 2
D1
R R
0 UP TYPE NUMBER
44
m m
UP
T
m
VO
4 a
ST1' ST1
55
00
00
A-# REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
5
W
72
88
45
D13
5
88
3
72
D1
17
11
80
20 ±0 LEV L-1 0
M .00 EL 20
28
50
0 D (3 M - VE .
76 1X LV 1 LE LVL M
D 11
50 GR 16 L. M 50
AN ) .00 76
88 ±0 Y
D )
BB 72
8549
72 LO 16
X LO Y 88
11601
80 MD BB (31 TR
0 VI D 00 General Notes:
SI Y AN MD EN 8
80
TO GR OR 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
R IT 72
29
49
EN S
TR VI 80
3049 3000
88 MD 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE
72 Y UP UP 72 MEASURED/ SCALED.
80 MD 88
0 ST1 RIS ST1' 8 00 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
3000
E m
TRE R = 1 48 m
AD 4
= 30 8 mm
= 1 0 mm RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
80 MD 0m
D10 D10 ER
RIS AD =
30
2
72 m
D11 TRE 7 LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
36 VIS MD 0 80
75 5
ITO RY 67 30
48
88 0 T 3 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD

7 RE EN 72
1113
2 88
1112
80 NT BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
0 RY T2 L I T OR 80
0
IMMEDIATELY.
TRICA VIS
FHC
80 T1 FHC
72 LT PA ELEC 72
10
D12 NEL R
O R O O M
D12 80
OM 9.5)
95
7
11000
BATTERY HIS
11000
D
76 W5 (8.1 X )
CT-1
3 X 9.5 W5 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
49 88 BACKUP R DU (5.3
72 77
10
D7
72 80 DUC OOM 0
47 0 T-1 2 80 88 31
807 V3 2
2 Ram V 807
p UP p UP
112 Ram
887 800 00 W5 W11 00 2
2 765 112 800 887
W5 W24 0
46
0 765
RAMP UP 0 32
887 4500 RAMP UP 163
2
2
4405 5500 887
3027
8872
7650 4500
45 1253 4405 8872 33
7651 6900
1026 1922
8872 8872
8872 8174 REV.NO. DESCRIPTION DATE BY
44 8872 8157 34 REVISIONS LOG
43 600mm
Seismic Gap 35
42
BUILDING TYPE :
36 STADIUM COMPLEX
41 37 Client:
40 39 38a 38
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
A1.01 A1.11
SLAB AREA=6296.458 SQ.M Project :
INSIDE USABLE AREA=3594.86 SQ.M GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
(±0.00M LVL. STAND-B)
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024

1:350
SCALE 1:350 A1.11
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal

Design Team
600mm Kupondole, Nepal
Seismic Gap
77 78 79 1
76 2
75 3
74 4
232307
73 5
8872 8157
8872 8174
72 8872 8872 6
8872
A1
.12 1
8872 A3
.10
2 887 7
71 887 2
2 887
887 2
DUCT
-3 8
70
LOUNGE DUC
T-2 88
72 (15 x 17 ) LOUNGE D12 72
88 GE
LOUN ) 11.25 x 1
2.0
.3 X 9.5 8
(5
69 72 LEVEL-2 88
72
9
88 m
+5.60M LVL. RIS
E DN
48 m TRE R = 1
DN ER
= 1 0 mm
0 AD 4
= 30 8 mm
RIS AD = 3 0m
TRE m
ST1' LEV VO
ID +5. ID
VO
UP UP 60M EL-2
LVL 88
2 72 ST1 . 72
88
68
A1.12 A6.10
10
ID VO
VO 14788 ID
VO
I D ID
VO
LEGEND:
88
12599
72
VO
ID ID 72
VO A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
88 1.
ST-# STAIRCASE NUMBER.
67
11
2
L- . 2. D-##
E VE VL TYPE NUMBER
L L
0M
N
72
88
D
D
N
.6 3.
88
72
ST1 5 1 430 ST1'
m
+ 430 2
P
U
m R
8 mm
U
765 b
TR ISE
P
14 00
VO
1
= 3 EA R
0
ER D
= D =1
Y
= 48
RM
66
IS A
12
30 m
OR
R RE
0
T m m
m
ITO
IT
6670 5966
RM
RY
m
72
88
6670
m
8 mm
14 0
VO
DU
= 30
5979
2a
=
88
ER D
72
CT
IS A
6670 6670
R RE
T
-1
6670
7470
-4
0
6670
7470 General Notes:
CT
667 7470
DU
7470 7470 667 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
7470 0 667 43
02 7470 0 UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
65
13
02
88
43 0
7470
72
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE
667
0 747
1a
VO
72
0 MEASURED/ SCALED.
RY
67
RM
747
76
88
6 0 747
O
50
0 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL

IT
66
IT
70
O
RM
RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
RY
0 66
747
VO
70 LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
70
2b
0 74
66 70
74 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
0 70
6 67 IMMEDIATELY.
66
70 70
74
70 66 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
74 74 70
70
70
66 74
70
0
70
7
74
66
300 18
66
0 0 0
10 10 300
70
14
0 18
70
13
610 12
A
0
74
0 11
610
74
10
66
B
70
A 9
8
70
70
7
B 830 6
0
66
0 5
830
74
4
3 C
70
2
70
1
C 1
74
900 2700 0
70
70
12
66
0 0
66
900 D
70
70

D
74
74
REVISIONS LOG
70
E
E
BUILDING TYPE :
STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
Project :
A1.02 A1.12
GAUTAM BUDDHA
INSIDE USABLE AREA=3373.226 SQ.M INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
(+5.60M LVL. STAND-A)
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024

1:350
SCALE 1:350 A1.12
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
E
E
70
74
74
D
70
70
0
900 9 12 900
66
69 D
66
12 69 0
9
70
74
C
70
70
0
830 830
74
C
66
0
B
70
70
70
A
66
0 B
610
74
610
74
0 18 0 A
10
70
0 10
300 18
70
74 0 300
66
0
66
70
70
70
66 74
6
70
W2
70
74 74 70
70 66
74 70
70
LO .25
66 66
11
UN x 1
70 70
26
74
W
GE 2.0
66 70
70 74
74
70 747 70
8
66
D1
3a
0
VO
70
X E
1
)
Y
RM
G
66
9.5
OR
0
747
(5 UN
50
0
66 747
IT
26
IT
76
OR
LO
0
88
RM
667
.3
747 7470
Y
0
72
VO
4b
43
2
7470 02
7
02 0
667 43
88
7470 7470 667
0
52
26
7470 7470
667 6670
0 7470
7470
6670
LEGEND:
6670 6670
5970
3b
6670
88
72
VO
1. A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
72
RY
88
5975 ST1
RM
6670 ST-# STAIRCASE NUMBER.
ITO
IT
OR
RM
765
m
R m
8 mm
51
TR ISE
D-##
Y4
27
14 0
2.
VO
EA R = 30
0
D =1
= 48 ER
AD
=
TYPE NUMBER
a
30 m IS
R RE
0
m m 430 2
430
T
P
U
m
1
U
P

88
3.
72
ST1' -2 A-# REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
7
88
EL L.
2
N
V
N
D
+5 LE LE LV
. 60 VE
M L 0M
LV -2 .6
L. +5
28
50
88
12599
72 72
VO
ID
VO
ID 88
General Notes:
VO
ID 14788 I D 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
VO VO
88 ID UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
ID VO
72
29
72
49

MEASURED/ SCALED.
UP UP
VO
ID ID 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
VO
ST1 RIS ST1' RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
E m
TRE R = 1 48 m
AD 4
= 3 8 mm LEVEL-2 = 1 0 mm LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
88 DN ER
RIS AD = 3
0
DN
72
00 m
72 m
TRE
+5.60M LVL. D11 88 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
30
48

T3 IMMEDIATELY.
LOUN
88 GE
72 (5.3 X
9.5) LOUNGE 8 72
LOUNGE 2.0 88
11.25 x 1 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
(15 x 17 )
47 31
887 2
2 887
887 2
46
2 887
32
8872
8872
8872 8872
45 33
8872 8174
8872 8157
44 232331 REVISIONS LOG

34
43 600mm
Seismic Gap 35
BUILDING TYPE :
42 STADIUM COMPLEX
36
41
Client:
37
40 39 38a 38 BHARATPUR MUNICIPALITY
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Location :
A1.02 A1.13 Rampur, Chitwan
INSIDE USABLE AREA=3373.226 SQ.M Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
(+5.60M LVL. STAND-B)
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024

1:350
SCALE 1:350 A1.13
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
1 Team
19 20 Kupondole, Nepal
18 21
17 22

Design Team
16 23 CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
Kupondole, Nepal
15 24
GROUND LEVEL GROUND LEVEL

UNFINISHED: -1.00M) UNFINISHED: -1.00M)
83511 2
8872 8872
8872
8072
800 8072 800
8072 8872
1
8872
800 GROUND LEVEL 800
5482 5512
UNFINISHED: -1.00M)
2400 UP 2398
221 8872
8872 600 1 4403
3252
2500 DW1
4500
2585 DW1 DW1 1254 LEGEND:

2 887
887 2
0 W12 765 A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
765 W12 0 1.
W13
749
7 102 D-##
102 V2 W11
7 2.
TYPE NUMBER
1500
D7 D7
1550
1109
1109
DUCT D1
115
DUCT
731
4464 2049 115 LOBBY A-# REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
309
1930
(25.73 X 9.22 )
LADIES TOILET
1843
W5 D5 W5
T1 D5 D4 LEVEL-1
12546
1500
1000 1241 835 1050 180 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
±0.00M LVL. 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
2354
21
ST2 ST2' 21
D1
685 ADA 20 20
2465
19 25728 19
4320
506 2.07x2.24 18 18
17 17
T3 RISER = 150 MM
LEVEL-1 LEVEL-1 RISER = 150 MM
T2 16
15
TREAD = 300 MM
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
TREAD = 300 MM
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
16
15
±0.00M LVL. ±0.00M LVL. General Notes:
1 6892 1850 2065 UP UP 1 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
450
0
300
450
300
BANQUET
0

4791
STORE
4275
2319
2319
14651 PASSENGER MEASURED/ SCALED.
230 (6.57 X 10.33 )
10329
PASSENGER
LIFT 515
8728
LIFT ELECTRIC 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
ADMINISTRATION (2.32 x 2.5) 450 450 BANQUET
A GENTS UPS 2394 1430 17726 1200 (2.32 x 2.5) ROOM
6568 A RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
OFFICE ROOM /CONFERENCE ROOM-1
8206
TOILET LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
5
(14.65 X 8.20) D1 D1 (12.11 X 21.35 )
977
977
FHC 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
5
1540
FHC
1375
6863
4160 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
0
610
D3
21353
D3
610
IMMEDIATELY.
2175
D1
1
0
4425 1500 1429 1945 1500 6275

860
B B
2131
D1 564 115 5073 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
2780
C C
ADMINISTRATION GROUND/ MEDIA CONFERENCE ROOM

5103 4974
OFFICE EQUIPMENT STORE (10.07 X 11.67)
4974 (17.27 X 11.78)
(22.15 X 11.67)
11775
10350
10350
7000
8250
8250
8250
8250
22152 17265 10065 12114
LEVEL-1 DW10 LEVEL-1 REV.NO. DESCRIPTION DATE BY

±0.00M LVL. ±0.00M LVL. REVISIONS LOG
570
1700 1700
D D
BUILDING TYPE :
1200
1200
1200
1200
D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
W4 W4 W3 W2 W2 W1 W2 W2 W3 W4 W4 STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
GROUND LEVEL
GROUND LEVEL
UNFINISHED: -1.00M)
1 GROUND LEVEL
Bharatpur, Chitwan
UP UP
800 570 900
983 5300 977 900 1992 4500 1800 2400 1800 2400 1988 6500 1988 2400 1800 2400 1800 4500 1992 900 983 5300 977 800
900 570 570 570
9300 8516 8600 8628 8600 8516 9300
62260 Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
2 Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
FLOOR PLAN IN LEVEL-1
(TOWER-1 ±0.00M LVL. )
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.22
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64
LIFT
VOID
45
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
18 21
17 22

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
15 24
2
8872 8872
8872
1254 7650 1254
7650 7650 8872
8872 1254
1254
4500 4500
750 750
2400 2400
8872
8872 4404
4404
4000
4500 W5c
W5d W5b 1753
2
1254 887
LEGEND:
887 W11a W11a
2
237
233
3 W12a 764 A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
764 V6 3 1.
1000
1000
D3 D3 D: DOOR, W: WINDOW, RS: ROLLING SHUTTER,
7 D-##
102 2.
3313
W11a MANAGER'S ROOM RECORD ROOM

V10
2977
TYPE NUMBER
2978
D7 D7
1550
1550
(5.46 X 3.31 ) (5.55X 3.31 )
1109
1109
1898
2013
5463 5500 4654
1930 A-# REFERENCE DRAWING NO.
1930 4690
W5a W5a
DN DN
2338
1891
35 36
LOBBY 36 35
4150
0
115
852 ST2 (26.39 X 14.42 ) ST2'

4763
4756
T11 230
ACU & UMPIRE RISER = 150 MM RISER = 150 MM
TREAD = 300 MM TREAD = 300 MM
GENTS TOILET 1575 425
DINING 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S S General Notes:
1 1
8269
8196
(12.20 X 9.55 ) UP UP
0
300
T13
450
D5
300
ADA
5361
0
3225
3225
2.00x2.00 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE
450
SERVER ROOM T12

2319
MEASURED/ SCALED.
(6.48 X 10.25 ) 12203 ROOM
PASSENGER PASSENGER ELECTRIC 1660 D4 LADIES TOILET
995
LIFT LEVEL-2 LIFT ROOM 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
(2.13x2.81) (2.32 x 2.5) (2.32 x 2.5)
A 1660 A
837
5
LEVEL-2 +5.60M LVL. (2.25x2.81) RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
837
D2 +5.60M LVL.
7341
7
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
1000
1095
980
995
D5 D5 UMPIRE
5
FHC D3 FHC
977
977
450
6800
D3 CHANGING ROOM 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
5
4601 3000 3285 1200 1163 998 3179 450 563 1000 (7.34 X 10.25)
LEVEL-2 3179 1048 1200 3152 2000 4846 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
D1
0
610
1500
610
IMMEDIATELY.
450 450 D1
163
+5.60M LVL.
1 4185 23830 3000 23830 1500 3297
0
B B
1753
1590
4336
D2 4337
D1 D1 D1
C C
5103 4974
4974
BROADCASTING ROOM
(31.83 X 11.75 ) MATCH REFEREE ROOM
ANTI-CORRUPTION UNIT (11.69 X 9.73)
9725
9725
(11.69 X 9.73)
8250
8250
8250
8250
11685 31839 6246 11685
11755
THIRD UMPIRE
(6.25 X 11.75) REV.NO. DESCRIPTION DATE BY
REVISIONS LOG
1738 1854 1854 1738

970 970
D D
4860 970 970 4860
BUILDING TYPE :
1200
1200
1200
1200
STADIUM COMPLEX
2000
W4 W17 W17 W17 W4 W4 W17 W17 W17 W4

Client:
500
W18 W19 W20 W19 W18 BHARATPUR MUNICIPALITY

Bharatpur, Chitwan
900 200 200 200 200 800 800 200 200 200 200 800
800 1000 1487 1487 1487 1000 900 350 5891 350 8250 350 8278 350 8250 350 5891 350 900 1000 1487 1487 1487 1000 900
570 570 570 570
9300 8516 8600 8628 8600 8516 9300
62260 Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 2 Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.23
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
D
N
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
35
74
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71 38a
70
DN
UP
39
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64
LIFT
VOID
45
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 56 53 52
55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
18 21
17 22

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
15 24
83511 2
8872 8872
8872
1254 7650 1254
7650 7650 8872
8872 1254
1254
4500
750 750
2400 2400
8872
8872 4404
5072
4000
2500
2585 1754
LEGEND:
887
2 SLOPED ROOF LINE ABOVE SLOPED ROOF LINE ABOVE 887
2
800
0 765 A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
765 0 1.
2186
7 102 D-##
102 7 2.
TYPE NUMBER
W14 DW5 W14 E ELEVATION AND SECTION NO.

3.
LOUNGE SPACE
DN
DN DN
DN
(25.37 X 14.42 )
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
19
18 18
SLAB LINE ABOVE 17

16
17
16
SLAB LINE ABOVE
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 11 10 9 8 7 HALL/ DINNING 7 8 9 10 11 12
General Notes:
1 3015 ST2 (26.28 x 13.92 ) ST2' 1 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
0
300
300
0
LEVEL-3.1 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE READ ONLY AND NOT TO BE

PASSENGER
+10.60M LVL. PASSENGER ELECTRIC
MEASURED/ SCALED.
UTILITY
LIFT LIFT
(4.46x2.87) (2.32 x 2.5) (2.32 x 2.5)
ROOM 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
A (2.02x2.69) A RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
5
D3 FHC FHC
977
977
5
D3 D1 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
0
610
D1
610
IMMEDIATELY.
1
0
B B
D1A ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
W14B W14B
C C
2135
2270 DW5
5103 W14 W14
4974
4974
D8 D5 CORNICE LINE
CORNICE LINE CORPORAE BOX CORPORAE BOX
(11.34 x 9.61 ) (11.34 x 9.61 )
8250
8250
8250
8250
REVISIONS LOG
DW2 DW2
W21 W21 W21 W21
W4a
D D
BUILDING TYPE :
1200
1200
1920
W4a W4a W4a STADIUM COMPLEX
SLOPED ROOF LINE ABOVE SLOPED ROOF LINE ABOVE
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
950 600 1250 6200 1250 600 950 5966 900 7700 900 7728 900 7700 900 5966 950 600 1250 6200 1250 600 950
9300 8516 8600 8628 8600 8516 9300

SLOPED ROOF LINE SLOPED ROOF LINE SLOPED ROOF LINE
AT LINTEL LEVEL AT LINTEL LEVEL Location :
16 17 18
CORNICE LINE 19 20 21 22 23 Rampur, Chitwan
1 2 Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
(TOWER-1 ±10.60M LVL. )
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.24
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
18 21
17 22

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
15 24
83511 2
8872 8872
8872
8872 8872
8872
8872
2 887
LEGEND:
887 2

2. D-##
TYPE NUMBER

.1
EL-4
LEV .
L L
V
60M
+15.
General Notes:
1 1 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MASONARY DIMENSIONS & IN MM.
MEASURED/ SCALED.
A A RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
977
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
5
977
5

IMMEDIATELY.
1
B B
C C
3174 3175
CORNICE LINE
CORNICE LINE

REVISIONS LOG
D D
BUILDING TYPE :
STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
SLOPED ROOF LINE SLOPED ROOF LINE SLOPED ROOF LINE

AT LINTEL LEVEL AT LINTEL LEVEL Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 2 Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
ROOF PLAN IN LEVEL-7
(TOWER-1 ±20.525M LVL. )
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.25
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 10
11
12
13
14 15 16 17 18
19
20
21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64
LIFT
VOID
45
LEVEL-7 +20.525M LEVEL-7 +20.525M

C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
1850
LEVEL-6 +18.675M LEVEL-6 +18.675M CONSULTANTS:
Team
3025
Kupondole, Nepal
LEVEL-5 +15.65M LEVEL-5 +15.65M
1050
LEVEL-4 +14.60M LEVEL-4 +14.60M
4000
W14B W14 DW9 W14 W14B
W21 DW2 W21 W21 DW2 W21 Design Team
W4a W4a W4a W4a CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
LEVEL-3 +10.60M LEVEL-3 +10.60M Kupondole, Nepal
5000
5891 8250 8278 8250 5891
W4 W4
W18 W19 W20 W19 W18 W4 W17 W17 W17 W4
W17 W17 W17
LEVEL-2 +5.60M LEVEL-2 +5.60M
LW2 LW1 LW2 LW2 LW1 LW2
5600
W4 W4
W3 W2 W2 W1 W2 W2 W3 W4 W4
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
LEVEL-1 ±0.00M LEVEL-1 ±0.00M
GROUND LEVEL GROUND LEVEL -1.00M

-1.00M
TOWER-1
DOORS AND WINDOWS SCHEDULE
SN Particulars Size Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total Remarks

1 W1 6500x2400 1 - - 1 Aluminium
2 W2 2400x2400 4 - - 4 Aluminium
3 W3 4500x2400 2 - - 2 Aluminium LEGEND:
4 W4 900x2000 4 4 - 8 Wooden
5 W4a 600x900 - - 4 4 Wooden ST-# STAIRCASE NUMBER.
6 W5 7644x3850 2 - - 2 Aluminium
2. D-##
TYPE NUMBER
7 W5a 7644x3850 - 2 - 2 Aluminium
8 W5b 7644x3850 - 1 - 1 Aluminium 3.
9 W5c 7644x3850 - 1 - 1 Aluminium
10 W5d 7644x3850 - 1 - 1 Aluminium
11
12
13 General Notes:
15 MEASURED/ SCALED.
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
17 W11 4500x3850 1 3 - 4 Aluminium
17 W12 2400x3850 2 1 - 3 Aluminium BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
IMMEDIATELY.
18 W13 600x2400 1 - - 1 Aluminium
5891
19 W14 6500x2400 - - 4 4 Aluminium ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
20 W14B 6000x2400 - - 2 2 Aluminium
2750 21 W17 1475x2400 - 6 - 6 Aluminium
22 W18 5890x4350 - 2 - 2 Toughened
1 680
23 W19 8250x4350 - 2 - 2 Toughened
1 680 680 1
680 1
24 W20 8275x4350 - 1 - 1 Toughened
2500
2500
25 W21 1200x3000 - - 4 4 Aluminium

4075
26
27 V2 2500x1200 1 - - 1 Aluminium
300
300
300
300
REVISIONS LOG
28 V6 2400x1200 - 1 - 1 Aluminium
1575
1575
1575
1575
Level-4 Level-4 29 V10 4000x1200 - 1 - 1 Aluminium
30 BUILDING TYPE :
31 STADIUM COMPLEX
32 Client:
33 DW1 750x3000,1500x3000 3 - - 3 Aluminium Bharatpur, Chitwan
34 DW2 750x3000,1500x3000 - - 2 2 Aluminium
Roof Section 2 Roof Section 6 35 DW5 7000x2400 - - 2 2 Aluminium
Location :
36 Rampur, Chitwan
Project :
40 D1 1500x2250 12 5 2 19 wooden GAUTAM BUDDHA
41 D1A 1200x2250 - - 2 2 wooden INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
STADIUM COMPLEX
42 D2 3000x2250 - 2 - 2 wooden
43 D3 1000x2250 2 4 2 8 wooden Drawing Title :
44 D4 1050x2250 1 1 - 2 Wooden/ADA SOUTH ELEVATION
45 D5 1000x2250 2 3 0 5 Wooden/ Toilet Doors (TOWER-1)
46 D7 600x1800 2 2 - 4 Aluminium/Duct Doors
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M
47 D8 750x2250 - - 2 2 Wooden/ Toilet Doors (270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.26 1:100
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
D
N
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
35
74
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71 38a
39
UP
70
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64
LIFT
VOID
45
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 56 53 52
55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal
1
2
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55
62260
9300 8516 8600 8628 8600 8516 9300
900 Mechanical Electrical and Plumbing
800 1000 5260 1000 900 1992 4500 1800 2400 1800 2400 1988 6500 1988 2400 1800 2400 1800 4500 1992 900 1000 5260 1000 900 800
570 570
Design Team
570 570
UP UP Kupondole, Nepal
GROUND LEVEL
UNFINISHED: -1.00M)
4974
W4 W4 W3 W2 W2 W1 W2 W2 W3 W4 W4
1200
1200
UP D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
D D
LEVEL-1 LEVEL-1
±0.00M LVL. LOBBY ±0.00M LVL.
(4.93 X 6.24 )
TEAM 2 ROOM
8250
8250
8250
VIP LOUNGE AREA
8250
8250
(17.74 X 15.53 )
PLAYERS' GROUND WAITING players dinning
AREA (39.17 X 8.53 )
D1
4974 (17.74 X 15.53 )
5100 D1 D1 4974
1881 2400 693
5100
DUCT-10
C D9 D8 C
D7 DUCT-8
DUCT-5 LIFT VOID
DUCT-6 D7
D7 PASSENGER
LIFT (2.36 x 2.51)
ELECTRIC
D7
B ROOM
ADA TOILET B
TEAM 1 ROOM 2526 2728 293031 323334 35 (2.32 X 2.64 )
0
24
Level 1
610
610
23
(SSL: ±0mm) D1 D1 BANQUET 22
0
STORE 21
VIP ENTRY D3 D4
5
977
20
977
19 LIFT VOID HIS

LEVEL-1
5
18
17 HER
16 ±0.00M LVL. D1
A D1 15 RISER = 150 MM
A
1 14 TREAD = 300 MM
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D5 D5 1
D1 FHC UP
D4 FHC
RECOVERY ROOM CCTV/SECURITY
0
ELECTRIC
300
300
(6.56 X 10.33 ) D5 D3 ROOM

D3 CENTRAL CONTROL
(2.32 X 2.64 )
LEGEND:
0
ADA
(2.34 x 2.10)
(16.84 X 7.38)
LADIES TOILET DOPING 2223 2425 262728 293031 3233 34 35
(2.69 x 5.92) 21
D5 CONTROL
20 A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
(4.7x3.88)
19
CONFERENCE HALL 1.
18
LEVEL-1 (13.71X 6.53 )
17 VOID RISER = 150 MM GRAND LOBBY D: DOOR, W: WINDOW, RS: ROLLING SHUTTER,
16 TREAD = 300 MM
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
±0.00M LVL. (26.31 X 15.61 )
GENTS TOILET UP 2. D-##
(3.95 X 4.58 )
TYPE NUMBER
D1
W5 D1 W5 3. E ELEVATION AND SECTION NO.
WASHROOM D1
D7 DUCT (5.07x3.64)
D7
102 V5 LIFT VO DUCT
ID 7
7
V5 VIP LIFT
D1
W10 102
(2.74 x 1.87)
Level 1
(SSL: ±0mm)
764 V11
3
3
W7 W7 764
887 DUCT-7 2
2
1478 W7
MD W7 DUCT-9 887 General Notes:
823 W10
W10 UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
1500 3500
8872 1000 4637 MEASURED/ SCALED.
1412
2100 8872 3. THIS DRAWING SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALL
3224
2100 UP LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
8872 5553 5553

789 8070 667 3501
8872 IMMEDIATELY.
8872
8872
83511 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING

LEVEL-1
±0.00M LVL.

REVISIONS LOG
BUILDING TYPE :
63 STADIUM COMPLEX
54
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
62 55
Location :
61 GROUND LEVEL 56 Rampur, Chitwan
UNFINISHED: -1.00M)
Project :
60 57 GAUTAM BUDDHA
59 1 58 INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.22a
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal
1
2
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55
62260
9300 8516 8600 8628 8600 8516 9300

570 570 570 570
800 1000 1487 1487 1487 1000 900 350 5891 350 8250 350 8278 350 8250 350 5891 350 900 1000 1487 1487 1487 1000 900
Design Team
900 800 200 200 CREATIVE DESIGN ARCHITECTS PVT. LTD.
200 200 200 200 800 200 200 800 Kupondole, Nepal
350
W18 W19 W20 W19 W18
350
W4 W17 W17 W17 W4 W4 W17 W17 W17 W4
D D
HOME COACH
8250
8250
VIP VIP VIP VIP AWAY COACH
8250
8250
(9.61 X 10.26 ) VIP
(42.36 X 10.53 ) (9.61 X 10.26 )
4974
D1 5100
D5 D5 DUCT-10
C D7 D7 C
S D1 DUCT-8 S D1
DUCT-5 DN D1 LIFT VOID
DUCT-6 LADIES TOILET
COACH D7 PASSENGER ELECTRIC COACH
B SHOWER+ 3031 323334 35
LIFT (2.36 x 2.51) ROOM
(2.32 X 2.64 ) D7 (4.41 X 3.94 ) SHOWER+ B
0
GENTS TOILET
610
TOILET TOILET
610
TEAM ASSEMBLY STORE

(2.43 X 3.83) (4.98 X 3.83 ) (2.43 X 3.94)
0
(5.24 X 5.88 ) D3 TEAM ASSEMBLY
(9.59 X 5.77 ) LOBBY
977
5
D5 D5 (10.47 X 5.88 )
977
5
LEVEL-2
D8
D5
RISER = 150 MM
+5.60M LVL. boh D1
A D1 TREAD = 300 MM
A
1 D1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D3 DOCTOR'S ROOM 1
UP (4.66 X 6.19)
D1 FHC
FHC D1
0
D3
300
PHYSIOTHERAPY
300
DN D3 D1
(5.86 X 6.79) S S S S S D1 LEGEND:
0
S S S S S
LEVEL-2 PHYSIOTHERAPY
VOID +5.60M LVL. (5.86 X 6.79) 1. A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
LEVEL-2 ST-# STAIRCASE NUMBER.
CHANGING ROOM SHOWER + TOILETS RISER = 150 MM
CHANGING ROOM
TREAD = 300 MM +5.60M LVL. D: DOOR, W: WINDOW, RS: ROLLING SHUTTER,
(5.03 X 5.56 ) (3.92 X 7.85 )
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SHOWER + TOILETS 2. D-##
W10 UP TYPE NUMBER
W5 3. E ELEVATION AND SECTION NO.

V11 D7
102 V8 D7 LIFT VO
ID 7
7 VIP LIFT V4 102
350 (2.74 x 1.87)
0
V11
0
315 765
2 V8 W7
887 DUCT-7 2
2 1000 887
1477 W7 W7 DUCT-9 General Notes:
W5 W5
W5 3000 UNLESS MENTIONED OTHERWISE.
1412
3224 3000 RELEVANT STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SERVICES &
2100 2039 LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
1418 2400
8872 1253
7650 7650 8872 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
1254 7650 1254 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
8872 IMMEDIATELY.
8872
8872

REVISIONS LOG
BUILDING TYPE :
63 STADIUM COMPLEX
54
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
62 55
Location :
61 56 Rampur, Chitwan
Project :
60 57 GAUTAM BUDDHA
59 1 58 INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
STADIUM COMPLEX
Drawing Title :
(TOWER-2 +5.60M LVL.)
AREA : 137484.42 SQ.M

(270-3-3-3.11 Ropani)
Date : Feb 2024
1:150
A1.23a
14 15 16 17
13 18
12 19
11 20
10 21
9 22
8 A 23
B
7 24
C
25
6
D
26
DN
5
E
4 B
A 27
C
3 28
D
UP
600mm E 29
2
Seismic Gap
1 30
79
31
78
ND
32
77
33
76
34
75
PU
74 35
36
UP
73
72
37 600mm
38 Seismic Gap
71
38a
70
UP
39
DN
69 40
41
68 E
PU
D 42
67
C
66
B 43
A E
44
PU
65 D
N
D
64 45
LIFT
VOID
C
63 46
B
62
A 47
61 48
60 49
59 50
58 51
57 53 52
56 55 54
MASTER KEY PLAN
CONSULTANTS:
Team
Kupondole, Nepal
1
2

Design Team
Kupondole, Nepal
W4a W4a W4a W4a
W21 W21 W21 W21

DW2 DW2
PRESIDENTIAL SUITE
8250
8250
(10.93 x 8.17 )
8250
8250
PRESIDENTIAL SUITE
(10.93 x 8.17 )
TERRACE
D8
D8
4974
W14 5100
W10 W10
DUCT-10
DW4 D1 D7
LIFT VOID
DUCT-5 D1 DN DUCT-8
BOH DUCT-6 PASSENGER
ELECTRIC
D7 22 23 24 25 26 27
3031
282930
3233 3132
3435
LIFT (2.36 x 2.51)
ROOM
(6.55 x 6.21 ) 21
(2.32 X 2.93 )
0
610
610
20
19 LOBBY
0
18
D3 D3
977
5
D1
17 LEVEL-3.1
977
16 D3
5
15
14
+10.60M LVL. Level 3.1
13
12
(SSL: 10600mm)
terrace RISER = 150 MM
terrace
1 11 TREAD = 300 MM
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
UP
FHC
0
300
FHC
300
D5 D5
LEGEND:
0
LADIES TOILET
GENTS LEVEL-3.1
(2.1 X 5.3)
D4 +10.60M LVL. 1. A-A ARCHITECTURAL DET./CLUSTER NO.
Banquet Hall
D1 2. D-##
TYPE NUMBER

D7
D1
102 W7 D7 7
7 W10 102
V11
V11 W14 W14
788 DW3
5 W7
V8 balcony
887 2
2 DUCT-7 W7 W7 887 General Notes:
1243 DUCT-9 99
1001 3500
1413
3224 3224
2100 LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS
1033 1031 2100
8872 8035 851 2186 8872
5000 4. ANY DISCREPANCIES IN THE DRAWINGS OR AT SITE SHOULD
1254 7650 1254 BE BROUGHT TO THE NOTICE OF THE ARCHITECTS
8872 IMMEDIATELY.
8872
8872

REVISIONS LOG
BUILDING TYPE :
STADIUM COMPLEX
Client:
Bharatpur, Chitwan
Location :
Rampur, Chitwan
Project :
GAUTAM BUDDHA
1 INTERNATIONAL CRICKET
STADIUM COMPLEX

Bid Document

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bid Document

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bid Document

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIDDING DOCUMENT

National Competitive Bidding (NCB)

IFB No.: 54-BMC/2080/081/W/NCB/87

Bharatpur Metropolitian City Office

Part I: BIDDING PROCEDURES ...............................................................................................

Section I: Instructions to Bidders ..............................................................................................

Part II : EMPLOYER'S REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................

Section VI: Works Requirements .............................................................................................

Part III: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS ........................................

Section VIII: General Conditions of Contract ...........................................................................

Date of publication: 29-02-2024 00:00

Information to deposit the cost of bidding document in Bank:

In case of joint ventures,

each partner: must meet requirement.

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Letter of Technical Bid.

Single entity : must meet requirements.

In case of joint ventures,

Documents Required : Letter of Technical Bid.

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Forms ELI - 1, ELI - 2, with attachments

Documents Submission Requirements : Letter of Technical Bid.

Bidder’s Running Contracts:

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Document attachment.

Other Eligibility : Business Registration Certificate:

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Document attachment.

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Document attachment.

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

General Construction Experience:

Contracts of Similar Size and Nature

For Single Entity : Must meet requirement

Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(a)

Documents Submission Requirements : Form EXP – 2(b)

Average Annual Construction Turnover:

Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 3

Documents Submission Requirements : Form FIN - 4 and Form FIN - 5

(9) Usually not less than 25 %

(ii) “fraudulent practice” means any act or omission, including a

(iii) “coercive practice” means impairing or harming, or threatening to

(iv) “collusive practice” means an arrangement between two or more

v) “obstructive practice” means (a) deliberately destroying, falsifying,

vi) “integrity violation” is any act which violates Anticorruption Policy,

(d) DP will impose remedial actions on a firm or an individual, at any time, in

(a) give or propose improper inducement directly or indirectly,

(a) if convicted by a court of law in a criminal offence which disqualifies the

4.4 A firm that is under a declaration of ineligibility by the GoN in accordance

4.7 Firms shall be excluded in any of the cases, if

B. Contents of Bidding Documents

7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting, if

11.2 The Technical Bid shall comprise the following:

(a) Letter of Technical Bid;

18.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validity

19.6 The bid security shall be forfeited if:

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

2. Bid Security/Bank Mandatory PDF

3. Company registration Mandatory PDF